JP2020039730A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that is devised for a performance.SOLUTION: A game machine performs a lottery regarding a winning, executes a performance capable of suggesting the result of the lottery, and includes a performance display device on which the performance is displayed. A special performance included in the performance is statically displayed as a performance, and includes a win/lose result notification performance in which the result of the lottery is shown in dynamic display when the static display time elapses a predetermined time and a preparation performance in which it is statically displayed as a performance and the result of the lottery is not shown although the static display changes to the dynamic display when the static display time elapses a predetermined time. A sense of tension when statically displayed as a performance is reduced by making it possible to execute the preparation performance in which the result of the lottery is not shown before executing the win/lose result notification performance to show the result of the lottery.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 556

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  Conventionally, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to make a big hit based on the winning of a game ball at the starting port, and a symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode according to the lottery result, and the lottery is performed. When the result is a big hit, a gaming machine is known in which a big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on a display device to generate a big hit gaming state.

  Also, there have been proposed a large number of gaming machines that use a display device to perform an effect while a symbol is being changed or a symbol is not being changed (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2007-111185 A

  However, there is room for improvement in such an effect, and there are not a few players who seek an effect that is further devised.

  Then, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a device for an effect is devised.

Means 1: lottery means for performing a lottery regarding a hit,
Effect execution means for executing an effect capable of suggesting the result of the lottery by the lottery means,
An effect display device on which the effect is displayed,
The effect that the effect execution means can execute includes a special effect,
The special production is
When the static display is statically displayed as an effect, and the result of the lottery is indicated by a dynamic display when a predetermined period of time during the static display has elapsed, a hit result notification effect,
Static display as an effect, and the static display time changes to a dynamic display when a predetermined time elapses, but at least a mental effect in which the result of the lottery is not shown is displayed. hand,
The effect executing means,
It is possible to execute a mind-set production in which the result of the lottery is not displayed before performing the hit result notification production that indicates the result of the lottery,
There are multiple productions in the above-mentioned ceremonial production,
The sound that has been output before the static display in the hit result notification effect is shown is not audibly output when the static display is performed,
A gaming machine wherein a predetermined movable body can be operated at a timing indicating the result of the lottery in the hit result notification effect.
In a special effect, performing the effect indicating the result of the lottery after being statically displayed increases the player's sense of tension. However, some players may excessively increase the sense of strain. Therefore, in the above configuration, before performing the hit result notification effect indicating the lottery result by the dynamic display after the static display, the dynamic display is performed after the static display, but the lottery result is not displayed. By performing the effect, the player can get used to the static display, and thus, can reduce the tension when the static display is performed (for example, paragraphs [4669] to [4747], FIG. 556 to 558 etc.).

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has been devised for an effect.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which opened the door frame from the main frame and opened the main frame from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from behind. It is a front view showing an example of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from behind. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board, which is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is the front view which cut | disconnected the front structural member and the front unit in the game board at the approximate center of the front-back direction in a game area. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a configuration in a main control MPU. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an arithmetic circuit in a main control MPU. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a serial communication circuit. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an initialization process. 22 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the initialization process of FIG. 21. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an accessory ratio calculation / display process. 25 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the accessory ratio calculation / display process of FIG. 24. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of an arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in a ROM and a RAM incorporated in a main control MPU. It is a figure showing the structure of the data stored in the accessory ratio calculation area. It is a figure showing composition of an accessory ratio indicator. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a driver circuit. FIG. 4 is a timing chart of data input to a driver circuit. It is a figure showing the example of mounting of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship between the main control MPU and the accessory ratio display. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a load register selection table. It is a figure showing a character generator decode table. FIG. 4 is a state transition diagram of a driver circuit. It is a figure showing an example of a display of an accessory ratio. It is a figure showing an example of a display of an accessory ratio. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base calculation area update process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base calculation / display process. It is a figure which shows an example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of winning balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of winning balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of winning balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of winning balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation / display process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation / display process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation / display process. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a structure of data stored in a base calculation area. It is a front view which shows another example of a game board. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation / display process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation / display process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation / display process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation / display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a peripheral control part. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a display selection process. It is a figure showing an example of a display selection table. It is a figure showing an example of a display selection table. It is a figure showing an example of a display selection table. It is a figure showing an example of a display selection table. It is a figure showing an example of a display selection table. It is a figure showing an example of a display screen. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation / display process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base calculation area update process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update process for base calculation. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a timer interrupt process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base calculation process 1. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base calculation process 2. 9 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation processing 1. 11 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation process 2. 9 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base calculation process 3. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base calculation process 4. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a base display process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation processing 3. 13 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation processing 4. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base display process. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing arrangement of a frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure showing arrangement of a frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure showing the example of connection of a discharge ball sensor and a main control board. It is a front view showing an example of a game board. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a main control input circuit. It is a figure showing the example of mounting of the main control board. It is a figure showing the example of mounting of the main control board. It is a figure showing the example of mounting of the main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a main control I / O port. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a main control I / O port. FIG. 97 is a timing chart in a configuration example of the main control I / O port shown in FIG. 97. It is a figure showing change of a state (section) concerning calculation of a base value. It is a figure showing an example of a character displayed on a base indicator. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an initialization process. 102 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the initialization processing of FIG. 101. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a base calculation area. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a timer interrupt process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base calculation process. 108 is a flowchart illustrating the continuation of the base calculation process in FIG. 105. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base display data generation process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a base calculation process. It is a figure showing calculation of a base at the time of a game state switching. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a configuration related to a storage area in an internal configuration of a main control MPU 1311. It is a figure which shows an example of the program of a timer interruption process and a base calculation process. It is a figure which shows an example of the program of a timer interruption process and a base calculation process. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of an arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in a ROM and a RAM incorporated in a main control MPU. It is a figure showing an example of a game history recorded on a gaming machine. It is a figure showing an example of an error screen. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of an error signal. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of an error. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of an error. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of an error. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a peripheral control part. It is a figure showing an example of a game history record condition setting table. It is a figure showing an example of a game history. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a peripheral control board and its periphery. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration around a peripheral control SRAM; It is a figure showing a modification of a game history record condition setting table. It is a figure showing a modification of a game history. It is a figure showing a modification of a game history. It is a figure showing a modification of a game history. It is a block diagram showing roughly the control structure of the pachinko machine which has a setting part. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which has a setting part from the back with the door opened. FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130 as viewed from behind with the door closed. FIG. 130 is a diagram illustrating a setting unit of the pachinko machine illustrated in FIG. 130. It is a figure showing the modification of a setting part. It is a block diagram showing roughly the control structure of the pachinko machine which has a setting part. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board which has a setting part from the back. FIG. 135 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine equipped with the game board shown in FIG. 135 as viewed from behind. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process and a setting display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process and a setting display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special symbol and special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special symbol change waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special symbol variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a fluctuation pattern selection determination process. (A) is an example of a fluctuation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is out of order. (B) is an example of a fluctuation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect performed in out-of-place variation patterns 20 and 24-29 in the variation pattern table of Drawing 144 (A). FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect performed in out-of-place variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of an effect performed in the outlier fluctuation pattern 31 and the hit fluctuation pattern 34 in the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect performed in the outlier fluctuation pattern 32 and the hit fluctuation pattern 35 in the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). (A) is an example of a fluctuation pattern table selected when the gaming state is a time saving state and the result of the special lottery is out of order. (B) is an example of a fluctuation pattern table selected when the gaming state is a time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit. It is a figure showing the example of mounting of the main control board. It is a figure showing another example of mounting of a main control board. FIG. 152 is a sectional view taken along the line A-A ′ in FIG. 151 (B). It is a figure showing another example of mounting of a main control board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an initialization process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting confirmation process. FIG. 4 is a timing chart of a security signal. 11 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the initialization processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a setting confirmation process. It is another example of a fluctuation pattern table. It is an example of a final reserved color table. When the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. 161, a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 1 This is an example. In the case where the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. 161, the table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 3 This is an example. When the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. This is an example. It is an example of a notice effect table. It is an example of a line production table. It is another example of a notice effect table. It is an example of a setting suggestion effect table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an outline of a setting suggestion effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an outline of a setting suggestion effect as a prefetch effect. (A) is an example of an effect restriction table at the time of a setting confirmation mode, and (B) is an example of an effect restriction table at the time of an error. It is an example of a new start winning effect restriction table. 3 is an example of a processing table 1. 7 is an example of a processing table 2. 9 is an example of a processing table 3; 9 is an example of a processing table 4. 9 is an example of a processing table 5. 7 is an example of a processing table 6. 11 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 1. 11 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 1. 13 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of another example 1. 13 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of another example 1. 13 is a flowchart of a performance display process of another example 1. It is a figure showing the information mode of example 1 of another. It is a figure which shows the notification priority of another example 1. 11 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 1. 11 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a main control-side main process of another example 1. 13 is a flowchart of a RAM abnormality initialization process of another example 1. 13 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of another example 1. 13 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of another example 1. 13 is a flowchart of a setting process of another example 1. 11 is a flowchart of a setting display process of another example 1. 11 is a flowchart of a power-on setting process of another example 1. 14 is a flowchart of a random number update process 2 of another example 1. 13 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of another example 1. 13 is a flowchart of switch input processing 1 of another example 1. FIG. 198 (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch winning information data table of another example 1, and FIG. 198 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch input level / edge data area of another example 1. is there. FIG. 199 (A) is a diagram showing another configuration example of the switch winning information data table of another example 1, and FIG. 199 (B) is another configuration example of the switch input level / edge data area of another example 1. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a setting change / confirmation process of another example 1. FIG. 201 (A) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the switch input port 2 of another example 1, and FIG. 201 (B) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a setting state management area of another example 1. FIG. 202 (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on operation command of another example 1, and FIG. 202 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on state command of another example 1, FIG. 202 (C) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on return destination command of another example 1, and FIG. 202 (D) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a set value command of another example 1. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a transmission order of commands according to another example 1. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a state transition of a setting state management area of another example 1. 10 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. 9 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode of another example 1. 10 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. 10 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. 10 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the big hit determination threshold value table of another example 1. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the big hit determination threshold value table of another example 1. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the big hit determination threshold value table of another example 1. 14 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 2. 14 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 2. 15 is a flowchart of a setting value confirmation process of another example 2. It is a flowchart of RAM confirmation processing outside the game area at the time of power-on of another example 2. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of RAM abnormality outside a game area of another example 2. 15 is a flowchart of an out-of-use-area RWM initialization process of another example 2. 11 is a flowchart of a power-on setting process of another example 2. FIG. 220 (A) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a setting state management area according to another example 2, and FIG. 220 (B) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on operation command according to another example 2. FIG. 220 (C) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on state command of another example 2. 15 is a flowchart of a main control-side main process of another example 2. 11 is a flowchart of a power-off process of another example 2. 14 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of another example 2. 13 is a flowchart of a setting process of another example 2. 15 is a flowchart of a setting display process of another example 2. 15 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 3. 15 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 3. 15 is a flowchart of a main control-side main process of another example 3. 13 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process for a setting change process of another example 3. It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process for normal games of the other example 3. 15 is a flowchart of a main control-side main process of another example 4. 15 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process for a setting change process of another example 4. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the center role of the front unit of the game board and the display effect unit, which is exploded and viewed from the front. It is a front view which shows the state which light-emitting-displayed the 1st design in the presentation effect unit. It is a front view showing the state where the 2nd picture was light-emitting-displayed in the presentation effect unit. It is a figure showing the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure showing the structure of the reflective part provided in the light guide plate. It is a figure showing the structure of the reflective part provided in the light guide plate. It is a figure showing the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure showing an example of a picture projected on a light guide plate. It is a figure showing an example of a picture projected on a light guide plate. It is a figure showing an example of a picture projected on a light guide plate. It is a figure showing the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure showing an example of a picture projected on a light guide plate. It is a figure showing signs that a picture seen by plane by a light guide plate is displayed. It is a figure showing signs that a picture seen by plane by a light guide plate is displayed. It is a figure showing signs that a picture stereoscopically viewed by a light guide plate is displayed. It is a figure showing signs that a picture stereoscopically viewed by a light guide plate is displayed. It is a figure showing the example of the production display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure showing the example of the production display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure showing the example of the production display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure showing the example of the production display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure showing the example of the production display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure showing the example of the production display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure showing the example of the production display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure showing the example of the production display performed using a light guide plate. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram around a synchronous serial interface of a main control board. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram showing a connection between a serial / parallel conversion circuit and an LED. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a connection example of terminals of an IC that accommodates an inverter buffer. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a connection example of terminals of an IC that accommodates an inverter buffer. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an arrangement of a main control MPU and peripheral components on a main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an arrangement of ports in a main control MPU. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating timings of outputting and capturing data by a synchronous serial signal. It is a figure showing another arrangement of a main control board in a main control board box. It is a figure showing another arrangement of a main control board in a main control board box. It is a perspective view of the slot machine. It is a perspective view of the slot machine in the state where the front member was opened. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operation members, and the like provided in the slot machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a storage area provided by a ROM, a RAM, and the like according to the embodiment, and details of the ROM area. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating details of a RAM area according to the embodiment. It is a figure showing the structure of the data stored in the accessory ratio calculation area. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating details of a parameter information setting area according to the embodiment. 20 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a system reset activation process executed when the slot machine is reset. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a periodic process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the information signal N output process. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine at the time of the press operation part of an effect operation unit being in an ascent position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine at the time of the press operation part of an effect operation unit being in an ascent position from the front right. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which opened the door frame from the main frame and opened the main frame from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame left assembly of the outer frame, and the outer frame right assembly, respectively, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame from the front and disassembled. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit from the back. FIG. 3A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 2B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after the rear case and the fraud prevention member are removed. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. FIG. 3A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as exploded and viewed from the front, and FIG. 3B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit exploded and viewed from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and looked from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in the plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in the plate unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit for every main member and looked from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in the dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for every main member and looked from behind. It is the top view which looked at the production operation unit in the plate unit from the advancing and retreating direction of the production operation unit button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rendering operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rendering operation unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the effect operation unit disassembled for every main member from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring from the lower front. FIG. 2A is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotary drive unit from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the rotation drive unit from the left front. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit from the front and the upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation button unit and looked from the front lower part. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lower position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the upper position. It is an explanatory view showing the relation between the production operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration board in the top view which looked at the effect operation unit from the press direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is at the raised position, and (c) is a center pressing operation unit of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the plate unit when is pressed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, and (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked from the front lower part. It is a front view of the door frame shown with each decorative board. It is a front view of a main part frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member and looked at from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left front corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device viewed from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit of the main body frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit in the main body frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. FIG. 5 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, which is cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (A) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). . It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full tank path unit. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball in a main part frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the board unit from the lower back. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit, which is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and looked at from behind. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction center. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a plan view of the body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows an upper part in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the upper front in a state where the tank rail and the like are assembled to the ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the lower front in (a). FIG. 376 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the exploded view of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of a main body frame distribute | circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the upper part of a main body frame. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball to a detour passage in an upper part of a main part frame. It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the tank rail vicinity in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the hinge side back. It is the front view of the game board which made the front component, the game panel, the front unit, etc. opaque in the pachinko machine. 390 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 382 viewed from the front right. 390 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 382 viewed from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from behind. It is a front view of the game board in the state where the front component, the game panel, the front unit, and the like are made transparent. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member and looked from behind. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by CC line in FIG. 382. It is a front view of the game board which cuts a front unit in parallel with the surface of a game panel, and shows the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and obstacle nails. (A) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the starting port unit and the side unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the starting port unit and the side unit of the front unit as viewed from the rear, and (c) is It is a left side view of a starting opening unit, and (d) is a left side view of a side unit. It is explanatory drawing which compared the inclination of the front surface of a general winning opening, and the inclination of the door member of a variable winning opening at the time of an open state. It is an enlarged front view which shows the part of the starting port unit and the side unit in a game board. (A) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit as viewed from the front by exploding. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit when disassembled and viewed from behind. It is an explanatory view showing movement of the first big winning opening door in the first attacker unit from the left side. It is an explanatory view showing a passage of a game ball in a first attacker unit in a cross section. (A) is a perspective view of the center role of the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center role of the front unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of a center accessory. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd attacker unit in the front unit, the right side middle unit, and the gate member from the front, and (b) is the 2nd attacker unit in the front unit, the right side middle unit, and the gate member. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the device viewed from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the path | pass of the game ball in a 2nd attacker unit and a side right middle unit by a cross section. FIG. 390 is an explanatory diagram in which a right portion in the game area is enlarged in FIG. 390. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main structure and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main structure and looked at from behind. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in which the upper left corner of the game board is enlarged and the door frame is transparent. (A) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back effect unit and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back back effect unit and looked from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable structure of a back effect unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of a back back effect unit. It is a front view which shows a back decoration movable body with a back decoration board. (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the DD line in FIG. 417, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line in FIG. 417. (A) is a perspective view of the back decorative movable body viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back movable decorative body viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back movable movable body and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back movable movable body and looked from behind. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of back movable movable body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light guide radiation plate and the back decoration board in a front view of FIG. 422 with a broken line. (A) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the back movable movable body, (b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same part as the decorative body of (a), (c) (A) is a front view showing a part of a light guide radiation plate and a back decoration substrate at the same site as the decorative body of (a). It is an expanded sectional view which expands and shows the upper part of FIG. 418 (a). 425 is an exploded view showing the cross-sectional view of FIG. 425 in an exploded manner. It is explanatory drawing which expands a part of front part of a back movable movable body, and shows the relationship between the decoration by a decorative body and a decoration sheet, a light guide radiation plate, and a back decoration board. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the back decoration board in the site | part of a 1st LED in a cross section, (b) is a 2nd LED located on the optical axis of a 1st LED. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the light guide radiation plate in the part which exists from the front, (c) is the LED accommodation part of the light guide radiation plate with respect to the 2nd decoration part in a decoration body and a decoration sheet, and the 1st LED of a back decoration board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of arrangement | positioning from the front. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of back decoration board with copper foil of a circuit pattern. (A) is a front view of a back decoration board, (b) is a back view of a back decoration board. (A) is an enlarged sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the back movable movable body, and (b) is an enlarged sectional view showing a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative portion in a form different from that of (a). It is a figure, (c) is an expanded sectional view showing a part of ornaments which have a metal ornament part of a form different from (a) and (b) further. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the back movable movable body of 2nd Embodiment different from the back movable movable body of FIG. 417 by a cross section, (b) is a back movable movable body of 3rd embodiment. (C) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the configuration of the back movable movable body according to the fourth embodiment. (A) is a perspective view of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a back lower left production unit and a lower back right production unit of the back unit as viewed from behind. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower back left production unit and the lower back right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower back left production unit and the lower back right production unit, and was seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable structure of a lower back left production unit and a lower back right production unit from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the under-representation effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the under-rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the raising / lowering mechanism under the back of the under-back effect unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the raising / lowering mechanism under the back of the under-back effect unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower back middle decoration body unit of the lower back middle effect unit and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower back middle decoration body unit of the lower back middle effect unit and looked from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising and lowering of the under-back middle decoration body unit by the under-back middle raising / lowering mechanism in a back-under middle production unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure concerning rotation of the lower back middle decoration body of the lower back middle decoration body unit in a back lower middle production unit from the front, and (b) is the stop position of the lower back middle rotation decoration body. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a table indicating a relationship between the sensor and each detection sensor. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement | positioning of the LED of the decoration body unit under the back in the under the back effect unit from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper presentation unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper presentation unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper presentation unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper presentation unit for every main member and looked at from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back up-and-down decoration body unit in a back upper presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up-and-down decoration body unit in a back unit, and was seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the rotation mechanism of the back upper front rotary decoration body in a back upper presentation unit from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the raising / lowering mechanism of the back raising / lowering decoration body unit in a back upper production unit from the front, (b) is the back raising / lowering decoration in the state which moved the back raising / lowering decoration body unit to the appearance position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising / lowering mechanism of a body unit, and the rotation mechanism of a back decoration rotating body from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the decoration board from the front in the state which moved the back raising / lowering decorative body unit to the appearance position in a back upper production unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back rear left rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back rear left rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back back left effect unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back rear left effect unit for every main member, and was seen from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back left decoration body unit of the back back left production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back back left decorative body unit of the back back left production unit, and was seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of a back back left production unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back back left decoration body unit in a back back left effect unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back right effect unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back right effect unit for every main member, and was seen from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back right decoration body unit of the back back right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back right decoration body unit of the back back right production unit, and was seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of a back back right production unit from the front. It is an explanatory view showing movement of a back right decoration body unit in a back right effect unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back front left rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front left rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left production unit, and was seen from behind. (A) is a front view showing a shutter group in a back front left production unit in a closed state, and (b) is a front view showing a shutter group in a back front left production unit in an open state. (A) is a perspective view of the back front right rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front right rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled one back right decoration body unit in the back front right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled one back front right decorative body unit in the back front right production unit, and was seen from behind. (A) is a front view which shows a shutter group in a front right production unit in a closed state, and (b) is a front view which shows a shutter group in a front right production unit in an open state. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the back movable decoration object of the back back effect unit was moved from the retreat position to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the under-back middle decoration of the under-back middle rendering unit was moved from the lowered position to the raised position. The back-side rotating decorative body of the back-facing rear production unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position, the back-left rotating decorative body of the back-left producing unit is moved from the retracted position to the first appearing position, and the back of the rear-facing right producing unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the rear-right rotating decorative body moved from the evacuation position to the first appearance position, respectively. A state in which the back left rotating decorative body of the back left rendering unit has been moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back right rotating decorative body of the back back right rendering unit has been moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position, respectively. It is a front view of the game board shown by. It is a front view of the game board which shows the shutter unit of the back front left production unit and the shutter unit of the back front right production unit from a closed state to an open state, respectively. Move the back-to-back decorative unit from the retracted position to the appearing position, move the back-to-back rotating decorative unit from the retracted position to the appearing position from the retracted position, and move the back-to-back left decorative unit from the retracted position to the appearing position. From the evacuation position to the first appearance position, the back right rotation decoration of the back right production unit from the evacuation position to the first appearance position, and the lower back rotation decoration of the back bottom production unit ascend from the descending position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state moved to the position, respectively. It is a block diagram showing roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a pachinko machine shown with a self-supporting auxiliary member. (A) is a flowchart showing a procedure for a main process executed by the main control MPU, and (b) is a flowchart showing a procedure for an interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by a main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting-port passage process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the preliminary determination process performed by a main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting-port passage process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by a main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit determination process performed by a main control MPU. (A) is a hit determination table used in a lottery process for a hit, (B) is a big hit symbol determination table used in a lottery process for a big hit type, and (C) is a type of a small hit It is a small hit symbol determination table used in the lottery process for. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design change processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit control process performed by a main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit control process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol process process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passage process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal process performed by a main control MPU. (A) is a public figure hit determination table used in the lottery process for the general figure hit, and (B) is a general figure hit open pattern table used for the determination processing about the open pattern at the time of the general figure hit. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol change process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol stop process performed by a main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal electric accessory opening processing performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about 16mS regular processing performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the effect control processing performed by a peripheral control MPU. (A) is an example of a hit probability table, and (B) is an example of a big hit distribution table. It is a transition diagram showing an example of a game state transition of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a rush entry chance effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a rush entry chance effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a rush entry chance effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect during a small hit rush. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect during a small hit rush. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation during a high-precision time-saving big hit. It is an example of the timetable of a demonstration screen. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a screen transition of volume adjustment. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a rise effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of a rising effect. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing at which a promotion effect in a rising effect is performed. (A) is a reserved color determination table used when a game ball wins a starting port during a non-reserved and non-changed execution. (B) is a reserved color determination table used when a game ball wins a starting opening during no change and during execution of fluctuation. (C) is a reserved color determination table used when a game ball wins a starting port with one reserved. (D) is a reserved color determination table used when a game ball wins a starting port with two reserves. (E) is a reserve color determination table used when a game ball wins a starting port with three reserves. It is an example of a change pending color determination table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a reservation notice effect by a reservation color change. (A) is a gacha-coin hold determination table used when a game ball wins a starting port without holding and during non-change execution. (B) is a gacha-coin hold determination table used when a game ball wins a start-up port without holding and during execution of fluctuation. (C) is a gacha coin holding determination table used when a game ball wins a starting port with one holding. (D) is a gacha coin reservation determination table used when a game ball wins a starting port with two reserves. (E) is a gacha coin reservation determination table used when a game ball wins a starting port with three reserves. It is an example of a gacha coin reserved color correspondence table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a gacha coin reservation notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of reach collapse pseudo continuous production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a reach symbol promotion effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect on the Sugoroku stage. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect on the Sugoroku stage. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a pine zone effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a pine zone effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a super matsu zone production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a super matsu zone production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a held peeping effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a rocket effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a rocket effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a rocket effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a schedule of a dynamic production of a character A and fuel from the start of a still image production in a rocket production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a battle effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a battle effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a battle effect. It is an explanatory view showing another example of a battle effect. It is an explanatory view showing another example of a battle effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a reel effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a reel effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of bee extermination production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of bee extermination production. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of bee extermination production. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of bee extermination production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the reach production which Daruma fell. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the reach production which Daruma fell. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the reach production which Daruma fell. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a notice process selection reach production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a notice process selection reach production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a notice process selection reach production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a reservation set effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a reservation set effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a division reach effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a division reach effect.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame 3 opened from the main frame and the main frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame 3, a game board 5, a main body frame 4, and an outer frame 2 as viewed from the front, and FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 when viewed from behind.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable and is mounted on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a player that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated and extend left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 are connected to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the left and right lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is connected to lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30. The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are openably and closably mounted by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular outer shape in a front view and having a through-hole 111 penetrating front and rear, and a game mounted on a lower front part of the door frame base unit 100. A plate unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing spheres, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front part of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the left front part of the door frame base unit 100 A unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the right front part of the door frame base unit 100, and a game ball attached to the lower right part of the front face of the door frame base unit 100 through the plate unit 200 and stored in the upper plate 201. Handle unit 500 operable by a player to drive the player into the game area of the game board 5, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. A foul cover unit 520 that receives a game ball that has been hit into the game area and is ejected to the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and a game ball that is mounted on the lower portion of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and has an upper plate 201 A ball feed unit 540 for sending the ball to the ball launching device 680, a glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 to close the through-hole 111, and a security cover 580 covering a lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 560 are provided. ing.

  The main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main frame base 600, which is partially insertable into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5. The upper hinge member 60 and the lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 are rotatably attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, respectively, and the upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are rotatable. The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably mounted, the reinforcing frame 660 mounted on the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the main body frame base 600 And a ball launcher 680 for driving game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and a frame 2 and a body frame 4 mounted on the right side of the body frame base when viewed from the front. , And door A locking unit 700 for locking between the main frame 3 and the main frame 4; and an inverted L-shaped payout which is attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in front view and pays out game balls to the player side. The unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and the back of the game board 5 attached to the rear of the main frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable and attached to the main frame base 600. And a back cover 980.

  Inside the back cover 980, a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game performed in the pachinko machine 1 is provided. The main control unit 1300 is provided with an accessory ratio display 1317. The accessory ratio display 1317 is constituted by, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED. The effect ratio display 1317 may be configured by the effect display device. Note that the accessory ratio display 1317 may be provided in the payout control board unit 950 instead of the main control unit 1300.

  In addition, the display ratio display device 1600, 3114, or 244 may display the accessory ratio without separately providing a display device for displaying the ratio of the accessory. In this case, if the accessory ratio is always displayed on any of the effect display devices 1600, 3114, 244, the player ratio can be notified to the player, and the player can confirm the condition of the pachinko machine.

  As will be described later, the role ratio can be calculated by calculating the number of gained balls / the total number of obtained balls. For example, a pachinko machine having a high value of the ratio of bonuses (for example, 90%) has a large number of prize balls due to a jackpot. Since it is obtained, it can be said that it is in good condition. On the other hand, a pachinko machine having a low value of the accessory ratio (for example, 10%) has a small number of jackpot games and a small number of prize balls during a large jackpot, and thus can be said to be in poor condition. Therefore, the player can select the pachinko machine to be played in consideration of the numerical value of the accessory ratio.

  As a mode of notifying the player of the accessory ratio, a numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. For example, when the accessory ratio is 70% or more, the numerical value is displayed in red, the frame lamp is lit or flashed in red, and when the ratio is 69% to 30%, the numerical value is displayed in green, and the frame lamp is lit or flashed in green. I do. The numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed in a manner not to be mistaken for a decorative pattern. For example, it may be displayed in such a manner that it is displayed at a position that does not overlap the display position of the decorative symbol when it is not fluctuating, or that the size of the numeral indicating the accessory ratio is smaller than that of the decorative symbol. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

  Further, the aspect ratio of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be changed according to the value of the accessory ratio to notify the player of the accessory ratio. For example, when the accessory ratio is 70% or more, a decorative pattern is displayed in red, a frame lamp is lit or blinked in red, and when 69% to 30%, a decorative pattern is displayed in green and a frame lamp is lit green. Or flashing. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

  Further, it may be displayed on the effect display device 244 provided on the door frame 3. At this time, the above-described display mode may be changed, and may be displayed together with other information in addition to the accessory ratio. The other information includes the number of jackpots, the number of consecutive jackpots (so-called number of consecutive chan), the number of balls held, the remaining balance, and the like.

  In addition, the present invention is not limited to the accessory ratio, and a continuous accessory ratio, a base value, and the like, which will be described later, may be displayed in different forms as described above. The display ratio of the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the base value may each be changed.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is enclosed in a transparent resin main control board box 1320 sealed in a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed, and is disposed on a printed circuit board. The parts can be seen from the outside. Further, for example, when the back cover 980 is formed of a transparent resin, the main control unit 1300 can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the accessory ratio display 1317 provided on the main control unit 1300 is displayed on the pachinko machine. It can be seen from the back side of the machine 1. By enclosing the accessory ratio indicator 1317 in the main control board box 1320, it is possible to prevent unauthorized alteration of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 so as to make the pachinko machine 1 have a low gambling property, and to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being accurately modified. Can display gambling.

  When the back cover 980 is formed of an opaque resin, a hole is formed in the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317, or the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is made transparent, so that the pachinko machine can be used. The accessory ratio indicator 1317 may be seen from the back side of the machine 1.

  Even when the back cover 980 is made of a transparent resin, the surface of the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 can be made flat, or the back cover 980 can be made thinner. The ratio indicator 1317 may be easily seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  In the lower part of the back of the pachinko machine 1, there is provided an outlet for collecting game balls flowing out of the game area 5a via the out port 1111 and the winning ports 2001, 2005, 2006 and the like, and discharging the game balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. ing. In addition, the game ball discharged from the discharge port is supplied to the ball tank 802 through the island facility. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a discharged ball sensor 3060 for detecting game balls discharged from the discharge port.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is provided with a display switch 1318. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole through which the display switch 1318 can be operated. It may be displayed on the printed circuit board near the display switch 1318 or on the main control board box 1320 that the switch is used to operate the display of the accessory ratio (printing, engraving, sticker, etc.). The display switch 1318 is desirably provided near the accessory ratio display 1317. However, the display switch 1318 is not limited to the main control unit 1300, but may be provided on another board (for example, the effect control board 4700) as long as the operation is easy. , Power supply device 4112), housing 4100, or front member 4200. A peripheral board provided separately from the peripheral control unit 1500 and the main control unit 1300, a power board in the frame-side power board box 930, or a payout control board unit 950 may be provided. Further, as described later, the display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate, it is possible to prevent the player from operating by mistake.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends leftward and rightward. A ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and a game ball in the ball tank 802 which is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 to the left in a front view. A left and right tank rail 803 for guiding, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 in front view for guiding game balls from the tank rail 803 in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820 Game balls that are detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 at the lower side and guided by the ball guiding unit 820 A payout device 830 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from a payout control board 951 (see FIG. 17) housed in the payout control board unit 950, and a payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801. The upper full tank path unit 850 that guides the game balls downward and discharges the game balls from the normal discharge port or the full discharge port according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 201 in the plate unit 200. And a normal taxiway attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801 to guide the game balls discharged from the normal discharge port of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward and to guide the game balls from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3. And a full tank guide path for guiding the game balls released from the full tank discharge port forward and guiding the game balls to the full tank receiving port 530 of the door frame 3 from the front end. A lower Kalimantan ball path unit 860, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a speaker for bass sound mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in a front view. Speaker unit 920 having a power supply board 921, a power supply board box 930 that is mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and houses a power supply board therein, An interface control board box 940 accommodating an interface control board therein, and a payout control board 951 mounted on the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of game balls are accommodated therein. And a payout control board unit 950. .

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides an outer periphery of a game area 5a into which the game ball is to be shot and places the game ball fired from the ball firing device 680 on the upper part of the game area 5a as shown in FIGS. Front member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding to the front, a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front member 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a; A box-shaped substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower portion on the rear side of the machine and opened upward, and a main control substrate 1310 attached to the rear side of the substrate holder 1200 for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1. The main control unit 1300 and a plurality of winning holes mounted in the game area 5a in front of the game panel 1100 and capable of receiving a game ball hit into the game area 5a. A table unit that (illustration is omitted), and a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 in the upper of the substrate holder 1200, the.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launching device 680 plays the game with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A ball is hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit into the game area 5a are received in a winning port (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning ports. . Since the interest of the player can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the players can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of gaming board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board. 11 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front right, FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front left, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. Further, FIG. 16 is a front view in which a front component member and a front unit in the game board are cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area.

  The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. Further, the game board 5 is provided with a front component 1000 having a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front and defining the outer periphery of the game area 5a, and a rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped gaming panel 1100 to be divided, a substrate holder 1200 attached to a lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, which is driven by driving game balls into the gaming area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 17) for controlling the game content to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game balls are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at a portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown).

  Further, the game board 5 displays a game state based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and attached to the front of the game panel 1100. It further includes a front unit 2000 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 has a transparent plate-like panel plate 1110 and an outer periphery that is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side and the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 includes a plurality of general prize ports 2001 which are always open to accept game balls hit into the game area 5a and a plurality of general prize ports 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to receive a ball, a gate 2003 mounted at a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting the passage of a game ball, and a game ball passing through the gate 2003 The second starting port 2004 in which game balls can be accepted in accordance with the result of the ordinary lottery selected by the lottery, and the first special portrayed by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 A first winning prize opening 2005 and a second winning prize opening 2006 are provided, in which game balls can be received in accordance with either a lottery result or a second special lottery result. The second special winning opening 2006 is composed of two special winning openings, a second upper winning opening 2006a and a second lower winning opening 2006b arranged in one flow path through which the game ball circulates (FIG. 16).

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted immediately above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a first winning port 2005. The lower side unit 2200 is attached along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the mouth unit 2100 in a front view and has three general winning openings 2001, and is mounted above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in a front view. A frame shape attached to the upper side unit 2300 and substantially at the center in the game area 5a and having one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second big winning opening 2006. A center role 2500.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape having an open front and a square back opening 3010a in the rear wall. The back unit 3000 is disposed at a predetermined position in the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage table unit 2000, and a lock mechanism attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600. 3020, a right ball passage unit 3030 attached to the right end of the back box 3010 when viewed from the front and for discharging game balls received at the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the center role 2500, It is attached near the front end of the lower right corner of the box 3010 when viewed from the front. Lower right ball passage unit 3035 for discharging the accepted game balls to 2543C, and a.

  The back unit 3000 also includes an upper relay board 3040 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010, an upper relay board cover 3041 covering the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and a rotatable mounting on the rear surface of the back box 3010. Box-shaped effect drive board box 3042, effect drive board 3043 accommodated in effect drive board box 3042, panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010, and panel relay board 3044 And a panel relay board cover 3045 that covers the rear side of the panel.

  The back unit 3000 further includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end in the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back unit below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. A rear lower movable effect unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200 mounted on the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and a back box A rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view within the 3010, and a back upper center attached from the center in the left and right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Movable staging unit 3400 and movable staging unit 3100 under the back below opening 3010a in back box 3010 A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

[2-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The inner shape of the inner shape defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a. An outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape from the lower left end to the left in the left-right direction in the front view and extending in the clockwise circumferential direction from the center in the front view and passing through the upper center in the left-right direction in the front view to the upper right diagonal, An inner rail 1002 that is disposed substantially inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, and a game is played on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in front view. And an out guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  The front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in a front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. A right rail 1005 extending from the right end to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000 and having an upper part curved inside the front component 1000; an upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail And an impact portion 1006 that connects the upper end of the game ball 1001 and that a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to be rotatable, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the inner rail 1002 and the front view clock. A backflow preventing member which is turned by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable only in the open position where it is turned around and opened between the outer rail 1001 and returned to the closed position side. 1007.

  On the back side of the game board 5 near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 (preferably immediately after passing through the backflow prevention member 1007), a shooting ball sensor 1020 for detecting a game ball hit into the game area 5a is provided. For example, the shooting sphere sensor 1020 is configured by a magnetic sensor, and outputs a signal when detecting a game sphere that has passed through the backflow prevention member 1007 and flowed into the game area 5a. In addition, the shooting ball sensor 1020 may be provided at a position where the game ball always passes in the game area. By fixing the position of the shooting sphere sensor 1020 on the game board 5, specifications can be shared among a plurality of models, and inspection at a manufacturing site and inspection after installation in a hall are facilitated.

  The shooting sphere sensor 1020 provided upstream of the game area 5a, such as near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002, detects an out ball before the winning opening sensor detects a winning of the game ball. That is, since the game balls are detected in the order of the out ball and the prize ball, the base value can be accurately calculated without detecting the prize ball caused by the game ball not counted as the out ball.

[2-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel plate 1110 having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface. The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 has an out port 1111 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. The panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate back and forth to mount the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 holds the panel board 1110 detachably from the rear side. Further, panel holder 1120 has a plurality of mounting holes for mounting back unit 3000 and a plurality of positioning holes formed on the rear surface.

  When the game panel 1100 is mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel board 1110 is opened on the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guiding section 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[2-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top and the front open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction. When the board holder 1200 is assembled on the game board 5, the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 can be covered from below. Thereby, the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out opening 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged part 1201 (see FIG. 14).

[2-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15 and FIG. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

  The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Must be performed, and a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the improper act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

[2-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (the player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 displays a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  Although not shown in detail, the function display unit 1400 has a status indicator made up of one LED for displaying a game state, and two LEDs based on a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball to the gate unit 2003. , A normal symbol display for displaying these two LEDs in a lighting manner according to a normal lottery result after the normal symbol is variably displayed by flashing control, and a fluctuation display of the normal symbol relating to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003. Among them, a normal holding indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings, which is the number of changing displays for which the start condition of the changing display has not been satisfied, and accepting a game ball to the first starting port 2002 (starting prize). After the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed by blinking the eight LEDs based on the result of the first special lottery selected by (occurrence). And the first special symbol display for displaying the LED in a lighting mode according to the result of the first special lottery, and the variation display of the first special symbol related to the reception of the game ball to the first starting port 2002. A first special reserve number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the reserve number, which is the number of variable displays for which the start condition is not satisfied, and the reception of game balls to the second start port 2004 (the occurrence of a start prize). The second special symbol is displayed by varying the second special symbol by blinking control of the eight LEDs based on the selected second special lottery result, and then displaying these eight LEDs in a lighting mode according to the second special lottery result. A second display for displaying a symbol display and the number of variable displays, which are the number of variable displays for which the start condition of the variable display has not yet been satisfied among the variable displays of the second special symbol relating to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004; Two L D and the number of repetitions of the opening and closing pattern of the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like. And a round indicator comprising two LEDs for displaying (number of rounds). A part of the display (for example, the first special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 may be configured by a 7-segment LED.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, symbols, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[2-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. The peripheral control unit 1500 is mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 17) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image (see FIG. 17). reference).

[2-7. Effect display device]
Next, the effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. The effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to a substantially central rear surface of a rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (the player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a full-color display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display a still image or a moving image.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side in front view, and a right fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side in front view. And This effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves 3010c opened in the left inner peripheral surface in a front view inside a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion of a back box 3010 described below, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward, After inserting two left fixing pieces 1601 from diagonally behind 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is moved downward. By sliding, it is attached to the back box 3010.

[2-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12 and FIGS. 14 to 16. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. The front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end passes through the opening 1112. And protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The front unit 2000 according to the present embodiment is configured such that a plurality of general prize holes 2001 which can receive game balls hit into the game area 5a and are always open, and a plurality of general prize ports 2001 are in the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 which is always open so as to receive a game ball at a different position, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball, A second starting port 2004 in which game balls can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing through the section 2003, and a lottery performed by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. A first special winning opening 2005 and a second special winning opening 2006 that allow game balls to be accepted in either the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  Of the plurality (four in this case) of general winning openings 2001, three are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged near the upper right in front view in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002 is located right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate unit 2003 is disposed in the game area 5a at the upper right in front view and substantially immediately below the stop unit 1006. The second starting port 2004 is arranged right below the gate portion 2003 as viewed from the front. Among the plurality of general winning openings 2001 described above, the general winning opening 2001 arranged near the upper right in front view in the game area 5a is arranged immediately above the second starting opening 2004. The first special winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1111. The second special winning opening 2006 is located above the first special winning opening 2005 on the right side of the first starting opening 2002 in a front view.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the second large winning opening 2006 in the front unit 2000 includes a second upper winning opening 2006a and a second lower winning opening 2006b arranged along one flow path through which the game ball circulates. It consists of. In the second special winning opening 2006, a second upper special winning opening 2006a is arranged near the lower right in front view in the game area 5a, and a second lower special winning opening 2006b is viewed in front of the second upper special winning opening 2006a. It is located below on the left.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted immediately above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a first winning port 2005. The lower side unit 2200 is attached along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the mouth unit 2100 in a front view and has three general winning openings 2001, and is mounted above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in a front view. A frame shape attached to the upper side unit 2300 and substantially at the center in the game area 5a and having one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second big winning opening 2006. A center role 2500.

[2-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described. The starting port unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1111 near the lower end in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 and a first winning port 2005.

  The starting port unit 2100 has a rectangular unit base 2101 attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 and having a first winning port 2005 penetrating back and forth in a rectangular shape extending left and right, and a first base unit 2101 in the unit base 2101. A ball receiving portion 2102 protruding forward from an upper portion of a substantially central portion in the left-right direction above the large winning opening 2005 and forming a first starting opening 2002, and a first starting opening attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101. A ball guiding unit 2103 for guiding a game ball received in 2002 downward, a first starting port sensor 2104 attached to the ball guiding unit 2103 and detecting a game ball received in the first starting port 2002; A first attacker unit 2110 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the big winning opening 2005.

  The first attacker unit 2110 of the starting port unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first big winning opening 2005 from the rear, and has a front end which is substantially the same size as the first big winning opening 2005 and is opened forward. Box-shaped unit case 2111, and a first oblong door having a horizontally long rectangular shape and a flat plate shape whose lower side is rotatably supported at the front end of the unit case 2111 so that the first winning opening 2005 can be opened and closed. A member 2112, a first attacker solenoid 2113 mounted in the unit case 2111 for driving the opening and closing of the first winning port door member 2112, and a first winning port 2005 mounted in the unit case 2111 and received in the first winning port 2005. First winning opening sensor 2114 for detecting a game ball that has fallen, and a first A starting port unit relay board 2115 for relaying the connection between the moving port sensor 2104, the first attacker solenoid, and the first winning port sensor 2114 and the main control board 1310; A starting port unit decorative board (not shown) for illuminating and decorating the winning port 2005.

  The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting port 2002 has a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time, and is open upward. The first special winning opening 2005 penetrating the unit base 2101 has a size capable of receiving a plurality of (for example, 4 to 6) game balls at a time and is opened forward.

  The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 formed by a ball receiving portion 2102 that is open upward, and a game ball received by the first starting port 2002 is unit-based by a ball guiding portion 2103. After being guided downward on the rear side of 2101 and detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, it can be discharged downward through the first attacker unit 2110. In the present embodiment, two first starting port sensors 2104 are provided. In the main control board 1310, when the two first starting port sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range, the first starting port sensor 2104 is provided. In 2002, it is determined that a game ball has been accepted. This makes it possible to detect an improper act caused by improper insertion of a tool into the first starting port 2002.

  In the starting port unit 2100, the first attacker unit 2110 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101, so that the first winning port door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 is opened in the unit base 2101. It is inserted from the back into the mouth 2005 to close the first big winning opening 2005. The first big win opening door member 2112 is mounted upright with the first big win opening 2005 closed, and the left and right ends of the lower side are rotatably attached by the unit case 2111. By rotating so as to move downward, the first special winning opening 2005 can be changed from the closed state to the open state.

  The first special winning opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 stands upright in a normal state (the state in which the first attacker solenoid 2113 is not energized), and closes the first special winning opening 2005. Then, when the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the game state, the first winning port door member 2112 is rotated so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side is slightly above the lower side. It will be located. That is, the first large winning opening door member 2112 is inclined so as to increase from the lower side of the first large winning opening 2005 toward the front.

  In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the first special winning opening 2005 and comes into contact with the first special winning opening door member 2112, the distribution direction of the game ball is changed from below by the inclination of the first special winning opening door member 2112. It changes to the rear, is accepted by the first big winning opening 2005, and enters the unit case 2111. Then, the game balls received in the first special winning opening 2005 are discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2111 after being detected by the first special winning opening sensor 2114.

[3. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effect devices during a game based on a command from the main control substrate 1310, and an effect display device 1600 or a high-end effect display based on a command from the peripheral control unit 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the display of effect images on the device 244 and the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 for controlling payout of game balls and the like, and a launch control unit 953 for controlling launch of game balls by rotating the handle lever 504.

[3-1. Main control board]
A main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 1311 which is a microprocessor in which a ROM 1313 for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM 1312 for temporarily storing data, and the like, and an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 1315 to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1316 for driving various solenoids, and a main control And a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the MPU 1311. The main control MPU 1311 has a built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting port sensor 2104 for detecting a game ball received in the first starting port 2002, and a second starting port sensor for detecting a game ball received in the second starting port 2004. 2551, a general winning opening sensor 3015 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2547 for detecting a game ball passing through the gate section 2003, and detecting a gaming ball received in the first winning opening 2005 The first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second big winning opening 2006a as the second big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening sensor 2554 for detecting the game ball received in the second lower winning opening 2006b. The second lower winning opening sensor 2557, the ejected ball sensor 3060, the launched ball sensor 1020, and the illegal magnetism in the game area 5a are detected. Magnetic detection sensor, the detection signal from the like are input via the respective main control I / O port 1314.

  The main control MPU 1311 outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 1314 to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the starting port solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, the second upper attacker A drive signal is output to the solenoid 2553 and the second lower attacker solenoid 2556, and a first special symbol display, a second special symbol display, and a first special symbol memory of the function display unit 1400 are output from the main control I / O port 1314. A drive signal is output to a display, a second special symbol storage display, a normal symbol display, a normal symbol storage display, a game status display, a round display, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 2104, the second starting opening sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening sensor. The sensor 2557 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, whereas the general winning opening sensor 3015 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first starting port sensor 2104, the second starting port sensor 2551, Also, the detection of game balls by the gate sensor 2547 frequently occurs. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used for the first opening sensor 2104, the second opening sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. In addition, when an advantageous game state (eg, "big hit" game) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 are opened (or enlarged), and the game balls are frequently played. In order to enter the ball, the detection of the game ball by the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening sensor 2557 frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches having high durability and long life are also used for the first special winning opening sensor 2114, the second special winning opening sensor 2554, and the second special winning opening sensor 2557. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball does not frequently enter, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3015 does not frequently occur. Therefore, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3015.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. Or Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits various commands related to control of the game effect executed on the effect display device 1600 and the like and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port 1314. The information is transmitted to the control unit 1511. When receiving various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, the main control MPU 1311 shapes these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from a power supply board in the power supply board box 930. The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. ). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1311 can store various kinds of information in the RAM 1312 in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 1312 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 951.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages fall below the power failure warning voltage. The power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the main control I / O port 1314, and is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

  On the main control board 1310, an accessory ratio indicator 1317 is attached at a position visible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The accessory ratio display 1317 displays the accessory ratio calculated by the main control MPU 1311.

  In addition, a display switch 1318 is provided on the main control board 1310. The display switch 1318 may be constituted by a push button switch that performs a momentary operation, but may be another type of switch. By operating the display switch 1318, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. Note that the accessory ratio display 1317 may always display the accessory ratio and switch the display content by operating the display switch 1318.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a configuration inside the main control MPU 1311.

  The main control MPU 1311 includes a CPU 13111, a RAM 1312, a ROM 1313, a random number generation circuit 13112, a parallel input port 13113, a serial communication circuit 13114, a timer circuit 13115, an interrupt controller 13116, an external bus interface 13117, a clock circuit 13118, a matching block 13119, and a unique block. Information 13120, an arithmetic circuit 13121, and a reset circuit 13122 are provided.

  The CPU 13111 executes a program stored in the ROM 1313. The RAM 1312 stores data necessary for executing a program.

  The main control MPU 1311 is provided with one or more random number generation circuits 13112. The random number generation circuit 13112 provides random numbers for determining the lottery result of the result of the variable display game (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) and the effect contents of the variable display game. The random number generation circuit 13112 is a so-called hard random number generation unit that outputs a random number updated at the timing of a clock cycle (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock cycle) supplied to the main control MPU 1311. The hard random number generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 is used for a lottery for a special symbol, a lottery for a symbol for a special symbol variation display game, and a lottery for a regular symbol.

  The parallel input port 13113 is a port to which detection signals from various detection switches are input via the main control input circuit 1315.

  The serial communication circuit 13114 transmits and receives various commands related to control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to and from the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port 1314. In addition, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits and receives various information (game information) related to games and various commands related to payout of game balls to and from the payout control board 951 via the main control I / O port 1314. Further, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits data for displaying the accessory ratio to the accessory ratio display 1317. The detailed configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The timer circuit 13115 is a timer for timer interruption and various time controls. The interrupt controller 13116 controls various interrupts to the CPU 13111 (general interrupts, NMI that cannot be masked by software). That is, when the interrupt controller 13116 detects an interrupt, it refers to a vector table defined for each type of interrupt and jumps to an address set in the vector table.

  The external bus interface 13117 is an interface for connecting the internal bus of the main control MPU 1311 to an external device. From the external bus interface 13117, I / O requests (IORQ), read (RD), write (WR), 16-bit addresses (A0 to A15), and 8-bit data (D0 to D7) can be input and output.

  The clock circuit 13118 generates an internal clock of the main control MPU 1311 from the input external clock signal (for example, 32 MHz). In addition, the clock circuit 13118 divides the input clock signal by a set number and outputs the clock signal from the CLKO terminal to the outside. For example, a clock signal to be supplied to the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 28) of the accessory ratio display 1317 may be output.

  The matching block 13119 is a functional block for checking whether the ROM 1313 has been tampered with using a predetermined code. The unique information 13120 is an ID unique to the main control MPU 1311 and is written in a non-rewritable manner when the chip is manufactured.

  The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function that does not depend on a program recorded in the ROM 1313. This arithmetic function is fixedly written when the chip is manufactured.

  The reset circuit 13122 has a non-designated travel prohibition circuit, a watchdog timer, and a user reset function. When the CPU 13111 accesses an address outside the predetermined range of the ROM 1313, the non-designated traveling prohibition circuit estimates that the access is made by an unauthorized program, and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The watchdog timer outputs a timeout signal when a predetermined timer time has elapsed, and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The user reset function resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311 according to a reset signal input to the SRST terminal.

  FIG. 19 is a block diagram illustrating a detailed configuration of the arithmetic circuit 13121.

  The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function that does not depend on a program for an arithmetic result, and includes a multiplying circuit 131211 and a division circuit 131215.

  The multiplication circuit 131211 is an arithmetic circuit that multiplies two values of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 16 bits) and outputs a 32-bit product. Functions as an output conversion circuit.

  The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores the multiplier and the multiplicand of 16 bits or less in the multiplication input register A131212 and the multiplication input register B131213. The multiplication circuit 131211 reads out the values stored in the two 16-bit multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 at a predetermined timing, and stores the result of multiplying the two values in the multiplication result register 131214. The CPU 13111 obtains a multiplication result from the multiplication result register 131214. The processing from writing the values to the multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 to storing the operation result in the multiplication result register 131214 is completed in a predetermined time (for example, one clock). , 131213, and after a predetermined number of clocks have elapsed, the multiplication result can be obtained by referring to the multiplication result register 131214.

  The division circuit 131215 is an arithmetic circuit that divides a dividend having a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) by a divisor of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) and outputs a 32-bit quotient and a 32-bit remainder. It functions as a conversion circuit that performs quotient and remainder conversion of input values (divisor, dividend) by a function and outputs the result.

  The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a dividend of 32 bits or less in the division input register A 131216, and stores a divisor of 32 bits or less in the division input register B 131217. When the division circuit 131215 detects that a value is stored in both of the two 32-bit division input registers 131216 and 131217, the division circuit 131215 reads out the stored value at a predetermined timing, and divides the dividend by the divisor. The result is stored in a division result register A 131218, and the remainder is stored in a division result register B 131219. When the division circuit 131215 reads the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217, the division circuit 131215 may erase the read values and clear the registers. The division circuit 131215 may read the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 at the timing when the start command is input, and store the division result in the division result registers 131218 and 131219. In this case, the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 need not be erased at the read timing. Further, the division input registers 131216 and 131217 may have already stored values (without clearing the stored values) or may be able to overwrite the values.

  The CPU 13111 acquires the division result from the division result registers 131218 and 131219. The processing from writing the values to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to storing the operation results in the division result registers 131218 and 131219 is completed in a predetermined time (for example, 32 clocks). After the values are stored in the registers 131216 and 131217 and a predetermined number of clocks have elapsed, the quotient and the remainder can be obtained by referring to the division result registers 131218 and 131219, respectively.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described later, a division process is required to calculate a base value. Such is the case. For this reason, it is difficult to execute the base calculation process for each timer interrupt process, and it is difficult to display a base value without delay. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required for calculating the base value can be reduced, and the base value can be calculated a plurality of times in one timer interrupt process (see FIGS. 75 and 80). . In addition, since the CPU 13111 is not occupied for the division process from the time when the value is written to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the time when the operation result is read from the division result register A131218, other processes can be executed. Base calculation processing during timer interrupt processing can be executed efficiently.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114.

  The serial communication circuit 13114 has four data transmission / reception circuits, and each data transmission / reception circuit transmits / receives data for one channel to / from a predetermined device. In FIG. 20, only the data transmission circuit is shown, and the description of the data reception circuit (for example, one channel is mounted) is omitted.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, as described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 includes the channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, the channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, Three channels of channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the display 1317 are used, and channel 3 is unused.

  The serial communication circuit 13114 includes a data register 3141, a transmission data register 3142, a parity generation circuit 3143, a transmission shift register 3144, a command status register 3145, a communication setting register 3146, a transmission trigger setting level register 3147, a baud rate register 3148, and a baud rate generation circuit. 3149.

  Data input from the CPU 13111 is stored in the data register 3141 and then in the transmission data register 3142. The transmission data register 3142 is configured by a FIFO having a predetermined capacity (for example, 64 bytes). The transmission data register 3142 adds the error detection code generated by the parity generation circuit 3143 for each data transmission unit to the data to be transmitted, and stores the data in the transmission shift register 3144.

  The baud rate generating circuit 3149 generates a transmission clock signal for transmitting data at the rate set in the baud rate register 3148 from the clock signal supplied from the clock circuit 13118. Then, the transmission shift register 3144 transmits data according to the transmission clock signal.

  The command status register 3145 is a register referred to for confirming a transmission state.

  Communication setting register 3146 stores a command for controlling data transmission. The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 stores a threshold value for controlling the amount of data at which the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 causes an interrupt. The baud rate register 3148 stores a baud rate setting for defining a data transmission rate. The communication setting register 3146, the transmission trigger setting level register 3147, and the baud rate register 3148 are set for each of the four channels as initial settings in step S28 in FIG.

  Hereinafter, these settings will be described in detail. The communication format of each channel is set in the communication setting register. Specifically, the presence / absence of use of the FIFO (FIFO mode, normal mode), the number of stop bits, and parity (whether parity is used, even parity or odd parity) are set. For example, in channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 and channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, a FIFO mode, 1 stop bit = 1 bit, and 1 ×× 1010B meaning even parity In the channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317, the FIFO mode, the stop bit = 1 bit, and 1 ×× 1000B which means that no parity is used are set.

  In the FIFO mode, data is transmitted using the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142. Since the gaming machine is in an environment with a lot of noise, it is desirable to set a parity when transmitting data at high speed outside the main control board 1310.

  Since the accessory ratio display 1317 is mounted on the main control board 1310, the influence of noise is smaller than that of communication with another board via a communication wire. Further, since the amount of data to be transmitted and received is small, the communication speed may be low, and the need to use parity is scarce. In addition, along a pattern for transmitting a signal between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 (for example, the left and right and / or thickness direction of a signal line provided on the surface or an inner layer of a printed circuit board) (A layer adjacent to the signal transmission pattern), the noise superimposed on the signal transmission pattern can be reduced by the shielding effect of the ground pattern.

  The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 determines the amount of data at which the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 causes an interrupt. Specifically, when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is smaller than the set number of bytes, a predetermined bit of the status register corresponding to each channel is set. By determining the corresponding bit of the status register, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a free space in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142, and it is possible to determine the transmission timing of the data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142.

  Note that the bit of the status register can be used to determine whether there is an abnormality in the transmission FIFO. For example, even if data is not written to the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 for a predetermined period, if the corresponding bit of the status register is not set, there is no empty space in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142. It may be determined that data has not been transmitted from the FIFO, and error processing (for example, error notification) may be executed.

  Baud rate register 3148 determines the data transmission rate. For example, 19200 bps is set for channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, and 1200 bps is set for channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951. 1200 bps is set for channel 2 used for communication with.

  Thus, the transmission rate is changed according to the data transmitted in each channel. This is because the gaming balls are rolling inside the gaming machine, and the electronic circuit of the gaming machine is in an environment susceptible to noise. For this reason, the data for controlling the pitching directly related to the profit given to the player is transmitted to the payout control board 951 at a low speed so as to be surely transmitted. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 transmits the data at a high rate because the amount of data to be transmitted is large and is not related to the pitch. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 verifies whether the received command is abnormal, and when it is determined that the received command is abnormal, does not operate the peripheral control board 1510 or executes abnormal processing (for example, communication error notification), and executes the command. Request retransmission of When it is determined that the retransmitted command is normal, the state of the peripheral control board 1510 is restored using the normal command. Therefore, communication with the peripheral control board 1510 can transmit data at a high rate. Further, when the communication rate with the peripheral control board 1510 is lowered, the player can recognize the delay from the winning of the starting port to the start of the change of the symbol, which may reduce interest.

  Communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display unit 1317 is performed at a high rate (19200 bps which is a data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) or at a low rate (1200 bps which is a data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). Good. The communication between the accessory ratio display 1317 and the driver circuit 13171 is performed at a high rate (19200 bps which is a data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) and a low rate (a data transmission rate with the payout control board 951 which is 1200 bps). May be adopted. If the data transmission rate is increased, there is a possibility that other circuits may malfunction due to switching noise of the transistor of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. On the other hand, even if the transmitted data is abnormal due to noise, the same data is retransmitted every timer interrupt unless the transmitted data is updated, and if the retransmitted command is normal, the display content of the accessory ratio display 1317 is displayed. Is returned to normal, and it is not necessary to make the transmission rate extremely low.

The command status register 3145 is a register referred to for confirming a transmission state. For example, each bit is defined as follows.
Bit 7: SnTC This is a flag indicating transmission completion. 0 indicates that transmission is in progress, and 1 indicates transmission completion. Bit 6: SnTDBE In a normal mode (communication mode not using a FIFO), this is a flag indicating transmission data empty. 0 indicates that data has not been transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1 indicates that data has been transferred to the transmission shift register. That is, when data is transferred from the transmission data register 3142 to the transmission shift register 3144 and transmission data is not stored in the transmission data register 3142, it is set.

In the SnTFL FIFO mode, this flag indicates a transmission FIFO trigger level. 0 indicates that the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is equal to or higher than the trigger level, and 1 indicates that the transmission data is stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142. Indicates that the amount of transmitted data is below the trigger level. That is, it is set when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is smaller than the number of bytes set in the transmission trigger level setting register. Therefore, at the time of communication in the FIFO mode, after confirming that the bit is 1, data is written to the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142.
Bits 5 and 2: Not used (fixed to 0)
Bit 1: SnTCL This is a bit for clearing the transmission buffer and the transmission of the break code, emptying the transmission data, or setting the transmission FIFO trigger level to (SnTFL), and is written from outside. For example, when the contents of the buffer are forcibly cleared, the corresponding bit is set to 1. More specifically, the command is written to the FIFO, but is used when transmission of the written command is stopped for some reason (for example, occurrence of an abnormality). Even if bit 1 is set, the data in the transmission shift register is not cleared.

  With the configuration described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 can perform asynchronous communication (asynchronous communication), but outputs a clock signal for synchronous communication (not shown). In this case, the clock signal supplied to the communication partner (the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317) is output from the serial communication circuit 13114 instead of the clock circuit 13118. In each transmission / reception circuit of the serial communication circuit 13114, at least one channel may be capable of performing synchronous communication by setting, or a start-stop synchronization serial communication circuit and a synchronous communication serial communication circuit may be provided separately.

  Although not shown, the serial communication circuit 13114 outputs a signal (LOAD) indicating a data fetch timing used at the time of synchronous communication.

[3-2. Dispensing control board]
Returning to FIG. 17, the description of the control configuration of the pachinko machine will be continued. A payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls and the like is not shown in detail, but performs a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout, a firing control by a firing solenoid 682, and a ball by a ball feed solenoid 551. A launch control unit 953 for performing feed control, an error LED display for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for releasing an error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail 803, a ball guiding unit 820, and a ball release switch for discharging the game balls in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 to start a ball removal operation.

[3-2a. Dispensing control section]
A payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 951 is not shown in detail, but is a microcontroller that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830 and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. The payout control MPU has a built-in ROM and RAM as well as a function for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information (game information) related to a game (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via a payout control I / O port. In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the CPU through the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 is input, the ball exhaustion detection sensor 827, Detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

  Detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to a payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via a payout control I / O port. You.

  Further, detection signals from a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on an error LED display. A command for outputting to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port and indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Or, the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port. This external terminal plate 784 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by ascertaining the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like. The signal generated by the main control board 1310 among the signals output from the external terminal board 784 is output from the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310. The signal generated by the main control board 1310 may be output from the external terminal board 784 without passing through the payout control board 951.

  The error LED display is a segment display, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The following are the contents displayed and notified by the error LED display. For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is notified that “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it is “connection abnormal” (specifically, the main control board 1310 Is notified that the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 951 is abnormal), and when the number "1" is displayed, it is "ball out" (specifically, ball out) Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the payout device 830, and when the number "2" is displayed, it is "ball ball" (specifically, the blade). Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout blade and the game ball are engaged with each other in the payout passage of the payout device 830, indicating that the payout blade is difficult to rotate), and the number “3” is displayed. Error, a “counter switch error” (Specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842), and when the number “5” is displayed, it is a “retry error”. (Specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full” (specifically, Is notified that the game balls stored in the foul cover unit 520 are full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535), and when the number "7" is displayed, "CR not connected" (That the electrical connection has been disconnected at any point from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and when the number “9” is displayed, it is “stocking” ( Ingredient Manner to have informed yet that the ball number of game balls no payout has reached a predetermined number of balls).

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of balls to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 in a serial manner, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and input to the payout control MPU. Is done. Also, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of borrowed game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the display unit, and this signal is displayed on the display unit. Entered and displayed.

[3-2b. Launch control section]
Although not shown in detail, a firing control unit 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 551 is a firing control input to which detection signals from various detection switches related to firing are input. Circuit, an oscillation circuit for outputting a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit for outputting a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a based on the clock signal, and a firing reference pulse And a ball feeding solenoid driving circuit that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 551 based on a firing reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls per minute are launched toward the game area 5a, and outputs the generated reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. A ball feeding reference pulse, which is obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number, is generated and output to a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

  Regarding the handle unit 500, a contact detection sensor 509 for detecting whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle lever 504, and a stop for detecting whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. After the detection signal from the button is input to the firing control input circuit, it is input to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the signal is input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal, and is input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle operation sensor 507 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle lever 504 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  This firing solenoid drive circuit receives a firing reference pulse based on a signal from the handle operation sensor 507 and inputs a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle lever 504. As a result, the output is output to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball-feeding solenoid driving circuit outputs a constant current to the ball-feeding solenoid 551 in response to the input of the ball-feeding reference pulse, thereby causing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to drop. One ball is received in the feeding unit 540, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to send the received game ball to the ball launching device 680 side. As described above, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 682 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

  The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. With this capacitor, the dispensing control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the dispensing control board 951 in the power-off process even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 17, a peripheral control board 1510 performs a performance control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and a performance display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control section 1511. An effect display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the sub effect display device 3114 and the upper plate effect display device 244 is provided.

[3-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although not shown in detail, a peripheral control unit 1511 for performing effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance. And a sound ROM storing sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, based on the various commands, each decorative board of the game board 5 is provided. A game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to the effect drive board 3043, or the game board. The game board-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided in the game device 5 is transmitted from the game board decoration drive board serial I / O port to the effect drive board 3043, Door-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a vibration device 242 and a door lower right drive motor 272 provided on the frame 3, and various components of the door frame 3. Door-side drive emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on the substrate; Control data (display command) indicating a screen transmitted from the port to the door frame 3 side or displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the upper plate effect display device 244 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the effect display control unit 1512. And a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

  Detection signals from various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via an effect drive board 3043 mounted on the rear surface of the back box. . Further, detection signals from the touch panel 246 of the effect operation unit 220 provided on the door frame 3 and the effect button pressing sensor 258 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit 1512 Monitors operation.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and outputs music and music adapted to various effects from speakers 921 and the like provided on the door frame 3, the body frame 4, and the like. Control is performed so that sound effects and the like flow. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume that protrudes backward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is stored. In the present embodiment, a plurality of speakers on the side of the door frame 3 and a low-range speaker 921 of the main body frame 4 are provided with acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or , 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer), not shown, in addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU. A diagnosis is made as to whether or not the own system is running away by using the WDT together.

  A display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed through a serial input / output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) bits per second (hereinafter, referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / flashing command, the game board side lighting / flashing command, the movable body driving command, and a plurality of commands different from the display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect driving board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

  The effect driving board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 or receives the game board side lighting / blinking command. A lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the above is output to the LED of each decoration board provided in the game board 5.

  The effect driving board 3043 transmits a driving signal based on the received driving command to the vibration device 242 and the door lower right driving motor 272 provided on the door frame 3, and the respective driving motors provided on the game board 5. Or output to

[3-3b. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
First, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit will be described with reference to FIG. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the peripheral control MPU (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 17 performs the peripheral control unit power-on processing as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. This allows the peripheral control MPU to enter a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, a command related to control of a game effect and a pachinko machine output from the main control board 1310 are output. This is a state in which various commands such as commands relating to the state of the device 1 can be received.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the effect control program performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are obtained from the RTC control unit, and stored in the peripheral control RAM as the current calendar information in the calendar information storage unit. And set in the time information storage unit as current time information.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to a V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a later-described peripheral control unit steady-state process. Is not set, the value is set to 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control unit V blank signal to be described later, which is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data can be accepted from the peripheral control MPU is input. The value 1 is set in the interrupt processing. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG.

  Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). If the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (it is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such a determination, a state of waiting until the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed is set.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1 in step S1008, that is, when executing the peripheral control unit steady processing, the value 1 is first set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times that the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the number of times, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process.

  Following step S1010, the effect control program performs a lamp data output process (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller of the peripheral control MPU.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs an effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In the effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 220C and the like based on the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 220 Based on the various information acquired, the operation presence / absence of the operation button 220C is monitored, and it is appropriately determined whether or not the state of the operation of the operation button 220C is reflected in the game effect.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs a display data output process (step S1016). In this display data output processing, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP in the display data creation processing described later is used by the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side. Output to the decorative substrate 233. Thereby, various screens are drawn on the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, the effect control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP in the sound data creation processing to be described later to the speaker 921, and broadcasts in addition to the music and sound effects. For example, sound data of a sound or a notification sound is output to the speaker 921.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the effect control program performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the peripheral control RAM. For example, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in chronological order constituting the screen generation schedule data, in order to indicate the order of the screen data from the first screen data to be output to the sound source built-in VDP, Update the pointer.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, among the emission data arranged in a time series constituting the emission mode generation schedule data, in order to indicate the order of the emission data from the first emission data to be the emission mode of various LEDs. , Update the pointer.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, the first sound among the sound data such as music and sound effects, the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, The pointer is updated in order to indicate the order of the sound command data from the command data to be output to the sound source built-in VDP.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in a time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data, the order of the drive data from the first drive data is set as the output target. Update the pointer to indicate what to do.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this reception command analysis processing, the effect control program is information transmitted from the game board side decorative board 3053 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, and is a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command The receiving means analyzes the various commands received (command analyzing means).

  Following step S1022, the effect control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the effect control program includes various commands classified into a predetermined notification display in the command analyzed in the reception command analysis process in step S1022 as described above, various abnormality notifications are issued. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like set in the abnormal display mode for execution are stored in the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511. Alternatively, it is extracted from the peripheral control RAM and set in the peripheral control RAM. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order from the highest priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically changed to another abnormal notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is supposed to. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored at the same time without losing the information that another abnormality has occurred and one abnormality has occurred after the occurrence of one abnormality and before resolving the abnormality. Can be.

  Further, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of turning on the power, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the above-described received command analysis process (step S1022) is classified into various commands classified into status displays, for example, In the case of the error release navigation command (second error release command), by controlling to a mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, the game board-side decorative board 3053 (effect device), the door frame side A warning is visually given to the outside using the decorative substrate 233 (producing device) and a lamp (producing device), or an audible warning is externally provided using a speaker (error notifying means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch of the payout control board 951 even in the gaming state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, fraud on the main control board 1310 which may affect the progress of the game is suppressed.

  Next, following step S1024, the effect control program performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In the RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program is stored in the calendar information and time information storage units stored in the calendar information storage unit and acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the peripheral control RAM. Update the time information. By this RCT acquisition information updating process, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the time information storage unit, are updated, and the year and month, which are the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit, based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the effect control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In this lamp data creation processing, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the pointer is designated by the pointer of the time-series light emission data constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Based on the light emission data to be transmitted, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is peripherally controlled. It is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM or the peripheral control RAM of the unit 1511, and is set in the peripheral control RAM, and a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is provided. The door-side emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is stored in the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 or in the peripheral control ROM 1511. Was created by extracting from your RAM, it is set to peripheral control RAM.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation processing, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and displays the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in chronological order constituting the screen generation schedule data. Is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or the peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source built-in VDP extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and creates a game board decorative board 3053. Further, one screen (one frame) of drawing data to be displayed on the door frame side decorative substrate 233 is generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation processing, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or the peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source built-in VDP extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM, and controls the built-in sound source to control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program copies the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the externally attached peripheral control RAM to a backup first area and a backup second area, respectively, and backs up the contents. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM externally attached to the peripheral control MPU are copied and backed up in a backup first area and a backup second area, respectively.

  Subsequent to step S1034, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting the value to 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit regular processing”.

  The peripheral control unit steady processing starts when the effect control program first sets the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1009, and then sets 1 ms in step S1010. .., And step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, a value of 0 is set in the regular processing flag SP-FLG as the completion of execution of the peripheral control unit regular processing. To complete. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted is input from the VDP with a built-in sound source. The value 1 is set in the later-described peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board-side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. Is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

  Next, the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be accepted as shown in FIG. 61 is input from the sound source built-in VDP of the effect display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed at the moment will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

  If it is determined in step S1045 that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not the value 0 (it is the value 1), that is, if the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, the routine ends. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG has the value 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady state processing is not executed.

  Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 60 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 times as shown in FIG. S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer starting process in the 1ms interrupt timer starting process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board-side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. Is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, and then the next peripheral control unit steady processing is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. More specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs first, and the second,..., And 32nd 1 ms timer interrupts are sequentially performed. Will occur.

  If the number of executions of the 1 ms timer interrupt STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, if the 1st timer interrupt of the 33rd time occurs and the 1 ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit is started, this routine is ended as it is. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is set to the peripheral control unit V Although set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the first occurrence of the 1 ms timer interrupt is started. ing.

  On the other hand, if the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding a value of 1 to the number of times of execution of the 1 ms timer interrupt STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit normal process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing of this routine is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid driving process, the pointer data is used to store the electric drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU and the peripheral control RAM. In accordance with the drive data instructed, while driving an electric drive source such as various motors and solenoids, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed, Update the pointer.

  Subsequent to step S1104, a movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 have been input, so that the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, the original position history information , Movable position history information, etc.) and set them in the peripheral control RAM. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM, the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable members provided on the game board 5 can be obtained.

  Subsequent to step S1106, effect operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in effect operation unit 220 are input, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation The operation history information of the button 220C is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. The operation presence / absence of the operation button 220C can be obtained from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM.

  Subsequent to step S1108, a drawing state information acquisition process is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, the history information of the LOCKN signal output from the door frame side effect receiver IC of the door frame side decorative board 233 is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side presentation receiver IC SDIC0 of the door frame side decoration board 233 from the door frame side presentation transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined, it is a signal output to convey that effect.

  Subsequent to step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup processing, the content stored in the peripheral control RAM is copied and backed up in a backup first area and a backup second area, respectively, and the content stored in the peripheral control SRAM is copied into the backup first area. The data is copied and backed up in one area and a backup second area, respectively.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. are doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt will After the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt is performed. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. In other words, consistency between the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the progress state of the effect.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly varies depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233, and the peripheral control MPU and the sound source built-in VDP are mounted. Also in the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may slightly change. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the section V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even when the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb a time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[3-4. Effect display control section]
Next, the effect display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244 on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but a display as a microprocessor is omitted. A control MPU, a display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands and various data, a VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) for displaying and controlling the effect display device 1600 and the precision effect display device 244, and an effect display device 1600 An image ROM for storing various data of a screen displayed on the sub-effect display device 3114 and the upper-effect display device 244; and an image RAM for transferring and copying various data stored in the image ROM. Have.

  The display control MPU includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like. The rendering control of the effect display device 3114 and the upper plate effect display device 244 is performed. If the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. The display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs an interrupt process when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM includes, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be rendered on the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper effect display device 244, control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 and A plurality of corresponding schedule data, non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command), and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines a screen configuration in a time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper effect display device 244. ing. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured such that when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM, the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order is arranged in chronological order. The non-resident area transfer data includes screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600, the sub-effect display device 3114 and the upper effect display device 244 in accordance with the progress of the schedule data, in advance, from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM. Are defined in the order of transfer.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to the VDP. As described above, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in chronological order in the schedule data one by one from the display control ROM from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and outputs the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect. The drawing data to be displayed on the display device 244 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper effect display device 244. In addition, when the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, or the upper effect display device 244 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. . The VDP adopts a line buffer method. This “line buffer method” means that one line of drawing data for drawing the left and right directions of the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper effect display device 244 is held in a line buffer, and is held in this line buffer. In this method, the rendering data for one line is output to the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper effect display device 244.

  An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper effect display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored. 1600, the speed of drawing on the sub effect display device 3114 or the upper effect display device 244. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is base data which is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in a compressed state in the image ROM.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600 and the upper effect display device 244. For example, when various characters (characters) are displayed on the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, or the upper effect display device 244, data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". Accordingly, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper effect display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting a background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set in a position arranged on the screen and a vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite overlapping order”), and the effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3114 are set. Or on the upper plate effect display device 244.

  In addition, the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular regions each having 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character. In the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of six sprite characters arranged in a horizontal 2 × vertical 3 or the like are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be represented using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The effect display device 1600, the sub-effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244 are configured to sequentially set the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right as viewed from the front thereof. , And sub-scanning which repeatedly performs main scanning in a direction intersecting with the one direction. When the rendering data for one line output from the rendering display control unit 1512 is input, the rendering display device 1600, the sub rendering display device 3114, and the upper rendering rendering device 244 receive the rendering display device 1600 as a main scan. When viewed from the front of the display device 3114 or the upper plate effect display device 244, the image is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244 shift to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, drawing data for the next line is input. Then, based on the drawing data for the next line, the main display is performed as a main scan, from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244. Output to each pixel.

[4. Game content]
Next, the contents of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 10, 16 and 17. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player rotating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 arranged at the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3. Is struck between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a to start the game with the game ball. The game ball hit into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the hitting strength. Note that the driving strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and the more the ball is rotated clockwise, the stronger it can be hit. That is, game balls can be hit at 0.6 second intervals.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and the game ball is inserted into the obstacle nail. By the contact, the flowing speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. In addition, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nails, a windmill (not shown) which is rotated by the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role 2500 to the left in front view from the highest portion, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) , And flows down the area on the left side of the center role 2500. Then, when a game ball flowing down the left area of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center role 2500, the game ball passes through the warp passage 2521. It is supplied to a stage 2530 through a guide path 2523 from a warp outlet 2522 opened in the frame of 2500.

  The game ball supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and the center guiding portion 2531 at the center in the left-right direction or the side guiding portions 2532 at the left and right thereof. Is emitted backward from any of the above. When the game ball is released from the central guiding portion 2531 of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, the game released from the central guiding portion 2531 because the central guiding portion 2531 is located immediately above the first starting port 2002. The ball is accepted in the first starting port 2002 with a high probability. When game balls are received in the first opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from the side guiding portion 2532 into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. There is a possibility that the game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the first big winning port 2005 in the open state, or the like.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed to the left side of the center role 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved to the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2302 of the upper side unit 2300, and the general winning opening of the lower side unit 2200 There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the first starting port 2001 or the like. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  On the other hand, the game ball hit into the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters on the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center role 2500 (struck). ), And enters the upper right circulation space 2541 of the right hitting game area 2540. Although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in the upper right circulation space 2541, and a game ball abuts on the obstacle nail and circulates while changing its flowing direction in various ways. In the upper right circulation space 3541, a gate portion 2003 is provided at an upper portion, and a general winning opening 2001 and a second starting port 2004 which is normally closed by a second starting port door member 2549 are provided at a lower portion.

  The game ball flowing down in the upper right circulation space 2541 enters the lower right circulation space 2543 through the right flow passage 2542 on the downstream side. The game ball that has entered the lower right circulation space 2543 is a second upper winning opening that closes a second upper winning opening 2006a and a second lower winning opening 2006b arranged side by side as a second winning opening 2006. The upper surface of the door member 2552 and the second lower winning opening door member 2555 pass through the second attacker passage 2543a forming the bottom surface, and from the left end of the lower left emission plate portion 2559 in front view into the game area 5a. Released. The downstream end (discharge plate portion 2559) of the second attacker passage 2543a is opened so that the game ball is directed to the first big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100, and when the first big winning opening 2005 is in the open state. When the game ball is released from the second attacker passage 2543a into the game area 5a, the game ball is received in the first winning port 2005 with a high probability.

  The game balls flowing through the right flow passage 2542 and the lower right flow space 2543 flow down while the increase in the flow speed is suppressed by the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546. In rare cases, in the lower right circulation space 2543, the game ball may enter the discharge passage 2543b branched near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a. It is discharged out of the game board 5 from the second out port 2543c without being returned inside.

  When a game ball hitting right and entering the upper right circulation space 2541 passes through the gate unit 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, the ordinary random number updated in a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310 , One ordinary random number is acquired, and the acquired ordinary random number is compared with a predetermined ordinary hit determination table to perform an ordinary lottery. If the result of the normal lottery becomes “normal hit” when the time-saving control described later is not executed, the second starting port door member 2549 rotates once in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front and the second starting port. 2004 is opened, and game balls can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when the time reduction control is executed, the lottery is performed to determine which of the “normal hit”, “second normal hit”, “second normal hit”, and “third normal hit” in the normal lottery. Then, if the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is any of “first normal hit”, “second normal hit”, or “third normal hit” when the time saving control is executed, the second start-up door member 2549 is activated. After turning in the counterclockwise direction to open the second starting port 2004 in a front view, a state in which game balls can be received in the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period is set, and then the front view is performed. A predetermined number of times of opening / closing control (5 in this example) in which the second starting port 2004 is closed by rotating in the counterclockwise direction to make it impossible to receive game balls in the second starting port 2004. Times). When the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is “first normal hit”, “0.3 seconds” is set as each of the five times in which the second starting port 2004 is in a state in which game balls can be accepted. , "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", and when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "second normal hit" “0.3 seconds”, “0.28 seconds”, “1.1 seconds”, and “0.28 seconds” as five periods during which the second starting port 2004 is ready to accept game balls. , "0.3 seconds", and when the ordinary lottery result of the ordinary lottery is "third ordinary hit", the second starting port 2004 is set to a state in which game balls can be received. The periods are “0.3 seconds”, “0.28 seconds”, “0.3 seconds”, “0.28 seconds”, “1.1 seconds”, and “second normal hit” and “third normal”. Ri "In advantageous to the player than the" first normal per "has become a (acceptance of game balls to the second start-up port 2004 is easy) Atari. When a game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. You.

  In the present embodiment, in the variation display of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the passing of the game ball through the gate section 2003, the ordinary symbol is displayed after the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started. A certain amount of time is set before the stop display (until the normal lottery result is suggested) (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). In the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door member 2549 is rotated to be in an open state after a lapse of the normal fluctuation time. During execution of the time-saving control described later, control for reducing the normal fluctuation time is executed as compared with the normal time (a state in which the time-saving control is not executed). In addition, the opening time during which the second starting port door member 2549 is rotated to open the second starting port 2004 may be changed according to the gaming state. For example, time saving control is executed. When there is no time saving control, the opening time of the second start port 2004 may be changed to a longer time than when the time saving control is executed.

  In addition, during the period from when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 to when the normal symbol fluctuated and displayed on the normal symbol display is stopped (until the normal lottery result is suggested), a new game ball is added to the gate unit. After passing through 2003, since the normal symbol display cannot start a new variable display of the normal symbol, the start of the variable display of the normal symbol is continued until the previous variable display of the normal symbol is completed (the normal lottery result is displayed). (Until the suggestion ends). Specifically, the ordinary random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball passing through the gate unit 2003 by the gate sensor 2547 is stored, and a state in which the variation display of the ordinary symbol can be started. Until the start of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is held until. Note that the number of ordinary random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is up to four, and for more than that, even if a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, it is discarded without being retained. . This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, the pachinko machine 1 is updated with a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310. By obtaining one first special random number from one special random number and comparing the obtained first special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit" , "Small hit", etc.), a lottery of the first special lottery result is performed. Then, based on the lottery result of the first special lottery, eight LEDs of the first special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined variation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the first special lottery result is obtained. (Indicating the first special symbol after the variable display of the first special symbol and then displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the first special lottery result) to indicate the first special lottery result to the player. In addition, the first special lottery result which is drawn by accepting the game ball in the first starting port 2002 includes “out”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “8R big hit”, and “10R big hit”. Yes, the acquired first special random number is compared with the jackpot determination table to determine which of these is the case. Further, after the jackpot game, a normal (low probability state: with a probability of about 1/395 in this example) Probability improvement control (high probability state (also called probable change state): in this example, the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/44) that improves the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) rather than the jackpot. Whether or not to execute the time-saving jackpot, and whether or not to execute the time-saving control (hour-saving state) for shortening the fluctuation time shorter than usual when at least the first special lottery result is unsuccessful. Or time reduction control Period to execute: a (time-reduction times special symbol (number of times of the change in the first special punching pattern and the second special symbol)), so that also is determined. Note that the winning probability of "small hit" is always constant regardless of the gaming state (about 1/300 in this example).

  Further, when the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated in the predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310 is selected. The second special random number is obtained, and the obtained second special random number is compared with a predetermined big hit determination table to obtain an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "small hit", etc. ) Is generated. Then, based on the lottery result of the second special lottery, the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined variation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the second special lottery result is obtained. (A stop symbol corresponding to the second special lottery result is displayed after variably displaying the second special symbol) to indicate to the player the second special lottery result. In addition, the second special lottery result, which is drawn by accepting a game ball in the second starting port 2004, includes “outside”, “2R big hit”, “4R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “6R big hit”, There are "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", and "16R jackpot", and the acquired second special random number is compared with the jackpot determination table to determine which of them is the normal random number. Low-probability state: Probability improvement control that increases the probability of winning a jackpot (winning probability) rather than winning by a probability of approximately 1/395 in this example (high-probability state (also called probable state): this example In this case, whether or not to win a jackpot with a probability of about 1/44) (whether or not a jackpot is a variable jackpot), and time-saving control for shortening the fluctuation time shorter than usual when at least the second special lottery result is out of order (Time saving ) To be executed (whether a time saving big hit or not) and a period for executing the time saving control (the number of time savings: a special symbol (the number of times the first special hit symbol and the second special symbol change)) are also determined. It has become.

  When the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving game balls into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state. After a lapse of a predetermined fluctuation time, the eight LEDs of the special symbol display (the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display) are displayed in a lighting manner according to the result of the special lottery, and thereafter, the first special winning opening Either 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 can receive game balls in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 while the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 is in the open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cause the game ball to be accepted. A predetermined number (for example, 11 when a game ball is received in the first winning port 2005, or 15 when a game ball is received in the second winning port 2006) from the payout device 830. The game ball is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the first and second special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are capable of accepting game balls, the first and second special winning openings 2005 and 2006 allow game balls to be received. The ball can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big hit”, the first big winning opening 2005 plays the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern of closing after the state becomes the acceptable open state is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is “4R jackpot”, “5R jackpot”, “6R jackpot”, “7R jackpot”, “8R jackpot”, “10R jackpot”, or “16R jackpot”, the first big win A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the opening of the game 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 in which game balls can be received, or the first special winning opening 2005 is predetermined. When either the number (for example, 7) of game balls is accepted or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted in the second special winning opening 2006, the condition is satisfied. A predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds) of repeating an opening / closing pattern (a single opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) for closing a game ball in an unacceptable state is repeated. For example, 4 rounds for “4R jackpot”, 5 rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 16 rounds for “16R jackpot” are repeated, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big hit” (the first big winning opening 2005 is a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds) In the meantime, in the opening / closing pattern in which the game ball is in an open state in which the game ball can be received and then closed, it is substantially difficult to make the game ball enter the first big winning opening 2005. On the other hand, the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is “4R jackpot”, “5R jackpot”, “6R jackpot”, “7R jackpot”, “8R jackpot”, “10R jackpot”, “16R jackpot” (A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 becomes an open state in which game balls can be received, or the first special winning opening 2005 Either a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls is accepted or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted in the second special winning opening 2006. When such a condition is satisfied, in the opening / closing pattern in which the game ball cannot be received in the closed state), it is easy to cause the game ball to enter the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006. If the special lottery result is “4R jackpot”, “5R jackpot”, “6R jackpot”, “7R jackpot”, “8R jackpot”, “10R jackpot”, or “16R jackpot”, the above-mentioned first big prize A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 becomes an open state in which game balls can be received, or the first special winning opening 2005 is determined in advance. Either a certain number (for example, seven) of game balls is accepted or a predetermined number (for example, ten) of game balls is accepted in the second special winning opening 2006. Then, the number of rounds in which the opening / closing pattern in which the game balls are not allowed to be closed in the closed state may be set as a substantial special lottery result, and a predetermined number (for example, , 7) When either of the following conditions is satisfied: a game ball is accepted or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted into the second special winning opening 2006, the game ball cannot be closed. The opening / closing pattern to be set and the opening / closing pattern to be executed when the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big hit” (the first large winning opening 2005 has a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds) During this period), a plurality of rounds including an opening / closing pattern of opening and closing the game ball after the game ball can be received may be provided. For example, a special lottery result “8R big hit with 4Rs” is provided, and a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls is accepted in the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening is set. If a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted to 2006 or any one of the conditions is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern of closing the game balls in an unacceptable closed state is repeated four times. The opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds) during the first big winning opening 2005) An opening / closing pattern in which the game ball is opened and closed after the game ball can be received may be repeated four times.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, the second special winning opening 2006 is composed of a second upper special winning opening 2006a and a second lower special winning opening 2006b arranged side by side, and the second special winning opening 2006 is used. In the case of the "big hit", for example, in the first round (1R), the second upper winning prize opening 2006a is opened so that the game ball can be accepted, and the ball is closed by satisfying the condition that the game ball cannot be accepted, and then the game can be accepted next. Until this time (during the interval), the second round (the second round) in which the second lower winning opening 2006b is opened and game balls can be accepted is started, and when the second lower winning opening 2006b becomes unacceptable, In the meantime, since the interval period has elapsed, the second upper winning opening 2006a is opened again so that game balls can be accepted. Then, the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b are alternately opened and closed until a predetermined number of rounds are consumed. Thus, in the second attacker passage 2543a, during the "big hit", either the second upper special winning opening 2006a or the second lower special winning opening 2006b is in a state in which a game ball can be received. When a game ball is distributed in the second attacker passage 2543a by right-handing, the game ball is always accepted in the second big winning opening 2006, so that the player can entertain the player without losing the game ball. Can be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, for some of the above-described types of jackpots, whether to execute the above-mentioned time-saving control after the end of the jackpot game is made different depending on the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning. For example, when the first special lottery result is an 8R normal big hit in which the probability improvement control is not executed after the big hit game in the non-time saving state (a state where the time saving control is not executed), the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the first special lottery result is the 8R normal big hit in the time saving state (a state in which the time saving control is executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. When the second special lottery result is a 2R normal big hit in which the probability improvement control is not executed after the big hit game in the non-time saving state (a state where the time saving control is not executed), the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal big hit in the time saving state (a state in which the time saving control is executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. In a low probability non-time saving state (a state in which both the probability improvement control and the time reduction control are not executed: also referred to as a normal state), the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game. If it is a 2R probability change big hit, the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, in the state where the probability improvement control is being executed or the time saving control is being executed, that is, in a state other than the normal state, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game. If it is a big hit, the time saving control is executed after the big hit game.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display executed by the first special symbol display when the game ball is received into the first starting port 2002 and the game ball is received into the second starting port 2004 are displayed. The variable display of the second special symbol executed by the second special symbol display is not executed at the same time, and only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the first special symbol which is fluctuated and displayed on the first special symbol display by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002 is stopped and displayed (until the first special lottery result is suggested), and Until the second special symbol displayed fluctuated on the second special symbol display is stopped and displayed by the reception of the game ball into the second starting port 2004 (until the second special lottery result is suggested), the first start is performed. When a new game ball is received in the mouth 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display starts to newly display the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Since it is not possible to change the display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) until the change display of the previous special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) ends (first special lottery Until the results and suggestions for the second special lottery result are completed. ) Is set to be pending. Specifically, the first special opening random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received in the first starting opening 2002 by the first starting opening sensor 2104, and the second starting opening sensor 2551 And the second special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball accepted by the second starting port 2004 by the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol). The change display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until the variable display of symbols can be started. Note that the number of retained first special random numbers and second special random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is up to four each, and for more than four games, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 Even if the ball is accepted, it is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations. The first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310 are digested with priority given to the second special random number. That is, regardless of the timing at which game balls are accepted into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, if the second special random number is stored and the start of the variation display of the second special symbol is suspended, the first special random number is stored. The variable display of the second special symbol is executed prior to the symbol.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) and the effect display device 1600 (the sub effect display device 3114 may also be used). The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly turning on and off the eight LEDs constituting the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) for a predetermined time. It blinks, and then stops in a predetermined lighting mode, and the combination of the LEDs that are lit at the time of the stop indicates the special lottery result.

  On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control substrate 1510 based on a control signal (fluctuation pattern command, determination result notification command, etc.) from the main control substrate 1310, and suggests a special lottery result by the effect image. Is performed. Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, each decoration is displayed in a state in which a series of decorative symbol rows including a plurality of different symbols are displayed in a plurality of columns (for example, three rows of a left decorative symbol, a middle decorative symbol, and a right decorative symbol). Variation display of the symbol sequence is started, and thereafter, it is stopped and displayed sequentially (in this example, the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in this order), and finally all the decorative symbol columns are stopped and displayed. Then, the lottery result of the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed is suggested to the player side. In other words, a plurality of decorative symbol rows change according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) acquired at the time of the start winning prize occurrence. After being displayed, an effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to indicate the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) is displayed. The decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is larger than the first special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display. For easy viewing, the player generally pays attention to the decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (the blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the symbol image fluctuates and the final image is displayed). (The time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a shorter time.

  In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for indicating the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the decorative body of the center role item 2500, By appropriately using the decoration unit 3050, the underside rear movable production unit 3100, the back upper left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back upper middle movable production unit 3400, and the back lower front movable production unit 3500, etc. It is possible to perform a luminous effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like, so that the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[5. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, processing executed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. Specifically, a system / user reset process executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, and a timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined cycle (4 ms in the present embodiment) by a timer started in the system / user reset process. explain.

[5-1. Initialization process]
FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the initialization processing of the main control board in the embodiment of the present invention.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes a main control program to perform an initialization process. When the initialization process is started, first, the main control MPU 1311 sets the protection of the RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes the RAM 1312 writable (step S10). Specifically, "00H" indicating write permission is output to the RAM protect register.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates a built-in watchdog timer (step S12). Specifically, first, “03H” indicating the mode setting is written into the watchdog timer control register, and “03H” indicating the activation of the watchdog timer is written. Further, the watchdog timer is cleared and reset (step S14).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether a predetermined wait time has elapsed (step S16). Since the voltage does not rise immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on until it reaches a predetermined voltage, a power failure monitoring circuit is provided when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on to when the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage. , A power failure notice signal is input. In the wait process, a predetermined monitoring wait value is set, and the process waits for a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds) while activating the watchdog timer.

  If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18), since the time required for starting the sub-board (such as the peripheral control board 1510) has elapsed. . If the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the work ratio calculation work area (the work ratio calculation area 13128) out of the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is deleted (step S30). ), And proceed to step S24. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch has not been operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set (step S20). The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut down through normal processing, such as when a power failure occurs (see step S56 in FIG. 22).

  As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect. Therefore, the data backed up in the work area (other than the area 13128 for calculating the accessory ratio) is deleted (step S12). S30), and proceed to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power-off is used in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

  As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may not be correct. The portion other than the accessory ratio calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct. Proceed to.

  Then, it is determined whether the work area for calculating the ratio of the accessory (the area 13128 for calculating the ratio of the agent) is normal using the check code (step S24). If it is determined that the data is abnormal, the data stored in the work area ratio calculation work area is deleted because the data in the work area ratio calculation work area may be incorrect (step S26).

  When one or a plurality of backup areas are provided in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, first, the main area is determined using a check code, and if it is determined that the main area is abnormal, the backup area 1 , 2, and N, and the data in the backup area that is determined to be normal first may be copied to the main area. Thereafter, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is. When it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

  Regarding the accessory ratio calculating area, the data of the accessory ratio calculating area 13128 may be deleted every predetermined time, separately from the determination result of the check code when the power is turned on. In addition, for each predetermined operation amount (for example, for each predetermined number of launch balls, for each predetermined number of winning balls, for each predetermined number of special symbol variation display games, for each of the predetermined number of special symbol variation display games, etc.) The data in the ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is different for each data type (the game control data 13132 and the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136). Erase on condition. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed-up game control data 13132 is deleted, but the backed-up property ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not deleted. When the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 can be deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, the accessory ratio calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be deleted at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, the backed-up ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch, thereby preventing the deletion of the ratio-calculated / display data 13136 by operation of a game room attendant. In addition, it is possible to prevent concealment of an abnormal state of the accessory ratio. For this reason, it is possible to easily detect a gaming machine that has been remodeled to a state where the accessory ratio is high or low.

  When the power recovery setting of the RAM work area or the RAM initialization processing is executed, the main control MPU 1311 performs an initial setting for setting in various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) (step S28). In the initial setting of the main control MPU 1311, first, an initial setting of CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) is performed, and an interrupt is permitted. Further, the serial communication port and the test signal output port are initialized. Start the hardware random number generation circuit. Then, the serial communication circuit 13114 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, the payout control board 951, and the accessory ratio display 1317 is set. Furthermore, after the operation of the serial communication circuit 13114 starts, the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is initialized.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a process of setting a power-on command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S32). In the power-on command creation process, game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. To generate a power-on command, a power-on state reference command is set as reference command data, and command addition data corresponding to the generated command is added.

  The power-on command includes a power-on state buffer command and a special symbol / electric accessory operation number command. The power-on state buffer command is a command for notifying a gaming state at the time of return after power-off, and notifies a winning probability of a special lottery and an operation mode of a normal electric accessory. On the other hand, the special symbol / electric accessory operation number command notifies the execution status of the special symbol change display.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 permits execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing (step S34). The initial setting of the pachinko machine 1 is completed by the processing from turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 to step S34 (initial setting means).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure notice signal (step S36), and determines whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S38). If the power failure notice signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is "No"), that is, a random number update process is executed (step S40). In the random number updating process in step S46, a random number other than the random number for performing the winning determination mainly in the special lottery or the normal lottery is updated. The random number updating process for making a winning determination in a special lottery or a normal lottery is executed by a timer interrupt process described later. The processes from step S36 to step S40 are executed until a power failure notice signal is detected, and these processes are set as main control-side main processes (normal means after initial setting).

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is detected (the result of step S38 is “Yes”), the main control MPU 1311 executes a power failure process (power failure setting means). In the power-off process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the power failure occurred is executed. Specifically, first, execution of the interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42). As a result, timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, and writing to the main control built-in RAM 1312 can be prevented, and rewriting of game information can be protected. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (Step S44). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is set to the solenoid / power failure clear / ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared. For example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce the power consumption until the main board-side power-off processing ends, and to reliably complete the main board-side power-off processing.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held (Step S46). Further, the calculation result of the checksum is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 1312 (step S48). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal.

  Subsequently, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the work area for calculating the ratio of the accessory (the area for calculating the ratio of the agent 13128) (step S50). If the check code is a fixed value, there is no need to calculate the check code in step S50. The check code may be calculated and stored each time data is updated in the accessory ratio calculation / display processing, instead of the main board power-off processing.

  Subsequently, the calculated check code (or a predetermined value used as the check code) is stored in a predetermined area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S52).

  Subsequently, the data of the main area of the work for calculating the ratio of the bonuses (the region 13128 for calculating the ratio of the bonuses) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be appropriately performed (for example, each time data is updated) in the accessory ratio calculation and display process, instead of the main-board-side power-off process.

  By storing the data used for calculating the accessory ratio in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for calculating the accessory ratio is retained even when the power is turned off. In addition, it is possible to calculate the accessory ratio in long-term operation.

  Further, a value indicating that backup has been normally performed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S56). Thereby, the storage of the game backup information is completed. Finally, writing "01H" indicating write prohibition to the RAM protect register prohibits writing to the RAM 1312 (step S58), and waits until recovery from power failure (infinite loop).

[5-2. Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (4 ms in the present embodiment) set in the initialization process shown in FIGS. FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the timer interrupt process.

  When the timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 executes the main control program, first sets 1 to RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word, and switches the register (step S70). The main control board 1310 in this embodiment has a bank 0 and a bank 1, and is used by switching each time a timer interrupt process is executed.

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (Step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. More specifically, detection signals from various sensors for detecting game balls entering a winning opening such as a general winning opening, detection signals from a magnetic detection switch 3024 for detecting a fraud using a magnet, award ball control processing The payout control board 951 reads the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 indicating that the payout control board 951 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the step S1, and stores it as input information in the input information storage area. In the switch input processing, detection signals from the ejected sphere sensor 3060 and the fired sphere sensor 1020 are read, and the number of out spheres is counted.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs a timer update process (Step S76). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 is turned on in accordance with the variable display pattern determined in the later-described special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the normal symbol and the normal determined in the ordinary electric accessory control process In addition to the time during which the ordinary symbol display 1189 is turned on in accordance with the symbol variation display pattern, a payer ACK signal for notifying that the various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) has been normally received by the payout control board 951 is provided. When determining whether or not an ACK signal has been input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption cycle is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction processing is performed, the fluctuation time is reduced by 4 ms. When the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is accurately measured.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a random number update process 1 (Step S78). In the random number updating process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for initial value determination for the jackpot symbol and the small hit, which are updated in the non-hit number random number update processing in step S40 in the system / user reset processing (main control side main processing) shown in the figure. The random number for symbol initial value determination is also updated.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a prize ball control process (step S80). In the prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and the number is written to the main control built-in RAM 1312. Also, based on the calculation result of the number of award balls, a self-check for creating award ball commands for paying out game balls or checking a connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is performed. Or create a command. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created award ball command and the self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as a game value to an area corresponding to the current game state, and calculates the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. (See FIG. 26) is updated (step S81). If there is no prize ball to be paid out in step S80, the processing in step S81 can be skipped, and the load on the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a frame command receiving process (Step S82). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error canceling navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release notification command based on a detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command receiving process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to that effect is transmitted to the payout control board 951 and stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312 as output information. Further, the main control MPU 1311 shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame state display command, an error release notification command, and the like), and transmits the above-described transmission information as transmission information. The information is stored in the information storage area. In the prize ball discharge processing, the number of prize ball discharges is recorded in a storage area (see FIG. 27) defined by the gaming state of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128.

  The accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S81) may be executed in any order after the winning ball control process (step S80) and before the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S89). .

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs a fraud detection process (step S84). In the fraud detection processing, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the count switch detects that a game ball has entered the special winning opening 2005 or 2006 when the jackpot is not in the gaming state, the main control program is executed. Creates a prize abnormal display command which is classified into an alert display as an abnormal state and stores it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, it is determined whether or not the random number for the big hit matches the hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. Further, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability variation state based on the big hit symbol random number value. Then, when the certainty change condition is satisfied, the game state is shifted to the probability change state, and when the certainty change condition is not satisfied, the game state is shifted to a game state other than the certainty change state. Here, the “probability variation state” refers to a state (high-probability state) in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state (low-probability state).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S88). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal has been input to the input terminal, a normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted, and it is determined whether or not the random number matches a normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM ("" Ordinary lottery ”). Then, it is determined whether or not to open and close the second starting port door member 2549 according to the lottery result of the normal lottery. When the opening / closing operation is performed according to this determination, the second starting port door member 2549 is in an open (or enlarged) state, so that the starting port 2004 is in a game state in which game balls can be accepted, and a game advantageous to the player is provided. Transition to the state.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the display switch 1318 has been operated. If the display switch 1318 has been operated, the main object ratio calculation / display process (FIGS. 24 and 25) is called and The accessory ratio is calculated with reference to the number of award balls stored in the calculation area 13128. Then, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio indicator 1317 (step S89). In this way, by calling the accessory ratio calculation / display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the accessory ratio, the accessory ratio (the gambling of the pachinko machine 1) based on the latest data can be confirmed.

  Regardless of whether or not the display switch 1318 is operated, if the body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio may be displayed. . When the display switch 1318 is operated while the body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. Is also good. Since the display switch 1318 is provided on the back side of the game board, if the display switch 1318 is displayed, the main body frame 4 is normally open, and the progress of the game is stopped. As described above, when the role-portion ratio is calculated at the timing when the progress of the game is stopped, CPU resources are not consumed by division or subtraction for calculating the role-portion ratio during the game, and the load on the CPU can be reduced.

  Details of the accessory ratio calculation / display process will be described later with reference to FIGS. A specific example of the display method of the accessory ratio will be described later. Note that when the display switch 1318 is operated, all types of values (accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, cumulative total, total cumulative total) may be calculated, but are displayed each time the display switch 1318 is operated. May be calculated only. Also, the accessory ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and if the display switch 1318 is operated, the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317.

  In addition, even if the pachinko machine 1 detects a fraud and stops the game, it executes the accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S81) and the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S89). Regardless of whether or not fraud has been detected, by executing these processes, the ratio of the accessory and material can be confirmed even during fraud notification.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes an output data setting process (Step S90). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951, or the big hit game In this state, a drive signal is output to an attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) for opening and closing the opening and closing members 2107 of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the starting port (second starting port door member 2549), a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, and a normal symbol display information output Various signals related to games, such as signals, information on information output during working hours, and information on starting port winning information Broadcast and outputs a (game information) signal and security signals to the payout control board 951.

  In the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out-balls counted in the switch input process (step S74) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal plate 784 every predetermined number of out balls (eg, 10 balls).

  In the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a gaming state, a signal indicating a stop symbol of a normal symbol or a special symbol (information signal output means).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a peripheral control board command transmission process (Step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission processing, transmission information such as a command and data is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and the transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. In the transmission information, various commands created in the timer interrupt processing of this routine are stored. In the main circumference serial data, one packet is composed of three bytes. Specifically, the main serial data has a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value calculated by assuming the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to clear. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing ends, the timer interrupt processing ends, and the processing returns to the processing before the interruption.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation process of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the timer interrupt process. The calculation process of the physical ratio may be executed. In this case, the main control board 1310 may transmit a command for displaying the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or the payout control unit 952 may transmit the command to the peripheral control unit 1511. A command for displaying the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be transmitted.

[5-3. Calculating and Displaying the Ratio of Characters]
24 and 25 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the accessory ratio calculation / display process. The main control MPU 1311 executes the accessory ratio calculation / display process. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may execute the accessory ratio calculation / display processing. When the peripheral control unit 1511 calculates the accessory ratio, the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. For example, when the calculated accessory ratio is within a predetermined range (or outside the range), the effect in the game may be changed. Specifically, when the accessory ratio exceeds a predetermined threshold value (threshold value smaller than the reference value), the notice effect may be changed so that the notice effect is more interesting than the normal notice effect.

  First, a check code is calculated from the main area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 (step S140), and the calculated check code is compared with the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether they match (step S142). If the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the main area is normal. The object ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated and stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S156). More specifically, the ratio of the bonuses is calculated by the number of the acquired balls / the total number of the acquired balls, and the ratio of the continuous bonuses is calculated by the number of the consecutively acquired balls / the total number of the acquired balls. It is preferable to round off or round off the decimal portion (value after the decimal point) of the calculated bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio. Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

  In addition, in step S156, the updated value may be copied to the backup area every time the accessory ratio and / or the continuous accessory ratio of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is updated.

  When the number of bits in which the number of acquired balls is stored is large and the number of bits that can be calculated by the main control MPU 1311 is insufficient, in the calculation of the accessory ratio, the lower-order bits of the acquired number of balls are omitted and division is performed. May be calculated. For example, if the storage area of the number of acquired balls is 32 bits, a numerical value from 0 to 4,294,969,295 can be stored. However, if the main control MPU is an 8-bit processor and can perform 8- or 16-bit operations, the operation is performed by extracting the lower 16 bits from the most significant bit with a value of 1 out of the number of acquired balls stored in 32 bits. It is preferable to store the data in a register (16 bits) for division. When the number of acquired balls is equal to or less than the maximum value of the number of bits usable for calculation (32767 which is the maximum value of 16 bits), the lower 16 bits may be extracted and used for calculation.

  Further, when the total number of obtained balls is divided by 100 (rounded down to the nearest whole number) and used as the dividend (divided number) to calculate the accessory ratio, calculation with decimal numbers can be avoided.

  Further, the upper limit of the accessory ratio may be set to 99, and 99 may be set when the calculation result of the accessory ratio becomes 100 or more.

  On the other hand, if the calculated check code does not match the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the main area is abnormal, and the calculation of the accessory ratio from the data in the backup area 1 is performed. Try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 1 of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S144), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. Is determined (step S146). If the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, and the data in the backup area 1 is copied to the main area (step S148). ), An accessory ratio calculation process is executed to calculate an accessory ratio and a continuous accessory ratio from the data of the main area (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

  On the other hand, if the calculated check code does not match the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the backup area 1 is abnormal, and the calculation of the accessory ratio from the data in the backup area 2 is performed. Try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 2 of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S150), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. Is determined (step S152). If the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, and the data in the backup area 2 is copied to the main area (step S154). ), An accessory ratio calculation process is executed, the data in the main area is read out, and an accessory ratio and a continuous accessory ratio are calculated (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

  If there is another backup area, similarly, it is determined whether the data in the backup area is normal, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated from the data in the normal backup area.

  If the data of the main area and all the backup areas are abnormal, the work area for calculating the accessory ratio (the area 13128 for calculating the accessory ratio) is initialized, and the abnormality is notified (step S158).

  Subsequently, a check code is calculated from the main area (step S160), and the calculated check code is stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S162). The reason why the check code is calculated in the accessory ratio calculation / display processing is that the power failure flag and the checksum are not calculated when the power is reset during the power-off processing on the main board side. The backed up data is initialized, but if the check code is calculated and stored periodically in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, even if the power of the pachinko machine is turned on again, the work area for the accessory ratio calculation This is because the data in the (accessory ratio calculation area 13128) can be left without being erased.

  Subsequently, 1 is added to the backup area distribution counter value to update the value (step S164), and it is determined whether the backup area distribution counter value is an odd number (step S166). If the backup area distribution counter value is an odd number, the data in the main area is copied to the backup area 1 (step S168). On the other hand, if the backup area distribution counter value is even, the data in the main area is copied to the backup area 2 (step S170). By allocating the duplication destination of the data in the main area according to the backup area allocation counter value and writing the data to only some of the backup areas, it is possible to prevent an abnormal value from being written to a plurality of backup areas.

  When three or more backup areas are provided, the backup area to which data is to be written may be allocated according to the remainder obtained by dividing the backup area allocation counter value by the number of backup areas.

  Subsequently, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio indicator 1317 (step S172). Specifically, using the type of the calculated accessory ratio and the calculated value, referring to a conversion table (not shown), data to be displayed in each digit of the accessory ratio display 1317 is acquired, The acquired data is sent to the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. For example, if the type of the accessory ratio is the accessory ratio (cumulative), A7 is displayed in the first two digits, and if the calculated accessory ratio is 66%, 66 is displayed in the lower two digits.

  In the accessory ratio calculation process (step S156) of the accessory ratio calculation / display process, data on the number of acquired balls is read from the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (that is, the work ratio calculation work area shown in FIG. 27). However, data cannot be written to the storage area related to the number of acquired balls in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. That is, as described later, when the processing of steps S156 and S172 is configured by a common program module, the common program module does not have the authority to write data to the storage area related to the number of acquired balls in the area 13128 for calculating the ratio of characters. The data can be written in the storage area of the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio.

  As described above, since the data for calculating the accessory ratio in the accessory ratio calculation / display process is copied to the backup area, when the normal power-off process is not executed due to an abnormal reset or the like. , Data for calculating the accessory ratio can be protected.

  Note that the processes in steps S156 and S172 are common regardless of the type of gaming machine, and may be configured with one or a plurality of common program modules. In this case, the process of determining whether the check code of the main area and the check code of the backup area are correct may be configured on the non-common side separately from the common program module. This is because the method of checking and backing up data differs for each model. However, if the method of checking and backing up data is shared among the models, it may be arranged in a common program module.

[6. Configuration of Storage Area]
Next, the arrangement of programs and data stored in the ROM 1313 will be described. FIG. 26A is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in the ROM 1313 and the RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

  In the ROM 1313, a game control code 13131, a game control data 13132, a debug (inspection function) code 13133, a debug (inspection function) data 13134, a character ratio calculation / display code 13135, and a character ratio calculation / display An area for storing the data 13136 is included. In the ROM 1313 of the present embodiment, a game control area (first storage area) for storing programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1 such as the game control code 13131 and the game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133 A debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) for storing programs and data used for outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1 such as debug (inspection function) data 13134 and the like And a bonus ratio calculation area (third storage area) for storing programs used for calculating the bonus ratio, such as the bonus ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the bonus ratio calculation / display data 13136. Is assigned.

  When a free area of 16 bytes or more (unused space) is provided between the last address of the game control data 13132 and the top address of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133, and displayed in a dump list format The game control area and the debug (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished from each other. Similarly, an empty area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more is provided between the last address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the first address of the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135. When displayed in a dump list format, the debug (inspection function) area and the accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished. The value stored in the free area may be a fixed value that is the same value, and may be set to a value different from the value set in the game area and the debug area or a value with a low frequency. Also, the value stored in the free area may be an instruction such as a No Operation code that the CPU does nothing. In this way, when displayed in the dump list format, the game control area, the debug (inspection function) area, and the accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished.

  Even if the debug (inspection function) area and the accessory ratio calculation area are not divided, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 are stored in a part of the debug area. Good. That is, it is only necessary that the game control area and the other areas are clearly distinguished. In this way, by clearly distinguishing the game control area from the other areas, the character ratio calculation area (the character ratio calculation / display code 13135, the character code 13135, and the like) which is processing not directly related to the control of the progress of the game. The ratio calculation / display data 13136) is arranged separately from the game control area to avoid a risk that a defect (bug or the like) in the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 affects the game control.

  Note that the debug (inspection function) area stores target programs and data that are not directly related to the game. For example, various functions used only when debugging the pachinko machine 1 other than the game control of the pachinko machine 1 A code 13133 for outputting a test signal is stored. The debugging (inspection function) code 13133 is a program for outputting a debugging (inspection function) signal. Further, in the accessory ratio calculation area, a program for calculating the accessory ratio, which is not directly related to the progress of the game, is stored.

  The game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. The game control code 13131 can be read and written to and from the RAM 1312 as appropriate, but the game control area 13126 used by the game control code 13131 can be read only from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured to be executable, and is configured to be unable to execute writing to the area. In this way, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game area that can be accessed only from the game control code 13131. The processing based on the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 can be unilaterally called and executed during execution of the game control code 13131, but the processing based on the debugging (inspection function) code 13131 can be performed. Cannot be called and executed. As a result, the independence of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 can be enhanced, so that even when the game control code 13131 is changed, the modification of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 can be minimized. .

  The character ratio calculation / display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 23), and is executed by the main control MPU 1311. The accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 is stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. As shown in the figure, the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area). In this way, by designing the character ratio calculation / display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in another area, the inspection of the character ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the game control code 13131 are performed. And the inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. Further, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 can be used in common by a plurality of models without depending on the model.

  FIG. 26B is a diagram showing details of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of data stored in the main area is stored, in addition to the main area in which the calculation result of the accessory ratio is stored. . One or more backup areas may be provided. A check code for detecting a data error is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, is set each time data in the main area is updated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, and the main control side power-off process (FIG. 22 may be set in steps S50 to S54). In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the main control-side power-off process (step S50 in FIG. 20). May be set. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code in the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. If a predetermined value is set in the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

  When the main area is determined to be abnormal, it is determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data of the backup area determined to be normal may be copied to the main area (step in FIG. 21). S24). Also, in the main control-side power-off process, the value of the main area may be copied to each backup area (Step S54 in FIG. 22). Further, in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, every time the value of the main area is updated, the updated data may be copied to the backup area (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

  An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be kept away, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digit of the address.

  FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The data of the number of obtained balls in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is written in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) at which the main control MPU 1311 times, and the accessory ratio calculation process of the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step in FIG. 24) It is read in S156). As described above, the accessory ratio calculation / display process reads the data of the number of acquired balls from the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, and the timer interrupt processing (game control program) stores the acquired ball number data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. Can be completely separated from the game control program and the program for executing the accessory ratio calculation / display process, and the gaming machine ratio calculation / display process can be shared by gaming machines having different specifications. .

  In the accessory ratio calculating process (step S156 in FIG. 24) of the accessory ratio calculating / displaying process, the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are converted into the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory in the accessory ratio calculating area 13128. Write to ratio storage area. The data of the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio is read out in the accessory ratio display process (step S170 in FIG. 25) of the accessory ratio calculation / display process when displaying the accessory ratio. The game control program does not access the storage area of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128.

  FIG. 27A shows the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (A), the number of obtained accessory balls, the number of consecutive accessory obtained balls, the total number of obtained balls, the accessory ratio, and the continuous accessory ratio are stored. The number of obtained ball is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a running character (for example, a large winning opening 2005, 2006 being opened, a second starting opening 2004 in which the second starting opening door member 2549 is being opened). is there. The number of continuous role-acquisition balls is the number of prize balls for winning a role in a role while the role is continuously operating (for example, a winning opening is open in a jackpot series). The total number of obtained balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player. The ratio of the bonuses can be calculated by dividing the number of the gained balls by the total number of the acquired balls. The continuous bonus ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of continuous bonus balls by the total number of acquired balls. The number of the obtained spheres, the number of the continuously obtained spheres, and the total number of the obtained balls are updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt processing, and the ratio of the special prize and the number of continuous heroes are calculated in step S91 of the timer interrupt processing. Is stored.

  In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (A), the number of obtained accessory balls, the number of consecutive obtained accessory balls, and the total number of obtained balls correspond to the total sum of FIG. It is a storage area of 4 bytes, and can store a numerical value up to 16777215 or 429767295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. The accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are 1-byte storage areas, and can store up to 255 decimal values.

  FIG. 27B shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. The structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27B stores the number of obtained balls, the number of obtained other balls, the number of obtained continuous balls, the total number of obtained balls, the ratio of the role and the ratio of the continuous role. Further, the storage area of each data is constituted by a ring buffer having n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (for example, n = 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls). When the number reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointers of all data move, and the storage area in which the data is updated changes. Then, after data of a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area, and stores the data in the first storage area. If data other than the total number of acquired balls (the number of officially acquired balls, the number of launched balls, the number of winning balls, the number of special symbol variation display games, the number of big hits in the special symbol variation display game) becomes a predetermined number, The write pointer may be moved.

  Note that the write pointer and the read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers of all data strings move every predetermined number of winning balls. The read pointer also moves with the movement of the write pointer. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is to calculate the accessory ratio using the latest data for 6000 prize balls.

  The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the accessory ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is a value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. When the ring buffer makes a round and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the accumulated value is calculated excluding the data of the cleared area. The total sum of each data is the total value of the data collected in the past, and the value of the total of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio calculated from the total value is the value calculated from the total value of each data Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the total cumulative value including the data of the cleared area is calculated.

  In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (B), the number of accessory acquisition balls, the number of consecutive accessory acquisition balls, the accessory ratio, and the continuous accessory ratio are the same as those described in FIG. 27 (A). The other number of acquired balls is the number of awarded balls due to winning a prize other than the accessory (a winning opening that does not open and close, for example, a general winning opening 2001). The total number of obtained balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player. When this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves. Regarding the number of the obtained ball, the number of the obtained other balls, the number of the continuously obtained ball, and the total number of the obtained balls, the data in the storage area where the write pointer is located is updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt processing, and the ratio of the role and the number of the continuous The physical ratio is calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt processing.

  FIG. 27C shows a structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the work area structure shown in FIG. 27 (C), more detailed data can be acquired than that shown in FIG. 27 (B), and the number of ordinary electric accessory acquired balls, the number of special electric accessory acquired balls, and the number of starting opening acquired balls , The number of winning opening balls, the number of consecutive bonus balls, the total number of winning balls, the ratio of bonuses, and the ratio of consecutive bonuses. The storage area for each data is constituted by a ring buffer having n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total number of obtained balls is When the number reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer moves and the storage area in which data is updated changes. Then, after data of a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area, and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when the data other than the total number of acquired balls (the number of special electric accessory acquired balls, the number of launched balls, the number of winning balls, the number of special symbol variation display games, the number of big hits of the special symbol variation display game, etc.) becomes a predetermined number Then, the write pointer may be moved.

  The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the accessory ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is a value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer makes a round and is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the accumulated value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total sum of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, the cumulative value of the accessory ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer goes around Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the total cumulative value including the data of the cleared area is calculated.

  Among the work area structures shown in FIGS. 27 (B) and 27 (C), the number of obtained balls in the ring buffer, the number of obtained other balls, the number of obtained continuous balls, the total number of obtained balls, and the ordinary electric ball obtained balls The number, the number of special electric accessory-acquired balls, the number of acquired opening-port balls, and the number of winning port-acquired balls are each a 2-byte storage area, and can store values up to 65535 in decimal. Number of winning ball, other winning ball, number of consecutive winning ball, total number of winning ball, number of ordinary motorized playing ball, number of special motorized winning ball, number of starting opening ball and other winning opening ball The total number is a storage area of 3 bytes each, and can store a numerical value up to 16777215 in decimal. Since the total is the sum of data of 6000 prize balls × n (60,000 prize balls when n = 10), a large storage area is prepared. The number of acquired balls, the number of acquired other balls, the number of consecutive acquired balls, the total number of acquired balls, the ratio of actors, the ratio of consecutive characters, the number of ordinary electric accessory acquired balls, the number of special electric accessory acquired balls, the starting opening The total number of acquired balls and the number of other winning opening acquired balls is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store a numerical value up to 16777215 or 4294767295 in decimal. Since the total total is not erased unless an error occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. Each of the total and the total of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio is a storage area of 1 byte, and can store a numerical value up to 255 in decimal.

  In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27C, the total number of acquired balls, the ratio of the accessory, and the ratio of the continuous accessory are the same as those described in FIG. 27B. The other number of acquired balls is the number of awarded balls due to winning a prize other than the accessory (a winning opening that does not open and close). The number of ordinary electric accessory-acquired balls is the prize ball acquired by winning a prize to the operating ordinary electric auditors (the second starting port 2004 in which the second starting port door member 2549 is open) based on the result of the lottery by the normal symbol. Is a number. The special electric auditors product acquisition ball count is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a special electric auditors (eg, open large winning openings 2005 and 2006) that are operating according to the result of the lottery by the special symbol. The starting opening ball count is the number of prize balls obtained by winning the starting opening (first starting opening 2002). The other number of winning opening balls is the number of winning balls obtained by winning a winning opening (general winning opening 2001) which is not an accessory (does not operate) and does not trigger a special symbol lottery. The number of ordinary electric accessory acquired balls, the number of special electric accessory acquired balls, the number of acquired start opening balls, the number of other winning opening acquired balls, the number of continuous accessory acquired balls, and the total number of acquired balls are determined in step S81 of the timer interrupt processing. The data in the storage area where the write pointer is located is updated, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

  In the data structure shown in FIG. 27A, when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is deleted in step S116 of the initialization process. The data is not erased by the trigger. For this reason, the data of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Similarly, the total sum of FIGS. 25B and 25C may be deleted every predetermined period.

  In addition, the data of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 and the calculated accessory ratio are abnormal values (for example, the accessory ratio exceeds 100%, and the calculation result of the accessory ratio has greatly changed from the previous calculated value. If the number of acquired balls> the total number of acquired balls), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted. In addition, when the data of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that the attribute is abnormal. Alternatively, the data in the backup area may be inspected using the check code, the data in the normal backup area may be copied to the main area, and then the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[7. Configuration of Character Ratio Display]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the configuration of the accessory ratio display 1317.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 includes a driver circuit 13171 and a plurality of 7-segment LEDs 13172. For example, the 7-segment LED 13172 has four digits.

  The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed in one package as a single unit, but both may be housed in another package.

  The driver circuit 13171 and the main control MPU 1311 are connected by three signal lines (DATA, LOAD, and CLOCK).

  The DATA line transfers data to be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 and a signal for setting the operation state of the accessory ratio indicator 1317, and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The LOAD line transfers a signal indicating a data fetch timing, and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The CLOCK line transfers a clock signal that defines an operation cycle of the driver circuit 13171, and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311.

  The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are connected by four digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 and eight segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp. The segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp transmit a signal for lighting each LED element (7 segments and decimal point) of the 7-segment LED 13172. The digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 transmit a control signal indicating which digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 the signal transmitted on the segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp is. Although the direction of the illustrated signal (current) differs depending on whether the 7-segment LED 13172 is an anode common type or a cathode common type, the example of the anode common type is illustrated.

  The R-EXT terminal of the driver circuit 13171 is connected to a resistor 13174 that determines a current value flowing through each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172. By changing the resistance value of the resistor 13174, the emission luminance of each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 can be changed.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a configuration of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317.

  The driver circuit 13171 includes a 16-bit shift register 3171, 16-bit data latch 3172, 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173A, 8 × 4 data selector 3174, decoder 3175, 2 × 8 data selector 3176, constant current driver 3178, driver 3179, It has a latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180, a digit-limit control unit 3181, a duty ratio control unit 3182, a data selector control unit 3183, a standby mode control unit 3184, and an oscillator 3185.

  The 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal, holds 16-bit data, and sends it to the 16-bit data latch 3172 as parallel data. The four bits D15 (MSB) to D12 are data for selecting an operation mode (see FIG. 35) of the driver circuit 13171, and the four bits D11 to D8 are data for selecting a register corresponding to the operation mode. (See FIG. 33), and D7 to D0 (LSB) are data of the detailed setting.

  The 16-bit data latch 3172 latches data at the timing of the LOAD signal, and switches D15 to D8 to each control unit (latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control unit 3181, duty ratio control unit 3182, data selector control). Unit 3183 and the standby mode control unit 3184), and D7 to D0 are sent to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, the 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal at the rising edge of the CLOCK signal and shifts the data. The 16-bit data latch 3172 acquires 16-bit data as parallel data from the 16-bit shift register 3171 at the rising timing of the LOAD signal, and latches the data. Then, D15 to D8 are sent to each control unit (latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control unit 3181, duty ratio control unit 3182, data selector control unit 3183, standby mode control unit 3184). The 16-bit data latch 3172 sends D7 to D0 among the latched data to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D at the falling timing of the LOAD signal.

  The LOAD signal is also input to the latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180. The latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180 acquires D15 to D8 and selects an 8-bit data latch 3173 that stores display data (8 bits of D7 to D0). Specifically, as shown in the load register selection table (see FIG. 33), if D15 to D8 are 00100010B, the latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180 outputs data register 0, that is, the 8-bit Digit-A. A signal for selecting 8-bit data latch 3173 is sent so that data latch 3173A stores the data.

  The 8-bit data latches 3173 are provided by the number of 7-segment LEDs 13172 (the number of display digits), and take in data to be displayed on each of the 7-segment LEDs according to the selection signal from the latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180. Hold. The 8-bit data latch 3173 sends the held data to the 8 × 4 data selector 3174.

  The 8 × 4 data selector 3174 selects the data sent from each of the 8-bit data latches 3173 A to 3173 D at a predetermined display timing of each digit, and sends the data to the decoder 3175 and the 2 × 8 data selector 3176.

  Decoder 3175 converts the input data into a character to be displayed on 7-segment LED 13172 using a character generator decode table (see FIG. 34), and generates data for lighting each segment. The generated data is input to the 2 × 8 data selector 3176.

  The 2 × 8 data selector 3176 refers to the decoding setting, selects data from the decoder 3175 when the mode is set to use the decoder, and selects the 8 × data when set to the mode not using the decoder. The data from the four data selector 3174 is selected. The selected data is input to the constant current driver 3178.

  The constant current driver 3178 outputs a current signal for lighting each segment from the data output terminals OUTa to OUTDp using the data from the 2 × 8 data selector 3176. As described above, the current output from the constant current driver 3178 is controlled by the resistance value of the resistor connected to the R-EXT terminal.

  Driver 3179 receives the sink current of the current output from constant current driver 3178 to light each segment of 7-segment LED 13172. By controlling the current sink timing of the terminals DIG-0 to DIG-3 by the driver 3179, which 7-segment LED (digit) is displayed is determined.

  The Digit-Limit control unit 3181 controls the number of display digits of the 7-segment LED 13172 controlled by the driver circuit 13171. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the number of lit digits from one to four digits by an external setting. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are 00100001B and D7 to D0 are XXX0011B, a setting is made such that all four digits are used in the digit register (DIGITREGISTER) of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181. Is written. Note that x indicates that the data may be either H or L, and whether the input data is H or L does not affect the truth table.

  The duty ratio control unit 3182 controls a duty ratio when the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the duty ratio by an external setting, and controls the brightness at which the 7-segment LED 13172 lights up. The duty ratio control unit 3182 controls the duty ratio by controlling the pulse width of at least one of the timing signals sent to the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179. Specifically, by setting D15 to D8 to 00100000B and inputting arbitrary data to D3 to D0, the duty register (DUTY REGISTER) of the duty ratio control unit 3182 stores the 16-step duty of 0/16 to 15/16. The ratio setting is written.

  The data selector control unit 3183 controls the setting of the decoder. That is, the driver circuit 13171 controls whether or not to use the decoder 3175 according to an external setting. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are 00100001B and D7 to D0 are 0001xxxB, the setting for using the decoder is written in the decode register, and D7 to D0 are set to 0000xx. By inputting XXB data, the setting of NO DECODER that does not use the decoder is written. The data selector control unit 3183 controls the 2 × 8 data selector 3176 to select the data from the decoder 3175 when the use of the decoder is set, and sets the 2 × 8 data selector 3176 when the use of the decoder is not used. The control is performed so that the × 8 data selector 3176 selects the data from the 8 × 4 data selector 3174.

  The standby mode control unit 3184 controls the setting of the standby mode and the setting of the data clear. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can shift to the standby mode by an external setting. Specifically, the standby mode can be set by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are 0100B and D3 to D0 are 0000B. In the standby mode, the current setting is maintained as it is, the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172 is cut off, and the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171 is suppressed.

  In addition, the driver circuit 13171 can clear all data held therein by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0001B, all data held in registers and latches are cleared and initialized.

  The oscillator 3185 generates a clock used in the driver circuit 13171.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a mounting example of the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration on the main control board 1310 is shown by a dotted line.

  FIG. 31A shows a main control board box 1320 of the mounting example 1. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 so as to be sealable in a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once closed, and has a model number indication of the main control board 1310 on its surface. (Such as sticking, engraving, printing, etc.) and an opening seal. The opening seal is a seal that records the history of opening the seal of the main control board 1310.

  The mounting example 1 shown in FIG. 31B shows a state where the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. In the mounting example 1, the main control MPU 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 may be mounted so that the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are the same.

  The main control board 1310 is enclosed in a main control board box 1320, and forms a main control unit 1300. The main control MPU 1311 is arranged at a position where it can be externally confirmed that inappropriate modification has not been performed. The main control MPU 1311 is arranged so that no components are arranged around the main control MPU 1311 so that it can be easily confirmed from the outside that inappropriate modification has not been performed.

  The accessory ratio indicator 1317 is arranged on the main control board 1310 at a position visible from the outside. The direction of the number displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 may be the same as the model number of the main control MPU 1311 or the model number of 1320 on the main control board box. Further, it is preferable that the mounting is performed such that the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio display 1317, the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310, and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are the same. When the main control board 1310 is mounted on a gaming machine in a horizontally long orientation, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 or the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 is the same as the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310. It is preferable to mount the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 in such a manner. When the main control board 1310 is mounted on a gaming machine in a vertically long orientation, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 or the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are 90 degrees. The accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 may be mounted so as to be oriented.

  Further, connectors CN1 and CN2 for leading out signal lines from the main control board 1310 have ends along the long side of the main control board 1310 (in the figure, upper long sides) in a direction in which the length is aligned with the accessory ratio indicator 1317. (It is an upper end along the side, but may be a lower end along the lower long side or an end along the left and right sides.) That is, it is desirable that the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged at positions where the wiring (harness) connected to the connectors CN1 and CN2 overlaps the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and does not hinder the visual recognition of the accessory ratio indicator 1317. .

  Further, the model number of the main control board box 1320 and the opening seal affixed to the main control board box 1320 are affixed to positions that do not overlap with either the main control MPU or the accessory ratio display 1317.

  By mounting the accessory ratio indicator 1317 in this manner, the model number display of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 is displayed in a correct direction, and the visibility thereof is improved. In the inspection after the installation, the ratio of the accessory and the presence or absence of the modification of the main control MPU 1311 can be confirmed without taking an excessive posture.

  In another implementation example shown in FIG. 31 (C), the model number of the main control MPU 1311 and the numeric display of the accessory ratio display 1317 are mounted in the same direction, but circuits other than the main control MPU 1311 are mounted. The direction of the model number display of the module (for example, IC) is different from the direction of the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the number display direction of the accessory ratio display 1317. Further, a circuit module other than the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged at a position overlapping with the model number indication of the main control board box 1320 or the unsealing sticker attached to the main control board box 1320. This is because circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 have a low significance in inspecting unauthorized modification, and therefore, it is not significant that the orientations arranged on the main control board 1310 are the same.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, a signal line 13173 between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be unstable due to noise. For this reason, it is desirable to arrange the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 as close as possible.

  For example, as illustrated, the distance between the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 (the length L2 of the wiring 13173) is determined by the distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 (the length of the wiring 13101). L1) It is arranged so as to be shorter. That is, L1 becomes larger than L2.

  Further, as described above, no parts are arranged around the main control MPU 1311 in order to easily confirm from the outside that improper remodeling has not been performed, as indicated by the dotted line. For this reason, the wiring length L1 becomes a certain length, but L2 is made as short as possible.

  Note that the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed in one package or another package, and in any case, L1 is larger than L2.

  FIG. 32B is a diagram showing a positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317 in another implementation example, and FIG. 32C is a diagram showing the positional relationship in the implementation example shown in FIG. It is sectional drawing of a printed circuit board.

  As shown in FIG. 32B, ground patterns 13102 are provided on both sides of a signal line 13101 between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. Further, on the printed circuit board, a prohibited area 13106 where no signal pattern is provided is provided on the back surface and the inner layer of the signal line 13101. A ground pattern 13107 or a power supply pattern as a guard pattern may be provided on at least one of the back surface and the inner layer of the printed circuit board in the prohibited area 13106.

  The arrangement of other signal lines in this implementation example will be described. For example, the signal line 13103 that supplies a clock signal from the oscillator to the main control MPU 1311 avoids the prohibited area 13106 (that is, the signal line 13103 and the signal line 13101 are connected to each other). (So that they do not intersect). Further, the signal line 13104 connected to the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged so as to pass through to the back surface or the inner layer through the through hole 13105. Also in this case, the signal line 13104 is arranged so as to avoid the prohibited area 13106 (that is, the signal line 13104 does not cross the signal line 13101).

  In addition, the main control board 1310 is generally formed of a two-layer board having a pattern on the front and back surfaces and not having an inner layer from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized remodeling. The present invention is also applicable to a multi-layer substrate having an inner layer (e.g., four or six layers).

  FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating a load register selection table of the driver circuit 13171.

  The load register selection table is a table for determining a register for storing data input to the driver circuit 13171.

  The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has seven registers. The duty register is used by the duty ratio control unit 3182 to set a duty ratio for lighting the 7-segment LED 13172. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100000B, the data set to D7 to D0 is data for setting the duty ratio, and is written to the duty register of the duty ratio control unit 3182.

  The decode register is used by the data selector control unit 3183 or the Digit-Limit control unit 3181, and sets the use of the decoder 3175, that is, the presence / absence of decoding and the number of display digits. The decode register and the digit number register may be configured as one register. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100001B, the data set to D7 to D0 is data for setting the presence or absence of decoding or data for setting the number of display digits. It is written to a register or a digit register of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181.

  The data register is used by the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D, and sets data to be displayed in each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100010B to 00100101B, the data set to D7 to D0 is data for lighting the 7-segment LED, and is written to the data registers in the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173A.

  The duty ratio, the presence / absence of decoding, and the number of display digits set in the registers described above do not have to be set each time the accessory ratio is displayed, and need only be set once. Is set as If the setting is performed only once in the initial setting, the setting may be changed due to the influence of noise or the like after the initial setting. Every time is pressed). As a result, even if the setting is switched due to noise, correct display can always be performed.

  FIG. 34 shows a character generator decode table. The character generator decode table is used by the decoder 3175 to convert input data into character data to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172. By using the character generator decode table, characters such as numbers and some alphabets can be displayed without considering the font. When displaying a number, D5 to D0 match the displayed number, so that the calculation result can be input to the driver circuit 13171 without conversion and displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172.

  The lighting of the decimal point of each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is controlled by D6.

  FIG. 35 is a state transition diagram of the driver circuit 13171, and FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating a display example of the accessory ratio display 1317.

  The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has five states: an initial state, a data input completed state, an LED lighting state (0000), an LED lighting state (lighting according to input data), and an LED lighting state (full lighting). Is prepared.

  To control these five states, there are blank, normal operation, register write, all lighting, and standby mode setting instructions. The blank command cuts off the output of the constant current driver 3178 and the output of the driver 3179. The normal operation command displays the 7-segment LED 13172 after each setting is completed. When a normal operation command is input without setting display data, the 7-segment LED 13172 displays the numeral 0 in all digits. The register write command sets the number of digits to be used, sets the duty ratio, sets whether the decoder is used or not, and inputs display data. A register to which data is to be written is selected in D11 to D8, and contents to be set in the register are input in D7 to D0 (see FIG. 33). The all lighting instruction turns on the output of the constant current driver 3178 on the data side and lights all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172. The standby instruction includes a standby instruction which is divided into two according to parameters and shifts to a standby state, and a clear instruction which shifts to an initial state. The standby command maintains the settings at that time, stops the operations of the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179, cuts off the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172, and suppresses the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171. The clear instruction clears and initializes all data held in the registers and latches, and turns off the display.

  In addition, since the blank command is also a kind of the display command, in this specification, the “display” includes any of the lighting of all of the 7-segment LED, the lighting of some of the segments, and the turning off of all the segments.

  With reference to FIG. 36, display examples in each state described above will be described.

  When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, since the initial setting of the driver circuit 13171 is not completed or the display data is not set, the game machine is in the initial state (ALL BLANK), and the 7-segment LED 13172 as shown in FIG. Are turned off. In addition, in the state where the main body frame 4 is closed and a game is possible, since the accessory ratio display 1317 cannot be visually recognized, it is preferable to set the standby mode and turn off the 7-segment LED 13172 to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine.

  After setting the control data in the various control registers in the driver circuit 13171 and completing the initial setting, when the display data is input, a predetermined display is performed on the 7-segment LED 13172. In this predetermined display, as shown in FIG. 36B, "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be turned on. It is preferable that the normal display of the accessory ratio display 1317 can be confirmed by the predetermined display.

  Further, when the main body frame 4 is opened, a predetermined display may be provided on all digits so that it can be confirmed that the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36B, "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be turned on.

  Then, when the display switch 1318 is operated and display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the LED is turned on (lighting according to the input data). More specifically, the display is in the accessory ratio display state, and a code indicating the display content is displayed in the left two digits of the 7-segment LED 13172, and a numeric value of the accessory ratio is displayed in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36C, “y175” is displayed, which indicates that the accessory ratio 1 is 75%. In addition, when the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value out of the specified range, it is preferable that a display for identifying the abnormal value is displayed. For example, all digits (or numbers) are displayed by blinking, or the decimal point is lit or blinked.

  When the display switch 1318 is further operated and display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the display content of the 7-segment LED 13172 is changed. That is, a different type of accessory ratio is displayed. Also in this case, the code indicating the display content is displayed in the left two digits, and the numerical value of the accessory ratio is displayed in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36D, “y263” is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 2 is 63%. In this case as well, a display may be provided to identify that the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range, as described above. A more specific display example of the accessory ratio will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the accessory ratio display 1317 is performed (FIG. 36E), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on. It is better to turn off the light and reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. The non-display ratio of the accessory is the same as that after the completion of the initial setting, but may be different or may be any mode that can be distinguished from the display of the ratio of the accessory.

  FIG. 36E is a display example in a case where the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 have an abnormality and the accessory ratio cannot be displayed. The decimal point may be lit or blinking, or may be displayed differently for each digit. In addition, the abnormal display may be in a mode different from that shown in the figure, and may be in a mode that can be distinguished from a normal accessory ratio display in order to indicate that the accessory ratio display is not possible.

  In addition, in any state, when a full lighting instruction is input, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are lit. When a blank command or a standby command is input in any state, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are turned off while retaining data. When a data clear command is input in any state, all data held in the registers and latches are cleared, all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are turned on, and the state returns to the initial state.

[8. Display of ratio of character]
Next, a method of calculating and displaying the accessory ratio will be described.

  As described above, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio indicator 1317 provided on the main control board 1310. As described above, the accessory ratio display 1317 includes, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED or an effect display device, displays the numeric value of the accessory ratio in the lower two digits, and displays the type of the numeric value in the upper two digits. Is displayed.

  Further, the accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by a 2-digit 7-segment LED. In this case, the numerical value of the accessory ratio and the type of the numerical value may be displayed alternately.

  The display mode of the numeric value of the accessory ratio may be displayed in a different display mode depending on the result of comparison between the accessory ratio and a predetermined reference value. For example, when the accessory ratio exceeds a predetermined reference value, the numerical value is displayed by blinking or changing the color (green in a normal state, red in a case of exceeding the reference). By changing the display mode according to the comparison result with the reference value, it is possible to easily recognize that the accessory ratio is abnormal.

  The accessory ratio indicator 1317 may be constituted by one or a plurality of LED lamps. When the accessory ratio display 1317 is configured by one LED lamp, the comparison result between the accessory ratio and a predetermined reference value is displayed in different modes. For example, green is displayed when the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, and red when the accessory ratio is larger than the reference value. When the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, the display is turned on, and when the accessory ratio is larger than the reference threshold, the display is blinking.

  When the accessory ratio display 1317 is configured by a plurality (for example, 10) of LED lamps, the accessory ratio is displayed with one LED lamp being 10%. For example, if the accessory ratio is 70% or more and less than 80%, seven LEDs are turned on. In this case, the display may be performed in different display modes (display colors) depending on the display contents (such as the ratio of the accessory and the ratio of the continuous accessory, whether the latest data is displayed or the medium-term data is displayed).

  When the total number of obtained balls is smaller than 6000, the collection period of the prize ball data is short, and the value of the accessory ratio may not converge. Therefore, the display is performed in a different display mode (display color, blinking, or the like). May be. It is desirable that the display mode when the total number of acquired balls is smaller than the threshold is different from the display mode when the total number of obtained balls exceeds the reference value.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 may switch and display the latest data display, the medium-term data display, and the long-term data display. The latest data display is the accessory ratio calculated using the immediately preceding counter value currently being written in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27B and 27C. The medium-term data display is the accessory ratio calculated using the cumulative total in the ring counters shown in FIGS. 27 (B) and 27 (C). The long-term data display is the accessory ratio calculated using the total total in the ring counter shown in FIGS.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 may be shared by the function display unit 1400. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the game situation based on a control signal from the main control board 1310. However, when a main frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the main frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the main display unit 1400 displays the game status. The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio. The display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, but the progress of the game may be continued. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, it is possible to quickly switch from the display of the accessory ratio to the display of the game state. For example, if the main frame 4 is opened during the special symbol change display game, the accessory ratio is displayed, but if the main frame 4 is closed before the change time elapses, the change display for the remaining time may be performed. it can. Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbol stops at the timing when the special symbol variable display on the function display unit 1400 stops. For this reason, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio, it can be configured so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 may display anything other than the accessory ratio. For example, the number of prizes per type of prize port per unit time or the number of paid prize balls may be displayed. The unit time may be switched and displayed by operating the display switch 1318, such as 1 minute, 10 minutes, 1 hour, and 10 hours.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 may display a base. The base is the normal payout rate excluding the special prize (during the big hit), and can be calculated by dividing the number of safe balls by the number of out balls. The number of shot spheres (the number of out spheres) is detected by the shot sphere sensor 1020. As described above, the shooting sphere sensor 1020 is provided near the exits (backflow prevention members 1007) of the rails 1001 and 1002 that guide game balls from the ball shooting device to the game area 5a (see FIGS. 10 and 16). Further, the number of out-balls may be detected by the discharged-ball sensor 3060. As described above, the discharge ball sensor 3060 is provided at the discharge port for discharging game balls flowing out of the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). In addition, an out-port passing ball sensor 1021 (see FIG. 53) for detecting a game ball passing through the out-port 1111 provided below the game area 5a is provided, and the number of game balls detected by the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 is determined by: The number of out-balls may be detected by the sum of the number of game balls detected by the start-up opening sensors 2104 and 2551 and the number of game balls detected by the various winning opening sensors 3015, 2114, 2554 and 2557. Further, a launch and supply ball sensor (not shown) for detecting a game ball supplied to the ball launching device 680, and a game ball (so-called foul ball) launched from the ball launching device 680 but not reaching the game area 5a And a foul ball sensor (not shown) for detecting the number of game balls supplied to the ball launching device 680 detected by the launch / supply ball sensor, and subtracting the number of foul balls from the number of outgoing balls (the number of launched balls). It may be detected.

  The number of out-balls may be counted by any of the methods described above. That is, it is sufficient that any of the illustrated sensors is provided with either the ejection ball sensor 3060 or the shooting ball sensor 1020.

  The number of safe balls is equal to the number of paid prize balls. Further, the base may be defined as a payout rate for each game state (during normal game, during electric support, during probability fluctuation, and during time reduction), and the number of safe balls per game state divided by the number of out balls may be calculated. . By displaying the base on the accessory ratio display 1317, a deviation from the design value of the throwing performance during operation can be confirmed on the spot for each gaming machine. In addition, since the pitching performance can be checked without using a hall contest, the inspection of each gaming machine at the time of on-site inspection of the game arcade becomes easy.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 displays information on other winnings and prize balls (eg, the number of winnings in the general winning opening 2001 and the number of winning balls in the winning, the number of winnings in the starting opening 2002 and the number of winning balls in the winning, The number of winnings in the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 and the number of award balls due to the winning may be displayed.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 may always display the accessory ratio, or may display the accessory ratio by operating the display switch 1318. For example, when the display switch 1318, which is a push button switch, is pressed, the display of the accessory ratio starts, and after the display for a predetermined time, the display is turned off. If the display switch 1318 is operated while the body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. Good. That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the main body frame is open, the accessory ratio display 1317 does not display the accessory ratio.

  Further, the display content may be changed every time the display switch 1318 is operated. For example, as shown in FIG. 37, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, A7 indicating the ratio of the bonus (cumulative) is displayed in the first two digits, and the bonus for a predetermined number (for example, 60000) of prize balls is displayed. The ratio is displayed in the last two digits. When the display switch 1318 is operated once again, the display of the first two digits is switched to A6 which means the continuous bonus ratio (total), and the continuous bonus ratio for a predetermined number (for example, 60000) of prize balls is lowered by 2%. It may be displayed in a digit (FIG. 37B). Further, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, the y7 meaning the ratio of the accessory (6000 prize balls) is displayed in the first two digits, and the ratio of the accessory based on the latest data is displayed in the lower two digits (the latest data display). (FIG. 37 (C)). When the display switch 1318 is operated once again, the display of the upper two digits is switched to y6 meaning the ratio of the accessory (cumulative), and the ratio of the accessory to a predetermined number (for example, 60000) of prize balls is changed to the lower two digits. Display (medium term data display) may be performed (FIG. 37D).

  The display switch 1318 does not have to be provided as an independent switch, and may also be used as a RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. That is, the switch functions as a RAM clear switch when operated when the power is turned on, and functions as a display switch 1318 when operated during operation of the pachinko machine 1. By integrating the functions of the RAM clear switch and the display switch 1318 into one switch, the staff at the game arcade operates only one switch, and erroneous operations by inexperienced staff can be reduced.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the accessory ratio of the operating gaming machine can be accurately calculated, and the gambling of the operating gaming machine can be confirmed.

  In addition, since the data of the number of awarded balls is accumulated as the data 13136 for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio, and when the check code is abnormal, the data 13136 for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio is deleted. Can be avoided.

  In addition, since the data 13136 for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio is deleted under the condition different from the condition for deleting the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311, the accurate data of the number of winning balls is retained. , Can calculate the accurate accessory ratio.

  In addition, since the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not erased depending on the operation of the RAM clear switch, the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not erroneously erased by the operation of a game room attendant. Since the object ratio calculation / display data is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the data is not erased by an erroneous operation of a game room attendant. In addition, since the gaming hall cannot intentionally delete the data for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio, the reliability of the displayed accessory ratio is increased, and concealment of the state where the accessory ratio is high can be prevented.

[9. View Base]
[9-1. Basic configuration of gaming machine displaying base]
So far, the embodiment of the pachinko machine that calculates and displays the accessory ratio has been described. Next, the embodiment of the pachinko machine that calculates and displays the base value will be described. In the present embodiment, a pachinko machine that exclusively calculates and displays a base value will be described. However, the accessory ratio may be calculated and displayed together with the base value.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine described below, when a game ball wins in the starting port (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004), a random number is drawn and a special symbol variation display game is executed. . The variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation display game is a variation pattern of a relatively short time (a normal variation pattern of about 10 seconds, a shortened variation pattern of about 2 to 5 seconds that is easily selected when the number of holdings is large). And a fluctuation pattern of a relatively long time (a fluctuation pattern such as super reach exceeding 1 minute). When the base value is calculated by the pachinko machine, the notification of the base value does not require urgency than the notification of the error, so that it can be notified at the timing when the special symbol change display game switches to the next change display game. However, if the variable display time is long, when the predetermined condition is satisfied without waiting for the end of one special symbol variable display game (for example, the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) or the number of award balls (the number of paid balls) It is preferable to calculate the base value and update the display if the number changes). For this reason, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the game (for example, even during the special symbol variation display game) (for example, the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) or the number of award balls (the number of paid balls) If) changes), calculate the base value and display it. Next, a specific configuration of the pachinko machine that operates as described above will be described.

  FIG. 38 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration around the main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 that calculates and displays a base value.

  The pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 38 has substantially the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 17, but the configuration represented by reference numeral 1317 is a base display instead of the accessory ratio display. As the base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 28, a 4-digit 7-segment LED may be used, and other digits (for example, 2 digits) may be used. A 7 segment LED may be used.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment acquires data of the number of award balls and the number of out-balls in the update processing of the ratio of the accessory ratio (step S81) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23) executed by the main control MPU 1311. In the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S89), a base value is calculated and displayed. In the following description, the “update of the area ratio calculation area” in step S81 of FIG. 23 is replaced with the “area update processing of calculating the base area”, and the “calculation / display processing of aspect ratio” in step S89 is replaced with the “base area”. Calculation / display processing "will be described. In addition, the “accessory ratio calculation area 13128” shown in FIG. 26 is read as a “base calculation area 13128”, and the “accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135” is read as a “base calculation / display code 13135”. The description will be made by replacing the “data for calculating and displaying ratio 13136” with the “data for calculating and displaying base 13136”.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the base calculation area update processing (step S81). The base calculation area update processing determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as a game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and updates the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. I do. In particular, the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 39 uses the prize ball count calculated in the prize ball control processing (step S80) to calculate the base value every time the timer interrupt period occurs, and thus calculates the total prize ball count. Is directly updated (step S814), and the total number of out-balls is directly updated using the number of out-balls (step S822).

  First, it is determined whether the gaming state is during the special prize (step S810). The state of the game being in the special prize state means that the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are open and the player can acquire many prize balls, but the opening and ending time of the jackpot game is included. Good. When the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing in one big hit, the time from the closing of the special winning opening to the next opening (close interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810, it means that the condition device is operating, for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. Also, all times during the right-handed instruction may be included.

  Further, in the start-up ports 2002 and 2004, during the time reduction, during the probable change (during the ST), and during the power support, the special award may be included. Further, in a game state other than during the working hours, during the probable change (during the ST), and during the power support, a predetermined time after the opening of the starting port 2004 until the closing thereof (for example, until a ball winning the starting port is detected as an out ball). The period up to the required several seconds) may be included in the special prize.

  The electric actuated accessory provided in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is divided into two types from the viewpoint of calculating the base value. As described above, during the special prize regarding the special winning opening 2005 or 2006 in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the condition device is being operated (for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending), Since the base value is calculated based on the number of prize balls and the number of out-balls other than the special prize, a normal (so-called big hit) prize in the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 is not used for calculating the base value. On the other hand, in the starting port 2004 having an opening / closing member (so-called electric tulip), a winning ball and a prize ball other than during the special prize (low probability or non-time saving) are used for calculating the base value. In other words, some of the electrically actuated actors (grand prize openings 2005 and 2006) use the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls in the calculation of the base value regardless of the playing state (whether or not a special prize is in progress). The other characters (starting opening 2004) are not used, and whether to use the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls for the calculation of the base value is switched according to the game state (whether or not a special prize is in progress). Will be. The fact that the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls are not used in the calculation of the base value means that the paid-out balls are not counted in (the number of prize balls other than the special prize which is the dividend in the calculation of the base value) This includes not generating edge information for paying out a prize ball by the winning signal even when the winning signal is input.

  The special winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened even when the condition device does not operate (so-called small hits). Generally, a small hit occurs during a short working time, and since it is open for a short time, there is a low possibility that a game ball wins, so that it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, a small hit may be generated other than during the special prize (at a normal time), and the game ball may be opened only during a time when there is a high possibility that the game ball wins. In this case, the winning balls and the prize balls to the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 in the small hits generated other than during the special prize may be used for calculating the base value. In this way, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of a small hit other than during the special prize. That is, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly cope with the standard of the base value, and it is possible to improve design flexibility.

  If the gaming state is the special prize, the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore, the base calculation region updating process is terminated without updating the prize ball count or the out-ball count. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation area update processing may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of award balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command may be used. Alternatively, the main control board 1310 may transmit a payout command to the payout control board 951 and receive the acknowledgment (ACK) from the payout control board 951. Furthermore, the main control board 1310 may transmit the payout command to the payout control board 951, and may receive the payout completion report from the payout control board 951 (the number of paid out prize balls). This variation will be described with reference to FIGS.

  Then, the acquired prize ball count is added to the total prize ball count to update the total prize ball count (step S814). In addition, it may be determined whether there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped. In addition, although the game balls have won the starting openings 2002 and 2004, the holding is the upper limit, and even if the winning in the starting opening is not suspended, the prize balls are paid out, so that the total number of winning balls is updated. Further, in a game state in which a prize ball is not generated even when a game ball is awarded in the winning opening (for example, at the time of occurrence of a specific error), no prize ball due to the prize is generated and the number of prize balls to be acquired is reduced. Since it is 0, the total prize ball count is not updated. The total prize ball count is recorded in a total prize ball storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 39, every time the number of winning balls is calculated, the total number of winning balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

  Thereafter, the number of out-balls is obtained (step S818), and the total number of out-balls is updated so that the obtained number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls (step S822). As described above, the number of out-balls is detected by the launching ball sensor 1020, the ejecting ball sensor 3060, and the like. In the switch input process of step S74, the detection signals of these sensors are read, and if there is a detection signal of the sensor, the out-going ball is detected. The number of spheres = 1 is obtained. The total number of out-balls is recorded in a total-out-ball number storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 39, every time an out ball is detected, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated. As described above, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process, the total number of out-balls is updated, and the base value is calculated and displayed in the base calculation display process (FIG. 40), so that the base value is displayed without delay. It is possible to determine whether the base is normal or abnormal without delay.

  It is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls as in steps S815 to S817 of a base calculation area updating process (FIG. 46) described later, and if there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. Alternatively, the award ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has expired, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has expired, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is performed. May be stopped.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation process of the base value in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute the calculation process of the base value. In this case, a command for informing the base to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may be transmitted from the main control board 1310, or a command for informing the peripheral control unit 1511 of the base from the payout control unit 952. May be transmitted.

  Also, in one timer interrupt process, even if information on both the winning prize to the winning opening and the out ball is acquired, the number of prize balls is set to the total number of prize balls (or a prize ball number buffer in an embodiment described later). Then, the number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls (or an out-ball number buffer in an embodiment described later). Further, in one timer interrupt process, even if information on winning in a plurality of winning openings is obtained, the total number of winning balls resulting from the plurality of winnings is calculated as the total number of winning balls (or a winning ball number buffer in an embodiment described later). ). Therefore, the base value can be accurately calculated and displayed. For example, when a prize is detected to the winning opening sensor of the winning opening having five prize balls and the winning opening sensor of the winning opening having three prize balls, a total of eight prize balls are counted as the total winning prize balls. (Or prize ball number buffer).

  The prize ball count may be added to the total prize ball count (or the prize ball count buffer) only when the launch of the game ball is detected. In other words, only the number of prize balls related to winning detected within a predetermined time after the detection of the launch ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total prize ball number (or prize ball number buffer). In addition, the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is detected, and while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is operating (further, the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is stopped. Alternatively, only the number of prize balls related to winning detected in a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds) may be added to the total prize ball number or the prize ball number buffer. When the player operates the firing handle, the number of awarded balls may be added to the total number of awarded balls (or the number of awarded balls buffer). That is, only the number of prize balls related to winning detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is in contact with the palm or finger is determined as the total number of prize balls ( Alternatively, it may be added to the award ball count buffer). In this way, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being reflected in the base value due to an abnormality or improper operation of detecting the prize ball in a state where the game ball is not fired, and to prevent an incorrect display of the base value. In addition, when the contact detection sensor 509 is used, it is not necessary to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of a game ball, so that an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

  In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the base was calculated excluding the number of prize balls and the number of out-balls during the special prize. Alternatively, the base value may be calculated by counting the number of out-balls excluding the number of balls winning the big winning opening.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the base calculation / display processing (step S89). In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 40, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

  First, it is determined whether the total number of out-balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out spheres is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation / display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). If the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value need not be calculated. Further, when an abnormal base value is calculated (for example, when the total number of prize balls is larger than the total number of outs and a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value), the base value is not calculated. Is also good. If the base value is expressed as a percentage, the base value is calculated by multiplying the total number of prize balls / the total number of out balls by 100. Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A 131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B 131217.

  The predetermined number multiplied by the total number of winning balls stored in the division input register A131216 controls the number of digits of the calculated base value. For example, assuming that the predetermined number is 100, the base value is calculated to the first place in 100-percentage, and the base value is not calculated. If the predetermined number is 10,000, the base value is calculated up to two decimal places at a percentage. That is, if the quotient output from the arithmetic circuit is divided by 100, the base value of a two-digit decimal percentage can be calculated.

  Then, after the elapse of 32 clocks, the quotient is read from the division result register A 131218 and set as the base value. Note that the main control MPU 1311 waits for 32 clocks from the time when data is written to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to the time when data is read from the division result register A 131218. May be performed. For example, a random number that determines a jackpot may be updated between the time when data is written to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and the time that data is read from the division result register A 131218. More specifically, the hard random number generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 is updated at the timing of the clock cycle (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock cycle) supplied to the main control MPU 1311. The hard random numbers are also updated.

  That is, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, even while the arithmetic circuit 13121 is executing the base arithmetic processing, other processing relating to the game can be executed in parallel. Other processes relating to the game include at least a process of updating a random number for determining a win. In addition, during the calculation (division) process in the calculation circuit 13121, the update of the random number affecting the game result is performed one or more times.

  In addition, when the total number of out-balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 results in an error, and therefore need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. The base notification command may simply notify the base value or may notify the base value abnormality. The abnormality of the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than a design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. Note that a plurality of allowable ranges may be provided to determine the degree of abnormality in a plurality of steps based on the degree of deviation of the base value.

  There are various methods for reporting the base, and one of the methods described below may be used, or two or more may be combined. For example, the base value (7-segment LED) 1317, the effect display device 1600, 3114, 244, or the like, may notify the base value at all times or at a predetermined timing. Notifying the player of the base value may allow the player to check the condition of the pachinko machine. At this time, the display mode described with the accessory ratio may be applied to the base value. When notifying the base value, the calculated base value is displayed as a percentage on the above-described display or display device. The value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up. On a display device that can display an image such as a staging display device 1600, 3114, or 244, the value is displayed to the first decimal place and displayed in more detail. You may.

  When displaying the base value on the base display 1317 composed of 7-segment LEDs, the main control MPU 1311 inputs display data to a predetermined register provided in the driver circuit 13171 of the base display 1317. That is, the main control MPU 1311 generates display data set in the register of the driver circuit 13171 as a base notification command. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the main control MPU 1311 designates a digit for displaying a numerical value in “D15 to D8” with “data n setting”, and designates a display content in D7 to D0. Is generated and written to the shift register 3171.

  When displaying the base value on the effect display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, a predetermined reference value (for example, 50%) is provided for the base value, and when the reference value is exceeded, the display mode may be changed. . For example, the numerical value is displayed by blinking or by changing the color (green in a normal state and red in a case where the reference is exceeded). Further, the display mode of the base value may be changed in a plurality of stages. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. The display may be divided into a plurality of stages and the emission color may be changed in each stage such as white, blue, and yellow. Also, at each stage, when the base value is low, such as "good condition", "condition is getting worse", "not bad", "somewhat terrible", etc., a masochistic comment may be displayed. If the base value exceeds the reference value, the pachinko machine is operating differently than expected, and there is a possibility that the illegal operation has been performed. For this reason, it is desirable to display in a manner indicating a warning such as red. Further, the display mode may be the same as or similar to a weak error that does not stop the progress of the game. Here, the same means that at least one of the display, the lamp, and the sound is the same.

  Further, the range of the base value (such as whether the base value is high or low, an abnormal value or a normal value, etc.) may be notified by various lamps, effect display devices, sounds, and the like. If the base cannot be calculated (Yes in step S902) and there is no base value calculated in the past, a base notification command for displaying the base notification disabled on the effect display device may be generated. By transmitting the notification command to the generated sub-board, it is possible to report the state of the base with the effect device controlled by the sub-board. Can be reduced. Further, by notifying that the base display is impossible when nothing is displayed on the base display 1317, it is possible to distinguish between a failure of the base display 1317 and the absence of a base value to be displayed. Further, by displaying the abnormality of the base value on the effect display device, it is possible to know the abnormality of the base value without looking at the back side of the game board provided with the base display 1317.

  The function display unit 1400 may also serve as the base display 1317. In this case, it is preferable to always notify using a specific LED lamp (or a 7-segment LED) of the function display unit 1400. Also, the notification may be given at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time when the main frame 4 is opened, while the special symbol variation display game is not being executed, and when the special symbol variation display game is finished).

  Base information may be output from the external terminal plate 784 to a hall computer installed in a game arcade. In this case, when the base information is output at a predetermined timing (for each predetermined number of prize balls, for each predetermined number of out balls) as in a base calculation / display process (FIG. 47, FIG. 49, etc.) described later. Good.

  The base information output from the external terminal board 784 may be a binary (high, low) signal indicating whether the calculated base value is higher or lower than a predetermined threshold. Further, a signal having a length indicating an outline of the calculated base value may be output (for example, a pulse of 30 milliseconds when the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%). Also, a number of continuous pulses that roughly indicate the calculated base value may be output (for example, three continuous pulses when the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%).

  In addition, even when the base value is not updated, the base notification command may be generated. When the base value is not updated, the base notification command may not be generated. Even if the base notification command is not generated, the display of the base value is continued.

  Also, as described later with reference to FIG. 56 and the like, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal, a base notification command for notifying the abnormality of the base value is generated, and the base abnormality is notified to the player or the hall employee. You may be notified.

  Further, whether to notify the base to the player may be determined according to the game state (game state). This is because, if the base value is constantly notified to the player, the player's attention to the effect of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original pleasure of the pachinko machine, may be neglected, and the consciousness of the player may be dispersed. It is.

  Further, based on the calculated base value, the effect of the special symbol variation display game that is being executed or may be executed in the future may be changed. For example, a plurality of display selection tables may be prepared, and effects may be selected from display selection tables (see FIGS. 64 to 68) that differ depending on the base value.

  Further, during the special symbol change display game, the base value may exceed or fall below a predetermined threshold value (for example, 30%). Therefore, when the value exceeds or falls below the threshold value during the special symbol change display game, the effect of the special symbol change display game may be changed. The effect may be changed in the same manner when the base value rises and falls below the predetermined threshold value, or the effect may be changed in a different manner.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of the timing of updating the number of winning balls and the timing of calculating the base value. As shown in FIG. 23, in this embodiment, the number of winning balls is updated in the base calculation area update processing in step S81, and the base value is calculated in the base ratio calculation / display processing in step S89.

  For this reason, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning port in the prize ball control process (step S80), and calculates the base ball. The award ball count buffer is updated in the area update processing (step S81). Thereafter, the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display processing (step S89), and a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting processing (step S90).

  When storing the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the ball payout completion. Note that the number of unpaid prize balls among the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951. When backing up the number of unpaid prize balls in the payout control board 951, the payout control board 951 needs to transmit a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310, but it is not necessary to notify the main control board 1310 of the ball payout completion. Absent. On the other hand, when the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951 needs to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout, but transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. No need.

  In the pachinko machine according to the embodiment described above, the base value is calculated without delay during the game, and the state of the game machine can be known in real time. For this reason, an abnormality of the gaming machine can be found at an early stage. For example, when it is determined that the base is abnormal when the base value is lower or higher than a predetermined threshold value, the base value is calculated a plurality of times during one special symbol variation display game, and moves up and down over the predetermined threshold value and becomes abnormal. , The base value calculation process is continuously executed regardless of the determination of the abnormality without stopping the game. For example, there are special symbol variation display games that have a short duration such as normal variation and long durations such as reach variation, and calculate the base value from the start to the end of one special symbol variation display game. When the condition for performing is satisfied a plurality of times, the base value may be calculated each time, and the base value may be updated and displayed each time. This is because if the calculation of the base value during the special symbol change display game is restricted (for example, the base value is calculated and updated only once at the end of the change display), it may take a long time to change the base value depending on the calculation timing of the base value. This is because information required for the operation of the hall is not output at an appropriate time because the time is not noticed, and the hall may be inconvenienced.

  In addition, if the launched game ball has not won the starting port or the general winning opening, the base value decreases. In this state, the player loses money. For example, an additional effect (for example, an effect related to a hit that is not related to a change in the base value or an effect related to a change in the base value) Or a notice effect with a high expectation of a jackpot (a notice effect with a high expectation such as the next notice effect among the effects not related to the change of the base value) or a change in the base value. A notice effect (for example, displaying a base value in a rainbow display) with a high degree of expectation among specific appearing effects may be performed. Thereby, the player can reduce the discomfort felt by not winning in the starting port and the general winning opening, and can give motivation to continue the game.

  On the other hand, if many of the launched game balls win the starting opening or the general winning opening (if they win more than the average of the past winning numbers), the base value increases. In this state, even if the result of the jackpot lottery is lost, the player is paid out more game balls than usual, so that the player's disappointment is reduced. The effect of the variable display game may be changed to an effect with a low degree of expectation.

[9-2. Variation of update timing of prize balls and calculation timing of base value]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44, variations of the update timing of the number of winning balls and the calculation timing of the base value will be described. The outline of the update timing of the number of award balls and the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
-Fig. 41: Calculating the number of prize balls-> updating the number of prize balls-> calculating the base value-> sending a payout command-Fig. 42: Calculating the number of prize balls-> updating the number of prize balls-> sending a payout command-> calculating the base value-Fig. 43: Calculating the number of prize balls → Sending out payout command → updating the number of prize balls → calculating the base value ・ FIG. 44: Calculating the number of prize balls → sending out the payout command → confirming command reception → updating the number of prize balls → calculating the base value ・ FIG. 45: Calculating the number of prize balls → transmitting the payout command → Completion notification of payout → Update of the number of winning balls → Calculation of base value The variations in FIGS. 41 to 44 described above include not only the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 39 and the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. It can be applied to any base calculation area update processing and base calculation / display processing.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 42, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23, the base calculation area update processing (step S81) is executed at the illustrated position, and after the output data setting processing (step S90), the base ratio calculation is performed. Execute display processing (step S89).

  That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input processing (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control processing (step S80), and sets the base calculation area. In the update process (step S81), the total prize ball count (or the prize ball count buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated. Thereafter, a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting process (step S90), and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89).

  When storing the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the ball payout completion. As described above, the payout command reception confirmation or the payout command reception is determined depending on whether the unpaid prize ball number among the prize ball numbers calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951. Any of the ball payout completions may be omitted.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 43, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23, after the output data setting processing (step S90), the base calculation area updating processing (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display processing (step S89) Execute

  That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning port in the prize ball control process (step S80), and sets the output data setting process. In step (S90), a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Thereafter, in a base calculation area update process (step S81), the total prize ball count (or a prize ball count buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated with the prize ball count corresponding to the transmitted payout command, and the base ratio calculation / The base value is updated in the display processing (step S89). The prize ball number buffer may be updated not with the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command but with the number of prize balls corresponding to the generated payout command (even if the payout command has not been transmitted).

  When storing the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the ball payout completion. As described above, the payout command reception confirmation or the payout command reception is determined depending on whether the unpaid prize ball number among the prize ball numbers calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951. Any of the ball payout completions may be omitted.

  Note that the timing at which the main control MPU 1311 receives the command reception confirmation and the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951 depends on the processing speed of the payout control board 951 and the operation speed of the payout device 830. The order of the step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display processing (step S89) does not matter.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23, after receiving the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area update processing (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display processing (Step S89) is executed.

  That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning port in the prize ball control process (step S80), and sets the output data setting process. In step (S90), a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

  When storing the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310.

  Upon receiving the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, the main control MPU 1311 performs a base calculation area update process (step S81) to determine the total prize ball count (prize balls) corresponding to the payout command for which the command reception confirmation has been received. Alternatively, the prize ball number buffer is updated in the embodiment described later, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display processing (step S89).

  When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the ball payout completion. In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the payout control board 951 so that the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is not lost when a power failure occurs. Therefore, it is necessary to confirm the command reception from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, but the ball payout completion notification may be omitted.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 45, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23, after receiving the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area update processing (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display processing (Step S89) is executed.

  That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning port in the prize ball control process (step S80), and sets the output data setting process. In step (S90), a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

  When storing the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the ball payout completion.

  Upon receiving the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, the main control MPU 1311 performs the base calculation area update process (step S81) to calculate the total prize balls (or in the later-described embodiment) with the number of prize balls that have been paid out. The award ball count buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display processing (step S89).

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the main control board 1310 so that the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is not lost when a power failure occurs. For this reason, the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310 is necessary, but the command reception confirmation may be omitted.

  As described above, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment updates the number of prize balls and the number of out balls, which are parameters used for calculating the base value, when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, in the processing shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, when the winning opening sensor detects a winning of a game ball in the switch input processing (step S74), the number of winning balls is updated. In the processing shown in FIG. 43, when the payout command is transmitted, the number of winning balls is updated. In the processing shown in FIG. 44, when the reception of the payout command is confirmed, the number of winning balls is updated. In the process shown in FIG. 45, when the payout of the prize balls is completed, the number of prize balls is updated.

  In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the number of prize balls during the special prize cannot be accurately counted due to a difference between the timing of determining whether the gaming state is during the special prize and the timing of updating the number of prize balls. In particular, the problem becomes serious when the time from the winning of the winning opening to the update of the number of winning balls is long. For this reason, a flag is attached to the winning prize during the special prize, and the flag is taken over in the number of prize balls, the payout command, the reception confirmation, and the payout completion notification by the winning. Then, it is determined whether or not the prize ball is in the special prize at each stage using the flag. In this way, the number of prize balls in the special prize can be accurately counted and updated even if the time from winning a prize port to updating the number of prize balls is long.

  In the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, the number of award balls and the number of out-balls are updated at these moments, and a base value is calculated and displayed. That is, since the base value can be known by the gaming machine alone, the time required for nail adjustment in the manufacturing process and the inspection process can be reduced, and the gaming machine can be manufactured efficiently.

  In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine is unable to pay out a prize ball when the ball has run out, the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls.

  In the case where the main control board 1310 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning port sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning port for which the winning is detected is not determined. Add to the number of dispensed balls. Note that a predetermined upper limit may be provided for the number of unpaid balls, but an upper limit may not be provided. In this case, each time the number of prize balls to be paid out is calculated, the prize ball number buffer for calculating the base value or the total prize ball number may be updated. Further, the number of winning balls may be updated after the payout command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951.

  On the other hand, when the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning port sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning port where the winning is detected is detected. Is transmitted to the payout control board 951. A payout command is transmitted even when the pachinko machine is unable to pay out a prize ball when the ball has run out, and the number of unpaid balls is held by the payout control board 951. In this case, each time a payout command is transmitted, the prize ball count buffer for calculating the base value or the total prize ball count may be updated.

  Further, when the payout control board 951 receives the payout command, the number of winning balls for calculating the base value may be updated. Note that a predetermined upper limit may be provided for the number of award balls, but an upper limit may not be provided. Further, each time a prize ball is actually paid out, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated. The payout control board 951 transmits the number of prize balls for calculating the base value to the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 calculates the base value using the received number of prize balls.

  Further, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 47, the prize ball number buffer value is not compared with the threshold value Th1, but every predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). , Steps S891 and S892 may be performed.

  As described above, the update of the number of award balls for calculating the base value can be performed at various timings. However, when the number of award balls is updated, the base value is calculated without delay, and the base display 1317 displays the value in real time. Or a base value may be calculated and displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, every minute).

[9-3. Timing for updating the number of winning balls and calculating the base value]
Next, a variation of the base calculation area update processing (step S81) and the base calculation display processing (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
39 and 40: Calculate the base value each time the timer interrupt period occurs. FIGS. 46 and 47: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls. FIGS. 48 and 49: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of out balls. Calculations / FIGS. 50 and 51: When one of the number of award balls and the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number, the base value is updated

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation area update processing (step S81). In the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 46, the prize ball count is recorded in the prize ball count buffer in order to calculate the base value when the prize ball count satisfies a predetermined condition (step S813). In FIG. 46, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update processing (FIG. 39) described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether the gaming state is during the special prize (step S810). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. If the gaming state is during the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the process proceeds to step S824 without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S811).

  Then, it is determined whether there is a prize ball, that is, whether the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more (step S812). As a result, if there is no winning ball, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of winning balls. On the other hand, if there is an award ball, the acquired number of award balls is added to the award ball number buffer (step S813). Note that the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer installed in the game hall every time the number of prize balls is added to the prize ball buffer, or the prize ball number described later becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1. In this case, the threshold value Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the award ball count buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and temporarily stores the award ball count paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

  Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815). For example, an abnormal number of prize balls means that a large number of prize balls (for example, a prize corresponding to 10 or more prizes per minute in consideration of the number of prize balls in a general winning opening or a starting opening) during a predetermined time other than during the special prize. Ball) is obtained. Note that a plurality of allowable ranges may be provided to determine the degree of abnormality in a plurality of stages based on the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of award balls. If the number of prize balls is abnormal, the acquired number of prize balls need not be added to the prize ball buffer in step S813, and the number of prize balls added to the prize ball buffer in step S813 is subtracted. Is also good.

  As a result, if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the player or the hall employee is notified that the prize balls are abnormal. There are various methods for reporting the abnormality, and one of the following methods may be used, or two or more methods may be combined. For example, an abnormality in the number of prize balls may be notified by various lamps, effect display devices 1600, 3114, 244, sound, and the like. Further, the abnormality of the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal plate 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall. Further, the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal may not be used for calculating the base value. In this case, a prize ball may be paid out to the player. When the number of award balls is determined to be abnormal and is notified by the above-described notification means (sound, lamp, LED, effect display device, information output from external terminal board 784, etc.), the number of award balls determined to be abnormal is determined. It may be used to calculate the base value. Further, the game may be temporarily stopped. Specifically, the main control board 1310 initializes all data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 and initializes all data in the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 even when the RAM clear switch is not operated. Then, the game is started from the operation check in the initial state. As another method of stopping the game, the game is temporarily stopped (for example, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is stopped), and after the error notification is stopped, the game returns to the original state and the game is restarted. Therefore, even if the power failure monitoring circuit does not detect a drop in the power supply voltage, the power failure detection signal is output, and the main control MPU 1311 backs up all data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 and stops the game. Then, after the error notification, the data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 is restored from the backup area, and the game is restarted. At this time, since the peripheral control unit 1511 waits for a command from the main control board 1310 without any change, the interrupted game is restarted by restarting the operation of the main control board 1310. However, since 100 gaming balls (that is, out balls) are fired in the game area 5a and all the gaming balls may enter the general winning opening or the starting opening, the abnormality of the number of winning balls is notified. It is desirable that the mode in which the error is performed is lower in urgency than a normal error (such as a magnetic sensor error) and the mode in which the error is lower (for example, a lower volume or a lower light quantity than the normal error notification). Also, the display time may be the same as a normal error or a short time. In some cases, it is not necessary to set the notification time to 0 seconds and not to notify.

  Then, the award ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817), and counting of the award ball abnormality notification time is started.

  Thereafter, the number of out-balls is obtained (step S818), and the total number of out-balls is updated so that the obtained number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls (step S822).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer started in step S817 has timed out (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S825). In step S824, the end of the notification is determined based on the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time. However, the end of the notification is determined so as to notify the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined number of shot balls. You may. Further, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms.

  In the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 46, it is determined in step S985 whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls. However, after acquiring the number of out balls, the number of prize balls is abnormal in comparison with the number of out balls. (Ie, whether there is an abnormality in the base value) may be determined. For example, when the number of prize balls exceeding the number of out-balls is counted at a predetermined time, or when the number of out-balls is high (for example, 50% or more) in consideration of the number of prize balls in a general winning opening or a starting opening. And so on.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation / display processing (step S89). In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 47, the base value is updated at a timing when the number of winning balls satisfies a predetermined condition. 47, the same steps as those in the above-described base calculation / display processing (FIG. 40) are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of award balls stored in the award ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). Various methods can be used to determine whether or not the award ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the prize ball count buffer value may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the determination may be made based on a predetermined bit value of the prize ball count storage area (specifically, the prize ball count storage area is represented by 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, the number of out balls can be determined to be 128 or more.) In the base calculation area update processing (FIG. 46), the determination result obtained by comparing the number of winning balls with the threshold Th1 is recorded in a flag, and in the base calculating / displaying processing (FIG. 47), the flag is used to store the winning ball number buffer value. May be determined to be greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold Th1.

  If the award ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not time to calculate the base value, and the base calculation / display process ends.

  On the other hand, if the prize ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball count (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball buffer (step S892). That is, if the number of prize balls counted from a predetermined starting point satisfies a predetermined condition (the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or larger than the threshold Th1), the fractional part of the number of prize balls is determined. Remaining (the fraction obtained by subtracting the threshold Th1 from the prize ball buffer is left in the prize ball buffer), and the other portion is stored in the memory (adding the threshold Th1 to the total prize ball count) and used for calculating the base value. Execute the processing to be performed. Specifically, when the threshold value Th1 is 100, the prize ball number buffer value is 99, and when five prize balls are generated by winning a general winning opening, the prize ball number buffer value is 104. However, 100 pieces are moved to the total number of prize balls and used for calculating the base value, and the remaining four pieces are left in the prize ball number buffer. In this case, the count of the four winning balls remaining in the winning ball buffer is used for calculating the base value when the next winning ball buffer value becomes equal to or greater than the threshold Th1. Also, the threshold value Th1 = 100 has been described, but another numerical value such as 1000 may be used. However, if a large threshold value Th1 is set such that the base is not calculated even if a jackpot is obtained, the detection of fraud may be delayed. Therefore, the threshold value Th1 is equal to or less than the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot (multiple types). (For example, if there are four rounds and eight rounds), it may be set to be equal to or less than the minimum number of prize balls per jackpot. In addition, the base value may be frequently updated from the viewpoint of early detection of fraud. For example, it is preferable that the threshold value Th1 be 10 instead of 100 since the base value is frequently updated.

  Steps S891 and S892 may be executed for each predetermined number of wins (for example, 10) without comparing the award ball count buffer value with the threshold Th1. Further, steps S891 and S892 may be executed at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 5 seconds) without comparing the award ball count buffer value with the threshold Th1. The predetermined time may be measured by a timer operated by the main control MPU 1311 or may be measured by an output of an RTC (real time clock).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out-balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation / display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A 131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B 131217. Then, after the elapse of 32 clocks, the quotient is read from the division result register A 131218 and set as the base value. When the total number of out spheres is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 results in an error (or indefinite), and therefore need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

  In addition to the case where the total number of out-balls is 0 and the case where the calculated base value is an abnormal value, it is not necessary to calculate the base value and update the base calculation area 13128. For example, when the total number of out balls is equal to or less than the total number of award balls, the base value is equal to or more than 100%, and the same number of or more award balls as the number of launch balls (out balls) are obtained. Therefore, it is not necessary to store the numerical values in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and to calculate the base value. When the base value is calculated and the value read from the division result register A131218 is 100% or more, the base calculation area 13128 does not need to be updated with the value read from the division result register A131218.

  Further, the abnormality of the base value may be determined with 1500% as the threshold. The upper limit of the theoretical base value of a pachinko machine having a maximum winning ball number of 15 for a winning opening is 1500%. Therefore, a base value exceeding 1500% is an impossible value and the gaming machine is abnormal. It can be determined that there is. Also in this case, the base value need not be calculated, or the base calculation area 13128 need not be updated with the value read from the division result register A 131218.

  Further, the threshold value for determining the abnormality of the base value may be another value. A normal value (for example, 30% to 50%) of the base value in the normal operation of the pachinko machine is determined, and if it is out of the range of the normal value, the base calculation area 13128 is read with the value read from the division result register A131218. It is not necessary to update the display of the base value without updating.

  Although the case where the base value is not displayed has been described above, even if the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal base value may be displayed.

  The total number of prize balls and the total number of out-balls are cumulative numbers from the time when the pachinko machine 1 starts operating, as described later with reference to FIG. 52. Initialization may be performed at a timing (for example, for each predetermined number of prize balls, for each predetermined number of out balls).

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

  As described above, the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal each time the number of prize balls is acquired, so that an illegal act can be detected early. This is because during a normal game, a considerable number of game balls (for example, 50% of the number of shot balls) do not win the general winning opening 2001 or the starting openings 2002 and 2004 with a high probability. Therefore, the abnormality of the winning in the winning opening (the general winning opening 2001 and the starting openings 2002 and 2004) which is always open is determined and notified.

  In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value is calculated when the number of winning balls satisfies a predetermined condition, so that an accurate base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the base value is calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, the calculation amount required for calculating the base value (for example, The load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated and a new base value is notified, but until then, the conventional base value is notified. Is done.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation area update processing (step S81). In the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 48, the out-ball count is recorded in the out-ball count buffer in order to calculate the base value at a timing when the out-ball count satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). In FIG. 48, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether the gaming state is during the special prize (step S810). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). If the result of determination in step S812 is that there is a winning ball, the acquired number of winning balls is added to the total number of winning balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 48, every time the number of winning balls is calculated, the total number of winning balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of award balls (step S815). If there is an abnormality in the number of award balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a timer for informing the award ball abnormality is reset (step S817). ).

  Thereafter, the number of out-balls is obtained (step S818). The acquired number of out-balls is added to the out-ball number buffer (step S819).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer has expired, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S824). Step S825).

  In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls. For this reason, for example, when it is determined that a game ball wins at the starting port and a prefetching effect is generated, and the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a mode different from normal (flashing display, red hold, or the like), The player expects the special symbol change display game corresponding to the pre-reading hold to be a big hit, but if the special symbol change display game is a loss, the player is discouraged. Even in such a case, when the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of winning balls as in the present embodiment, the discourage of the player as described above can be reduced. This is because the calculation of the base value is delayed from the prize ball generation timing, so that the base value increased by the prize ball by winning the start port is notified. That is, even when it is determined that a prefetch effect is to be performed when a prize is entered in the starting opening, the number of prize balls paid out when the prize is entered in the starting opening is added to the above-described predetermined number (for example, the threshold value Th1 = 100). If not, the base value is not updated. That is, the base value displayed to the player has not changed. However, since the prize ball has been obtained, the base value should increase (only the lower numerical value changes due to the number of display digits, and the display may not change). For this reason, even if the above-mentioned pre-reading effect is lost, the player thinks that the base value will increase later (that is, the condition is good), and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. In other words, even when it is determined that the pre-reading effect is to be executed, the base value is not updated if the winning ball buffer value has not reached the predetermined number (threshold Th1). Further, when it is determined that the prefetching effect is to be executed and the winning ball buffer value reaches a predetermined number, the calculation of the base value may be delayed until the next winning ball buffer value reaches the predetermined number. .

  The player may be allowed to select whether to delay the calculation of the base value or to calculate without delay. For example, the selection can be made with the operation buttons 220C at the start of the game. The calculation timing of the base value may be determined by lottery. Further, when it is determined that the prefetch effect is to be performed, it is preferable to execute an effect that can notify the delay of the calculation of the base value. In addition, when the reserved memory of the special symbol change display game has reached the upper limit, the jackpot lottery is not executed even if the start opening is won. Even in this case, the prize balls are paid out in accordance with the prize in the starting port, so the number of the prize balls is counted and used for calculating the base value. In addition, at the time of a specific error, even if a prize is won in the starting opening or the general winning opening, it is treated that there is no prize, and if the prize ball is not paid out, the number of prize balls is not counted, and the base value depends on the prize. Is not updated.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation / display processing (step S89). In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 49, the base value is updated at a timing when the number of out-balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 49, the same steps as those in the base calculation / display processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether the number of out spheres stored in the out sphere number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). Various methods can be used to determine whether the out-ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the number of out-balls may be compared with the threshold Th2, or the determination may be made based on a predetermined bit value of the out-ball-number storage area (specifically, the out-ball number storage area is configured with 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more.) In the base calculation area update processing (FIG. 48), the determination result obtained by comparing the number of out-balls with the threshold Th2 is recorded in a flag. In the base calculation / display processing (FIG. 49), the number of out-balls is determined by the flag. May be determined to be not less than the threshold Th2.

  If the out-ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not time to calculate the base value, and the base calculation / display process ends.

  On the other hand, if the out-ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the threshold Th2 is added to the total out-ball count (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out-ball count buffer (step S900). Steps S899 and S900 may be executed at predetermined time intervals (for example, one minute) without comparing the out-ball count buffer value with the threshold Th2.

  Thereafter, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A 131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B 131217. Then, after the elapse of 32 clocks, the quotient is read from the division result register A 131218 and set as the base value. When the total number of out-balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 results in an error. Therefore, the base value need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

  Note that the total prize ball count and the total out ball count are cumulative numbers from the start of operation of the pachinko machine 1, and the total prize ball count and the total out ball count are determined at the same timing (for example, a predetermined prize count). (Each ball count, a predetermined number of out-balls) may be initialized.

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. The base notification command may simply notify the base value, may notify the base value in a specific effect, or may notify the base value abnormality.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value can be updated and displayed every time the number of out-balls (the number of fired balls) reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, the base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing. In addition, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which fun is pursued.

  Also, the number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls each time a prize ball (prize detection, transmission of a payout command, arrival of a payout command, completion of payout of a prize ball, etc.). This is because if the predetermined condition is satisfied when adding the number of prize balls (for example, whether there is an out ball corresponding to the prize ball), the base value may not be calculated correctly. For example, even if the firing is not performed for a predetermined time (about one minute), the ball-grabbing state caused by the game ball being caught on the nail provided in the game area is resolved, and the game ball is later placed in the winning opening. This is because a prize may be won. Therefore, it is desirable to update the number of prize balls regardless of the presence or absence of an out ball.

  When both the out-ball count and the out-ball count buffer value are smaller than the threshold Th2, it may be displayed that the out-ball count buffer value is a fraction smaller than the threshold Th2, or the out-ball count buffer value may be displayed.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the base value is calculated at the timing when the number of out-balls reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, it is necessary to calculate the base value rather than calculating the base value every time an out-ball is detected. The amount of calculation (for example, the load of the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated and a new base value is notified, but until then, the conventional base value is notified. Is done.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation area update processing (step S81). The base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 50 records the number of award balls in the award ball number buffer in order to calculate a base value at a timing when either the number of award balls or the number of out-of-balls satisfies a predetermined condition. The number of out-balls is recorded in the out-ball number buffer. In FIG. 50, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether the gaming state is during the special prize (step S810). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). If there is an award ball, the acquired number of award balls is added to the award ball number buffer (step S813).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of award balls (step S815). If there is an abnormality in the number of award balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a timer for informing the award ball abnormality is reset (step S817). ).

  Thereafter, the number of out-balls is obtained (step S818), and the obtained number of out-balls is added to the out-ball number buffer (step S819).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer has expired, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S824). Step S825).

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display processing (step S89). In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 51, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of award balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 51, the same steps as those in the above-described base calculation / display processing are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of award balls stored in the award ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not time to update the total prize ball count, and the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball count (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball buffer (step S892). Then, the out ball count buffer value is added to the total out ball count (step S893), and the out ball count buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the award ball count buffer value with the threshold Th1.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of out spheres stored in the out sphere number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not time to update the total out-ball count, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the prize ball count buffer value is added to the total prize ball count (step S897), and the prize ball count buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out-balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out-ball count buffer (step S900).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out-balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, and the base calculation / display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A 131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B 131217. Then, after the elapse of 32 clocks, the quotient is read from the division result register A 131218 and set as the base value. When the total number of out-balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 results in an error. Therefore, the base value need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. The base notification command may simply notify the base value or may notify the base value abnormality. Note that the base notification command may be generated each time the base value is calculated, or the base value may not be calculated or the base notification command may not be generated.

  In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 51, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, unless the total prize ball count and the total out ball count are updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the base calculation area 13128.

  The data of the total prize balls number and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area 13128 are based on the base calculation area update processing and the base calculation / display processing (FIGS. 39, 46, 47, 48, and 48) executed by the main control MPU 1311. 49, 51, etc.) and read out in the base calculation / display processing (FIGS. 40, 47, 49, 51, etc.). Also, the data of the prize ball count buffer and the out-ball count buffer in the base calculation area 13128 are written in the base calculation area update processing (FIG. 46, FIG. 48, FIG. 50, etc.) executed by the main control MPU 1311, and the base calculation is performed. -It is read out in the display processing (FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 51, etc.). For this reason, the base calculation area update processing and the base calculation / display processing can be configured separately from the timer interrupt processing (game control program), and the programs for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio are shared by gaming machines having different specifications. it can.

  FIG. 52A shows an example of the structure of a work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52 (A), the prize ball number buffer, the total prize ball number, the out ball number buffer, the winning ball number buffer, the specific winning ball number buffer, the total out ball number, and the base are stored. The prize ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize, and bases the prize ball number upon satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, for each predetermined number of prize balls). Is used to calculate The total number of prize balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize. The out-ball count buffer is the number of game balls fired by the player other than during the special prize, and is used to calculate the base when the out-ball count satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, for each predetermined number of out-balls). Can be The winning ball buffer temporarily stores the number of balls winning the general winning opening and the starting opening. The specific winning ball count buffer temporarily stores the number of balls that have won a specific general winning port or starting port. The winning ball count buffer is used when counting the number of out-balls based on the number of out-going balls (FIGS. 55 and 56). The specific winning ball count buffer is used when correcting the out-ball count with the number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening (FIGS. 71 and 72). The total out ball count is the total number of game balls fired by the player other than during the special prize. The base is calculated as the total number of prize balls / the total number of out balls × 100 and is a numerical value expressed as a percentage, and is calculated in step S903 of the base calculation / display processing.

  In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52 (A), the total number of prize balls and the total number of out-balls correspond to respective areas of the total total of FIG. 52 (B), which will be described later, and each has a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes. And can store a numerical value up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. The base is a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the total sum of the base in FIG. 52B described later, and can store a numerical value up to 255 in decimal. It should be noted that a capacity capable of recording the base value as a decimal may be allocated.

  FIG. 52B shows another example of the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52 (B), a prize ball buffer, a total prize ball count, an out ball count buffer, a winning ball count buffer, a specific winning ball count buffer, a total out ball count, and a base are stored. Each data item is the same as that described in FIG. The storage areas for the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are n storage areas (for example, every 6000 prize balls) for each of a predetermined number of prize balls (or for each of a predetermined number of out balls and for a predetermined time). When the number of award balls reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer for all data moves, and the storage area in which the data is updated changes. . Then, after data of a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area, and stores the data in the first storage area. The write pointer may be moved when data other than the number of award balls (the number of out balls, a predetermined time, etc.) reaches a predetermined number.

  Note that the write pointer and the read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers of all data strings move every predetermined number of winning balls. The read pointer also moves with the movement of the write pointer. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is to calculate the base value using the latest data for 6000 prize balls.

  The total of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is the total value of data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the total value of the base is the total of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls. When the ring buffer makes one cycle and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the accumulated value is excluded by excluding the data in the cleared area. Recalculated. The total total of each data is the total value of all data collected in the past, the value of the base total total calculated from the total value is the value calculated from the total total value of each data, and the ring buffer Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data in one cycle, the total cumulative value including the original data of the cleared area is calculated.

  In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52 (B), the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the ring buffer are each 2-byte storage areas, and can store numerical values up to 65535 in decimal. Since the total is the sum of data of 6000 prize balls × n (60000 prize balls when n = 10), a large storage area is prepared. The total number of the total prize balls and the total number of the out balls are each a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, and can store a numerical value up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal. Since the total sum is not erased unless an error occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. Each of the base total and the total total is a storage area of 1 byte, and can store a numerical value up to 255 in decimal. It should be noted that a capacity capable of recording the base value as a decimal may be allocated.

  In the data structure shown in FIG. 52A, the stored data is not erased, so even if the data in the base calculation area 13128 is erased every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Good. Similarly, the total sum of FIG. 52B may be deleted every predetermined period.

  If the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all data in the base calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Further, it may be notified that the data of the base calculation area 13128 and the calculated base value are abnormal. Alternatively, the data in the backup area may be checked using the check code, and the base value may be calculated again after copying the data in the normal backup area to the main area.

[9-4. Display Base Value]
The base value calculated as described above may be continuously displayed while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. However, when the main body frame 4 is closed and a game is possible, the base display 1317 is visually recognized. Since it is not possible, the 7-segment LED 13172 may be turned off to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. Naturally, even when the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off, the base calculation area update processing (step S81) and the base calculation / display processing (step S89) are executed.

  The base display 1317 may always display the base value, or may display the base value by operating the display switch 1318. For example, when the display switch 1318, which is a push button switch, is pressed, the display of the base value is started, and after the display for a predetermined time, the display is turned off. The base value may be displayed on the base display 1317 if the display switch 1318 is operated while the body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2. That is, if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the body frame 4 is open, the base display 1317 does not display the accessory ratio.

  In addition, when the main body frame 4 is opened, a predetermined display may be displayed on all digits so that it can be confirmed that the base display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36B, "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be turned on.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the base display 1317 is displayed (FIG. 36E), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off. The power consumption of the gaming machine may be reduced. This base non-display state is the same as the state after the completion of the initial setting (FIG. 36B), but may be in a different form as long as it is distinguishable from the displayed base value.

  The base display 1317 may be shared by the function display unit 1400. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the game situation based on a control signal from the main control board 1310. However, when a main frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the main frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the main display unit 1400 displays the game status. The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the base value. Even if the display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, the progress of the game may be continued. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, it is possible to quickly switch from the base display to the display of the game state. For example, when the main frame 4 is opened during the special symbol fluctuation display game, the base value is displayed, but when the main frame 4 is closed before the fluctuation time elapses, the fluctuation display for the remaining time can be performed. . Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbol stops at the timing when the special symbol variable display on the function display unit 1400 stops. For this reason, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the base value, it is possible to configure so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  Further, even while the main body frame 4 is closed, the calculated base value (in the above-described embodiment, the accessory ratio) may be displayed on the base display (an accessory ratio indicator) 1317. In this way, the base value (the ratio of the accessory) can be checked without opening the main body frame 4, so that a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine can be suppressed. Further, it is not necessary to determine whether the main body frame 4 is open. In the island facility where the pachinko machines are installed on both sides, when the main body frame 4 of one pachinko machine is opened, the back of the pachinko machines installed on the opposite side can be seen. In such a gaming machine, by opening the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side, it is possible to confirm the bases (combination ratio) of the two pachinko machines installed back to back. In addition, when the base value is displayed even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the base value is displayed in a form recognizable by the player (for example, on a display device for displaying an effect of the special symbol variation display game or a display device attached to the frame). Should be displayed. This is because the base value can be used as a barometer indicating the condition of the pachinko machine and is worth seeing by the player. When the base value is calculated by the main control board 1310, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. When the base value is calculated by the payout control board 951, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted via the relay board.

  Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the light amount (luminance) of the base display 1317 is not changed even when the mode is shifted to the energy saving mode. If the light amount of the base display 1317 is reduced during the energy saving mode, it is difficult to confirm the base value using the base display 1317 when adjusting the pachinko machine other than the opening hours.

  Specifically, the gaming machine of the present embodiment enters a standby state when a predetermined time has elapsed after the holding of the special symbol variation display game has been exhausted and no gaming ball has won any of the winning ports. . In the standby state, the peripheral control unit 1511 continuously outputs BGM that is output with so-called normal fluctuation. Further, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the standby state, the state shifts to the demonstration state. In the demonstration state, a moving image in which the motif of the gaming machine is known is reproduced, and the explanation of the gaming machine is given. Further, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the demonstration state, the mode shifts to the energy saving mode (the demo state and the energy saving mode do not need to be distinguished). In the energy saving mode, in order to suppress power consumption, the effect display devices 1600, 3114, and 244 controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 and the light amounts of various lamps are reduced. However, since the power consumption of the display devices (the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317) controlled by the main control board 1310 is smaller than the power consumption of the entire pachinko machine, it is not necessary to reduce the light amount of these display devices. Is also good. Further, if the light amount of the function display unit 1400 is not reduced, a player who wants to play a game on an empty stand can easily visually recognize the result of the previous lottery.

  In addition, even if a game ball does not win in the starting port or general winning opening, if the game ball is fired toward the game area and an out ball is detected, the displayed base value may be recalculated and updated. There is. If the number of out-balls increases when the number of out-balls is increased without increasing the number of prize balls, the calculated base value decreases, but some players burn revenge.

  By notifying such a player of the state of the game with the function display unit 1400 also serving as the base display 1317, the interest of the game can be revived. That is, even when the mode shifts to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, the display mode of the display on which the base value is displayed maintains the light amount before shifting to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, or the light amount is increased, so that the player can It is good to be able to confirm the base value properly.

  As described above, the maintenance or the increase of the light amount of the display on which the base value is displayed has been described. However, from the viewpoint of reducing the energy consumption, the light amount of the display on which the base value is displayed is lowered or turned off. Good. For example, a predetermined operation during the energy saving mode (a firing stop button for forcibly stopping firing, an operation button for changing the effect that appears, a RAM clear button for clearing the contents of the RAM, supply of power to the gaming machine) (Operation of an operation means provided in the gaming machine such as a supply adjustment button for switching the presence / absence of the presence / absence) may be reduced by reducing the light amount of the display on which the base value is displayed. Further, not only during the energy saving mode but also when performing the above-described predetermined operation, the light amount of both the lamp and the like for reducing the power consumption and the display displaying the base value are reduced or turned off during the energy saving mode. Is also good.

  When reducing or extinguishing the light intensity of both the lamp and the display that displays the base value, reduce the light intensity of the lamp that reduces power consumption during the energy saving mode before the display that displays the base value. The power may be turned off or turned off. In this case, an effect is obtained in that the light amount of a lamp or the like which consumes a large amount of power is first reduced to greatly reduce the power consumption. In addition, the display on which the base value is displayed may be reduced or extinguished before the lamp or the like on the display on which the base value is displayed. In this case, the gorgeousness of the gaming machine is maintained even during the energy saving mode. It works. In addition, during the energy saving mode, a lamp or the like for reducing power consumption and a display for displaying the base value may be simultaneously reduced or turned off. In this case, the amount of reduction in power consumption can be increased and the energy saving effect is high. . It should be noted that before and after the time in these descriptions (meaning “first” and “simultaneously”) also includes the order of internal processing timing and the order of appearance from the player.

  Further, the display mode of the base value may be set in a plurality of stages, and the display mode of each stage may be changed. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. Divide into several stages. The display for displaying the base value may be configured by a multi-color LED, and the display may be displayed in different colors such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage. Also, the display that displays the base value is composed of a staging display device, and the base value is low at each stage, such as "Good condition", "I'm getting worse", "It's not bad", "In a sense it's amazing" Sometimes masochistic comments may be displayed. Furthermore, without changing the display mode of the display for displaying the base value, the effect of adding the comment as described above may be executed on the effect display device 1600 displaying the decorative symbol.

[9-5. Calculation of base value using the number of out-passing balls]
Next, further variations of the base calculation area update processing (step S81) and the base calculation display processing (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. In the processing described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56, the number of out-balls is calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of out-passing balls, and a base value is calculated. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
54 and FIG. 40: Calculate the base value every time the timer interrupt period occurs. FIG. 55 and FIG. 56: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of out balls. A description of the pattern for calculating the base value and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out-balls will be omitted, but it can be realized by combining FIG. 54 to FIG.

  When the out ball is detected by the out ball passing ball sensor 1021 provided near the out port 1111, there is a problem that the accurate number of out balls cannot be counted. That is, the game ball launched toward the game area 5a flows out of the game area 5a via the general winning opening 2001, the starting opening 2002, and the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 in addition to the out opening 1111. For this reason, the out-passing ball sensor 1021 cannot accurately count the number of game balls fired toward the game area 5a. Thus, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the number of out-balls is accurately calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of out-going balls, and the base value is accurately calculated.

  FIG. 53 is a front view showing another example of the gaming board.

  The game board of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment has substantially the same structure as the game board shown in FIG. 10, but is provided below the game area 5a and passes through the out port 1111 to flow out of the game area 5a. An out-passing ball sensor 1021 for detecting the number of passing ball) is provided. The out-portion passing ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position where the player can see through the out-port 1111. By installing the out-mouth passing ball sensor 1021 at a position where the player can see through the out-mouth 1111, it can be made conscious that the out-balls are counted, that is, the base is calculated.

  Further, the out-portion passing ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position not seen by the player, such as a collecting gutter where game balls flowing down from the game area 5a through the out-portion 1111 are aligned. When the player is placed at a position where the player cannot view the ball, the player does not need to be aware of the number of out-balls. Further, by providing the out-portion passing ball sensor 1021 on the back side of the out-port 1111, it is possible to secure a sufficient place for providing the effect display device and the accessory (movable body), thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the game board 5. it can. Also, in order to prevent double counting of game balls, the rolling surface on which the game balls passing through the out-portion passing ball sensor 1021 rolls so that the game balls passing through the out-portion passing ball sensor 1021 do not rebound. It is good to have a slope or a curved surface.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation area update processing (step S81). The base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 54 obtains the number of award balls, the number of out-passing balls, and the number of winning balls in order to calculate a base value using the number of passing-out balls at each timer interrupt cycle. In FIG. 54, the same steps as those in the above-described base calculation area update processing are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether the gaming state is during the special prize (step S810). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. Then, the number of award balls other than the special award is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of award balls is added to the total number of award balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 54, every time the number of winning balls is calculated, the total number of winning balls used for calculating the base value is updated. In addition, it may be determined whether there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped.

  Thereafter, the number of out-passing balls is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820). Then, the sum of the number of passing-out balls and the number of winning balls is added to the total number of out-balls (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 54, every time an out ball or a winning ball is detected, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

  It should be noted that, as in steps S815 to S817 of the above-described base calculation area update processing (FIG. 46), it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. Alternatively, the award ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825 in FIG. 46, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated. The ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

  After recording the total prize ball count and the total out ball count in the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 54, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation area update processing (step S81). In the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 55, in order to calculate a base value at a timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out spheres satisfies a predetermined condition, the number of prize balls is recorded in a prize ball number buffer. , The number of balls passing through the OUT port is recorded in the number-of-out-balls buffer, and the number of winning balls is recorded in the number-of-prizes-ball buffer. In FIG. 55, the same steps as those in the base calculation area updating process described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether the gaming state is during the special prize (step S810). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). If there is an award ball, the acquired number of award balls is added to the award ball number buffer (step S813).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of award balls (step S815). If there is an abnormality in the number of award balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a timer for informing the award ball abnormality is reset (step S817). ).

  Thereafter, the number of out-passing balls is obtained (step S818), and the obtained number of out-passing balls is added to the out-ball count buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820), and the acquired number of winning balls is added to the winning ball number buffer (step S821).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer has expired, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S824). Step S825).

  In the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 54, the sum of the acquired number of out-passing balls and the number of winning balls is added to one storage area (total number of out balls), and the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. Then, the obtained number of out-passing balls and the number of winning balls are added to another storage area (out-number-of-balls buffer, winning number-of-prizes buffer). As described above, the number of out-passing balls and the number of winning balls may be recorded in one storage area or in another storage area.

  Also, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55, when the acquired number of out-passing balls and the number of winning balls are recorded in different storage areas, the number of out-balls increases by one when a winning port is won. The counting of the number of outgoing balls and the counting of winning balls are performed simultaneously (within one timer interruption process), but the base value is calculated after updating both the out-ball buffer and the winning-ball buffer. At this time, if both the out-ball count buffer and the winning ball count buffer cannot be updated within one timer interrupt process, whether to count the number of balls passing through the out-mouth preferentially or count the number of winning balls first. Is not determined by lottery as appropriate, but should be determined in advance. At this time, if the process relating to the prize ball is prioritized over the other processes, the payout process of the prize ball can be executed quickly, but it may be determined appropriately according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display processing (step S89). In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 56, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of winning balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 56, the same steps as those in the above-described base calculation / display processing are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of award balls stored in the award ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not time to update the total prize ball count, and the process proceeds to step S896. On the other hand, if the prize ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball count (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball buffer (step S892). Then, the out ball count buffer value is added to the total out ball count (step S893), and the out ball count buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the award ball count buffer value with the threshold Th1.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the sum of the number of out-passing balls stored in the out-ball count buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball count buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S896). ). The sum of the number of balls passing through the exit and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls flowing into the game area and is the number of out balls. If the result of determination is that the calculated number of out-balls is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not time to update the total number of out-balls, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out-balls is equal to or larger than the threshold Th2, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball count (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold value Th2 is added to the total number of outgoing balls (step S899), the winning ball number buffer is set to 0, the winning ball number buffer value is added to the outgoing number buffer, and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted (step S901). . Steps S896 to S901 may be executed for each predetermined number of winnings or for each predetermined time without comparing the number of out balls (the number of out balls buffer value + the number of winning balls buffer value) with the threshold Th2.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out-balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, and the base calculation / display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A 131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B 131217. Then, after the elapse of 32 clocks, the quotient is read from the division result register A 131218 and set as the base value. When the total number of out-balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 results in an error. Therefore, the base value need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

  In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 56, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out-balls are not updated. That is, unless the total prize ball count and the total out ball count are updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the number of winning balls is added to the number of passing balls out of the exit to calculate the number of out balls, so that the number of out balls is accurately counted and the base value is calculated accurately. it can. Further, in the manufacturing process and the inspection process of the gaming machine, by confirming the base value, it is possible to confirm whether or not the winning opening switch, the base display 1317 and the process of calculating the base value are normal.

[9-6. Notification of abnormalities in the base]
The process described above is for generating a command for reporting the calculated base value. Next, a process for determining an abnormality in the base value and reporting the abnormality will be described.
FIG. 57: Calculate the base value every time the timer interrupts cycle. FIG. 58: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of out-balls. The description of the pattern for calculating the base value for each out-ball count is omitted, but can be realized by combining FIG. 57 and FIG.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display processing (step S89). In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 57, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

  First, it is determined whether the total number of out-balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out spheres is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation / display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A 131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B 131217. Then, after the elapse of 32 clocks, the quotient is read from the division result register A 131218 and set as the base value. When the total number of out-balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 results in an error. Therefore, the base value need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

  After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than a design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. Note that a plurality of allowable ranges may be provided to determine the degree of abnormality in a plurality of steps based on the degree of deviation of the base value. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or the hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display processing ends. The same method as the above-described base notification can be adopted as a method of notifying the base abnormality.

  For example, one of the methods described below may be used, or two or more may be combined. Specifically, the base value (7-segment LED) 1317, the effect display devices 1600, 3114, 244, and the like may notify the abnormality of the base value. If the player is notified of the abnormality of the base value, the player may be able to confirm the abnormality of the pachinko machine. The calculated base value may be displayed as a percentage notation on the above-described display or display device to notify an abnormality of the base value. The value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up. On a display device that can display an image such as a staging display device 1600, 3114, or 244, the value is displayed to the first decimal place and displayed in more detail. You may.

  When displaying the base value on the effect display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, if the base value is abnormal, the display mode may be changed. For example, the numerical value is displayed by blinking or by changing its color (green in a normal state and red in an abnormal state). Further, the display mode of the base value may be changed in a plurality of stages. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. The display may be divided into a plurality of stages and the emission color may be changed in each stage such as white, blue, and yellow.

  Further, the range of the base value (such as whether the base value is high or low, an abnormal value or a normal value, etc.) may be notified by various lamps, effect display devices, sounds, and the like. The function display unit 1400 may notify the abnormality of the base value. In addition, information on abnormalities of the base may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game arcade.

  The base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 57 is performed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 55, at the timing when the number of prize balls and the number of out balls satisfy a predetermined condition. It may be used in combination with the base calculation area update processing to be updated.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display processing (step S89). In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 58, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of winning balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 58, the same steps as those in the base calculation / display processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of award balls stored in the award ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not time to update the total prize ball count, and the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball count (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball buffer (step S892). Then, the out ball count buffer value is added to the total out ball count (step S893), and the out ball count buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the award ball count buffer value with the threshold Th1.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of out spheres stored in the out sphere number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not time to update the total out-ball count, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the prize ball count buffer value is added to the total prize ball count (step S897), and the prize ball count buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out-balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out-ball count buffer (step S900).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out-balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, and the base calculation / display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A 131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B 131217. Then, after the elapse of 32 clocks, the quotient is read from the division result register A 131218 and set as the base value. When the total number of out-balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 results in an error. Therefore, the base value need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

  After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than a design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. Note that a plurality of allowable ranges may be provided to determine the degree of abnormality in a plurality of steps based on the degree of deviation of the base value. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or the hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display processing ends.

  In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 58, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, unless the total prize ball count and the total out ball count are updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

  The base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 58 updates the total prize ball count and the total out ball count directly using the acquired prize ball count and out ball count, for example, as shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. It may be used in combination with the base calculation area update processing.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when the calculated base value is abnormal, the abnormal is notified, so that the player can know the state of the gaming machine, and the hall employee can know the state of the gaming machine. It is possible to know the possibility of an unauthorized operation on the gaming machine. Further, it is possible to detect and notify an abnormality of the gaming machine which cannot be detected by the conventional error detection.

[9-7. Notification of base change]
Next, a description will be given of an embodiment of a gaming machine for notifying a change in the calculated base value.

  The base value calculated by the pachinko machine naturally goes up and down. Since the base value indicates the condition of the gaming machine, a player who is playing a game is concerned not only with the base value itself but also with a change in the base value. Therefore, it is desired that the player be notified of the change in the base value. When a display that serves as a guide above and below the base value appears, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display processing (step S89). In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 59, the history of the calculated base value is recorded in order to compare the current base value with the history of the past base values. In FIG. 59, the same steps as those in the base calculation / display processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of award balls stored in the award ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not time to update the total prize ball count, and the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball count (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball buffer (step S892). Then, the out ball count buffer value is added to the total out ball count (step S893), and the out ball count buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the award ball count buffer value with the threshold Th1.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of out spheres stored in the out sphere number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not time to update the total out-ball count, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the prize ball count buffer value is added to the total prize ball count (step S897), and the prize ball count buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out-balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out-ball count buffer (step S900).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out-balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, and the base calculation / display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A 131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B 131217. Then, after the elapse of 32 clocks, the quotient is read from the division result register A 131218 and set as the base value. When the total number of out-balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 results in an error. Therefore, the base value need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the time of the base value management timer has expired (step S904). If the base value management timer has not expired, it is not time to store the base value in the base history, and the base calculation / display processing ends. On the other hand, if the base value management timer has expired, the base value is stored in the base history (step S905), and the base value management timer is reset (step S906).

  The base value management timer is a timer used to record a base value every predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes), and stores a current base value in a base history every time the base value management timer times out. The base history is stored in the base calculation area 13128. Only one base history may be stored in the base calculation area 13128, or a plurality of base histories may be stored in the base calculation area 13128. When storing a plurality of base histories in the base calculation area 13128, a ring buffer may be configured in the base calculation area 13128, and for example, a predetermined time × 10 base values may be stored. Also, as shown in FIG. 52, a ring buffer for the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is formed in the base calculation area 13128, and stores, for example, a predetermined time × n number of prize balls and the total number of out balls, The base value may be calculated as needed.

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the display selection process. The display selection process is called from the display data creation process (step S1030) of the process at power-on of the peripheral control unit (FIG. 60).

  First, the MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 selects a specific base history (for example, the latest past base value) stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value. Is determined (step S10301). As a result, if the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value, it is determined whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the base value decrease by referring to the base decrease duration measuring timer. (Step S10302). Then, if the predetermined time has not elapsed from the start of lowering the base, an effect table in which the base is lowering is selected (step S10303). On the other hand, if the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the base decrease, the effect table in which the base decrease is continued is selected (step S10304).

  On the other hand, if the selected base history value is not smaller than (equal to or larger than) the current base value, the base lowering duration measuring timer is reset (step S10305), and a display selection table in which the base is rising is selected (step S10306). ).

  In the display selection process described above, in step S10301, it was determined whether the current base value is smaller than the base history value. However, the current base value is compared with the base history value to determine whether the current base value is larger, equal, or smaller. May be. The base value is generally a decimal value because it is obtained by division. Therefore, it is preferable to determine whether the base history value is equal to the current base value in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

  FIGS. 64 to 68 are diagrams illustrating an example of the display selection table. These display selection tables are used to select an effect of the special symbol variation display game by a random number selected at the time of winning in the starting port (or before the start of the special symbol variation display game). The display selection table 1 shown in FIGS. 64 to 66 is selected when the base value is increasing or when there is no change in the base value, and the display selection tables 2 and 3 shown in FIGS. 67 and 68 are selected when the base value is decreasing. Selected. In particular, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value began to decrease.

  Each display selection table includes each item of the effect number, the effect content, the variation time, the remarks, and the sorting. The effect number is an identifier for uniquely identifying the effect selected in the display selection table. The effect content is the name of the effect. The fluctuating time is a time from the start of the change of the special symbol by the effect to the end thereof. The remarks are information describing the outline of the effect so that the designer can understand it. The distribution is a probability that the effect is selected, and is defined by a numerator having 65536 as a denominator.

  The display selection table 1 (outlier) shown in FIG. 64 is selected when the result of the big hit lottery is outlier and the base value is increasing or does not change. Is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot that does not derive a probability change state and the base value is increasing or does not change. The display selection table 1 (hit 2) shown in FIG. 66 is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability change big hit for deriving a probability change state and the base value is increasing or does not change.

  The display selection table 2 shown in FIG. 67 is selected while the base value is decreasing. Further, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected when the base value has decreased even if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value began to decrease.

  As shown in the figure, the display selection tables 2 and 3 include freeze effects 1 and 2, which are effects in which the symbols do not change, and the freeze effect is selected with a high probability. The freeze effect is displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the effect is determined.

  Also, even if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the base value has started to decrease, if the base value has decreased, an effect is selected using the display selection table 3 and the selected effect is selected. You may switch.

  Further, whether to display a specific effect for notifying a change in the base value may be determined according to the game state (game state). This is because if the player is constantly informed of the change in the base value, the player's attention to the effect of the special symbol change display game, which is the original pleasure of pachinko machines, is neglected, and the consciousness of the player may be dispersed. Because there is.

  For example, during the execution of the special symbol variation display game (game situation where the result of the jackpot lottery is not shown), the effect of the special symbol variation display game is executed with priority, and when the variation is not in progress, the base value increases. It is preferable to display a specific effect (effect serving as a measure of a change in the base value) at the time of or at the time of descending.

  The specific effect may be displayed at a timing when a time during which the special symbol change display game is not executed continues for a predetermined time. Here, if the specific effect is displayed immediately after the end of the special symbol change display game, the player's sense of tension is maintained and fatigue is accumulated. When a game ball wins at the starting port in a state where the specific effect is displayed, the display of the specific effect is stopped and the effect of the special symbol variation display game is executed. This is because a jackpot lottery is performed and a special symbol variation display game is started when a prize is received at the starting opening, so that it is better to cause the player to pay attention to the special symbol variation display game.

  The specific effect may be displayed even in a situation where the number of prize balls has not reached a predetermined number (threshold Th1) or in a situation where the number of out-balls has not reached a predetermined number (threshold Th2). Further, the specific effect may be displayed according to the result of the lottery, but may be always executed if the same condition is satisfied.

  Also, the specific effect may not be displayed when the base value rises, but may be displayed only when the base value falls. This is because notifying the player of an increase in the base value increases the expectation of the player, and if the base value does not increase to the extent that the player expects, the gap with the expectation may cause the player to be discouraged. is there. On the other hand, if the player is notified of the decrease in the base value, there is a player who raises the fighting spirit to increase the base value.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display selection table is changed while the base value is decreasing and other than that (during the rising and steady state). However, the display selection table is divided into three states, that is, the base value is decreasing, the steady state and the rising state. A selection table may be defined to notify the player that the base is rising. In this case, it is preferable to determine whether the base value is in a steady state (whether the base history value is equal to the current base value) in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

  Further, the specific effect may be displayed during the special symbol change display game. In this case, there is a higher possibility that the base value will decrease when displayed during a non-special symbol variation display game than when displayed during the special symbol variation display game.

  Note that, in a state where the game ball does not win the starting port and the special symbol change display game is not performed, the base value usually decreases. If the special symbol change display game has not been played for a predetermined time, a demonstration screen is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 69A shows a display example of the normal reach, in which the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. FIG. 69 (B) is a display example of special reach 1, in which the left symbol and the right symbol displayed at the upper left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is changing. In the center of the screen, the player and the opponent are playing a rock-paper-scissor battle, and the result of the rock-paper-scissors determines the medium symbol. FIG. 69 (C) is a display example of the special reach 2, in which the left symbol and the right symbol displayed at the upper left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is changing. In the center of the screen, the player and the opponent are fighting, and the medium symbol is determined based on the result of the battle.

  FIG. 69 (D) is a display example of freeze effect 1, in which a stopped decorative symbol is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is reduced at a position that does not hinder the recognition of the decorative symbol (for example, at the lower right of the screen). Display that can be recognized. FIG. 69 (E) is a display example of freeze effect 2, in which a stopped decorative symbol is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is reduced at a position that does not hinder the recognition of the decorative symbol (for example, at the bottom of the screen). Provide a display that recognizes continuation. In the freeze effect, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be any position as long as the position does not hinder the recognition of the decorative symbol. Further, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative symbol. For example, a display that pops up at the center of the display screen may be used.

  The example in which the degree of change of the base value is displayed on the effect display device 1600 has been described above, but the lighting mode of the decorative lamp may be changed. Further, the change of the base value may be indicated by a numerical value, instead of the upward and downward tendency of the base value.

  The displayed change in the base value is the total of the base values calculated before the predetermined time, even if the comparison result between the base value calculated in the time period before the predetermined time and the base value calculated in the current time period is obtained. The result may be a comparison between the latest base value and the latest total value.

[9-8. Calculation based on specific general winning openings]
Next, a description will be given of a process of accurately calculating a base value in consideration of winning in a specific general winning opening.

  In the pachinko machine, the player aims to win a specific winning opening (for example, the open winning opening 2005 or 2006 in an open state) in which the gaming ball can easily win during the big hit, and the game ball is played. Adjust the launch intensity. Even during a big hit, a game ball is fired by aiming at the same place as that of a so-called normal hit and aiming at the special winning opening 2005, or by aiming at the special winning opening 2006 by a so-called right-hand shot with the firing strength increased to the maximum. There are variations. In such a variation, a game board may be designed to arrange a starting port or a general winning port downstream of the special winning port and to pick up a ball spilled from the special winning port.

  Here, the downstream (lower) portion of the right-handed pachinko machine during the big hit will be described in detail. During a big hit, the player makes a right-handed hit so that a game ball can be placed in the open big winning opening. Many of the game balls fired toward the game area win the open special winning opening 2006 which is being opened. As described above, the pachinko machine of this embodiment is provided with the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the big winning opening 2005 as shown in FIGS. 10 and 16, and the right-handed gaming ball is being opened. When the player does not win the special winning opening 2006, the player wins the general winning opening 2001. In other words, it can be said that the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the big winning opening 2005 wins only when the right-handed game ball does not win the open big winning opening 2006.

  The base value is the number of prize balls paid out by winning in the starting port and the general prize port when 100 game balls are fired toward the game area 5a (that is, the payout number for 100 out balls). (The ratio of the number of issued prize balls) to indicate the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area but have a low probability of winning in the starting port and the general winning port (high probability of winning in the large winning port). When counted as (the number of out-balls), it is assumed that when calculated as the base value, it deviates from the actual base value.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the special winning opening 2005 is defined as a specific general winning opening, and the number of balls winning the specific general winning opening during the special prize is excluded from the number of out balls. To calculate the base value.

The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation of the gaming machine for calculating the base value in consideration of the specific general winning opening is as follows.
70 and FIG. 40: Calculate the base value every time the timer interrupt period occurs. FIG. 71 and FIG. 72: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of out balls. Although the description of the pattern for calculating the base value and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out-balls is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIG. 70 to FIG.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation area update processing (step S81). The base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 70 is performed in order to calculate the base value using the number of out balls corrected by the number of winning balls to a specific general winning opening for each timer interrupt period. Obtain the number of balls and the number of specific winning balls. In FIG. 70, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether the gaming state is during the special prize (step S810). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. Then, the number of award balls other than the special award is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of award balls is added to the total number of award balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 70, every time the number of winning balls is calculated, the total number of winning balls used for calculating the base value is updated. In addition, it may be determined whether there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped.

  Thereafter, the number of out-balls is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls to a specific general winning opening (specific number of winning balls) is acquired (step S820). Then, a value obtained by subtracting the number of specific winning balls from the number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 70, every time an out ball or a winning ball is detected, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

  It should be noted that, as in steps S815 to S817 of the above-described base calculation area update processing (FIG. 46), it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. Alternatively, the award ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825 in FIG. 46, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated. The ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

  After recording the total prize ball count and the total out ball count in the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 70, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update processing (step S81). The base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 71 is to record the number of prize balls in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls and the number of out balls satisfy a predetermined condition, and Record the number in the out ball count buffer. In FIG. 71, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether the gaming state is during the special prize (step S810). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). If there is an award ball, the acquired number of award balls is added to the award ball number buffer (step S813).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of award balls (step S815). If there is an abnormality in the number of award balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a timer for informing the award ball abnormality is reset (step S817). ).

  Thereafter, the number of out-balls is obtained (step S818), and the obtained number of out-balls is added to the out-ball number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired, it is determined whether or not the winning port associated with the acquired number of winning balls is a specific general winning port, and the number of winning balls to the specific general winning port is acquired (step S820). Then, the acquired number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening is added to the specific winning ball number buffer (step S823).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer has expired, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S824). Step S825).

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display processing (step S89). In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated in consideration of the specific winning ball count recorded in the specific winning ball count buffer. In FIG. 72, the same steps as those in the above-described base calculation / display processing are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of award balls stored in the award ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not time to update the total prize ball count, and the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball count (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball buffer (step S892). Then, the out ball count buffer value is added to the total out ball count (step S893), and the out ball count buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the award ball count buffer value with the threshold Th1.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the sum of the number of outgoing balls stored in the out-ball count buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball count buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). ). The sum of the number of balls passing through the exit and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls flowing into the game area and is the number of out balls. If the result of determination is that the calculated number of out-balls is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not time to update the total number of out-balls, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out-balls is equal to or larger than the threshold Th2, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball count (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the number of specific winning balls is subtracted from the total number of out balls, and the threshold Th2 is added (step S899). The winning ball buffer is set to 0, and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball buffer (step S900).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out-balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, and the base calculation / display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A 131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B 131217. Then, after the elapse of 32 clocks, the quotient is read from the division result register A 131218 and set as the base value. When the total number of out-balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 results in an error. Therefore, the base value need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

  After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than a design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. Note that a plurality of allowable ranges may be provided to determine the degree of abnormality in a plurality of steps based on the degree of deviation of the base value. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or the hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display processing ends.

  In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total prize ball count and the total out ball count are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, the base value maintains the same value, and if the total prize ball count or the total out ball count is updated, The base value is updated to a different value. The base value may be calculated at a timing when one of the total prize ball count and the total out ball count is updated, or the base value may be calculated at a timing when both of them are updated.

  Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value is calculated by excluding the game balls that have flowed into the game area but are unlikely to win the starting port and the general winning opening, so that the deviation from the actual base value may be different. A small base value can be calculated accurately.

  Also, the case where the general winning opening 2001 is located downstream of the special winning opening 2006 with the pachinko machine that strikes right during the big hit has been described, but the invention according to the present embodiment aims at the large winning opening 2005 by the normal hit during the big hit. A pachinko machine can also be applied to a gaming machine provided with a starting port or a general winning port downstream of the special winning port 2005.

  In the game area 5a, large winning prize openings 2005 and 2006 are arranged, which do not normally accept game balls but allow game balls to be accepted according to the jackpot lottery result. The prize balls resulting from winning in the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the special ball change display game is started when the game ball wins the starting openings 2002 and 2004, and after the special symbol is determined and the large winning opening 2005 and 2006 are opened (big hit opening), the large winning opening is started. From the closing of 2005 and 2006 to the start of the next special symbol change display game (big hit ending), the detected out ball is excluded from the number of out balls as a special prize. In this way, the number of prize balls and the number of out-balls during a special prize can be counted without determining whether or not a special prize is being performed in step S810 of FIG. When the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing with one big hit, the time from the closing of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 to the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the special prize. In other words, during the special prize means that the condition device is operating, for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. Also, all times during the right-handed instruction may be included. Further, in the start-up ports 2002 and 2004, during the time reduction, during the probable change (during the ST), and during the power support, the special award may be included. Further, in a game state other than during the working hours, during the probable change (during the ST), and during the power support, a predetermined time after the opening of the starting port 2004 until the closing thereof (for example, until a ball winning the starting port is detected as an out ball). The period up to the required several seconds) may be included in the special prize.

  Also, in the game area 5a, a second starting port 2004 which normally does not accept game balls but can accept game balls in accordance with a result of a lottery of a normal symbol is arranged. The prize ball resulting from winning in the second starting port 2004 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 to perform a normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol variation display game starts, and the normal symbol is determined and then released (opening). During the period from the closing of the game until the next normal symbol variation display game starts (ending), the detected out ball is excluded from the number of out balls as a special prize. In the case where the second starting port 2004 repeatedly opens and closes according to the result of the normal symbol lottery, the time from the closing of the second starting port 2004 to the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the award. In this way, all winnings in the second starting port 2004, not only during the working hours, can be excluded from the calculation of the base value.

  In this way, the number of prize balls and the number of out-balls other than during the special prize (big hit, time saving, etc.) can be accurately counted without determining whether or not the special prize is being performed in step S810 in FIG. 39 or the like.

  In this way, the number of out balls and the number of award balls while the player is right-handed can be accurately excluded, and the base value can be accurately calculated.

  Further, depending on the pachinko machine, it is recommended to play a game by left-handing in a state where neither a big hit nor a time reduction (a so-called normal state), and to play a right-handed game during a big hit or during a time reduction. In such a gaming machine, there are provided a general winning opening 2001 and a first starting opening 2002 for winning when left-handed, and a general winning opening 2001 and second starting opening 2004 for winning when right-handed. In such a gaming machine, the number of winning ports in the center from the left side of the gaming area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting left) and the right side of the gaming area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting right), The ball entry rate to each winning opening differs depending on the arrangement and the arrangement position of the nails. In other words, the left-handed base value differs from the right-handed base value.

  The base value of the pachinko machine is set on the assumption that the player makes a left-hand hit in the normal state. However, as described above, when the base value differs between left-handing and right-handing (for example, when the base value for right-handing in a normal state is designed to be lower than that for left-handing). When the player makes a right strike in the normal state, a low base value is calculated.

  In the hall, the pachinko machine having a low base value is considered to have an abnormality and is inspected, or is judged to be a gaming machine having poor payout performance. Even in a pachinko machine determined to have a poor ball-out performance (lower than the assumed base), the hole determines that the player is performing a left-handed operation, so the starting port or the starting port that acts on the base for the left-handed operation Make adjustments to increase the ball entry rate of general winning openings. Then, the nail having the abnormality is adjusted to increase the base value. When the gaming machine adjusted in this manner is left-handed, many prize balls can be obtained even in a normal state. In other words, many lotteries can be received for a small amount. In other words, even if the base at the time of left-handing is not different from what the hole assumed, the hole is misunderstood and an adjustment to increase the ball entry rate of the starting opening or the general winning opening at the time of left-handing is performed. Since there is a possibility that the hole may be disadvantaged due to such malice of the player, it is necessary to accurately calculate the left-handed base value and the right-handed base value.

  By the way, a pachinko machine that performs a right-handed operation during working hours has a second starting port 2004 that opens and closes depending on the game state, and a gate unit 2003 for performing a normal symbol lottery for opening the second starting port 2004. The game ball is arranged in a rolling area. In addition, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 by right-handing to the normal state, even if a lottery of a normal symbol is performed, the probability of winning the general symbol is extremely reduced so that the second starting port 2004 is not opened, Even if the symbol lottery is won, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is shortened to make it difficult to win the second starting port 2004 in the normal state.

  Here, in order to increase the base value in the state where the ball is struck right in the normal state, the ball entry rate to the second starting port 2004 is increased. However, since the second starting port 2004 is generally set to be more advantageous than the first starting port 2002, increasing the ball entry rate into the second starting port 2004 will reduce the profit of the hole. Therefore, game balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003 in the normal state are counted, and when calculating the base value, a corrected base value may be calculated using the number of passing balls of the gate unit 2003.

  Specifically, in the normal state, the number of game balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003 is subtracted from the number of out balls (the number of game balls hit toward the game area 5a) as the number of specific winning balls. A high base calculation can be obtained by reducing the number of out balls. For example, when a considerable number of game balls pass through the gate unit 2003, an extremely high base value is calculated. Note that the degree of the correction process may be appropriately determined based on the design value (performance) of the gaming machine.

  Furthermore, the passage of the gate portion 2003 is monitored, and when a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 (for example, when a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls pass through the gate portion 2003 without winning the starting opening). The condition may be set), and the number of out-balls counted for a predetermined time or a predetermined number of shots after (or before and after) passing through the gate unit 2003 may not be used for calculating the base value. In this way, the base value can be calculated more accurately. When passage through the gate unit 2003 is detected, a display or sound such as "Please return to left-handed" may be output without actively notifying the player that the result is not reflected in the calculation result of the base value. Further, when the passage of the gate portion 2003 is detected, the right may be notified to the hall that the right-hand driving is being performed. For example, a specific lamp may be turned on, the lighting mode may be changed, or the fact that the player is right-handed may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall.

  As described above, by excluding the number of passing balls of the gate portion 2003 provided on the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting right) from the number of out-balls, a right-handed shot in the normal state. The base value at the time can be corrected to a large value. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a change in the base calculation value due to the player's game style.

[9-9. Initialize base value]
In view of the role of the base value in checking the operation status of the pachinko machine 1, it is desirable that the calculated base value be held for a long time. Also, it is desirable that the calculated base value cannot be easily erased. For this reason, the base calculation / display data 13136 is erased under another condition different from the erase condition of the data related to the progress of the game, which is backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. As a result, accurate data on the number of awarded balls can be held, and the accurate accessory ratio can be calculated.

  Specifically, the base calculation / display data 13136 is not erased depending on the operation of the RAM clear switch (first operation), but the backup power supplied to the main control MPU 1311 is cut off and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off. By the second operation of shutting down, all data backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 can be erased. In the second operation, a single switch for realizing this operation may be provided, or an employee of the game shop disconnects the connector of the backup power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310, and the pachinko machine 1 May be shut off.

  In other words, two operations are prepared to erase the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. In the first operation, only data related to the progress of the game is erased, but in the second operation, the calculated base value is erased. And all data including data related to the progress of the game.

  With such a configuration, the base calculation / display data 13136 is not erased due to an erroneous operation of a game room attendant, so that the reliability of the displayed accessory ratio is increased, and concealment of a state where the accessory ratio is high can be prevented. .

[9-10. Calculation based on winning abnormalities]
FIG. 73 and FIG. 74 are flowcharts of the base calculation area update processing in consideration of the winning abnormality.

  In the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the abnormality in the number of winning balls determined in step S815 described above, a winning abnormality may be detected. For example, when a winning is detected other than during the opening of the special winning opening 2005 or 2006 due to the jackpot being derived in the special symbol variation display game, or when the winning is derived in the normal symbol variation displaying game, the starting port 2004 is generated. If a prize is detected other than during the opening of, the prize is abnormal. That is, the abnormality in the number of winning balls determined in step S815 is an abnormal operation detected from the number of winning balls, and is mainly when a large number of winning balls are obtained in a predetermined time. On the other hand, the winning abnormality is an abnormal operation detected from the number of winning balls, and is mainly a winning in a state where it is impossible to win or a case where many winnings are detected in a predetermined time.

  Since the winning sphere related to the winning prize is counted as an out sphere, it is desirable to correct the amount and calculate the base accurately. For this reason, in the base calculation area updating process in consideration of the winning abnormality, the total number of out balls is corrected so as to reduce the number of winning balls related to the detected winning abnormality.

  In addition, since the winning prize mouths 2005 and 2006 and the starting opening 2004 are normally won only during the special prize, the winning spheres in these winning prizes are not counted as out balls for calculating the base, and the winning prize is not counted. There is no need to consider abnormalities.

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the base calculation area update processing (step S81). The base calculation area update processing determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as a game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and updates the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. I do. In particular, the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 73 is similar to the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 39, in order to calculate the base value every time the timer interrupt period occurs. The total number of prize balls is directly updated using the number of prize balls calculated in (Step S814), and the total number of out-balls is directly updated using the number of out-balls (Step S822). In FIG. 73, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether the gaming state is during the special prize (step S810). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG.

  If the gaming state is the special prize, the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore, the base calculation region updating process is terminated without updating the prize ball count or the out-ball count. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation area update processing may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of award balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command may be used. Alternatively, the main control board 1310 may transmit a payout command to the payout control board 951 and receive the acknowledgment (ACK) from the payout control board 951. Furthermore, the main control board 1310 may transmit the payout command to the payout control board 951, and may receive the payout completion report from the payout control board 951 (the number of paid out prize balls). This variation has already been described with reference to FIGS.

  Then, the acquired prize ball count is added to the total prize ball count to update the total prize ball count (step S814). In addition, it may be determined whether there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped. In addition, although the game balls have won the starting openings 2002 and 2004, the holding is the upper limit, and even if the winning in the starting opening is not suspended, the prize balls are paid out, so that the total number of winning balls is updated. Further, in a game state in which a prize ball is not generated even when a game ball is awarded in the winning opening (for example, at the time of occurrence of a specific error), no prize ball due to the prize is generated and the number of prize balls to be acquired is reduced. Since it is 0, the total prize ball count is not updated. The total prize ball count is recorded in a total prize ball storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 73, every time the number of winning balls is calculated, the total number of winning balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

  Thereafter, the number of out-balls is obtained (step S818). Then, it is determined whether a winning abnormality has been detected (step S826). Then, the number of game balls corresponding to the winning determined as abnormal is obtained (step S827). More specifically, as described above, when a prize in the special winning opening 2005 or 2006 is detected other than during the special prize (during the operation of the condition device) caused by the jackpot being derived in the special symbol change display game, If a winning in the starting opening 2004 is detected while the game is not being opened due to a winning derived in the normal symbol variation display game, it is determined that the winning is abnormal.

  If one prize ball related to the prize abnormality is detected, it may be determined that the prize is abnormal, or if a predetermined number of prize balls related to the prize abnormality are detected, it may be determined that the prize is abnormal. Further, when a predetermined number of prize balls related to the prize abnormality are continuously detected, it may be determined that the prize is abnormal, or when a predetermined number of prize balls according to the prize abnormality are detected within a predetermined time, it is determined that the prize is abnormal. May be.

  Then, the total number of out-balls is updated so that the obtained number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls (step S822). As described above, the number of out-balls is detected by the shooting-ball sensor 1020, the ejection-ball sensor 3060, and the like, and the detection signals of these sensors are read and acquired in the switch input process of step S74. At this time, a value obtained by subtracting the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the obtained number of out balls may be added to the total number of out balls, or the obtained number of out balls may be added to the total number of out balls, and then the winning The abnormal winning ball count may be subtracted from the total out ball count. The total number of out-balls is recorded in a total-out-ball number storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 73, every time an out ball is detected, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated. As described above, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process, the total number of out-balls is updated, and the base value is calculated and displayed in the base calculation display process (FIG. 40), so that the base value is displayed without delay. It is possible to determine whether the base value is normal or abnormal without delay.

  It is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls as in steps S815 to S817 of a base calculation area updating process (FIG. 74) described later, and if there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. Alternatively, the award ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has expired, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has expired, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is performed. May be stopped.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation process of the base value in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute the calculation process of the base value. In this case, a command for informing the base to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may be transmitted from the main control board 1310, or a command for informing the peripheral control unit 1511 of the base from the payout control unit 952. May be transmitted.

  Also, in one timer interrupt process, even if information on both the winning prize to the winning opening and the out ball is acquired, the number of prize balls is set to the total number of prize balls (or a prize ball number buffer in an embodiment described later). Then, the number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls (or an out-ball number buffer in an embodiment described later). Further, in one timer interrupt process, even if information on winning in a plurality of winning openings is obtained, the total number of winning balls resulting from the plurality of winnings is calculated as the total number of winning balls (or a winning ball number buffer in an embodiment described later). ). Therefore, the base value can be accurately calculated and displayed. For example, when a prize is detected to the winning opening sensor of the winning opening having five prize balls and the winning opening sensor of the winning opening having three prize balls, a total of eight prize balls are counted as the total winning prize balls. (Or prize ball number buffer).

  The prize ball count may be added to the total prize ball count (or the prize ball count buffer) only when the launch of the game ball is detected. In other words, only the number of prize balls related to winning detected within a predetermined time after the detection of the launch ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total prize ball number (or prize ball number buffer). In addition, the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is detected, and while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is operating (further, the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is stopped. Alternatively, only the number of prize balls related to winning detected in a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds) may be added to the total prize ball number or the prize ball number buffer. The prize ball count may be added to the total prize ball count (or the prize ball count buffer) only when the player operates the firing handle. That is, only the number of prize balls related to winning detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when a hand or a finger is detected to be touching the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is determined as the total number of prize balls ( Alternatively, it may be added to the award ball count buffer). In this way, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being reflected in the base value due to an abnormality or improper operation of detecting the prize ball in a state where the game ball is not fired, and to prevent an incorrect display of the base value. In this case, if the contact detection sensor 509 is used, it is not necessary to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed from increasing.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation area update processing (step S81). In the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 74, the out-ball count is recorded in the out-ball count buffer in order to calculate the base value at a timing when the out-ball count satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). In FIG. 74, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether the gaming state is during the special prize (step S810). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). If the result of determination in step S812 is that there is no winning ball, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of winning balls. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815). If there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). . That is, in the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 74, every time the number of winning balls is calculated, the total number of winning balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

  On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the award ball count, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the award ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817).

  Thereafter, the number of out-balls is obtained (step S818). The acquired number of out-balls is added to the out-ball number buffer (step S819). Then, it is determined whether a winning abnormality is detected (step S826), and the number of gaming balls corresponding to the winning determined as abnormal is obtained (step S827).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer has expired, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S824). Step S825).

  In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the out balls are corrected by the number of all the winning balls related to the abnormal winning, but the out balls are corrected for the winning balls related to the specific type of the abnormal winning, and the other balls are corrected. It is not necessary to correct the out ball in a winning ball related to a particular type of winning abnormality. For example, depending on the type of the winning sphere related to the winning prize, the prize ball may or may not be paid out for the winning prize ball. Whether or not to pay out a prize ball for this winning prize abnormality may be determined for each prize port. In this case, a winning prize in which a prize ball is not paid out is not counted as a total out ball and should not be used for calculating a base value. On the other hand, with respect to a winning prize in which a prize ball is paid out, the prize ball may be counted as a total out ball, the prize ball to be paid out may be counted as a total prize ball number, and used for calculating a base value. Even if a winning prize ball is paid out, even if the winning prize is paid out, the winning prize ball is not counted as the total out sphere, the paid out prize ball is not counted as the total prize ball number, and may not be used for calculating the base value.

  For example, as a result of maintenance of a malfunction of a gaming machine (such as clearing of a clogged ball), a hall employee may manually insert a game ball into the starting opening to compensate for the outgoing ball so as not to damage the player. In this case, a prize ball is paid out for a prize at the starting port. The winning at the starting port is detected as a winning error, but a prize ball is paid out. When a prize ball is paid out as described above, it should be reflected in the base value, and therefore it is not necessary to determine that the winning is abnormal. In this case, a prize ball is paid out at the winning opening (starting opening 2002, 2004) which is reflected in the calculation of the base value, and a winning prize ball is paid out at another winning opening (large winning opening 2005, 2006) without judging a winning abnormality. It is good to determine a winning abnormality without paying out. A winning opening for determining a winning abnormality has a smaller number of prize balls paid out by a prize than a winning opening for which no winning abnormality is determined (3 starting balls and 15 winning prize holes). For this reason, although a winning prize is determined in the large winning opening, even if the abnormal winning is not determined in the starting opening, it does not become a large security hole from the viewpoint of protection against fraud. In this way, by determining the winning abnormality, it is possible to prevent inconsistency between the out ball and the number of the winning balls. In particular, by correcting the number of out balls using the number of winning balls related to a winning abnormality that does not generate a winning ball, it is possible to match the number of winning balls with the out ball that causes the winning ball.

  As described above, a winning abnormality can be determined at various winning ports, but a specific example of mounting on a pachinko machine will be described.

  First, the prize abnormality may not be determined in the general prize port 2001, but may be determined in prize ports other than the general prize port 2001 (large prize ports 2005 and 2006, start ports 2002 and 2004). Since it is difficult to simultaneously win a plurality of gaming balls, the general winning opening is a large winning opening 2005, 2006 or a starting opening 2002 (an electric accessory that opens and closes while improving the security resistance of the gaming machine against fraudulent acts). The ball can be compensated for the ball by entering the general winning opening 2001 (total of four) provided more than the total (three in total). In addition, since the general winning opening 2001 can be easily identified by the employee of the hall, the operation for the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 and the compensation for the exiting ball are easy. As a reason that the employee of the hall can easily identify the general winning opening 2001, the general winning opening 2001 is often arranged collectively (in a divided area) in the game area, and the electric accessory (large winning opening) This is because the decoration members (appearance) are different from the decoration members (appearance). In addition, when the number of prize balls with respect to the winning of one ball in the general winning opening is small, there is an effect that the security resistance of the gaming machine against improper behavior is improved. Note that a winning abnormality may not be determined only for a specific general winning opening (for example, the left end), but may be determined for other general winning openings.

  In the special winning opening 2005 or 2006 having a large number of prize balls, no winning abnormality is determined, and the winning prize opening other than the special winning opening 2005 or 2006 (a general winning opening 2001 having a small number of prize balls, a starting opening 2002 or 2004). An abnormality may be determined. Since a large winning opening has a large number of winning balls per winning of one ball, the base value greatly changes even with a small winning ball. For this reason, the change of the base value can be easily inspected when inspecting the pachinko machine, which is convenient. It should be noted that the winning abnormality may not be determined only by a specific winning opening (for example, the winning opening 2005 in which the game ball can be easily inserted by hand), and the winning abnormality may be determined by another winning opening (for example, 2006). .

  In addition, the start-up ports 2002 and 2004 may not be determined as having a winning prize, but may be determined as a prize-abnormality using a prize opening other than the start-up ports 2002 and 2004 (general prize opening 2001, grand prize opening 2005 and 2006). Since the starting port has a smaller number of prize balls for winning one ball than the large winning port, it is possible to improve the security resistance of the gaming machine to the goto and to compensate the player for the ball. Note that the winning abnormality may not be determined only by a specific starting port (for example, the starting port 2002 provided at the center of the game board is easy to understand), and the winning abnormality may be determined by the other starting ports 2004.

  Furthermore, in the special winning opening and the starting opening, the opening / closing member of the winning opening is located at a position visible from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, in the winning opening where the employee of the hall can easily operate the opening / closing member, a winning abnormality is determined. Alternatively, a winning abnormality may be determined at a winning opening where the opening / closing member of the winning opening is not visible from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, the hall employee has difficulty operating the opening / closing member. For example, when the opening / closing member, which is vertically positioned in the closed state, is inclined at an oblique position, the employee of the hall can easily operate the winning opening (a so-called electric tulip) having a structure in which the opening / closing member picks up a game ball. On the other hand, in the closed state, the winning opening is closed by the plate-shaped member, and when the flat-shaped member is retracted to the back, the entrance to the winning opening (the so-called belochu) is opened. Is difficult to operate. In this way, the security level is reduced by limiting the winning port used for compensating for the ball to the player, so that the employees of the hall can easily understand and improve the security resistance of the gaming machine.

  Further, the detected winning abnormality may be notified. The method of notifying the winning abnormality may be the same as the method of notifying the abnormal number of prize balls described above (for example, outputting a security signal to an external terminal board, displaying a warning on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, or displaying a game board or frame. It is preferable that the notification of the winning abnormality is looser than the notification of other abnormalities such as lighting or blinking of the decorative lamp, output of voice, sound effect, and warning sound. Specifically, the time of the abnormality notification is short, the character for notifying the abnormality is small, the lamp does not light at the time of the abnormality notification, or the abnormality notification sound is lower than the volume of the notification sound at the time of another abnormality (suppression ).

  Further, in the notification of the winning prize abnormality, an abnormality is notified for a predetermined time after detecting the prize abnormality, and even if the prize abnormality is further detected during the predetermined time, the predetermined time is set without extending the predetermined time. It is preferable to end the notification at a predetermined time or change the mode of notification. In this manner, when the winning abnormality occurs continuously for a predetermined period of time (for example, several minutes), it can be determined that the hall is maintaining the gaming machine, not an improper act by the player. For this reason, if the winning prize is notified for a predetermined time and the notification is not continued thereafter, the maintenance work of the gaming machine by the hall is not disturbed and the work efficiency can be improved. Further, by changing the mode of notification after a predetermined time, it can be understood that the maintenance work of the gaming machine is not hindered and the work is continuously performed correctly. Specifically, the notification by the display device or the lamp is continued, but the notification by sound may be stopped (or the volume may be reduced).

  In summary, the gaming machine of this embodiment has a correcting means for correcting the number of out-balls based on the number of winning balls, and the correcting means divides the plurality of winning holes into a plurality of types (start-up opening, large winning opening). For the first type of winning opening, the number of out-balls is corrected based on the winning balls detected while the predetermined condition is not satisfied (during the special prize), and for the second type of winning opening, The number of out-balls is not corrected based on the winning sphere detected other than during the establishment of the condition (during the special prize). As a result, as described above, it is possible to prevent a deviation in the number of out-balls when compensating a player for maintenance of the gaming machine, and to accurately calculate the number of out-balls. An abnormal base value may be calculated due to a malfunction of the gaming machine, and the base value can be adjusted as adjustment (maintenance). Thereby, an accurate base value can be calculated and displayed.

  So far, the detection of a winning prize abnormality and the exceptional handling of the detection of a prize abnormality (when not detected) have been described. However, the game ball determined to be a prize abnormality is not a prize ball acquired in the game, but a pachinko machine. Since it is highly likely to be used for maintenance (adjustment of the base value), it is desirable that the winning balls determined to have a winning abnormality be not reflected in the number of out balls and not used for calculating the base value.

  In addition, the winning abnormality detected in the base calculation area update processing shown in FIGS. 73 and 74 may be notified. For example, in the fraud detection processing of the timer interrupt processing (step S84), a winning abnormality display command is created with the winning abnormality as an abnormal state, and transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). The notification of the prize abnormality may be performed when one prize ball relating to the abnormal prize is detected, or may be performed when a predetermined number of prize balls relating to the abnormal prize are detected. Further, when a predetermined number of prize balls related to the prize abnormality are continuously detected, the notification of the prize abnormality may be performed. When a predetermined number of prize balls related to the prize abnormality are detected within a predetermined time, the prize abnormality is detected. Notification may be performed.

  Further, the notification of the winning abnormality may be terminated after a predetermined time has elapsed, or may be terminated when the winning port is opened next (the condition device is activated).

  It is not necessary to notify the winning abnormality.

[9-11. Calculation of Base Value Utilizing Characteristics of Arithmetic Circuit]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the arithmetic circuit 13121 performs the division process for calculating the base value, the base value can be calculated without hindering other processes than when the CPU 13111 executes the division by a program. The base calculation process described so far does not take advantage of this characteristic.

  That is, in connection with the calculation of the base value, in the above-described timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23), in the switch input processing (step S74), the detection signals from the ejection sphere sensor 3060 and the firing sphere sensor 1020 are read, and the number of out spheres is read. Is counted, and in the prize ball control process (step S80), the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated. Thereafter, in the base calculation area update processing (step S98), the number of awarded balls and the number of out-balls in the base calculation area 13128 are updated.

  Thereafter, in the base calculation / display processing (step S89), a base value is calculated with reference to the number of prize balls and the number of out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the calculated base value is displayed on the base display 1317. indicate.

  Since the timer interrupt process is executed at every predetermined time, the predetermined process must be terminated at every timer interrupt. Therefore, in a slow division process by a program, a time-consuming process is included in the timer interrupt process. That is, it has been difficult to include a plurality of base calculation processes in the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required for calculating the base value can be reduced, the base value can be calculated a plurality of times in one timer interrupt process, and the base value can be displayed without delay.

  In addition, the CPU 13111 is not occupied for the division process from the time of writing values to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the operation circuit 13121 to the time of reading the operation result from the division result register A 131218. In other words, the wait time of 32 clocks from the input timing of the dividend and the divisor to the output timing of the quotient can be effectively used, and other processing can be performed during this period. In other words, since the input timing of the dividend and the divisor is different from the output timing of the quotient, the degree of freedom in the base value calculation process in the timer interrupt process is improved.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process utilizing the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit. The timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 75 is the same as the above-described timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23) except for the base calculation processing (steps S97 and S98), and thus the description of the same processing will be omitted.

  When the timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 executes the main control program to first switch the register (step S70).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (Step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Specifically, a detection signal from a sensor for detecting a winning ball, a detection signal from a switch for detecting cheating, a detection signal from a discharge ball sensor 3060, and a detection signal from a firing ball sensor 1020 are read, and the number of out balls is read. Is counted.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a base calculation process 1 (step S97). In base calculation processing 1, the total number of out-balls is updated using the number of out-balls counted in step S74, and a base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation processing 1 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a timer update process (Step S76) and a random number update process 1 (Step S78).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a prize ball control process (step S80). In the prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and the number is written to the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a base calculation process 2 (step S98). In the base calculation process 2, the total prize ball count is updated using the prize ball count calculated in step S80, and a base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 77 and 79.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs a frame command receiving process (Step S82), a fraud detection process (Step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (Step S86), a normal symbol and an ordinary electric accessory. The control process (step S88) is executed. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes an output data setting process (Step S90) and a peripheral control board command transmission process (Step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to clear. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing ends, the timer interrupt processing ends, and the processing returns to the processing before the interruption.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. If the gaming state is during the special prize, the base ball is not calculated and the base calculation processing 1 is terminated because the out ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the special prize, the number of out-balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is obtained (step S9702), and the total number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls. The number of out-balls is updated (step S9705). If the number of out-balls cannot be obtained or the obtained number of out-balls is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be immediately terminated. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessary calculation of the base value.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out spheres is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation processing 1 ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A 131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B 131217. It is stored (step S9708). Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the operation result (total prize ball count / total out ball count) is read from the division result register A 131218 and set as a base value (step S9709).

  Thereafter, similarly to the above-described step S908, a base notification command is generated (step S9710), and the base (base value or abnormal base value) is notified to the player or the hall employee. The base notification command is a display command to the peripheral control unit 1511 when notifying the base value with a display device (effect display devices 1600, 3114, 244) controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 or the effect display control unit 1512 or the speaker 921. And sound output commands. Also, when the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 notifies, the base notification command is sent to the LED elements because these display devices are configured with 7-segment LEDs and LED lamps. It is a drive signal. Specifically, when the 7-segment LED is driven by the driver, a drive signal including a character code set in the driver (character generator in the driver) is the base notification command. When the 7-segment LED is directly driven, a drive signal for lighting each LED element is a base notification command.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG.

  As a result, if the gaming state is the special prize, the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. Therefore, the base is not calculated, and the base calculation processing 2 ends. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the special prize, the number of award balls calculated in the award ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S9802), and the obtained number of award balls is added to the total number of award balls. The total prize ball count is updated (step S9809). If the number of prize balls cannot be obtained or the obtained number of prize balls is 0, the base calculation process 2 may be immediately terminated. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessary calculation of the base value.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out-balls is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out spheres is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation process 2 ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A 131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B 131217. It is stored (step S9812). If the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value need not be calculated. Further, when the total number of prize balls is larger than the total number of outs, a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value, but the base value need not be calculated. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total prize ball count / total out ball count) is read from the division result register A 131218 and set as a base value (step S9813).

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to the player or the hall employee.

  Since the base calculation processing shown in FIGS. 76 and 77 is executed for each timer interrupt processing, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt process, but may be executed in a timer interrupt process for each predetermined time (for example, one minute longer than the timer interrupt process). By not performing the base calculation display process for each timer interrupt process, the amount of calculation (for example, the load on the main control MPU 1311) required for calculating the base value can be reduced as compared with the case where the base value is calculated for each timer interrupt process.

  Next, another example of the base calculation processing (steps S97 and S98) will be described with reference to FIGS. The base calculation processing shown in FIGS. 78 and 79 calculates a base value for each predetermined number of outgoing balls and for each predetermined number of award balls.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. If the gaming state is during the special prize, the base ball is not calculated and the base calculation processing 1 is terminated because the out ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the special prize, the number of out-balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is obtained (step S9702), and the obtained out-ball number is added to the out-ball number buffer. The sphere number buffer is updated (step S9703). If the number of out-balls cannot be obtained or the obtained number of out-balls is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be immediately terminated. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessary calculation of the base value.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of out spheres stored in the out sphere number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out-balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the out-ball count buffer value may be compared with the threshold Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the out-ball count storage area (specifically, the out-ball count storage area is 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, the number of out balls can be determined to be 128 or more.)

  If the out-ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not time to calculate the base value, and the base calculation process 1 ends.

  On the other hand, if the out ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the total ball count is updated so that the out ball count buffer value is added to the total out ball count (step S9705), and the out ball count buffer is set to 0. It is set (step S9706).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out spheres is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation processing 1 ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A 131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B 131217. It is stored (step S9708). Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the operation result (total prize ball count / total out ball count) is read from the division result register A 131218 and set as a base value (step S9709).

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S9710), and the base is notified to the player or the hall employee.

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. Then, if the gaming state is the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation processing 2 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S9802), and if there is a prize ball, that is, the obtained number of prize balls is one or more. Is determined (step S9803). As a result, if there is no winning ball, the process advances to step S9808 without updating the number of winning balls. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S9805). If there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the acquired prize ball number is added to the prize ball buffer. The sphere number buffer is updated (step S9804).

  On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806), and the player or the hall employee is notified that the prize ball is abnormal. There are various methods for reporting the abnormality, and one of the following methods may be used, or two or more methods may be combined. Specifically, the various methods described in step S816 in FIG. 46 can be used.

  The abnormal number of prize balls means, for example, that a large number of prize balls (for example, a prize corresponding to a prize of 10 or more shots per minute in consideration of the number of prize balls in a general winning opening or a starting opening) at a predetermined time other than during the special prize. Ball) is obtained. Note that a plurality of allowable ranges may be provided to determine the degree of abnormality in a plurality of stages based on the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of award balls.

  Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S9807), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

  Then, it is determined whether the number of award balls stored in the award ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether or not the award ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the prize ball count buffer value may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the determination may be made based on a predetermined bit value of the prize ball count storage area (specifically, the prize ball count storage area is represented by 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, the number of out balls can be determined to be 128 or more.)

  If the award ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not time to calculate the base value, so that the base is not calculated, and the base calculation process 2 ends.

  On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or larger than the threshold Th1, the total prize ball number is updated so that the prize ball number buffer value is added to the total prize ball number (step S9809), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0. It is set (step S9810).

  Note that the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer installed in the game hall every time the number of prize balls is added to the prize ball buffer, or the prize ball number described later becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1. In this case, the threshold value Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the award ball count buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and temporarily stores the award ball count paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out-balls is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out spheres is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation process 2 ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A 131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B 131217. It is stored (step S9812). Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total prize ball count / total out ball count) is read from the division result register A 131218 and set as a base value (step S9813).

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to the player or the hall employee.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer started in step S9807 has timed out (step S9815). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S9816). In step S9815, the end of the notification is determined based on the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time. However, the end of the notification is determined so as to notify the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined number of shot balls. You may. Further, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms.

  FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing another example of the timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 80 is the same as the above-described timer interrupt processing (FIGS. 23 and 75) except for the base calculation processing (steps S93 and S94) and the base display processing (step S95). Is omitted.

  When the timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 executes the main control program to first switch the register (step S70).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (Step S74). In the switch input process, detection signals from the ejection ball sensor 3060 and the shooting ball sensor 1020 are read, and the number of out-balls is counted.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a base calculation process 3 (step S93). In the base calculation process 3, the total number of out-balls is updated using the number of out-balls counted in step S74, and parameters for calculating the base value are written in the arithmetic circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 3 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a timer update process (Step S76) and a random number update process 1 (Step S78).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a prize ball control process (step S80). In the prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and the number is written to the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a base calculation process 4 (step S94). In the base calculation process 2, the total prize ball count is updated using the prize ball count counted in step S80, and a parameter for calculating the base value is written in the arithmetic circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 4 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs a frame command receiving process (Step S82), a fraud detection process (Step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (Step S86), a normal symbol and an ordinary electric accessory. The control process (step S88) is executed.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs a base display process of reading a command from the arithmetic circuit 13121 and generating a command for notifying the base (step S95).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes an output data setting process (Step S90) and a peripheral control board command transmission process (Step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to clear. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing ends, the timer interrupt processing ends, and the processing returns to the processing before the interruption.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). The base calculation process 3 shown in FIG. 81 is the same as the base calculation process 1 shown in FIG. 76 except that steps after S9709 are removed.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. If the gaming state is during the special prize, the base ball is not calculated and the base calculation processing 1 is terminated because the out ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the special prize, the number of out-balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is obtained (step S9702), and the total number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls. The number of out-balls is updated (step S9705). If the number of out-balls cannot be obtained or the obtained number of out-balls is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be immediately terminated. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessary calculation of the base value.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation process 3 ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). The base calculation process 4 shown in FIG. 82 is obtained by removing steps S9813 and subsequent steps from the base calculation process 2 shown in FIG.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. Then, if the gaming state is the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation processing 2 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the special prize, the number of award balls calculated in the award ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S9802), and the obtained number of award balls is added to the total number of award balls. The total prize ball count is updated (step S9809). If the number of award balls cannot be obtained or the number of award balls obtained is 0, the base calculation processing 1 may be immediately terminated. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessary calculation of the base value.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out-balls is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out spheres is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation process 2 ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A 131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

  In step S9708 of FIG. 81, the total number of out-balls is not stored in the division input register B131217. In step S9812 of FIG. 82, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of award balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is set in the division input register A131216. And the total number of out-balls may be stored in the division input register B131217.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the base display process (step S95).

  The main control MPU 1311 reads out the calculation result (total prize ball count / total out ball count) from the division result register A 131218 and sets it as a base value (step S8901). Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to the player or the hall employee.

  Since the base calculation processing shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 and the base display processing shown in FIG. 83 are executed for each timer interruption processing, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt process, but may be executed in a timer interrupt process for each predetermined time (for example, one minute).

  Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98) will be described with reference to FIGS. The base calculation processing shown in FIGS. 84 and 85 calculates a base value for each predetermined number of out-balls and each predetermined number of award balls.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). The base calculation process 3 shown in FIG. 84 is the same as the base calculation process 1 shown in FIG. 78 except that steps after S9709 are removed.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. If the gaming state is during the special prize, the base ball is not calculated and the base calculation processing 1 is terminated because the out ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the special prize, the number of out-balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is obtained (step S9702), and the obtained out-ball number is added to the out-ball number buffer. The sphere number buffer is updated (step S9703). If the number of out-balls cannot be obtained or the obtained number of out-balls is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be immediately terminated. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessary calculation of the base value.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of out spheres stored in the out sphere number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out-balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the out-ball count buffer value may be compared with the threshold Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the out-ball count storage area (specifically, the out-ball count storage area is 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, the number of out balls can be determined to be 128 or more.)

  If the out-ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not time to calculate the base value, and the base calculation process 1 ends.

  On the other hand, if the out ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the total ball count is updated so that the out ball count buffer value is added to the total out ball count (step S9705), and the out ball count buffer is set to 0. It is set (step S9706).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out spheres is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation processing 1 ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). The base calculation process 4 shown in FIG. 85 is obtained by removing steps S9813 and subsequent steps from the base calculation process 2 shown in FIG.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. Then, if the gaming state is the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation processing 2 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S9802), and if there is a prize ball, that is, the obtained number of prize balls is one or more. Is determined (step S9803). As a result, if there is no winning ball, the process advances to step S9808 without updating the number of winning balls. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S9805). If there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the acquired prize ball number is added to the prize ball buffer. The sphere number buffer is updated (step S9804).

  On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806), and the player or the hall employee is notified that the prize ball is abnormal. There are various methods for reporting the abnormality, and one of the following methods may be used, or two or more methods may be combined. Specifically, the various methods described in step S816 in FIG. 46 can be used.

  The abnormal number of prize balls means, for example, that a large number of prize balls (for example, 10 or more prizes per minute in consideration of the number of prize balls in a general winning opening or a starting opening) are obtained at a predetermined time other than during the special prize. And so on. Note that a plurality of allowable ranges may be provided to determine the degree of abnormality in a plurality of stages based on the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of award balls.

  Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S9807), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

  Then, it is determined whether the number of award balls stored in the award ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether or not the award ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the prize ball count buffer value may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the determination may be made based on a predetermined bit value of the prize ball count storage area (specifically, the prize ball count storage area is represented by 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, the number of out balls can be determined to be 128 or more.)

  If the award ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not time to calculate the base value, so that the base is not calculated, and the base calculation process 2 ends.

  On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or larger than the threshold Th1, the total prize ball number is updated so that the prize ball number buffer value is added to the total prize ball number (step S9809), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0. It is set (step S9810).

  Note that the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer installed in the game hall every time the number of prize balls is added to the prize ball buffer, or the prize ball number described later becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1. In this case, the threshold value Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the award ball count buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and temporarily stores the award ball count paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out-balls is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out spheres is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation process 2 ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A 131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

  In step S9708 of FIG. 84, the total number of out-balls is not stored in the division input register B131217. In step S9812 of FIG. 85, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is set in the division input register A131216. And the total number of out-balls may be stored in the division input register B131217.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing another example of the base display process (step S95).

  The main control MPU 1311 reads out the calculation result (total prize ball count / total out ball count) from the division result register A 131218 and sets it as a base value (step S8901). Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to the player or the hall employee.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer started in step S9807 of the base calculation process 4 has timed out (step S8903). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S8904). In step S8903, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time. However, the end of the notification is determined so as to notify the prize ball abnormality by a predetermined number of shot balls. Is also good. Further, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms.

  As shown in FIGS. 75 and 80, in the timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment, before the timer interrupt processing ends (before the timer interrupt cycle elapses and before the next timer interrupt processing starts), the arithmetic circuit The input values (divisor, dividend) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 are written at the timing at which the division result can be read from 13121. Specifically, the timing of writing the input values (divisor, dividend) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 is in the first half of the timer interrupt processing, before the random number update processing (step S78), or in the special symbol or the ordinary symbol. It is better before the control processing (steps S86 and S88).

  Further, whether or not to execute the process of calculating the base value may be determined based on the number of game media (prize balls) given to the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of winning balls determined for each winning opening, whether the number of winning balls or the number of out balls is used for calculating the base value may be switched. For example, the winning ball of the winning opening that gives the largest winning ball to one winning ball may not be used for calculating the base value.

  Specifically, the number of prize game media (prize balls paid out for one prize ball) given when a game medium defined for each prize port provided in the game area wins is one, three, or three. If there are three types, the maximum number of five winning balls and the corresponding number of out-balls, it is not necessary to use them for calculating the base value. This is because when a winning with a large number of prize balls is used for the calculation of the base value, the calculated base value changes greatly, and the lower digits of the calculated base value are rounded (rounded, rounded up, rounded down, etc.) by the processing means. ), The displayed value sometimes changes frequently. In such a case, it is difficult to determine whether or not the pachinko machine is exhibiting the predetermined performance (for example, whether the pachinko machine has the set payout rate) by the hole.

  Further, the minimum number of one prize ball and the corresponding number of out spheres need not be used for calculating the base value. This is because, since the change in the base value due to winning with a small number of prize balls is small, the lower digits of the base value calculated by the processing means are rounded even if the one prize ball is not used for the calculation of the base value. If the value is displayed (rounded, rounded up, rounded down, or the like), the displayed base value may not change, so that processing that does not contribute to the change in display may be omitted.

  Also, the case where the number of prize balls is maximum and minimum has been described, but the number of prize balls having an intermediate value between the maximum value and the minimum value may not be used for calculating the base value. In this case, since the maximum and minimum prize balls are used for calculating the base value, the maximum and minimum are averaged to indicate the number of prize balls and the number of out balls which indicate the operation of the entire pachinko machine. A base value can be indicated.

  Although the description has been made with the three types of prize ball number patterns, the present invention is not limited to the three types of prize ball number patterns.

  Furthermore, if the winning of the number of award balls of a specific type (one of the minimum value, three of the intermediate value, five of the maximum value, etc. described above) is not used in the calculation of the base value, the winning is determined. All winnings in the gaming state when detected may not be used for calculating the base value. For example, when winning in a winning opening that gives five prize balls is not used for calculating the base value, in a gaming state in which winning in the winning opening is detected, the winning is not performed until the end of the gaming state. Do not use winnings in mouths or other winning openings to calculate the base value. Also, even after the start of the gaming state, winnings to the winning opening and other winning openings are not used for calculating the base value retroactively.

  In addition, the winning in the case where the gaming state when the winning is detected occurs again does not have to be used for calculating the base value, and the gaming state when the winning is detected transits to another gaming state. The winnings up to may not be used in the calculation of the base value. This is because the pachinko machine is normal (for example, according to the set payout rate) by not using the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the gaming state in which the calculated base value changes greatly in the calculation of the base value. This is to eliminate the possibility that the judgment is delayed.

  It should be noted that when the number of prize balls changes depending on the game state, the maximum (or minimum, middle) prize ball with respect to one winning ball need not be used in the calculation of the base value.

  Next, a specific process in which the number of awarded balls and the number of out-balls are not used for calculating the base value based on the number of game media (prize balls) described above will be described.

  In the switch input process (step S74), when a detection signal from each winning opening sensor is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 may determine whether to use the winning for the calculation of the base value. . For winnings determined not to be used for the calculation of the base value, the total prize balls and the total number of out balls for calculating the base value are not updated, or the calculation process of the base value is not executed. I do. More specifically, for example, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75, in the base calculation process 1 (step S97), the number of winning balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0 and excluded from the number of out balls, and the base calculation is performed. In process 2 (step S98), the number of prize balls excluded from the calculation of the base value may be set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. When all the detected winnings are not used for the calculation of the base value, the base calculation processing 1 (step S97) and the base calculation processing 2 (step S98) of FIG. 75 need not be executed.

  In the timer interruption process shown in FIG. 80, in the base calculation process 3 (step S93), the number of winning balls excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0 and excluded from the out ball count, and the base calculation process 4 (step S94). In, the number of prize balls excluded from the calculation of the base value may be set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. If all the detected winnings are not used for the calculation of the base value, the base calculation processing 3 (step S93), the base calculation processing 4 (step S94) and the base display processing (step S95) of FIG. 80 are not executed. You may.

  As a method of excluding the number of winning balls determined not to be used in the calculation of the base value from the number of out balls, a method similar to the method of correcting an out ball due to abnormal winning described in FIGS. 73 and 74 may be employed.

  In this case, whether to use the detected winning in the calculation of the base value is determined from the number of winning balls, so that the base calculation processing 1 (step S97), the base calculation processing 2 (step S98), and the base calculation processing 3 ( In step S93) and the base calculation process 4 (step S94), it is not necessary to determine whether or not a special prize is being won.

  By excluding the number of out-balls and the number of winning balls required for a predetermined prize from the calculation of the base value in this way, the process is executed without skipping, so that it is easy to check whether the process is correctly executed especially in the development stage. Can be confirmed. Further, by not updating the base value without executing the process of calculating the base value, the process of the main control MPU 1311 is reduced, and other processes (such as a lottery process and a process of determining a variation pattern) are accurately executed. it can.

  In other words, among a plurality of prizes having different degrees of advantage, even if the largest prize is given to a player, the largest prize is not used for calculating the base value, and the base value is displayed without being changed by the provision of the prize. You. Further, the calculated base value is displayed without change until at least the gaming state in which the maximum prize is provided.

[9-12. Another configuration of gaming machine displaying base]
FIG. 87 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, unlike the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 17, a board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is provided on the game board 5 as a discharge ball sensor 3060, and the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is 4. Note that either one of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be provided, or both may be provided.

  The board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is, as described above, an out-portion passing ball sensor 1021 that detects a game ball passing through the out-port 1111 provided below the game area 5a (see FIG. 53). The output signal of the board-side ejection ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control board 1310 and input to the main control MPU 1311 as described later with reference to FIG. In this case, the number of game balls detected by the out-passing ball sensor 1021, the number of game balls detected by the starting-port sensors 2104, 2551, and the number of game balls detected by the various winning port sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, 2557. The total with the number is the number of out balls.

  As described above, the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is provided at the discharge port for discharging game balls flowing out of the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). The output signal of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and the connector connecting the main body frame 4 and the game board 5.

  When both the board-side ejection ball sensor 3060A and the frame-side ejection ball sensor 3060B are provided, the counting result of the board-side ejection ball sensor 3060A and the counting result of the frame-side ejection ball sensor 3060B are compared to obtain two counting results. May be notified when a difference of more than a predetermined value occurs. In addition, an error may be notified when a difference between two count results within a predetermined time is equal to or more than a predetermined value.

  In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the display switch 1318 is not an essential component, and the display contents (provisional section display and fixed section display) of the base display 1317 are switched at predetermined time intervals as described later. By operating the display switch 1318, the base value may be displayed or the display content may be switched.

  The configuration other than that described above is the same as the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

  FIG. 88 and FIG. 89 are views showing the arrangement of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B.

  FIG. 88 shows an example of a mechanism in which the out balls are aligned in a single line in a ball flow path 960 provided in the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board, and the number of out balls is counted by one frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B. . The game ball rolling in the game area 5a flows into the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board 5 via the out port 1111, the general winning port 2001, and the special winning ports 2005 and 2006. The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 that causes the discharged game balls to flow down to the right side in a front view and align them in a single line. The frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B counts the game balls arranged in one line.

  FIG. 89 shows an example of a mechanism in which out balls aligned in a ball flow path 960 provided on the back surface of a game board flow down in two rows and are counted by a plurality of discharged ball sensors 3060. The game ball rolling in the game area 5a flows into the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board 5 through the out port 1111, the general winning port 2001, the starting ports 2002 and 2004, and the special winning ports 2005 and 2006. The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 that causes the discharged game balls to flow down from the left and right to the vicinity of the center and align them in two lines. Each of the two frame-side ejected ball sensors 3060B counts the number of game balls arranged in each row.

  The frame-side discharge sphere sensor 3060B is provided at the position shown in FIGS. 53, 88, and 89, but may be configured as a unit together with the sphere flow path 960 so as to be detachable from the main body frame 4. Further, the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be configured to be detachable from the main body frame 4.

  FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating a connection example between the ejection ball sensor and the main control board.

  The output line of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected to the connector 13101 provided on the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and the output signal of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control MPU 1311. The output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected to a connector 13102 provided on the main control board 1310, and the output signal of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control MPU 1311.

  The connector 13101 to which the output line of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected is preferably provided above the main control board 1310, and the connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected is connected to the main control board 1310. It is good to be provided below.

  The connector 13101 to which the output line of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected and the connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B are connected are provided separately. The output line of 3060A and the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to one connector (for example, 13102).

  The output line of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A may be connected to the main control board 1310 without passing through the relay board. The output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be directly connected to the main control board 1310. The output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via a relay board (not shown). After connecting the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B to the payout control board 951 or the relay board, it is connected to the main control board 1310 via a connector (for example, a floating connector) connecting the game board 5 and the main body frame 4. May be.

  Further, a plurality of magnetic detection sensors 1030 are provided in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. The output signal of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is input to the main control MPU 1311 as described later with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 91 is a front view showing an example of the game board 5, and particularly shows an arrangement of the magnetic detection sensors 1030 provided on the game board 5.

  The magnetic detection sensor 1030 is a sensor that detects unauthorized magnetism in the game area 5a, and is in the vicinity of a sensor that detects a winning in each of various winning openings 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, and 2006 (the position of the star in the figure). Is provided. The detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is indicated by a broken line on the game board 5 and partially overlaps.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a magnetic detection sensor 1030 is also provided near the out port 1111. This is to prevent calculation of an incorrect base value. That is, when the player brings the magnet close to the out port 1111 and operates the discharge ball sensor 3060, the number of out balls is counted more than the actual number, and the base value decreases. For this reason, in a game arcade, maintenance work of the pachinko machine 1 may be performed so as to return the base value to a predetermined standard value. In a pachinko machine that has been subjected to maintenance work based on a base value different from the actual one, the number of pitches in the normal state increases, so that the player can play in a more advantageous state than usual and can acquire many pitches. In order to calculate an accurate base value and prevent illegal payout of the ball, a magnetic detection sensor 1030 is provided near the out port 1111. Note that a magnetic detection sensor 1030 may be provided at a location other than the vicinity of the out port 1111 where the ejection ball sensor 3060 may malfunction due to magnetism.

  As shown, the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided near the out port 1111 preferably has a wider detection range than the other magnetic detection sensors 1030. This is because, as shown in FIG. 89, when detecting the out ball with the plurality of discharged ball sensors 3060, the magnetism is detected in a sufficient range that can cover the plurality of discharged ball sensors 3060. Further, the magnetic detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided near the out opening 1111 may include another winning opening (for example, a large winning opening 2005 provided above the out opening 1111).

  FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a configuration of the main control input circuit 1315. The main control input circuit 1315 includes a discharge ball sensor 3060 and a winning opening sensor (general winning opening sensor 3015, first starting opening sensor 2104, second starting opening sensor 2551, first winning opening sensor 2114, second upper winning opening). Sensor 2554, second lower winning opening sensor 2557, etc.) and the output signal of magnetic detection sensor 1030 are received and input to main control MPU 1311.

  The main control input circuit 1315 includes an interface circuit 1331 and a buffer circuit 1332. The interface circuit 1331 performs level conversion and shaping (for example, chattering removal) on signals input from various sensors and outputs the signals. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the input signal to the data bus at the timing specified by the main control MPU 1311.

  Specifically, an output signal from each sensor is input to one of the terminals A1 to A8 of the interface circuit 1331, a signal whose level has been converted or shaped by the interface circuit 1331 is output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals, and The signal is input to one of terminals A1 to A8 of the circuit 1332. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the signals input to the Y1 to Y8 terminals to the data bus at the timing when the chip select signals CS4 and CS5 of the main control MPU 1311 are input. As a result, the detection result of each sensor is taken into the main control MPU 1311.

  The interface circuit 1331 includes an abnormality detection circuit and a power supply monitoring circuit. The abnormality detection circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the inputs of the A1 to A8 terminals, and the level of the input signal to each terminal is lower than a predetermined threshold (for example, 4 V) or a predetermined threshold (for example, the power supply voltage − 0.1V), the disconnection of the connection line to the switch or the short circuit of the switch is detected. If the input of any terminal exceeds the normal range defined by the predetermined threshold, the abnormality signal E is output. And outputs a signal of a level at which each sensor is OFF from the Y1 to Y8 terminals irrespective of the input signals of the A1 to A8 terminals. The power supply monitoring circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the power supply voltage VS, and outputs an abnormality signal E when the power supply voltage becomes lower than a predetermined threshold (for example, 12V-20%) and an abnormality of the power supply is detected. At the same time, regardless of the input signals at the A1 to A8 terminals, a signal of a level at which each sensor is OFF is output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals. That is, even if an ON-level signal is input from the sensor, the output of the interface circuit corresponding to the input is at the OFF level. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 does not determine the signal output from the sensor as valid (the output of the sensor is invalid). This eliminates the need for the main control MPU 1311 to determine whether or not to execute the processing of the input signal based on whether or not the power supply of the switch has been reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load and to reduce the output signals of Y1 to Y8. Regardless of the state of the input signals A1 to A8, a signal of a level at which each sensor is turned off can be output.

  As described later, upon detecting the abnormal signal, the main control MPU 1311 does not calculate the base value (see FIG. 105). The interface circuit 1331 receives a signal (the number of ejected balls and the number of awarded balls) from a sensor used for calculating the base value and a signal (eg, a gate sensor 2547) from a sensor not used for calculating the base value. . The interface circuit 1331 outputs an abnormal signal when any of the input signals becomes abnormal. Therefore, even if an abnormality is detected in a sensor unrelated to the calculation of the base, the calculation of the base is not executed, and the display content of the base display 1317 is maintained and does not change.

  That is, the main control input circuit 1315 monitors the signal from the sensor used for calculating the base value and the signal from the sensor not used for calculating the base value, and when any of the signals becomes abnormal, Outputs an abnormal signal to stop the base calculation.

  93, 94, and 95 are diagrams illustrating mounting examples of the main control board 1310. FIG. 93A shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, and FIG. 93B shows a case where the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are one. An example of connection to the driver circuit 1334 is shown. FIG. 94 shows an arrangement on the main control MPU 1311, the base display 1317, and the main control board 1310. FIG. 95 (A) is a front view of main control board 1310 housed in main control board box 1320, FIG. 95 (B) is a bottom view, and FIG. 95 (C) is a right side view.

  As shown in FIGS. 93A and 93B, the main control I / O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334.

  In the example shown in FIG. 93A, the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into different latch circuits 1333. Then, display data is output from the different driver circuits 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

  In the example shown in FIG. 93B, the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into one latch circuit 1333. Then, display data is output from one driver circuit 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 93A and 93B, a reset signal from a reset circuit 1335 and a clock signal from a clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311. It is preferable that the signal line from which the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the base display unit 1317 is output from the main control MPU 1311 does not cross the signal line of the reset signal or the clock signal.

  The connector 13101 is a connector to which the output line of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected, and may be provided above the main control board 1310. The connector 13101 is connected not only to the output line from the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A, but also to other winning opening sensors 3015, 2104, etc., and the output lines from the magnetic detection sensor 1030. The connector 13102 is a connector to which an output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected, and may be provided below the main control board 1310. The signal from the ejection ball sensor 3060 input to the connectors 13101 and 13102 is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the interface circuit 1331 and the buffer circuit 1332.

  FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the arrangement of components arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 on the main control board 1310. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the printed circuit board constituting the main control board 1310 from the back side, in which a solid line is a pattern on the back side, a broken line is a pattern on the component side, and a dotted line is a component mounted on the component side of the printed board. Is shown. The illustration of the ground pattern and the power supply pattern is omitted.

  The data lines (D1 to D8) output from the main control MPU 1311 are input to the latch 2 (1333) and passed through the driver 2 (1334) to the segments on the cathode side of each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317. Connected to terminal.

  In addition, some of the data lines (D1 to D4) output from the main control MPU 1311 are input to the latch 1 (1333), and each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 via the driver 1 (1334). To the common terminal on the anode side.

  A chip select signal for controlling the operation timing of the latch circuit 1333 is output from the main control MPU 1311. Specifically, the latch circuit 2 (1333) outputs a timing at which the chip select signal CS2 of the main control MPU 1311 is input. Then, data for controlling the blinking of each segment is fetched from the data lines (D1 to D8). Further, the latch circuit 1 (1333) takes in data for controlling blinking of each digit from the data lines (D1 to D4) at the timing when the chip select signal CS3 of the main control MPU 1311 is input.

  A reset signal from a reset circuit 1335 and a clock signal from a clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311. The reset signal is also input from the reset circuit 1335 to each latch circuit 1333. The latch circuit 1333 clears the latched data by the reset signal.

  The data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 are arranged so as not to cross the signal lines of the reset signal and the clock signal. Similarly, although not shown, the data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the function display unit 1400 are arranged so as not to intersect with the signal lines of the reset signal and the clock signal.

  This is because, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the base display 1317 is controlled by dynamic lighting, a pulse signal is transmitted on a data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317, and the main control MPU 1311 The level of the data line to and from the base display 1317 changes frequently. In particular, a large current required to drive the LED element flows between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317. Therefore, a data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 (particularly, between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317) becomes a factor of generating noise. When the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 crosses the signal line of the reset signal or the clock signal, noise is put on the signal line of the reset signal or the clock signal, and the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions. there's a possibility that. The intersection of the signal lines can also occur at the intersection of the wiring patterns on the front and back surfaces of the printed circuit board, and at the intersection of the wiring patterns on the inner layer and the surface layer (front and back surfaces).

  Specifically, when a reset signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 at a timing that cannot occur, the main control MPU 1311 is reset during the game, and the game may be stopped or the game state may be erased. . If the game state is erased at a timing that cannot be caused, the process is reset without executing the normal power-off process, so that the data stored in the RAM 1312 is cleared, the big hit ends, or the fluctuation display is performed. The game is ended in the middle, or the special symbol variation display game or the normal symbol variation display game is canceled.

  The main control board box 1320 is partially low in height and high in other parts according to the height of components attached to the main control board 1310 and interference with other members when assembled. Has become. For example, as shown in FIG. 95, since the height of the main control MPU 1311 is high, the place where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted has the height of the main control board box 1320 which is high, and the place where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted. In the area on the left side of the figure, the height of the main control board box 1320 is high, and components such as electrolytic capacitors, which are relatively tall, are mounted. On the other hand, the height of the main control board box 1320 is low in a region on the right side of the place where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, and components such as short ICs are mounted (tall components cannot be arranged). In addition, the height of the main control board box 1320 is high, and a region where a high component can be mounted is indicated by hatching. Further, in a region where the connectors 13101 and 13102 are attached, the main control board box 1320 is formed at a height equal to or less than the surface on which the mating connector is inserted / removed (preferably the same height as the board surface). It is preferable not to hinder the insertion and removal of the cable (connector) connected to the substrate.

  In this way, by partially changing the height of the main control board box 1320 in accordance with the height of the components mounted on the board, it is possible to suppress the goto action of mounting an incorrect component (circuit) on the main control board. it can.

  In FIG. 95, the base display 1317 is arranged at the upper right portion of the main control board 1310. However, even if the main frame 4 is opened at a predetermined angle for maintenance, the display contents are hardly visible to the player. A display 1317 may be provided. For example, when the main body frame 4 is opened by a predetermined angle for maintenance during business (confirmation of the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply tank), if the player can visually recognize the display content of the base display 1317, the player In many cases, the player does not correctly understand how to read the display on the base display 1317, so that the player may be required to explain the display contents of the base display 1317, and in order to prevent such complication. In addition, the base display 1317 may be arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the display content. In addition, by disposing the base display 1317 in this manner, inquiries from the player can be suppressed. In other words, the base display 1317 displays the base value of the maximum number of active balls of 52,000, but the base value is different from the base value in the short-time game by the player, so that a complaint may be made about the pitching rate. There is. By arranging the base display 1317 in this way, complaints from the player can be suppressed. The same is true of the above-described accessory ratio display 1317, and the accessory ratio display 1317 may be arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the displayed content.

  As shown, since the height of the base display (7-segment LED) 1317 is low, it is mounted in an area where the height of the main control board box 1320 is low.

  FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I / O port 1314. As shown in FIG. 93A, an example is shown in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334. It is a circuit diagram. In this embodiment, an example will be described in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are configured by light emitting diodes (LEDs), but may be configured by a lamp (bulb) or another light emitting element. The main control I / O port 1314 is disposed between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400, and outputs display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400. I do.

  As described above, the main control I / O port 1314 includes the latch circuit 1333 and the driver circuit 1334.

  The latch circuit 1333 takes in the input data at the timing of the clock signal, holds the data until the next clock signal or clear signal is input, and outputs the data. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistors according to the input signal, and outputs the power supply voltage (+12 V) input to the VCC terminal of the driver circuit 1334, respectively.

  Specifically, the latch circuit 1333 takes in the bus data input to the D1 to D8 terminals at the rising timing of the clock signal CK, and outputs the bus data to the driver circuit 1334 from the Q1 to Q8 terminals, respectively. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistors in accordance with the signals input to the I1 to I8 terminals, and changes the voltages of the O1 to O8 terminals, respectively. The outputs O1 to O8 of the driver circuit 1334 are connected to the segment terminals of the 7-segment LED constituting the base display 1317 and the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400.

  For example, in order to turn on the first digit 7-segment LED (7seg1) of the base display 1317, the driver 2 (1334) converts the bus data D1 to D8 captured in the latch 2 (1333) at the rising timing of CS1. It is output as segment data (when lighting is LOW). The drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal. That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 captured by the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS0, COM1 output from the driver 1 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the first-digit seven-segment LED (7seg1) of the base display 1317 turns on. Driven.

  In addition, in order to light the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the bus data D1 to D8 captured by the latch 3 (1333) is read by the driver 3 (1334) at the rising timing of CS2, and the driver 3 (1334) outputs the segment data (LOW when lit). ). The drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS3, the driver 4 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 captured by the latch 4 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS3, the O1 terminal of the driver 4 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the 7-segment LED (LED-C1) of the function display unit 1400 is driven.

  In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is a common anode type in both the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, a current flows from the driver 1 to the driver 2 in the 7-segment LED. Therefore, when the segment is turned on, the outputs of the drivers 1 and 4 are VCC (+12 V), and the outputs of the drivers 2 and 3 are GND (0 V).

  The latches 1 and 4 (1333) on the common side directly output the data input from the data bus to the Q1 to Q8 terminals, but the latches 1 and 4 (1333) have a decoder function and have a data bus. A signal may be output from any of the terminals Q1 to Q8 in accordance with the binary data acquired from.

  Next, the output timing of signals when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 as shown in FIGS. 93A and 96 will be described.

  The segment data sent from the driver 2 (1334) to the base display 1317 and the common data sent from the driver 1 (1334) to the base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. The segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are also output in the same timer interrupt processing. That is, since both the common data and the segment data are sent to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 via separate signal lines, both the display data to the base display 1317 and the display data to the function display unit 1400 are: Output in one timer interrupt process.

  Then, in the next timer interrupt processing, common data for selecting the next digit (group of LEDs) is output, and segment data for controlling lighting of each LED is output at the same timing as the output of the common data.

  The display data on the base display 1317 and the display data on the function display unit 1400 are generated in another process in the timer interrupt process and output at another timing in the timer interrupt process. That is, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation / display code 13135 outside the game control area to generate and output display data to the base display 1317. On the other hand, the main control MPU 1311 generates and outputs display data to the function display unit 1400 by executing the game control code 13131 in the game control area. These data are generated by another program (code) and output at another timing.

  Next, a modification of the signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

  The segment data sent from the driver 2 (1334) to the base display 1317 and the common data sent from the driver 1 (1334) to the base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. Similarly, the segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process for outputting data to be sent to the base display 1317 is executed at a different timing from the timer interrupt process for outputting data to be sent to the function display unit 1400, and may be executed subsequently.

  The process of outputting signals to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 is executed in accordance with programs (game control code 13131 and base calculation / display code 13135) stored in different areas of the RAM 1312, but the same processing is performed. In order to prevent the common signal from being transmitted at the timing, it is preferable to use control data common to the two codes and control the transmission timing of the common signal so as not to overlap. For example, a common counter used by the game control code 13131 and the base calculation / display code 13135 is provided in common. For example, when the common counter is 0 to 3, a common signal is output to the function display unit 1400, and the common counter is output. Are controlled to output a common signal to the base display 1317 when the values are 4 to 7.

  The process of outputting the common signal and the process of outputting the segment signal may be configured separately or by one subroutine. A game control code 13131 for executing a process of outputting data to be sent to the function display unit 1400, and a base calculation / display code 13135 for executing a process of outputting data to be sent to the base display 1317, The subroutine may be called at a timing determined by a program to output a signal to the function display unit 1400 or the base display 1317. In this case, output of data to be sent to the function display unit 1400 and output of data to be sent to the base display 1317 are not performed in the same timer interrupt processing. The game control code 13131 and the base calculation / display code 13135 are executed in one timer interrupt process, but the subroutine is called by a different timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIGS. 93A and 96, when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, a display (function display unit 1400) provided outside the main control board 1310 is provided. Even if noise is mixed in from the main control board 1310, the influence on the display (base display 1317) inside the main control board 1310 and the circuit of the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

  FIG. 97 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I / O port 1314. As shown in FIG. 93B, the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to a driver circuit 1334 which is common on the common side. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram of an example performed. The main control I / O port 1314 is disposed between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400, and outputs display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400. I do.

  As described above, the main control I / O port 1314 includes the latch circuit 1333 and the driver circuit 1334. Since the configuration of the circuit included in main control I / O port 1314 is the same as the above-described circuit configuration, a difference from the configuration example shown in FIG. 96 will be described below.

  In the example shown in FIG. 97, the operation for lighting the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is the same as the example shown in FIG. 96, but the common of the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 is the common signal. It is common.

  In order to turn on the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the bus data D1 to D8 captured by the latch 3 (1333) are converted into segment data (the lighting time is LOW) by the driver 3 (1334) at the rising timing of CS2. Output. The drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 captured by the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven).

  As described above, by using a common driver circuit for the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, the circuit scale can be reduced. By reducing the number of components, the failure rate is reduced, the size of the board can be reduced, and the board unit (including the main control board 1310 and the main control board box 1320) can be easily miniaturized. In the pachinko machine, the main control board 1310 does not use an inner layer pattern (three or more printed boards) but uses a two-layer board having a pattern only on the front and back surfaces. For this reason, even if components can be physically arranged on the main control board 1310 composed of a two-layer board, an area for routing the wiring pattern cannot be secured, and the board cannot be larger than a three-layer or more multilayer board. Therefore, miniaturization by reducing the number of parts is important.

  FIG. 98 is a timing chart in the configuration example of the main control I / O port 1314 shown in FIG. In FIG. 98, a dotted line perpendicular to the time axis indicates a break of the timer interrupt processing (timing of the timer interrupt processing).

  In the timer interrupt processing, the main control MPU 1311 outputs digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0. The latch 1 (1333) selected by CS0 takes in D1 to D4 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS0, and the driver 1 (1334) sets the common data (at the time of driving) corresponding to the digit specified by D1 to D4. Output HIGH).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment to be turned on by the function display unit 1400 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS2. The latch 3 (1333) selected by CS2 takes in D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS2, and the driver 3 (1334) stores the segment data (LOW when lit) specified by D1 to D8. Output, and the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is turned on.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment to be turned on by the base display 1317 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS1. The latch 2 (1333) selected by CS1 captures D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS1, and the driver 2 (1334) stores the segment data (LOW when lit) specified by D1 to D8. Then, the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is turned on.

  Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets all data on the data bus to 0 at the timing of outputting CS0, CS1, and CS2. As a result, the digit selection data set in the latch 1 (1333) and the display data set in the latches 2 and 3 (1333) are erased, and the 7-segment LED is turned off.

  In the next timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the next digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0, and repeats the above-described process to output digit selection data and display data. In this manner, the common driver circuit is shared between the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, the segment data is output in a time-division manner, and the common display is used to output the segment data. The LED element with the display unit 1400 can be turned on.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 (B) and 97, the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to the common driver circuit 1334, so that the circuit scale of the main control board 1310 can be reduced, and high-density mounting (for example, In addition, it is possible to easily mount components on the main control board 1310 where it is impossible to employ a multilayer board or to arrange components close to each other.

  In addition, in order to control both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 by common data in one timer interrupt process, the function display unit 1400 and the base display are controlled during the period of outputting the common data. 1313 at a different timing. Therefore, while both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are controlled by a common data line, the display of both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 can be controlled within one timer interrupt process. .

  In the case shown in FIG. 98, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first, and the display data of the base display 1317 is output later. Each display data is latched at the rising timing of the chip select (CS2, CS1), and is erased at the rising timing of the chip select (CS0) corresponding to the erase data. For this reason, as shown in the figure, when the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first, and the display data of the base display 1317 is output later, the display time of the function display unit 1400 is changed to the display time of the base display 1317. Be longer. This increases the lighting time in one cycle of the LED of the function display unit 1400 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and increases the luminance, thereby reducing the visibility due to being directly illuminated by the illumination of the hall. This is to prevent it. In addition, since the base display 1317 is disposed on the back side darker than the front side of the pachinko machine 1, even if the LED emits light at low luminance, the influence on the visibility of the base display 1317 is small. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first LED and the second LED controlled by the main control MPU 1311 are provided, and the emission brightness of the first LED is higher than the emission brightness of the second LED.

  Contrary to the above, the display data of the base display 1317 is output first, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output later, and the display time of the base display 1317 is displayed on the function display unit 1400. It may be longer than the time.

  FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating a change in a state (section) related to the calculation of the base value.

  On the base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the provisional section display and the confirmed section display are switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). In the provisional section display, the base value of the section being measured is displayed. Specifically, “bA.” Is displayed in the first two digits to indicate that the base value A is being displayed, and the base value A being measured is displayed in the last two digits as a two-digit percentage. Note that when the integer part of the percentage of the base value A is 99, “99” is displayed, when it is 100 or more, “99.” is displayed, and when it is 0, “00” is displayed. For this reason, even if the number of display digits of the base display 1317 is two, it is possible to display so that the base value A can be recognized as 0% or 100%.

  In the provisional section display, when the number of low-probability non-time-saving balls is less than a predetermined number (for example, 6000), the first two digits (or all four digits) are blinked (for example, a cycle of 0.6 seconds). , 0.3 seconds on and 0.3 seconds off), indicating that an accurate base value could not be measured. On the other hand, when the number of low-probability / non-timeout balls is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, 6000), the first two digits are lit to indicate that an accurate base value has been measured.

  In the confirmed section display, the base value of the immediately preceding section is displayed. Specifically, “bb.” Is lit on the upper two digits to indicate that the base value B is displayed, and the lower two digits are the base value of the immediately preceding section (the lower value of the previous section). The base value B), which is the final value of two digits, is lit and displayed in two-digit percentage. When the integer part of the percentage of the base value B is 99, “99” is displayed, when it is 100 or more, “99.” is displayed, and when it is 0, “00” is displayed. For this reason, even if the number of display digits of the base display 1317 is two, it is possible to display the base value B so that it is clear whether the base value B is 0% or 100%.

  In the first section, the base section is not measured because the previous section is a test section. For this reason, in the confirmed section display, "bb." Is blinkingly displayed in the first two digits, and "-" is blinkingly displayed in the last two digits.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, 256) in which the number of out-balls is less than 500 since the first power-on is set as a test section and the base value is not calculated. This is because in a predetermined number of launches from the first power-on of the pachinko machine 1, the pitch may vary within the range of the probability distribution, the base value is not stabilized, and a meaningful base value cannot be measured. . Therefore, in the test section, the base value is not displayed on the base display 1317, and the base value is made indefinite. Specifically, in the provisional section display, “bA.” Is displayed in the first two digits, “−−” is displayed in the last one digit, and “bb.” Is displayed in the first two digits in the confirmed section display. , "-" Is displayed in the last digit. In the test section, all digits of the base display 1317 are blinked to indicate that an accurate base value has not been measured. In the test section, the base value may be calculated, and the calculated base value may not be displayed on the base display 1317, and the base value may be undefined.

  Here, when the power is turned on for the first time, the power is turned on for the first time after the completion of the pachinko machine 1 or immediately after the initialization of the work area for base calculation (S26 in FIG. 101, S8013 in FIG. 108). State. The power-on generally used in this specification is a power-on other than the first power-on.

  In addition, all the LEDs of all digits of the base display 1317 may blink at a predetermined time after the power is turned on, or at a predetermined time after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (from the OFF operation of the setting key 971). .

  Note that in the inspection of the data in the base calculation area 13128 described later, when an abnormality is detected in the data and the data is deleted, the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section.

  In each section other than the test section, when the total number of out-balls in all game states (during a big hit, during a normal game, during a time reduction, during a non-time reduction, during a high probability, during a low probability, etc.) reaches 52,000, the next section is reached. To measure the new base value. Note that the number of out-balls in one section is not 52,000, but may be another number as long as it is a predetermined value. For example, assuming that the daily operation time of the pachinko machine 1 is 10 hours, the daily operation (number of out-balls) of 60,000 may be adopted as the number of out-balls in one section. 50,000 or 100,000, which are good numbers, may be adopted.

  Note that the number of out-balls in one section may be changed as appropriate. For example, a setting switch (DIP switch, rotary switch, or the like) may be provided on the main control board 1310, and the number of out-balls in one section may be set according to the setting of the switch. The switch is provided on a main control board 1310 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 or another board connected to the main control board 1310. Further, when the setting of the switch is changed, the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) of the RAM 1312 is initialized, and the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section. Good. Since the pachinko machine is frequently operated immediately after being introduced as a new unit, the number of out-balls in one section is set to a large number after the business period, and the number of out-balls in one section is set to a small number after the business period. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a setting means capable of setting an operation for determining the length of a section serving as a unit for calculating the base value, and when the power is turned on for the first time, based on the operation set by the setting means. Thus, the length of one section is set.

  As an example of displaying the determined section, an example in which the section immediately before the provisional section currently being measured is displayed will be described. However, the base values of a plurality of determined sections (for example, sections 1 to 3 before) are switched and displayed. May be. At this time, even if the display is switched from the provisional section to the determined section 1 to the determined section 2 to the determined section 3 at predetermined time intervals, the provisional section → the determined section 1 → the determined section 2 → The confirmed section 3 may be switched and displayed.

  In this case, the first two digits of the base display 1317 in the fixed section display are not “bb.” But “b1”, “b2”, and “b3”. It is good to display differently.

  As described above, the base value of the section currently being measured and the base value of the immediately preceding section or sections are switched and displayed at predetermined intervals on the base display 1317. In addition, a display capable of distinguishing display contents is displayed on a part of the base display 1317, and the measured base value is displayed on another part.

  FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of characters displayed on the base display 1317.

  As described above, the base display 1317 is configured by a 7-segment LED of a plurality of digits (for example, 4 digits), and displays a number or a character by lighting or blinking the segment of each digit. 0 to 9 can be displayed as numbers, and letters A, b, c, d, E, F, L, and a minus sign can be displayed as characters. In addition, decimal points can be displayed simultaneously with numbers and letters. The case where the number 6 is displayed simultaneously with the decimal point and the case where the number 9 is displayed are illustrated.

  FIG. 101 and FIG. 102 are flowcharts showing an example of the initialization processing of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  In the initialization processing shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, the check code calculation processing (step S50) and the check code storage processing (step S52) are deleted as compared with the initialization processing described above with reference to FIGS. Therefore, the calculation of the check code in the base calculation area is executed in the base calculation process (step S8038) of the timer interrupt process. Note that the same steps as those in the initialization processing described above with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes a main control program to perform an initialization process. First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the protection of the RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes the RAM 1312 writable (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates a built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for activation of the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510 or the like)) has elapsed. A determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). If the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) out of the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is deleted (step S30), and step S24 is performed. Proceed to. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch has not been operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set (step S20).

  As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30). The process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power-off is used in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

  As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect. The area other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct. Proceed to.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). When it is determined that the data is abnormal, the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted because the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect (step S26).

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18), the power failure flag abnormality in which the power failure flag is not set (step S20). There is a RAM abnormality where the checksums of the RAM do not match (step S22) and an abnormality of the base calculation work (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, and when the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (the game work area and the game stack area are deleted). Is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. If the base calculation work is abnormal, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

  In the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, and a base calculation work abnormality, unlike the illustrated one, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, so that the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 May be cleared. When the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a base calculation work error, the data indicating the game state is lost and the normal processing cannot be executed. In the case of a memory configuration, the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area It is good to initialize only. If the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared and the base calculation area 13128 is cleared, as described above. You don't have to clear it.

  When one or a plurality of backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, first, the main area is determined using a check code, and if it is determined that the main area is abnormal, the backup areas 1, 2 are determined. , N in that order, and the data in the backup area first determined to be normal may be copied to the main area. Thereafter, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is. When it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is erased under different conditions (the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128) for each data type. I do. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 is deleted, but the backed up base calculation area 13128 is not deleted. When the base calculation area 13128 can be deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, the base value calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be deleted at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, the backed-up base calculation area 13128 is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, so that the base calculation area 13128 is prevented from being erased by the operation of the game room attendant, and the abnormal base value is hidden. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect a gaming machine whose base value has been modified to a high state or a low state.

  The main control MPU 1311 performs an initial setting process (step S28) for setting in the various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) when the power recovery of the RAM work area or the RAM initialization process is executed. A power-on command setting process (step S32) for transmitting to the 1515 is executed, and execution of an interrupt process including a timer interrupt process is permitted (step S34). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure notice signal (step S36), and determines whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S38). If the power failure notice signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is "No"), a random number update process is executed (step S40).

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is detected (the result of step S38 is “Yes”), the main control MPU 1311 executes a power failure process (power failure setting means). In the power-off process, first, execution of the interrupt process is prohibited (step S42), the output port is cleared, and the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port is stopped (step S44). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held (step S46), and checks the checksum calculation result in the RAM 1312. It is stored in the sum area (step S48).

  Subsequently, the data in the main area of the base calculation work (base calculation area 13128) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be performed appropriately (for example, every time data is updated) in the base calculation process, instead of the main-board-side power-off process. In this way, by storing the data used for calculating the base value in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for calculating the base value and the calculated base value can be obtained even when the power is turned off. And a base value in long-term operation can be calculated.

  The check code checked in step S24 is calculated in step S8038 (FIG. 106) of the base calculation process. Further, in a modified example described later, it is calculated in step S50 (FIG. 22) of the initialization processing.

  Further, a value indicating that backup has been normally performed is stored as a power failure flag in the backup flag area (step S56), and "01H" indicating write prohibition is output to the RAM protect register to prohibit writing to the RAM 1312 (step S56). S58), and stands by until the power is restored (infinite loop).

  FIG. 103 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the base calculation area 13128 in which the accessory ratio calculation area illustrated in FIG. 26A is read in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment.

  The base calculation area 13128 is composed of a part of the RAM 1312, and is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area) as described above.

  The base calculation area 13128 includes a storage area for the base value A, the base value B, the section counter, the total number of out-balls, the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out-balls, and the number of low-probability / non-time-saving award balls.

  The storage area for the base value A is composed of one byte and stores the base value of the provisional section currently being measured. The storage area for the base value B is composed of one byte, and stores a base value measured in a section immediately before the provisional section. The storage area of the section counter is composed of 1 byte, and stores a value indicating the section whose base value is currently being measured. The section counter is updated each time the section is switched, and is used to control different display contents depending on the section. The section counter may be controlled so as not to be larger than any one of 0, 1, and 2, that is, 2. Specifically, the section counter = 0 in the test section, the section counter = 1 in the first section, and the section counter = 2 in the second and subsequent sections. In addition, the section counter may be controlled so as to be a value from 0 to 255 so as not to be larger than 255, and the section counter becomes 2 or more after the second section.

  The storage area for the total number of out-balls is composed of 2 bytes, and stores the number of all out-balls regardless of the gaming state (ie, a value indicating the operation of the gaming machine). The total number of out-balls is used to determine the switching of the section that is the base unit of measurement. In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the operation of one day is generally regarded as one section, and the base value in each section is measured. Therefore, 2 bytes (65536) are allocated to the storage area for the total number of out-balls. As described above, the total number of out-balls is a storage area for counting the number of all out-balls regardless of the game state for each section. (Total value from the start of operation of the pachinko machine 1).

  The storage area for the number of low-probability / non-timeout balls is composed of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and stores the number of out balls for calculating the base value (the number of out balls in a game state other than during the special prize). Store. The storage area for the number of low-probability / non-time-short award balls is composed of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and stores the number of award balls for calculating the base value (the number of award balls in a game state other than during the special prize). Store. The storage area for the low-probability / non-time-saving out-of-ball count and the storage area for the low-probability / non-time-saving-prize-ball count need only be an area of 2 bytes or more. It is better to do.

  The storage capacity (the number of bytes) of each storage area described above is merely an example, and may be determined according to the number of out balls in one section.

  When the main area and the backup area of the base calculation area 13128 are provided, a storage area having the same configuration is provided in the RAM 1312.

  FIG. 104 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 104 is different from the timer interrupt process described above with reference to FIG. 23 in that a base calculation process (step S801) is provided in place of the update process of the accessory ratio calculation area in step S81. The object ratio calculation / display process is deleted. Note that the same steps as those in the timer interrupt process described above with reference to FIG. 23 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 executes the main control program, first sets 1 to RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word, and switches the register (step S70).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (Step S74), a timer update process (Step S76), a random number update process 1 (Step S78), and a prize ball control process (Step S80).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current game state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as a game value to an area corresponding to the current game state, and stores the base calculation area 13128 ( The base value is calculated (step S801). Details of the base calculation process will be described later with reference to FIGS. The base calculation process (step S801) may be executed in any order after the award ball control process (step S80), but may be executed in an earlier order to ensure execution at every timer interruption. .

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs a frame command receiving process (step S82), a fraud detection process (step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86), a normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process (step S86). Step S88), output data setting processing (step S90), and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92).

  Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing ends, the timer interrupt processing ends, and the processing returns to the processing before the interruption.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value is measured by the timer interrupt processing, so that the base value during the game can be measured in real time.

  FIG. 105 and FIG. 106 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the base calculation process.

  The base calculation process (step S801) is called from the timer interrupt process and executed by the main control MPU 1311.

  By executing the base calculation program, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011). For example, as described above, the winning opening sensors (general winning opening sensor 3015, first starting opening sensor 2104, second starting opening sensor 2551, first winning opening sensor 2114, second upper winning opening sensor 2554, second winning opening sensor 2554, When there is an abnormality in the lower ball prize mouth sensor 2557) or the ejected ball sensor (board side ejected ball sensor 3060A, frame side ejected ball sensor 3060B), the base value is accurately calculated by the abnormal signal output from the interface circuit 1331. It is determined that there is an error that cannot be made. Also, when it is determined that cheating has been performed (for example, when the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism, when the vibration detection sensor detects vibration, and when the radio wave detection sensor detects radio waves), the base value is also accurately determined. Is determined to have an error that cannot be calculated. When it is determined that there is this error, the display of the base display 1317 may be turned off. In step S8011, it is determined that an error (for example, magnetic, vibration, radio wave error, etc.) accompanied by a game stop is an error (YES), and an error not accompanied by a game stop (eg, prize ball abnormality, door opening, etc.). Failures that are not directly related to the calculation or the base (out-of-supply, full tank error, etc.) may be determined to be no error (NO). In other words, the base calculation process may be executed even if there is some abnormality among a plurality of types of abnormal states, and the base calculation process may not be executed if there is another abnormality.

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 obtains the number of out balls (step S8014). As described above, the number of out-balls is detected by the launching ball sensor 1020, the ejecting ball sensor 3060, and the like. In the switch input process of step S74, the detection signals of these sensors are read, and if there is a detection signal of the sensor, the out-going ball is detected. The number of spheres = 1 is obtained. When out balls are detected by the plurality of discharged ball sensors 3060, the total value of the numbers detected by each sensor is acquired as the number of out balls. That is, a plurality of out balls may be detected in one timer interrupt process.

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of winning balls (step S8015). As described above, the number of prize balls is obtained as the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control processing in step S80. The number of award balls obtained in the base calculation process may be the number of award balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of award balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command may be used. Alternatively, the main control board 1310 may transmit a payout command to the payout control board 951 and receive the acknowledgment (ACK) from the payout control board 951. Furthermore, the main control board 1310 may transmit the payout command to the payout control board 951, and may receive the payout completion report from the payout control board 951 (the number of paid out prize balls). This variation is as described with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether an out ball has been detected in step S8014 (step S8016). If no out-ball has been detected, the process proceeds to step S8022 without executing the processing relating to the out-ball. On the other hand, if an out ball has been detected, the detected out ball number is added to the total out ball number stored in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8017).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128, and determines whether the current section is a test section (step S8018). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is a predetermined value of less than 500 since the first power-on of the pachinko machine (or initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and the value of the section counter is 0, which is the initial value. Has become. Thus, if the section counter value is 0, it can be determined that the section is a test section. If it is a test section, there is no need to calculate the base value, so the flow proceeds to step S8028. On the other hand, if it is not the test section, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a special prize (step S8019). The determination as to whether or not a special prize is being made can be made in the same manner as in step S810 in FIG. The state of the game being in the special prize state means that the big wins 2005 and 2006 are open due to the big hit and the player is able to obtain many prize balls, but includes the time of opening and ending the big hit game. You may. When the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing in one big hit, the time from the closing of the special winning opening to the next opening (close interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810, it means that the condition device is operating, for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. Also, all times during the right-handed instruction may be included.

  Further, in the start-up ports 2002 and 2004, during the time reduction, during the probable change (during the ST), and during the power support, the special award may be included. Further, in a game state other than during the working hours, during the probable change (during the ST), and during the power support, a predetermined time after the opening of the starting port 2004 until the closing thereof (for example, until a ball winning the starting port is detected as an out ball). The period up to the required several seconds) may be included in the special prize. Note that the so-called “latent game state” which is a high-probability game state but does not become a time-saving state (during electric support) is not included in the special prize, and is the same as the normal state (low-probability / non-time-saving state). The base value may be calculated using the number of prize balls or the number of out balls. In this case, the base value may be calculated separately in each of the normal game state and the latent game state, and the base value may be displayed so that it is possible to identify which base display is to be performed.

  Although the latent game state is a game state that does not allow the player to recognize that it is a high probability state even if it has a high probability, if the latent game state is excluded from the calculation of the base value, the frame is opened during business hours In some cases, the player looks at the base display 1317 and recognizes that the player is in a hidden game state (that is, a high probability). In other words, in a case where an employee of the hall cares for a ball in the winning opening or sheds a ball in the out opening in the frame open state, the player can know the gaming state depending on whether the base display changes. Such a problem can be avoided by calculating the base value without distinguishing between the normal game state and the hidden game state.

  On the other hand, in the business of the hall, it may be necessary to manage the base value in the low-probability, non-time saving state, and when calculating the base value including the latent game state, it may not be possible to manage according to the business mode of the hall . Such a problem can be avoided by calculating the base value excluding the hidden game state. Similar problems can be avoided by calculating the base value separately for the normal game state and the hidden game state. That is, since the normal game state and the latent game state are different game states in the first place, depending on the business mode of the hall, it may be desired to manage (examine) the base value separately for each game state. .

  When calculating the base value separately for the normal game state and the hidden game state, even if the base value is calculated using a dedicated calculation process for each game state, the base value is calculated using the common calculation process. May be. By calculating the base value using a common calculation process, the processing load on the CPU can be reduced, and the program capacity can be reduced.

  The electric actuated accessory provided in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is divided into two types from the viewpoint of calculating the base value. As described above, during the special prize regarding the special winning opening 2005 or 2006 in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the condition device is being operated (for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending), Since the base value is calculated based on the number of prize balls and the number of out-balls other than the special prize, a normal (so-called big hit) prize in the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 is not used for calculating the base value. On the other hand, in the starting port 2004 having an opening / closing member (so-called electric tulip), a winning ball and a prize ball other than during the special prize (low probability or non-time saving) are used for calculating the base value. In other words, some of the electrically actuated actors (grand prize openings 2005 and 2006) use the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls in the calculation of the base value regardless of the playing state (whether or not a special prize is in progress). The other characters (starting opening 2004) are not used, and whether to use the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls for the calculation of the base value is switched according to the game state (whether or not a special prize is in progress). Will be.

  The special winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened even when the condition device does not operate (so-called small hits). Generally, a small hit occurs during a short working time, and since it is open for a short time, there is a low possibility that a game ball wins, so that it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, a small hit may be generated other than during the special prize (at a normal time), and the game ball may be opened only during a time when there is a high possibility that the game ball wins. In this case, the winning balls and the prize balls to the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 in the small hits generated other than during the special prize may be used for calculating the base value. In this way, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of a small hit other than during the special prize. That is, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly cope with the standard of the base value, and it is possible to improve design flexibility.

  If the gaming state is during the special prize, the process proceeds to step S8022 without updating the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out-balls, because the ball is an out-ball not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the special prize, the number of out-balls detected in step S8014 is to be used for the calculation of the base. The calculated number of out-balls is added (step S8020). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8021). The update flag is set to 1 each time the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is executed, when an out-ball or award ball other than a special prize is detected, and indicates a timing at which a base value should be calculated (steps S8026 to S8027). reference).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a winning ball has been detected in step S8015 (step S8022). If no prize ball has been detected, the process proceeds to step S8026 without executing the process related to the prize ball. On the other hand, if a prize ball has been detected, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a special prize (step S8023). The determination as to whether or not a special prize is being made may be the same as in step S8019.

  If the gaming state is during the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the process proceeds to step S8026 without updating the low probability / non-time saving prize ball count. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the special prize, the number of prize balls detected in step S8015 is to be used for the calculation of the base. The determined award balls are added (step S8024). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8025).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8026). When the update flag is 1, since the out ball or the prize ball other than the special prize is detected in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process), the number of low-probability / non-time-saving prize balls is reduced to the low-probability / non-time-out ball. The base value is calculated by dividing by the number and stored in the base value A storage area of the base calculation area 13128 (step S8027).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter to determine whether or not a test section is being performed (step S8028). Then, when the section counter value is 0, indicating that it is a test section, it is determined whether it is time to end the test section (step S8029). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is a predetermined value of less than 500 since the first power-on of the pachinko machine (including the initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and indicates that the section counter is a test section, If the total number of out-balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, it can be determined that it is time to end the test section.

  As a result, if it is not the timing to end the test section, the process proceeds to step S8034 without updating the base calculation area 13128 to continue the test section. On the other hand, if it is during the test section and it is the timing to end the test section, the process proceeds from the test section to the first section, and the process proceeds to step S8032. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the section counter (Step S8032). The section counter changes from 0 representing the test section to 1 representing the first section. Then, the total number of out-balls, the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls, and the number of low-probability / non-time-saving award balls are initialized to 0 (step S8033). With this processing, the test section is completed, and the process proceeds to the first section.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8028 that the section counter value is not 0 and the test section is not in the test section, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the total number of out-balls is 52000 or more (step S8030). If the total number of out-balls is smaller than 52000, the flow advances to step S8034 to continue the current section.

  On the other hand, if the total number of out-balls is 52,000 or more, the section ends, and processing for starting a new section (steps S8031 to S8033) is executed. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the base value A from the base value A storage area in the base calculation area 13128 and writes the base value A into the base value B storage area (step S8031). Thereafter, 1 is added to the section counter (step S8032). As described above, the section counter is controlled so as not to be larger than any one of 0, 1, and 2, that is, 2. Therefore, when the section counter value is 2, even if 1 is added to the section counter. The section counter value does not increase and remains at 2. Then, the total number of out-balls, the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out-balls, and the number of low-probability / non-time-saving award balls are initialized to 0 (step S8033), and the process proceeds to the next section.

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8034). If the update flag is 1, data for displaying the newly calculated base value is generated (step S8035). Details of the base display data generation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 sets the update flag to 0 (Step S8036).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the display switching counter (Step S8037). The display switching counter is used to switch and display the provisional section display and the fixed section display described with reference to FIG. 99 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). The predetermined time for switching between the provisional section display and the confirmed section display is a cycle of blinking display (blinking display controlled in step S8051 in FIG. 107) when the number of low-probability / non-timeout balls in each section is less than 6000. It should be much longer. This is because if the blinking and the display switching are of the same period, the blinking display (that is, whether the number of low-probability / non-timeout balls is less than 6000) becomes difficult to understand, so that the blinking display is performed. This is in order to make it easy to understand whether or not the switching is performed.

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a check code (for example, a checksum) from the data in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8038). The check code is calculated using the same calculation method as that for calculating the check code in step S50 of the initialization processing (FIG. 22). In addition, when the check code is set to a fixed value without being calculated, a value of a plurality of bytes in which adjacent bits of the check code do not have the same value may be used (for example, in the case of two bytes, A55AH (1010010101011010B)). To). Instead of setting fixed values in continuous areas, they may be arranged separately. For example, a first fixed value is stored at the head of the base calculation area 13128, a second fixed value is stored in the middle, and a third fixed value is stored at the end. When the check code is a fixed value, it is preferable to configure the check code with a larger number of bytes than the check data obtained by calculating the checksum to improve the possibility of determining a RAM abnormality.

  As described above, according to the base calculation process of the present embodiment, the base value is calculated and displayed for each timer interrupt process, so that the base value can be set without delay at the timing of each occurrence of a prize ball or each occurrence of an out ball ( (In real time) and determine whether the base value is normal or abnormal without delay. Note that the capacity of the base calculation area 13128, which is a storage area used for base calculation, is extremely small as compared with the capacity of the game control area 13126. Even if it is calculated, the influence on the processing load of the main control MPU 1311 is small.

  In addition, when a base value is calculated and displayed for the prize ball using the expected number of prize balls to be paid out based on the generated winning signal, the timing at which the base value is calculated and displayed and the timing at which the prize ball is paid out Are different. That is, a state in which the payout device is abnormal and the prize ball is not paid out (the supply device runs out, the upper plate is full, the payout number count sensor provided in the prize ball passage, the payout motor fails, or the like). Base value is calculated and displayed.

  In the above-described base calculation process, each time the base calculation process is called from the timer interrupt process, the base value is calculated using the number of out-balls detected in the timer interrupt process and the calculated number of prize balls. The base value may be calculated each time the ball sensor 3060 detects an out ball and each time various winning opening sensors detect a winning ball. That is, in one timer interrupt process, the base value calculation process is called a plurality of times, and the base value is calculated a plurality of times. In this way, even if the timing of the above-described section switching (the number of out balls is 52,000) arrives in one base calculation process, it is possible to distinguish which of the preceding and following sections is to be calculated as the base value. , Can display an accurate base value in real time.

  Also, as in steps S815 to S817 of the above-described base calculation area update processing (FIG. 46), it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. Alternatively, the award ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has expired, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has expired, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is performed. May be stopped.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the base display data generation process.

  The base display data generation processing is called and executed from step S8035 of the base calculation processing.

  By executing the base display data generation program, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether the display switching counter is smaller than 1250 (step S8041). Since the timer interrupt process described above is executed every 4 milliseconds, when the display switching counter reaches 1250, five seconds have elapsed since the display switching counter was initialized to zero. In step S8053, the display switching counter is initialized to 0 when the display switching counter reaches 2499. Therefore, when the display switching counter is 0 to 1249, the processing in steps S8042 to S8045 is executed. Executes the processing of steps S8046 to S8049. For this reason, in the base display data generation processing of the present embodiment, the display data of the base display 1317 is switched every 5 seconds.

  If the display switching counter is smaller than 1250, data for displaying “bA.” In the first two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8042). Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128, and determines whether or not the current section is a test section (step S8043). Since the base value has not been calculated in the test section, data for displaying “−−” in the last two digits is generated (step S8044). On the other hand, if it is not a test section, data for displaying the base value A currently being measured in the provisional section is generated (step S8045).

  If it is determined in step S8041 that the display switching counter is 1250 or more, data for displaying "bb." In the first two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8046). After that, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 to determine whether the current section is the test section or the first section (step S8047). In the test section or the first section, since the base value has not been measured in the past determined section, data for displaying “−−” in the last two digits is generated (step S8048). On the other hand, if it is neither the test section nor the first section, data for displaying the base value B measured in the latest confirmed section is generated (step S8049).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the number of low-probability / non-timeout balls stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether the number of low-probability / non-timeout balls is smaller than 6000 (step S8050). ). If the number of low-probability / non-hours-out balls is smaller than 6000, the number of operations (number of out balls) after starting the measurement of the base value in the section is small, and the base value may not be stable. The display of the base display 1317 is controlled to blink (step S8051). On the other hand, if the number of low-probability / non-timeout balls is 6000 or more, control is performed so that the display on the base display 1317 is turned on without blinking (step S8052).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the display switching counter is 2499 or more (step S8053). If the display switching counter is smaller than 2499, the process proceeds to step S8055 without initializing the display switching counter. On the other hand, if the display switching counter is 2499 or more, one repetition has been completed, and the display switching counter is initialized to 0 (step S8054).

  Finally, the main control MPU 1311 generates a display pattern in which the generated display data and the lighting mode (lighting or blinking) are specified (step S8055).

  As described above, in the timer interrupt process (base calculation process) executed every predetermined time, the display content on the base display 1317 is switched by using the display switching counter that is periodically updated, so that the current time in the provisional section is changed. The base value A being measured and the base value B measured in the past in the determined section can be displayed in an easily understandable manner.

  In addition, since the blinking display is performed in a range where the base value is not stable in each section, whether the base value is in the stable range or in the range where the base value is not stable can be easily confirmed by the display of the base display 1317.

  FIG. 108 is a flowchart illustrating a modification of the base calculation process. 108 is the same as the base calculation process shown in FIG. 105 except that a base calculation work check process (steps S8012 and S8013) is added. Note that FIG. 108 describes the base calculation processing up to the calculation of the base value A (step S8027), but the processing of steps S8028 to S8038 is the same as that of FIG. 106 described above.

  By executing the base calculation program, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the work area for base calculation (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code (step S8012). If it is determined that the data is abnormal, the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted because the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect (step S8013).

  When one or a plurality of backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, first, the main area is determined using a check code, and if it is determined that the main area is abnormal, the backup areas 1, 2 are determined. , N in that order, and the data in the backup area first determined to be normal may be copied to the main area. Thereafter, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is. When it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

  In the illustrated example, after determining whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011), it is determined whether the base calculation area 13128 is normal (step S8012). It may be determined whether or not 13128 is normal (step S8012), and after performing necessary processing based on the determination result, whether or not there is an error in the calculation of the base value may be determined (step S8011).

  Subsequent processes (steps S8014 to S8014) are the same as those in FIGS. 105 and 106 described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the base calculation processing shown in FIG. 108, it is determined whether the data in the base calculation area 13128 is normal at each timer interrupt (ie, every 4 milliseconds). Display of a simple base value can be suppressed.

Next, a method of determining an abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment will be described. The value used for calculating the base value and the calculated base value are stored in a base calculation area 13128 of the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 (the “completion ratio calculation area 13128” shown in FIG. 26 is referred to as a “base calculation area 13128”). It is determined whether the data is normal at a predetermined timing. The process (timing) for performing the normal / abnormal determination step and the check code calculation step includes the following variations.
FIG. 101 and FIG. 106: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined when the power is turned on.
FIG. 21 and FIG. 22: The check code calculated at power-off is determined at power-on (initialization processing).
106 and 108: The check code calculated in the base calculation processing (timer interrupt processing) is determined in the base calculation processing (timer interrupt processing).

(A case where the check code is calculated for each timer interrupt and is determined when the power is turned on)
First, the process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) at power-on will be described with reference to FIGS.

  When the initialization processing is shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 and the base calculation processing is shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the base calculation area 13128 is determined in step S8038 of the base calculation processing (FIGS. 105 and 106). A check code (for example, checksum) is calculated from the data.

  In step S24 of the initialization processing (FIGS. 101 and 102), it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code. As a result, if it is determined that the data is abnormal, the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted because the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct (step S26).

  When the data in the base calculation area 13128 is erased, the state related to the calculation of the base value is initialized, so that the calculated base value is cleared and the calculation of the base value is started from the test period.

  When one or a plurality of backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, first, the main area is determined using a check code, and if it is determined that the main area is abnormal, the backup areas 1, 2 are determined. , N in order, and the data in the backup area initially determined to be normal may be copied to the main area to restore the data in the base calculation area 13128. Thereafter, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is. When it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

  In this case, the frequency of the check code determination is low, and the consumption of the calculation resources (main control MPU 1311) for the abnormality determination can be reduced.

(A case where the check code is calculated when the power is turned off and is determined when the power is turned on)
Next, a process of determining the check code calculated at the time of power-off at the time of power-on (initialization process) will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22.

  When the initialization processing is shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 and the base calculation processing is shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, in step S50 of the power-off processing of the initialization processing (FIGS. 21 and 22), A check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data of the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128).

  In step S24 of the initialization processing (FIGS. 21 and 22), it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code. As a result, if it is determined that the data is abnormal, the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted because the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct (step S26).

  In this case, the calculation of the check code in step S8038 of the base calculation process may be omitted.

  In this case, the frequency of calculation and determination of the check code is low, and the consumption of calculation resources (main control MPU 1311) related to abnormality determination can be reduced.

(A case where the check code is calculated by timer interrupt processing and determined)
Next, the process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  When the base calculation processing is shown in FIGS. 108 and 106, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data of the base calculation area 13128 in step S8038 of the base calculation processing (FIGS. 108 and 106).

  In step S8012 of the base calculation processing (FIGS. 108 and 106), it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code. As a result, if it is determined that the data is abnormal, the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted because the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect (step S8013).

  In this case, the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, and the step of determining whether the base calculation work area is normal in steps S24 and S26 may be omitted.

  In this case, an abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected more quickly than in the case described above.

  When a fixed value is used for the check code instead of the checksum, the timing for setting and determining the check code may be the same as the timing for calculating and determining the checksum. Alternatively, the determination may be made by using both the checksum and the fixed value as the check code.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram illustrating calculation of a base value when the gaming state is switched.

  One game ball won while the starting port 2004 (electric tulip) was open, and thereafter, a predetermined number of variable display games ended, the time saving state ended, and the state returned to the normal state. Thereafter, in a normal state, it is assumed that a game ball wins in the opening port 2004 that is being opened.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display in accordance with the winning of the starting port 2004. That is, the illustrated variable display game in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in connection with any winning in the starting opening 2004 is performed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the out ball during the special prize is not used for the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting port 2004 is not added to the number of low probability / non-time-saving out balls, The second winning ball is added to the number of low-probability, non-timeout balls.

  In the above, the case where the time saving state ends is described, but the same applies to the case where the probable change by the ST ends.

  A similar phenomenon occurs at the time of a big hit in the special symbol variation display game, in addition to the end of the time saving state described above. It is assumed that, in the normal state, one game ball wins while the starting port 2004 (electric tulip) is open, then the big hit state starts, and further, the game ball wins the opening port 2004 being opened.

  Also in this case, a variable display game in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in relation to winning in any of the starting openings 2004 is performed. On the other hand, since the out ball in the special prize is not used for the base calculation, the first prize ball to the starting port 2004 is added to the number of low probability / non-time saving out balls, but the second prize ball is low probability.・ It is not added to the number of non-hours out balls.

  Further, the same phenomenon occurs when a specific error occurs. In a normal state, it is assumed that one game ball wins while the starting port 2004 (electric tulip) is open, a specific error occurs after that, and further, a game ball wins in the opening port 2004 being opened. . As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a specific error occurs (when it is determined that there is an error for which the base value cannot be accurately calculated by the abnormal signal output from the interface circuit 1331), Do not use the sphere for base calculations.

  Also in this case, a variable display game in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in relation to winning in any of the starting openings 2004 is performed. On the other hand, since the out ball in which a specific error has occurred is not used for the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting port 2004 is added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number, but the second winning ball is added. Is not added to the number of low-probability, non-timeout balls.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of game balls which have been won during the operation of the electrically-powered accessory under specific conditions (such as at the end of time saving, at the time of the occurrence of a special symbol variation display game big hit, or at the time of a specific error). May be used for the calculation of the base value and may not be used for the base calculation, and the variation of the special figure can be started in any of the winnings.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, with respect to the pre-reading effect of the special symbol variation display game on hold, the first prize winning in the time opening state in the starting port 2004 is not a target of the pre-reading effect, and is in the normal state. The second winning prize may be a target of a look-ahead effect. Conversely, the first prize winning in the starting port 2004 in the time saving state may be a target of the prefetching effect, and the second prize winning in the normal state may not be a target of the prefetching effect.

  Although the timing of changing from the time saving state to the normal state has been described, the same applies to the timing of changing from the positive change state (ST) or the power support state to the normal state.

[10. Memory switching in processing outside the game control area]
Next, switching of the memory used by the CPU in processing outside the game control area (for example, base calculation processing) will be described.

  FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a configuration relating to a storage area in the internal configuration of the main control MPU 1311.

  The main control MPU 1311 is configured as shown in FIG. 18 as a whole, but FIG. 110 shows the configuration related to the storage area in detail.

  In the main control MPU 1311, a RAM 1312, a ROM 1313, and an auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU are provided as storage areas for storing data. The CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 exclusively temporarily stores data (for example, a flag indicating a state of an operation result, a program execution state, data input / output to / from the CPU 13111) when the CPU 13111 executes the program. In the CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142, for example, a random number value updated in the random number update process (Step S40 in FIG. 22) and an intermediate value in the random number value update operation are temporarily stored. Also, the address of the subroutine to be executed and the address of the jump destination are temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU, and the processor core 13141 executes the processing corresponding to the stored address. Furthermore, values input to the ports from various switches connected to the main control board 1310 (for example, values in the process of creating edge information of a signal input from the switches and detection results of edge information) are temporarily stored. To be stored.

  When a random number is acquired and stored in the holding storage area at the time of winning the starting opening, the random number value is temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU, and the temporarily stored random number value is stored in the holding storage area of the RAM 1312. To memorize. In addition, when the random number at the time of starting opening winning is acquired and the pre-reading determination (winning determination at the time of starting opening winning) is performed based on the value of the random number, the randomness temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU is determined. The prefetch determination may be performed based on the numerical value, or the random number stored in the reserved storage area may be read (again) into any storage area of the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU to perform the prefetch determination.

  The CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 is provided separately from the memory space configured by the RAM 1312 and the ROM 1313 and specified by an address, and is specified by the name (for example, Area0) of each storage area included in the CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142. . The in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 includes a switching unit 13143, a switching register 13144, and a plurality of auxiliary storage areas 13145A to 13145C.

  The auxiliary storage areas 13145A to 13145A are configured by a plurality of storage areas (Area 0 to 6) having a predetermined number of bits (for example, 1 byte or 2 bytes), and a group is formed for every predetermined number (7 in the figure) of storage areas. Thus, access from the processor core 13141 is enabled for each group. That is, when the auxiliary storage area 13145A is selected, the processor core 13141 can access only the auxiliary storage area 13145A and cannot access the other auxiliary storage areas 13145B and 13145C.

  As described later, the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145 can be performed by switching a plurality of storage areas for each group by one CHANGE instruction. For example, the instruction CHANGE 0 selects the auxiliary storage area 13145A of the group 0, and switches the auxiliary storage area accessible by the processor core 13141 to the group 0.

  The auxiliary storage area 13145 is composed of three groups in the illustrated example, but may be any number as long as it is two or more. That is, at least two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided with the same configuration.

  The storage area (Area0 to Area5) of the auxiliary storage area 13145 is a storage area provided separately from the RAM 1312 for temporarily storing data at the time of program execution, and one (1 byte = 8 bits) can be used. Even if a plurality is set (for example, 2 bytes = 16 bits where Area 0 and Area 1 are paired), it can be used. For this reason, 8-bit data or 16-bit data can be stored in the auxiliary storage area 13145 without generating extra capacity in the storage area. The storage area (Area 6) is set as a storage area used with a capacity of an integral multiple (for example, 2 bytes) of another storage area, and cannot be used by being divided into 1-byte storage areas. As described above, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is configured by the storage areas having a plurality of capacities, and the storage area that can be used in any combination is provided. Therefore, the storage area is selectively used according to the use (eg, data length) in the arithmetic processing. be able to. For example, if the address space is represented by 16 bits, an address can be specified in one (or a set of combined) storage areas. Therefore, the number of arguments of the instruction can be reduced, and the instruction can be executed with a small number of clocks.

  The switching unit 13143 switches the group of storage areas that can be accessed by the processor core 13141 according to the value stored in the switching register 13144.

  The switching register 13144 is a storage area that stores data for determining an accessible auxiliary storage area 13145, and is an area that can be accessed by the processor core 13141 regardless of the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145. The switching register 13144 includes, for example, data for identifying the auxiliary storage area 13145 to be selected (for example, 2-bit data for switching between four areas), and an abnormal flag indicating that switching was not performed normally. (When the abnormality flag is set, the switching command is executed again), and an unauthorized access flag set when an abnormality occurs in which the value of the unselected auxiliary storage area 13145 has changed is stored. Good.

  Further, the switching register 13144 may store a flag (for example, a carry flag, a parity / overflow flag, a zero flag, a sign flag, and the like) indicating the state of the operation result.

  In addition to the switching register 13144, a storage area accessible by the processor core 13141 without depending on the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be provided. For example, a program counter indicating the address at which the program is being executed and a stack pointer indicating the start address of the stack area provided in the RAM 1312 may be provided.

  FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of a program for the timer interrupt process and the base calculation process, and shows a specific example of a part that calls the base calculation process from the timer interrupt process and returns from the base calculation process.

  In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801, but interrupts are prohibited by the DI instruction before the process proceeds to the base calculation process. The base calculation process can be performed without interrupting the process from the DI instruction to the EI instruction.

  After that, the data of the switching register 13144 is saved to the game control stack area 13137 (see FIG. 113) by the PUSH instruction. After that, the program is executed from the start address xxxx of the base calculation process by the CALL instruction.

  In the base calculation processing, before starting the processing shown in FIGS. 105 to 108, the CHANGE instruction is used to use the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the group 0 used in the timer interrupt processing of the caller in the base calculation processing of the callee. Switch to group 1. As described above, a plurality of storage areas can be switched for each group by one CHANGE instruction, and a plurality of storage areas can be switched collectively by one instruction (ie, a small number of steps).

  Further, the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt processing is written to an arbitrary address (for example, zzz) of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction, and the stack pointer value is saved. Thereafter, the address yyyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 is written to the stack pointer by the LD instruction, and the stack area is changed.

  After the preparation for executing the base calculation processing is completed, the processing is executed from step S8011 in FIG. 105 or FIG. Then, after the base calculation process is completed (after step S8038 in FIG. 106), the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is restored from the address zzzzz of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction. After that, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched from the group 1 used in the base calculation processing of the callee to the group 0 used in the timer interrupt processing of the caller by the CHANGE instruction, and then the timer interrupt processing of the caller is changed by the RET instruction. Return. In general, an instruction for switching the auxiliary storage area 13145 and an instruction for restoring data saved on the stack have different roles. However, in this embodiment, after returning from the base calculation process to the timer interrupt process, By returning the data saved in the stack to the switching register 13144, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary storage area 13145 does not have to be switched to group 0 by the CHANGE instruction after the base calculation processing is completed, but the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be surely switched by the CHANGE instruction.

  As described above, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 by changing an argument (operand), but a different instruction may be provided for each auxiliary storage area 13145.

  Thereafter, when returning from the base calculation processing, the data of the switching register 13144 saved in the game control stack area 13137 is restored to the switching register 13144 by the POP instruction. The saving and restoring of the data of the switching register 13144 may be performed by using other instructions (for example, the data transfer instruction LD and the exchange instruction EX) without using the push or POP as the stack operation instruction.

  Thereafter, after permitting the interrupt by the EI instruction, the timer interrupt process is continued, the timer interrupt process is terminated by RETI, and the process returns to the main control side main process (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21).

  Note that the interrupt may be prohibited by the DI instruction at the beginning of the timer interrupt processing, and may be enabled by the EI instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing. In addition, the interrupt may be disabled when the timer interrupt processing is started by directly operating the interrupt enable flag without using the DI instruction or the EI instruction, and the interrupt may be enabled at the execution timing of the RETI instruction.

  Further, since the timer interrupt processing is originally executed in a state where the interrupt is prohibited, it is not necessary to further prohibit the interrupt or permit the interrupt in the timer interrupt processing. In the illustrated program example, the interrupt prohibition by the DI instruction is for setting the state where the interrupt is permitted for some reason to the interrupt prohibition. In this case, the interrupt-inhibited state should be continued until the end of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the EI instruction should be executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, not immediately after the POP instruction.

  In the example described above, the saving of the switching register 13144 is executed by the timer interrupt processing of the caller, and the switching of the auxiliary storage area 13145 and the switching of the stack area are executed by the base calculation processing of the callee. The two processes may be executed by either the caller or the callee when the process moves out of the game control region and when the process returns to the inside of the game control region. An example in which the auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched in the caller's timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 112 is a diagram showing another example of the program for the timer interrupt processing and the base calculation processing, and shows a specific example of a part that calls the base calculation processing from the timer interrupt processing and returns from the base calculation processing.

  In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801, but interrupts are prohibited by the DI instruction before the process proceeds to the base calculation process. The base calculation process can be performed without interruption by the interruption between the DI instruction and the EI instruction by the interruption.

  After that, the data of the switching register 13144 is saved to the game control stack area 13137 (see FIG. 113) by the PUSH instruction. Thereafter, the CHANGE instruction is used to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 from group 0 used in the caller's timer interrupt process to group 1 used in the callee's base calculation process. As described above, a plurality of storage areas can be switched for each group by one CHANGE instruction, and a plurality of storage areas can be switched collectively by one instruction (ie, a small number of steps).

  After that, the program is executed from the start address xxxx of the base calculation process by the CALL instruction.

  In the base calculation process, before starting the processes shown in FIGS. 105 to 108, the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is written to an arbitrary address (for example, zzzzz) of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction, and the stack pointer value is written. Evacuate. Thereafter, the address yyyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 is written to the stack pointer by the LD instruction, and the stack area is changed.

  After the preparation for executing the base calculation processing is completed, the processing is executed from step S8011 in FIG. 105 or FIG. Then, after the base calculation process is completed (after step S8038 in FIG. 106), the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is restored from the address zzzzz of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction.

  Thereafter, when returning from the base calculation processing, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched from the group 1 used in the base calculation processing of the callee to the group 0 used in the timer interrupt processing of the caller by the CHANGE instruction, and the game is executed by the POP instruction. The data of the switching register 13144 saved in the control stack area 13137 is restored to the switching register 13144. The saving and restoring of the data of the switching register 13144 may be performed by using other instructions (for example, the data transfer instruction LD and the exchange instruction EX) without using the push or POP as the stack operation instruction.

  As described above, the return of the switching register 13144 returns the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the state before calling the base calculation processing. Therefore, the auxiliary storage area 13145 need not be switched by the CHANGE instruction. However, the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be reliably switched by the CHANGE instruction.

  Thereafter, after permitting the interrupt by the EI instruction, the timer interrupt process is continued, the timer interrupt process is terminated by RETI, and the process returns to the main control side main process (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21).

  As described above, the interrupt may be prohibited by the DI instruction at the beginning of the timer interrupt processing, and may be enabled by the EI instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing. In addition, the interrupt may be disabled when the timer interrupt processing is started by directly operating the interrupt enable flag without using the DI instruction or the EI instruction, and the interrupt may be enabled at the execution timing of the RETI instruction.

  Further, since the timer interrupt processing is originally executed in a state where the interrupt is prohibited, it is not necessary to further prohibit the interrupt or permit the interrupt in the timer interrupt processing. In the illustrated program example, the interrupt prohibition by the DI instruction is for setting the state where the interrupt is permitted for some reason to the interrupt prohibition. In this case, the interrupt-inhibited state should be continued until the end of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the EI instruction should be executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, not immediately after the POP instruction.

  In FIG. 111, an example has been described in which the timer interrupt processing, the base calculation processing, and the auxiliary storage area 13145 are switched. However, the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be switched in the inspection processing executed by the debug (inspection function) code 13133. In this case, at the beginning of the debug (inspection function) code 13133, the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be switched to the auxiliary storage area 13145 for inspection processing by a CHANGE instruction. Further, an initialization process (step S10 in FIG. 21 to step S34 in FIG. 22), a main control side main process (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21), a power-off process (steps S42 to S58 in FIG. 21), The auxiliary storage area 13145 may be switched between the timer interrupt processing (FIGS. 23, 75, 80, etc.) and a different auxiliary storage area 13145 may be used for each processing.

  Further, when only two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided, processing executed in the game control area (for example, main control side main processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like) and processing performed outside the game control area (for example, debug ( The auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched between processing (for example, debugging processing, base calculation processing, and the like) executed in the inspection function) area and base calculation area, and different auxiliary storage areas 13145 are used separately inside and outside the game control area. Is also good.

  In this case, the same auxiliary storage area 13145 is used for the main control side main processing and the timer interrupt processing. However, since the main control side main processing being executed is interrupted and the timer interrupt processing is started, the timer interrupt processing is started. At the start of the process (for example, at the beginning of the timer interrupt process), the value of the auxiliary storage area 13145 is temporarily stored in the game control stack area 13137, and at the end of the timer interrupt process (for example, at the end of the timer interrupt process). The value temporarily stored in the game control stack area 13137 may be returned to the auxiliary storage area 13145.

  For example, since the auxiliary storage area 13145 has a plurality of (byte) storage areas, the number of instructions for saving increases when the unit is saved to the stack area by one unit (byte or word). Similarly, the number of instructions for restoring data from the stack area increases. Also, in this case, if the order of processing is wrong between data saving to the stack area and data recovery from the stack area, different data is read from the stack area, so that subsequent processing may not be performed accurately. . For this reason, by providing an instruction to collectively save all of the plurality of storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area and collectively restore all of the plurality of storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the stack area, The above problem can be solved.

  Furthermore, if all the storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 are saved in the stack area, the stack area overflows, and there is a possibility that data outside the area that is scheduled as the stack area (such as a stack area for another use) is rewritten. is there. Therefore, in addition to the instruction for collectively storing all storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 in the stack area, an instruction for collectively saving a plurality of arbitrarily designated storage areas in the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area is provided. Alternatively, an instruction for collectively restoring a plurality of storage areas arbitrarily designated in the auxiliary storage area 13145 saved in the stack area may be provided and executed.

  As described above, when the processing shifts to processing outside the game control area, the processing is switched to another auxiliary storage area 13145, and when the processing shifts to processing within the game control area, the processing is switched to the original auxiliary storage area 13145. Processing can proceed without saving the saved data to the RAM 1312 (for example, a stack area).

  In addition, when the processing shifts to processing outside the game control area, the switching register 13144 is saved to the RAM 1312 (for example, a stack area), and when the processing shifts to processing within the game control area, the switching register 13144 is restored from the RAM 1312. The auxiliary storage area 13145 can be switched when proceeding to the processing in the game control area, and the data in the auxiliary storage area 13145 can be restored without being restored from the RAM 1312.

  Also, when switching to processing outside the game control area, switching to another stack area is performed, and when switching to processing within the game control area, switching to the original stack area, the stack area used for processing within the game control area is The processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely divided without being updated in the processing outside the game control area.

  Further, the value stored in the switching register 13144 is saved in the RAM 1312 (for example, a stack area) when the processing shifts to processing outside the game control area, and the value saved when the processing shifts to processing in the game control area is used for switching. Since the value is restored to the register 13144, the value related to the execution result of the program in the game control area is not updated in the processing outside the game control area, and the processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated.

  FIG. 113A is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in the ROM 1313 and the RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310. In the arrangement on the memory shown in FIG. 113, the stack area omitted from the arrangement on the memory described above with reference to FIG. 26 is shown in the RAM 1312, but the stack area is also provided in the RAM 1312 shown in FIG.

  The ROM 1313 stores a game control code 13131, a game control data 13132, a debug (inspection function) code 13133, a debug (inspection function) data 13134, a base calculation / display code 13135, and a base calculation / display data 13136. Contains the storage area. In the ROM 1313 of the present embodiment, a game control area (first storage area) for storing programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1 such as the game control code 13131 and the game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133 A debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) for storing programs and data used for outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1 such as debug (inspection function) data 13134 and the like And a base calculation area (third storage area) for storing a program used for calculating a base value, such as a base calculation / display code 13135 and a base calculation / display data 13136.

  When a free area of 16 bytes or more (unused space) is provided between the last address of the game control data 13132 and the top address of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133, and displayed in a dump list format The game control area and the debug (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished from each other. Similarly, an empty area (unused space) of a predetermined length is provided between the last address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the start address of the base calculation / display code 13135. If the predetermined length is 16 bytes or more, the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area can be easily distinguished when displayed in the dump list format. However, the predetermined length may be shorter than 16 bytes. The value stored in the free area may be a fixed value that is the same value, and may be set to a value different from the value set in the game control area and the debug area or a value with a low frequency. Also, the value stored in the free area may be an instruction such as a No Operation code that the CPU does nothing. In this way, when displayed in the dump list format, the game control area, the debug (inspection function) area, and the base calculation area can be easily distinguished.

  Also, the base calculation / display code 13135 and the base calculation / display data 13136 may be stored in a part of the debug area without separating the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area. That is, it is only necessary that the game control area and the other areas are clearly distinguished. In this way, by clearly distinguishing the game control area from other areas, a debug area (debug (inspection function) code, debug (inspection function) data, ) And a base calculation area (base calculation / display code 13135 and base calculation / display data 13136) are arranged separately from the game control area, and a defect (bug or the like) of the base calculation / display code 13135 is applied to the game control. Avoid the danger of affecting.

  In the debug (inspection function) area, programs and data that are not directly related to the game are stored. For example, in addition to the game control of the pachinko machine 1, various functions used only when debugging the pachinko machine 1 are used. A code 13133 for outputting a test signal is stored. The debugging (inspection function) code 13133 is a program for outputting a debugging (inspection function) signal. The base calculation area stores a program for calculating a base value that is not directly related to the progress of the game.

  The game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. The game control code 13131 can be read and written to and from the RAM 1312 as needed, but the game control area 13126 used by the game control code 13131 can be read only from the debug (inspection function) code 13133. Can be executed, and writing to the area cannot be executed. In this way, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game control area that can be accessed only from the game control code 13131. The process based on the debugging (inspection function) code can be unilaterally called and executed during execution of the game control code 13131, but the game control code 13131 is converted from the debugging (inspection function) code. It is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. As a result, the independence of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 can be enhanced, so that even when the game control code 13131 is changed, the modification of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 can be minimized. .

  Further, the base calculation / display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 23) and executed by the main control MPU 1311. The base value calculated by the base calculation / display code 13135 is stored in the base calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. As shown, the base calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area). In this way, the base calculation / display code 13135 is designed separately from the game control code 13131 and stored in another area, so that the inspection of the base calculation / display code 13135 and the inspection of the game control code 13131 can be performed. The inspection can be performed separately, and the labor for the inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. Further, the base calculation / display code 13135 can be commonly used by a plurality of models without depending on the model.

  The RAM 1312 is provided with a game control area 13126, a debugging area, a base calculation area 13128, a game control stack area 13137, a debug stack area, and a base calculation stack area 13138.

  The game control area 13126 is an area in which data used by the game control code 13131 is stored, and is readable and writable from the game control area 13126. The game control area 13126 cannot write data from the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the base calculation / display code 13135, but can be read-accessed, and has the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the base calculation code. The display code 13135 can refer to data stored in the game control area 13126.

  The debugging area is an area in which data used by the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 is stored. The debug area is accessible from the game control code 13131 and the base calculation / display code 13135, but only data reading is permitted and data writing is prohibited. The base calculation area 13128 is an area for storing data used by the base calculation / display code 13135. The base calculation area 13128 can be accessed from the game control code 13131 and the debugging (inspection function) code 13133, but only data reading is permitted and data writing is prohibited.

  The game control stack area 13137 is an area in which data used by the game control code 13131 is saved. The debug stack area is an area where data used by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 is saved. The base calculation stack area 13138 is an area in which data used by the base calculation / display code 13135 is saved. Each stack area is used exclusively for temporarily saving data stored in the CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142. Each stack area can be switched by changing the value of the stack pointer managed by the CPU 13111. Note that the stack pointer is a storage area that specifies the start address of the stack area.

  FIG. 113B is a diagram illustrating details of the base calculation area 13128. The base calculation area 13128 may include a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of data stored in the main area is stored, in addition to a main area in which a base calculation result is stored. One or more backup areas may be provided. A check code for detecting a data error is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization processing when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, is set every time the data in the main area is updated in the base calculation / display processing, and the power-off processing in the main control side (FIG. It may be set in steps S50 to S54). In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the main control-side power-off process (step S50 in FIG. 20). May be set. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code in the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. If a predetermined value is set in the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

  When the main area is determined to be abnormal, it is determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data of the backup area determined to be normal may be copied to the main area (step in FIG. 21). S24). Also, in the main control-side power-off process, the value of the main area may be copied to each backup area (Step S54 in FIG. 22). In the base calculation / display processing, the value of the main area may be copied to the backup area at the end of the base calculation / display processing. What is necessary is to copy the entire main area or only the area of the updated value to the backup area when at least a part of the main area is updated (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

  An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be kept away, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digit of the address.

[11. Record of game history]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine that records and outputs a game history will be described.

[11-1. Basic Configuration of Gaming Machine for Recording Game History]
In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines an effect suitable for the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 from a plurality of effects prepared, and displays the determined effect on the effect display device. 1600. At this time, when it is determined that a specific effect (for example, two types of special effects among three types of super reach) among the plurality of types of effects is to be presented, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the game state is switched. The number of times the special symbol change display game has been performed and the specific effect has appeared (in other words, at what rotation the effect appeared) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 together with the progress of the game. indicate.

  Specifically, according to the game history shown in FIG. 114, the super reach 1 appears at the 34th rotation at 10:25, and the result of the special symbol variation display game is lost, at the 127th rotation at 10:54. Super Reach 2 appears, the result of the special symbol variation display game is lost, and Super Reach 2 appears at 428 rotation at 11:30, and the result of the special symbol variation display game is a probable big hit. Is displayed.

  The display of the jackpot history (for example, the history of the jackpot at the 15th rotation and the jackpot at the 50th rotation) can be confirmed on the data display provided in the hall, but the specific effect that appeared up to the jackpot cannot be confirmed. Some players determine whether the pachinko machine 1 is performing well or not according to the degree to which a specific effect appears (for example, if the super reach 2 appears within 50 revolutions after the end of the jackpot, it is considered that the jackpot will be won in a short time). In order to meet such a player's expectation, the degree of appearance of the effect is displayed so as to be visible. Also, since the player does not fire the game ball when checking the degree of appearance of the effect, if the display that shows the degree of appearance of all the prepared effects is displayed, the player It takes time to check the appearance of the game, and the operation of the game console may be reduced. For this reason, it is preferable to display only a specific reach effect (reach effect with a high degree of expectation for the jackpot) among the reach effects. Further, the history of appearance for each effect may be confirmed by operating a predetermined operation means (operation button 220C or the like).

  As a specific process, when receiving the fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 stores information on the number of fluctuations and the effect that has appeared. Further, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates the information on the number of times of change and the effect that has appeared, based on the received change pattern command. Then, when a predetermined operation means (the operation button 220C or the like) is operated, not all the produced effects but the number of fluctuations required until a limited specific effect appears is displayed. Processing may be performed.

  When an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1 in operation, the pachinko machine 1 outputs error information and notifies the employee of the hall. In this notification mode, an error screen shown in FIG. 115A is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or a detailed error screen shown in FIG. 115B is displayed on the effect display device 1600 to notify the cause of the error. Or an alarm sound is output, or an error signal shown in FIG. 116 is output from the external terminal board 784. In addition, typical errors in the pachinko machine 1 include those shown in FIGS. 117, 118, and 119. An error occurring in the pachinko machine 1 is reported outside the pachinko machine 1 so that the employee of the hall can know the cause. For example, a code determined for each type of error may be displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400. Specifically, when the connection of the cable between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is defective, “0” is displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400, and the LED in the right of the door is turned off. Lights up blue.

  However, the error occurs due to various causes such as a minor failure of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, disconnection of a connector), a severe failure requiring replacement of parts, and a misconduct.

  The pachinko machine 1 in which the error has occurred must find out the cause of the error, recover from the error, and operate. Searching for the cause of the error requires time and cost, and stopping the operation of the pachinko machine 1 due to the error causes a decrease in sales. Accordingly, if the hall can know detailed information of the error that has occurred, the error can be resolved at an early stage, and the operation stoppage time of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  More specifically, the hall determines the state of the pachinko machine 1 based on a signal output from the external terminal board 784 using a hall computer. However, in searching for the cause of the error, in addition to the signal output from the external terminal plate 784, it is desirable to select “the number of winnings in the general winning opening”, “the number of winnings in the large winning opening”, “the number of passing gates”, and “normal symbol variation”. Game history information such as "number" is required. If the failure of the pachinko machine 1 is solved by repair or replacement of parts, there is not so much problem. However, when a game ball is acquired by wrongdoing, the opportunity for a normal player to gain profit decreases, and Could eventually disrupt the operation of the hall and eventually cause the hall to be difficult to manage.

  When such game history information is output from the external terminal board 784, the number of terminals of the connector used for the external terminal board 784 increases, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 increases. Further, since events such as “winning in the general winning opening”, “winning in the grand winning opening”, “passing through the gate”, and “normal symbols fluctuate” frequently occur, when all data is output from the pachinko machine 1, the data A high-performance hall computer is required to analyze the data, and the burden on the hall increases.

  In order to solve the above-described problem, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment stores data that is not output as a real-time signal from the external terminal board 748 inside the pachinko machine 1, and makes it possible to refer to the stored data later. As a result, details of the process up to the occurrence of the error can be confirmed.

  In addition, the time of occurrence of the events (the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the large winning opening, the number of passing gates, the number of changes in ordinary symbols, etc.) generated in the course of the occurrence of the error is recorded, Can determine how many events have occurred. For example, it is found that the number of winnings in the general winning opening is 50 per minute.

  If the date and time of occurrence is recorded for each event, the amount of data used to search for the cause of the error increases, and it takes time to search for the cause of the error. Therefore, when a predetermined number or more of events have occurred during a predetermined time (for example, one minute), the information may be output as error information and reported.

  For example, in any game state, it is possible to win a general winning opening, so it is good to output and notify error information when a predetermined number or more winnings are made in a predetermined time, but a big winning opening is won only during a big hit game. Therefore, the predetermined time may be set from the start to the end of the jackpot game, and error information may be output and notified when a predetermined number or more of the winning prize ports are won in the predetermined time.

  In a pachinko machine described below, the peripheral control unit 1511 records a game history and outputs the data in a predetermined format.

  FIG. 120 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process performed when the peripheral control unit is turned on according to the present exemplary embodiment. In the processing at power-on of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 120, a game history recording process (step S1023) is added to the processing at power-on of the peripheral control unit described above with reference to FIG.

  In the game history recording process, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history in the memory when the received command is a predetermined command based on the analysis result of the command received from the main control board 1310. The game history is recorded as an event occurrence date and time in a format as shown in FIG. 122, for example. The memory in which the game history is recorded may be a DRAM, but it is preferable that the memory is stored in an SRAM which does not require a refresh operation and consumes low power in consideration of holding the stored contents even when the power is turned off.

  The game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed before the process related to game control (steps S1024 to S1032). By executing the game history recording process at an early stage of the peripheral control unit regular process, the game history can be accurately recorded even if the process related to the game control is stopped halfway and some effects are not executed. That is, even if some effects are not executed (even if all effects are not executed), the result of the lottery already performed on the main control board 1310 does not change, and the privilege given to the player also changes. Since there is no effect, the game history is recorded prior to the effect. Further, since the game history recording process is not affected by the process related to the game control, the game history recording process can be shared by a plurality of pachinko machines.

  Next, processing when the capacity of the memory of the game history to be recorded reaches the upper limit will be described. When the data amount of the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, the game history recording process is executed, but the game history recorded in the memory need not be updated. That is, the information recorded in the memory does not change. As described above, even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, by executing the game history recording process, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history. Processing can be reduced.

  When the capacity of the memory of the game history to be recorded has reached the upper limit, the game history recording process may be executed to update the game history recorded in the memory. In this case, a ring buffer having a plurality of (for example, 10) storage areas may be provided in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and the oldest game history may be deleted and the latest game history may be recorded. Even in this case, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 each time can be reduced.

  Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, step S1023 may be skipped and the game history recording process may not be performed. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent execution of useless processes. Therefore, other processes (effect control, ramp, etc.) performed by the peripheral control unit 1511 are performed. Control, sound control), and new processing (for example, processing that is performed over a plurality of peripheral control unit regular processings because there is no margin in processing time) using the available processing time Alternatively, a process (for example, a process of switching a selection table) that is executed once in several peripheral control unit regular processes because it is not necessary to execute the process each time may be executed.

  Note that the received command may be analyzed immediately after the interrupt timer activation process (step S1010) (step S1022), and the game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed.

  FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game history recording condition setting table.

  The game history recording condition setting table registers, among commands received by the peripheral control unit 1511 from the main control board 1310, a type of a command recorded as a game history, that is, an event recorded as a game history.

  For example, the following command types are registered in the game history recording condition setting table, and the purpose of recording the command occurrence conditions and the game history are as follows.

  For example, the start-up port 1 winning command and the start-up port 2 winning command are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when detecting the winning of the game ball to the starting port 2002 and the starting port 2004, respectively. The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each starting port. In addition, the special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the start of the special symbol change, and the peripheral control unit 1511 The number of fluctuations can be counted.

  The power-on command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the power is turned on, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire a ram clear operation or the like. The change start state command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the start of the special symbol change, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the state at the start of the special symbol change. The states that can be distinguished by the state command at the start of fluctuation are four states: low probability / time saving, low probability / non time saving, high probability / time saving, high probability / non time saving. The number of fluctuations can be counted. Here, the low probability is a state in which the probability that the jackpot is derived in the jackpot lottery accompanying the special symbol change display game is a normal probability, and the high probability is the jackpot in the jackpot lottery associated with the special symbol change display game. Is higher than usual. The time saving is such that the probability that the above-described second starting door member 2549 is opened (or enlarged) becomes a higher probability than the non-time saving time, or the time from when the symbol usually starts to change until the symbol is determined is determined. The second starting port door member 2549 is in a state of being opened (or enlarged) more frequently than a non-time saving state, such as being shorter. Along with this, the probability that an effect in which the time of one special symbol change display game is short is selected increases.

  The special winning opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the special winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the game ball wins the special winning opening 2005 and the special winning opening 2006, respectively. A command is transmitted, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each of the special winning openings.

  The special winning opening 1 winning command (special winning or less) and the special winning opening 2 winning command (regular winning or less) are won in the special winning opening 2005 and the special winning opening 2006, respectively, by the number of game balls less than the specified number by the end of the round. Otherwise, a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined time elapses (for example, from one second to before the next opening) after the closing of each special winning opening, and the peripheral control unit 1511 The winning status in one round to each winning port can be obtained. The special winning opening 1 winning command (greater than the regular winning) and the special winning opening 2 winning command (greater than the regular winning) are rounded when a game ball exceeding the specified number wins in the special winning opening 2005 and the special winning opening 2006, respectively. Is completed, a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined time elapses (for example, from one second to before the next opening) after the closing of each special winning opening, and the peripheral control unit 1511 The status of winning in one round to each winning port can be obtained. This command is transmitted when a predetermined time elapses after the closing of each of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, because a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls determined in one round is detected and the special winning opening is detected. There is a possibility that an undetected game ball may be present in the big winning opening when the game is closed, so that the winning situation can be accurately grasped even in such an over winning.

  The jackpot OP command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a jackpot occurs (that is, when the condition device is activated or the accessory continuous operation device is activated), and the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires a change to the jackpot state. Yes, you can count the number of jackpots. The destination command at the end of the jackpot operation is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the end of the jackpot state, so that the end of the jackpot state and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the status after the jackpot.

  The small hit OP command is issued when the big winning opening is released in a relatively short time (for example, one opening time is 1.8 seconds or a total of a plurality of opening times is less than 1.8 seconds). Therefore, a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the accessory continuous operation device does not operate (so-called small hit), and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of small hits.

  The ordinary symbol stop command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the ordinary symbol is stopped, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the stopped symbol of the ordinary symbol and can count the number of fluctuations of the ordinary symbol. When the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003.

  Even when a special symbol or a regular symbol is not drawn (eg, when there is no overflow or memory) even when a prize is entered in the starting opening or passing through the gate, the main control board 1310 sends the starting opening 1 prize to the peripheral control unit 1511. The time command, the starting port 2 winning command and the general-purpose gate passing command are transmitted. Therefore, the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to the starting port and the number of balls passing through the gate unit.

  The error display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when an error occurs, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the error occurrence timing and count the number of error occurrences.

  The general winning opening 1 winning command, the general winning opening 2 winning command, and the general winning opening 3 winning command are respectively transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the game ball wins to each general winning opening 2001, and the peripheral The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each general winning opening 2001. It should be noted that the number of the general winning opening winning command may be determined by the number of the general winning opening 2001 provided in the game area 5a, and the case where three general winning opening 2001 are provided is illustrated above. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 16, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with four general prize ports 2001, so that four types of general prize ports from a general prize port 1 prize command to a general prize port 4 prize command are provided. Commands are defined.

  FIG. 122 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the game history recorded in the memory.

  The game history includes a history number, an event, and an event occurrence date and time, and is preferably recorded in the memory in the order of the event occurrence time. As the event occurrence date and time, the time at which the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command from the main control board 1310 may be recorded as the event occurrence date and time, and the time at which the main control board 1310 detects the event occurrence is notified to the peripheral control unit 1511. The peripheral control unit 1511 may record the event occurrence time notified from the main control board 1310. In the illustrated game history, the event occurrence date and time is recorded with a granularity up to minutes, but may be recorded up to seconds.

  By analyzing the game history in the form shown in FIG. 122, it is possible to know the details of the event (for example, a change in the game state, the result of the variable display game, etc.) generated in connection with the command transmitted from the main control board 1310. . For example, the power-on command of the history number 1 is generated at 15:30 on March 15, 2016, the RAM is cleared from the content of the command, and the game is started in a low probability / non-time saving state. I understand. That is, the history of the hall opening at 15:30, turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, and starting playing after a while (for example, after lighting a cigarette), and winning the general winning opening 2001. I understand. Also, the special symbol 1 change start event of the history number 4 occurs at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and the special symbol change event is determined based on the content of the received special symbol 1 symbol type command (the type of the stopped symbol). You can see the result of the display game. The special figure 1 change start event of the history number 6 is generated at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and the special pattern change display game is executed based on the content of the received special design 1 design classification command (type of the stopped design). You can see the result of Although the result of the special symbol variation display game is not shown in FIG. 122, each special symbol variation display game is indicated by a numerical value indicating the result of the variation display game included in the symbol type command received at the start of the variation of the special symbol. And the result of the variable display game (loss, usually 4 rounds, high probability 4 rounds, high probability 16 rounds, etc.) may be recorded as the game history.

  Next, a method of referring to information (game history) recorded in the memory by the hall will be described.

  First, a history output interface 1590 for outputting information recorded in the memory from the peripheral control unit 1511 is provided. Then, when receiving the history reference command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the game history recorded in the memory from the history output interface 1590.

  When a data collection terminal is connected to the pachinko machine 1 and the history control command is received from the data collection terminal, the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the game history recorded in the memory from the history output interface 1590. The history output interface 1590 may be configured by a history output terminal provided in the peripheral control unit 1511 or may be provided separately from the peripheral control unit 1511. The data collection terminal may be held by a hall for data management of the pachinko machine 1.

  The connection between the data collection terminal and the pachinko machine 1 may be a connection via a cable via the history output interface 1590 or a wireless connection via a short-range wireless communication (for example, Bluetooth (registered trademark)).

  The command that triggers the peripheral control unit 1511 to output the game history is a history reference command dedicated to game history output, and a command that is not transmitted when a normal game is played after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (FIG. 121). May be used as a history reference command when a special condition (operation) is performed under a command that is not defined in the command. The special condition (operation) is, for example, operating the RAM clear button while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Also, a history reference command may be transmitted on the condition of an event that cannot be performed (or is unlikely) even in a command transmitted during a normal game. For example, this is a case in which 50 prizes are won in the starting port or the general prize port in one minute. Further, the game history may be output when the commands used for the game control are received in a special order that cannot be normally performed.

  Note that an operation panel (keyboard) and a display (effect display device) may be provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (a place not visible to the player) to display the game history.

  FIG. 123 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the peripheral control board and its periphery.

  The peripheral control board 1510 performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and transmits the effect display drive board 4450 and control commands and various information (various data) via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. Effect display control for performing drawing control of the exchanged peripheral control unit 1511, effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, and sound control of music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. A real-time clock (hereinafter, referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that stores calendar information for specifying year, month, and day and time information for specifying hours, minutes, and seconds.

  As shown in FIG. 123, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the power-on. A peripheral control ROM 1511b for storing various control programs such as a sub-control program for controlling the effecting operation to be executed, various data, various control data and various schedule data, and a V blank from a sound source built-in VDP 1512a of an effect display control unit 1512 to be described later. Various types of information (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 and schedules defining light emission modes such as various LEDs) which are continued over the peripheral control unit regular processing executed each time a signal is input. Information for managing data, etc.) And a peripheral control SRAM 1511d for storing various information (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a jackpot game state, information for managing a special effect flag, and the like) continued over the day. And a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 1511e”) for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally.

  The peripheral control RAM 1511c loses its contents when power is cut off for a long time (when a long-term power interruption occurs), whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d has a large capacity (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931. The stored content can be held for about 50 hours by supplying backup power from the electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter, referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”). Since the electrolytic capacitor for the SRAM is provided on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d retains the stored contents. And lose their content.

  In addition, power is supplied to a part of the area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d by a backup power supply 1513 different from the backup power supply supplied from the power supply board 931. A game history is recorded in an area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d to which power is supplied by the backup power supply 1513, and the stored contents can be retained even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The backup power supply 1513 is configured by a secondary battery such as a lithium ion battery, and preferably has a power supply capability capable of retaining data in at least a part of the area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d for several weeks to about one month.

  FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing a configuration around the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

  In the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the area for storing the game history may be configured in a package different from the peripheral control CPU including the peripheral control MPU, or may be configured in the package of the peripheral control CPU together with the peripheral control MPU.

  FIG. 124A shows a configuration around the peripheral control SRAM 1511d in which an area for storing the game history is formed in a package different from the peripheral control CPU. As shown, the effect control area to which power is not supplied from the backup power supply 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package, and the game history storage area to which power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package. Can be

  When the pachinko machine 1 is reset by operating the RAM clear switch, the data of the peripheral control SRAM (effect control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage) outside the peripheral control CPU is cleared. The data in the area 1511d is not cleared.

  FIG. 124 (B) shows a configuration around the peripheral control SRAM 1511d which forms an area for storing the game history in the package of the peripheral control CPU. As shown, both the effect control area to which power is not supplied from the backup power supply 1513 and the game history storage area to which power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513 are provided in the peripheral control CPU package.

  Even in the configuration shown in FIG. 124B, when the pachinko machine 1 is reset by operating the RAM clear switch, the data of the peripheral control SRAM (production control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control is not performed. The data in the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d outside the CPU is not cleared. For this reason, the effect control area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d and the game history storage area are desirably physically separated.

  In the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the area for storing the game history may be configured by a flash memory instead of the SRAM. By storing the game history in the flash memory, the game history can be held even in the pachinko machine 1 to which power is not supplied without providing the backup power supply 1513.

  In each of the forms shown in FIGS. 124 (A) and (B), the pachinko machine 1 has means for initializing data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The means for initializing the data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d may be any method having a procedure different from the normal data initialization method of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while operating the RAM clear switch. Good. For example, when a history clear switch is provided in addition to the RAM clear switch, and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the history clear switch, the stored game history is initialized. In this case, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating both the RAM clear switch and the history clear switch, both the stored game state information and the game history are initialized. The history clear switch may be directly connected to the peripheral control board 1510.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch and the RAM clear switch is continuously operated for a predetermined time after the power is turned on, both the stored game state information and the game history are initialized. It may be.

  When initializing the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the main control board 1310 transmits a command different from a normal power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510.

  The main control board 1310 continues to transmit a power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510 while the RAM clear switch is operated, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives a power-on command a predetermined number of times within a predetermined time. In this case, or when the power-on command is continuously received, the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d may be initialized. By providing the means for initializing the game history storage area in this way, for example, even if the gaming machine has been operating in the hall for one year, the latest information can be accurately recorded and analyzed.

  The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a runs out of control. When the timer is up, a reset is performed by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer is up). When outputting the clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, the peripheral control MPU 1511a restarts the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so that the reset is not performed.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, based on the various commands, each decorative board of the game board 5 A game board-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on a lamp from a serial I / O port for a lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 or outputting drive signals to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serialized for the motor drive board. A drive signal is transmitted from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, and a drive signal to an electric drive source provided on the door frame 3 is transmitted. The door-side motor drive data to be transmitted is transmitted from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the peripheral control output circuit and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the door frame 3 A door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each of the decorative boards from a frame decorative drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port to a peripheral control output circuit , Via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressing detection switch for detecting operation of the pressing operation unit 405 provided in the effect operation unit 220 are provided. Is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized effect operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, and are input to the serial I / O port for effect operation unit detection of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors, etc.) for detecting the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are transmitted to a game board (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. The serialized transmission data is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and the serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. I have. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  As described above, according to the command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the game machine according to the present embodiment records the event that occurred during the game as a game history, so that the event occurred during the game. The event can be analyzed later (for example, after the hall is closed) to understand the performance and failure of the gaming machine. Further, since the game history is stored in the nonvolatile memory (SRAM to which the backup power is input), the game history can be confirmed even after the game machine is restarted.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121, FIG. In addition, for example, when the winning opening 1 is won, (1) the fact that the winning opening 1 has been won, (2) the time when the winning opening 1 has been won, and (3) the event that occurred before the winning opening 1 has been won. Thus, more information is stored in the pachinko machine 1 than information output from the external terminal board 748 shown in FIG. This is because the minimum necessary information (for example, (1) the information indicating the fact that the start port has been won) is output from the external terminal board 784 such as when the start port is won, and in a special case (for example, the cause of the error). This is because the information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 can be checked when the information is inspected. This is because, when all of the information stored therein is output from the external terminal board 784 when the winning opening is made, the output amount of the information relating to the operation of the pachinko machine 1 increases, which may burden the hall. It is. That is, when an event occurs, more information than the information output from the external terminal board 784 is recorded inside the pachinko machine 1, and part of the information recorded inside the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal board 784. 1 is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 in special cases.

[11-2. Compact plan 1]
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine that records and outputs the game history will be described. Note that some of the modifications described below change a part of the above-described embodiment and form a part of the embodiment.

  In the above-described embodiment, of the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, an event (command type) and an event occurrence date and time are recorded for a predetermined command. However, the capacity of the SRAM 1511d for recording the game history is limited, and it is difficult to record all of the huge amount of events that occur during the game for a long time. For this reason, in the first modification (compact plan 1), a change in the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of counting events occurring in the state are recorded.

  FIG. 125 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a game history recording condition setting table according to the first modification.

  In the game history recording condition setting table of the first modification, the commands to be recorded as the game history are defined as a command to be counted and a command that triggers a state change, and a command in which both attributes are set. There is also. Note that the countable information column and the obtainable status change column are provided for convenience of explanation, and when the game history recording condition setting table is implemented in the pachinko machine 1, only the command type column is required. .

  When receiving the command in which the attribute to be counted is set, the peripheral control unit 1511 counts the number of events which have triggered the command as a result of the command analysis. Further, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command in which an attribute that triggers a state change is set, as a result of the command analysis, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates the state of the game history recorded in the memory, and records the number of events. Add.

  For example, a power-on command, a fluctuation start state command, a jackpot OP command, a shift-destination command at the end of a jackpot operation, and an error display command are commands issued according to a state change. It can be grasped as a change of the state of the jackpot state start, the jackpot state end, and the error state occurrence.

  Further, the number of events that triggered the issue of the counting command is counted using the counting command. More specifically, the number of winning balls to each starting port can be counted by the starting port 1 winning command and the starting port 2 winning command. The special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command can count the number of variations of each special symbol. The special winning opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the special winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) can count the number of winning balls to each special winning opening. With the special winning opening 1 winning command (specified winning or less) and the special winning opening 2 winning command (specified winning or less), it is possible to count the number of rounds completed with the specified winning number or less. The special winning opening 1 winning command (greater than the specified winning) and the special winning opening 2 winning command (greater than the specified winning) can count the number of rounds that have exceeded the specified number of winnings (ie, over-winning).

  The small hit OP command can count the number of small hits. The normal symbol stop command can count the number of changes in the normal symbol. The general-purpose gate passing command can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate unit. The error display command can count the number of error occurrences. The general winning opening 1 winning command, the general winning opening 2 winning command, and the general winning opening 3 winning command can count the number of winning balls to each general winning opening.

  FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the first modification.

  The game history of the first modification includes the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, the time at which the state change event occurred, and the state from the predetermined starting point. (Until the next state change event) and the total number of counting events detected until the end of the event. The number of counting events recorded as the game history may be the number of counting events detected during the state (between the previous state change event and the state change event). The predetermined starting point is a time when the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is initialized. The states in which the counting events are separately recorded are assumed to be five states of a low probability / non-time saving state, a low probability / time saving state, a high probability / non-time saving state, a high probability / time saving state, and a jackpot state. The state may be further subdivided.

  Next, the details of the game history recording process in Modification Example 1 will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 126, as the counting events, the starting opening 1 winning number, the starting opening 2 winning number, the special symbol 1 changing number, the special symbol 2 changing number, the general winning opening 1 winning number, the general winning opening 2 winning number, The general winning opening 3 winning number, the grand winning opening 1 winning number, the grand winning opening 2 winning number, the number of passing gates, and the number of ordinary symbol changes are recorded. Note that the number of events other than those illustrated may be counted.

  It is sufficient that the storage area of the cumulative number of each counting event is 2 bytes. In particular, data that does not derive so frequently and does not have a large cumulative number (for example, the number of general winning opening winnings) may be 1 byte, and the other data may be 2 bytes. In this case, it is preferable to arrange 2 bytes and 1 byte (or 1 byte and 2 bytes) without mixing 1 byte data and 2 byte data.

  When a state change event occurs, the type of the state change event, the state after the occurrence of the event, and the date and time of occurrence of the event are recorded, and a new record is created in the game history. Then, the counting event after the state change is recorded in a new record.

  The counting result of the counting event in the current state may be recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and may be stored in a new record created in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d after the state change. Note that a new record in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is created when the state changes, but a new record may be created at the start of the period in which the counting event is counted. In this case, during the counting of the counting event, 0 may be stored as an initial value even if no data is stored in the created new record. Further, a new record may be created at the end of the period in which the counting event is counted. In this case, immediately after creating a new record, the counting result of the counting event in the period is stored in the new record.

  When the game state changes and data recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is stored in the game history storage area (peripheral control SRAM 1511d), the data is read from the game history storage area and the total recorded in the work area is read. The numerical values are added and stored in the game history storage area. On the other hand, when the number of counting events detected during the state (between the previous state change event and the state change event) is recorded as the game history, the count value of the count event is set to the game value of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Store in the history storage area.

  That is, each time a state change event occurs, the count value of the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. For this reason, the count result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c until the next state change event occurs, and the stored contents are backed up when a power failure occurs. Is initialized by the normal ram clear operation. Specifically, for example, in the low-probability, non-time saving state, the information of the game history in which the number of winnings to the starting port 1 is 50 in the work area (the peripheral control RAM 1511c) is the pachinko machine of the first modification. At 1, the game state is recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d after the game state changes. In other words, if the game state does not change, the game history is not recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, if the power is cut off and the ram clear operation is performed in the low probability / non-time saving state, the 50 winning numbers are initialized to 0.

  Further, the count result of the count event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a counting event occurs, the count value of the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the count result in the current state recorded in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the above-described game history initialization operation.

  Even when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, the game history recording process may be executed. In this case, the game history is continuously recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current state, and the accumulated number of counting events may not be stored from the peripheral control RAM 1511c to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d when the state changes. Further, the game history (the cumulative number of counting events) in the oldest state may be deleted and the cumulative number of counting events in the immediately preceding state may be recorded. In this case, a ring buffer may be configured in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

  By executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, there is no need to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 is reduced each time. it can. Further, since the cumulative number of counting events in the current state is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the latest game history can be confirmed.

  Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, step S1023 may be skipped and the game history recording process may not be performed. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, execution of useless processes can be prevented, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be reduced.

  As described above, in the first modification, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the number of counting events (the number of winnings, the number of fluctuations, etc.) in each state between the switchings is recorded. Long game histories can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the history storage area.

  Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the first modification is also characterized in that more information than the information output from the external terminal plate 784 is internally recorded.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the first modification, the condition under which a new record is created in the game history is a change in the game state, and if the game state does not change, the condition is stored in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Information (game history) is not written. That is, if a fraud is performed in a state where no new record is created in the game history storage area (while the same game state is continuing), it may be difficult to find the fraud. As described above, in order to analyze the information (game history) written in the memory, the hole can check the information written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, but in the pachinko machine 1 of the first modification, As long as the game state does not change, information is not written to the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so even if the information is read from the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the current state information (game history) cannot be confirmed. In such a case as well, a check function that can detect fraud at an early stage may be provided.

  Specifically, a first record (the latest record in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d) in which the most recent game history is recorded and a second record (a record in the peripheral control RAM 1511c) in which the current game history is recorded If the comparison result with the predetermined condition is satisfied, an error may be notified.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 that fires a game ball so as to roll on the right side of the game area 5a in the high probability / time saving state or the big hit game state, the so-called right-handed pachinko machine 1 transits from the high probability / time saving state to the big hit game state. In addition, when the state is switched to the high probability / time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, even if the state is switched, since the player normally makes a right-handed hit, there is a possibility that the general winning opening on the left side of the game area 5a may be won. Extremely low. In this case, the number of winnings in the general winning opening may be compared between the jackpot game state and the subsequent high probability / saving time state, and if a difference is detected, an error may be notified. The allowable value of the difference in the number of winning balls to the general winning opening between the states may be one, and an error may be notified if a difference of two or more occurs. This is because when the player releases his / her hand from the firing handle, the firing force becomes uneven, and the game ball may roll on the left side of the game area 5a.

  Instead of the error notification, a security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal plate 784 shown in FIG. The above-mentioned early fraud detection check function detects an error from the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 by predicting a game (for example, it will hit right because of a high probability and time saving state). There is a possibility of detecting an error when performing an unexpected hitting method. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 may not output an error but only output a security signal from the external terminal board 784 and may not notify the player. In this way, the clerk of the hall can check the possibility of an error from a location away from the pachinko machine 1 without being noticed by the player, and can also prevent trouble with the player.

  As described above, since the error detection function of the pachinko machine 1 is not perfect, the cause of the error can be checked by analyzing the game history outside the pachinko machine 1.

[11-3. Compact plan 2]
In the above-described first modification, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the change of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded by the state change event, and the number of count events in each state during the change is recorded. Was recorded. However, the number of events in each changing state may not be important, and it may be sufficient if the number of events for each type of repeatedly occurring state is known. For this reason, in the second modification (compact plan 2), the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the cumulative number of counting events for each state are recorded.

  In the second modification, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 125) as the first modification.

  FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the second modification.

  As shown in FIG. 127, the game history of the second modification includes a history of state events and a cumulative count of each count event for each state. The history of the status event includes a status change event that triggered the status change of the pachinko machine 1, a status after the status change event, and a time at which the status change event occurred. In the pachinko machine 1 of the second modification, the cumulative count of the counting event is recorded in five states of the low probability / non-time saving state, the low probability / time saving state, the high probability / non-time saving state, the high probability / time saving state, and the big hit state. You. The counting event (and the command related to the event) recorded in the modified example 2 includes a starter 1 winning number (starter 1 winning command), a starter 2 winning number (starter 2 winning command), special Number of symbol 1 fluctuations (special symbol 1 symbol type command), number of special symbol 2 fluctuations (special symbol 2 symbol type command), number of general winning opening 1 winning (general winning opening 1 winning command), number of general winning opening 2 winning (general) Winning opening 2 winning command), General winning opening 3 winning number (General winning opening 3 winning command), Winning opening 1 winning number (Winning opening 1 winning command), Winning opening 2 winning number (Winning opening 2 winning command) ), The number of passing gates (ordinary symbol gate passing command), and the number of ordinary symbol fluctuations (ordinary symbol stop command).

  Note that the number of counting events other than those described above may be counted, and the state in which the counting events are separately recorded may be further subdivided.

  Next, the details of the game history recording process in Modification Example 2 will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 127, when a state change event occurs, the type of the state change event, the state after the occurrence of the event, and the date and time of occurrence of the event are recorded in the state event history. When a change in the state of the gaming machine is detected by the state change event, the cumulative number of counting events counted in the state before the change is recorded in the non-volatile memory, and the above-described counting event is performed in accordance with the state after the change. Start recording the cumulative number of.

  The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after a state change, the game history storage area (accumulated value of the state) of the SRAM 1511d is read out and stored in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The recorded values may be added and stored in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a state change event occurs, the accumulated value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated using the value before the state change recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. For this reason, the count result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up when a power failure occurs, but is initialized by a normal ram clear operation.

  Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a counting event occurs, the accumulated value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the count result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the above-described game history initialization operation.

  As described above, in the second modification, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the counting event (the number of winnings, the number of fluctuations, etc.) for each type of state is recorded, so that the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is provided. A long game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the game.

[11-4. Compact plan 3]
In Modification 2 described above, of the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded by the state change event, and the cumulative number of count events for each state is recorded. However, the timing at which the state is switched may not be important, and it may be sufficient if the number of events for each type of state is known. For this reason, in the third modification (compact plan 3), the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is not recorded, but the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded.

  In the third modification, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 125) as the first modification.

  In the third modification, the same event as the event recorded in the first modification is recorded using the game history recording condition setting table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the third modification.

  As shown in FIG. 128, the game history of Modification 3 is configured by the cumulative count of the count event in each state. Further, the game history of the third modification includes the accumulated time of each state. The reason why the cumulative time is included is to enable the hall to estimate the number of occurrences of the event (for example, the number of occurrences of jackpots) from the cumulative time. The states in which the counting events are separately recorded are five states: a low probability / non-time saving state, a low probability / time saving state, a high probability / non-saving time state, a high probability / time saving state, and a jackpot state. A counting event may be recorded.

  The counting event (and the command related to the event) recorded in the modified example 3 includes the starting port 1 winning number (starting port 1 winning command), the starting port 2 winning number (starting port 2 winning command), special Number of symbol 1 fluctuations (special symbol 1 symbol type command), number of special symbol 2 fluctuations (special symbol 2 symbol type command), number of general winning opening 1 winning (general winning opening 1 winning command), number of general winning opening 2 winning (general) Winning opening 2 winning command), General winning opening 3 winning number (General winning opening 3 winning command), Winning opening 1 winning number (Winning opening 1 winning command), Winning opening 2 winning number (Winning opening 2 winning command) ), The number of passing gates (ordinary symbol gate passing command), and the number of ordinary symbol fluctuations (ordinary symbol stop command). Note that the number of counting events other than those described above may be counted.

  Next, the details of the game history recording process in Modification Example 2 will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 128, when a state change event occurs, the cumulative count of the above-described counting event is recorded in accordance with the state of the gaming machine changed by the state change event.

  The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after a state change, the game history storage area (accumulated value of the state) of the SRAM 1511d is read out and stored in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The recorded values may be added and stored in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a state change event occurs, the accumulated value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. For this reason, the count result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up when a power failure occurs, but is initialized by a normal ram clear operation.

  Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a counting event occurs, the accumulated value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the count result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the above-described game history initialization operation.

  As described above, in the second modification, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the counting event (the number of winnings, the number of fluctuations, etc.) for each type of state is recorded, so that the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is provided. A long game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the game.

  As described above, in the first to third modifications, when the game history recording process temporarily records the event in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) and writes the game history in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Then, the data of the work area is written to the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. In a normal ram clear operation, information written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is not deleted (initialized), but information recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is deleted (initialized).

  Here is a brief description of the hall business. In many cases, the hall has business hours, for example, opening time is 10:00 and closing time is 23:00. For this reason, in a time zone where many players are present, such as a time zone immediately after opening and a time zone in the evening, it may be difficult for the clerk to monitor whether the player is playing an illegal game. However, as the closing time approaches, the number of gamers will decrease, and if there is a pachinko machine in the high probability / time saving state immediately before closing, the pachinko machine in the high probability / time saving state will be initialized and the low probability / May be in a non-time saving state. In this case, since there are few players, the pachinko machine in a high probability / time saving state can be monitored, and it is known whether the latest game is fraudulent. In other words, considering the situation that some pachinko machines do not require the latest game history, an efficient game machine can be provided by allowing the clerk to select whether to keep the latest information.

  Specifically, by initializing the pachinko machine 1 by the ram clear operation, the game history stored in the work area for the event that occurred after the latest event is deleted, and the game history is stored for the event that occurred before the latest event. The game history stored in the area remains. That is, although the pachinko machine records information that is not output from the external terminal board 784, information recorded in the work area that is erased by the RAM clear operation and information that is recorded in the game history storage area that is not erased by the RAM clear operation The game history is recorded separately. By doing this, if you want to keep a record of all the events recorded in the work area, if the clerk only needs to cause a change in the state of the pachinko machine, if you want to erase the record of the events recorded in the work area, The clerk may perform the ram clear operation. As described above, the lam clear operation does not delete all the game histories but only deletes the game histories stored in the work area related to the event that occurred after the latest event, as described above. This is because the event that occurred before is not seen by the clerk (it is not seen because there are many players).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, not only the information that the winning opening has been won but also the winning in the general winning opening unrelated to the lottery is once recorded in the work area. A symbol that starts to fluctuate due to winning in the starting opening, and a symbol indicating a winning lottery result in a state where the symbol is stopped) does not fluctuate, even if the gaming ball is being shot in the gaming area 5a. It is characterized by collecting histories. In other words, it can be said that the game history recording process is not a process executed in response to a random lottery but a process that may be executed at all times while power is supplied to the pachinko machine.

  In the case of a low probability / non-time saving state, the game ball is fired so that the game ball wins to the starting port 2002, as in a so-called left-handed or short-shot beating. In such a case, the starting opening 2002 and the general winning opening 2001 should be appropriately won. However, there is no (or extremely few) prize in the general prize port 2001, but there are many game balls in the start port 2002, or conversely, no prize in the start port 2002 (or very few). ), When many game balls are winning in the general winning opening 2001, there is a possibility that cheating has been performed. Therefore, the first winning opening and the second winning opening where the game ball wins in the same period are set as the monitoring targets, and the number of winnings in the first winning opening is a predetermined magnification of the number of winnings in the second winning opening. When the number exceeds the limit, an error may be notified.

  Further, a security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal plate 784 instead of the error notification. In the above-described detection method, there is a possibility that an error is detected when an unskilled player makes an unexpected hit. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 may not output an error but only output a security signal from the external terminal board 784 and may not notify the player. In this way, the clerk of the hall can check the possibility of an error from a location away from the pachinko machine 1 without being noticed by the player, and can also prevent trouble with the player.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is characterized in that information accumulated in a plurality of games is collected as a game history. Since there is an upper limit to the amount of game history data that can be recorded, if one game (one change) is recorded, many games (long time) cannot be recorded. I have.

[12. Game performance setting function]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting function will be described. The pachinko machine of the present embodiment has a setting function for changing, for example, the operating ratio of the condition device as the game performance.

[12-1. Basic configuration of pachinko machine with setting function]
FIG. 129 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine having the setting section. FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine having the setting section viewed from the back side in the door open state. 130 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130 when viewed from the back side in a closed state, and FIG. 132 is a diagram showing a setting unit of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine shown in FIG. 129 has a setting board 970 for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine. The setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquires the operation state of each switch, and controls the display on the setting display 974.

  As shown in the front view of FIG. 132A, the setting board 970 includes a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and a setting for changing the set value. A change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed set value, and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected set value are provided. The setting board 970 functions as a setting change operation unit that receives a setting change operation.

  In this embodiment, the operation signals of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the payout control unit 952. The setting display 974 is controlled by the payout control unit 952. The determined setting is transmitted from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310. As described later, the main control board 1310 may control components on the setting board 970.

  The setting key 971 is used to insert a predetermined key into a keyhole (key insertion part) and turn the key to a set position to maintain the short-circuited or open state of the contact and to change to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Switch that outputs a signal that triggers Note that another switch may be used instead of providing the setting key 971. In this case, by operating (holding) the setting change switch 972 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or more, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and the setting change switch 972 during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started. A long press may end the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  The setting change mode may be started / terminated by operating the RAM clear switch 954. For example, when the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press), the setting change mode is started. The power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than the predetermined time, the RAM clear processing is executed. Further, the setting change mode may be ended by long-pressing the RAM clear switch 954 during the setting change mode.

  In this way, even an employee who does not have the key for the setting key 971 can change the setting, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled in the hall. In addition, since the operation time of the setting change switch 972 is detected, the operation may be detected at the fall of the setting change switch 972.

  The setting change switch 972 is constituted by, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to sequentially switch and select the set values (1 to 6). That is, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the setting value increases by one, and when the setting change switch 972 is operated when the setting value = 6, the setting value becomes one. The setting value may be selectable by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. The set value is not limited to six steps, but may be smaller (e.g., two) or larger (e.g., eight).

  Further, the setting key 971 may also serve as the setting change switch 972 without providing the setting change switch 972. In this case, the setting key 971 can be operated in three stages, the key can be inserted and removed in the neutral position (normal position), the operation to start the setting change mode when turned to the left, and the setting to be set when turned to the right. This is an operation for selecting a value (turning to the right functions as a setting change switch 972). The setting key 971 performs an alternate operation capable of holding the left position and the neutral position, and performs a momentary operation in which the right position is not held (the key position returns to the neutral position when the key is released).

  The set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device (that is, the special symbol hit probability). The set value = 1 has a low hit probability and the set value = 6 has a high hit probability. In addition, depending on the set value, the rate of probability change big hit, the rate of time saving (ST) after big hit, the number of time savings, the number of rounds and counts of big hits, the probability of hitting a regular figure, the general winning opening, the starting opening, and the big winning opening. Various parameters relating to the game, such as the number of prize balls, may be changed to change the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player.

  The setting confirmation switch 973 is, for example, a momentary switch, and is a switch for confirming the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 972 and inputting the setting value to the pachinko machine 1. The setting confirmation switch 973 may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch as long as it is a momentary switch. The setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973 may be constituted by switches having different operation methods (operation directions) and shapes so as not to operate both switches by mistake. For example, the setting change switch 972 may be constituted by a push button switch, and the setting confirmation switch 973 may be constituted by a momentary toggle switch.

  The setting selected by the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position may be determined without providing the setting determining switch 973. Further, the set value selected in response to the operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1 may be determined. For example, the operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the contact detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, the operation of the stop button of the handle unit 500, the operation of the operation button 220C, and the ball lending button , The operation of the return button, the detection of winning of a game ball to the start-up ports 2002 and 2004, and the like, the selected setting may be determined. The operation unit that substitutes for the setting confirmation switch 973 may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used for a game) or a switch that cannot be operated by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

  That is, in the illustrated example, three switches (including a setting key) are provided on the setting board 970 in order to set the gaming performance on the pachinko machine 1, but one or two switches are provided on the setting board 970. It is enough if provided.

  Furthermore, the setting change operation may be performed only by the RAM clear switch 954 without providing any of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973. For example, when the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press), the setting change mode is started. The power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than the predetermined time, the RAM clear processing is executed. Further, a setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 for less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) during the setting change mode instead of the setting change switch 972, and a RAM clear switch is used instead of the setting confirmation switch 973. The set value can be determined by an operation (long press) of 954 or more for a predetermined time. Further, the setting change mode may be ended by long-pressing the RAM clear switch 954 after the setting is confirmed.

  The setting display 974 includes, for example, a 7-segment LED, and displays a setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 972, and displays a current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, operation of the setting key 971). . Note that the setting display 974 may be constituted by LEDs having a settable number of values instead of the 7-segment LEDs. In this case, the LED corresponding to the set value is turned on to display the set value.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an error type indicator using a 7-segment LED for displaying the type of the payout error is provided on the payout control board 951. The error type indicator and the setting indicator 974 are also used. The selected set value or the current set value may be displayed on the error type display. In this case, the display mode may be changed so that the display of the error type and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, the dots may be turned off when displaying the error type, and the dots may be turned on when displaying the set value. The display of the error type may be lit (not blinking), and the display of the set value may be blinking.

  In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, but may be connected to a power board (not shown) in the power board box 930. By providing the setting board 970 in parallel with the power supply board (or inside the power supply board box 930), the setting key 971 and the power switch 932 operated at the time of setting change are arranged in the vicinity, and the operability of setting change is provided. Can be improved.

  In addition, as described later, the setting board 970 may be connected to the main control board 1310.

  As still another form, the setting board 970 may be configured as a part of the payout control board 951, the power supply board, or the main control board 1310 instead of being an independent board. That is, a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting display 974 may be mounted on any of the payout control board 951, the power supply board, and the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 130, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side of the lower part of the main body frame 4 constituting the pachinko machine 1 (that is, the frame side instead of the game board 5), and as shown in FIG. When the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2, at least a part of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. In a state where the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2, the interval between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow, so that it is difficult to operate keys and switches on the setting board 970 in this state. As described above, the right frame member 40 conceals the setting key 971, hinders insertion of the key into the keyhole of the setting key 971, and makes setting change difficult to operate the setting board 970 (setting change operation unit). Functions as a means. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting key 971 as at least a part of the setting board 970 may be opposed to the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a small interval in a state where the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a small interval. In this case, keys and switches may be arranged vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. As described above, when the entire setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a small interval, the setting is performed during the operation of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2). By making the operation of the substrate 970 difficult, it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act of changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1 by the player.

  In the illustrated example, the member facing the setting board 970 (the setting change difficulting means) in a state where the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40, but may be another member. For example, the cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a small interval in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. Further, a cover that moves in conjunction with opening and closing of the main body frame 4 may be provided, and in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the cover may be disposed at a position facing the setting board 970 at a small interval. .

  The setting change difficulting means constituted by a member provided facing the setting board 970 may be a cover covering the setting board 970. In this case, the setting key 971 that triggers the start of the setting change mode may be covered with a double cover. For example, an inner cover that covers the setting board 970 and an outer cover that covers various control boards including the setting board 970 are provided. Further, an inner cover that covers the keyhole of the setting key 971 and an outer cover that covers the setting board 970 may be provided. More specifically, the setting board 970 is housed in a setting board case, and the setting board case has a first cover that prevents careless operation of the setting key 971 and the switches 972 and 973 (at least the setting key 971). A body (eg, a door-like lid that can be opened during operation) is provided. Further, a second cover body that covers various control boards including the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 is provided on the outer frame 2. Note that the second cover body may be provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 to cover various control boards. In this way, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from being started due to an inadvertent operation, and it is possible to prevent an unauthorized player from changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

  The distance in which the setting board 970 faces the member such as the right frame member 40 in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is determined by the head of the key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 (the key head gripped during operation). ) Should be shorter than the length.

  The setting board 970 may be arranged near the power switch 932 so that the setting key 971 and the power switch 932 operated when changing the setting are arranged near each other. By doing so, the operability when activating the setting change mode can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 131, a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1 is provided in the power supply board box 930, and the main control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1 is initialized in the payout control board unit 950. A clear RAM switch 954 is provided. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game and can be operated from the back side, but the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are different from the back side. It is provided at a position where it can be viewed and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably, the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973) is provided at a position where it is difficult to visually recognize and operate the pachinko machine 1 from the back side during operation. Since the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated in the manufacturing process, they are provided at positions that can be operated from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is operating. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden so as to be difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is operating, thereby suppressing an illegal act of changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the setting board 970 during a game. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the switches on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraud.

  Similarly, it is desirable that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is not known to the player because it is important information for selecting the table of the player. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 131, similarly to the setting key 971, the setting display 974 may be opposed to the right frame member 40 at a small interval so that the display is not visible. Normally, when the main frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off so that the set value is not known to the player. It is desirable. In this manner, the right frame member 40 functions as a visibility-improving unit that conceals the display content of the setting display 974 and makes it difficult to visually recognize the display content of the setting display 974 (setting state display unit).

  FIG. 132 (B) is a diagram of the setting board 970 viewed from above in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. In this state, since the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 at a small interval, the head of the key 975 inserted into the key hole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40, and the setting key 971 The key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole.

  On the other hand, when the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the right frame member 40 is not located in front of the key hole of the setting key 971, and the key 975 can be inserted into the key hole of the setting key 971.

  Also, the display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side of the pachinko machine 1, and faces the right frame member 40 when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, so that it can be viewed from the front by the player. It is difficult to check the current settings of pachinko machines.

  FIG. 133 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the setting board 970.

  Also in this modified example, the setting board 970 is provided with a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting display 974, as in the above-described example. However, in the present modification, the setting key 971 is arranged horizontally on the setting board 970, and the key 975 is inserted from the side of the setting board.

  For this reason, the setting board 970 of the present modification is installed on the back side of the main body frame 4 instead of on the side, so that the keyhole faces the side. Then, as shown in FIG. 133 (B), when the setting board 970 is viewed from above, the side surface (ie, the keyhole) of the setting board 970 is in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 and the right frame member 40. Since the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 and the right frame member 40 interfere with each other, the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 133, the board of the pachinko machine 1 can be arranged in the same direction as the other boards, and the setting board 970 is operated during the operation of the pachinko machine 1 even if the difficulty of arranging the boards is reduced. It is possible to suppress a fraudulent act of changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

  Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine having the setting unit will be described. In this modification, the setting board 970 is provided not on the main frame 4 but on the game board 5 and is connected to the main control board 1310.

  FIG. 134 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine according to the present modification. FIG. 135 is a perspective view of a game board having a setting unit as viewed from behind. FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which mounts the game board shown from the back.

  The setting board 970 is provided with a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting display 974. The setting board 970 may be the one shown in FIG. 132 (A) or the one shown in FIG. 133 (A).

  In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 134, the setting board 970 for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine is connected to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation state of each switch, and the main control MPU 1311 Controls the display of the setting display 974.

  The function and configuration of the setting board 970 and each component on the setting board are the same as those in the above-described embodiment, and the common description will be omitted.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317 composed of 7-segment LEDs. For this reason, the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may also be used, and the selected setting value or the current setting value may be displayed on the base display 1317. Normally, the base display 1317 displays the base value of the provisional section (section currently being measured) and the base value of the fixed section (straight line section) at predetermined time intervals. On the other hand, during the setting change mode, the selected setting value (to be set next) is displayed, and during setting confirmation (see FIG. 152), the current setting value is displayed.

  In this case, the display mode may be changed so that the display of the base value and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, while the base value is displayed using four digits, the set value may be displayed using only one predetermined digit (for example, the rightmost digit), and "-" may be displayed. The digits not used in the display of the set value may be replaced with "-", and other numbers, characters, and symbols may be displayed as long as they are not used in the display of the base value. When the set value is displayed, characters that are not used in displaying the base value may be displayed. For example, the set values are displayed in six stages of alphabets A, b, C, d, E, and F.

  Further, in the setting change mode, it is preferable that the setting value is blinking while the setting value is selected, and the determined setting value is lit. Further, the current set value may be lit and displayed. In the base display, the first two digits represent the type of display data, and no numeral is displayed. Therefore, the set value may be displayed using the most significant digit. When the base display 1317 is used as the setting display 974, the setting value is displayed with priority during the setting change mode and during the setting confirmation. Therefore, although the base value is calculated, the base value is displayed. Not done. Thereafter, when the confirmation of the setting change mode and the setting value is completed, the base display 1317 restarts the display of the base value.

  When the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are shared, the process of outputting the display content to the setting display 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 in the game control area, and the display content is displayed on the base display 1317. The output process is executed by the base calculation / display code 13135 outside the game control area. However, a part of the base calculation / display code 13135 (for example, a process of outputting display data to the driver circuit) may be provided in the game control area. Shared processing can reduce the capacity of the program and save memory.

  On the other hand, the process of outputting the display content to the setting display 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 in the game control area, and the process of outputting the display content to the base display 1317 is for calculating and displaying the base outside the game control area. When the processing is executed by the code 13135, processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated, and security can be improved.

  Further, the processing of setting change or setting confirmation may be executed outside the game control area.

  That is, whether the setting display 974 is provided separately from the base display 1317 or is shared with the base display 1317, both cases are included in the scope of the invention described in this specification. As described above, while confirming the setting change mode and the set value, the plurality of displays provided on the main control board box 1320 are displayed so as not to be confused, thereby preventing erroneous operation at the time of setting change and erroneous recognition of the set value.

  Further, even when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are not shared, while the setting display 974 is displaying the set value, the display of the base display 1317 may be turned off or turned on entirely. Also in this case, when the setting change mode and the confirmation of the set value are completed, the base display 1317 restarts the display of the base value. By not displaying a plurality of indications on the main control board box 1320 during the confirmation of the setting change mode and the setting value, it is possible to prevent erroneous operation at the time of changing the setting and erroneous recognition of the setting value.

  In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310. However, the setting board 970 may be formed on a part of the main control board 1310 instead of an independent board. That is, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974 may be mounted on the main control board 1310.

  The setting board 970 may be enclosed in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310. When the setting board 970 is sealed in the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 has holes or notches for operating the setting keys 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970. Is provided.

  When the setting board 970 is sealed in the main control board box 1320, the structure of the main control board box 1320, that is, the opening / closing direction differs depending on the direction of the key hole of the setting key 971 on the setting board 970. Specifically, when the key 975 is vertically inserted into the board from the front of the board, the main control board box 1320 is vertically separated from the setting board 970 on the front and back sides of the setting board 970 or the front side box ( Or the cover) and the back side box may be configured to be openable and closable with one side as a hinge. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted in the direction in which the board extends from the side, the main control board box 1320 moves the extension box of the setting board 970 between the front side box (or cover) of the setting board 970 and the back side box. It is preferable to adopt a structure that slides and separates (in the insertion direction of the key 975).

  In this modification, the operation signals of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the main control MPU 1311. The setting display 974 is controlled by the main control MPU 1311.

  As shown in FIG. 135, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side (the left side in FIG. 135) of the game board 5 constituting the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 136, the game board 5 is attached. When the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2, at least a part of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. In a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the interval between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow. It is difficult to operate the switch. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting key 971 as at least a part of the setting board 970 may be opposed to the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a small interval in a state where the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a small interval. In this case, keys and switches may be arranged vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. As described above, when the entire setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a small interval, the setting is performed during the operation of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2). By operating the board 970, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

  In the illustrated example, the member facing the setting board 970 (the setting change difficulting means) in a state where the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40, but may be another member. For example, the cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a small interval in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. Further, a cover that moves in conjunction with opening and closing of the main body frame 4 may be provided, and in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the cover may be disposed at a position facing the setting board 970 at a small interval. .

  The distance in which the setting board 970 faces the member such as the right frame member 40 in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is determined by the head of the key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 (the key head gripped during operation). ) Should be shorter than the length.

  As shown in FIG. 136, the power supply board box 930 is provided with a power supply switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1, and the payout control board unit 950 stores the main control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1 in the initial state. A clear RAM switch 954 is provided. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game and can be operated from the back side, but the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are different from the back side. It is provided at a position where it can be viewed and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably, the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973) is provided at a position where it is difficult to visually recognize and operate the pachinko machine 1 from the back side during operation. Since the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated in the manufacturing process, they are provided at positions that can be operated from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is operating. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden so as to be difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is operating, thereby suppressing an illegal act of changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the setting board 970 during a game. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the switches on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraud.

  Similarly, it is desirable that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is not known to the player because it is important information for selecting the table of the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, similarly to the setting key 971, the setting display 974 may be opposed to the right frame member 40 at a small interval so that the display is not visible. Normally, when the main frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off so that the set value is not known to the player. It is desirable. In this manner, the right frame member 40 functions as a visibility-improving unit that conceals the display content of the setting display 974 and makes it difficult to visually recognize the display content of the setting display 974 (setting state display unit).

  In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 134, a view in which the setting board 970 is viewed from above in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is as shown in FIGS. 132 (B) and 133 (B). . In this state, since the keyholes of the setting board 970 and the setting key 971 face the right frame member 40 at a small interval, the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40. However, the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

  Also, the display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side of the pachinko machine 1, and faces the right frame member 40 when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, so that it can be viewed from the front by the player. The current settings of the pachinko machine cannot be confirmed.

  Next, processing related to setting change will be described.

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the initialization processing. The initialization processing shown in FIG. 137 is different from the initialization processing described above with reference to FIG. 21 in that the RAM clear processing is performed when the setting key is operated (steps S17 and S30) and the CPU initialization processing (step S30). The difference is that the setting change process is performed in S28). Note that the same steps as those in the initialization processing described above with reference to FIG. 21 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes a main control program to perform an initialization process. First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the protection of the RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes the RAM 1312 writable (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates a built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for activation of the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510 or the like)) has elapsed. A determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated and its output is on (step S17). When the setting key 971 is operated, the data of the set value and the game state (for example, the probable change state, the time saving state, the holding of special symbols and ordinary symbols, the prize ball, etc.) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 ), And deletes the other data (step S30), and proceeds to step S24.

  On the other hand, if the setting key 971 has not been operated, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). If the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) out of the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is deleted (step S30), and step S24 is performed. Proceed to. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch has not been operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set (step S20).

  As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30). The process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power-off is used in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

  As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect. The area other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct. Proceed to.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). When it is determined that the data is abnormal, the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted because the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect (step S26).

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the setting of the power failure flag are set. There are a power failure flag abnormality that has not been performed (step S20), a RAM abnormality where the checksums of the RAM do not match (step S22), and an abnormality of the base calculation work (step S24). As shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the setting value and the game state in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) are detected. (E.g., probable change state, reduced working hours, reserved storage of special symbols and ordinary symbols, information on prize balls), clears other data, and does not clear base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area). . When the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, or when the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared and the base calculation is performed. The area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. If the base calculation work is abnormal, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

  In the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, and a base calculation work abnormality, unlike the illustrated one, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, so that the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 May be cleared. When the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a base calculation work error, the data indicating the game state is lost and the normal processing cannot be executed. In the case of a memory configuration, the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area It is good to initialize only. If the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared and the base calculation area 13128 is cleared, as described above. You don't have to clear it.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is stored in the work control area 13126 (set value, game state data) for each data type. Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is deleted, and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not deleted. If the set value is erased by operating the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set value every time the RAM clear operation is performed, and the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall becomes complicated. Therefore, the set value is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch.

  For the processing after step S28, any of FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 is the presence or absence of a process (steps S50, S52) for calculating and storing a check code from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is turned off.

  138 and 139 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the setting change processing and the setting display processing. FIG. 138 illustrates a case where the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 (or configured integrally with the payout control board 951). FIG. 139 shows the processing when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 (or is configured integrally with the main control board 1310).

  First, a setting change process in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG.

  When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, (1) the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated to be turned on and whether the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. Whether the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 can be determined by a detection signal from the main frame open switch. Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, since the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, the determination of the opening of the main frame 4 may be omitted. .

  If the setting key 971 is turned on and the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 starts the setting change mode. As described above, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change allowable state generating unit. The start conditions of the setting change mode other than those described above include operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, insertion of a prepaid card into the CR unit (prepaid card), and the like. The setting change mode does not need to be started when there is a balance inserted in the cash sand). Also, it is better not to start the setting change mode even when the pachinko machine 1 has detected a possibility of some wrongdoing (for example, a magnetic error). The determination of these conditions may be performed after the main control MPU 1311 receives the setting change start command instead of the payout control unit 952. In such a case, it is presumed that the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 is not performed by the hall, and there is a possibility that a setting change operation is being performed by an unauthorized player. Therefore, it is better not to shift to the setting change mode. .

  (2) When the setting change mode starts, the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting change start command to the main control board 1310.

  (3) Upon receiving the setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 executes a RAM clear process before the setting change. The RAM clear processing before the setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) in the game state (for example, the probable change state, the time saving state, the special symbol and the normal symbol holding storage). , Data on the prize ball) and other data are cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. Since the set value is set to the initial value later in the procedure (6), it is not necessary to clear the set value in this step.

  (4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  (5) Upon receiving the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies that the device is in the setting change mode. The notification in the setting change mode performs an initial operation of the accessory and performs a predetermined display on the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control unit 1511 may not perform the initial operation of the accessory. For example, when displaying the procedure or state of the setting change on the effect display device 1600, if the initial operation of the accessory is performed during the setting change, the display of the effect display device 1600 is partially hidden, and the setting change operation is performed. Because it will disturb you.

  The main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a special mode that does not appear during a normal game (for example, all LEDs for special symbol display are turned off or turned on), and the progress of the game may be stopped. . Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping detection of a winning ball or an out ball and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, in the setting change mode, the base value is not calculated. Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the firing permission signal, stops the firing of the game ball controlled by the firing control device, and notifies the setting change mode by functioning as the firing disabler. Is also good. When the firing of the game ball is stopped during the setting change mode, the firing of the game ball during the firing stop period may be regarded as an error, and the error may be detected if the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. .

  (6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to 0. As described above, the setting value can be selected from 1 to 6, and the setting value = 0 is a state in which the setting has not been set. If the setting value = 0, the setting change mode cannot be ended, and the game (the game ball Launch, fluctuating game, etc.) does not start.

  (7) Thereafter, every time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the payout control unit 952 displays the selected set value on the setting display 974.

  (8) The payout control unit 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Although the opening of the main body frame 4 is determined in the procedure (1) described above, it is sufficient that the determination is made at least once before the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973 is determined. As described above, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change allowable state generating unit that determines whether the setting change condition is satisfied before the setting change is determined.

  (9) Further, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

  (10) If the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the payout control unit 952 confirms the selected setting value, and confirms that the setting value has been confirmed. Is displayed on the setting display 974. The set value confirmation display may display a value that cannot be selected as the set value (for example, 8), or may blink the decided set value for a predetermined time.

  (11) Thereafter, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 has been turned off.

  (12) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting change mode ends, and the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting change end command to the main control board 1310. With this setting change end command, the determined set value is notified to the main control MPU 1311.

  (13) Upon receiving the setting change end command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 transmits the setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  (14) Upon receiving the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 ends the notification of the setting change. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 notifies that the setting is being changed, this is also ended.

  Note that the notification (including the game stop and the firing stop) may be released immediately after the setting change mode ends, or may be released after a predetermined time has elapsed. Assuming that the notification performed in step (5) is merely notification to the outside (players, hall employees), the notification may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends. However, if the notification performed in the procedure (5) is captured from the viewpoint of detecting a fraudulent activity, the notification may be canceled after a lapse of a predetermined time after the setting change mode ends. This is because if a setting change is made, a predetermined display is performed for a predetermined time or the game is stopped, so that it is easy to find that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. is there.

  When the firing of the game ball is stopped for a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, the firing of the game ball during the firing stop period is regarded as an error, and the error is detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. May be.

  (15) Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 executes a RAM clear process after the setting change. The RAM clear processing after the change of the setting is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) and the set value and the game state (for example, the probable change state, the time saving state, the special symbol and the ordinary symbol). , And the other data are cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. That is, unlike the RAM clearing process before the setting change, the setting value is not initialized in the RAM clearing process after the setting change.

  Then, the setting change mode ends.

  As described above, when the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 and functions as a child board of the payout control board 951 (or when the setting board 970 is integrally formed with the payout control board 951). The main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 execute the setting change process in cooperation with each other.

  In the above-described processing, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated, but the main control MPU 1311 may determine. In this case, a signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310 is transmitted by serial communication, a predetermined pulse signal (pulse of a predetermined frequency is transmitted a predetermined number of times), or a power supply voltage. Alternatively, an intermediate potential signal other than the ground voltage may be output. This is to prevent the fraudulent act of starting the setting change mode by short-circuiting the terminal of the setting key 971, so that the signal relating to the operation of the setting key 971 is transmitted from the payout control unit 952 by a signal which cannot be generated by short-circuiting the terminal. This is because transmission to the substrate 1310 is preferable.

  Next, setting display processing in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 138 (B) cooperate will be described.

  When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is operating (while power is being supplied), the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

  (1) In the setting display mode, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, since the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, the determination of the opening of the main frame 4 may be omitted. .

  (2) When it is determined that the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 transmits a set value request command to the main control board 1310.

  (3) When receiving the set value request command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 reads out the set value stored in the main control RAM 1312, and transmits a set value notification command to the payout control unit 952.

  (4) The payout control unit 952 displays the set value notified by the set value notification command from the main control MPU 1311 on the setting display 974.

  In the above description, the set value stored in the main control board 1310 (main control RAM 1312) is displayed on the setting display 974, but the payout control unit 952 stores the set value and stores the set value in the payout control unit 952. The set value may be displayed on the setting display 974.

  Next, a setting change process by the main control board 1310 illustrated in FIG. 139A will be described.

  When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, (1) the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. As described above, the main control MPU 1311 functions as a setting change allowable state generating unit. Whether the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 can be determined by a detection signal from the main frame open switch. The detection signal of the body frame opening switch is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The payout control board 951 may transmit a body frame opening detection command to the main control board 1310 based on the received detection signal of the body frame opening detection switch. Also, the payout control board 951 may output the received detection signal of the body frame opening detection switch to the main control board 1310 as it is. Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, since the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, the determination of the opening of the main frame 4 may be omitted. .

  If the setting key 971 is turned on and the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 starts the setting change mode. The start conditions of the setting change mode other than those described above include operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, insertion of a prepaid card into the CR unit (prepaid card), and the like. The setting change mode does not need to be started when there is a balance inserted in the cash sand). Also, it is better not to start the setting change mode even when the pachinko machine 1 has detected a possibility of some wrongdoing (for example, a magnetic error). In such a case, it is presumed that the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 is not performed by the hall, and there is a possibility that a setting change operation is being performed by an unauthorized player. Therefore, it is better not to shift to the setting change mode. .

  (3) When the setting change mode starts, upon receiving a setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 executes a RAM clear process before the setting change. The RAM clear processing before the setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) in the game state (for example, the probable change state, the time saving state, the special symbol and the normal symbol holding storage). , Data on the prize ball) and other data are cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. Since the set value is set to the initial value later in the procedure (6), it is not necessary to clear the set value in this step.

  (4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  (5) Upon receiving the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies that the device is in the setting change mode. The notification in the setting change mode performs an initial operation of the accessory and performs a predetermined display on the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control unit 1511 may not perform the initial operation of the accessory. For example, when displaying the procedure or state of the setting change on the effect display device 1600, if the initial operation of the accessory is performed during the setting change, the display of the effect display device 1600 is partially hidden, and the setting change operation is performed. Because it will disturb you.

  The main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a special mode that does not appear during a normal game (for example, all LEDs for special symbol display are turned off or turned on), and the progress of the game may be stopped. . Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping detection of a winning ball or an out ball and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, in the setting change mode, the base value is not calculated. Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the firing permission signal, stops the firing of the game ball controlled by the firing control device, and notifies the setting change mode by functioning as the firing disabler. Is also good. When the firing of the game ball is stopped during the setting change mode, the firing of the game ball during the firing stop period may be regarded as an error, and the error may be detected if the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. .

  (6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to 0. As described above, the setting value can be selected from 1 to 6, and the setting value = 0 is a state in which the setting has not been set. If the setting value = 0, the setting change mode cannot be ended, and the game (the game ball Launch, fluctuating game, etc.) does not start.

  (7) Thereafter, every time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the main control MPU 1311 displays the selected setting value on the setting display 974.

  (8) The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Although the opening of the main body frame 4 is determined in the procedure (1) described above, it is sufficient that the determination is made at least once before the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973 is determined. As described above, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting change condition is satisfied before the setting change is determined (especially, whether the detection signal of the body frame opening switch is input from the payout control board 951). It functions as an allowable state generating means.

  (9) Further, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

  (10) If the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the main control MPU 1311 confirms the selected setting value and confirms that the setting value has been confirmed. It is displayed on the setting display 974. The set value confirmation display may display a value that cannot be selected as the set value (for example, 8), or may blink the decided set value for a predetermined time.

  (11) Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting key 971 has been turned off.

  (13) If the setting key 971 has been turned off, the setting change mode ends, and the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  (14) Upon receiving the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 ends the notification of the setting change. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 notifies that the setting is being changed, this is also ended.

  Note that the notification (including the game stop and the firing stop) may be released immediately after the setting change mode ends, or may be released after a predetermined time has elapsed. Assuming that the notification performed in step (5) is merely notification to the outside (players, hall employees), the notification may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends. However, if the notification performed in the procedure (5) is captured from the viewpoint of detecting a fraudulent activity, the notification may be canceled after a lapse of a predetermined time after the setting change mode ends. This is because if a setting change is made, a predetermined display is performed for a predetermined time or the game is stopped, so that it is easy to find that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. is there.

  When the firing of the game ball is stopped for a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, the firing of the game ball during the firing stop period is regarded as an error, and the error is detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. May be.

  (15) Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 executes a RAM clear process after the setting change. The RAM clear processing after the change of the setting is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) and the set value and the game state (for example, the probable change state, the time saving state, the special symbol and the ordinary symbol). , And the other data are cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. That is, unlike the RAM clearing process before the setting change, the setting value is not initialized in the RAM clearing process after the setting change.

  Then, the setting change mode ends.

  As described above, when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 and functions as a child board of the main control board 1310 (or when the setting board 970 is integrally formed with the main control board 1310) Since the main control board 1310 obtains the detection signal of the body frame opening switch from the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310 alone cannot execute the setting change process, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate with each other. To change the settings.

  Next, a setting display process in which the setting board 970 and the payout control board 951 illustrated in FIG. 139 (B) cooperate will be described.

  When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is operating (while power is being supplied), the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

  In the setting display mode, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, since the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, the determination of the opening of the main frame 4 may be omitted. .

  When it is determined that the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 reads out the set values stored in the main control RAM 1312 and displays them on the setting display 974.

  In the setting change process described with reference to FIGS. 138 (A) and 139 (A), when the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during the setting change mode, the setting change mode may be invalidated and the setting change mode may be temporarily stopped. Then, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off and the power is turned on again to restart the stopped setting change mode. The setting change mode may be restarted from the stage where the setting change mode is stopped due to error detection, or may be started from the beginning of the setting change mode (set value = 0 when no set value is selected).

  The set value may be changed by recording a history record for a predetermined number of times. Specifically, the date and time when the setting is determined and the determined setting value are stored in the main control RAM 1312 or the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511. When the history of the set values is stored in the peripheral control unit 1511, it is preferable to store the history in the RAM in the RTC provided in the peripheral control unit 1511 because the stored contents are backed up even when the pachinko machine 1 is powered off. Further, the recorded change history of the set value can be output. For example, the history of the change of the set values recorded may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 by a predetermined operation.

  The section for measuring the base value may be changed when the set value is changed. That is, when the set value is changed, even if the total number of out-balls in the section where the base value is currently being measured is less than 52,000, the section is ended and the next section is started. Since the gaming performance of the gaming machine is changed by the set value, by changing the section by changing the set value, it is possible to calculate a base value in which different gaming performances are not mixed, and grasp the transition of the base value due to the change of the set value. .

  Further, when the set value is changed, the section in which the base value is currently measured may be continued without changing the section for measuring the base value. Although the set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device, a design in which the base value does not significantly change by changing the set value is also possible. In such a case, it is not necessary to change the section for calculating the base value by changing the set value.

  If both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode may be activated. In the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971, the operation of the setting key 971 is less likely to be erroneously operated in consideration of the operation method and the arrangement of the operation means. Is considered to be the intention of the operator. Also, in the setting change mode, the contents stored in the main control RAM 1312 other than the game state and the base value are cleared, so that even if the user wants to clear the RAM, it is considered sufficient to activate the setting change mode. .

  On the other hand, when both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the RAM may be cleared without activating the setting change mode. This is because when both are operated, it is considered that the operator at least wants to clear the RAM. Further, when both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to start the setting change mode or clear the RAM. This is because, from the viewpoint of file safety against an erroneous operation, it is preferable that an operation whose operator's intention is not clear is not accepted.

  In the RAM clear of the above-mentioned procedures (3) and (15), the game state data is maintained, but the special symbol holding storage may be deleted. Since the set value changes the operation ratio of the condition device, the determination result of the random number in the special symbol lottery may change. For this reason, it is preferable to delete the reserved storage of the special symbol and newly perform a lottery.

  On the other hand, a lottery of a special symbol (extraction of a random number) is performed when a game ball is entered into the starting port. However, since the determination of the lottery result is performed at the start of the variable display game, the lottery is determined under the condition after the setting value is changed. What is necessary is just to determine the random number value stored and stored. For this reason, the special symbol on-hold storage may be maintained.

  In the above-described procedures (3) and (15), the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized in the same area as the area erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch 954. That is, in the RAM clearing process in the setting change mode, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is deleted (the game state data is also deleted), and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not deleted. Normally, the setting change is performed between the closing of the hall and the opening of the next day, so the game state data (probable change state, saving time, holding special symbols and ordinary symbols, storing information about winning balls, etc.) is deleted. It is not necessary to maintain without.

[12-2. Performance on pachinko machines with setting functions]
[12-2-1. Special design and special electric accessory control processing]
Hereinafter, details of the processing by the main control MPU 1311 will be described. First, the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. The special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed in the process of step S86 in the main control timer interrupt process. Hereinafter, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are also collectively referred to as a starting port. In addition, the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 are collectively referred to simply as a special winning opening. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to simply as a special symbol.

  In the special symbol and special electric auditors control processing, the game ball is accepted into the starting opening, that is, upon the start prize (start condition being satisfied), a big hit is made for each start storage information (start information) in which the start condition is satisfied. A random number for determination is obtained, and it is determined whether or not the random number for jackpot determination matches a jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (lottery means). Then, it is determined whether or not to generate a jackpot game state based on the lottery result. If the random number value for jackpot matches the jackpot determination value (predetermined winning condition is satisfied), it is usually determined. The game state is shifted to the jackpot game state. Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 140.

  When the special symbol and special electric auditors control process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the gaming ball B has won a large winning opening (step S100). When the game ball B has won the special winning opening (the result of step S100 is "yes"), a special winning opening winning designation command is set (step S102).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the game ball has won the starting port (step S112). Then, whether or not the game ball has won the starting port is determined by the presence or absence of the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002 or the second starting port sensor 2511 in the switch input process (step S74) in the main control timer interrupt process. The reading is performed based on the input information stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  When a game ball has won the starting opening (the result of step S114 is “yes”), the main control MPU 1311 executes a starting opening winning process (step S116). In the opening mouth winning process, a starting mouth winning command transmitted when a new game ball is won in the starting mouth is set, a random number for jackpot determination or the like is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, a special symbol, For example, a process for executing a prefetch effect is executed.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a corresponding process based on a special symbol / electric accessory operation number, which is a game progress state variable in which a type of branch process executed according to the progress of the game is specified (step). S124). The game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is updated in each branch process executed according to the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process proceeds to the branch process designated based on the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area, and when the transferred branch process is completed, the special symbol and special electric accessory control. The process ends. Note that the value of the game progress state variable and the like stored in the game progress state storage area are game information, and are backed up in the main control-side power-off process.

  In the process of step S130, based on the value of the game progress state variable, as a branch process, a special symbol change waiting process (step S130), a special symbol change process (step S132), a special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), Special symbol loss stop processing (step S136), special symbol jackpot stop processing (step S138), interval processing before opening a special winning opening (step S140), processing of opening a special winning opening (step S142), processing during closing of a special winning opening (step S142) S144) or a special winning opening opening end interval process (step S146) is executed.

  In the special symbol change waiting process (step S130), a process of starting the change display of the special symbol on the special symbol display based on the fact that the game ball B has entered the starting port is performed.

  In the special symbol changing process (step S132), a process of controlling the change display of the special symbol is performed. In the special symbol big hit determination process (step S134), it is determined whether or not the special symbol that has been definitely stopped generates a big hit game state based on the fact that a game ball has entered the starting port.

  In the special symbol losing stop process (step S136), when the big hit game state is not generated, a process of stopping the change display of the special symbol and notifying the user of the fact is performed. In the special symbol big hit stop process (step S138), when a big hit game state is generated, a process of stopping the change display of the special symbol and notifying the fact is performed.

  In the interval process before the opening of the special winning opening (step S140), a process for generating a big hit game state and notifying that the big hit operation is started is performed. In the special winning opening opening process (step S142), a process related to a big hit operation that makes it easy for game balls to enter the special winning opening by opening the special winning opening is performed.

  In the special winning opening closing process (step S144), a process related to a big hit operation that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter each special winning opening by changing the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state is performed. In the winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), when the big hit operation is ended, a process of notifying the end is performed.

[12-2-2. Special symbol change waiting process]
Next, the details of the special symbol change waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the special symbol change waiting process. The special symbol change waiting process is executed in a state in which the special symbol change display is not executed, and when the change display is suspended, a preparation for starting the special symbol change display is made.

  The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the change of the special symbol is suspended (Step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of special symbol operation reserved balls is not zero. Note that the number of special symbol operation reserve balls is stored for each starting port when a plurality of starting ports are provided. If the change of the special symbol is not suspended (the result of step S420 is "no"), the display of the change of the special symbol is not started, and thus the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the change display of the special symbol is suspended (the result of step S420 is “yes”), the main control MPU 1311 sets a reserved ball number designation command as command data (step S438).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol / flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol / flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on a random number for jackpot determination acquired at the time of winning the starting opening.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (Step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 creates a variation pattern command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, first, the upper byte of the special figure variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set as the command value (step S452). Further, a variation pattern value stored in the variation pattern area is set as lower-order command data (step S458). Further, a variation type type value is acquired from the variation type type area (step S460), and the variation type type value is added to the command value set in the process of step S452, thereby obtaining the upper byte of the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation type. Is calculated (step S462). The command data of the variation pattern command created in this way is stored in a predetermined area.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 sets a symbol type command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (Step S466). Further, the change state designation command is set in the command buffer (step S474).

  Each command created by the above processing is set in the command buffer. The reserved ball number designation command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control timer interrupt process.

[12-2-3. Special symbol variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special symbol change pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol change waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol. FIG. 142 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation pattern setting process.

  The main control MPU 1311 first obtains the number of special symbol operation reserved balls (step S530). The special symbol operation reserve ball count is stored in the special symbol operation reserve ball count buffer. Further, the main control MPU 1311 sets a big hit flag from the big hit flag area (step S538).

  Then, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation pattern selection determination process of selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol based on the number of special symbol operation reserved balls and the big hit flag (step S542). Details of the variation pattern selection determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the fluctuation pattern value extracted by the fluctuation pattern selection determination processing (Step S544). Then, data corresponding to the variation pattern value (variation time value) is searched from the special symbol variation time data (step S546).

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 executes a change type determination process for selecting a change type defined in the change pattern in the change display of the special symbol (step S548). The change type classification value acquired by the change type determination processing is set (step S550).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 searches the fluctuation time addition value data for a fluctuation time addition value corresponding to the fluctuation type type value (step S552). The fluctuation time addition value is an addition time corresponding to the fluctuation type, and corresponds to, for example, an addition time corresponding to the number of pseudo runs. Then, the main control MPU 1311 adds the fluctuation time addition value searched in the processing in Step S552 to the reference fluctuation time value searched in the processing in Step S546, and acquires a final fluctuation time (Step S554). . Finally, the final variation time is stored in the special symbol / electric accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol variation pattern setting processing ends.

[12-2-4. Variation pattern selection judgment processing]
Subsequently, the details of the variation pattern selection determination processing (Step S542) will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a variation pattern selection determination process. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of a special symbol.

  The main control MPU 1311 first obtains a fluctuation information source table based on the fluctuation table number (Step S340). The variation table number is a value for selecting (acquiring) the variation information source table from the variation information source address table. The fluctuation information source table includes a hit (a hit fluctuation selection information state table), a loss (a loss fluctuation selection information state table), a reach (a reach fluctuation selection information state table), and a reach probability (a special symbol reach probability) according to a game state or the like. This is a data table that stores table information for referring to a change type (change type determination data table).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a hit determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (step S346). It is determined whether or not a big hit has been won by determining whether or not the hit determination value matches the big hit value (step S350). If a big hit is won (the result of step S350 is "yes"), a big hit flag and a big hit symbol type are acquired (step S354).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a change information number search process based on the big hit flag and the big hit symbol type (step S358). In the variation information number search process, a variation information number for determining a hit variation pattern selection value data table is obtained from the big hit variation selection information type table. The main control MPU 1311 acquires the variation pattern random number 1 from the jackpot variation selection information type table based on the acquired variation information number (step S360).

  On the other hand, when a big hit or a small hit has not been won (the result of step S350 is “no”), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a reach is to be generated in the variable display corresponding to the winning start (step S350). S372).

  When the reach is not generated in the fluctuation display (the result of step S372 is “no”), the main control MPU 1311 obtains the fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the outlier fluctuation selection information reservation table based on the number of retained balls (step S372). S376).

  On the other hand, when the reach is generated in the fluctuation display (result of step S372 is “yes”), the main control MPU 1311 acquires the fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the reach fluctuation selection information state table based on the state flag. (Step S382).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation information number search process based on the variation pattern random number 1 acquired in the process of Step S360, Step S378, or Step S382 (Step S388). Then, a fluctuation pattern selection value data table is obtained by the fluctuation information number search processing, and a fluctuation pattern random number 2 is obtained from the fluctuation pattern selection value data table (step S392). Further, a variation information number search process is executed based on the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern selection value data table (step S394). A change pattern is selected based on the result of the change information number search process (step S396), and this process ends.

  In the present embodiment, a variation pattern is selected in two stages based on two types of random numbers, a variation pattern random number 1 (steps S360, S372, and S378) and a variation pattern random number 2 (step S392). First, a type of a fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern group such as XX system reach) is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number 1. Further, a variation pattern (a value set in the variation pattern command) to be finally variation-displayed is selected from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2. In addition, the method is not limited to the method of performing the lottery in two stages, and a method of performing the lottery in three or more stages may be employed, or the variation pattern may be directly selected by using one variation pattern random number.

[12-3. Description of production on pachinko machines with setting function]
Hereinafter, the effect in the pachinko machine 1 having the setting function will be described. Specifically, a setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 having the setting function, for example, as the setting is higher, the payout number of the game balls with respect to the number of the special lottery is increased. Specifically, for example, the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot probability in the non-probable change state (for example, setting 1: 1/300, setting 2: 1/290, setting 3: 1/280, setting 4: 1/270). , Setting 5: 1/250, setting 6: 1/230, etc.). Therefore, since the player wants to play a game with the pachinko machine 1 having the highest possible setting, the willingness to play is increased by installing the setting suggestion effect.

  In the following, in this chapter, for convenience of description, the main control MPU 1311 selects a variation pattern directly with one variation pattern random number in the variation pattern selection determination processing in step S542. Specifically, in this chapter, the main control MPU 1311 executes the following processing in step S542.

  In step S542, the main control MPU 1311 determines the current gaming state (whether the time saving state (the state in which the time saving control is being executed) or the normal state other than the time saving state) and the result of the special lottery (winning at the big hit). Is selected or not), and a variation pattern table corresponding to the above is selected. When the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the main control MPU 1311 obtains a random number for the fluctuation pattern, and based on the obtained random number for the fluctuation pattern and the distribution of each fluctuation pattern in the selected fluctuation pattern table, It is assumed that a variation pattern is selected from the selected variation pattern table. In addition, when the result of the special lottery is out of order, further determine whether or not reach has occurred, obtain a random number for the fluctuation pattern, and obtain the obtained random number for the fluctuation pattern, distribution of each fluctuation pattern in the selected fluctuation pattern table, Based on the selected variation pattern table.

  FIG. 144 (A) is an example of a fluctuation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is out of order. FIG. 144 (B) is an example of a fluctuation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

  The variation pattern table is stored, for example, in the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310. The variation pattern table includes, for example, a variation pattern type column, a variation time column, a corresponding effect content column, and a variation pattern determination random number distribution column. The variation pattern type column stores information for identifying the type for identifying the variation pattern in the table. The fluctuation time column stores information for specifying the fluctuation time in the corresponding fluctuation pattern type. The corresponding effect content column stores information for specifying the effect content executed in the corresponding variation pattern.

  The distribution random number field for fluctuation pattern determination stores the distribution for selecting the corresponding fluctuation pattern for each setting. The fluctuation pattern determination distribution random number field of the fluctuation pattern table selected when the special lottery result is out of order (that is, the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A) and FIG. For each of the cases where the reach is not generated, the distribution for selecting the corresponding variation pattern is stored for each setting.

[12-4. Setting suggestion effect performed after temporary display of special lottery results]
First, the setting suggestion effect in the outlier variation pattern stored in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A) will be described. First, the effects performed in the deviation variation patterns 24 to 29 will be described with reference to FIG. 144.

  FIG. 144 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of an effect performed in the outlier variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). In the variation of the deviation variation pattern 20, after a special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 indicating that the special lottery result is highly likely to be deviated after the SP reach 1, the special lottery result is deviated thereafter. A confirmation display indicating the presence is displayed on the effect display device 1600. On the other hand, in the variation of the deviation variation patterns 25 to 29, after displaying the temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is highly likely to be a deviation after the SP reach 1 is performed, the temporary display is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the setting is performed. A suggested effect is executed, and then a final display indicating that the special lottery result is out of order is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  As described above, in the variation patterns 25 to 29, after performing the provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out of order, the setting suggestion effect is performed, so that the provisional display is performed. The player can expect the occurrence of the setting suggestion effect thereafter and maintain the expectation. In addition, when a setting suggestion effect occurs due to a deviation, even if the special lottery result is deviated, discouragement of the player due to the result of the special lottery can be suppressed, and thus a feeling of excitement can be enhanced.

  In addition, in the variation of the deviation variation pattern 24, after the SP reach 1 is executed, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is highly likely to be deviated is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the setting suggestion effect is executed. Is displayed on the effect display device 1600 without performing the setting suggestion effect itself, but indicating that the special lottery result is out of order.

  Note that the SP reach is a reach effect in which the ratio selected when the result of the special lottery is a big hit is high, and the ratio selected when the result of the special lottery is out of order is low. In other words, the big hit expectation of the fluctuation at which the SP reach is executed is high.

  Hereinafter, the effects performed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 will be specifically described. In each effect, in addition to the contents described below, sound output from various speakers, light emission from various lamps, operation of various movable bodies, and / or display on the effect display device 1600 are simultaneously executed. Is also good.

  In the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24-29, first, the pre-reach effect is executed. In the effect before reach, all the decorative symbols fluctuate in the effect display device 1600. Subsequently, in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, a normal reach effect is developed. In the normal reach effect, the decorative design is in the reach state on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, for example, of the three decorative symbols (for example, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol), the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol, and the middle symbol changes.

  Subsequently, in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, SP reach 1 is developed, and the first half effect of SP reach 1 is executed. In SP reach 1, for example, one main character and one enemy character are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the player plays a rock-paper-scissor game. In the first half effect of the SP reach 1 in the departure variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, an effect is performed on the effect display device 1600 in which the hero character loses to the enemy character in a rock-paper-scissor game. During SP reach, for example, the decorative symbol may be displayed at a position smaller than that at the time of the pre-reach effect and at the time of the normal reach effect, and at a position closer to the periphery of the effect display device 1600.

  Subsequently, in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, the second half of SP reach 1 is developed. In the second half of the SP reach 1 in the departure variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, for example, a so-called resurrection effect is executed. For example, at the start of the second half effect, the main character's voice such as "still!" On the display device 1600, an effect of performing a rock-paper-scissors game between the hero character and the enemy character is performed again. In the second half effect of SP reach 1 in the departure variation patterns 24 to 29, an effect is performed on the effect display device 1600 in which the hero character loses again to the enemy character in a rock-paper-scissor game.

  Subsequently, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is out of order is executed on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, for example, in the effect display device 1600, one combination of the decorative symbols in the detached state (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol are the same symbol as the symbol stopped in the reach state, and the middle symbol is the corresponding symbol). (A symbol different from the same symbol) is displayed in such a manner as to swing with a small width.

  Subsequently, in the deviation variation pattern 20, after the provisional display, a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is deviated is displayed on the effect display device 1600 without performing another effect. In the deviation variation pattern 24, a setting suggestion gassing effect is executed after the provisional display, and thereafter, a fixed display indicating that the special lottery result has been deviated is displayed on the effect display device 1600. On the other hand, in the deviation variation patterns 25 to 29, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the provisional display, and thereafter, the final display indicating that the special lottery result is off is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the final display, for example, on the effect display device 1600, the same combination of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporary display is displayed in a completely stopped state. In the provisional display and the finalized display, the decorative design is displayed, for example, in the center of the effect display device 1600 in the same size as the effect before reach and the normal reach effect.

  In the setting suggestion gassing effect in the departure variation pattern 24, for example, on the effect display device 1600, an effect is performed in which one hero character finds two enemy characters and follows the enemy character but cannot catch the enemy character. As in the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 24 in FIG. 144 (A), the distribution of the fluctuation pattern in which the setting suggestion gassing effect is executed is desirably equal or approximately equal in all the settings. This is because if the distribution is not equal, the setting suggestion gassing effect suggests the setting.

  Further, it is desirable that the ratio of the dislocation variation pattern 24 to the total of the distribution of the variation executed by the SP reach 1 is low (for example, 20% or less). If the distribution is high, a setting suggestion effect is frequently generated when the SP reach 1 is developed, which may reduce a player's expectation of the setting suggestion effect.

  In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation patterns 25 to 29, for example, in the effect display device 1600, one hero character finds two enemy characters, chases and catches the enemy characters, and then three people play a rock-paper-scissor game. An effect is performed.

  In the setting suggestion effect in the departure variation pattern 25, an effect in which all three players play a good luck in a rock-paper-scissors game is executed. Further, in FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 25 is determined so as to be distributed only in the low setting (settings 1, 2, and 3). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 25 is an effect in which the low setting is determined.

  In the example of FIG. 144 (A), the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 25 has the same value as the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 26 and the like in the high setting (settings 4, 5, and 6). If it occurs, there is a possibility that the player may stop playing the game early. Therefore, the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 25 may be set lower than the distribution of the other setting confirmation effects in other settings, or the deviation variation pattern may be set. 25 itself may not be present.

  In the setting suggestion effect in the departure variation pattern 26, an effect in which all three players play a choki in a rock-paper-scissors game is executed. Further, in FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 26 is determined so as to be distributed only in the high setting (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 26 is an effect in which the high setting is determined.

  In the setting suggestion effect in the departure variation pattern 27, an effect in which all three players play a par when playing a rock-paper-scissors game is executed. Further, in FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 27 is determined so as to be distributed only in the even number setting (settings 2, 4, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 27 is an effect in which the even number setting is determined.

  In the setting suggestion effect in the departure variation pattern 28, an effect in which all three players give different hands in a rock-paper-scissors game is executed. Further, in FIG. 144 (A), it is determined that the deviation variation pattern 28 can be sorted only in the odd number setting (settings 1, 3, and 5). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 28 is an effect in which the odd number setting is determined.

  In addition, for example, when the odd number setting and the even number setting have different characteristics, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the effect by installing the above-described odd number setting finalizing effect or even number setting finalizing effect. .

  Specifically, for example, in the order of the settings 6, 4, 2, 5, 3, 1, the jackpot probability of the normal state is high (6 is the highest, 1 is the lowest), and the settings 5, 3, 1, 6, 4, In the order of 2, the jackpot winning percentage of the jackpot winning is high (5 is the highest, 2 is the lowest), and the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are in the order of the setting 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. It is assumed that the jackpot winning probability and the probability change ratio in each setting are determined so that the ratio of the total number of game ball payouts to the number of winning game balls to the game is high (6 is the highest and 1 is the lowest).

  In this case, even-number setting is higher in odd-number setting than in odd-number setting, but the probability of winning in the normal state is high, but the probability of change is low, that is, although the number of game balls required to win the so-called first hit is likely to decrease, The total amount of game balls that can be obtained in one retreat from the first hit tends to be small. On the other hand, odd-numbered settings have a lower probability of winning in the normal state than odd-numbered settings, but have a higher probability of change, that is, the number of game balls required to win the first hit tends to be larger, The total amount of game balls that can be obtained in a single extended villa from the home tends to increase. In such a case, a situation may occur in which a certain player prefers the odds setting of the odds setting, and another player prefers the odds setting of the odds setting. The player's interest in the performance increases. Also, the even number setting may have a feature that a big hit with a smaller number of rounds is easily selected instead of the big hit winning probability in the normal state as compared with the odd number setting.

  In the above-described deviation fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, the effect until the setting suggestion effect starts is the same, but the content of the setting suggestion effect is different (results in a rock-paper-scissors game by three people are different). In addition, it is desirable that the rock-paper-scissors game effect of the three players be used only in the deviation variation patterns 25 to 29. This allows the player to recognize that the setting suggestion effect has started at the time when the rock-paper-scissors game effect starts with the three players, and the euphoria further increases.

  Note that, for example, the deviation variation pattern 25 is a variation pattern in which an effect for determining the high setting is executed, but may be a variation pattern in which an effect indicating that the possibility of the high setting is high is executed. Specifically, for example, if the variation pattern 25 is distributed even in the low setting, and the distribution is lower than the distribution of the variation pattern 25 in the high setting (for example, 50% or less), the effect in the off variation pattern 25 is performed. Is not an effect that confirms the high setting, but an effect that suggests that the possibility of the high setting is high.

  In addition, in addition to the variation pattern in which the effect in which the high setting is determined is performed, a variation pattern in which the effect indicating that the possibility of the high setting is high as described above may be determined. The same applies to the low-setting final effect, the odd-setting final effect, the even-setting final effect, the highest-setting final effect, and the like.

  According to the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 144 (B) (the fluctuation pattern table at the time of normal and big hit), when the special lottery result is a big hit in the normal state, other than the hit fluctuation pattern 34 for which the highest setting is determined. Is not performed. In addition, the distribution of the fluctuation pattern in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed is higher than that in the case where the special lottery result is out of order. As a result, the setting suggestion effect is an effect executed mainly when the special lottery result is out of order, and the player can obtain a sense of expectation even when the special lottery result is out of order.

[12-5. Setting suggestion effect using shortened fluctuation]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of an effect performed in the outlier variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A).

  In the deviation fluctuation patterns 1, 2, and 30, the shortening fluctuation is executed. The shortened fluctuation is, for example, a fluctuation in which the fluctuation time is shorter than other fluctuation patterns, and after starting the fluctuation of the decorative symbols on the effect display device 1600, all the decorative symbols are not developed into the reach state. Is the fluctuation that stops. In the normal fluctuation, in the effect display device 1600, the decoration symbols stop in the order of, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, but in the shortening fluctuation, all the decoration symbols may stop at the same time.

  Subsequently, in the variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, a temporary display indicating that there is a high possibility that the special lottery result is out of order is performed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is out of place is performed. The description of the temporary display and the confirmed display is the same as that described above, and thus will be omitted.

  The deviation fluctuation pattern 30 has a fluctuation time different from the fluctuation times of all the other fluctuation patterns in which the shortened fluctuation is executed, such as the deviation fluctuation patterns 1 and 2. In the example of FIG. 144 (A), the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 1 is 2 seconds, the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 2 is 5 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 is 3.5 seconds. . In addition, in FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 30 is determined so as to be distributed only at the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 30 is executed, the highest setting is determined.

  In addition, the distribution of the outlier fluctuation pattern 30, which is the fluctuation pattern in which the shortening fluctuation is executed and suggests the setting, is extremely low compared to the distribution of the other fluctuation patterns in which the shortening fluctuation is executed (for example, the other fluctuation pattern). 10% or less of the minimum distribution of Further, in each variation pattern in which the shortening variation is executed, it is desirable that the execution time of the temporary display and the fixed display is the same, and only the time of the shortening variation is different. Further, it is desirable that the difference between the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern in which the other shortened fluctuation is executed is an extent that the player can recognize (for example, 1.5 seconds or more). .

  Thereby, at the time when the shortening fluctuation is executed, the player assumes the fluctuation time like the deviation fluctuation patterns 1 and 2 with many distributions, but when the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 is executed, the assumed fluctuation time and It is possible to recognize the difference, and enjoy the performance in which the highest setting is determined. In particular, in the example of FIG. 144 (A), since the fluctuation pattern including the shortening fluctuation is selected only when there is no reach, the player loses his expectation when the shortening fluctuation is executed, and becomes interested in the shortening fluctuation. I will not be able to have it. However, by performing the setting suggestion effect using the shortening variation in this way, the player can have a sense of expectation for the shortening variation selected only when the player has not reached the reach, and suppresses a decrease in interest. can do.

  In the variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, the contents displayed on the effect display device 1600 are the same, but only the time of the shortened variation is different. This allows the player to concentrate on the effect so as not to miss the highest setting finalized effect.

  The outlier fluctuation pattern 30 is a fluctuation pattern in which the highest setting is determined and the shortening fluctuation is executed. However, for each setting other than the highest setting, the fluctuation in which the setting is fixed and the shortening fluctuation is executed is performed. There may be patterns. In this case, for example, it is desirable that the fluctuation time of each of the fluctuation patterns is different from the fluctuation time of the other outlier fluctuation pattern in which the shortened fluctuation is executed.

[12-6. Setting suggestion effect performed before temporary display of special lottery results]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the out-of-office variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). In FIG. 144, the outlier fluctuation pattern 31 and the hit fluctuation pattern 34 are determined so as to be distributed only in the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are executed, the highest setting is determined.

  In the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, for example, the special movie 1 flows on the effect display device 1600 simultaneously with the start of the variation. The special movie 1 is an effect that occurs only in the deviation change pattern 31 and the hit change pattern 34, that is, an effect in which the highest setting is determined.

  In the departure variation pattern 31, after the end of the special movie 1, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is highly likely to be deviated is performed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is deviated is performed. In the winning variation pattern 34, after the end of the special movie 1, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is a hit is performed, and then a final display indicating that the special lottery result is a hit is performed.

  The deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are different from the deviation variation patterns 25 to 30 and the like, and the setting suggestion effect is started before the temporary display (specifically, for example, at the same time as the start of the variation). This allows the player to obtain a feeling of excitement waiting for the notification of the jackpot lottery result in a state where the highest setting has been determined. In particular, when the display time of the special movie 1 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), it is possible to appeal to other players that the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is the highest setting, and thus the player Can feel a sense of superiority to the other player, and the hall can easily appeal to the other player that the highest setting is used.

[12-7. Setting suggestion that jackpot winning or high setting will be finalized]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of an effect performed in the out-of-shift pattern 32 and the hit change pattern 35 in the change pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). In FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 32 is determined so as to be distributed only in the high setting (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 32 is executed, the highest setting is determined.

  In the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35, for example, the special movie 2 flows on the effect display device 1600 simultaneously with the start of the variation. The special movie 2 is an effect that is generated only by the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34.

  In the departure variation pattern 32, after the end of the special movie 2, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is highly likely to be deviated is performed, and then a final display indicating that the special lottery result is deviated is performed. In the hit variation pattern 35, after the end of the special movie 2, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is a hit is performed, and then a final display indicating that the special lottery result is a hit is performed.

  Therefore, when the special movie 2 occurs, one of the high setting and the big hit in the fluctuation is determined. That is, if the special lottery result is out of order after the occurrence of the special movie 2, the high setting is determined, so that the player can be less discouraged from the special lottery result being out of order, and, consequently, the high setting. Is determined, it is possible to obtain a feeling of elation.

  In particular, when the display time of the special movie 2 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), the player can feel a sense of superiority to other players, and furthermore, the special movie 2 occurs. If the special lottery result is out of order, the hole can easily appeal to other players that the high setting is being used.

[12-8. Proposal of setting suggestion in time-saving state]
Hereinafter, a variation pattern selected when the game state is the time saving state will be described. FIG. 149 (A) is an example of a fluctuation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is out of order. FIG. 149 (B) is an example of a fluctuation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

  In the example of FIG. 149 (A), the higher the setting, the larger the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 3 and the smaller the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 2 during the non-reach-specific deviation. Further, the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 2 is shorter than the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 3. For example, if the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot probability is, if the distribution of each variation pattern is the same in all the settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot in a short time, and the The number of paying out game balls may increase, which may lead to a burden on the hall.

  However, as in the example of FIG. 149 (A), the higher the setting, the more frequently the fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time is distributed, so that the number of game balls paid out per unit time in the respective settings can be equalized. it can. In addition, the higher the setting, the higher the selectivity of the outlier variation pattern 3, which has a longer variation time in the variation patterns including the shortened variation, so that the outlier variation pattern 3 also functions as a variation pattern indicating a high setting. Can be.

  Similarly, at the time of the off-state with the reach, the higher the setting, the larger the distribution of the off-state fluctuation pattern 11 with the long fluctuation time, and the smaller the distribution of the off-state fluctuation pattern 12 with the short fluctuation time. Similarly, at the time of winning the big hit, as the setting is higher, the distribution of the hit fluctuation pattern 2 having the longer fluctuation time is larger, and the distribution of the hit fluctuation pattern 3 having the shorter fluctuation time is smaller.

  As described above, for example, if the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot winning probability is, if the distribution of each variation pattern is the same in all the settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot in a short time In other words, the lower the setting, the longer it takes to win the big hit, and the larger the number of game balls fired before the big hit is won. For example, if the setting is lower, the distribution of the fluctuation pattern having the longer fluctuation time becomes larger, and the selectivity of the fluctuation pattern having the shorter fluctuation time becomes smaller.If the player stops firing the game ball during the fluctuation, The number of game balls fired per unit time in the setting can be equalized.

  In addition, at the timing when the setting is suggested in the various setting suggesting effects described in this chapter, a predetermined sound effect may be output, or a predetermined light emitting effect may be executed. Note that the predetermined sound effect and the predetermined light emission effect may be a dedicated effect that is executed only at the time of the setting suggestion effect. In particular, in a setting suggestion effect in which a high setting or a maximum setting is determined, it is preferable that a predetermined sound effect output or a predetermined light emission effect, which is executed only by the setting suggestion effect, be executed.

  In addition, it is desirable that the allocation of the variation pattern in which an effect indicating that the high setting or the maximum setting is determined, or that the effect indicating the possibility is high is extremely low compared to the allocation of other variation patterns. If the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is high, the player loses the expectation if the high setting suggestion effect or the maximum setting suggestion effect is not executed, even though the player plays only a small amount of game time, and eventually the player plays the game early. This is because there is a risk of being canceled.

  In addition, it is desirable that the allocation of the variation pattern in which the effect indicating that the low setting or the minimum setting is finalized or that the possibility is high is performed is extremely low compared to the allocation of other variation patterns. This is because if the variation pattern is highly distributed, the low setting suggestion effect and the minimum setting suggestion effect are frequently executed, so that the player loses his or her sense of expectation and may stop playing the game early.

  Also, the setting suggestion effect that suggests a group of settings such as a high setting, a low setting, a maximum setting, an odd number setting, and an even number setting has been described, but the setting group in the setting suggestion effect is not limited to these. A setting suggestion effect for an arbitrary group including one or more settings may be executed. For example, the settings 1 and 2 may be grouped into low settings, the settings 3 and 4 may be grouped into intermediate settings, and the settings 5 and 6 may be grouped into high settings, or there may be a group including only the settings 5.

[12-9. Another form of pachinko machine with setting function]
FIG. 150 is a diagram illustrating a mounting example of the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is shown by a dotted line.

  In the above description, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 obtains the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974. , The setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation state of each switch, and controls the display of the setting display 974.

  FIG. 150A shows a main control board box 1320 of this mounting example. The main control board box 1320 has a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once closed, and is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a hole 971A for operating the setting key 971.

  FIG. 150B shows a state where the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 150B, a base display 1317, a display switch 1318, and a RAM clear switch 954 are mounted on the main control board 1310 in addition to the main control MPU 1311 and a driver circuit (not shown). Note that the RAM clear switch 954 may not be mounted on the main control board 1310, but may be mounted on another control board (for example, a payout control board 951 or a power supply board). In this case, the hole 954A is not provided in the main control board box 1320.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, two operation units (RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971) serving as a trigger for RAM clear are provided in the main control board box 1320. As will be described later, the storage area of the main control RAM 1312 from which data is deleted differs between when only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated and when the setting key 971 is operated.

  The setting board 970 is provided near the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The connection between the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be a direct connection between the boards by a connector or a connection by an electric wire. On the setting board 970, a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, and a setting display 974 for displaying a set or selected set value are mounted. Note that a setting change switch 972 for changing the setting value and a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970.

  Outputs of the various switches 971, 972, and 973 provided on the setting board 970 are sent to the main control board 1310 and input to the ports of the main control MPU 1311.

  The main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 may perform serial communication, and the driver circuit of the setting display 974 may be mounted on the setting board 970.

  Since the main control board box 1320 is disposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting display 974 on the setting board 970 is mounted at a position that can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The main control board 1310 may authenticate the setting board 970 in the initialization processing (FIGS. 21 and 22). For example, an authentication code for each pachinko machine manufacturer is set on the setting board 970, and the main control board 1310 reads out and authenticates the authentication code set on the setting board 970. If the setting board 970 cannot be authenticated, the game is not started with the pachinko machine 1. In other words, game balls can be fired toward the game area 5a, but even if a winning port is won, the prize balls are not paid out and the variable display game is not executed. The authentication code may be set for each pachinko machine type, or a serial number for each pachinko machine may be set. The authentication code can be set by, for example, setting the authentication code using a DIP switch, a jumper wire, a jumper pin, or a short circuit of a pattern provided on the setting board 970, or a logic circuit (for example, A small-capacity FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) may be mounted on the setting board 970.

  Further, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) may be able to identify whether the board mounted in the main control board box 1320 is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. For example, by outputting different signals from the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 recognizes whether the connected board is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. I do. Specifically, the setting board 970 outputs +5 V, and the dummy board 979 outputs 0 V (ground level). The signals from the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 are input to a specific port of the interface circuit 1331 of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 determines the connected board based on the input signal to the port.

  As described above, by changing the code of the setting board 970 for each manufacturer (for each model), mounting of the wrong setting board 970 on the main control board box 1320 can be prevented. In addition, by setting the authentication code in the logic circuit on the setting board 970, unauthorized replacement of the setting board 970 can be prevented.

  FIG. 150C illustrates a state where the main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 illustrated in FIG.

  As described above, recently, some pachinko machines 1 have a function of setting game performance. This setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine relating to the prize balls acquired by the player, such as a jackpot probability in the special symbol change display game, and the setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine 1 in accordance with the business policy of the hall. On the other hand, conventional pachinko machines that do not have a setting function are sufficient, and there are some halls where the setting function is unnecessary. For this reason, it is necessary for the pachinko machine manufacturer to design and produce both a pachinko machine having no setting function and a pachinko machine having the setting function. There is a demand for efficient design and production of pachinko machines.

  For this reason, in the pachinko machine 1 having no setting function, the dummy board 979 is mounted in the mounting space of the setting board 970, and the pachinko machine 1 can be manufactured similarly to the case where the setting board 970 is mounted. To Further, the main control board 1310 can be shared between the pachinko machine without the setting function and the pachinko machine with the setting function.

  The dummy substrate 979 does not have devices such as the setting key 971 and the setting display 974 mounted on the setting substrate 970, but may have a pattern for mounting these devices. That is, a pattern for mounting a device is provided on the dummy substrate 979, but the device is not mounted on the pattern.

  The dummy board 979 may be a member (for example, a unit formed of a resin case) that can be attached to the main control board box 1320 at the same position as the setting board 970 without being constituted by a printed board.

  Further, since the driver circuit of the setting display 974 is mounted on the main control board 1310, the output of the driver circuit of the setting display 974 is neither open nor ground on the dummy board 979, but is terminated by a dummy resistor. Good. This can prevent the driver circuit from being damaged by overcurrent. When the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 perform serial communication, the dummy board 979 may terminate the serial communication with the main control board 1310.

  When the dummy board 979 is mounted, the main control board box 1320 does not have the hole 971A. The setting function is provided by providing a small door movable in the main control board box 1320 so as to close the hole 971A so that the small door can be operated from the inside of the main control board box 1320 and cannot be operated from the outside. The pachinko machine having no setting, the pachinko machine having the setting function, and the main control board box 1320 may be shared.

  Note that an authentication code for the main control board 1310 to authenticate may also be set on a dummy board 979 to be described later. In addition, the dummy board 979 does not require authentication by the main control board 1310, and does not need to set an authentication code. The main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 may perform serial communication, and the main control board 1310 may authenticate the dummy board.

  The variations of the operation means mounted on the setting board 970 described above are summarized as follows.

(1) With the setting change switch 972 and with the setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, with the key 975 inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (and with the RAM clear switch 954 pressed), the pachinko machine Operate the power switch 1 to turn on the power. Then, after the user operates the setting change switch 972 to select a set value to be set, the user operates the setting confirmation switch 973.

(2) With the setting change switch 972 and without the setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, with the key 975 inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (and with the RAM clear switch 954 pressed), the pachinko machine Operate the power switch 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the setting change switch 972 to select a setting value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position.

(3) Without the setting change switch 972 and with the setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, with the key 975 inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (and with the RAM clear switch 954 pressed), the pachinko machine Operate the power switch 1 to turn on the power. Then, the user operates the RAM clear switch 954 to select a set value to be set, and then operates the setting confirmation switch 973. Instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting key 971 may be turned clockwise to select a setting value to be set.

(4) Without the setting change switch 972 and without the setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, with the key 975 inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (and with the RAM clear switch 954 pressed), the pachinko machine Operate the power switch 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the RAM clear switch 954 to select a setting value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position. Instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting key 971 may be turned clockwise to select a setting value to be set.

  FIGS. 151 and 152 are diagrams illustrating another example of mounting the main control board 1310. FIG. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is shown by a dotted line.

  The mounting example shown in FIGS. 151 and 152 differs from the mounting example shown in FIG. 150 in that a small door 1321 is provided in the main control board box 1320.

  FIG. 151A shows a main control board box 1320 of this mounting example. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that houses the main control board 1310 in a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed, as described above. The main control board box 1320 includes a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode. A hole 976A for operating the 976 is provided.

  The hole 976A is normally covered by the small door 1321. The small door 1321 is provided with a key unit 1322. By inserting and operating the key 975 in the key hole of the key unit 1322, the small door 1321 is opened from the main control board box 1320, and the hole 976A is exposed. The mode switch 976 can be operated.

  As shown in FIG. 152 (A), in the normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and withdrawn, the bar 1323 is at the maximum projecting position from the key unit 1322, the bar 1323 is inserted into the seat 1324, and the bar 1323 and the seat 1324 are inserted. And the small door 1321 is fixed in the closed position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 152 (B), when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and rotated, the bar 1323 retreats from the maximum projecting position, and the engagement between the bar 1323 and the seat 1324 is released. With the hinge 1325 as an axis, the small door 1321 can be opened. When the small door 1321 is open (FIG. 152 (B)), the hole 976A is exposed, and the setting mode switch 976 can be operated.

  FIG. 153 is a diagram illustrating still another example of mounting the main control board 1310. In the mounting example shown in FIG. 153, a key unit 1322 is provided on a back cover 980 that covers the back side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, by inserting and operating the key 975 in the keyhole of the key unit 1322, the back cover 980 is opened from the main frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 (the setting mode switch 976 provided on the setting board 970) is operated. It becomes possible.

  That is, in the normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the back cover 980 is fixed by closing the back side of the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 is housed in the back cover 980. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and rotated, the back cover 980 can be opened from the body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 housed inside the back cover 980 is exposed on the back side, The setting mode switch 976 can be operated.

  When the key unit 1322 is provided on the back cover 980, the main control board box 1320 (main control board 1310) may have a configuration illustrated in FIG. 151C. Specifically, the main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that seals the main control board 1310 and has a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode. A hole 976A for operating is provided. The main control board box 1320 houses the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970. On the main control board 1310, a base display 1317, a display switch 1318, and a RAM clear switch 954 are mounted in addition to a main control MPU and a driver circuit (not shown). Note that the RAM clear switch 954 may not be mounted on the main control board 1310, but may be mounted on another control board (for example, a payout control board 951 or a power supply board). In this case, the hole 954A is not provided in the main control board box 1320.

  The setting board 970 is provided close to the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The connection between the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be a direct connection between the boards by a connector or a connection by an electric wire. On the setting board 970, a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode, and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected set value are mounted. Note that a setting change switch 972 for changing the setting value and a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970.

[12-10. Details of the setting change process]
FIG. 154 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the initialization processing. The initialization processing shown in FIG. 154 is different from the initialization processing described above with reference to FIG. 101 in that the RAM clear processing is performed when the setting key 971 is operated (steps S17 and S30). The same steps as those in the initialization processing described above with reference to FIGS. 21 and 101 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes a main control program to perform an initialization process. First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the protection of the RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes the RAM 1312 writable (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates a built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for activation of the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510 or the like)) has elapsed. A determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated (step S18).

  Note that the RAM clear switch 954 may be detected immediately after the power is turned on (for example, before step S12), the detection result may be stored in a predetermined register, and the stored value may be determined in step S18. By detecting the RAM clear switch 954 immediately after turning on the power, even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated only for a short time after turning on the power, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 can be reliably detected.

  If the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated and its output is on (step S17). If the setting key 971 has not been operated, it is a normal RAM clear operation, and the process proceeds to step S30 to initialize a predetermined area of the internal RAM 1312. On the other hand, when the setting key 971 is operated, that is, when the power is turned on while both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated, the mode shifts to the setting change mode. That is, since the operation of the two switches and the operation of the power switch are required to start the setting change mode, an erroneous operation of starting the setting change mode by mistake can be prevented.

  In the setting change mode, first, the set value is displayed (step S60). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads out the current setting value from the main control RAM 1312 and generates data to be displayed on the setting display 974. Then, a security signal is output (step S61). Specifically, main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality, but it is extremely rare that the pachinko machine 1 is set to the setting change mode during a game, and a fraudulent activity is possible. This is because the hall computer should be notified when the mode is changed to the setting change mode during business hours.

  The security signal may be output for a predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode, or may be output from the start to the end of the setting change mode, or may be output from the start of the setting change mode to a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode. May be output. By outputting the security signal until a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, the period during which an abnormality can be detected is extended, and the security can be further improved.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a setting change operation has been performed based on whether or not the setting change switch 972 has been operated (step S62), changes the setting value according to the operation of the setting change switch 972, and writes it to the main control RAM 1312. (Step S63). For example, when the setting change switch 972 is configured by a push button switch, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the setting value is changed by one step. When the setting key 971 also functions as the setting change switch 972, when the setting key 971 is turned right once, the setting value is changed by one step. Then, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for displaying the changed set value on the setting display 974 (step S64).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting change mode is ended and the set value is determined (step S65). Specifically, when the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting change mode, and proceeds to step S30. Further, the setting change mode may be ended by an operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position. In addition, the setting change mode may be ended upon operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1.

  In the above-described processing, after the setting change mode ends, or when it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process proceeds to step S30, but may proceed to step S20. In this case, after the setting change mode ends, it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20), whether the checksums match (step S22), the power failure flag is not set, and the check is performed. If the sums do not match, a predetermined area of the internal RAM 1312 is initialized. If it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process proceeds to step S30.

  After the end of the setting change mode, in step S30, among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, the set value data, the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128), and the game state (for example, the probability change state, The data of the time reduction state, the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, the storage of the information, and the information on the prize ball are left, and the other data are deleted, and the process proceeds to step S24. The game state data may be deleted without being left. In this case, the storage area deleted by the RAM area deleted after the setting change operation is the same as the storage area deleted by the RAM clear operation.

  On the other hand, if the operation for ending the setting change mode is not detected, the process returns to step S62 and further detects the setting change operation.

  If the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected in step S17, in step S30, the set value data and the base calculation work area (the base calculation area 13128) of the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312. ), The other data is deleted, and the process proceeds to step S24.

  If the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is not detected in step S18, the main control MPU 1311 does not delete the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 and determines whether the power failure flag is set (step S20). .

  As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the main control MPU 1311 erases the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128). Then (step S30), the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the main control MPU 1311 clears the power failure flag and uses the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power-off to check the data calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312. The sum and the checksum stored in step S48 are compared (verified) (step S22).

  As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect. The deleted data (other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct. Proceed to.

  In step S24, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the main control MPU 1311 deletes the data stored in the base calculation work area (step S26).

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of only the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the power failure flag There are a power failure flag abnormality that has not been set (step S20), a RAM abnormality where the checksums of the RAM do not match (step S22), and an abnormality of the base calculation work (step S24). As shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the setting value and the game state in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) are detected. (E.g., probable change state, reduced working hours, reserved storage of special symbols and ordinary symbols, information on prize balls), clears other data, and does not clear base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area). . If the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is detected when the power is turned on, but the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, or if the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (the game work area and the game stack The area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. If the base calculation work is abnormal, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

  In the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, and a base calculation work abnormality, unlike the illustrated one, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, so that the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 May be cleared. When the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a base calculation work error, the data indicating the game state is lost and the normal processing cannot be executed. In the case of a memory configuration, the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area It is good to initialize only. If the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared and the base calculation area 13128 is cleared, as described above. You don't have to clear it.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is stored in the work control area 13126 (set value, game state data) for each data type. Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is deleted, and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not deleted. If the set value is erased by operating the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set value every time the RAM clear operation is performed, and the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall becomes complicated. Therefore, the set value is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch.

  For the processing after step S28, any of FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 is the presence or absence of a process (steps S50, S52) for calculating and storing a check code from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is turned off.

  In the initialization processing described above, the setting confirmation processing is not executed, but is executed in the setting confirmation processing called from the timer interrupt processing described later (FIGS. 155 and 156). May be performed. By executing the setting confirmation process in the initialization process, the setting confirmation can be permitted only at the time of turning on the power, and the confirmation of the setting value by an inadvertent operation during operation of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented.

  In this case, an operation unit (for example, a push button switch) for setting confirmation is provided separately from the setting key 971 (the setting change switch 972 may have the function of the operation unit for setting confirmation), and when the power is turned on. When the setting confirmation operation unit is operated, the current setting value is read from the main control RAM 1312, data for displaying on the setting display 974 is generated, and the setting value is displayed on the setting display 974. Good to do. Also in this case, a security signal may be output in accordance with the display of the set value.

  In some cases, the main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment does not immediately execute the RAM clear processing even when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. Specifically, when the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 954 with the setting key 971 turned on, the main control RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends (step S30). That is, the main control MPU 1311 suspends the RAM clearing process, and executes the RAM clearing process after a predetermined condition is satisfied (end of the setting change mode). During the setting change mode, it can be said that the main control MPU 1311 is controlled to store the execution of the RAM clear processing. On the other hand, when the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without operating the setting key 971, the main control RAM is cleared without starting the setting change mode (step S30).

  The clearing (initialization) of the main control RAM 1312 has been described in detail above. Next, the clearing of the RAM of the payout control unit 952 mounted on the payout control board 951 will be described.

  After the setting change mode, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared in step S30, but the RAM of the payout control unit may be cleared at the same time. Further, the RAM of the payout control unit 952 need not be cleared. Further, whether to clear the RAM of the payout control unit may be switched by an operation. For example, when the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954 with the setting key 971 turned on, the main control RAM 1312 and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 are cleared, and the setting key 971 is turned on. When the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 954, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared, and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is not cleared. As described above, by changing the operation method, it is possible to execute processing in which a part of the main control RAM 1312 is cleared and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is not cleared.

  When the main control RAM 1312 and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 are cleared, the timing of clearing the main control RAM 1312 and the timing of clearing the RAM of the payout control unit 952 depend on whether the setting key 971 is operated. May occur. That is, when the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 954 while the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared after the setting change mode ends (step S30). On the other hand, when detecting the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the payout control unit 952 clears the RAM immediately. Therefore, depending on the condition (operation), the RAM of the payout control unit 952 may be cleared, but the main control RAM 1312 may not be cleared.

  In addition to the case where the RAM clear switch 954 is provided on the main control board 1310, the pachinko machine 1 provided on the payout control board 951 and the power supply board 931 also operates the RAM clear switch 954 while changing the set value. It is preferable that the RAM of the payout control unit 952 be cleared when the power is turned on. That is, the payout control unit 952 does not clear the RAM by the RAM clear command from the main control board 1310, but detects the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on. It is determined whether the operation has been performed and whether the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is cleared. When the RAM clear switch is provided on the payout control board 951, there is an effect that various models can be supported without changing the control program on the frame side.

[12-11. Details of setting confirmation processing]
FIG. 155 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 155 is different from the timer interrupt process described above with reference to FIG. 23 in that a base calculation process (step S801) is provided in place of the update process of the area ratio calculation area in step S81. The object ratio calculation / display process is deleted. Further, a setting confirmation process (step S802) for displaying a set value indicating the game performance of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the operation ratio of the condition device) is added. Note that the same steps as those in the timer interrupt processing described above with reference to FIGS. 23 and 104 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 executes the main control program, first sets 1 to RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word, and switches the register (step S70).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (Step S74), a timer update process (Step S76), a random number update process 1 (Step S78), and a prize ball control process (Step S80).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current game state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as a game value to an area corresponding to the current game state, and stores the base calculation area 13128 ( The base value is calculated (step S801; see FIG. 105 and FIG. 106 for details of the base calculation process). The base calculation process (step S801) may be executed in any order after the award ball control process (step S80), but may be executed in an earlier order to ensure execution at every timer interruption. .

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs a frame command receiving process (step S82), a fraud detection process (step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86), a normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process (step S86). Step S88) is executed.

  After that, a setting confirmation process (step S802) for displaying a set value indicating the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the setting confirmation process, the current setting value is displayed on the setting display 974 by an employee of the hall performing a predetermined operation. Details of the setting confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, an output data setting process (step S90) and a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) are executed.

  Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing ends, the timer interrupt processing ends, and the processing returns to the processing before the interruption.

  FIG. 156 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a pachinko machine setting confirmation process according to the present embodiment. The setting confirmation process is called and executed from step S802 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 155).

  In the setting confirmation processing, first, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a setting confirmation operation is being performed (step S8061). Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated. If the setting key 971 is operated when the power is turned on, the shift to the setting change mode is triggered (step S17 in FIG. 154). If the setting key 971 is operated during operation, a setting confirmation operation is performed, and the current setting can be displayed.

  If the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, since the setting key 971 has been returned to the normal position, data for not displaying the set value is generated and the set value is not displayed (step S8065).

  On the other hand, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected, it is determined whether the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062).

  As the setting display condition, it is determined whether or not the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 based on the output of the frame release switch. Since the setting key 971 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting key 971 cannot be operated unless the outer frame 2 is open. However, if the operation of the setting key 971 is detected while the outer frame 2 is closed, it is estimated that some abnormality (failure or misconduct) has occurred in the pachinko machine 1, and in this case, the setting is performed. It is better not to display. Further, since the setting display 974 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting display 974 cannot be seen unless the outer frame 2 is open, and there is no need to display the setting.

  The set value may be displayed at any time during the operation of the pachinko machine 1. Further, a setting display condition that enables display at a specific time may be provided. For example, the set position may be displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) from when the power is turned on. In this case, it is preferable to operate a timer that measures the time elapsed since the power was turned on (or to initialize the CPU in step S28), and to display the set value until the timer expires.

  In addition, a setting display condition that allows a set value to be displayed in a specific game state may be provided. For example, the setting display condition cannot be displayed during the change display of the special symbol or during the big hit game. That is, a setting display condition is provided to enable the setting value to be displayed during periods other than during the special symbol change and during the big hit. The set value may not be displayed in a game state other than the above. In this case, when the setting key is operated during the special symbol change game or the big hit game, the set value may be displayed at a timing when the special symbol change game or the big hit game ends.

  If it is determined that the setting display condition is satisfied, a security signal is output (step S8063). Specifically, main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality. However, it is rare that the pachinko machine 1 confirms a setting during a game, and is a harbinger of fraud. This is because the hall computer should be notified if a setting confirmation operation is performed during business hours.

  The security signal may be output for a predetermined time from the start of the set value display, may be output from the start to the end of the set value display, or may be output from the start of the set value display to a predetermined period after the end of the set value display. Good. By outputting the security signal until a predetermined period after the end of the display of the set value, the period in which the abnormality can be detected is extended, and the security can be further improved.

  In the illustrated setting confirmation processing, the security signal is transmitted when the setting display condition is satisfied. However, even when the setting confirmation operation (operation of the setting key 971) is detected, the security signal is transmitted even when the setting display condition is not satisfied. Good.

  After that, the set value is displayed (step S8064). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads out the current setting value from the main control RAM 1312 and generates data to be displayed on the setting display 974.

  If the setting display condition is not satisfied, the condition is checked until the setting display condition is satisfied.However, there is a possibility that the loop cannot be escaped for a long time. The confirmation processing may be ended. For example, if it is determined that the set value is not displayed because the special symbol variation display is being performed, and then the special symbol variation display ends within a predetermined time, the end of the special symbol variation display satisfies the setting display condition. And display the set value. If the setting condition is not satisfied, the setting check process may be immediately terminated without repeating the setting condition check.

  At this time, the fact that the set value is not being displayed may be included in the special symbol change display start condition. In this way, a new special symbol variation display is not started while the set value is being displayed, and a new special symbol variation display is started after the set value is hidden.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the set value can be confirmed at a predetermined timing, so that the set value can be confirmed without obstructing other displays. In particular, when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are also used, the setting value is displayed with priority during the setting confirmation, so that the base value is calculated but the base value is not displayed. In a game state in which many prize balls are paid out in a short time, it may be desired to check a change in the base value. Therefore, the set value can be displayed without hindering the real-time display of the base value.

[12-12. Output of security signal for setting change and setting confirmation]
FIG. 157 is a timing chart of the security signal output when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

  As described above, a security signal is output at the time of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation (S61 in FIG. 154, S8063 in FIG. 156).

  In the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 157 (A), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode. The predetermined time (T seconds) during which the security signal is output may be at least as long as the hall computer can recognize the security signal, and may be 1 second or less or several tens of seconds.

  Further, the security signal may be output during a period from the start to the end of the setting change mode instead of the predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode.

  Further, in the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 157 (B), a security signal may be output for a predetermined time (T seconds) at the timing of the RAM clear processing executed in association with the setting change mode.

  At the time of setting confirmation, as shown in FIG. 157 (C), a security signal is output from the external terminal plate 784 for a predetermined time from the start of setting confirmation. The predetermined time (T seconds) during which the security signal is output may be at least as long as the hall computer can recognize the security signal, and may be 1 second or less or several tens of seconds.

  Further, the security signal may be output during a period from the start to the end of the setting check (a period during which the set value is displayed) instead of the predetermined time from the start of the setting check.

  When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error, as shown in FIG. 157 (D), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time (T seconds) from the detection of the error. When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during setting confirmation, a security signal is output for a predetermined time after the error is detected, as shown in FIG. 157 (E). That is, the security signal resulting from the setting confirmation and the security signal resulting from the error detection are continuously output for a predetermined time (T seconds) (the predetermined time from the error detection). Note that even if an error is detected during the setting confirmation, the output time of the security signal does not need to be extended. That is, even if an error is detected during the output of the security signal, the security signal resulting from the error detection is not output, but is absorbed by the security signal being output.

  In the setting change mode, since the pachinko machine 1 does not detect an error, the security signal resulting from the setting confirmation does not overlap with the security signal resulting from the error detection. That is, in the setting change mode, the output time of the security signal is not extended even if an error occurs, but the output time of the security signal is extended if an error occurs at the time of setting confirmation.

[12-13. Another example of setting confirmation processing]
Hereinafter, another example of the setting confirmation process will be described. In the above description, an example in which the setting confirmation processing is performed in the timer interrupt processing in the peripheral control unit regular processing has been mainly described. However, in the following, the setting confirmation processing is performed in the initialization processing when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. An example will be described.

  Specifically, for example, if the setting key is on when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the processing shifts to the setting confirmation processing. Hereinafter, the details of the processing will be described. The timer interrupt processing executed by the peripheral control MPU in this chapter is the timer interrupt processing in FIG. 23 (that is, the timer interrupt processing not including the setting confirmation processing in step S802).

  FIG. 158 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the initialization processing. The differences from FIG. 154 will be described. When determining in step S18 that the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated (step S18: No), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 has been operated and its output is on (step S18). S29).

  When determining that the output of the setting key 971 is ON (step S29: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 shifts to the setting confirmation process in step S807, and then shifts to step S20. The setting confirmation processing in step S807 will be described later. When determining that the output of the setting key 971 is off (step S29: No), the main control MPU 1311 proceeds to step S20.

  FIG. 159 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the setting confirmation process (the setting confirmation process in step S807). 156 will be described. The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting display condition is satisfied without performing the processing of Step S8061 (Step S8062). When determining that the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062: YES), the main control MPU 1311 outputs a security signal (step S8063) and displays the setting value (step S8064). When determining that the setting display condition is not satisfied (step S8062: NO), the main control MPU 1311 executes the processing of step S8062 again.

  Following the processing in step S8064, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 has been operated and its output is off (step S8071). If the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is on (step S8071: No), the main control MPU 1311 executes the determination of step S8071 again after a predetermined time elapses, for example. When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is off (step S8071: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 hides the setting value (step S8075), and ends the setting confirmation processing. That is, when the setting key 971 is turned on and the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear button, the mode shifts to the setting confirmation state.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off while the special symbol is being changed, the number of reserved storages managed by the main control board 1310 and the remaining variation time in the special symbol are stored as they are. Thereafter, when the setting confirmation processing is performed at the next power-on (when the power is turned on with the setting key 971 being in the on state), after the setting confirmation processing is completed (the setting without turning off the power is performed). After the key 971 is returned to the initial position), the special symbol change restarts. At this time, for example, the effect (the effect using the display device, the effect using the lamp, the sound effect using the loudspeaker, the effect using the movable body, and the like) that has been executed together with the special symbol change is the special symbol. It will not be performed after the resumption of fluctuations.

  Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol change and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, when the special symbol change is resumed after the setting confirmation process is completed, the special symbol change is restarted. The effect that has been executed together with may be restarted. For example, the suspended production using the display device, the lamp, and the speaker is restarted. Further, for the effect using the movable body, for example, after returning to the initial position at the time of the restart of the special symbol change or when power is turned on, it is determined that the movable body is operated in the effect pattern of the effect. In this case, the movable body is operated according to the effect pattern.

  In other words, if the movable body shifts to the setting confirmation state when it is not at the initial position, it returns to the initial position once when the power is turned on or when the setting confirmation processing is completed, and then, based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation. If the effect that moves (moves) the movable body is included in the determined effects, the movable body may be operated (moved). If the movable body moves (moves) to the setting confirmation state, the operation pattern of the movement (movement) may not be executed, or the movable body may be returned to the initial position once. The movable body may be operated as long as it is a pattern that can be operated from within.

  Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol change and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, when the special symbol change is resumed after the setting confirmation process is completed, the special symbol change is restarted. Among the effects that were being performed, the effect using the display device, the effect using the lamp, and the sound effect using the speaker were resumed, and the movable body was returned to the initial position after the restart of the special symbol change or when the power was turned on. There is no need to perform the effect using the movable body.

  Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol change and the setting confirmation processing is performed at the next power-on, when the special symbol fluctuation is resumed after the setting confirmation processing, the effect display device 1600 is displayed. May be restarted (resume the effect originally scheduled to be performed), or until the symbol is determined in the change of the decorative symbol (or until the swing fluctuation immediately before the symbol is determined). The decoration pattern may be changed at high speed with transparency, or the decoration pattern may be hidden until the symbol is determined (or until the swing fluctuation immediately before the symbol is determined). In addition, when the symbol is determined, for example, the combination of the decorative symbols scheduled before the power is turned off is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Also, in this case, at the end of the special symbol change after resumption, a combination of a predetermined decorative symbol, a combination of decorative symbols displayed at the time of initial power-on, or a special decorative symbol not displayed at the time of normal special symbol change The combination (for example, “xxx” or the like) may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the change of the special symbol, the setting confirmation processing is performed at the next power-on, and when the setting confirmation processing is completed and the normal state is restored, the setting key 971 is turned off. The same initial operation (for example, a predetermined operation of the movable body, an operation of confirming a predetermined light emission of the LED, and the like) similar to that at the time of turning on the power (that is, when the power is normally turned on) may be performed. (The above-described effects and the like may be restarted after performing this initial operation.)

  Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned off while the pre-reading effect is being performed during the special symbol change and the setting confirmation processing is performed at the next power-on, for example, the special When the symbol variation is restarted, the prefetching effect and the prefetching effect for the special symbol variation held immediately before turning off the power are not executed (specifically, for example, performed before the power is turned off). The special zone that was displayed during the change of the special symbol that was being displayed (for example, a special stage that shows the player that the jackpot expectation is high across multiple fluctuations, from rival horse production to horse racing production described later) Developing zone (horse racing production is a special zone in which the degree of expectation of itself is set higher (for example, the expectation is relatively higher than dialogue production described later)). Clearing or display effect in zones such, when aspects of the hold display was blue rather than for example conventional white, or return to normal white). However, a prefetch effect may be executed for a special symbol change corresponding to a winning after the setting confirmation processing.

  Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned off while the pre-reading effect is being performed during the special symbol change and the setting confirmation processing is performed at the next power-on, for example, the special When the symbol change is resumed, the prefetching effect during the special symbol change is stopped (specifically, for example, the special zone displayed during the change of the special symbol performed before the power is turned off). The display in the standby state, the display effect in the special zone is deleted, or when the mode of the hold display is blue instead of normal white, the display is returned to normal white.) The pre-reading effect may be resumed from the special symbol change (the erased display may be returned to its original state, or if the effect pattern is such that the pre-reading effect is promoted at the start of the change, the pre-reading effect may be restored in the display mode after the promotion. Good . In this case, the look-ahead effect performed from the next special symbol change is restarted, for example, assuming that the prefetch effect during the special symbol change has not been stopped. That is, before turning off the power of the pachinko machine 1, the look-ahead effect that is to be executed after the next special symbol change is executed. Also, a new look-ahead effect pattern may be set, and the effect of the new look-ahead pattern may be executed from the next special symbol change.

[12-14. Another example of setting suggestion effect]
Hereinafter, an example of a process in which the execution of the setting suggestion effect is restricted will be described. In the following description, it is assumed that the jackpot probabilities of the settings 1 to 6 in the normal state are 1/240, 1/230, 1/220, 1/210, 1/200, and 1/190, respectively. It is assumed that the jackpot probabilities of the settings 1 to 6 at the time are 1/48, 1/46, 1/44, 1/42, 1/40, and 1/38, respectively. In addition, it is assumed that the probability of change at the time of winning the jackpot is 50%.

[12-14-1. Variation pattern table]
FIG. 160 is another example of the variation pattern table. The variation pattern table is stored, for example, in the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310. In the description of FIG. 142 and the like, an example is described in which a fluctuation pattern table exists for each winning type of the special lottery result. However, in the example of FIG. Is defined. In the example of FIG. 160, a common variation pattern table is used for all settings.

  The variation pattern table of FIG. 160 shows the correspondence between the winning type of the special lottery result, the identifier of the variation pattern, the outline of the effect of the variation pattern, and the selection rate. As described above, in the example of FIG. 160, information on the variation pattern of each special lottery result is stored in one variation pattern table. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 selects a variation pattern corresponding to the winning type corresponding to the winning according to the selection rate indicated by the variation pattern table. As in the example of FIG. 144, the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern may be defined in the fluctuation pattern table.

  The movie reach listed in the summary column is a reach production where the ratio selected when the result of the special lottery is a big hit is high, and the ratio selected when the result of the special lottery is out of reach is extremely low It is. In other words, the big hit expectation of the fluctuation in which the movie reach is executed is high. When a movie reach occurs, a predetermined movie is displayed on effect display device 1600.

  In addition, the “+1 symbol” in the case where the hit type is “losing” described in the summary column is a decorative symbol that fluctuates to the end after the decorative symbol stops in the reach state, Indicates that the vehicle stops after passing one decorative pattern. Specifically, for example, after reaching the reach state with the decorative symbol “7”, the decorative symbol that fluctuated until the end stops at “8”. The “+1 symbol” when the hit type is “big hit” means that after the decorative symbol has stopped in the reach state, the decorative symbol fluctuating to the end has temporarily stopped after passing one decorative symbol in the reach state. After that, the decorative symbol is stopped as the same symbol as the reach decorative symbol. Specifically, for example, after reaching the reach state with the decorative symbol “7”, the decorative symbol that fluctuated until the end appears to have stopped temporarily at “8”, and then the decorative symbol stopped at “7” And inform the big hit.

  In the outline column in the example of FIG. 161, “+1 symbol” is selected only when the hit type is “big hit (non-probable change)” in the big hit, but is “big hit (probable change)” May be selected, or may be selected in the case of “big hit (non-probable)” and “big hit (probable)”. Further, “+1 symbol” may be selected only when the winning type is “losing”.

  “+ Pseudo 1” and “+ Pseudo 2” described in the summary column indicate that two consecutive pseudo-continuous effects and three consecutive pseudo-continuous effects are executed, respectively. The pseudo continuous effect is an effect of performing the operation of changing the decorative symbol and terminating the change of the decorative symbol a plurality of times during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. . “Ending the change of the decorative pattern” means, for example, a mode in which a part or all of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, a mode in which the player recognizes that the change in the decorative pattern has ended once, and a mode in which the decorative pattern is changed. There is a mode in which the pseudo-sequence symbol (a symbol in which the pseudo-sequence is determined if this symbol stops) is partially stopped. The pseudo continuous production in which the operation is performed N times (N is a natural number of 1 or more) is referred to as N consecutive pseudo continuous productions, and the variation of the Mth decorative pattern (M is 1 or more N The following natural number) is referred to as an M-th series pseudo continuous effect. In addition, during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display, the operation is actually executed again while suggesting to the player that the operation may be executed again. An effect that is not performed is referred to as a “pseudo-gase effect”. Hereinafter, the pseudo continuous production is also simply referred to as “pseudo continuous production”.

  The pseudo continuous effect is generated or continued, that is, the operation of changing the decorative symbol and terminating the change of the decorative symbol is performed again during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. When it is determined that the pattern is to be performed, the peripheral control MPU may stop the pseudo continuous symbol on at least one of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol. In the following example, the peripheral control MPU stops characters such as "continue!" Note that, for example, a combination of specific decorative symbols (for example, all of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are odd or even and no reach occurs) may be used as the pseudo continuous symbol. Note that the pseudo gassed effect can be executed, for example, when the outline of the effect is “normal fluctuation” or the like. Also, for example, even if the variation pattern is “+ pseudo 1”, a pseudo-gase effect indicating the occurrence of a third pseudo-repeated run in “+ pseudo 2” may be executed.

[12-14-2. Final hold color table]
FIG. 161 is an example of the final reserved color table. The final reserved color table is stored, for example, in the peripheral main control ROM. The final reserved color table is, for example, a display color (hereinafter referred to as a final reserved color) of a reserved display at the end of the variation for each variation pattern (a winning lot type of the special lottery result, a variation pattern identifier, and an outline of the effect of the variation pattern). ) Is maintained.

  It is to be noted that effect display device 1600 includes a suspended display area indicating the number of suspended first special random numbers and second special random numbers. In the start-up winning process in step S116 in FIG. 142, a reserved number designation command for designating the reserved number of the first special random number and the second special random number is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU displays in the suspension display area a display indicating the suspension number indicated by the suspension number designation command.

  Specifically, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (start condition is satisfied), the number of holds (the number of stored memories) specified from the number-of-holds designation command is increased. , One suspension display is added and displayed in the suspension display area. On the other hand, when the variable display (variable display of the special symbol) based on the hold display is started (the start condition is satisfied), the number of holds (the number of stored memories) specified from the hold number designation command decreases. Then, the hold display in the hold display area is deleted.

  In addition, a plurality of display modes may exist in the hold display. For example, as the plurality of display modes, there is a display mode of a hold display using a plurality of colors (white, blue, green, red, and rainbow). Hereinafter, it is assumed that the big hit expectation of the special lottery result corresponding to the hold display increases in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow of the hold display. In particular, in the example of FIG. 161, the rainbow hold display is selected only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

  That is, the peripheral control MPU selects the final reserved color corresponding to the selected variation pattern according to the selection rate indicated by the final reserved color table. Further, the peripheral control MPU responds to the hold display by changing the display mode of the hold display during a display period from when the hold display is displayed in the hold display area to when the hold display is deleted. It is possible to execute a hold announcement effect indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit with respect to the variation display of the decorative symbol to be displayed (the variation display of the special symbol).

  Further, in the present embodiment, during the display period of the hold display, a hold change effect indicating that the display mode of the hold display may change can be executed. Note that the hold change effect and the hold announcement effect during the display period of the hold display and before the start of the change corresponding to the hold are also referred to as a hold look-ahead effect.

  For example, the peripheral control ROM holds a hold notice table (not shown) that defines a change timing of the display mode of the hold display. Specifically, for example, the hold notice table defines the change timing of the display mode of the hold display and the display mode (display color) of the hold display at the time of winning and at each change timing for each final hold color. The start, during, and end of a special symbol change after the winning and before the special symbol corresponding to the winning is an example of the change timing.

  It is desirable that the display mode of the hold display at each change timing is a hold color having a jackpot expectation that is equal to or less than the jackpot expectation of the final hold color. Further, it is desirable that the big hit expectation indicated by the hold display is not demoted at each change timing (for example, it is desirable that the blue hold display does not change to the white hold display). It is to be noted that a different suspension notice table may exist for each of the number of storages held at the time of winning.

  Note that, for example, at the start of the special symbol change held before the hold display is an example of the change timing of the display mode of the hold display described above.For example, even during the special symbol change corresponding to the hold display A change timing of the display mode of the hold display may be provided.

  The pre-reading effect including the reserved pre-reading effect is executed based on the pre-determination command transmitted from the main control MPU 1311 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the pre-determination process performed in the start-up winning process at step S116 in FIG. You.

  Hereinafter, the pre-determination process in the start-port winning process for the first special symbol will be described. Note that the same applies to the pre-determination process in the starting opening winning process for the second special symbol, and therefore, only the first special symbol will be described here. In the pre-determination process, the main control MPU 1311 compares a pre-determination table (not shown) with a special random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variable random number to determine whether or not a big hit is to be made. The type of the big hit, and if it does not become a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or the type of the game effect to be executed is specified.

  Then, the specified pre-determination information (whether or not a big hit is to be made, if a big hit is made, if a big hit is not made, a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, Game production mode), the type of the obtained special random number (first special random number), and the number of storages to be stored (the value of the number of reservations counter) stored in correspondence with the obtained special random number. Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-judgment processing for the first special symbol, the first special symbol pre-judgment command is set according to the specified pre-judgment information, the fact that the first special random number has been acquired, and the first hold storage number. .

  By transmitting a pre-judgment command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a special symbol based on the generated starting prize is added to the number of reserved storages stored in correspondence with the starting opening in which the starting prize is generated. Whether the display result of the variable display is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, and if it is not a big hit, a reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp the preliminary determination information such as the type of the game effect before starting the variable display according to the start winning.

  FIG. 162 is an appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 1 when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. FIG. FIG. 163 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 3 in the same case. FIG. 164 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 5 in the same case. According to FIGS. 162 to 164, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance rate of the display mode of the hold display of the high-rank expectation degree. In addition, the bigger the hit expectation of each color is, the higher the setting is. These appearance rates and expectations are calculated based on the jackpot probabilities of the respective settings described above. For the final reserved color table, the final reserved color table of FIG. 161 is used in all settings. It is assumed that there is.

  The peripheral control ROM may hold a different final reserved color table for each setting. In this case, for example, in the same hold display mode, the selection rate of the last hold color table of the last hold color is set such that the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot expectation degree. As a result, for example, when a big hit is won in a special symbol change corresponding to a red hold display, the degree of expectation for a higher setting is further increased, so that the player can obtain a sense of excitement.

  Also, for example, in the display mode of the hold display other than white which is most frequently selected, for the same hold display display mode, the final hold color table of the final hold color table is set such that the lower the setting is, the higher the jackpot expectation is. The selection rate may be set (specifically, for example, the jackpot expectation degree in the case where the hold display mode is red is 50% in the low setting 1 and 30 in the high setting 6). %). By this, for example, even if the special symbol change corresponding to the red hold display does not win the big hit, the degree of expectation for the high setting is increased, so that the discouragement of the player is suppressed and the game is continued. Can be promoted.

  Also, for example, in the most frequently selected display modes other than white, the last reserved color in the final reserved color table is set so that the jackpot expectation degree is substantially common in all the settings. May be set. Thereby, for example, it becomes difficult to estimate the setting from the combination of the final reserved color and the special lottery result, and the player can concentrate on only the expectation for the special lottery result from the display mode of the reserved display. In addition, for example, when a big hit is not won in the special symbol change corresponding to the red display mode, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the possibility of low setting increases.

[12-14-3. Notice production table]
FIG. 165 is an example of a notice effect table. The notice effect table is stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM. The notice effect table holds, for example, the selectivity of the notice effect for each variation pattern (specified by the winning type of the special lottery result, the identifier of the change pattern, and the outline of the effect of the change pattern).

  In the example of FIG. 165, the notice effects include a line effect, a weather change effect, and a rival horse effect. The line effect is, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the fluctuation, and the line is spoken. The weather change effect is, for example, an effect in which the weather in the background of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes in the fluctuation. The rival horse effect is an effect in which the rival horse of the horse raised by the hero character appears on the effect display device 1600 in the fluctuation.

  It is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect using a notice effect, and the notice effect table stores a selection rate of each notice effect for each execution presence / absence of the setting effect effect. “No set” in the example of FIG. 165 indicates that the setting suggestion effect is not executed, and “set existing” indicates that the setting suggestion effect is executed. The peripheral control MPU determines an announcement effect to be executed based on the variation pattern and the selectivity of the announcement effect table.

  In each of the notice effects in each variation pattern of the notice effect table, it is desirable that the selectivity without the setting suggestion effect is sufficiently higher than the selectivity with the setting suggestion effect. If the selection rate with the setting suggestion effect is high, the setting suggestion effect frequently occurs. In this state, if the setting suggestion effect that suggests the high setting has a low occurrence frequency, the player is likely to stop the game in a short time. That is, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 at a low setting is significantly reduced, which may impose an excessive burden on the hall. Conversely, for example, when the frequency of setting suggestion effects indicating high setting is high, the number of players who estimate that the setting of the other pachinko machine 1 in the hall is low increases, and the operation of the other pachinko machine 1 increases. There is a risk that the rate will decrease and the hall will be overburdened.

  Note that the selectivity of the variation pattern in the variation pattern table is determined so that the larger the number of pseudo runs, the greater the expectation of big hits. For example, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is not substantially changed by the number of pseudo runs. In addition, the selection rate of whether or not to perform the setting suggestion effect in the notice effect table is determined. In other words, for example, for a variation pattern whose outline is “SP reach”, “SP reach + pseudo 1”, and “SP reach + pseudo 2”, the pseudo-setting suggestion effect is performed so that the appearance rates of the setting suggestion effects are substantially the same. Has been determined. As a result, for a variation pattern with a small number of simulated repeats, although the jackpot expectation degree is low, the occurrence rate of the setting suggestion effect is not low compared to a variation pattern with a large number of simulated repeats. I can also be interested in fluctuations with small fluctuation patterns.

  Also, as the number of pseudo-runs increases, the selectivity of execution of the setting suggestion effect in the preview effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect increases, or as the number of pseudo-runs decreases, The selection rate of the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the preview effect effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect increases. In addition, when the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is increased as the number of pseudo repetitions decreases, the above-described problem may occur. Therefore, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is increased as the number of pseudo repetitions decreases. It is more preferable to set them as substantially the same numerical values (specifically, for example, 15/256 is set for the speech effect when the variation pattern 5 is selected when the variation pattern 5 is selected, and is set to 15/256 for the speech effect when the variation pattern 6 is selected. 16/256).

  In addition, a fluctuation pattern with a high jackpot expectation (or an effect in which the expected degree of the rendered effect is relatively high although the variation pattern is not a high jackpot expectation (for example, an effect in which the jackpot expectation is equal to or more than a predetermined value) ), The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the announcement effect table may be determined such that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect increases. Specifically, for example, in order of “normal fluctuation”, fluctuation including “normal reach”, fluctuation including “SP reach”, and fluctuation including “movie reach”, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is increased, The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the notice effect table may be determined.

  In the example of FIG. 165, a setting suggestion effect may occur in all the notice effects (line effect, weather change effect, and rival horse effect). For example, a notice effect in which no setting suggestion effect occurs does not occur. May be present.

  Also, if the outline of the fluctuation pattern is the same, the special lottery result is a big hit without probability change, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is higher than the case where the special lottery result is a big hit with probability change, The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the notice effect table may be determined. As a result, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect increases when the jackpot is won without a probability change, and the discourage of the player for the fact that the probability change is not given can be reduced. Note that, in the above example, three types of notice effects of the line effect, the weather change effect, and the rival horse effect have been described, but needless to say, the present invention is not limited to the three types.

[12-14-4. Dialogue production]
Hereinafter, the details of the speech effect among the notice effects will be described. The peripheral control MPU causes the character A to appear on the effect display device 1600, for example, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, two seconds) from the start of the change, when the dialog effect having no setting suggestion effect is selected as the notice effect, "What day is it today?" Is displayed as a line of character A. Then, for example, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the display of the character A, the peripheral control MPU causes the character display B to appear on the effect display device 1600, and the character "B ..." indicate. In addition, for example, the words of the character A and the character B may indicate the degree of expectation of the change.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU selects the speech of the character B (the speech suggesting the setting) from the speech production table described later, when the speech production with the setting suggestion production is selected as the announcement production. The peripheral control MPU displays the character on the effect display device 1600, for example, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation (for example, after two seconds, that is, the same timing as the character A appears when there is no setting suggestion effect described above). A is displayed, and "What day is it today?" Is displayed as a line of character A. The peripheral control MPU causes the character display B to appear on the effect display device 1600 after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) after the display of the character A, and displays the character of the selected character B. In addition, the dialogue of the character A may be a dialogue that directly expresses a setting value such as “Do you know the setting of this platform today?”

  FIG. 166 is an example of the speech effect table. The speech effect table is stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM. The speech effect table holds the effect type of the speech effect and the selectivity of the content of the speech of the character B for each setting. The effect type includes “patterns that are partway together” and “patterns that suddenly branch”, and for each of the two patterns, there is a “kane-type” dialogue and a “definite-type” dialogue. .

  Each line belonging to the "pattern together" includes the same line up to the middle, and then branches to a different line. In the example of FIG. 166, all the lines belonging to the “pattern together” start with “come ...” and then branch to a different line. On the other hand, a line belonging to the “pattern that suddenly branches” branches to a different line from the beginning. Note that it is desirable that the selectivity of the lines belonging to the “patterns in the middle” be higher than the selectivity of the lines belonging to the “pattern that suddenly branches”. This is to pull expectations.

  Dialogues belonging to “Kane-kei” are those that suggest the current setting, but do not announce the setting in a definitive manner. For example, "But I feel like it was an even day ..." is a line of "Kane-kei" suggesting an even number setting. "But it feels like an even day ..." is a line of "Kamone", so the selection rate is determined so that it may appear even with an odd number setting. However, the selectivity of the dialog in the odd setting is sufficiently lower than the selectivity of the dialog in the even setting. Similarly, it is assumed that the selectivity of the line in the setting suggested by the line is sufficiently higher than the selectivity of the line in the other settings.

  On the other hand, a line belonging to the “determined system” is a line for announcing the setting definitely. For example, "Oh! Remembered! It's an even day!" Is a line of "determined system" that announces the even number setting definitely. Therefore, the selectivity of the dialog in the odd setting is 0, and the selectivity exceeds 0 only in the even setting.

  In addition, it is desirable that the selectivity of the lines belonging to the “Kamakane” is higher than the selectivity of the lines belonging to the “definite system”. Assuming that the selectivity of dialogue belonging to “determined” is high, there is a possibility that the high setting will be definitely notified to the player in a short time after the game is started. This is because there is a certain number of players who presume that the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is not good, and there is a possibility that the operation of other gaming machines may be reduced.

  In a speech effect when performing a specific reach effect such as SP reach or a movie reach, or in a speech effect when performing a pseudo-ream, a line for suggesting the setting of the character B is indicated in red characters (for a jackpot expectation effect or the like). Ordinary dialogue may be displayed in white characters. This makes it easy for the player to distinguish the words of the expected suggestive effect from the words of the setting suggestive effect, so that the two types of effects (setting suggestive effect and expected suggestive effect) coexist without causing the player to feel unnatural. Can be done. In addition, the expectation suggestion effect is an effect indicating that the jackpot expectation degree in the special symbol change is a predetermined value, and specifically, a notice effect indicating the expectation for the jackpot within one change, Includes look-ahead effects that suggest expectations for jackpots across the fluctuations in

  The surrounding control MPU may determine the setting suggestion effect using a lottery table similar to the dialogue effect table, though not shown, for the weather change effect and the rival horse effect. For example, in a setting suggestion effect in a weather change effect, a thundercloud is displayed on the effect display device 1600, a number such as “246?” Is displayed by lightning (an effect of “Kamakane” indicating an even number setting), or a rival. In the setting suggestion effect in the horse effect, a combined horse effect of the horse raised by the hero character and the rival horse is displayed on the effect display device 1600. For example, a number such as "135?" Direction of "Kane-kei" suggesting an odd number setting).

  In the above example, "What day is it today?" Is displayed as the character of the character A in the line production, but in addition to this line, the character A is "What was the last week's test?" Character B is "66 points! (Setting" 6 "is fixed" ") or" 55 points ... " A plurality of variations may be provided for an effect (for example, a line effect). In this case, the B effect (for example, the effect of listening to the test score) may be more credible to the setting suggestion than the A effect (for example, the effect of listening to the date). More specifically, for example, the expectation of setting 6 when "I felt like it was a day with 6 ..." in the production A was 30%, but in the production B it was "30 days". It is better to set the expectation, which is the setting 6 when the feeling of 66 points is "... (Kaneka))" to be 50%.

[12-14-5. Another example of a notice production table]
FIG. 167 is another example of the notice effect table. In the example of FIG. 167, the preview effect table 173 holds the selectivity of the preview effect for each variation pattern. Unlike the example of FIG. 165, the notice effect table of FIG. 167 does not hold information on whether or not a setting suggestion effect is executed. That is, the peripheral control MPU selects only the type of the notice effect in accordance with the selection rate corresponding to the variation pattern in the notice effect table of FIG.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU determines whether to execute the setting suggestion effect based on the variation pattern and the type of the selected advance effect. FIG. 168 (A) is an example of a setting suggestion effect table showing the distribution of the setting suggestion effect execution when the outline of the change pattern is “normal change” and “line effect” is selected as the notice effect. is there. FIG. 168 (B) is an example of a setting suggestion effect table showing the distribution of the setting suggestion effect execution when the outline of the variation pattern is “normal reach + 1 symbol” and “line effect” is selected as the notice effect It is. A setting suggestion effect table for all combinations of the fluctuation pattern and the notice effect as shown in FIG. 168 is stored in the peripheral control ROM in advance.

  In the above example, the peripheral control MPU determines whether to execute the setting suggestion effect after determining the content of the announcement effect, but determines the content of the announcement effect after determining whether to execute the setting suggestion effect. May be. By using such a method, although the data amount is larger than that of the table as shown in FIG. 165, the appearance rate and reliability of the effect can be set in detail. Further, the table shown in FIG. 165 and the processing shown in this alternative example may be combined.

[12-14-6. Specific example of setting suggestion effect]
FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an outline of a setting suggestion effect. 169 (A), (B), and (C) proceed in the order of (C), the setting suggestion in the case where “4, 5 or 6 is the day to be added!” Is selected as the line of character B in the line effect. This is an outline of the production.

  In FIG. 169 (A), a special symbol change starts. In FIG. 169 (B), after the start of the special symbol change, the effect display device 1600 displays the character B's dialogue “Day with 4 or 5 or 6!”. In FIG. 169 (C), the dialog is displayed on the effect display device 1600 until the end of the special symbol change.

  The effect that proceeds in the order of FIGS. 169 (A), (D), and (E) is an outline of a setting suggestive effect in the case where “day 6 is added!” Is selected as the character of character B in the line effect. is there. 169 (A), (D), and (E), in the effect that proceeds in the order, the setting suggestion effect starts from the start of the special symbol change, and the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect changes during the special symbol change. has been edited. Specifically, in FIG. 169 (D), after the start of the special symbol change, the effect display device 1600 displays the character B's dialogue “Day with 4 or 5 or 6!”. In FIG. 169 (E), at the end of the special symbol change, the dialogue of the character B, “The day with 6!” Is displayed. In other words, the setting suggested by the line of the character B is promoted.

  Specifically, for example, for each of the dialogues in the dialogue production table (the dialogues to be finally displayed), one or more scenarios indicating the timing of the dialogue change and the dialogue at each timing, and the selectivity of each scenario are set. It may be defined for each. The peripheral control MPU displays the dialog at the timing of the dialog change at the timing according to the selected scenario.

  In this case, it is desirable that the dialogue effect table does not hold a scenario in which the suggested setting may be demoted. Specifically, for example, the dialogue production table may not hold a scenario in which a dialogue saying “It is an even number of days!” Is displayed after a dialogue saying “It is a day with 4 or 5 or 6!” desirable.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 169, only the setting suggestion effect is performed in the special symbol change, but another effect (for example, an effect indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit, etc.) may be executed in parallel. Although the example in which the character of the character B is promoted at the end of the special symbol change has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the character B may be promoted before the end of the special symbol change. Note that the character A appears before the character B's dialogue, and the character A performs an effect of speaking to the character B, but is omitted in the drawing.

  FIG. 170 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an outline of a setting suggestion effect as a prefetch effect. In FIG. 170 (A), the game ball B wins in the first starting port 2002 during the special symbol change without the special symbol change being held. Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (B), immediately after the winning of the game ball B in the first starting port 2002, the character display of the character B, "The day when 4 or 5 or 6 is attached!" Is displayed on the effect display device 1600. You. In this case, since the remaining time of the special symbol that has already changed is undefined, the character B may be displayed immediately without displaying the character A, or the character B may be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the winning. Alternatively, the character A may be displayed before the character B is displayed. In FIG. 170B, the number of suspensions indicated by the display in the suspension display area is increased by one.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (C), all the decorative symbols stop, and the special symbol change ends. In addition, the character display of character B, “Day with 4 or 5 or 6!” Is still displayed on effect display device 1600. Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (D), a special symbol change corresponding to the winning starts. Also, at the same time as the start of the special symbol change, the line of the character B displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes to “It is a day with 5 or 6!”. That is, the setting indicated by the dialogue of the character B is promoted.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (E), all the decorative symbols stop, and the special symbol change corresponding to the prize ends. At the end of the special symbol change corresponding to the prize, the line of the character B displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes to “the day with 6!”. That is, the setting indicated by the dialogue of the character B is promoted.

  For example, the peripheral control ROM holds a speech look-ahead effect table (not shown) that defines the speech of the character B and the timing at which the speech changes. Specifically, for example, the speech look-ahead presentation table defines the change timing of the speech of character B, and the speech of character B at the time of winning and at each change timing. The start, during, and end of a special symbol change after the winning and before the special symbol corresponding to the winning is an example of the change timing. It is desirable that the setting suggested by the dialogue is not demoted at each change timing. It should be noted that a different line look-ahead effect table may be present for each of the number of reserved memories at the time of winning. When the peripheral control MPU determines to execute the look-ahead effect based on the advance determination command, the peripheral control MPU executes the speech look-ahead effect at a predetermined ratio, for example, by referring to the speech look-ahead effect table. In addition, in the case of promotion, in FIG. 170, the promotion is performed step by step (“day with 4 or 5 or 6!”, “Day with 5 or 6!”, “Day with 6” !) In the order of "). Specifically, for example, in FIG. 170, the dialogue of (E) may be displayed without displaying the dialogue of (D).

  The setting suggestion effect may be executed under a specific situation other than the above. For example, a setting suggestion effect may be executed when the condition of the pending ream is satisfied. The term “suspended” means that the next big hit is realized by the special random number held until the end of the big hit game. In this case, for example, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the holding is performed and before the big hit game ends. Further, for example, when a specific variation pattern is repeated a predetermined number of times, a setting suggestion effect may be executed in the special symbol variation of the predetermined number of times.

[12-15. Restrictions on setting suggestions]
Hereinafter, the limitation of the setting suggestion effect under specific conditions will be described.

[12-15-1. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects after special conditions]
First, the limitation of the setting suggestion effect after the special state will be described. Hereinafter, both during the setting confirmation mode and during the occurrence of the error are examples of the special state. Note that the setting confirmation mode is a mode for displaying setting values, which is started when it is determined that the setting display condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation processing (step S8062: Yes).

  FIG. 171 (A) is an example of an effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode. FIG. 171 (B) is an example of the effect production restriction table when an error occurs. The effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode and the effect restriction table in the case of an error are stored in, for example, the peripheral control ROM.

[12-15-1-1. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects after setting check mode]
First, the effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode will be described. When the setting confirmation mode is started while the change determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as setting suggestion change) in the setting confirmation mode is performed or suspended, the effect restriction table at the time of setting check mode is used. A restriction flag indicating whether to restrict setting suggestion effects is stored.

  The effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode is set in the setting confirmation mode before the start of the setting suggestion effect (that is, when the effect related to the setting suggestion is not executed (displayed) even though it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be performed). 1701 that stores the restriction flag when the setting is started, and after the setting suggestion effect is started in the setting suggestion change (that is, when the effect related to the setting suggestion is determined to be performed and the effect related to the setting suggestion is executed (displayed)). A record 1702 for storing a restriction flag when the setting confirmation mode is started.

  When the setting confirmation processing shown in FIG. 159 is performed, the game is stopped at the start of the setting confirmation mode, and when the setting confirmation processing shown in FIG. 156 is performed, the game proceeds even during the setting confirmation mode. . Therefore, the setting confirmation mode effect restriction table stores a column 1703 storing a restriction flag when the game is stopped at the start of the setting confirmation mode, and a restriction flag when the game proceeds even during the setting confirmation mode. A column 1704.

  Further, when the game proceeds during the setting confirmation mode, a new setting suggestion change may be suspended by a game ball winning at the starting port during the setting confirmation mode. Accordingly, column 1704 includes a column 1705 that stores a restriction flag for a new setting suggestion change corresponding to a winning at the starting port during the setting confirmation mode. In addition, each restriction flag in the effect restriction table at the time of the setting confirmation mode is, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured or in a hall or the like, the operation medium provided to the pachinko machine 1 (even if the operation medium cannot be operated by the player, The operation medium may be operable). When a game ball enters the starting port during the setting confirmation mode, it is not necessary to acquire lottery information and execute a prize ball for the entered ball. However, even in such a case, in the case of the special symbol variation already held, the special symbol variation is executed during the setting confirmation mode or after the end of the setting change mode.

  When the game is stopped at the start of the setting confirmation mode, one of the values of the fields 1706 and 1707 is 1 and the other is 0, the values of the fields 1708 to 1711 are 0, and the values of the fields 1712 and 1713 are One value is 1 and the other value is 0, and the values of the fields 1714 to 1717 are 0.

  Also, when the game proceeds even during the setting confirmation mode, the values of the fields 1706 and 1707 are 0, one of the fields 1708 and 1709 is 1 and the other is 0, and the field 1710 And one of the values of the field 1711 is 1 and the other is 0, the values of the fields 1712 and 1713 are 0, one of the fields 1714 and 1715 is 1 and the other is 0, One value of the field 1716 or the field 1717 is 1 and the other value is 0.

  The peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect restriction pattern in accordance with the restriction flags in each state defined in the setting confirmation mode start effect restriction table and the error occurrence effect restriction table. Hereinafter, these restriction patterns will be described.

(1) The case where the setting confirmation mode starts before the setting suggestion effect starts, and the game stops when the setting confirmation mode starts.

  (1-1) A setting suggestion effect is executed after the game is resumed (the value of the field 1706 is 1 and the value of the field 1707 is 0). By performing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to inform the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed, and it is possible to provide a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected. Can be given.

  (1-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1706 is 0 and the value of the field 1707 is 1). For example, when a sound or an image indicating that the setting is being confirmed is output to the various speakers and the effect display device 1600 during the setting confirmation mode, the setting suggestion effect is not executed in this way, and the setting is confirmed. It is possible to provide the player with the expectation that the setting may have been changed to a high setting.

(2) About the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion change in a case where the setting confirmation mode starts before the setting suggestion effect starts and the game proceeds even during the setting suggestion mode.

  (2-1) A setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1708 is 1 and the value of the field 1709 is 0). Since the game proceeds even during the setting confirmation mode, the operation is not dropped. When a sound and an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is being performed are output to the various speakers and the effect display device 1600, the sound and the image are output in preference to the sound and the image in the setting suggestion effect. I do. At this time, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is being performed is displayed on the effect display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed so as not to make the player uncomfortable. In addition, in order to provide the player with the expectation that “when the setting suggestion effect was displayed” and “the setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting may have been displayed”, all of the setting suggestion effects were provided. An image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is being performed may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 so as to be hidden.

  (2-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1708 is 0 and the value of the field 1709 is 1). For example, in the case where the player has confirmed the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect is different from the actual setting (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting such as “Is high setting?” When a suggestion effect occurs), the player may have distrust in the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

(2 ′) When the setting confirmation mode starts before the setting suggestion effect starts, and when the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, a new setting suggestion change corresponding to the winning at the starting opening in the setting confirmation mode. About setting suggestion production of.

  (2'-1) A setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1710 is 1 and the value of the field 1711 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to inform the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode, and it is possible to give a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected.

  (2'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1710 is 0 and the value of the field 1711 is 1). For example, if the hall shifts to the setting confirmation mode due to doubt about the setting value, the setting value may be changed thereafter. In such a case, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the setting suggestion effect is different from the actual setting (for example, the setting suggestion effect is changed to a different setting while a display indicating that the even number setting is determined is displayed in the setting suggestion effect). There is a possibility that an odd number setting will be confirmed in the later setting suggestion effect), and a trouble may occur between the hall and the player. By not performing the setting suggestion effect, the occurrence of such a situation can be avoided.

  It is desirable that the image, sound, light, and the like indicating the above-described setting confirmation state appear regardless of the value of the above-described field. In addition, if the game is stopped after the transition to the setting confirmation state, a new prize may be made valid. In such a case, the same processing as the processing for advancing the game may be performed.

(3) The setting confirmation mode starts during the setting suggestion change and after the setting suggestion effect starts (when the setting suggestion effect is displayed, and after the setting suggestion effect is displayed and the display of the setting suggestion effect ends). And when the game stops at the start of the setting confirmation mode.

  (3-1) The setting suggestion effect is restarted after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1712 is 1 and the value of the field 1713 is 0). If the setting suggestion effect that has been started is cancelled, the player may have a distrust that the setting may have been changed. The occurrence of a situation can be avoided.

  (3-2) The setting suggestion effect is not restarted after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1712 is 0 and the value of the field 1713 is 1). For example, when a sound or an image indicating that the setting is being confirmed is output to the various speakers and the effect display device 1600 during the setting confirmation mode, the setting suggestion effect is not executed in this way, and the setting is confirmed. It is possible to provide the player with the expectation that the setting may have been changed to a high setting.

(4) The setting confirmation mode starts during the setting suggestion change and after the setting suggestion effect starts (when the setting suggestion effect is displayed, and after the setting suggestion effect is displayed and the display of the setting suggestion effect ends). And setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion change when the game proceeds even during the setting confirmation mode.

  (4-1) The setting suggestion effect is continued (the value of the field 1714 is 1 and the value of the field 1715 is 0). Since the game proceeds even during the setting confirmation mode, the operation is not dropped. When a sound and an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is being performed are output to the various speakers and the effect display device 1600, the sound and the image are output in preference to the sound and the image in the setting suggestion effect. I do. At this time, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is being performed is displayed on the effect display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed so as not to give a player an unpleasant feeling ( (The image indicating the setting suggestion effect does not overlap with the image indicating the setting check mode, or the image indicating the setting suggestion effect does not overlap with the character indicating the setting check mode such as "during setting check mode.") . Note that the same processing can be performed for this display and the like even when an error described later occurs. Here, “not overlapping” indicates that the appearance from the player does not overlap, not the image data actually set in the RAM.

  In addition, in order to provide the player with the expectation that “when the setting suggestion effect was displayed” and “the setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting may have been displayed”, all of the setting suggestion effects were provided. An image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is being performed may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 so as to be hidden.

  (4-2) The setting suggestion effect is stopped (the value of the field 1714 is 0 and the value of the field 1715 is 1). For example, in the case where the player has confirmed the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect is different from the actual setting (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting such as “Is high setting?” When a suggestion effect occurs), the player may have distrust in the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

(4 ′) In the case where the setting confirmation mode starts during the setting suggestion change and after the setting suggestion effect is started, and the game proceeds even during the setting confirmation mode, a new game corresponding to the winning at the starting port in the setting confirmation mode is performed. About setting suggestion effect of various setting suggestion change.

  (4'-1) A setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1716 is 1 and the value of the field 1717 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to inform the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode, and it is possible to give a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected.

  (4'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1716 is 0 and the value of the field 1717 is 1). For example, if the hall shifts to the setting confirmation mode due to doubt about the setting value, the setting value may be changed thereafter. In such a case, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the setting suggestion effect is different from the actual setting (for example, the setting suggestion effect is changed to a different setting while a display indicating that the even number setting is determined is displayed in the setting suggestion effect). Since a display for confirming the odd number setting is made in a later setting suggestion effect), a trouble may occur between the hall and the player. By not performing the setting suggestion effect, the occurrence of such a situation can be avoided.

  In the case where the game also proceeds in the setting confirmation mode, if the setting confirmation mode extends over a plurality of fluctuations, for example, the peripheral control MPU may start the setting confirmation mode based on a notification from the main control MPU 1311, for example. When the first symbol is determined or when the next change is started, it is determined whether or not the mode is the setting confirmation mode. If the peripheral control MPU determines that the setting confirmation mode is set, if the newly won hold is a setting suggestion change, the peripheral control MPU performs a setting suggestion effect together with a change corresponding to the hold. By performing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to inform the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed, and it is possible to provide a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected. Can be given.

  The peripheral control MPU may not execute the setting suggestion effect in this case. In the case where the player confirms the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect differs from the actual setting (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting such as “Is high setting?” Is suggested). When an effect occurs), the player may have a distrust of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

  As described above, when the setting suggestion effect is performed and when the setting suggestion effect is not performed, the effect is exerted on both sides. Amusement machines that meet the needs of the sales style.

[12-15-1-2. Restrictions on setting suggestions when an error occurs]
Next, a description will be given, with reference to FIG. The error production effect restriction table indicates the setting suggestion effect of the change when an error occurs during the execution or suspension of the change determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as setting suggestion change in this chapter). A restriction flag indicating whether or not to restrict the

  The error occurrence effect restriction table includes a record 1801 for storing a restriction flag when an error occurs before the setting suggestion effect starts, and an error occurring during the setting suggestion change and after the setting suggestion effect starts in the setting suggestion change. And a record 1802 for storing the restriction flag in the case where the restriction is made.

  Note that the error includes a strong error that is reported by stopping the game and a weak error that is reported while the game is in progress. An error that detects an illegal magnetism in the shooting sphere sensor 1020 and the game area 5a is an example of a strong error. The full tank error (an error indicating that the game balls stored in the foul cover unit 520 are full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535) is an example of a weak error.

  Therefore, the error production effect restriction table, a column 1803 for storing a restriction flag corresponding to an error reported when the game is stopped, and a column 1804 for storing a restriction flag corresponding to an error reported while the game is in progress. ,including.

  In addition, when the game progresses even during the occurrence of an error, a new setting suggestion change may be suspended by a game ball winning at the starting port during the occurrence of the error. Therefore, the column 1804 includes a column 1805 for storing a restriction flag in a new setting suggestion change corresponding to a winning at the starting port during the occurrence of an error.

  In addition, the restriction flag in the effect restriction table at the time of error occurrence can be controlled by the operation medium provided in the pachinko machine 1 (even if the operation medium cannot be operated by the player, for example, during manufacture of the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall or the like). The setting can be made by using an operation medium.

  Note that, in the error-restraining effect restriction table, one of the fields 1806 and 1807 is 1 and the other is 0, one of the fields 1808 and 1809 is 1 and the other is 0, One of the fields 1810 and 1811 is 1 and the other is 0, one of the fields 1812 and 1813 is 1 and the other is 0, and one of the fields 1814 and 1815 is The value of 1 and the other is 0, the value of one of the fields 1816 and 1817 is 1 and the value of the other is 0.

  The peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect restriction pattern according to the restriction flag of each case defined in the error occurrence effect restriction table. Hereinafter, these restriction patterns will be described.

(1) A case in which an error starts before the setting suggestion effect starts, and the game stops when the error occurs (strong error).

  (1-1) After the game is restarted, a setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1806 is 1 and the value of the field 1807 is 0). By performing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to inform the player that the setting has not been changed when the error is canceled by the hall clerk, and to give a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected. it can.

  (1-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1806 is 0 and the value of the field 1807 is 1). Accordingly, when an error occurs, a situation may occur that is disadvantageous for the player, in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed, and the player proceeds with the game so as not to cause an error, Can smoothly proceed, and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

  (2) About the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion change when an error occurs before the start of the setting suggestion effect and the game proceeds even after the error occurrence starts (weak error).

  (2-1) A setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1808 is 1 and the value of the field 1809 is 0). As a result, the game progresses even during the occurrence of an error, so that the operation of the gaming machine does not drop. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect occurs even during the occurrence of an error, the interest of the player can be improved. When a sound and an image indicating that an error is occurring are output to the various speakers and the effect display device 1600, the sound and the image are output in preference to the sound and the image in the setting suggestion effect. . At this time, an image indicating that an error is occurring is displayed on the effect display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed so as not to give the player any discomfort. Also, in order to provide the player with the expectation that "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" and "the setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting was displayed", all of the setting suggestion effects were provided. An image indicating that an error is occurring may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 so as to be hidden.

  (2-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1808 is 0 and the value of the field 1809 is 1). Accordingly, when an error occurs, a situation may occur that is disadvantageous for the player, in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed, and the player proceeds with the game so as not to cause an error, Can smoothly proceed, and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

  (2 ′) If an error occurs before the setting suggestion effect starts and the game progresses during the error occurrence (weak error), a new setting suggestion corresponding to the winning at the starting port during the error occurrence About setting suggestion effect of fluctuation.

  (2'-1) A setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1810 is 1 and the value of the field 1811 is 0). As a result, the game progresses even during the occurrence of an error, so that the operation of the gaming machine does not drop. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect occurs even during the occurrence of an error, the interest of the player can be improved.

  (2'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1810 is 0 and the value of the field 1811 is 1). As a result, the setting suggestion effect is not executed for the prize in which an error has occurred, so that the player stops the launch of the game ball and releases the error early.

  (3) A case in which an error occurs during the setting suggestion change and after the setting suggestion effect starts, and the game stops when the error occurs (strong error).

  (3-1) The setting suggestion effect is restarted after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1812 is 1 and the value of the field 1813 is 0). If the setting suggestion effect that has been started is cancelled, the player may have a distrust that the setting may have been changed. The occurrence of a situation can be avoided.

  (3-2) The setting suggestion effect is not restarted after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1812 is 0 and the value of the field 1813 is 1). Thus, when an error occurs, a situation may occur that is disadvantageous to the player, in which the setting suggestion effect is stopped, and the player proceeds with the game so as not to cause an error, Can smoothly proceed, and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

  (4) The setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion change when an error occurs during the setting suggestion change and after the start of the setting suggestion effect, and the game proceeds even during the error occurrence (weak error).

  (4-1) The setting suggestion effect is continued (the value of the field 1814 is 1 and the value of the field 1815 is 0). As a result, the game progresses even during the occurrence of an error, so that the operation of the gaming machine does not drop. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect occurs even during the occurrence of an error, the interest of the player can be improved. When a sound and an image indicating that an error is occurring are output to the various speakers and the effect display device 1600, the sound and the image are output in preference to the sound and the image in the setting suggestion effect. . At this time, an image indicating that an error is occurring is displayed on the effect display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed so as not to give the player any discomfort. In addition, in order to provide the player with a sense of expectation that “when the setting suggestion effect was displayed” and “when the setting suggestion effect indicating high setting was displayed”, hide all the setting suggestion effects. Then, an image indicating that an error is occurring may be displayed on effect display device 1600.

  (4-2) The setting suggestion effect is stopped (the value of the field 1814 is 0 and the value of the field 1815 is 1). Accordingly, when an error occurs, a situation may occur that is disadvantageous to the player that the setting suggestion effect is stopped, so that the player proceeds with the game so as not to cause an error, and It can proceed smoothly and reduce the burden on the hall.

(4 ′) When an error occurs during the setting suggestion change and after the start of the setting suggestion effect and the game proceeds during the error occurrence (weak error), a new game corresponding to the winning at the starting port during the error occurrence is performed. About setting suggestion effect of various setting suggestion change.

  (4'-1) A setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1816 is 1 and the value of the field 1817 is 0). As a result, the game progresses even during the occurrence of an error, so that the operation of the gaming machine does not drop. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect occurs even during the occurrence of an error, the interest of the player can be improved.

  (4'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1816 is 0 and the value of the field 1817 is 1). As a result, the setting suggestion effect is not executed for the prize in which an error has occurred, so that the player stops the launch of the game ball and releases the error early.

  As described above, when the setting suggestion effect is performed and when the setting suggestion effect is not performed, the effect is exerted on both sides. Amusement machines that meet the needs of the sales style.

[12-15-2. Restrictions on directing new start winnings]
Hereinafter, a description will be given of the limitation of the effect in the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning during the special symbol fluctuation and the state in which the new fluctuation can be held. FIG. 172 is an example of the new start winning effect restriction table. The new start winning effect restriction table is stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM.

  The new start winning effect restriction table includes, for example, a condition column, a reference processing table column, and a flag column. The condition in the condition column is defined by an assumption about the effect of the previous change and an effect restriction on the effect in the new start winning prize based on the assumption. Note that the pre-change in this chapter is a change immediately before a change corresponding to a new start winning. The condition of the effect of the preceding change includes a case where only an expected suggestive effect of whether the special lottery result corresponding to the change is a big hit is performed, and a case where an expected suggestive effect and a setting suggestive effect are performed.

  In addition, as the production restriction of the look-ahead effect in the new start winning, only the setting suggestion effect in the look-ahead effect is restricted (that is, the setting suggestion effect is not executed), and both the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect in the prefetch effect are restricted (that is, the setting suggestion effect). (The suggestion effect and the expectation effect are not executed), and neither the setting suggestion effect nor the expectation effect in the prefetch effect is restricted (that is, the setting suggestion effect and the prefetch effect are executed).

  The reference processing table column stores the identifier of the processing table to be referred to when executing the pre-reading effect restriction in the new starting prize, which is included in the corresponding condition. The flag column stores a flag indicating which condition is to be executed and which processing table is to be used to determine a process for a prefetch effect in a new start winning.

  In addition, 1 is stored in the flag column corresponding to any one of the processing tables 1 to 3, and 0 is stored in the flag column corresponding to the other two of the processing tables 1 to 3. In addition, 1 is stored in the flag column corresponding to any one of the processing tables 4 to 6, and 0 is stored in the flag columns corresponding to the other two of the processing tables 4 to 6. The flag in the new start prize production restriction table is, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured or in a hall or the like, the operation medium provided in the pachinko machine 1 (either an operation medium that cannot be operated by the player or an operation medium that can be operated by the player) Can be set.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines that there is a new start winning during the special symbol change and the new change can be held, and that only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous change, the new start winning effect restriction table Of the “previous fluctuation effect” column is a flag column corresponding to “expectation suggestion only”, and a condition indicated by a condition column corresponding to a flag column storing 1 as a value is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU refers to the processing table corresponding to the flag column to determine the content of the prefetch effect in the change corresponding to the new start winning.

  Similarly, when there is a new start winning in a special symbol change and a state where a new change can be held, and the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the previous change, the peripheral control MPU performs the new start winning. Referring to the processing table corresponding to the flag field corresponding to “expected suggestion + setting suggestion” in the “previous fluctuation effect” column of the effect restriction table and corresponding to the flag column storing 1 as the value, The content of the look-ahead effect in the fluctuation corresponding to the start winning prize is determined.

  Hereinafter, each condition shown in the condition column will be described. The first condition (the condition under which the processing table 1 is selected) is that, when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous change, only the setting suggestion effect is limited as a pre-reading effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Is to be done. Under the first condition, an expectation effect is performed in the previous change, so that the player has an increased sense of excitement due to the expectation of the big hit. In such a state, when a setting suggestion effect is performed as a look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning, the player's consciousness is directed to the setting suggestion effect, and the effect of the previous change There is a possibility that the elation sensation may be reduced. In addition, the player may confuse the setting suggestion effect with the expectation effect effect to make the player feel joyful. Therefore, the occurrence of these situations can be suppressed by executing the first condition.

  Further, under the first condition, the expected suggestion effect is performed in the previous change, and in this state, if the setting suggestion effect is further performed as a look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning, the player: Even if it is assumed that there is a deviation in the previous change, it is still possible to expect a change corresponding to the new start winning, so that a sense of security can be provided to the player.

  For example, in the case of selecting an effect using the notice effect table shown in FIG. 165, for example, the peripheral control MPU determines the effect based on the table, and then determines whether or not the flag in the condition column indicating that setting suggestive effects are to be restricted is 1. (Restriction or not), and if it is 1 (restriction), even if “set” is selected, the setting is rewritten and displayed without “set”. I do. That is, the peripheral control MPU can execute the determination process after determining the effect, and thereby execute the restriction on the setting suggestion effect using the announcement effect table illustrated in FIG. 165. That is, since the pachinko machine 1 does not need to hold the effect table for each effect restriction type, the data amount can be reduced. Similarly, in the case of the expected suggestion effect to be described later, the peripheral control MPU uses the final hold color table of FIG. The selected hold display is rewritten to white and displayed.

  The second condition (the condition under which the processing table 2 is selected) is a setting suggestion effect and an expectation suggestion as a pre-reading effect restriction of a change corresponding to a new start winning when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous change. It is to limit both productions. Under the second condition, an expectation effect is performed in the previous change, so that the player has an increased sense of excitement due to the expectation of the big hit. In such a state, when a setting suggestion effect and a period attitude suggestion effect are performed as a look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning, the player's consciousness is directed to these effects, There is a possibility that the feeling of elation in the effect of the previous fluctuation may be reduced. Therefore, the occurrence of these situations can be suppressed by executing the second condition.

  The third condition (the condition under which the processing table 3 is selected) is a setting suggestion effect and an expectation suggestion as a pre-reading effect restriction of a change corresponding to a new start winning when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous change. It is not to limit any of the productions. Under the third condition, an expectation effect is performed in the previous change, so that the player has an increased sense of excitement due to the expectation of the big hit. In such a state, the setting suggestion effect is executed as a look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning, and in addition to the excitement for the jackpot, the excitement for the setting suggestion effect (particularly, the high setting confirmation suggestion effect) Or when a high setting finalization effect is executed) can be given to the player.

  The fourth condition (the condition under which the processing table 4 is selected) is that, when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change, the setting suggestion effect is set as a pre-reading effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning. The only thing that is restricted. In the fourth condition, since the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the previous change, a sense of excitement that the player may win the jackpot in the previous change, and (in particular, the high setting suggestive effect or the high setting finalized effect) If it is executed), feel the excitement, and the setting suggestion. In such a state, if the setting suggestion effect is executed as a look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning, there is a possibility that a feeling of excitement to the expectation of the big hit in the suspension of the previous change may decrease. .

  Specifically, for example, when the setting 4 or more is determined in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change, and the setting 5 or more is determined in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new starting winning, The setting suggestion effect contains a lot of inaccurate information (although it suggests the possibility of setting 4 even though it is originally setting 5 or more). In such a case, the player estimates that not only the setting suggestion effect in the previous change but also the expected suggestion effect includes a lot of inaccurate information (specifically, for example, the display mode is red. It is possible that the degree of expectation of the jackpot is not high even if the reservation is held), and there is a possibility that the feeling of excitement for the expectation suggestion effect may be reduced. The occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed by executing the fourth condition.

  The fifth condition (the condition under which the processing table 5 is selected) is that, when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change, the setting suggestion effect is set as a prefetch effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning. And expectation suggestion effects. In the fifth condition, since the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the previous change, if the setting suggestion effect is performed in the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning, a plurality of setting suggestion effects are performed in a short period of time. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player may guess the setting value with high accuracy (for example, when the odd setting suggestion effect and the high setting suggestion effect are performed, the setting is likely to be 5). If it is determined in this state that the player has set a low setting, there is a risk that the game in the pachinko machine 1 may be stopped, and if it is determined that the setting is high, another pachinko machine in the hall may be used. The operation of the machine 1 may be reduced. The occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed by executing the fifth condition.

  In particular, if the expected suggestive effect and the setting suggestive effect are performed in the previous change, and the expected suggestive effect and the setting suggestive effect are performed as a look-ahead effect even in the change corresponding to the new starting prize, many effects occur in a short period of time. And the player may be confused. The occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed by executing the fifth condition.

  The sixth condition (the condition under which the processing table 6 is selected) is that, when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change, the setting suggestion effect is set as a pre-reading effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning. And expectation-producing effects. Under the sixth condition, since the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the previous change, the player assumes the degree of expectation of the expectation suggestion effect in the setting suggested by the setting suggestion effect. In this state, the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect are performed in the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning, and there is a possibility that the degree of expectation by these two expectation suggestion effects is increased.

  Specifically, for example, when a setting suggestion effect indicating a setting of 4 or more is performed in the previous change and a setting suggestion effect indicating a setting of 5 or more is performed as a look-ahead effect in a new start winning, the player: The degree of expectation at the setting of 4 or more is assumed for the expected suggestion effect in the previous change. However, since the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect in a new start winning prize suggests a setting of 5 or more, the degree of expectation for the expectation suggestion effect is assumed to be 5 or more. The sense of excitement increases.

  As described above, the effect is exhibited for each of the contents of the look-ahead production restrictions corresponding to the new start winning, so that the halls and the like can set such contents of the look-ahead production restrictions to meet the needs of the business style of the halls and the like. A gaming machine can be provided according to the requirements.

  Hereinafter, each processing table and the look-ahead effect performed with reference to each processing table will be described. Each processing table is stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM.

  FIG. 173 is an example of the processing table 1. First, common contents of each processing table will be described. Each processing table stores the winning type in the special lottery result of the previous fluctuation, the processing content related to a new start winning prize corresponding to the winning type, and the processing number that is the identifier of the processing content.

  It should be noted that the processing contents held by each processing table define processing contents for prefetching effects that are not subject to restriction. Specifically, for example, as the look-ahead effect restriction of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning, the processing content of the processing table 1 which is a table referred to when only the setting suggestion effect is restricted includes the expectation effect effect. Processing details are defined. Similarly, as the look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning, the processing contents of the processing table 3 which is a table referred to when both the expected suggestive effect and the setting suggestive effect are limited include the expected suggestive effect and The processing content for the setting suggestion effect is defined.

  Therefore, the peripheral control MPU determines the prefetching effect to be restricted and the processing table to be referred to in the new start winning prize based on the flag of the new starting prize effect restriction table, and is not the restriction target based on the processing table. The processing for the look-ahead effect is determined.

  The processing table 3 and the processing table 6, which will be described later, store a flag for selecting a processing content related to a new start winning from a plurality of processing contents. The flag in the processing table may be, for example, an operation medium provided to the pachinko machine 1 (an operation medium that cannot be operated by a player or an operation medium that can be operated by a player) at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or a hall. ) Can be set.

  Hereinafter, the processing content related to a new start winning prize defined by the processing table 1 will be described. The processing table 1 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous change and only the setting suggestion effect is limited as a prefetch effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Hereinafter, an example in which a reserved look-ahead is performed as a look-ahead effect that gives an expectation suggestion will be described.

  The process of the process number 1 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is a big hit with a reduced time. In the process of process number 1, the peripheral control MPU determines that the new start winning hold display mode is a specific mode (eg, blue, green, red, etc. hold display mode) with a high jackpot expectation. At the start of the opening screen of the jackpot that has been won in the previous change, the hold display mode of the new start winning is returned to the default (white display mode in the final hold color table in FIG. 161). However, when the hold is not displayed in the hold display area at the start of the jackpot opening screen, the hold display in the specific mode is erased like other hold displays. Further, the peripheral control MPU does not return the new start winning hold suspension display mode to the specific display mode at the time of shifting to the time saving after the end of the big hit (that is, keep the default display mode). In addition, the peripheral control MPU does not return the new start winning holding display mode to the specific display mode even if the holding of the new winning prize has not been exhausted at the end of the time reduction. Leave the default view).

  The process of the process number 2 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is a big hit without a time reduction. In the process of the process number 2, the peripheral control MPU determines that the hold display of the new start winning prize is a specific mode with a high jackpot expectation degree, for example, at the start of the opening screen of the jackpot won in the previous change. The state of the hold display of the new start winning is returned to the default. However, when the hold is not displayed in the hold display area at the start of the jackpot opening screen, the hold display in the specific mode is erased like other hold displays. Also, at the time of the transition to the normal state controlled after the big hit game ends, the mode of the hold display of the new start winning is not returned to the specific display mode (that is, the default display is maintained).

  The process of the process number 3 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is the small hit. In the process of the process number 3, the peripheral control MPU does not change the mode of the hold display of the new start winning (that is, the hold display is continued. Specifically, for example, if the hold display mode is blue, Is continuously displayed). Further, the peripheral control MPU may return the state of the suspension display of the new start winning to the default at the start of the opening screen of the small hit won in the previous change. However, when the hold is not displayed in the hold display area at the start of the small hit opening screen, the hold display in the specific mode is erased like other hold displays.

  The process of the process number 4 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is out of order. In the process of process number 4, the peripheral control MPU does not change the mode of the hold display of the new start winning (that is, the hold display is continued. Specifically, for example, if the hold display mode is blue, Is continuously displayed).

  FIG. 174 is an example of the processing table 2. The processing table 2 is a table which is referred to when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous change, and both the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect are limited as a look-ahead effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning. is there. The processing table 2 is a table referred to when restricting both the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning, and therefore, regardless of the jackpot type of the previous change, It is defined that no special processing is executed for the look-ahead effect in the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning.

  FIG. 175 is an example of the processing table 3. The processing table 3 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous change, and neither the setting suggestion effect nor the expectation effect is limited as a prefetch effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning. is there.

  The processing of processing numbers 5 to 6 is processing relating to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is a big hit with a reduced time. One of the processing numbers 5 and 6 can be selected by a flag. In the processing of processing numbers 5 and 6, the processing of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the processing of processing number 1.

  In the process of process number 5, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a prefetch effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. The time before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning is specifically, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the jackpot game won by the previous change, or during the time reduction accompanying the jackpot won by the previous change. The second special symbol is being reserved. By the processing of the process number 5, when the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the previous change, the player does not forget that the setting suggestion effect is performed. it can.

  In the process of process number 6, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. In addition, since the big hit with the time saving is won in the previous change, the change corresponding to the new winning is likely to start after the end of the time saving (the game ball is placed in the second starting port 2004 during the time saving). If the player wins at a high frequency and the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change are suspended, the second special symbol change is executed prior to the first special symbol change.) Therefore, by the processing of the processing number 6, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the end of the time saving, so that the discouragement of the player due to the end of the time saving can be reduced.

  The processing of processing numbers 7 and 8 is processing relating to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is a big hit with no time reduction. One of the processing numbers 7 and 8 can be selected by a flag. In the processing of the processing numbers 7 and 8, the processing for the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the processing of the processing number 2.

  In the process of process number 7, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning is, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the big hit game won by the previous change, or the like. Although the player feels disappointed that he / she won the jackpot but did not win in a short time, the processing of the processing number 7 indicates that if the setting suggestion effect is started at the latest during the jackpot game, the discouragement is made. You can enjoy the jackpot game in a reduced state.

  In the process of process number 8, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 8, the setting suggestion effect is started immediately after the end of the big hit, so that the discouragement of the player for not giving the time saving can be reduced.

  The processes of process numbers 9 to 10 are processes relating to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is the small hit. One of the processes of process numbers 9 to 10 can be selected by a flag. In the processing of the processing numbers 9 to 10, the processing of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the processing of the processing number 3.

  In the process of process number 9, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning prize is, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the opening of the small hit won by the previous change, or during the small hit. In a small hit, the player may be discouraged because only a small privilege is given to the player, but the processing of the process number 9 causes the setting suggestion effect to be started at an early timing, thereby causing discouragement. Can be reduced.

  In the process of process number 10, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. Since the series of digestion times related to the small hits is shorter than the series of digestion times related to the big hits, if the player recognizes that the set suggestion effect has started before the start of the previous fluctuation, the setting suggestion effect Otherwise, the player may feel distrust. By the processing of the processing number 10, it is possible to prevent such a distrust from being given to the player.

  The processing of the processing numbers 11 to 13 is processing relating to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is out of order. One of the processes of the process numbers 11 to 13 can be selected by a flag. In the processing of the processing numbers 11 to 13, the processing of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the processing of the processing number 4.

  In the process of process number 11, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning.

  In the process of the process number 12, the peripheral control MPU performs the new start only when the hold display mode in the hold prefetch effect of the previous change is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high jackpot expectation. During the change corresponding to the winning, a setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect in the new starting winning is executed. The execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is not changed, that is, no special processing is performed, but the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is controlled to be different (for example, a dialogue suggesting the setting by the character B appears. The timing may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds) or advanced by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds) than usual. By the process of the process number 12, it is possible to reduce such discouragement for a player who feels discouraged that he / she has lost the appearance despite the appearance of the hold display having high jackpot expectation in the previous change. it can. In FIG. 175 and FIG. 178 described later, the old hold is a hold corresponding to the previous change, and the new hold is a hold corresponding to the new start winning.

  In the process of process number 13, if the mode of the hold display is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high jackpot expectation, the peripheral control MPU suggests setting as a prefetch effect in the new start winning prize. Do not perform the production. By the process of the process number 13, although the mode of the hold display with a high expectation of the big hit in the previous change appears, the setting suggestion effect as the pre-reading effect does not appear even in the change corresponding to the new start winning. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from getting into the game.

  FIG. 176 is an example of the processing table 4. The processing table 4 is a table that is referred to when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change, and only the setting suggestion effect is limited as a look-ahead effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning. .

  The process of the process number 14 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is a big hit with a time reduction. In the processing of the processing number 14, the processing of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the processing of the processing number 1.

  The process of the process number 15 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is a big hit with no time reduction. The process of the process number 15 in the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of the process number 2.

  The process of process number 16 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is the small hit. In the process of process number 16, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 3.

  The process of the process number 17 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is out of order. The process of the process number 16 in the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of the process number 4.

  The processing table 4 is a table referred to when restricting only the setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning, so that the new start regardless of the jackpot type of the previous change. It is defined that no special processing is executed for the setting suggestion effect in the fluctuation corresponding to the winning.

  FIG. 177 is an example of the processing table 5. The processing table 5 is referred to when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change, and both the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect are limited as the prefetch effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Is a table to be performed. Since the processing table 5 is a table referred to when restricting both the setting suggestion effect and the expectation effect effect as a look-ahead effect restriction of a change corresponding to a new start winning, regardless of the jackpot type of the previous change, It is defined that no special processing is executed for the look-ahead effect in the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning.

  FIG. 178 is an example of the processing table 6. The processing table 6 is referred to when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change, and neither the setting suggestion effect nor the expectation suggestion effect is limited as the prefetch effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Table.

  The processing of the processing numbers 18 to 21 is processing relating to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is a big hit with a reduction in time. One of the processing numbers 18 to 21 can be selected by a flag. In the processing of processing numbers 18 to 21, the processing for the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the processing of processing number 1.

  In the process of the process number 18, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a prefetch effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. The time before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning is specifically, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the jackpot game won by the previous change, or during the time reduction accompanying the jackpot won by the previous change. The second special symbol is being reserved. By the process of the process number 18, when the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the previous change, the player does not forget that the setting suggestion effect is performed. it can.

  In the process of the process number 19, the peripheral control MPU sets the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, from the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change. (Specifically, for example, it is notified that the setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change, and the setting as the look-ahead effect is set before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning.) Only when setting 5 or more is notified in the suggested effect), the setting suggestive effect as a pre-reading effect is executed before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. The time before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning is specifically, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the jackpot game won by the previous change, or during the time reduction accompanying the jackpot won by the previous change. The second special symbol is being reserved.

  By the processing of the processing number 19, the player can see the high setting suggestion effect at the latest during the time saving big hit, and thus can obtain a double elation feeling by the time saving big hit and the high setting suggestion. Also, for example, it is notified that the setting 5 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change, and the setting 4 or more is determined in the setting suggestion effect as a prefetch effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Is notified, the setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new starting prize is a useless effect that does not provide new information to the player. By the process of No. 19, such useless effects can be omitted. Conversely, for example, when it is notified that the setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change, the setting 5 is set in the setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Even if it is not notified that the above is confirmed, the player is likely to continue the game, and therefore the setting suggestion effect is highly likely to be a useless effect. The effect can be omitted.

  In the process of the process number 20, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 20, the setting suggestion effect often starts immediately after the end of the time reduction, so that the discouragement of the player for the end of the time reduction state can be reduced.

  In the processing of the process number 21, the peripheral control MPU sets the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, from the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 21, it is possible to omit useless setting suggestion effects as described in the processing of the processing number 19, and to reduce discouragement of the player when the time-saving state ends.

  The processes of process numbers 22 to 25 are processes relating to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is a big hit without a time reduction. One of the processes of the process numbers 22 to 25 can be selected by a flag. In the processing of the processing numbers 22 to 25, the processing of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the processing of the processing number 2.

  In the process of process number 22, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a prefetch effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning is, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the big hit game won by the previous change, or the like. Although the player feels disappointed that he / she won the jackpot but did not win in a short time, if the setting suggestion effect starts at the latest during the jackpot game by the processing of the processing number 22, the player is not disappointed. You can enjoy the jackpot game in a reduced state.

  In the process of the process number 23, the peripheral control MPU sets the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning from the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change. The setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect is executed before the start of the change corresponding to the new start prize only when the above is better. Specifically, before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning is, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the big hit game won by the previous change, or the like. According to the process of the process number 23, when the setting suggestion effect starts at the latest during the big hit game, the big hit game can be enjoyed with the discouragement reduced.

  In the process of process number 24, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the process of the process number 24, the setting suggestion effect starts immediately after the end of the big hit, so that the discouragement of the player for not entering in a short time can be reduced.

  In the process of process number 25, the peripheral control MPU sets the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, from the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 21, it is possible to omit useless setting suggestion effects as described in the processing of the processing number 19, and to reduce discouragement of the player for not entering the time shortening. Also, if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new starting prize is not better than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change, If the setting suggestion effect is performed as a look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, the player who is discouraged not to enter the time zone will be shown a more useless setting suggestion effect, May be turned upside down.

  The processes of process numbers 26 to 29 are processes relating to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is the small hit. One of the processing numbers 26 to 29 can be selected by a flag. In the processing of the processing numbers 26 to 29, the processing of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the processing of the processing number 3.

  In the process of process number 26, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a prefetch effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning prize is, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the opening of the small hit won by the previous change, or during the small hit. In a small hit, the player may be discouraged because only a small privilege is given to the player. However, the processing of the process number 26 causes the setting suggestion effect to start at an early timing, resulting in discouragement. Can be reduced.

  In the process of process number 27, the peripheral control MPU sets the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, from the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change. The setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect is executed before the start of the change corresponding to the new start prize only when the above is better. Specifically, before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning prize is, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the opening of the small hit won by the previous change, or during the small hit. By the processing of the processing number 27, it is possible to omit useless setting suggestion effects as described in the processing of the processing number 19, and to reduce discourage of the player due to the fact that only a small merit is given in a small hit.

  In the process of process number 28, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. Since the series of digestion times related to the small hits is shorter than the series of digestion times related to the big hits, if the player recognizes that the set suggestion effect has started before the start of the previous fluctuation, the setting suggestion effect Otherwise, the player may feel distrust. By the processing of the processing number 28, it is possible to prevent the player from giving such distrust.

  In the process of the process number 29, the peripheral control MPU sets the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning from the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 29, it is possible to omit useless setting suggestion effects as described in the processing of the processing number 19, and to reduce discouragement of the player for giving a small merit in a small hit. Also, if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new starting prize is not better than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change, If the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect is performed before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, a more useless setting suggestion effect for a player who is discouraged that only a small merit is given in a small hit. This may cause the player to be upset.

  The processing of the processing numbers 30 to 34 is processing relating to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is out of order. One of the processing numbers 30 to 34 can be selected by a flag. In the processing of the processing numbers 30 to 34, the processing of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the processing of the processing number 4.

  In the process of process number 30, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 30, the discouragement of the player due to the loss of the previous fluctuation can be reduced.

  In the process of the process number 31, the peripheral control MPU performs the new start only when the mode of the hold display in the hold prefetch effect of the previous change is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high jackpot expectation. During the change corresponding to the winning, a setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect in the new starting winning is executed. The execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is not changed, that is, no special processing is performed, but the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is controlled to be different (for example, a dialogue suggesting the setting by the character B appears. The timing may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds) or advanced by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds) than usual. By the process of the process number 31, it is possible to reduce such discouragement for a player who feels discouraged that he / she has lost the appearance despite the appearance of the hold display having a high jackpot expectation in the previous change. it can.

  In the processing of the process number 32, the peripheral control MPU sets the pre-variation when the mode of the suspension display in the pre-change effect of the pre-variation is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high jackpot expectation. Only when the setting suggested in the suggestion effect is better than the setting suggested in the suggestion effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, the new start winning effect is set. During the change corresponding to (1), a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect in the new start winning is executed. By the processing of the processing number 32, the discouragement of the player for the fact that the previous fluctuation, which is the mode of the hold display with a high jackpot expectation, is not achieved can be reduced by the setting suggestion effect.

  In the process of the process number 33, the peripheral control MPU performs the new start prize only when the hold display mode in the hold prefetch effect of the previous change is not a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high jackpot expectation. During the change corresponding to (1), a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect in the new start winning is executed. By the process of the process number 33, such discouragement can be reduced by the setting suggestion effect for the player who has not been able to obtain the expectation for the big hit and has been discouraged in the pre-change prefetch effect.

  In the process of the process number 34, the peripheral control MPU determines that the mode of the hold display is not the specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high jackpot expectation, and the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change. Therefore, only when the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect is better before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, only during the change corresponding to the new start winning, A setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect in the new starting prize is executed. A situation in which the processing of the processing number 34 amplifies the frustration of the player that the mode of the pending display of the previous change indicates a low setting in the setting suggestion effect in the change corresponding to the low expectation and the new start winning. Can be suppressed.

  Note that, in the above-described processing, even in a situation where the setting suggestion effect is not limited as the pre-reading effect limitation of the change corresponding to the new start winning, in the following cases, the peripheral control MPU determines the setting suggestion effect. It is not necessary to perform the effect. For example, when the new start prize is performed during the big hit, the peripheral control MPU may not execute the setting suggestion effect. This is because, immediately after the jackpot game, the player is likely to continue the game without giving an incentive by the setting suggestion effect.

  As in the example of the processing table 3 and the processing table 6, since the effect is exerted in each of the processes related to the new starting prize determined by the respective processing numbers, the hall and the like can set the process related to the new starting prize. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that meets the needs of a business style such as a hall.

  Also, for example, immediately before the end of the new start winning prize (a probable change state that continues until a big hit is won or a predetermined number of special symbol changes are executed) (specifically, for example, a special start prize until the end of the ST state) This is performed in a state where the number of remaining fluctuations of the symbol is 4 or less, which is the maximum number of special symbols held, or a state where the remaining number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the end of the ST state is displayed on the effect display device 1600). In this case, the peripheral control MPU does not have to execute the setting suggestion effect. Immediately before the end of the ST state, the greatest concern of the player is whether or not to win a big hit in the ST. In such a state, when the setting suggestion effect starts as a look-ahead effect relating to a new start winning, the player immediately mistakes the setting suggestion effect for a high hit expectation effect, causing a situation in which the player is delighted. There is a possibility that. With the above-described processing, occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

  Also, for example, a predetermined number of special symbol changes (specifically, for example, four special symbol changes, which is the maximum number of special symbols to be held, or a change from the ST state) after the ST state ends and the normal state is entered. Immediately after the transition to the normal state, the second start port 2004 may be open, and the new start port 2004 is taken into account until the predetermined number of times (for example, five times of the special symbol change) is performed in consideration thereof. When the start winning is performed, the peripheral control MPU does not have to execute the setting suggestion effect. Immediately after the end of the ST state, the biggest concern of the player is whether or not to win the big hit immediately. In particular, immediately after the end of the ST state, there is a high possibility that a change corresponding to the suspension of the second special symbol that is likely to be won in the type of jackpot of great merit for the player is executed. In such a state, when the setting suggestion effect starts as a look-ahead effect relating to a new start winning, the player immediately mistakes the setting suggestion effect for a high hit expectation effect, causing a situation in which the player is delighted. There is a possibility that. With the above-described processing, occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

  In addition, when it is determined that the setting suggestion effect that is completed independently in each of the plurality of holds is executed, one setting suggestion effect over the change corresponding to the plurality of holds is executed. The setting suggestion effect may be changed.

[12-16. Another example 1 of setting change / confirmation processing]
Hereinafter, another embodiment of the pachinko machine having the setting change function will be described. In the embodiment described below, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. However, the initializing function of the original main control RAM 1312 of the RAM clear switch 954, In order to distinguish between the setting change function and the setting change function, an operation for changing the setting value may be described as a setting change switch 972.

  FIGS. 179 and 180 are flowcharts of the power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on. The power-on processing shown in FIGS. 179 and 180 is another example of step S10 in FIG. 21 to step S34 in FIG.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 fetches the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 and the signal level of the setting key 971 from the input port, and stores the fetched level data in a register (step S201). The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated in steps S212 and S214 after the peripheral control board 1510 is reliably started. Therefore, if the employee of the hall interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 by mistake while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to be activated, the RAM of the hall is unintentionally cleared by the employee. The switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined. For this reason, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a temporary storage means such as a register at an early stage after the start of the power-on process, and after the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 ends. By judging the state of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in the temporary storage means such as a register, even if an employee of the hall accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on, the power supply is stopped. The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 at the time of the closing operation is reliably detected.

  Note that the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 may be different from the ON level of the setting key 971. For example, by changing the polarity of the logic between the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 may be turned on at a high level, and the setting key 971 may be turned on at a low level. Further, the voltage determined to be ON by the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 may be changed. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to perform a fraudulent act of activating the setting change mode by changing the signal level by irradiating the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves. Further, as described later, in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is not necessary to monitor the level of the signal of the sensor for detecting fraud.

  Then, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S202). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the setting can be selected in the stages from 1 to 6, the value of the work in which the setting value is stored corresponds to 0 to 5 (0 for setting 1, 0 for setting 6). In the case of 5), if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined that the value is within a predetermined range.

  If the set value is not within the predetermined range, a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the set state management area, and the pachinko machine 1 waits for initialization by a reset signal (step S203). Since the set value is not within the range where the checksum is calculated and is not erased by the RAM clear operation, the abnormal set value is not corrected. For this reason, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether there is any abnormality in the set value, and if there is an abnormality, processing relating to a normal game such as a special figure or a general figure is not executed.

  The set value is determined not only at the time of turning on the power, but also at the time of winning in the starting port, at the start of the variable display game, or when the game state is switched (from the normal state to the big hit state, from the low probability state to the high probability state). , A non-time-saving state to a time-saving state, etc.). This prevents a lottery from being performed based on the incorrect set value even if the set value is incorrectly abnormal.

  When it is determined that the set value is abnormal, the game is stopped and the state of the set value abnormality (RAM abnormality) is maintained until the power is turned on again or the set value is changed. . When it is determined that the set value is abnormal, a predetermined value may be set. As the predetermined value, the setting value storage area may be updated using a value corresponding to setting 6 indicating the highest setting or a value corresponding to setting 1 indicating the lowest setting.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the RAM abnormality can be eliminated only through the setting change mode, and the RAM abnormality cannot be eliminated only by turning on the power again. This is because, in addition to the malfunction, the RAM abnormality may be caused by fraud, and if the RAM abnormality caused by the fraud can be resolved by a power-on operation, the RAM abnormality can be easily resolved. On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality cannot be eliminated without passing through the setting change mode, the RAM abnormality cannot be eliminated unless the power switch 932, the setting key 971, and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated. Since the operation of the setting key 971 that can be operated only by the employee of the hall having the key is included, security performance against fraudulent acts can be improved.

  In addition, in order to cope with a goto act of illegally changing a set value to an indefinite value, if the set value is determined to be abnormal, it is updated to a value corresponding to the setting 1 indicating the minimum setting, and the security of the gaming machine is changed. Effectiveness can be improved.

  The setting state management area is a storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, as shown in FIG. 201 (B), and includes, for example, a normal game state (a game startable state), a setting confirmation mode, and a setting change mode. , The abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is recorded.

  On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, the process waits for activation of the peripheral control board 1510 (step S204).

  Then, the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power shutdown is compared with the checksum calculated at the previous power shutdown and stored in step S48. Instead of the checksum, a fixed value check code may be used. Further, it is determined whether the value of the backup flag area is normal. If the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup has been performed normally is stored in the backup flag area, the data in the RAM is normally backed up when the power failure occurs (step S205).

  As a result of the judgment, if either the value of the checksum or the value of the backup flag area is abnormal, the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S206), and the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 (setting (Including the area where the value is stored) (step S207), and the process proceeds to step S216. Note that erasing data stored in the entire area or a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is referred to as “initialization”, and “RAM clear” is used in the same sense.

  On the other hand, if the values of the checksum and the backup flag area are normal, a setting change operation (RAM clear switch 954 ON, setting key 971 ON) is performed based on the value (contents) of the setting key stored in the register. Is determined. If the operation is not a setting change operation (both or both of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are OFF), the setting is made in the setting state management area to determine whether the state was being changed before the power was turned on. It is determined whether or not the value (02H) indicating the change is being recorded (step S208).

  As a result, if it is stored in the register that the setting change operation has been performed, the operation to enter the setting change mode with the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 when the power is turned on has been performed, and the setting change operation should be started. The state can be determined. If the value (02H) indicating that the setting is being changed is recorded in the setting state management area, it can be determined that the power is turned on after a power failure during the setting change operation. When it is determined to shift to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the register or the value stored in the setting state management area, a value (02H) indicating the setting change state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S209), the clear area of the main control RAM 1312 to be initialized when the RAM is normal is initialized (step S210), and the process proceeds to step S216.

  When shifting to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the setting state management area in step S208, a value indicating the setting change state (02H) is recorded in the setting state management area in step S209. At this time, since it is not necessary to set the same value (setting change state (02H)) again, when it is determined to shift to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the setting state management area, the setting is changed to the setting state management area. It is not necessary to record the value (02H) indicating the state.

  On the other hand, if the setting change operation is not set in the register and the value (02H) indicating that the setting is being changed is not recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change operation should not be started. In order to determine whether or not the state is a RAM abnormality, it is determined whether or not a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S211).

  As a result, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined that the state before the power is turned on is a RAM abnormality (main control RAM 1312 is abnormal), and the process proceeds to step S216. On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the state before turning on the power is not the RAM abnormality (the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal), and the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 is stored in the register. It is determined whether it has been performed (step S212).

  As a result, if the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 is stored in the register, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on, and the RAM in the game control area excluding the set value and the set state management area The process proceeds to step S210 to initialize the area (clear area when the RAM is normal).

  On the other hand, if the level of the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is not stored in the register, the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated when the power is turned on, so that the power-on state buffer is set (step S213). The contents set in the power-on state buffer are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a power-on state command for notifying the gaming state managed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is restored.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the ON level of the setting key 971 is stored in the register (step S214). As a result, if the ON level of the setting key 971 is stored in the register, the setting key 971 is operated when the power is turned on, and the setting confirmation operation should be started. Therefore, the setting confirmation mode is indicated in the setting state management area. The value (01H) is recorded (step S215).

  After that, the initialization of the device built in the main control MPU 1311 is performed (step S216), and the power-on operation command for notifying the operation of each part at the time of power-on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S217). The power-on operation command is one of the power-on commands described in step S32 of FIG. Then, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized to the state when the power is turned on (step S218).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S219). If a value indicating the game startable state is recorded in the set state management area, the normal game can be started, so the process proceeds to step S220, and the initial setting is continued. On the other hand, if the value indicating the game startable state is not recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game cannot be started, so that the initial setting is completed, and the process proceeds to step S224.

  In step S220, an initial setting at the time of starting the game or an initial setting at the time of power recovery is performed. Thereafter, a power-on state command for notifying the state of each unit at the time of power-on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S221). Then, a power-on return destination command for notifying the state of the special symbol at the time of power recovery is stored in a buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S222). The power-on state command and the power-on return destination command are one of the power-on commands described in step S32 of FIG. The various commands stored in the buffer are transmitted in the timer interrupt processing.

  Further, a set value command for notifying the set value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S223), the interrupt is permitted (step S224), and the process proceeds to a normal main loop (for example, step S36 in FIG. 22).

  FIGS. 181 and 182 are flowcharts of the timer interrupt process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The timer interrupt processing shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 differs from the timer interrupt processing shown in FIGS. 24, 75, 80, 104, and 155 in that the setting change processing is executed within the timer interrupt processing.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 updates the LED common counter (LED_CT) (Step S230). The LED common counter is a counter that determines which common terminal of the base display 1317 is turned on, that is, determines a digit to be displayed. In this embodiment, an example is described in which the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are shared, but the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be provided separately. In this case, LED common counters may be provided as many as the number of indicators.

  Thereafter, a switch input process is executed (step S231). The switch input process is the same as step S74 in FIG.

  Next, it is determined whether or not an initial value (a value indicating a game startable state) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S232). If an initial value (a value indicating a game startable state) is recorded in the setting state management area, it is not necessary to execute the setting change / confirmation processing (step S234 and subsequent steps) in the timer interrupt processing. (Eg, after step S76 in FIG. 23) is executed (step S233). In the normal timer interrupt processing of step S233, a performance display processing (FIG. 183) described later is executed. On the other hand, if an initial value (a value indicating a game startable state) is not recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game processing is not executed in the timer interrupt processing, and the setting change / confirmation processing is executed.

  In the setting change / confirmation processing, first, OFF is output from the LED common port, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784, and the game interruption signal is set to ON (step S234). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the time for turning off the LED is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the display switching of the LED is mixed appears. And flickering of the LED is prevented.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S235). If the value indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S245 without executing the process of changing / confirming the setting value. On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether an operation for changing / confirming the setting value has been performed (steps S236 and S237). Specifically, it is determined whether a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S236).

  If the setting change switch 972 has been operated, the set value is incremented by 1 (step S238), and the process proceeds to step S245. If the result of adding the set value exceeds the upper limit, the value is returned to the initial value. On the other hand, if the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting state management area (the value indicating the setting confirmation is recorded in the setting state management area) or if the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting key It is determined whether an OFF edge of the output level 971 has been detected (step S239). When the OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 is detected, the setting key 971 has been operated to the normal position, so that the setting change / confirmation mode end processing is executed (steps S240 to S244). On the other hand, if the OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S245 without ending the setting change / confirmation mode.

  In the setting change / confirmation mode end processing, as shown in FIG. 182, an initial value (a value indicating a state in which a game can be started) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S240), and an initial setting at the time of starting the game or at the time of power recovery (Step S241) to transmit a power-on state command to the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying the state of each unit at the time of power-on (game state such as low probability / high probability, time-saving / non-time-saving). (Step S242). Then, a power-on return destination command for notifying the state of the special symbol upon return after a power failure is stored in a buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S243). Specifically, a counter value indicating a processing state related to the special symbol / special electric accessory (a state of each processing related to the special symbol / special electric accessory (waiting, fluctuating, determination, big hit, etc.)) is transmitted as a command. . Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 can determine the game state relating to the special symbol and the operation state of the special electric accessory when the power is restored. Then, the setting value command for notifying the setting value is stored in the buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S244), and the process proceeds to step S245.

  The command for notifying the set value may be transmitted not only at the time of power-on setting change / confirmation mode end processing, but also at the start of fluctuation or at the time of game state switching. At this time, the command of the set value to be transmitted when the power is turned on and the command to be transmitted during the normal game such as the start of fluctuation may be the same command or a different command (for example, the value of the upper byte differs).

  When the set value command is made different at the time of power-on and at the time of the normal game, the peripheral control board 1510 sends a series of commands including the set value (a change pattern command, a pattern command, etc.) at the start of the special symbol change display game. Upon receipt, it is determined whether the command is missing. By making the contents of the command different at the timing when the command is transmitted (when the power is turned on, during a normal game, or the like), the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether the set value is correctly received when the power is turned on, or is different from the set value when the change is started. It is possible to determine whether the variation pattern command or the design command has been lost.

  In step S245, it is determined whether or not a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area. If a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, a setting for displaying an error on the base display 1317 (or the setting display 974 in the case of a separate unit) is performed (step S246). On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the setting for displaying the current setting value on the base display 1317 (or the setting display 974 in the case of a separate unit) is performed (step S10). S247).

  Thereafter, ON is output to the common terminal of the LED of the base display 1317, and the base display 1317 is turned on by the segment signal output according to the setting in step S246 or S247 (step S248). As described above, after the timer interrupt process is started, the setting value change operation is determined (step S237), and thereafter, ON is output to the common terminal of the LED for each timer interrupt, and the set value is displayed (display of the set value). Switch). The setting value will be displayed without using the setting operation as a trigger. More specifically, the processing related to the setting change / confirmation processing is not performed as the processing at the time of power-on, but is performed in the same timer interrupt processing as when a normal game is started. Even if the power is restored after the setting key 971 is returned to the original state and the setting key 971 or the setting change switch 972 is not operated to the same position as that at the time of the power failure, the setting at the time of the power failure occurs It is possible to return to the state of change / confirmation processing. Further, in the setting change / confirmation processing, the processing executed in the normal game processing, such as the command transmission processing and the control of the dynamic lighting of the LED, can be shared.

  Then, a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S249), and the timer interrupt processing ends. That is, in step S249, the commands stored in the buffers in steps S242, S243, S244, and the like are actually output from the main control board 1310 as serial data.

  In the timer interrupt processing described above, the processing branches depending on whether the normal game is executed or the setting change mode (or the setting confirmation mode) is executed (step S232 in FIG. 181). May be provided, and different timer interrupt processes may be activated in the normal game state and the setting change mode and / or the setting change mode. The plurality of timer interrupt processes may partially include common processes (for example, a common subroutine is called in each timer interrupt process), or all may be configured by different routines. That is, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the timer interrupt processing 1 (for setting change / confirmation) is called, and in the normal game state, the timer interrupt 2 (for normal game) is called. It has a process (module) to be executed and a dedicated process (module) to be executed only by one timer interrupt process. Commonly executed processes include, for example, a switch input process for capturing the output of various detection switches such as a winning opening sensor, and a peripheral board command process for transmitting a command to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Further, the register bank may be shared between the process executed in the normal game and the process executed in the setting change mode. When the bank 0 is used in the main processing on the main control side, the bank 1 is used in both of the two timer interrupt processes. Since the two timer interrupt processes do not start simultaneously, one register bank can be shared. That is, in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 has two or more registers that can be switched by a bank, and a main control side main process that is repeatedly executed and a timer interrupt process that is periodically executed. 1 (during a normal game) and a timer interrupt process 2 (setting change mode) that is periodically executed, and is common to at least two processes of the main control side main process, the timer interrupt process 1 and the timer interrupt process 2. Use the registers of the bank.

  The timer interrupt process executed in the normal game and the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode may have the same execution cycle, but may have different execution cycles. Since the sampling of the switches in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode is performed only by the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, when the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process in the normal game state is 4 ms, the process is executed in the setting change mode. The execution cycle of the timer interrupt process may be early (for example, 2 ms) or late (for example, 8 ms). If the execution cycle of the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode is delayed, the cycle of the dynamic lighting control of the LED for displaying the set value is delayed, and the display mode of the set value is different from the base display during the normal game. become. When there are eight LED commons, if the execution cycle of the timer interrupt processing is 8 ms, the display cycle is 64 ms (display ON is 8 ms, OFF is 56 ms), and if the execution cycle of the timer interrupt processing is 4 ms, the display is The cycle is 32 ms (display ON: 4 ms, OFF: 20 ms), the OFF time is lengthened in proportion to the execution cycle of the timer interrupt processing, and the flickering of the LED is increased, so that the display mode with the base display during the normal game is performed. Can be recognized differently.

  When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started when the power is turned on, the timer interrupt processing 1 for setting change / confirmation is permitted, and the timer interrupt processing 2 for normal game is prohibited. On the other hand, when the power is turned on and the game is started in the normal game state (the mode is not shifted to the setting change / confirmation mode), the timer interrupt processing 1 for setting change / confirmation is prohibited, and the timer interrupt processing 2 for normal game is permitted. At the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change / confirmation timer interrupt processing 1 is prohibited, and the normal game timer interrupt processing 2 is permitted.

  FIG. 183 is a flowchart of a performance display process executed by the main control MPU 1311. In the performance display process, the performance (for example, base value) of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the base display 1317.

  The performance display process is executed at the above-described timer interrupt in the normal game state. Specifically, it is executed in the normal interrupt processing in step S233 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 181, and in the base display output processing in step S2087 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 saves a stack address in the game control area, sets a stack address outside the game control area (step S260), and saves a register used in the game control area in a register saving buffer (step S260). S261). The save destination of the register used in the game control area in step S261 may be a work area of the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area. The save destination of the register used in the game control area may be a stack area of the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the first power-on flag is normal (step S262). The initial power-on flag is a flag indicating whether an area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized (that is, whether the power is initially turned on), and 5AH is set when the area outside the game control area is initialized. Is done. That is, if the value of the first power-on flag is 5 AH, it can be determined that the main control RAM 1312 at the time of the first power-on is initialized (that is, the area outside the game control area is also initialized).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the parameter used for displaying the base value is within a predetermined range (step S263). For example, if the value of the LED common counter for switching the display digit of the base display 1317 is other than 0 to 3, it is determined that the value of the parameter is abnormal, and the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is determined in step S264. initialize.

  If the power failure flag is not normal or the value of each parameter is not within the predetermined range, the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is initialized, the power failure flag is set to 5AH (step S264), and the process proceeds to step S265. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is normal and the value of each parameter is within a predetermined range, various winning opening sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, 2557, and a discharge ball sensor 3060 are detected, and a base value is calculated ( Step S265).

  Then, it is determined whether it is the switching time of the section of the base value calculation (step S266), and if the switching time has come, the display mode is switched (step S267). Then, display data is created according to the display mode and stored in the buffer (step S268). Then, the display is controlled for each section. For example, the display control for each section includes displaying a test section having less than 500 out-balls, blinking when the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out-balls is less than a predetermined number (for example, 6000), and the like ( Step S269).

  Thereafter, the value of the register is restored from the register save buffer (step S270), the stack address in the game control area is restored (step S271), and the performance display process is terminated.

  Next, a notification mode of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal when the power is turned on, or in the setting change mode or in the setting confirmation mode, the pachinko machine notifies the pachinko machine of the pachinko machine. Inform the state in an easy-to-understand manner.

  The notification mode (for example, the display mode of the function display unit 1400) described below is output in a mode selected in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The notification is controlled by selecting a notification pattern together with the display setting on the base display 1317 in steps S246 and S247 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181). Specifically, it is executed in the setting display process in step S2069 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 190. The processing may be executed by providing a dedicated module for displaying the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1.

First, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, the main control RAM 1312 is controlled by a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 181). It should be noted that the abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is notified prior to the notification of other abnormalities and states.
Function display unit 1400 All lights are turned off, or all LEDs are flashed at the same cycle at high speed. Effect display device 1600 Sound of "RAM error" is displayed. Sound (sound effect) RAM abnormal sound is output (RAM abnormal sound is set change mode. Or the same as the notification sound other than the setting confirmation mode)
Sound (Voice) Outputs the sound of "RAM error". Volume The maximum volume frame decoration LED that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player. (Except for missing balls and stock notification LED) blinks in red Display panel decoration LED All lights off External output (security signal) Output test signal (gaming machine error signal) Output re-signaling Canceling condition By changing settings on main control board 1310 RAM is cleared or power is turned on again to peripheral control board 1510

Next, setting change notification when the main control RAM 1312 is activated in the setting change mode will be described. The setting change notification is controlled by a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 181).
Function display unit 1400 All lighting or all LEDs are flashed in the same cycle at medium speed. Effect display unit 1600 Displaying "Setting is being changed" sound (sound effect) Sound to notify setting change mode is output sound (voice) "Setting" The sound of "being changed" is output a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times). The maximum volume frame decoration LED which does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player. (Including lamps, excluding missing balls and stock notification LED) blinking in white Display panel decoration LED All off External output (security signal) Output test signal (gaming machine error signal) Output re-release Release condition for peripheral control board 1510 "A001H" was received as a closing operation command.

Next, setting confirmation notification when the main control RAM 1312 is activated in the setting confirmation mode will be described. The setting confirmation notification is controlled by a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 181).
Function display unit 1400 All lighting or all LEDs are blinking slowly at the same cycle. Effect display device 1600 Displaying the character of "Setting is being confirmed". Sound (sound effect) Outputs notification sound of setting confirmation mode (Notification sound of setting confirmation mode) May be the same as the notification sound in the setting change mode)
Sound (voice) The sound of "Setting is being confirmed" is output a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times). Output volume A maximum volume frame decoration LED that is not dependent on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player. Predetermined frame lamps (including top lamps, excluding ball out and stock notification LED) blinking in white Display panel decoration LED All off External output (security signal) Output test signal (gaming machine error signal) A predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the peripheral control board 1510 receives “A001H” as the power-on operation command.

In the notification of the three states described above, it is preferable that the abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is notified with the highest priority, and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are notified in that order. More specifically, the priorities may be determined in the order shown in FIG. In addition, the priority 1 has a high notification priority, and the priority 9 has a low notification priority. That is, when a plurality of notifications are to be given, a notification with a higher priority (a smaller number) is given. In addition, when a plurality of notification conditions having the same priority are satisfied and the notification conflicts, even if the plurality of conflicting notifications are switched and reported, the previously established notification is performed, and after the notification is released. If the conflicting notification satisfies the condition, the conflicting notification may be performed. Specifically, at the priority 3, the RAM clear notification and the setting confirmation notification do not occur at the same time, so that the notification does not conflict. At the priority level 4, the prize-ball excess abnormality notification and the normal electric auditors prize abnormality notification occur simultaneously, and the two notifications may conflict with each other.
Priority 1: RAM error notification priority when abnormality of RAM is detected 2: Setting change notification priority in setting change mode 3: RAM clear when main control RAM is initialized by operation of RAM clear switch 954 Notification (excluding RAM clearing by setting change)
Priority 3: Setting confirmation notification in setting confirmation mode Priority 4: Excessive prize ball abnormality notification priority when prize balls are paid out by a predetermined number or more 4: Normal number of continuous continuations or more when non-operated electric accessory When a prize is detected or when one or more prizes are detected at the time of activation of the normal electric porcelain, a normal electric prize prize abnormality notification priority 5: difference between the number of prizes and the number of discharges of the large prize port Is higher than a predetermined number, emission abnormality notification priority 6: vibration sensor abnormality notification priority when vibration is detected 7: door opening abnormality notification priority when door frame 3 or body frame 4 is opened 8: Magnetic sensor abnormality notification priority when the magnetic sensor detects magnetism Priority 9: When a winning is continuously detected for a predetermined number or more when the special winning opening is not operated, or when a single big hit is made, a predetermined winning or more is won. Notification of abnormal winning prize winning when detected

  Next, the above-described power-on processing (FIGS. 179 and 180) will be described in detail. FIGS. 186 and 187 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by main control MPU 1311 at power-on.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 starts processing at the address 8000, which is the start address of the program code, when the reset signal is released by turning on the power. The protection invalidity and the prohibited area invalidation of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protection register (step S2000). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and, when an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed, determining that the area is abnormal and resetting it. In order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the entire prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed by invalidating the prohibited area. Note that, when an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and when an access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset. Good.

  Next, a simple clear mode timer for a predetermined time is set as a watchdog timer (step S2001), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2002). Thereafter, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2003), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2004). Once the power failure clear signal is set ON and then OFF, the power failure signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

  Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2005). The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated after the peripheral control board 1510 is reliably started. If the employee of the hall erroneously interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 will be determined in a state where the employee of the hall is not intended. For this reason, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a register or the like as a temporary storage means at an early stage after the power-on processing starts, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 ends. By determining the state of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in a register or the like as a temporary storage unit later, even if an employee of the hall accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after turning on the power, Then, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 at the time of the power-on operation is reliably detected.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the power failure notice signal indicates that the power failure is occurring (step S2006). If the power failure notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, so that the process waits in step S2006 until the power supply voltage is stabilized.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S2007). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the setting can be selected in the stages from 1 to 6, the value of the work in which the setting value is stored corresponds to 0 to 5 (0 for setting 1, 0 for setting 6). In the case of 5), if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined that the value is within a predetermined range.

  If the set value is not within the predetermined range, the set value is initialized to 0 (step S2023), a value indicating the RAM abnormality (08H) is recorded in the set state management area (step S2024), and the reset signal of the pachinko machine 1 is set. Wait for initialization by. The set value is not within the range in which the checksum is calculated and is not erased by the RAM clear operation, so that even if the set value is abnormal, it is not corrected. For this reason, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether there is any abnormality in the set value, and if there is an abnormality, the normal game is not started. At the hall where the pachinko machine is installed, you want to initialize the game state while maintaining the set value (for example, clear the latent probability change (high probability non-time reduction) and return to the normal state with low probability time reduction) In some cases, a RAM clear operation may be performed. When the set values are initialized by the RAM clear operation during business hours, the power is shut down and the setting change mode is started to reset the set values and the business is continued, and the original set values are reset. There is a need. In order to avoid such trouble, the set value is maintained without being cleared by the RAM clear operation.

  On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, a sub activation wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, and the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires. (Step S2008). The waiting for the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 may be performed at any time after the power is turned on until the command is first transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, even after the setting value is determined.

  Thereafter, it is again determined whether the power failure notice signal indicates that the power failure is occurring (step S2009). If the power failure notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and the process stands by in step S2009.

  Further, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, and the determination result is stored in a register (step S2010). Specifically, a checksum calculated and stored from data used as a game control area (excluding data saved to the stack) in an area backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 when the power supply was last shut down, The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if they are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. If the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup has been performed normally (the power-off processing has been performed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when a power failure occurs. (The power-off process has not been executed normally), and it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality.

  If there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the information in the setting state management area is saved (step S2011), and a value indicating the RAM abnormality (08H) is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2012). .

  Then, of the register value in which the value of the PF port is recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2013). Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2014). If the setting key 971 has been turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, and the flow advances to step S2030 in FIG. 187.

  On the other hand, if the setting key 971 has not been operated and the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, it is determined whether the apparatus was in the setting change mode when a power failure occurred (step S2015). For example, when the value of the setting state management area saved in S2011 is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode.

  When it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2030 in FIG. 187.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that no power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2016). Specifically, the determination can be made using the determination result stored in the register in step S2010 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2031 in FIG. 187.

  On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2017). For example, when the value of the saved setting state management area is a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality, it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing.

  Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality process, the process proceeds to step S2036 in FIG. 187. On the other hand, when it is determined that no power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, a value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2018). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018, the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2012 is returned to the normal state. Also, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018, the value of the setting state management area when jumping from step S2016 and S2019 to step S2031 is different. Size can be reduced.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2019). If the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON, it is determined that a RAM clear operation has been performed, and the flow advances to step S2031 in FIG. 187.

  In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 08H is recorded in the setting state management area and is maintained until the power is turned off, so that the normal game process cannot be executed. At this time, if the power is turned off by performing a setting change operation after turning off the power once, the RAM abnormality can be canceled. That is, if it is determined in step S2014 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 have been operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from the value indicating a RAM abnormality (08H) to a value indicating a setting change. (02H) (step S2030), and the RAM abnormal state ends. As described above, the recovery from the RAM abnormality always goes through the setting change. In other words, since it is determined whether the setting change operation has been performed before determining whether the state at the time of the power failure occurrence is the RAM abnormality, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only by changing the set value.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, the game state information at the time of the power failure occurrence is stored in the power-on state buffer in order to restore the state before the power failure occurred (step S2020).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2021). If the setting key 971 has been turned ON, it is determined that a setting confirmation operation has been performed, and a value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2022), and FIG. Proceed to step S2036. That is, irrespective of whether the state at the time of occurrence of the power failure is the setting confirmation, if only the setting key 971 is operated (if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated), the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode.

  Steps S2018 to S2022 are executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated. Therefore, the determination of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2019) and the setting key 971 (Step S2021) may be performed first. That is, as illustrated, the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2021) after the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is determined (step S2019), or after the operation of the setting key 971 is determined (step S2021). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2019).

  Next, FIG. 187 which is a continuation of the power-on process (FIG. 186) will be described.

  If “YES” is determined in the step S2014 or the step S2015, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2030). Then, the area other than the set value and set state management area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2031). Thereafter, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2032). Specifically, since the determination result in step S2010 described above is stored in the register, the determination can be made in step S2032 based on the determination result stored in the register.

  When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is evacuated to the stack area in the game control area (step S2033). The RAM (work area and stack area) used outside is initialized (step S2034). Details of the RAM abnormality initialization processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2035).

  Thereafter, the functions of the devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S2036), and the hardware random numbers (for example, random numbers) built in the main control MPU 1311 are activated (step S2037). Then, a power-on setting process is executed (step S2038). Details of the power-on setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Finally, the timer interrupt is set to be enabled (step S2039), and the process proceeds to the main control-side main process (FIG. 188).

  FIG. 188 is a flowchart of the main control-side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control-side main processing is executed after step S2039 of the power-on processing (FIG. 187).

  First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure notice signal and determines whether a power failure has occurred based on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2040). If the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, and the random number update processing 2 is executed (step 2041). Details of the random number update process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. In the random number update processing 2, a random number other than the random number for performing the winning determination is mainly updated in the special lottery or the normal lottery.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is detected, the power-off process (steps S2042 to S2046) is executed. In the power-off process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the power failure occurred is executed. Specifically, first, the interrupt is prohibited (step S2042). As a result, timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, and writing of data to the main control built-in RAM 1312 is prohibited, and rewriting of game information is protected. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (Step S2043). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid / power failure clear / ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared. For example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the processing at the time of power-off at the main board side is reduced, and the processing at the time of power-off at the main board side can be surely ended.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held, and stores the calculated checksum in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312. (Step S2044). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. Note that the area for which the checksum is calculated is a setting state management (setting value) which may be changed in the work area in the game control area after the power is turned on and before the main control side main processing is executed. And the value of the setting state management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area.

  Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off process has been executed normally is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S2045). Thereby, the storage of the game backup information is completed. Finally, the RAM protection is enabled (writing is prohibited) and the invalidation of the prohibited area is written into the RAM protection register, and writing to a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S2046). (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and, when an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed, determining that the area is abnormal and resetting it. In order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the entire prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed by setting the prohibited area as invalid. Note that, when an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and when an access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset. Good.

  FIG. 189 is a flowchart of RAM abnormality initialization processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The RAM abnormality initialization processing is executed in step S2034 of the power-on processing (FIG. 187).

  First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP evacuation buffer outside the game control area (step S2050), sets the stack pointer value outside the game control area to the stack pointer (step S2051), The value is stored in the register save buffer outside the game control area (step S2052).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the initialization is performed at the time of the first power-on, based on the value of the first power-on flag at the time of the power-on (step S2053). The first power-on means that the power is turned on for the first time as the pachinko machine and that the power is turned on after the backup power supply is interrupted and the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 is deleted. For example, if the connection line between the main control board 1310 and the backup power supply (for example, installed on the main body frame 4) is disconnected, the supply of the backup power to the main control RAM 1312 is cut off, and the data in the main control RAM 1312 cannot be retained.

  If the initialization is performed when the power is turned on for the first time, the process proceeds to step S2056. On the other hand, if the initialization is not performed when the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined whether or not the discharge sphere to be calculated is outside the predetermined range (step S2054). If the discharge sphere to be calculated is outside the predetermined range, the process proceeds to step S2056. On the other hand, if the discharge ball to be base-calculated is within the predetermined range, it is determined whether the display parameter of the performance display monitor is within the normal range (step S2055). If the display parameter of the performance display monitor is within the normal range, the RAM abnormal initialization processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the calling source processing.

  On the other hand, if the display mode of the performance display monitor is outside the normal range, 00H is written to all the work areas outside the used area of the main control RAM 1312 to initialize it (step S2056), and 00H is written to all the stack areas outside the used area. Is written (step S2057), a predetermined value (for example, 5AH) is set in an initialization flag at power-on (step S2058), and the process returns to the calling source.

  FIG. 190 and FIG. 191 are flowcharts of the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2060). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which is used as a register group of bank 0, and the other is usable as a register group of bank 1, and performs bank switching. Without using the registers of both banks. The register bank 0 is used in the main processing on the main control side, and the register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, an instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but there is no need to execute an instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of the interrupt. Return from the stack area by executing the instruction. Therefore, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register returns to the original state by executing the RET instruction. When a configuration in which the state of the bank is not stored in the flag register is adopted, the bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, and the bank is returned to bank 0.

  Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not an interrupt is permitted, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting the interrupt to be enabled. It should be noted that the flag for controlling whether or not an interrupt is possible is set to an interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless the interrupt is permitted (such as the EI instruction) or the RETI instruction is executed during the timer interrupt processing, the interrupt is not permitted.

  Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, the value is set to 0 (step S2061).

  Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2062). In the switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and stored as input information in an input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

  The switch input process 1 in step S2062 is a process relating to a winning signal, and the switch input process 2 in step S2080 described later is a process relating to the input of a fraud detection sensor (magnet sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc.). For this reason, in the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, since the determination in step S2604 is NO, the winning detection is performed, but no illegality is detected. Note that even if a prize is detected, payout of a prize ball, display of a change, and the like are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by the employees of the hall, and it is considered that it is desirable that the fraud is not performed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode and that the fraud is not detected.

  Note that even in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may detect in the switch input processing 1 and monitor a specific type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect a fraudulent act of forcibly activating the setting change mode by, for example, radiating radio waves by a person who intends to perform fraud (Goto).

  Subsequently, random number update processing 1 is executed (step S2063). In the random number updating process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. 188. In addition to these random numbers, respective values for changing the initial values of the big hit symbol determining random number and the small hit symbol determining random number updated in the random number updating process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. Update the initial value determination random number.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2064). If a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2080 in FIG. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2065). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the time for turning off the LED is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the display switching of the LED is mixed appears. And flickering of the LED is prevented.

  Thereafter, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2066), and a test signal is output (step S2067). In step S2067, only the game state error signal may be turned ON, and the other signals may be turned OFF.

  Then, a setting process is executed (step S2068). Details of the setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Thereafter, a setting display process is executed (step S2069). Details of the setting display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, a peripheral board command transmission process for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2070). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area that is a transmission buffer of a plurality of bytes in a FIFO format, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2071). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, setting one word clears the watchdog timer. Thereafter, the bank of the register is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2072), and the process returns to the process before the interruption.

  Next, FIG. 191 will be described. If it is determined in step S2064 in FIG. 190 that the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the main control MPU 1311 performs switch input processing 2 for detecting the state of a sensor (switch) for detecting fraud. Is executed (step S2080). Specifically, a detection signal or the like from a magnetic detection switch 3024 for detecting a fraud using a magnet is read, and when a predetermined level (ON level or OFF level) continues for a predetermined time, the input information storage area Remember. Based on the detection state of each fraud detection sensor generated in the switch input processing 2, it is determined whether fraud has been detected in the fraud detection processing of step S2084. In the fraud detection process (step S2084), in addition to the fraud detection by the fraud detection sensor, a winning prize such as a large winning prize port or an excess of prizes in the ordinary electric accessory is also determined.

  Thereafter, a timer update process is executed (step S2081). In the timer updating process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 is turned on according to the variation display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the normal symbol variation determined in the normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process In addition to the time during which the ordinary symbol display 1189 is turned on in accordance with the display pattern, a payer ACK signal is transmitted to the effect that the payout control board 951 has successfully received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). When determining whether or not the ACK signal is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption cycle is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction processing is performed, the fluctuation time is reduced by 4 ms. When the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is accurately measured.

  Subsequently, a prize ball control process is executed (step S2082). In the prize ball control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and the calculated number is written to the main control RAM 1312. Also, based on the calculation result of the number of award balls, a self-check for creating award ball commands for paying out game balls or checking a connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is performed. Or create a command. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created award ball command and the self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data.

  Subsequently, a frame command receiving process is executed (step S2083). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error canceling navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release notification command based on a detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command receiving process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to that effect is sent to the payout control board 951 in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame state display command, an error release notification command, and the like), and stores the transmission information storage area described above. To memorize. Specifically, in the frame command receiving process, in order to perform notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951, the command system conforms to the command system for transmitting the command received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, the command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO) in the same manner as other generated commands. When a command from the payout control board 951 is normally received, a signal for controlling the output of the main ACK signal is generated. The main ACK signal is output directly from the output port to the payout control board 951 instead of the serial communication circuit.

  Subsequently, a fraud detection process is executed (step S2084). In the fraud detection processing, an abnormal state related to fraud (magnetism, vibration, winning abnormality, etc.) is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the game switch is not in the big hit game state and it is detected by the count switch that a game ball has entered the special winning opening 2005 or 2006, the main control program is executed. Creates a prize abnormal display command which is classified into an alert display as an abnormal state and stores it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  Subsequently, a command corresponding to a winning switch or a start-up switch is generated at the time of detection of the passage of various switches, and a switch passing command output process for setting the command in the transmission information storage area is executed (step S2085).

  Then, the flag register is evacuated to the stack area in the game control area (step S2086), and the base display output processing is executed (step S2087). Unlike other processes, the base display output process is a process executed using the second area outside the game control area, and is a common process that is not affected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1. For this reason, in order to ensure the independence of the base display output process, before and after the execution of the base display output process, predetermined data such as a flag register is evacuated to a stack area in the game control area, and the base display is output. It is not updated during output processing. After that, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2088).

  Subsequently, a special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed (step S2089). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, it is determined whether or not the random number value for the big hit matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, and the probability variation state is set based on the random number value for the big hit symbol. It is determined whether or not to shift. Then, when the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value, it is determined whether or not to open / close the big winning ports 2005 and 2006. When opening or closing the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 based on this determination, the game state where the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (or enlarged) so that game balls can be received in the special winning openings 2005 and 2006. As a result, the game state shifts to an advantageous gaming state for the player. In addition, when the certainty change condition is satisfied, the game state shifts to a probability change state, and when the certainty change condition is not satisfied, the game state changes to a game state other than the certainty change state. Here, the “probability variation state” refers to a state (high-probability state) in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state (low-probability state).

  Subsequently, a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process is executed (step S2090). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal has been input to the input terminal, a normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted, and it is determined whether or not the random number matches a normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM ("" Ordinary lottery ”). Then, it is determined whether or not to open and close the second starting port door member 2549 according to the lottery result of the normal lottery. When the opening / closing operation is performed according to this determination, the second starting port door member 2549 is in an open (or enlarged) state, so that the starting port 2004 is in a game state in which game balls can be accepted, and a game advantageous to the player is provided. Transition to the state.

  Subsequently, an output data setting process is executed (step S2091). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951, or the big hit game In this state, a drive signal is output to an attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) for opening and closing the opening and closing members 2107 of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the starting port (second starting port door member 2549), as a piece of output information to the hall computer, a probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information Output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, information output information during time reduction, start Various information regarding the game, such as a winning information output signal to output the (game information) signal and security signals to the external terminal board 784.

  In the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out-balls counted in the switch input process 2 (step S2080) is output from the external terminal plate 784. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal plate 784 every predetermined number of out balls (eg, 10 balls).

  In the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a normal symbol or a special symbol.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2070 in FIG.

  FIG. 192 is a flowchart of the setting process. When the setting state management area is not the value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state, the setting processing is executed in step S2068 of the timer interrupt processing, and mainly performs processing for changing the setting value.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2100). If the value indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the process returns to the calling source process without executing the setting process.

  If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the setting process is repeatedly executed, so that the process relating to the special symbol or the ordinary symbol is not executed, and the game cannot be played at all. This RAM abnormality is caused by performing an operation of activating the setting change mode with the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on again after the power is once cut off and the power failure processing is executed. And the RAM abnormality is eliminated. Then, by returning the setting key 971 to the original state, the setting change mode ends, and the normal game can be started.

  Also, when the power is turned on again, if an operation other than the activation of the setting change mode with the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 is performed, the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality in the setting state management area is maintained, The RAM abnormal state continues and the normal game cannot be started. That is, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality and enter the normal game state, it is necessary to always go through the setting change mode.

  On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2101). Specifically, it detects the edge of the setting key 971 from ON to OFF, or detects whether a predetermined period has elapsed since the change from ON to OFF.

  If it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position, the output time is set in the security signal output timer (step S2102), the setting state management area is initialized (step S2103), and the power-on setting processing is executed. (Step S2104), and the process returns to the calling source.

  When the operation of terminating the setting change mode (setting key 971 is turned off) is performed, the output time value is set in the security signal output timer, so that the delay time until the security signal is turned off after the end of the setting change mode is set. Provide. Therefore, even if the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed in a short time (for example, within one timer interrupt process), only the shortest output signal of the security signal is set in the security signal output timer as the output time value. The security signal can be reliably detected by the hall computer.

  In addition, when a fraud is detected during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, the security signal may be output for a period or time corresponding to the newly detected fraud while maintaining the security signal.

  Furthermore, if a power failure occurs during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, if a hot start is performed in the normal gaming state when the power is restored, a security signal for the remaining time is output and the RAM clear switch is operated to clear the RAM. Alternatively, when the RAM is cleared due to a RAM abnormality, the security signal for the remaining time is not output. This is because the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 resets the security signal output timer value and stops the output of the security signal.

  When the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during the output of the security signal, one of five patterns of hot start, RAM clear, setting change mode, setting check mode, and RAM abnormal state continuation is set.

  When the mode is shifted to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the activated mode ends, and the security signal is output until the delay time elapses. When the RAM abnormality state continues, since the setting change operation is not performed even when the power is restored, a security signal due to the continuous RAM abnormality is output. In the case of a hot start, a security signal is output for the remaining time.

Even when the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and the timer interrupt processing is performed after a predetermined time (for example, during the waiting time for starting the peripheral control board 1510). After the transition, the output of the security signal resumes. That is, in the following cases, even when the security signal is continuously output after the power failure occurs during the output of the security signal, a period for stopping the output of the security signal is provided for a predetermined period after the power is restored.
-When the power is restored by a hot start after a power failure occurs during security signal output due to fraud detection, etc.-After a power failure occurs during the security signal output due to RAM abnormality, the power returns and the RAM abnormality continues. -When a power failure occurs during security signal output in the setting change mode, the power returns and the setting change mode continues.- When a power failure occurs during the security signal output in the setting check mode, the power returns. The setting confirmation mode continues

  As described above, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs during the output of the security signal, by stopping the output of the security signal for a predetermined period after the power is restored, the hall computer side outputs the security signal to the security signal. It is possible to determine whether there has been an abnormality or whether the state accompanying the output of the security signal has been released.

  Further, in the setting confirmation mode in which only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends, regardless of the remaining time during which the security signal is output, and the delay time after the setting confirmation mode ends. After the elapse, the output of the security signal is stopped. Also, in the setting change mode in which the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated, the same processing as in the setting confirmation mode may be performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2105), and the setting change switch 972 is operated. It is determined whether it has been performed (step S2106). Note that the configuration change switch 972 may be configured to also serve as the RAM clear switch 954. As a result, when it is determined that a value indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area and that the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting value is updated by +1. If the set value exceeds the upper limit 6, the value is set to 1 (step S2107). Then, the process returns to the calling source process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting state management area (that is, the setting confirmation mode) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting value is updated. Without returning to the calling process.

  When the operation of the setting change switch 972 is determined (immediately or immediately after), it may be determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated to be ON. As described above, when the operation of the setting key 971 is determined when the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting change mode is set when a power failure occurs, and even when the setting key 971 is not turned ON when the power failure is recovered, the setting change switch 972 is not changed. It is possible to prevent the setting from being changed by the operation.

  FIG. 193 is a flowchart of the setting display process. The setting display process is executed in step S2069 of the timer interrupt process.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2110). If a value indicating a RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2111). On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that an error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2112).

  Thereafter, the driver is driven to output an LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter (step S2113) and to output display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or error display to the base display 1317 (step S2114). Then, the process returns to the calling source process.

  FIG. 194 is a flowchart of the power-on setting process. The power-on setting process is a subroutine, and is called and executed in step S2038 of the power-on process (FIG. 187) and S2104 of the setting process.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command, and sets the created command in the transmission information storage area (step S2120). The power-on operation command is a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting state management area as shown in FIG.

  Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area are set to 1, which is the initial value. The other bits may be set to 0 (step S2121). Setting the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area to 1 is because the bit of the switch is detected as 1 at the time of the next timer interrupt and the ON edge is incorrect. In order not to make it.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2122). If the value indicating the game startable state is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is either the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, or the RAM abnormality. Return to processing.

  On the other hand, if the value (00H) indicating the game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game can be started, and the work in the game control area depends on whether the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized. The area is initialized (step S2123).

  Thereafter, a power-on state command is created, and the created command is stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2124). The power-on state command, as shown in FIG. 202 (B), is a command for notifying, based on the recorded contents of the setting state management area, whether or not the normal game start is possible.

  Then, a power-on return destination command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2125). As shown in FIG. 202 (C), the power-on return destination command is a command for notifying a gaming state relating to a special symbol.

  Further, a set value command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2126). The setting value command is a command for notifying the setting value, as shown in FIG.

  In addition, the power-on state command, the power-on return destination command, and the set value command are transmitted together with the special symbol holding number command indicating the number of holdings of the special symbol change display game, and the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 transmit the special symbol holding number command. The display of the number of holds may be restored to the state before the occurrence of the power failure. The order of transmission of the special symbol hold number command is transmitted during the transmission of these commands, even after transmission of the power-on state command, power-on return destination command and setting value command, or before transmission of these commands. You may.

  Then, the process returns to the calling source process.

  The power-on setting processing is executed when the power failure is restored, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting check mode is performed, or when the setting change mode ends or the setting check mode ends. , The power-on state command, the power-on return destination command, and the set value command) are transmitted at the time of power failure recovery, which is neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode, at the end of the setting change mode, or at the end of the setting confirmation mode.

  FIG. 195 is a flowchart of the random number update process 2. The random number update process 2 is executed in step S2041 of the main process (FIG. 188), and mainly updates random numbers other than random numbers for performing a winning determination in a special lottery or a normal lottery.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the interruption prohibition (step S2131), updates the initial random number (step S2132), and sets the interruption permission (step S2133). Since the initial value random number is also updated in the random number update process 1 in step S2063 of the timer interrupt process, the interrupt is prohibited before the initial value random number update process so that the initial value random number update process is not interrupted by the timer interrupt process, Interruption is permitted after the initial value random number update processing. The initial random number is a random number for judging a big hit for a special symbol, a random number for a lottery for a normal symbol, a type of a symbol at the time of a special symbol big hit (low probability / high probability / time reduction / non-time reduction, etc.). ) Is a random number for changing an initial value for each cycle, such as a random number for determining ()).

  Thereafter, random numbers other than the hit random number (excluding the initial random number) are updated (step S2134), and the process returns to the calling source.

  FIG. 196 is a flowchart of another example of the timer interrupt process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The same reference numerals are given to the same processing steps as those of the timer interrupt processing described above with reference to FIGS. 181 and 182, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In another example 1 described below, the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized in the setting confirmation mode as well as in the setting change mode. In this alternative example 1, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is restored, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. It does not switch between the confirmation modes and has only a function as an operation to change the set value.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1, switches the register bank (step S2060), executes switch input processing 3 (step S2141), and details of the switch input processing 3 will be described later with reference to FIG. 197. I do. In step S2141, the switch input processing 1 of S2062 may be applied instead of the switch input processing 3 described with reference to FIG. 197.

  Then, random number update processing 1 is executed (step S2063), and setting change / confirmation processing is executed (step S2142). Details of the setting change / confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, switch input processing 2 is executed (step S2080), timer update processing is executed (step S2081), and prize ball control processing is executed (step S2082). Subsequently, a frame command receiving process is executed (step S2083), a fraud detection process is executed (step S2084), and a command output process at the time of switch passing is executed (step S2085).

  Then, the flag register is evacuated to the stack area in the game control area (step S2086), base display output processing is executed (step S2087), and the flag register evacuated to the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2087). S2088). Subsequently, a special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed (step S2089), a normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process is executed (step S2090), and an output data setting process is executed (step S2091). Further, a peripheral board command transmission process is executed (step S2070), the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2071), and the register bank is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2072), and the process returns to the process before the interruption. I do.

  FIG. 197 is a flowchart of the switch input process 3. The switch input process 3 is executed in step S2141 of the timer interrupt process, reads various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311, creates an ON edge, and inputs an input to the main control RAM 1312 as input information. It is stored in the information storage area.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the start address of the switch winning information data (step S2160), and obtains the number of times of processing repetition from the switch winning information data (step S2161). The number of repetitions of the process is the number n of blocks in the switch winning information data table. Then, the input port address specified by the switch winning information data is obtained (step S2162), and the input level data area address specified by the switch winning information data is obtained (step S2163). Further, input information is read from the obtained input port address (step S2164), and the read input information is corrected using a logical correction value designated by the switch winning information data (step S2165).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode by referring to the value recorded in the setting state management area (step S2166). If it is not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked by the mask value during the normal game specified in the switch winning information data (step S2167). With this mask, the bits of the input port used during the normal game can be obtained.

  On the other hand, in the case of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked by the mask value during the setting change / confirmation specified in the switch winning information data (step S2168). With this mask, only the bits used in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode among the input ports can be acquired.

  After that, input level data is generated from the bits obtained by the mask processing, and the input level data area specified by the switch winning information data is updated (step S2169).

  Then, edge data of the change from OFF to ON is generated from the input level data, and the input edge data area specified by the switch winning information data is updated (step S2170).

  Thereafter, the next block is set as switch winning information data (step S2171), and it is determined whether or not the processing for all switch input ports has been completed (step S2172). If it is determined that the processing has not been completed for all switch input ports, the process returns to step S2162 to process the next input port. On the other hand, when it is determined that the processing for all the switch input ports has been completed, the switch input processing 3 is completed, and the processing returns to the processing before the interruption.

  FIG. 198 (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch winning information data table.

  The switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 198 (A) is divided into n blocks (n is the number of repetitions of processing), and each block has an input port address, a logical correction value, and a mask during a normal game. The value, the setting change / confirmation mask value, and the address of the input level data area are included.

  FIG. 198 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input level / edge data area.

  The switch input level / edge data area includes n pairs of an input level data area address and an input edge data area address.

  Since the address of the input edge data area is set to the next address of the input level data area as shown in the figure, it is not specified in the switch winning information data. If the input level data area and the input edge data area are not arranged consecutively, the address of the input edge data area is set together with the input level data area in the same table. Although the addresses of the input level data area and the input edge data area are 16-bit (2 bytes) values, they are set as addresses of the input level data area and the input edge data area set in the switch winning information data table. The value may be a value of lower 8 bits (1 byte). That is, since the upper byte of the address is a fixed value that does not change with the value of the input level data area or the input edge data area, the upper byte is the upper byte of the address in the RAM area, and only the lower byte needs to be set. Can be reduced.

  FIG. 199 is a diagram showing another example of the structure of the switch winning information data table. FIG. 199 (A) shows an example of the structure of the switch winning information data table used in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 199 (B). Shows a configuration example of a switch winning information data table used in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

  Each of the switch winning information data tables shown in FIG. 199 is divided into n blocks (n is the number of repetitions of processing), and each block has an input port address, a logical correction value, a mask value, And the address of the input level data area. The switch winning information data table used in the normal gaming state and the switch winning information data table used in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode include ports having different logical correction values and mask values. That is, in the switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 198 (A), the mask value is different between the setting change mode (and the setting confirmation mode) and the normal gaming state, but the switch winning information data table shown in FIG. In this example, different switch winning information data tables are used for the setting change mode (and the setting confirmation mode) and the normal gaming state, and different switch winning information data can be acquired.

  To cope with such a configuration, the switch input processing 3 (FIG. 197) is changed as follows. For example, in step S2160, it is determined whether the mode is the setting change mode (or the setting confirmation mode) or the normal game state, and the start address of the switch winning information data is set according to the determination result. Then, in step S2166, the correction value is masked with the mask value specified in the switch winning information data in step S2167 without determining whether the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  FIG. 200 is a flowchart of the setting change / confirmation process. The setting change / confirmation process is executed in step S2142 of the timer interrupt process. In the setting change / confirmation processing shown in FIG. 200, the same processing steps as those of the timer interrupt processing described above with reference to FIGS. 181 and 182 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a value (00H) indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2064). If the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change / confirmation processing is ended, and the processing returns to the processing before the interruption. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2065), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2066), and a test signal is output. (Step S2067). Then, a setting process (FIG. 192) is executed (step S2068), and a setting display process (FIG. 193) is executed (step S2069).

  FIG. 201A is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the switch input port 2.

  The switch input port 2 is one of a group of ports to which outputs of various switches and sensors are input, and is configured by 8 bits. In the illustrated example, at bit 7, a reception confirmation signal (ACK) from the payout control board 951 is detected at level 1. In bit 6, at level 0, a power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is detected. In bit 5, when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, the signal level becomes 1. In bit 4, when the setting key 971 is turned ON, the signal level becomes 0. In bit 3, when the door opening sensor detects the opening of the door frame 3, the signal level becomes 1. In bit 2, when the magnetic detection switch (magnetic detection sensor) detects magnetism, the level becomes 0. Bits 1 and 0 are not used.

  FIG. 201B is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a setting state management area.

  As shown in FIG. 201B, the setting state management area is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used, and the upper 4 bits are defined. Not. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal gaming state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 08H when there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

  The setting state management area is not updated to 00H in the RAM clear processing by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. At the end of the setting confirmation mode, it is updated from 01H to 00H, and at the end of the setting change mode, it is updated from 02H to 00H. Further, if the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, the setting is changed from 08H to 02H when the setting change mode is entered by the next setting change operation at power-on, and from 02H to 00H when the setting change mode ends.

  FIG. 202A is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting state management area. For example, the power-on operation command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A0H, and the lower byte indicates the recorded contents of the setting state management area. The value of the lower byte stores a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting state management area. This is because the value of the setting state management area is 00H during a normal game, and if the value transmitted as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware abnormality in which the output becomes 0. Is set to 1.

  The power-on operation command is generated at least once in the power-on processing. Specifically, it is created once in the case of a hot start, RAM clear, and RAM abnormality, and in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, it is created twice: power-on processing and setting change / confirmation end.

  Upon receiving the power-on operation command, the peripheral control board 1510 performs notification in the above-described manner according to the setting confirmation mode, the setting change mode, and the state of the RAM abnormality (see FIG. 184).

  If the peripheral control board 1510 receives a game command during a normal game without receiving A001H in the power-on operation command, the game state may be inconsistent. It is determined to be invalid, and a game operation (such as an effect) for the game command is not started. However, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game command during a normal game is continuously transmitted a predetermined number of times), the peripheral control board 1510 may have missed the power-on operation command (A001H). It is preferable to cancel the invalidation of the received game command and perform an effect corresponding to the game command.

  In the state where the game command is invalidated, an effect that satisfies a predetermined condition among the received game commands is performed (for example, the effect corresponding to the received command is performed for the operation of the symbol, the lamp, the movable body, the voice, and the like). May be performed), and the fact that the game state is inconsistent may be notified using the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp. Also, the fact that the game state mismatch has occurred may be notified at a low volume. This is because a player who cannot understand that the inconsistency in the game state has occurred unless a certain effect is performed until a predetermined condition is reached, does not start the special symbol variation display game even if the player wins the starting opening. This is to prevent such a failure of the pachinko machine 1 and prevent a trouble that may occur in the hall. Even if the peripheral control board 1510 invalidates the game command, the main control board 1310 is executing a normal game process, so that the function display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol on the function display unit 1400 is normally displayed. Is done.

  FIG. 202B is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on state command. The power-on state command is a command for notifying, based on the recorded contents of the setting state management area, whether or not the normal game start is possible. For example, the power-on state command is composed of 2 bytes, and if the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is 01H, it indicates that the normal game can be started. The series code for each pachinko machine type may be notified using the lower byte of the power-on state command. For example, if bits 6 to 4 are used, eight series can be identified. The power-on state command may be another example shown in FIG. When the power-on state command illustrated in FIG. 220C is used, information recorded in the power-on buffer (game state before power failure) can be notified to the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 202C is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on return destination command. The power-on return destination command is a command for notifying a gaming state relating to a special symbol. For example, the power-on return destination command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is 31H, and the lower byte is a gaming state relating to the special symbol. Show. The power-on return destination command notifies the special symbol state and the operating state of the special electric accessory at the time of the power failure. The power-on return destination command is transmitted once when the power is turned on.

  FIG. 202 (D) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a setting value command. The set value command is a command for notifying the set value. For example, the set value command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A1H, and the lower byte indicates the set value. The set value command is transmitted at the time of recovery from a power failure that is not in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, at the end of the setting change mode, or at the end of the setting confirmation mode. Also, it is transmitted when the special symbol starts to change or when the game state changes (at the start and end of a big hit, a certain change, a reduction in time, etc.). Thus, even if the peripheral control board 1510 misses the set value command transmitted when the power is turned on, it is changed to the correct set value in a subsequent game (for example, the start of the change of the special symbol). The effect is not performed based on the value. The effect based on the set value is an effect that suggests the set value using an effect device such as a display, a lamp, a sound, a movable body, and the like. The setting value is indicated by generating the value. This setting value suggestion effect may be effected in other aspects of the effect exemplified below, and may include gas. As a set value suggestion effect, the effect display device 1600, which is an example of a display, displays an effect such as a notice corresponding to the set value, or changes the pattern variation mode from the normal state (for example, the start of the variation of the left and right middle symbol). And the timing of confirmation is different from the normal time (normally, each symbol starts to change at the same time, in the case of the high setting, starts changing in the order of left, middle, right, etc.) When used, a notification sound corresponding to the set value is generated with a predetermined probability at the time of starting opening prize, or a sound during production is generated differently from normal time (normal time is male voice, high setting is female voice). Voice etc.), etc.

  FIG. 203 is a diagram showing commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in various states. In the following description, n is a counter value indicating a processing state relating to a special symbol / special electric accessory, and m is a value corresponding to a set value.

  As shown in the figure, in the hot start in which the normal gaming state starts, the power-on operation command (A001H) → the power-on state command (3001H) → the power-on return destination command (310nH) → the setting value command (A10mH) Sent in order.

  When the main control RAM 1312 is initialized by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, a power-on operation command (A001H) → power-on state command (3001H) → power-on return destination command (3101H) → set value command ( A10mH).

  In the setting change mode, first, after the power-on operation command (A003H) is transmitted, the set value is changed in the setting change mode, and after the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, the power-on operation is performed. Command (A001H) → power-on status command (3001H) → power-on return destination command (3101H) → set value command (A10mH).

  In the setting confirmation mode, first, after the power-on operation command (A002H) is transmitted, the set value is checked, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, and then the power-on operation command (A001H). The power-on state command (3001H), the power-on return destination command (310nH), and the set value command (A10mH) are transmitted in this order.

  When the RAM is abnormal, first, a power-on operation command (A009H) is transmitted, and a setting change mode is activated by a setting change operation (setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are turned on) when the power is restored after the power is turned off. The power-on operation command (A003H) is transmitted. Then, after returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, the power-on operation command (A001H) → the power-on state command (3001H) → the power-on return destination command (3101H) → the set value command (A10mH). Sent.

  When the RAM is abnormal, first, the power-on operation command (A009H) is transmitted. If the setting change operation is not performed when the power is restored after the power is turned off, the RAM abnormal state continues and the power-on operation command (A009H) is issued. ) Is sent. Then, after returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, the power-on operation command (A001H) → the power-on state command (3001H) → the power-on return destination command (3101H) → the set value command (A10mH). Sent.

  As described above, when the main control board 1310 is activated in a normal game state, a plurality of commands indicating a return of the power supply (a combination of a plurality of commands in a predetermined order) are activated at predetermined timings. Sent to control board 1510. For this reason, when it is determined that the normal gaming state can be started after all of the series of commands from A001H to A10mH have been received, and when a part of the series of commands cannot be received (missed), It is determined that the normal game state cannot be started, and the start of the normal game state is notified.

  That is, in the same manner as the above-described effect in a state where the game command is invalidated, an effect that satisfies a predetermined condition among the received game commands is performed (for example, an operation of a symbol, a lamp, a movable body, a sound, etc. An effect corresponding to the given command is performed), and the fact that the game state mismatch has occurred may be notified using the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the set value command, the set value command transmitted at the start of the special symbol variation display game supplements the set value command that was missed when the power was turned on, and starts the normal game. May be.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the set value command, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the set value command when a predetermined initial value (for example, setting 1) is set as the set value when the peripheral control board 1510 is powered on. The setting value may be updated to a setting value corresponding to the command.

  The power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) both indicate a normal game startable state, and are normally transmitted continuously. It is enough to send it to the board.

  FIG. 204 is a diagram illustrating a state transition of a value set after the power is restored from the state before the power is turned off in the setting state management area.

  The power-on operation of the pachinko machine having the setting function differs depending on whether the RAM clear switch 954 is operated or the setting key 971 is operated. There are multiple patterns for convenience.

<Pattern 1>
An example of the operation shown in FIG. 204 (A) when the power is cut off immediately before the power supply is in the normal game state (VALID_PLAY = 00H) and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of recovery from power failure will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on when the power is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 stores the game control including the entire area stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used as the area. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a set value according to the setting change.

  When the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on and the setting key 971 is operated ON, the storage contents of the main control RAM 1312 are not initialized. The main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 01H. The base display 1317 displays the current setting value for confirming the setting.

  When the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on when the power is turned on and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF), the main control RAM 1312 stores the game control area including the entire area stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used as. The main control MPU 1311 is started in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 00H. In addition, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying a display indicating that the display has been switched to the performance display as an initial display when the power is turned on (for example, all blinking for 5 seconds).

  If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the contents stored in the main control RAM 1312 are maintained as they were before the power failure. Even if not all the storage contents in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 are maintained, at least an area in which information for returning to the game state before the power failure is stored (a storage in which information on the game is stored). Areas (special symbols, areas related to ordinary symbols, areas related to winning balls, random numbers generated by the program (variable pattern random numbers, initial random numbers, etc.)) need only be maintained, and are necessary to return to the gaming state before the power failure The area in which the non-information is stored may be in a state different from that before the power failure after the power is restored. The main control MPU 1311 is started in the normal game state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 00H. Note that the same value (00H) may be set regardless of the original value. In addition, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying a display indicating that the display has been switched to the performance display as an initial display when the power is turned on (for example, all blinking for 5 seconds).

<Pattern 2-1>
As shown in FIG. 204 (B), in the operation example 1 in which the setting change mode is set when the power is turned off immediately before and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is performed when the power is turned on. Regardless of the presence or absence of the setting key 971, the main control RAM 1312 initializes an area used as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. Note that the same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. Further, the base display 1317 displays a set value according to the setting change.

  Initialization of the main control RAM 1312 in the pattern 2-1 is performed by initializing an area used as a game control area including a stack area together with a storage area initialized by an initialization process already executed at the time of a power failure. Good. For example, when the power supply is cut off during the initialization processing of the main control RAM 1312, the remaining storage area where the initialization processing has not been completed may be initialized. On the other hand, irrespective of the progress of the initialization process at the time of the power failure, the area used as the game control area including the stack area of the main control RAM 1312 after the power is restored may be initialized.

  When a power failure occurs during the initialization processing, an area (for example, a RAM clear processing flag) is provided in the main control RAM 1312 for storing whether the initialization processing is being performed, and while the RAM clear processing flag is set, It is preferable to prohibit data writing to the storage area to be initialized.

  Further, the process of monitoring the power failure in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be repeatedly executed. Therefore, in addition to the main loop (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 22), for example, a power failure notice signal may be monitored by a timer interrupt.

  The power outage monitoring process and the process at the time of power failure can be performed as a common process in the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, and the normal game state, or can be performed as separate processes. The mode may be executed by a common process, and the normal game state may be executed by another process. In other words, among the three or more states (operation modes) in the operation of the pachinko machine, the power failure monitoring process and the power-off process may be shared in at least two states.

  As described above, in the pattern 2-1 in which the power is shut off in the setting change mode and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of restoration from power failure, the setting is always performed regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954. Start in change mode. For example, if a power failure occurs during a setting change operation in a hall, the setting change mode may be activated when the power is restored. However, the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 for activating the setting change mode when the power is restored may not be operated. For this reason, by controlling as in the pattern 2-1, it is possible to prevent an unintended state (different from the setting change mode) when the power is restored.

  For example, if only the setting key 971 is operated when the power is restored (the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated), the operation is started not in the setting change mode but in the setting confirmation mode, or only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. When the setting key 971 is not operated, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized to start the normal game state, or when no switch is operated, the normal game state is started. However, when the control is performed as in the pattern 2-1, the control always starts in the setting change mode regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954.

<Pattern 2-2>
If the main control RAM 1312 is in the setting change mode when the power is turned off immediately before and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of recovery from the power failure, the operation may be performed in another pattern shown in FIG. Good. When the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on when the power is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is used as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area to be used. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. Note that the same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. Further, the base display 1317 displays a set value according to the setting change.

  If the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of turning on the power is other than the above, at least if either the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) at the time of turning on the power, the main control RAM 1312 Does not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the game stop state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 08H indicating an abnormality of the main control RAM 1312. In addition, the base display 1317 displays an error (for example, an error code). The game stop state may be a game stop by executing an infinite loop in the main control MPU 1311 or a game stop by not executing the normal game process.

  That is, in the pattern 2-1, the mode is unconditionally shifted to the setting change mode regardless of the state of the setting key and the RAM clear switch after the power is restored. When the operation for starting the setting change mode is performed by the key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954, the setting change mode is started. When the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are in other states, the game cannot be executed (RAM abnormality). And That is, in the pattern 2-2, even if at least one of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 at the time of power return is operated, the normal game is not started as the RAM abnormal state, and the normal game is not performed after passing through the setting change mode. Start the game. For this reason, when the operation for starting the setting change mode is not performed, the normal game is not executed in a state different from the setting change mode such as the RAM abnormality or the setting confirmation mode, and the game stop state is notified to notify the hall stop state. May be prompted to operate the setting change mode.

  When the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are not initialized, and until the next setting change operation is performed. Stand by in the game stop state. The game stop state may be a game stop by executing an infinite loop in the main control MPU 1311 or a game stop by not executing the normal game process. After that, once the power is turned off, the setting key and the RAM clear switch are operated to the setting change mode and the power is turned on, the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H, and the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is updated. Clear the stack area in the game control area and start the setting change mode.

<Patterns 3-1 and 3-2>
An example of the operation shown in FIG. 204 (D) in the case where the setting confirmation mode is set immediately before the power is cut off, and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on when the power is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is set as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the used area. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a set value according to the setting change.

  When the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, and the setting key 971 is operated ON, the storage content of the main control RAM 1312 does not change. The main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H. Note that the same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. The base display 1317 displays the current setting value for confirming the setting.

  When the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF), the main control RAM 1312 is used as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area to be used. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 00H. In addition, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying a display indicating that the display has been switched to the performance display as an initial display when the power is turned on (for example, all blinking for 5 seconds).

  If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the stored content of the main control RAM 1312 does not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 00H. In addition, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying a display indicating that the display has been switched to the performance display as an initial display when the power is turned on (for example, all blinking for 5 seconds). In this case, the main control MPU 1311 may be activated in the setting confirmation mode as in a pattern 3-2 shown in FIG. 204 (E), and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H (the original value). The same value (01H) may be set irrespective of the setting), the base display 1317 may display the current setting value for setting confirmation.

<Pattern 4>
As shown in FIG. 204 (F), an operation example in the case where there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of restoration from power failure will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on when the power is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 stores the game control including the entire area stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used as the area. The main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is 02H. In addition, the base display 1317 displays for setting change.

  If the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of turning on the power is other than the above, that is, if at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) at the time of turning on the power, The contents stored in the control RAM 1312 do not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the game stop state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 08H. Note that the same value (08H) may be set regardless of the original value. In addition, the base display 1317 displays an error (for example, an error code).

  If there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of the immediately preceding power shutdown, if the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized before the power shutdown, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized again at the time of restoration from power failure, and (1) Initialize the devices built in the main control MPU 1311. (2) Restart the hardware random numbers. (3) It is preferable to execute the main loop after executing at least one of the interrupt permission settings.

  Further, even if the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality at the time of power-off immediately before, at the time of power-on, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 before the determination of whether the state before the power failure is the RAM abnormality (step S211 in FIG. 179). The presence or absence of the operation is determined. Then, when a setting change operation (the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are turned on) is detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is started. The state of the RAM abnormality is maintained regardless of whether the operation for starting up is performed, only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, or none is operated. That is, normally, when the setting change mode is started and when the setting check mode is started, the processing of the setting change mode and the processing of the setting check mode are executed in the timer interrupt processing, but the power is turned on again from the RAM abnormal state. In this case, different processing is executed between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In other words, when the power is turned on again after returning from the RAM abnormal state, when starting in the setting change mode, the processing in the setting change mode is executed in the timer interrupt processing as usual, but the operation is started in the setting check mode. When this is done, processing different from normal processing is executed in the timer interrupt processing.

  Thus, when the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the game cannot be started even if the power is turned on again. However, since the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, it is not necessary to initialize the main control RAM 1312 again.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 and its variations will be described using a time chart. The outline of the time chart described below is as follows.
-Time chart for normal setting change (Fig. 205)
-Time chart for normal setting confirmation (Fig. 206)
Time chart when the mode is changed to the setting change mode in the setting change mode at the time of power failure and the setting key 971 is OFF and the RAM clear switch 954 is OFF after the power is restored (FIG. 207).
Time chart when the mode is changed to the setting change mode in the setting change mode at the time of power failure and the setting key 971 is ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is OFF after the power is restored (FIG. 208).
Time chart when the mode shifts to the setting check mode in the setting check mode at the time of power failure and with the setting key 971 OFF and the RAM clear switch 954 OFF after the power is restored (FIG. 209)

  FIG. 205 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 205, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON and the setting key 971 has been turned ON, so that the main control MPU 1311 starts up in the setting change mode.

  First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

  The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at the timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until the timing T5.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts a customer waiting effect. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

  The main control MPU 1311 reads the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register and records 02H in the setting state management area at timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time elapses, and sets it. Move to change mode. The main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting the security signal. The display mode of the function display unit is as described in FIG. 184 described above.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

  The peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect (notification) in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 184 described above according to the received power-on command.

  When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value from N to N + 1, and displays the base display. Reference numeral 1317 displays the updated set value N + 1 (T6). Further, by the second operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972), the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N + 1 to N + 2, and updates the base display 1317. The subsequent set value N + 2 is displayed (T7). That is, in the setting change mode, the set value is changed in the range of 1 to 6 each time the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, and is updated to 1 when the set value exceeds 6. You.

  The hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the setting value has been changed. When detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, creates a power-on operation command (A0001H), and shifts to the normal game state. (T8). The created power-on operation command (A0001H) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing. By recording 00H in the setting state management area, processing during a normal game can be executed in the timer interrupt processing. Further, the main control MPU 1311 terminates all lighting of the function display unit 1400, and starts display in the normal game state. Further, the base display 1317 blinks all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. By displaying the base display 1317 in a predetermined manner at the start of the normal game state, the end of the setting change mode can be clearly understood, and operation errors at the end of the setting change mode can be reduced. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. Since the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in the setting change mode, the lower byte of the power-on return destination command is 01H. M of the set value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value as shown in FIG. The power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) both indicate a normal game startable state and are normally transmitted continuously. Send it to

  The peripheral control board 1510 knows from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect). Note that the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the power-on state command indicates that the normal game can be started, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the effect may be switched so as to start a customer waiting effect). During the predetermined delay time, it is good to perform the notification effect during the setting change by some effect devices. For example, the effect display device 1600 and the sound return to the effect of the normal game state, and the decorative lamp changes the setting effect during the setting change. Continue to produce information. In addition, as for the continuation of the notification effect by the decoration lamp, some decoration lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect, and the other decoration lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the effect of the normal game state. Good.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting change mode (T9). This is because if the setting change mode is completed in a very short time and the security signal is not output at all or only for a short time, the hall computer cannot grasp the transition to the setting change mode. This is to ensure.

  FIG. 206 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 206, the normal game state or the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is turned off immediately before, the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated when the power is turned on, and the setting key 971 is operated ON. The main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode.

  First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

  The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at the timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until the timing T5.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts a customer waiting effect. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

  The main control MPU 1311 reads the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, records 01H in the setting state management area, and sets it. Move to confirmation mode. The main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting the security signal.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

  The peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on command.

  The hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position after confirming the setting value. When detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal game state (T6). When the value of the setting state management area becomes 00H, the processing during the normal game can be executed in the timer interrupt processing. In addition, the base display 1317 blinks all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (310nH), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. M of the set value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value as shown in FIG. In the setting confirmation mode, since the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized in principle, the state before the power failure is transmitted as the lower byte of the power-on return destination command.

  The peripheral control board 1510 knows from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect). Note that the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the power-on state command indicates that the normal game can be started, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the effect may be switched so as to start a customer waiting effect). During the predetermined delay time, it is good to perform the notification effect during the setting change by some effect devices. For example, the effect display device 1600 and the sound return to the effect of the normal game state, and the decorative lamp changes the setting effect during the setting change. Continue to produce information. In addition, as for the continuation of the notification effect by the decoration lamp, some decoration lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect, and the other decoration lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the effect of the normal game state. Good.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting confirmation mode (T7).

  FIG. 207 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 207, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode because the setting change mode is set when the power is turned off immediately before. As shown in FIG. 204 (B), if the setting change mode is set immediately before the power is turned off, the main control MPU 1311 is in the setting change mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 at the time of turning on the power. It shows the case of starting.

  First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

  The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at the timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until the timing T5.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts a customer waiting effect. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

  The main control MPU 1311 reads the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register and records 02H in the setting state management area at timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time elapses, and sets it. Move to change mode. The main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting the security signal.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

  The peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. The peripheral control board 1510 resets its operation state by power-off and returns to the initial state. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

  When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value from N to N + 1, and displays the base display. Reference numeral 1317 displays the updated set value N + 1 (T6).

  Thereafter, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power failure and executes a power-off process (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 stops, the display of the set value on the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal stops (T8). In the power-off process, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the output port of the security signal and the output port to the base display 1317 by the program for the process at the time of power interruption, the output of the security signal is stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

  By turning off the output port in the power-off processing, power consumption during the power-off processing can be reduced, and resetting due to a drop in power (5 V) before the power-off processing is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off process. In addition, the output port of the signal to the solenoid for controlling the opening and closing of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, the second starting opening 2004 and the like may be turned off to stop the drive signal of the solenoid.

  Thereafter, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power supply rises (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

  The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and thereafter stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in a register at timing T12. Wait until the peripheral control board 1510 is activated until timing T13.

  The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value in the setting state management area. In the example shown in FIG. 207, since 02H is recorded in the setting state management area, regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954, the setting change mode is set at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed. Move to When shifting to the setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized again, as in the shift to the normal setting change mode. Since the power outage is monitored after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is completed, and the power outage process is executed thereafter, the RAM clearing process is not interrupted by the power-off process. In this case, since the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, the game control area may not be initialized by executing the RAM clear processing at the time of power recovery. After the initialization, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and starts outputting the security signal.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

  The peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the peripheral control board 1510 resets its operation state by power-off and returns to the initial state, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

  When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value, and uses the updated set value as a base. It is displayed on the display 1317.

  The hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the setting value has been changed. When detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal game state (T14). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, the processing during the normal game can be executed in the timer interrupt processing. In addition, the base display 1317 blinks all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. M of the set value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value as shown in FIG.

  The peripheral control board 1510 knows from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect). Note that the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the power-on state command indicates that the normal game can be started, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the effect may be switched so as to start a customer waiting effect). During the predetermined delay time, it is good to perform the notification effect during the setting change by some effect devices. For example, the effect display device 1600 and the sound return to the effect of the normal game state, and the decorative lamp changes the setting effect during the setting change. Continue to produce information. In addition, as for the continuation of the notification effect by the decoration lamp, some decoration lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect, and the other decoration lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the effect of the normal game state. Good.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) has elapsed from the end of the setting change mode (T15). This is because if the setting change mode is completed in a very short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the transition to the setting change mode cannot be grasped by the hall computer. This is to secure the output time.

  FIG. 208 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 208, even in the setting change mode when the power supply is turned off immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 is started in a different operation mode by operating the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on.

  First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

  The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at the timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until the timing T5.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts a customer waiting effect. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

  The main control MPU 1311 reads the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register and records 02H in the setting state management area at timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time elapses, and sets it. Move to change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting the security signal.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

  The peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. The peripheral control board 1510 resets its operation state by power-off and returns to the initial state. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

  When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value from N to N + 1, and displays the base display. Reference numeral 1317 displays the updated set value N + 1 (T6).

  Thereafter, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power failure and executes a power-off process (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 stops, the display of the set value on the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal stops (T8). In the power-off process, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the output port of the security signal and the output port to the base display 1317 by the program for the process at the time of power interruption, the output of the security signal is stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

  By turning off the output port in the power-off processing, power consumption during the power-off processing can be reduced, and resetting due to a drop in power (5 V) before the power-off processing is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off process. In addition, the output port of the signal to the solenoid for controlling the opening and closing of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, the second starting opening 2004 and the like may be turned off to stop the drive signal of the solenoid.

  Thereafter, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power supply rises (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

  The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and thereafter stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in a register at timing T12. Wait until the peripheral control board 1510 is activated until timing T13.

  The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch. The operation mode is changed depending on the level of the signal 954. In the example shown in FIG. 208, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned on so that the setting check mode is set when the power is turned on again. However, the state before the power failure recorded in the setting state management area is displayed. Since the value indicates the setting change (02H), the main control MPU 1311 restarts in the setting change mode at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board start waiting time has elapsed, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. Is done. Note that the same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. When shifting to the setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized again, as in the shift to the normal setting change mode. Since the power outage is monitored after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is completed, and the power outage process is executed thereafter, the RAM clearing process is not interrupted by the power-off process. In this case, since the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, the game control area may not be initialized by executing the RAM clear processing at the time of power recovery. For example, in FIG. 186 described above, if the state before the power failure is a setting change, YES is determined in step S2015, and the process branches to RESET_P_5A (step S2030 in FIG. 187) to execute the RAM abnormality initialization process (step S2034). However, if the process branches to RESET_P_7 (S2036 in FIG. 187), the state before the power is shut down will be continued without executing the RAM abnormality initialization processing step S2034. After the initialization, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and starts outputting the security signal. That is, in the time chart shown in FIG. 208, the setting change mode can be activated even when the setting key 971 is not turned ON. In other words, in the setting change mode, the setting change mode is activated by turning on the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on, and the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are also turned on when the power is turned on. The setting change mode can be started even if it is not ON.

  Although a broken line is shown at the timing T12, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned off when the power is turned on again, unlike the time chart shown in FIG. 00H may be recorded, and the game may be restarted in a state where the normal game cannot be executed (for example, RAM abnormality) without returning to the setting change mode. That is, in the operation pattern shown in FIG. 208, even in the setting change mode at the time of power failure, if the setting change operation is not performed at the time of power recovery, the RAM is restarted in a state of RAM abnormality. That is, if the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the normal game cannot be started unless the setting change mode is normally terminated at some point.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

  The peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. The peripheral control board 1510 resets its operation state by power-off and returns to the initial state. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

  When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value, and uses the updated set value as a base. It is displayed on the display 1317 (T14).

  The hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the setting value has been changed. When detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal game state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, the processing during the normal game can be executed in the timer interrupt processing. In addition, the base display 1317 blinks all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. Since the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in the setting change mode, the lower byte of the power-on return destination command is 01H. M of the set value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value as shown in FIG. The power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) both indicate a normal game startable state, and are normally transmitted continuously. It is enough to send it to the board.

  The peripheral control board 1510 knows from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect). Note that the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the power-on state command indicates that the normal game can be started, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the effect may be switched so as to start a customer waiting effect). During the predetermined delay time, it is good to perform the notification effect during the setting change by some effect devices. For example, the effect display device 1600 and the sound return to the effect of the normal game state, and the decorative lamp changes the setting effect during the setting change. Continue to produce information. In addition, as for the continuation of the notification effect by the decoration lamp, some decoration lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect, and the other decoration lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the effect of the normal game state. Good.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting change mode (T16). This is because if the setting change mode is completed in a very short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the transition to the setting change mode cannot be grasped by the hall computer. This is to secure the output time.

  FIG. 209 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 209, if the setting confirmation mode is set immediately before the power is turned off, the main control MPU 1311 starts up in the setting confirmation mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on.

  First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

  The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at the timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until the timing T5.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts a customer waiting effect. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

  The main control MPU 1311 reads the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register and records 02H in the setting state management area at timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time elapses, and sets it. Move to change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting the security signal.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

  The peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on operation command.

  After that, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects the power failure, executes the process at the time of power off, and stops the operation of the main control MPU 1311 (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 stops, the display of the set value on the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal stops (T8). In the power-off process, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the output port of the security signal and the output port to the base display 1317 by the program for the process at the time of power interruption, the output of the security signal is stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

  By turning off the output port in the power-off processing, power consumption during the power-off processing can be reduced, and resetting due to a drop in power (5 V) before the power-off processing is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off process. In addition, the output port of the signal to the solenoid for controlling the opening and closing of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, the second starting opening 2004 and the like may be turned off to stop the drive signal of the solenoid.

  Thereafter, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power supply rises (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

  The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and thereafter stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in a register at timing T12. Wait until the peripheral control board 1510 is activated until timing T13.

  The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value in the setting state management area. In the example shown in FIG. 209, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is operated to be in the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on again. However, the state before the power failure recorded in the setting state management area is Since the value indicates the setting confirmation (01H), the controller is restarted in the setting confirmation mode at timing T13 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H. Note that the same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. After that, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting the security signal. In other words, in the time chart shown in FIG. 209, the setting confirmation mode can be activated even when the setting key 971 is not turned ON. In other words, the setting check mode is activated when the setting key 971 is turned on when the power is turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off when the power is turned on, and the setting key 971 is not turned on when the power is turned on. It is also possible to activate the setting confirmation mode.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

  The peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on command.

  During the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, and even when the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, the main control MPU 1311 displays the set value without updating the set value. The display is continued at 1317.

  The hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position after confirming the setting value. When detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting confirmation mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal game state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, the processing during the normal game can be executed in the timer interrupt processing. In addition, the base display 1317 blinks all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (310nH), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510.

  The peripheral control board 1510 knows from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect). Note that the peripheral control board 1510 starts an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect) after a predetermined delay time has elapsed after the power-on state command indicates that the normal game can be started. You may. Also, the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the power-on state command indicates that the normal game can be started, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the effect may be switched so as to start a customer waiting effect). During the predetermined delay time, it is good to perform the notification effect during the setting change by some effect devices. For example, the effect display device 1600 and the sound return to the effect of the normal game state, and the decorative lamp changes the setting effect during the setting change. Continue to produce information. In addition, as for the continuation of the notification effect by the decoration lamp, some decoration lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect, and the other decoration lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the effect of the normal game state. Good.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting confirmation mode (T16). This is because if the setting change mode is completed in a very short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the transition to the setting change mode cannot be grasped by the hall computer. This is to secure the output time.

  FIG. 210 to FIG. 212 are diagrams illustrating a configuration example of the big hit determination threshold value table. The big hit determination threshold value table stores a big hit determination random number value hit determination threshold value for randomly selecting a special symbol big hit.

  The big hit threshold determination table shown in FIG. 210 includes a set value table selection address table and each set value determination threshold table. The big hit determination threshold table shown in FIG. 210 is an example in which a big hit is determined when the random number for big hit determination is larger than the threshold defined in the table.

  In the setting value table selection address table, pointer addresses of the determination threshold value table selected for each setting value are defined, and each data may be configured as a 2-byte value. If the upper byte is a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. Each set value determination threshold table stores a threshold at the time of low probability (normal state) and a threshold at the time of high probability (probable change state).

  At the time of the jackpot determination, a pointer address defined in an address table for selecting a set value table is obtained, and a threshold determination table for the current set value is selected using this value as an offset. Then, the threshold for big hit determination is acquired from the selected threshold determination table using the probability change state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) as an offset. If the random number for jackpot determination acquired at the time of winning of the starting opening is equal to or greater than the acquired threshold, it is determined to be a jackpot, and if it is less than the threshold, it is determined to be misaligned.

  The big hit determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 includes a set value table selection address table and each set value determination threshold table. The big hit determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 is an example in which a big hit is determined when the random number for big hit determination is in the range from the lower limit to the upper limit defined in the table.

  In the setting value table selection address table, pointer addresses of the determination threshold value table selected for each setting value are defined, and each data may be configured as a 2-byte value. If the upper byte is a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. The determination threshold table for each set value includes a lower threshold at the time of low probability (normal state), an upper threshold at the time of low probability (normal state), a lower threshold at the time of high probability (probable state), and a value at the time of high probability (probable state). Stores the upper threshold.

  At the time of the jackpot determination, a pointer address defined in an address table for selecting a set value table is obtained, and a threshold determination table for the current set value is selected using this value as an offset. Then, using the probability change state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) as an offset, it is determined whether the selected block is a low-probability block or a high-probability block in the threshold determination table. Get the threshold. If the random number for jackpot determination acquired at the time of winning of the starting opening is equal to or greater than the acquired lower threshold and equal to or smaller than the upper threshold, it is determined to be a big hit.

  The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 212 includes a low-probability setting value table selecting address table, a low-probability setting value determining threshold table, a high-probability setting value table selecting address table, and a high-probability setting. It consists of a judgment threshold value table. The big hit determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 is configured integrally with a low probability table and a high probability table, but the big hit determination threshold table shown in FIG. 212 is composed of a low probability table and a high probability table. It is configured separately.

  In the low-probability setting value table selection address table, pointer addresses of the determination threshold table selected for each of the low-probability (normal state) setting values are defined. Defines a pointer address of the judgment threshold value table selected at each set value of the high probability (probable change state). The data defined in each set value table selection address table may be configured as a 2-byte value. If the upper byte is a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. The determination threshold table for each set value for low probability stores a lower threshold value for low probability (normal state) and an upper threshold value for low probability (normal state). The determination threshold table for each set value for high probability stores a lower threshold value for high probability (normal state) and an upper threshold value for high probability (normal state).

  At the time of the jackpot determination, the address table for selecting the set value table for the low probability or the address table for selecting the set value table for the high probability is determined by the probability change state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability), and the determination is made. The setting value is acquired as an offset from the address table for selecting the setting value table, and the judgment threshold table corresponding to the current setting value is selected based on the acquired offset. If the random number for jackpot determination acquired at the time of winning of the starting opening is equal to or greater than the acquired lower threshold and equal to or smaller than the upper threshold, it is determined to be a big hit.

[12-17. Another example 2 of setting change / confirmation processing]
Next, another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function will be described. In the embodiment described below, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. However, the initializing function of the original main control RAM 1312 of the RAM clear switch 954, In order to distinguish between the setting change function and the setting change function, an operation for changing the setting value may be described as a setting change switch 972.

  FIGS. 213 and 214 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when power is turned on.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 starts processing at the address 8000, which is the start address of the program code, when the reset signal is released by turning on the power. The protection disable and the prohibited area disable of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protect register (step S2200). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and, when an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed, determining that the area is abnormal and resetting it. In order to release the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, access to the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 is enabled by disabling the prohibited area. Note that, when an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and when an access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset. Good.

  Next, the simple clear mode timer for a predetermined time is set as a watchdog timer (step S2201), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2202). Thereafter, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2203), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2204). Once the power failure clear signal is set ON and then OFF, the power failure signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

  Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read out from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2205). As the register, one of a plurality of general-purpose registers (storage means for temporarily storing information relating to the operation in the operation of the process) provided in the main control MPU 1311 may be used. The general-purpose register is divided into bank 0 and bank 1, and the register of bank 0 is used in step S2205. The register is provided in the main control RAM 1312 and is erased without retaining information at the time of power failure, and is different from the RAM area where information is backed up at the time of power failure. The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated after the peripheral control board 1510 is reliably started. If the employee of the hall erroneously interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 will be determined in a state where the employee of the hall is not intended. For this reason, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a register or the like as a temporary storage means at an early stage after the power-on processing starts, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 ends. By determining the state of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in a register or the like as a temporary storage unit later, even if an employee of the hall accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after turning on the power, Then, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 at the time of the power-on operation is reliably detected.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the power failure notice signal indicates that the power failure is occurring (step S2206). If the power failure notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, so that the process waits in step S2206 until the power supply voltage is stabilized.

  Thereafter, a sub-activation wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires, and the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (step S2207). Waiting for the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 may be performed at any time during a period from power-on to transmission of a command to the peripheral control board 1510 for the first time.

  Thereafter, it is determined again whether the power failure notice signal indicates that the power failure is occurring (step S2208). If the power failure notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and the process stands by in step S2208.

  Thereafter, a set value confirmation process is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range, and it is determined whether the value of the set state management area is within the normal range (step S2209). Details of the setting value confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Thereafter, the flag register is saved to the stack area in the game control area (step S2210). This is because information used in one process is not affected by the other process in order to ensure the independence of the process outside the game control region and the process inside the game control region. Thereafter, a power-on-out-of-game-area RAM confirmation process is executed to determine an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2211). Details of the RAM check processing outside the game area at power-on will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2212).

  Thereafter, the RAM abnormality determination result value is provisionally set in the C register (step S2213), and the RAM abnormality value (03H) in the setting state management area is provisionally set in the B register (step S2214). The B and C registers used in steps S2213 and S2214 are general-purpose registers. It should be noted that the general-purpose register of bank 0 is used in the processing at power-on.

  In the second embodiment, the value set in the setting state management area is different from that shown in FIG. 201B in the above-described embodiment, and if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 as shown in FIG. 03H is recorded. That is, the setting state management area of the other example 2 is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used, and the upper 4 bits are not defined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal gaming state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 03H when the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality.

  The setting state management area is not updated to 00H in the RAM clear processing by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. At the end of the setting confirmation mode, it is updated from 01H to 00H, and at the end of the setting change mode, it is updated from 02H to 00H. Further, if the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, the setting is changed from 03H to 02H when the setting change mode is entered by the next setting change operation at power-on, and from 02H to 00H when the setting change mode ends.

  Further, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the determination result is stored in the C register (steps S2215, S2216), and the process proceeds to step 2219. Specifically, a checksum calculated and stored from data used as a game control area (excluding data saved to the stack) in an area backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 when the power supply was last shut down, The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if they are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. If the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup has been performed normally (the power-off processing has been performed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when a power failure occurs. (The power-off process has not been executed normally), and it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality.

  If there is no abnormality in both the game control area and the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM normality determination result value is provisionally set in the C register (step S2217), and the information of the setting state management area is stored in the B register. Is set (step S2218), and the process proceeds to step 2219.

  Thereafter, a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2219).

  Then, of the register value in which the value of the PF port is recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2220). As the register for storing the value of the PF port, a general-purpose register different from the register provisionally set in S2213 and S2214 is used. Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2221). If the setting key 971 has been turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, and the flow advances to step S2230.

  On the other hand, if the setting key 971 has not been operated and the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, it is determined whether or not the apparatus was in the setting change mode when a power failure occurred (step S2222). For example, when the value of the setting state management area is in the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode.

  If it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2230.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that no power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and outside the game control area (step S2223). For example, an abnormality in the game control area can be determined using the determination results stored in the C register in steps S2213 and S2217 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 or outside the game control area, the process proceeds to step S2236.

  On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in both the game control area and the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2224). For example, if the value of the saved setting state management area is a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality, it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing.

  Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process proceeds to step S2236. On the other hand, when it is determined that no power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, a value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2225). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2225, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2214 is returned to the normal state. Also, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2225, the value of the setting state management area when jumping from step S2226 and S2231 to step S2235 is different. As described above, since the value of the setting state management area is different between the normal RAM clearing process and the RAM clearing process accompanying the setting change process, the caller can be distinguished even if the program for both RAM clearing processes is common. Therefore, there is no need to provide a separate program, and the size of the program can be reduced.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2226). If the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON, the process proceeds to step S2235.

  In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the operation of the setting key 971, and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area, and 03H is maintained until the power is turned off, so that the normal game process cannot be executed. At this time, if the power is turned off by performing a setting change operation after turning off the power once, the RAM abnormality can be canceled. That is, if it is determined in step S2221 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 have been operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from the value indicating RAM abnormality (03H) to a value indicating setting change. (02H) (step S2230), and the RAM abnormal state ends. As described above, the recovery from the RAM abnormality always goes through the setting change. In other words, since it is determined whether the setting change operation has been performed before determining whether the state at the time of the power failure occurrence is the RAM abnormality, the RAM abnormality can be eliminated only when the setting value is changed.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, the information of the gaming state at the time of the power failure occurrence is stored in the power-on state buffer in order to restore the state before the power failure occurred (step S2227).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2228). If the setting key 971 has been turned ON, it is determined that a setting confirmation operation has been performed, and a value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2229), and the flow proceeds to S2236. . That is, even if the state at the time of the occurrence of the power failure is the setting confirmation mode, if the setting key 971 is not operated when the power is turned on, the normal game state is set. In addition, when the state at the time of power failure occurrence is the setting confirmation mode, and the setting key 971 is not operated when the power is turned on, the game may shift to the same power failure confirmation mode as before the power failure occurrence, instead of the normal game state.

  Steps S2225 to S2229 are processes executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated. Therefore, the determination of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2226) and the setting key 971 (Step S2228) may be performed first. That is, as illustrated, the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2228) after the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is determined (step S2226), or after the operation of the setting key 971 is determined (step S2228). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2226).

  If “YES” is determined in the step S2221 or the step S2222, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2230). Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2231). For example, an abnormality outside the game control area can be determined based on the RAM abnormality determination result set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area in step S2266 described above. As a result, if there is no abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2235.

  On the other hand, if there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, a RAM clear process outside the game control area is executed. That is, the flag register is retracted to the stack area in the game area (step S2322), and the RAM abnormal processing outside the game area is executed (step S2233). Details of the processing when the RAM is out of the game area are abnormal will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area in step S2232 is restored (step S2234).

  Then, the setting value in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the area other than the setting state management area, and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2235). That is, the RAM clear processing outside the game control area is not executed unless the setting is changed. When the RAM is out of the game control area, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area as in the case of the RAM in the game control area, and the game is stopped. I cannot do it. However, while the condition for clearing the RAM outside the game control area is only the setting change, the condition for clearing the RAM within the game control area is the setting change and the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (even when no RAM abnormality has occurred). (When the RAM is forcibly cleared by the operation of the employee).

  Excluding the setting value and the setting state management area in the RAM clearing process in the game area in step S2235 causes damage to the hall side when the setting value is set high by an illegal RAM clear operation by the player. That is, if a failure (RAM abnormality) occurs during the game with the high setting and the game is stopped, the RAM clear operation changes the setting from the high setting to the low setting, causing damage to the player.

  Thereafter, all command buffers are initialized (step S2236). This is because when the power is turned off without clearing the RAM after the power is turned off while the command is stored in the command buffer, the unsent command stored in the command buffer is transmitted. For example, when the power is turned off during the transmission of the fluctuation command, the symbol command may be transmitted, but the subsequent fluctuation pattern command may not be transmitted. When only the variation pattern command is transmitted when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 may be determined to be abnormal. Further, if an untransmitted command in the processing related to the setting change is stored in the command buffer, the command that has not been transmitted during the setting processing after the power is restored is transmitted, so that the peripheral control board 1510 can execute the command based on the command. There is a possibility of malfunction by setting the game state. In order to prevent the occurrence of such an abnormality, the command buffer is initialized in step S2236.

  Although the command buffer is initialized in step S2236, the command buffer may be cleared only when starting the setting change process and when starting the setting confirmation process. In the setting change process, since the command buffer is cleared along with the initialization of the main control RAM 1312, it is not necessary to separately clear the command buffer. However, in the setting confirmation mode, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized. Therefore, it is preferable to clear the command buffer when shifting to the setting confirmation mode.

  After that, the functions of the devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S2237), and the hardware random numbers (for example, hit random numbers) built in the main control MPU 1311 are started (step S2238). By starting the hardware random number in step S2238, the hardware random number is updated also in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. However, the hardware random number is started when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. You may. Then, a power-on setting process is executed (step S2239). Details of the power-on setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Finally, the timer interrupt is set to be enabled (step S2240), and the process proceeds to the main control side main process (FIG. 221).

  FIG. 215 is a flowchart of the setting value confirmation process. The setting value confirmation processing is executed in step S2209 of the power-on processing (FIG. 213), and determines whether the setting value of the setting state management area is within the normal range and determines whether the value of the setting state management area is within the normal range. I do. Note that the set value confirmation process may be executed when the power is turned on, when the setting change mode ends, or when the setting confirmation mode ends. Also, it may be executed at the start of the special symbol change or at the time of the change of the game state (at the start and end of the big hit, the certainty change, the time saving, etc.).

  In the setting value confirmation process, first, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value other than the value originally recorded in the setting state management area is set (step S2250). As shown in FIG. 220A, 00H to 03H are recorded in the setting state management area. If a value of 04H or more is set, it is abnormal, and the process proceeds to step S2252.

  On the other hand, if a normal value (03H or less) is set in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting value is within a predetermined range (step S2251). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the setting can be selected in the stages from 1 to 6, the value of the work in which the setting value is stored corresponds to 0 to 5 (0 for setting 1, 0 for setting 6). 5) In the case, if a value of 6 or more is stored, it is determined that the value is outside the predetermined range.

  If the set value is out of the predetermined range, a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the set state management area (step S2252), the set value is initialized to 0 (step S2253), and the process returns to the power-on state. . On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, the process returns to the power-on process.

  Regarding the values recorded in the set state management area and the set values, whether the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal is determined even during the progress of the game (at the start of each change, at the time of switching the game state, etc.). For this reason, the condition for determining that the RAM is abnormal with respect to the set state management area and the set value during the game, and the RAM abnormality when the power is turned on (the work area in the game area excluding the set state management area and the set value, and the RAM outside the game area) The two conditions that are determined to be (work RAM abnormality) are different. The two RAM abnormality determination conditions may be partially the same. For example, when it is determined whether the setting state management area and the setting value are abnormal even when the power is turned on, it can be said that the two determination conditions are partially the same.

  As described above, the RAM abnormality determination conditions are different because the determination of the RAM abnormality relating to the set value is performed only when the power is turned on. This is because it is desirable to detect an abnormality at an early stage and shorten the period in which the disadvantage occurs, since the disadvantage occurs to the user.

  In addition, by substituting a RAM abnormality determination process relating to the set state management area and the set value during the game into a subroutine, the subroutine is called as necessary during the progress of the game to determine the RAM abnormality, whereby the same program is executed. The size of the program can be reduced without providing it at a location.

  Further, although the setting state management area is excluded from the RAM abnormality determination target when the power is turned on, the RAM abnormality determination target may be handled in the same manner as other areas of the main control RAM 1312. By setting the setting state management area as a RAM abnormality determination target when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is set before the power failure, and when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal when the power is restored, the RAM abnormality has priority. For this reason, if an abnormality (that is, a RAM abnormality) occurs in the value of the setting state management area, it is desirable to initialize the value recorded in the setting state management area. In this case, the storage area of the main control RAM 1312 in which the set value is stored may be a RAM abnormality determination target when the power is turned on or may not be a RAM abnormality determination target.

  The priority in the determination at the time of turning on the power is such that the RAM abnormality has the highest priority and the normal game state has the lowest priority. Furthermore, entering the setting change mode has a higher priority than entering the setting confirmation mode or executing the RAM clear processing by the RAM clear operation. As described above, by executing the determination processing in the order of the priorities of the states to be derived, a state having a high priority can be accurately derived even when a plurality of conditions are satisfied after the power is restored.

  FIG. 216 is a flowchart of RAM check processing outside the game area at power-on. The processing for checking the RAM outside the game area at power-on is executed in step S2211 of the processing at power-on (FIG. 213), and determines an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP evacuation buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2260), and sets the stack pointer value outside the game area value as the stack pointer (step S2261). Then, all the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the process of the calling source are stored in the register save buffer outside the game area (step S2262). In the processing executed outside the game control area, a stack area outside the game control area may be used as an evacuation buffer for storing all registers.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized when the power is turned on for the first time (step S2263). Specifically, if the value of the power down check area (EX_PDIND) is 5 AH, it can be determined that the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized by turning on the power for the first time or the like.

  If the main control RAM 1312 has not been initialized by turning on the power for the first time or the like, the process proceeds to step S2266 without executing steps S2264 to S2265. On the other hand, if the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized at the first power-on or the like, the checksum outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is calculated (step S2264), and whether the calculated checksum is normal or not. Is determined (step S2265).

  If the calculated checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S2267. On the other hand, if the calculated checksum is abnormal, the RAM abnormality determination result value (01H) is set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area (step S2266), and the flow proceeds to step S2271. In addition, based on the value set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area in S2266, the RAM abnormality outside the game control area is determined in S2231.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the checksum calculated in step S2265 is normal, the LED check timer is set to 5 seconds, the LED check timer is started (step S2267), and the blinking cycle value (600) is set in the LED blinking cycle timer. Milliseconds) (step S2268), and the mode switching time (5 seconds) is set in the mode switching time timer (step S2269). The LED blinking cycle timer is a timer for blinking and displaying the first two digits (or all four digits) of the base display 1317, and becomes one blinking cycle when the LED blinking cycle timer times out. The mode switching time timer is a timer for controlling the mode switching in the base display 1317, and switches to the base display mode when the mode switching time timer times out.

  Thereafter, the performance display monitor display management area is set to 0 and initialized (step S2270), and the flow advances to step S2271.

  Thereafter, the power down check area is initialized to 00H (step S2271).

  Then, all the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the processing of the caller saved in the register save buffer outside the game area are restored (step S2272), and the SP save buffer outside the game area is restored to the SP save buffer. The saved stack pointer value is restored (step S2273), and the process returns to the power-on process.

  FIG. 217 is a flowchart of the processing when the RAM outside the game area is abnormal. The RAM abnormality processing outside the game area is executed in step S2233 of the power-on processing (FIG. 214), and an area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is initialized.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP evacuation buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2280), sets the stack pointer value outside the game area as the stack pointer (step S2281), All register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the process of the calling source are stored in a register save buffer outside the game area (step S2282). In the processing executed outside the game control area, a stack area outside the game control area may be used as an evacuation buffer for storing all registers.

  Then, an out-of-use-area RWM initialization process is executed to initialize an area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2283). Details of the out-of-use-area RWM initialization processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Thereafter, the RAM normality determination value (00H) is set in the RAM abnormality determination area (EX_RWMERERROR) outside the game area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2284). Based on the value set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area in step S2284, it is determined in step S2231 whether the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal at the next power-on.

  Then, the LED check timer is set to 5 seconds, the LED check timer is started (step S2285), the blinking cycle value (600 milliseconds) is set to the LED blinking cycle timer (step S2286), and the mode is set to the mode switching time timer. The switching time (5 seconds) is set (step S2287). These timer values are initial settings for displaying the base value on the base display 1317.

  Then, all register values saved in the register save buffer outside the game area (register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the process of the caller saved in step S2262) are restored (step S2288). The stack pointer value saved in the SP save buffer outside the game area is restored (step S2289), and the process returns to the power-on process of the caller.

  FIG. 218 is a flowchart of the out-of-use-area RWM initialization process. The out-of-use-area RWM initialization processing is executed in step S2283 of the out-of-game-area RAM abnormality processing, and initializes an area of the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 writes and initializes 00H in a work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2290). Then, 00H is written to the stack area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 to initialize it (step S2291). After that, the process returns to the abnormal RAM process outside the game area.

  FIG. 219 is a flowchart of the power-on setting process. The power-on setting process is a subroutine, is executed in step S2239 of the power-on process (FIG. 214), and performs an initial setting at power-on.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command, and sets the created command in the transmission information storage area (step S2300). The power-on operation command is a command composed of two bytes for notifying the recorded contents of the setting state management area, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 220 (B). The upper byte is A0H and the lower byte is the setting state management. It is a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the area.

  Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area are set to 1, which is the initial value. The other bits may be set to 0 (step S2301). Setting the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area to 1 is because the bit of the switch is detected as 1 at the time of the next timer interrupt and the ON edge is incorrect. In order not to make it.

  Next, the backup flag is cleared (step S2302).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2303). If the value indicating the game startable state is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is either the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, or the RAM abnormality. Return to processing.

  On the other hand, if the value (00H) indicating the game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game can be started, and the work in the game control area depends on whether the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized. The area is initialized (step S2304).

  Thereafter, a power-on state command is created, and the created command is stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2305). As shown in FIG. 220 (C), the power-on state command is a command composed of 2 bytes, where the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is before power failure.

  Then, a power-on return destination command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2306). The power-on return destination command is, as shown in FIG. 202 (C), a command composed of 2 bytes for notifying a gaming state relating to a special symbol, and the upper byte is 31H and the lower byte is a special command when a power failure occurs. The state of the symbol and the operation state of the special electric accessory are shown. The power-on return destination command is transmitted once when the power is turned on.

  Further, a set value command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2307). As shown in FIG. 202 (D), the set value command is a command composed of two bytes for notifying the set value. The upper byte is A1H and the lower byte is the set value.

  In addition, the power-on state command, the power-on return destination command, and the set value command, as well as the special symbol holding number command indicating the number of holdings of the special symbol variation display game are transmitted, and the holding number display is turned off on the effect display device 1600. The state before the occurrence may be restored. In addition, the transmission order of the special symbol hold number command is transmitted during the transmission of these commands, even after transmission of the power-on status command, power-on return destination command and setting value command, or before transmission of these commands. You may.

  Then, the process returns to the calling source process.

  The power-on setting process is always executed regardless of the setting change mode. The power-on setting process is called from the setting process (FIG. 224) when the setting key 971 is detected to be OFF and the setting change / confirmation process ends. At this time, since 00H is recorded in the setting state management area, all the processes from S2300 to S2307 are executed.

  When the setting change / confirmation process is executed, the power-on operation command is transmitted twice because the power-on setting process is called from step S2239 of the power-on process and step S2355 of the setting process. On the other hand, when the setting change / confirmation processing is not executed, the power-on operation command is transmitted once only by the power-on setting processing called from step S2239 of the power-on processing. The power-on operation command is transmitted in order for the peripheral control board 1510 to identify the state of the main control board 1310 (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM abnormality, etc.). By receiving the command, the peripheral control board 1510 performs a notification corresponding to a state such as a setting change mode, a setting confirmation mode, or a RAM abnormality.

  In the setting / confirmation change mode, the setting adjustment function by the player (for example, adjustment of volume and brightness by operating a button provided on the door frame 3) is stopped, and adjustment by the employee of the hall (peripheral control board box) Adjustment of volume and brightness by the volume provided in 1520) may be effective. Specifically, the setting adjustment function by the player may be stopped until the power-on operation command indicating the normal game state is received.

  In any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the full screen of the effect display device 1600 may be used to display whether the mode is the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, or the RAM abnormal state. In this case, a voice message indicating whether the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be output. Further, the notification may be made using a part or all of the lamps or all lamps (including the lamps provided on the door frame 3).

  FIG. 220B is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting state management area, and the value of the lower byte stores a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting state management area. Unlike the one shown in FIG. 202 (A), in another example 2, when a RAM abnormality occurs, the lower byte becomes 04H.

  Specifically, the power-on operation command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A0H, and the lower byte indicates the recorded contents of the setting state management area. The value of the lower byte stores a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting state management area. This is because the value of the setting state management area is 00H during a normal game, and if the value transmitted as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware abnormality in which the output becomes 0. Is set to 1.

  The power-on operation command is generated at least once in the power-on processing. Specifically, an A001H or A004H command is created once in response to a hot start, a RAM clear, and a RAM error. In the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, an A002H or A003H command is created in the power-on processing. After that, the command is generated twice as an A001H command when the setting is changed / confirmed.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command, the peripheral control board 1510 responds to the normal game startable state (A001H), the setting confirmation mode (A002H), the setting change mode (A003H), and the RAM abnormality state (A004H). The notification is performed in the manner described above (see FIG. 184). Although the notification of the normal game startable state is not shown in FIG. 184, a demonstration screen is displayed, and an effect of a standby state for explaining the game content is performed.

  If the peripheral control board 1510 receives a game command during a normal game without receiving A001H in the power-on operation command, the game state may be inconsistent. It is determined to be invalid, and a game operation (such as an effect) for the game command is not started. However, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game command during a normal game is continuously transmitted a predetermined number of times), the peripheral control board 1510 may have missed the power-on operation command (A001H). It is preferable to cancel the invalidation of the received game command and perform an effect corresponding to the game command.

  In the state where the game command is invalidated, an effect that satisfies a predetermined condition among the received game commands is performed (for example, the effect corresponding to the received command is performed for the operation of the symbol, the lamp, the movable body, the voice, and the like). May be performed), and the fact that the game state is inconsistent may be notified using the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp. Also, the fact that the game state mismatch has occurred may be notified at a low volume. This is because a player who cannot understand that the inconsistency in the game state has occurred unless a certain effect is performed until a predetermined condition is reached, does not start the special symbol variation display game even if the player wins the starting opening. This is to prevent such a failure of the pachinko machine 1 and prevent a trouble that may occur in the hall. Even if the peripheral control board 1510 invalidates the game command, the main control board 1310 is executing a normal game process, so that the function display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol on the function display unit 1400 is normally displayed. Is done.

  FIG. 220C is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on state command. Unlike the one shown in FIG. 202B in the above-described embodiment, the power-on state command of the second alternative example defines four states of 01H, 02H, 03H, and 04H. That is, the power-on state command is a command for notifying, based on the recorded contents of the power-on state buffer, whether or not the normal game can be started, and for notifying the state before the power failure. For example, the power-on state command is composed of 2 bytes, and if the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is 01H, it indicates that the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized to notify RAM clear. If the lower byte is 02H, it indicates that the state before the power failure is a low probability / non-saving time state, the main control RAM 1312 returns without being initialized, and is in a normal game startable state. Further, if the lower byte is 03H, it indicates that the state before the power failure is the high probability / time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 returns without being initialized, and is in the normal game startable state. If the lower byte is 04H, it indicates that the state before the power failure is the low probability / time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 returns without being initialized, and the normal game can be started.

  As described above, the power-on state buffer is a storage area for storing information on the game state at the time of the power failure in order to restore the state before the power failure occurred. , A value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the power-on state buffer. For example, in the case of low probability non-time saving, 1 is stored in the power-on state buffer, and 2 obtained by adding 1 to this value is stored in the power-on state command. In addition, when the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, the power-on state buffer is set to 0, so that 1 is stored in the power-on state command, and it can be notified that the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized.

  FIG. 221 is a flowchart of the main control-side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control-side main processing is executed after step S2240 of the power-on processing (FIG. 214).

  First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure notice signal, and determines whether a power failure has occurred based on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2310). In the second example, the power outage is monitored in the main process. However, the power outage may be monitored by monitoring the power outage in the timer interrupt process and detecting the occurrence of the power outage. For example, when at least one of the start and end of the timer interrupt, it is determined whether the power failure notice signal is ON, and a period during which the power failure notice signal is continuously output is counted. May be determined that a power failure has occurred.

  If the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, and the random number update processing 2 is executed (step S2311). The random number update processing 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than random numbers for performing a winning determination in a special lottery or a normal lottery.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is detected, the power-off processing (steps S2312 to S2319) is executed. In the power-off process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the power failure occurred is executed. Specifically, first, the interrupt is prohibited (step S2312). As a result, the timer interrupt processing described later is not performed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (Step S2313). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid / power failure clear / ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared. For example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the processing at the time of power-off at the main board side is reduced, and the processing at the time of power-off at the main board side can be surely ended.

  Thereafter, the flag register is evacuated to the stack area in the game area (step S2314), the power-off processing is executed, and the necessary processing is executed before the power is turned off (step S2315). Details of the power-off processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the flag register evacuated to the stack area in the game area is restored (step S2316).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 to determine whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held, It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2317). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. Note that the area for which the checksum is calculated is a setting state management (setting value) which may be changed in the work area in the game control area after the power is turned on and before the main control side main processing is executed. And the value of the setting state management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area.

  Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off process has been executed normally is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S2318). Thereby, the storage of the game backup information is completed. Finally, the RAM protection is enabled (writing is prohibited) and the invalidation of the prohibited area is written to the RAM protection register, the writing to a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S2319), and the apparatus stands by until the power is restored. (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and, when an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed, determining that the area is abnormal and resetting it. For this reason, by setting the prohibited area of the RAM protect register to invalid, the reset function by accessing the main control RAM 1312 is released (not reset), thereby enabling access to the entire area. Note that, when an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and when an access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset. Good.

  FIG. 222 is a flowchart of the power-off processing. The power-off processing is executed in step S2315 of the main control-side main processing (FIG. 221), and executes necessary processing before the power is turned off.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP evacuation buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2320), sets the stack pointer value outside the game area as the stack pointer (step S2321), All register values are stored in a register save buffer outside the game area (step S2322).

  Subsequently, a checksum outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is calculated and stored in a checksum storage area outside the game area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2323). Thereafter, 5AH is set in the power down check area (EX_PDIND), and it is recorded that the RAM area of the main control RAM 1312 outside the game area has been initialized (step S2324). If 5AH is recorded in the power down check area, the power outage process has been executed normally. In this sense, the power-down check area and the backup flag of the RAM in the game control area are substantially the same. Since the power failure process has been executed normally, the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been determined to be normal, and if 5AH is set in the power down check area as a result, the main control The initialization of the area outside the game control area of the RAM 1312 has been completed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, two types of flags indicating that the power failure processing has been executed normally are provided in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and outside the game control area. . This is because the inside of the game control area and the outside of the game control area are determined twice, and since one storage area is not shared between the inside of the game control area and the outside of the game control area, they are independently determined. This is because it is desirable to process. For example, if there is only one flag indicating that the power failure process has been executed normally, 5AH is erroneously set in the flag, and if the process returns without performing the power failure process, it is erroneously determined that the power failure process was executed normally. Is determined. The possibility of erroneous determination is reduced by performing double determination in this way.

  Furthermore, the two flags are provided in a separate area as an area (for example, an area in which the lower byte (** 00H to ** FFH) or the upper byte (00 ** H or 01 ** H) of the address does not overlap). Thus, even if data is rewritten due to a defect such as noise, the data can be restored correctly.

  Then, all the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the process of the caller saved in the register save buffer outside the game area are restored (step S2325), and the SP save buffer outside the game area is restored. The saved stack pointer value is restored (step S2326), and the process returns to the caller.

  FIG. 223 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the main control MPU 1311.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2330). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which is used as a register group of bank 0, and the other is usable as a register group of bank 1, and performs bank switching. Without using the registers of both banks. The register bank 0 is used in the main processing on the main control side, and the register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, an instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but there is no need to execute an instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of the interrupt. Return from the stack area by executing the instruction. Therefore, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register returns to the original state by executing the RET instruction. When a configuration in which the state of the bank is not stored in the flag register is adopted, the bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, and the bank is returned to bank 0.

  Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not an interrupt is permitted, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting the interrupt to be enabled. It should be noted that the flag for controlling whether or not an interrupt is possible is set to an interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless the interrupt is permitted (such as the EI instruction) or the RETI instruction is executed during the timer interrupt processing, the interrupt is not permitted.

  Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, the value is set to 0 (step S2331).

  Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2332). In the switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and stored as input information in an input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

  The switch input processing 1 in step S2332 is processing relating to a winning signal, and the switch input processing 2 in step S2080 in FIG. 191 is processing relating to input of a fraud detection sensor (magnet sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc.). For this reason, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the determination is NO in step S2335, so that the winning detection is performed, but the fraud by the fraud detection sensor is not detected. Note that even if a prize is detected, payout of a prize ball, display of a change, and the like are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by the employees of the hall, and it is considered that it is desirable that the fraud is not performed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode and that the fraud is not detected. For example, since the operation of setting change and setting confirmation is performed in a state where the door is opened, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 connected to the outer frame 2 by the hinge member are easily shaken. Vibration may be erroneously detected. For this reason, such false notification can be prevented by stopping the detection of fraud by the fraud detection sensor in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, the hall employee has a magnet for collecting the ball that has fallen on the floor, which can prevent false notification of the magnet held by the employee at the time of setting change or setting confirmation operation. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has means for invalidating (or restricting, restricting, suppressing, etc.) fraud detection, and after shifting to normal game processing (for example, initial setting processing at power-on). After the end of), the fraud detection is enabled, and in a specific game state (for example, during the setting process), the fraud detection is invalidated (or restricted, restricted, suppressed, or the like) by the means.

  Note that even in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may detect in the switch input processing 1 and monitor a specific type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect a fraudulent act of forcibly activating the setting change mode by, for example, radiating radio waves by a person who intends to perform fraud (Goto).

  Subsequently, a random number update process 1 is executed (step S2333). In the random number updating process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, respective values for changing the initial values of the big hit symbol determining random number and the small hit symbol determining random number updated in the random number updating process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. Update the initial value determination random number. In the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 223, the random number is updated even when the setting process for changing the set value is executed. This is because the hardware random number that determines the hit is updated regardless of whether the setting change or the setting confirmation is being processed, and the random number generated by software is also updated at the same timing as the activation of the hardware random number, that is, By updating even during the process of setting change and setting confirmation, the mismatch between hardware random numbers and software random numbers is unlikely to occur, and the expected value of the effect in the game and the expected value that the big hit is derived at the specific effect Can be suppressed.

  Thereafter, a set value confirmation process (FIG. 215) is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range (step S2334). Note that the set value confirmation process is periodically executed in the timer interrupt process. However, even if the set value confirmation process is not executed in the timer interrupt process, when the change starts, when the game state is switched (for example, when the big hit probability is large). It may be performed when certain conditions such as switching, start and end of the big hit game, start and end of the time saving state, and detection of fraud (for example, when the door is opened and when magnetism is detected) are satisfied. Even if it is not determined periodically in a short cycle as in the execution of the timer interrupt processing, if the determination is made when the specific condition is satisfied, the resource consumption of the main control MPU 1311 can be suppressed.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2335). By confirming the value of the setting state management area after the setting value confirmation processing (step S2334, FIG. 215), when the setting value is determined to be abnormal, the value of the immediately following setting state management area is confirmed (S2335). The normal game process is controlled so as not to be executed. If a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2080 in FIG. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2336). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the time for turning off the LED is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the display switching of the LED is mixed appears. And flickering of the LED is prevented.

  Thereafter, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2337), and the flag register is evacuated to the stack area in the game area (step S2338). Then, a test signal output process is executed to output a test signal (step S2339). Then, the flag register is saved to the stack area in the game area (step S2340). Before and after the execution of the process for outputting the test signal, the stack pointer and the register are saved as in the other out-of-game-area processes, and the process returns after the end of the process. Since the test signal processing does not control the progress of the game, it is executed as processing outside the game control area. Note that the test signal processing may be executed as a process in the game control area as long as the test signal processing does not affect the game even if the processing is executed in the game control area. When the test signal processing is executed as the processing in the game control area, the saving and restoring (steps S2337, S2340) of the flag register executed before and after the test signal output processing (step S2339) become unnecessary.

  Then, a setting process is executed (step S2341). Details of the setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After that, a setting display process is executed (step S2342). Details of the setting display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, a peripheral board command transmission process for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2343). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area in a FIFO format of a plurality of bytes. The transmission information storage area stores commands generated each time a command is generated, and sequentially transmits the values (commands) stored in the transmission information storage area to the peripheral control board 1510. Note that the generated command may be directly stored in the transmission information storage area in the FIFO format of the serial communication circuit every time the command is generated.

  Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2344). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, setting one word clears the watchdog timer. Thereafter, the register bank is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2345), and the process returns to the process before the interruption.

  The processing after it is determined in step S2335 that the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area is the same as the processing described above with reference to FIG. After executing the output data setting process in step S2091, the process advances to step S2343 in FIG. 223.

  FIG. 224 is a flowchart of the setting process. When the setting state management area is not the value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state, the setting processing is executed in step S2341 of the timer interruption processing (FIG. 223), and mainly executes processing for changing the setting value.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2350). If a value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, a power-on command is created (step S2351), and the process returns to the calling source.

  Thus, in the case of a RAM abnormality, a power-on operation command (A004H) indicating the RAM abnormality is transmitted every timer interrupt until the RAM abnormality is cleared. This is because if the power-on operation command indicating the RAM abnormality is sent only once, the RAM abnormality re-notification is not performed when the command is lost, so that the peripheral control board 1510 cannot know the state of the gaming machine. It is. In addition, since the function display unit 1400 is completely turned off, if the peripheral control board 1510 does not know the state of the gaming machine, the abnormality notification is not performed, so that it is possible to prevent the state of the gaming machine from being externally confirmed. In addition, when the RAM is abnormal, since the game is not performed, no command other than the power-on operation command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the power-on operation command is repeatedly transmitted as long as the RAM abnormal state continues. are doing.

  That is, the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment is configured to execute a predetermined number of times (for example, a timer interrupt process) of a command of the same system (for example, an operation command at power-on) by executing a periodic process (timer interrupt process). The first case of transmitting only a small number of times, such as one, two, three, etc.) and the second case of repeatedly transmitting at predetermined intervals without limiting the number of times during operation of the pachinko machine. In the second case, the same command is repeatedly transmitted irrespective of whether or not the peripheral control board 1510 has correctly received the normal game, and other game-related commands are not transmitted when the normal game is stopped. But it is a command that is sent.

  When receiving the command related to the RAM abnormality, the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the user of the RAM abnormality. Note that even if the same command is received again during the notification of the RAM abnormality, the received command relating to the RAM abnormality may be invalidated and the current notification may be continued. By invalidating the subsequent command, for example, it is possible to prevent the notification by voice from being repeated from the beginning, and normal notification can be performed.

  The command related to the RAM abnormality may always be the same, but may be different depending on the transmission timing. The command consistency may be determined by changing the command related to the RAM abnormality according to the transmission timing. For example, a power-on operation command (A004H) transmitted when the RAM is abnormal when the power is turned on, and a power-on operation command (A005H) transmitted when the RAM is abnormal when a normal timer interrupt occurs. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command (A005H) after the power-on command (A004H), the peripheral control board 1510 can determine that the RAM abnormality at the time of power-on is continuing. On the other hand, if the power-on command (A005H) is received without receiving the power-on command (A004H), the set value and the setting state management area recorded in the main control RAM 1312 after the power is restored (for example, during a normal game). Can be determined to be abnormal. In this way, the notification mode can be different for each of the two states to be determined. For example, when the RAM abnormality at the time of turning on the power is continued, it is notified that the RAM is abnormal, and when the RAM abnormality occurs after the power is restored, it is possible to report that the set value is abnormal.

  During the notification of the RAM abnormality, the setting adjustment function by the player (for example, the adjustment of the volume and brightness by operating the buttons provided on the door frame 3) may be stopped. This is because the setting adjustment operation by the player during the RAM abnormality notification is considered to be an erroneous operation. Specifically, the setting adjustment function by the player may be stopped until the power-on operation command indicating the normal game state is received.

  If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the setting process is repeatedly executed, so that the process relating to the special symbol or the ordinary symbol is not executed, and the game cannot be played at all. This RAM abnormality is caused by performing an operation of activating the setting change mode with the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on again after the power is once cut off and the power failure processing is executed. And the RAM abnormality is eliminated. Then, by returning the setting key 971 to the original state, the setting change mode ends, and the normal game can be started.

  Also, when the power is turned on again, if an operation other than the activation of the setting change mode with the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 is performed, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality in the setting state management area is maintained, The RAM abnormal state continues and the normal game cannot be started. That is, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality and enter the normal game state, it is necessary to always go through the setting change mode.

  On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2352). Specifically, it detects the edge of the setting key 971 from ON to OFF, or detects whether a predetermined period has elapsed since the change from ON to OFF.

  When it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (determined that the setting change or the setting confirmation has been completed), the output time is set in the security signal output timer (step S2353), and the setting state management area is initialized (step S2353). S2354), the power-on setting process shown in FIG. 219 is executed (step S2355), and the process returns to the calling source process.

  When the operation of terminating the setting change mode (setting key 971 is turned off) is performed, the output time value is set in the security signal output timer, so that the delay time until the security signal is turned off after the end of the setting change mode is set. Provide. Therefore, even if the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed in a short time (for example, within one timer interrupt process), only the shortest output signal of the security signal is set in the security signal output timer as the output time value. The security signal can be reliably detected by the hall computer.

  In addition, when a fraud is detected during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, the security signal may be output for a period or time corresponding to the newly detected fraud while maintaining the security signal.

  Furthermore, if a power failure occurs during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, if a hot start is performed in the normal gaming state when the power is restored, a security signal for the remaining time is output and the RAM clear switch is operated to clear the RAM. Alternatively, when the RAM is cleared by changing the setting, the security signal for the remaining time is not output. This is because the security signal output timer value is reset by the initialization of the main control RAM 1312, and the output of the security signal accompanying the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is started.

  When the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during the output of the security signal, one of five patterns of hot start, RAM clear, setting change mode, setting check mode, and RAM abnormal state continuation is set.

  When the mode is shifted to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the activated mode ends, and the security signal is output until the delay time elapses. When the RAM abnormality state continues, since the setting change operation is not performed even when the power is restored, a security signal due to the continuous RAM abnormality is output. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and a power failure occurs before the delay time elapses, or in the case of a hot start after the power is restored, a security signal is output for the remaining time.

Even when the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and the timer interrupt processing is performed after a predetermined time (for example, during the waiting time for starting the peripheral control board 1510). After the transition, the output of the security signal resumes. That is, in the following cases, even when the security signal is continuously output after the power failure occurs during the output of the security signal, a period for stopping the output of the security signal is provided for a predetermined period after the power is restored.
-When the power is restored by a hot start after a power failure occurs during security signal output due to fraud detection, etc.-After a power failure occurs during the security signal output due to RAM abnormality, the power returns and the RAM abnormality continues. -When a power failure occurs during security signal output in the setting change mode, the power returns and the setting change mode continues.- When a power failure occurs during the security signal output in the setting check mode, the power returns. The setting confirmation mode continues

  As described above, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs during the output of the security signal, by stopping the output of the security signal for a predetermined period after the power is restored, the hall computer side outputs the security signal to the security signal. It is possible to determine whether there has been an abnormality or whether the state accompanying the output of the security signal has been released.

  Further, in the setting confirmation mode in which only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends, regardless of the remaining time during which the security signal is output, and the delay time after the setting confirmation mode ends. After the elapse, the output of the security signal is stopped. Also, in the setting change mode in which the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated, the same processing as in the setting confirmation mode may be performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2352 that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2356). If it is determined that the mode is set, it is determined whether the setting change switch 972 has been operated (step S2357). Note that the configuration change switch 972 may be configured to also serve as the RAM clear switch 954. As a result, when it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is recorded in the setting state management area and that the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting value is updated by +1 (step S2358). If the set value exceeds the upper limit 6, the value is set to 0 (steps S2359 and S2360). Then, the process returns to the calling source process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting state management area (that is, the setting confirmation mode) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting value is updated. Without returning to the calling process.

  When the operation of the setting change switch 972 is determined (immediately or immediately after), it may be determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated to be ON. As described above, when the operation of the setting key 971 is determined when the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting change mode is set when a power failure occurs, and even when the setting key 971 is not turned ON when the power failure is recovered, the setting change switch 972 is not changed. It is possible to prevent the setting from being changed by the operation.

  FIG. 225 is a flowchart of the setting display process executed by the main control MPU 1311. When the setting state management area is not the value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state, the setting display processing is executed in step S2342 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 223), and the processing for displaying the setting value is executed.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 clears the LED segment port (step S2370).

  Then, it is determined whether or not a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2371). If the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2372). On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2373).

  Then, the driver is driven to output an LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter (step S2374), and to output display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or error display to the base display 1317 (step S2375). Then, the process returns to the calling source process.

[12-18. Another example 3 of setting change / confirmation processing]
Next, another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function will be described. In the third example described below, the main difference from the second example described above is that the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing is provided separately from the timer interrupt processing for the normal game. The processes other than those described below are the same as those of the above-described alternative example 2.

  In the third example, similarly to the second example, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. However, the original main control RAM 1312 of the RAM clear switch 954 is used. In order to distinguish between the initialization function and the setting change function, the operation for changing the set value may be described as a setting change switch 972.

  FIGS. 226 and 227 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by main control MPU 1311 when power is turned on.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 starts processing from address 8000, which is the start address of the program code, when the reset signal is released by turning on the power. The protection invalidation and the prohibition area invalidation of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protection register (step S2400). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and, when an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed, determining that the area is abnormal and resetting it. In the third example, in order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid so that the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed. Note that, when an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and when an access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset. Good.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is immediately initialized. However, if the checksums do not match, or if the backup flag is not set properly, the setting change operation is not performed after the function of the gaming machine is stopped as a RAM abnormality and the game cannot be played. The main control RAM 1312 is controlled not to be initialized and the game is not executed.

  For this reason, when the prohibited area of the RAM protect register is set to be valid, a reset occurs due to erroneous access to the prohibited area of the RAM due to malfunction or failure, and when the main control MPU 1311 executes the power-on processing, Since the power failure processing has not been executed, the checksum has not been calculated, and the backup flag has not been set, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is not only initialized by the RAM clearing process, but the game cannot be resumed unless an employee of the hall performs a RAM abnormality canceling operation (setting change operation). Therefore, the RAM protect register is prohibited. It is desirable to set the area to "invalid".

  Note that the prohibited area may be set valid. By setting the prohibited area to be valid, when the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312 is accessed due to fraud or the like, the game cannot be restarted unless a RAM abnormality release operation (setting change operation) is performed by a hall clerk. Therefore, it is possible to improve the resistance to wrongdoing.

  Next, a simple clear mode timer for a predetermined time is set as a watchdog timer (step S2401), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2402). After that, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2403), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2404). By setting the power failure clear signal to ON and then to OFF, the power failure warning signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal state (non-power failure state).

  Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2405). The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated after the peripheral control board 1510 is reliably started. If the employee of the hall erroneously interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 will be determined in a state where the employee of the hall is not intended. For this reason, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a register or the like as a temporary storage means at an early stage after the power-on processing starts, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 ends. By determining the state of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in a register or the like as a temporary storage unit later, even if an employee of the hall accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after turning on the power, Then, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 at the time of the power-on operation is reliably detected.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the power failure notice signal indicates that the power failure is occurring (step S2406). If the power failure notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, so that the process waits in step S2406 until the power supply voltage is stabilized. In the loop of step S2406, since the watchdog timer is not cleared, the watchdog timer generates a reset unless the power failure is released. In the reset by the watchdog timer, a program is immediately started from a start address without performing a security check unlike a system reset, and power-on processing is executed. Therefore, unless the power failure notice signal is canceled in the loop of step S2406, the process does not exit the loop.

  As described above, the power outage determination processing for detecting the power outage notice signal is firstly performed in steps S2406 and S2408 during the power-on processing, and secondly in step S2450 of the main control side main processing during the normal game. Running in places. In the latter (step S2450), the power failure processing after step S2462 is executed by detecting the power failure. However, in the former (steps S2406 and 2408), the power failure processing is not executed even if the power failure is detected. During the loop period, the value of the checksum and the value of the backup flag are maintained, so that the state at the time of the power failure can be correctly restored without executing the power failure processing.

  The reset in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a system reset generated by a reset circuit and a user reset generated by an access outside a designated area of the watchdog timer or the game control RAM 1312. In a system reset, the program starts after a security check of several hundred milliseconds is executed. In a user reset, the program is started immediately without executing the security check when the reset is released.

  Therefore, for example, if a reset occurs by the watchdog timer during normal game processing, the power failure processing is not performed, the checksum is not calculated, and the backup flag is not set, so that it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. You. When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game state is initialized by the RAM clear processing, and the game cannot be resumed unless a RAM abnormality canceling operation (setting change operation) is performed by a hall clerk. On the other hand, in steps S2406 and S2408 during power-on processing, even if a reset is generated by the watchdog timer, the clerk at the hall does not perform the RAM abnormality canceling operation (setting change operation), and the state at the time of the power outage is correctly set. I can return.

  As described above, for the reset generated by the watchdog timer, the case where the setting change operation for canceling the RAM abnormality in order to restart the pachinko machine 1 is required and the case where the setting change operation is not required are usually provided. The occurrence of a reset by the watchdog timer during a game is when a software failure occurs, the data stored in the main control RAM 1312 has been destroyed, and the contents different from the game state at the time of the power outage are stored. Therefore, it is desirable that the main control RAM 1312 be initialized. On the other hand, the occurrence of a reset by the watchdog timer in the power-on processing is when a hardware failure occurs, and the data stored in the main control RAM 1312 is unlikely to be destroyed. It is because the necessity to convert is low.

  Although the reset generated by the watchdog timer has been described above, the same processing is performed for other types of user resets generated by the watchdog timer. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, there are a plurality of reset factors, and the above-described processing can be executed by a reset generated by one of the reset factors (for example, a user reset by a watchdog timer).

  Thereafter, a sub-activation wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited (step S2407). The waiting for the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 may be performed at any time after the power is turned on until the command is first transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, even after the setting value is determined.

  Thereafter, it is determined again whether the power failure notice signal indicates that the power failure is occurring (step S2408). If the power failure notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and the process stands by in step S2408. It should be noted that whether or not the power failure notification signal is during a power failure may not be determined in both steps S2406 and S2408, but may be determined in either one.

  Thereafter, a set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 215 is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range (step S2409).

  Thereafter, the flag register is evacuated to the stack area in the game control area (step S2410), and a power-on outside game area RAM confirmation process shown in FIG. 216 is executed to determine an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area. (Step S2411). Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2412).

  Thereafter, the RAM abnormality determination result value is provisionally set in the C register (step S2413), and the RAM abnormality value (03H) in the setting state management area is provisionally set in the B register (step S2414).

  In the third example, the value set in the setting state management area is different from that shown in FIG. 201B in the above-described embodiment, and if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 as shown in FIG. 03H is recorded. That is, the setting state management area of the third example is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used, and the upper 4 bits are not defined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal gaming state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 03H when the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality.

  The setting state management area is not updated to 00H in the RAM clear processing by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. At the end of the setting confirmation mode, it is updated from 01H to 00H, and at the end of the setting change mode, it is updated from 02H to 00H. Further, if the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, the setting is changed from 03H to 02H when the setting change mode is entered by the next setting change operation at power-on, and from 02H to 00H when the setting change mode ends.

  Further, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 (steps S2415 and S2416). Specifically, a checksum calculated and stored from data used as a game control area (excluding data saved to the stack) in an area backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 when the power supply was last shut down, The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if they are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. If the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup has been performed normally (the power-off processing has been performed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when a power failure occurs. (The power-off process has not been executed normally), and it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality.

  If there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 or outside the game control area, the process proceeds to step S2419. On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in both the game control area and the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM normality determination result value is provisionally set in the C register (step S2417), and the information in the set state management area is stored in the B register Is set (step S2418), and the process proceeds to step 2219. As a result, the determination result of whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal is set in the C register. Therefore, in the subsequent processing, the RAM abnormality is determined as the determination of “RAM abnormality” or “game state before power cut-off”. There is no need to execute the process (the process of determining whether the checksum and the backup flag match) again, and the size of the program can be reduced.

  In the B register, the value of the set state management area when a power failure occurs or the determination result (RAM abnormal value) of the main control RAM 1312 when the power is restored is set. In step S2419, the RAM abnormal value is temporarily stored in the set state management area. By setting, unnecessary processing can be deleted, and the size of the program can be reduced. For example, if the RAM abnormal value is not provisionally set in the setting state management area in step S2419, when the determination of each of steps S2423 and S2424 is YES, the RAM abnormal value is set in the setting state management area, and step S2436 is performed. It is necessary to execute the JUMP instruction to However, since the RAM abnormal value has already been provisionally set in the setting state management area in step S2419, by specifying S2436 as the JUMP destination at the time of determination in step S2423, as shown in the source code example illustrated below, JUMP Instructions can be reduced.

Source code example when the RAM abnormal value is not temporarily set in step S2419
AND A, 30H; S2420
CP A, 30H; S2421 (bit5: setting key, bit4: RAM clear SW)
JR Z, RESET_P_6;

CP B, 02H; S2422
JR Z, RESET_P_6;

CP C, 00H; S2423
JR Z, $ 111;
$ 000:
LD W, 03H; S2419 equivalent
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
JR S2436; Jump instruction to S2436
$ 111:
CP B, 03H; S2424
JR Z, $ 000;

XOR W, W; S2425
LD (VALID_PALY), W;

Example of source code when temporarily setting a RAM abnormal value in step S2419
LD W, 03H; S2419
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
AND A, 30H; S2420
CP A, 30H; S2421
JR Z, RESET_P_6;

CP B, 02H; S2422
JR Z, RESET_P_6;

CP C, 00H; S2423
JR NZ, S2436;

CP B, 03H; S2424
JR Z, S2436;

XOR W, W; S2425
LD (VALID_PALY), W;

  Thereafter, in step S2419, a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2419).

  Then, of the register value in which the value of the PF port is recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2420). Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2421). If the setting key 971 has been turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, and the flow advances to step S2430.

  On the other hand, if the setting key 971 has not been operated and the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, it is determined whether the apparatus was in the setting change mode when a power failure occurred (step S2422). For example, when the value of the B register set in step S2418 is in the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode.

  If it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2430.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that no power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2423). For example, an abnormality in the game control area can be determined using the determination result stored in the C register in step S2413 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 or outside the game control area, the process proceeds to step S2436.

  On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in both the game control area and the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2424). For example, if the value of the setting state management area set in the B register in S2418 is a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality, it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing.

  If it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process advances to step S2436. On the other hand, when it is determined that no power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, a value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2425). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2425, the temporary setting value is reset to 00H from the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2419. Also, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2425, the value of the setting state management area when jumping to step S2435 from steps S2426 and S2431 is different. For this reason, since the value of the setting state management area differs between the normal RAM clearing process and the RAM clearing process accompanying the setting change process, the caller can be distinguished even if the program for both RAM clearing processes is common. It is not necessary to provide a separate program, and the program size can be reduced.

  As shown in the source code example illustrated below, at the timing of step S2425, it is not determined whether 01H or 00H is recorded in the setting state management area. The determined value should be set in the setting state management area at the time of determination. However, in this case, 00H is set in the setting state management area after the RAM clear processing when it is determined that the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated to ON. Recording process is required. For this reason, since the processing content differs between the power-on processing and the RAM clear processing at the time of setting change, dedicated processing is required for each part other than the processing for initializing the main control RAM 1312. For this reason, 00H is provisionally set in step S2425 in order to commonize the process of initializing the main control RAM 1312 when the setting is changed and when only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated.

Example of source code when 00H is not provisionally set in the setting state management area in step S2425
CP A, 10H; S2426 (PF register information is stored in A register)
JR NZ, $ 000; (bit5: setting key bit4: RAM clear SW)

LD A, (JOTAI_BF); S2427
LD (POWER_BF), A;

CP A, 20H; S2428
JR NZ, $ 111;

LD W, 01H; S2429
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
JR S2436;

$ 000:
XOR W, W; equivalent to S2425
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
JR S2435; increase

$ 111:
XOR W, W; increase
LD (VALID_PALY), W; increment
JR S2436; increase

S2430:
LD W, 02H; S2430
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
...
S2435:
[RAM clear processing]; S2435
S2436:
[Initialize all command buffers]; S2436

Source code example for temporarily setting 00H in the setting state management area in step S2425
XOR W, W; S2425
LD (VALID_PALY), W;

CP A, 10H; S2426
JR NZ, S2435;

LD A, (JOTAI_BF); S2427
LD (POWER_BF), A;

CP A, 20H; S2428
JR Z, S2436;

LD W, 01H;
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
JR S2436;
S2430:
LD W, 02H; S2430
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
...
S2435:
[RAM clear processing]; S2435
S2436:
[Initialize all command buffers]; S2436

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2426). If the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON, the process advances to step S2435.

  In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the operation of the setting key 971, and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area, and 03H is maintained until the power is turned off, so that the normal game process cannot be executed. At this time, if the power is turned off by performing a setting change operation after turning off the power once, the RAM abnormality can be canceled. That is, if it is determined in step S2421 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area is changed from a value indicating a RAM abnormality (03H) to a value indicating a setting change. (02H) (step S2430), and the RAM abnormal state ends. As described above, the recovery from the RAM abnormality always goes through the setting change. In other words, since it is determined whether the setting change operation has been performed before determining whether the state at the time of the power failure occurrence is the RAM abnormality, the RAM abnormality can be eliminated only when the setting value is changed.

  When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game processing may be started by initializing the work area and the stack area in the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area. In this way, even if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it is possible to automatically return to the normal game state.

  When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, and after the power is turned off, when the power supply is restored and the work area in the area inside the game control area and the work area in the area outside the game control area are determined to be normal, The game processing may be started by initializing the work area and the stack area in the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area. In this case, the normal game state can be returned by the ON / OFF operation of the power switch.

  When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, and after the power is turned off, when the power is restored, the work area in the game control area and the work area in the area outside the game control area are determined to be normal, and the RAM is cleared. When the switch is operated, the game processing may be started by initializing the work area and the stack area in the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area. In this way, the normal game state can be restored by operating the RAM clear switch 954 after the power is turned off.

  In addition, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, and after the power is turned off, when the power is restored, the work area in the game control area and the work area in the area outside the game control area are determined to be normal, and the setting is performed. When the key 971 is operated, the game processing may be started by initializing the work area and the stack area in the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area. In this way, the normal game state can be restored by operating the setting key 971 after the power is turned off.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, the game state information at the time of the power failure occurrence is stored in the power-on state buffer in order to restore the gaming state before the power failure occurred (step S2427). In this way, the effects (background, decorative design mode (low probability time) on the peripheral control board 1510 side corresponding to each game state (for example, low probability state or high probability state, time saving state or non-time saving state). In this case, a preparation is made for reverting to the original pattern when the decoration pattern is different between the high probability and the high probability. In step S2300 of the power-on setting processing (INITIAL_SET) executed in step S2439, the power-on operation command Used when creating a.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting key 971 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2428). If the setting key 971 has been turned ON, it is determined that a setting confirmation operation has been performed, and a value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2429), and the flow proceeds to S2436. . That is, regardless of whether the state at the time of the power failure occurs is the setting confirmation mode, if only the setting key 971 is operated (unless the RAM clear switch 954 is operated), the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode.

  Steps S2425 to S2429 are processing executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated. Therefore, the determination of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2426) and the setting key 971 (Step S2428) may be performed first. That is, as illustrated, the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2428) after the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is determined (step S2426), or after the operation of the setting key 971 is determined (step S2428). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2426).

  If “YES” is determined in the step S2421 or the step S2422, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2430). Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2431). For example, an abnormality outside the game control area can be determined by using the determination result stored in the C register in step S2413 described above. As a result, if there is no abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2435.

  On the other hand, if there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is evacuated to the stack area inside the game area (step S2432), and the RAM abnormal processing outside the game area shown in FIG. 217 is executed (S2433). Thereafter, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area in step S2432 is restored (step S2434).

  Then, a work area other than the set value and set state management area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and a stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2435). Note that an unused area provided between the work area and the stack area may be initialized together.

  Thereafter, all command buffers are initialized (step S2436). This is because when the power is turned off without clearing the RAM after the power is turned off while the command is stored in the command buffer, the unsent command stored in the command buffer is transmitted. For example, when the power is turned off during the transmission of the fluctuation command, the symbol command may be transmitted, but the subsequent fluctuation pattern command may not be transmitted. When only the variation pattern command is transmitted when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 may be determined to be abnormal. Further, if an untransmitted command in the processing related to the setting change is stored in the command buffer, the command that has not been transmitted during the setting processing after the power is restored is transmitted, so that the peripheral control board 1510 can execute the command based on the command. There is a possibility of malfunction by setting the game state. In order to prevent the occurrence of such an abnormality, the command buffer is initialized in step S2436.

  Although the command buffer is initialized in step S2436, the command buffer may be cleared when starting the setting change process or when starting the setting confirmation process. In the setting change processing, since the command buffer is cleared along with the initialization of the main control RAM 1312, there is no need to separately clear the command buffer. However, in the setting confirmation processing, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized. For this reason, the command buffer should be cleared when shifting to setting confirmation.

  After that, the function of the device (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 is initialized (step S2437). Specifically, the timer interrupt cycle time is set in the CTC0 for the setting change process, and the CTC0 is set to enable the interrupt. The time of CTC1 for controlling the timer interrupt process in the normal game state is not set, and the interrupt of the CTC1 for the normal game is set to be prohibited.

  Then, a hardware random number (for example, a hit random number) built in the main control MPU 1311 is started (step S2438), updating of the hardware random number is started, and a power-on setting process shown in FIG. 219 is executed (step S2439).

  Finally, the timer interrupt is set to be enabled (step S2440), and the process proceeds to the main control-side main process (FIG. 228).

  FIG. 228 is a flowchart of main control-side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control-side main processing is executed after step S2440 of the power-on processing (FIG. 227).

  First, the main control MPU 1311 executes a first main loop process (steps S2450 to S2453) for a setting change process. In the first main loop process, first, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure notice signal, and determines whether a power failure has occurred based on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2450). In the third example, the power outage is monitored in the main processing. However, the power outage may be monitored by monitoring the power outage in the timer interrupt processing and detecting the occurrence of the power outage. For example, when at least one of the start and end of the timer interrupt, it is determined whether the power failure notice signal is ON, and a period during which the power failure notice signal is continuously output is counted. May be determined that a power failure has occurred. In another example 3, since the timer interrupt process for the setting process and the timer interrupt process for the normal game process are provided separately, the power failure may be monitored in any of the timer interrupt processes. A power outage may be monitored. Therefore, by substituting the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process into subroutines and executing these subroutines (power failure monitoring process, power failure process) in each of the two timer interrupt processes, the same program (code ) Does not need to be incorporated into each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

  When the power failure notice signal is detected, the power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

  On the other hand, if the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so that the interruption is set to be prohibited (step S2451), and it is determined whether the value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the set state management area. A determination is made (step S2452). If a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the set state management area, the process proceeds to step S2454 to start a normal game. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the interruption is set to be permitted (step S2453), and the process returns to step S2450, and the first main loop process for the setting change process is repeatedly executed. .

  If it is determined in step S2452 that the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the interrupt timer is switched to the normal game, and then the second main loop process for the normal game (steps S2457 to S2458). Execute Before executing the second main loop process, first, the timer interrupt cycle time is set to the normal game CTC1 (step S2454), the CTC0 interrupt (the timer interrupt for the setting process) is stopped, and the CTC1 interrupt ( A timer interrupt for normal game processing) is started (step S2455), and interruption is permitted (step S2456).

  Thereafter, a power failure notice signal is acquired, and it is determined whether a power failure has occurred based on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2457). When the power failure notice signal is detected, the power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. On the other hand, if the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, and the random number update process 2 is executed (step S2458). The random number update processing 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than random numbers for performing a winning determination in a special lottery or a normal lottery. Thereafter, the process returns to step S2457, and the second main loop process for the normal game is repeatedly executed.

If a power failure notice signal is detected in steps S2450 and S2457, power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. In the main control-side main processing shown in FIG.
In the power-off process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the power failure occurred is executed. Specifically, first, the interrupt is prohibited (step S2462). As a result, the timer interrupt processing described later is not performed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (Step S2463). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid / power failure clear / ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared. For example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the processing at the time of power-off at the main board side is reduced, and the processing at the time of power-off at the main board side can be surely ended.

  Thereafter, the flag register is evacuated to the stack area in the game area (step S2464), the power-off processing is executed, and the necessary processing is executed for the work area outside the game area before the power is cut off (step S2465). ). Details of the power-off processing are shown in FIG. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area is restored (step S2466).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 to determine whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held, It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2467). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. Note that the area for which the checksum is calculated is a setting state management (setting value) which may be changed in the work area in the game control area after the power is turned on and before the main control side main processing is executed. And the value of the setting state management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area.

  Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off process has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S2468). Thereby, the storage of the game backup information is completed. Lastly, the setting values of the RAM protection valid (write prohibition) and the invalidity of the prohibition area are written to the RAM protection register, the writing of the main control RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S2469), and the system stands by until the power is restored (step S2469). infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and, when an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed, determining that the area is abnormal and resetting it. In the present embodiment, the reset function by accessing the prohibited area is released to enable access to the entire area. When the unused area in the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area and the prohibited area is set as valid in the RAM protect register, when the access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 It may be reset.

  In the above-described processing, the processing is executed in the order of clearing the output port (step S2463), power-off processing (step S2465), calculating the checksum (step S2467), and setting the backup flag (step S2468). However, the execution order of these four processes is not limited to the illustrated one, and may be another order.

  In the third example, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the main control-side main process. However, the occurrence of a power failure may be monitored by a timer interrupt process, and the power failure process may be executed based on the monitoring result. For example, in each of the two main loops, the power failure signal is checked at least at the start and end times, the period during which the power failure signal is continuously output is measured, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined value. It is advisable to detect the occurrence of a power outage.

  In the main control-side main processing shown in FIG. 228, two main loops are provided corresponding to each of the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing and the timer interrupt for the normal game, and at least once for the setting change processing. Of the timer interrupt process. In addition, at this execution timing, the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing may not be executed (for example, when branching to YES in step S2454). By providing two main loops in this manner, a process of calculating a base value is performed in a main loop (timer interrupt process) for a normal game, and an unnecessary base value is calculated in a timer interrupt process for a setting change process. Whether to execute the process of calculating the base value can be switched so as not to execute the process. In another example 3, since the timer interrupt process for the setting process and the timer interrupt process for the normal game process are provided separately, the power failure may be monitored in any of the timer interrupt processes. A power outage may be monitored. Therefore, by substituting the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process into subroutines and executing these subroutines (power failure monitoring process, power failure process) in each of the two timer interrupt processes, the same program (code ) Does not need to be incorporated into each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

  FIG. 229 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process for the setting process executed by the main control MPU 1311.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2470). Note that the main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for the operation, one of which is used as a register group of bank 0, and the other is usable as a register group of bank 1. , Any of the banks can be used. In this embodiment, the register bank 0 is used in the main control-side main processing, and the register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing for the setting processing or the normal game. Therefore, an instruction to switch to bank 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but there is no need to execute an instruction to switch to bank 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of the interrupt. Return from the stack area by executing the instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also returned to the original state. When a configuration in which the state of the bank is not stored in the flag register is adopted, it is necessary to execute a bank switching instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing to return to the bank 0.

  Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not an interrupt is permitted, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting the interrupt to be enabled. It should be noted that the flag for controlling whether or not an interrupt is possible is set to an interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless the interrupt is permitted (such as the EI instruction) or the RETI instruction is executed during the timer interrupt processing, the interrupt is not permitted.

  Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, the value is set to 0 (step S2471).

  Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2472). In the switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and stored as input information in an input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

  Since the switch input process 1 in step S2472 is a process related to a winning signal, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, NO is determined in step S2473, so that the winning detection is performed. No fraud is detected. Note that even if a prize is detected, payout of a prize ball, display of a change, and the like are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by the employees of the hall, and it is considered that it is desirable that the fraud is not performed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode and that the fraud is not detected.

  Note that even in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may detect in the switch input processing 1 and monitor a specific type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect a fraudulent act of forcibly activating the setting change mode by, for example, radiating radio waves by a person who intends to perform fraud (Goto). For example, while an employee of the hall is performing a setting change or setting confirmation operation, the door is open, and the sensor attached to the door is located at a position close to an adjacent pachinko machine. For this reason, while performing the setting change operation or the setting confirmation, it is possible to detect a goto action by radio waves or the like in the adjacent pachinko machine.

  Then, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2473). In the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing, the value of the game state management area is normally other than 00H (01H to 03H) in the normal state, so the value (00H) indicating the start of the game is set in the setting state management area. It is not necessary to determine whether or not is recorded. However, during a normal game, a determination is made in order to prevent a fraudulent act of illegally shifting to the setting change mode.

  If the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2479 without executing the processing for changing the setting value and displaying the setting (steps S2474 to S2478). On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the specific output port is cleared (step S2474). For example, the signal cleared as the specific output port in step 2474 is a power failure clear signal. And a response signal (ACK) when a command to the payout control board 951 is received. Thereafter, the LED common port is turned off (step S2475). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the time for turning off the LED is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the display switching of the LED is mixed appears. And flickering of the LED is prevented.

  Thereafter, a security signal is output from the external terminal plate 784 (step S2476), and the setting process shown in FIG. 224 is executed (step S2577). Thereafter, the setting display processing shown in FIG. 225 is executed (step S2478).

  Further, a peripheral board command transmission process for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2479). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area that is a transmission buffer of a plurality of bytes in a FIFO format, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510. Since the capacity of the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is limited, untransmitted commands remain in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit, and the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is in the full state or the full state. In the case where the command is near, it is preferable to control whether the command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit in accordance with the empty state of the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. For example, it is determined whether the free space of the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is larger than the size (the number of bytes) of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. The information may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. In addition, each time the command transmission processing to the peripheral control board 1510 is executed, a predetermined upper limit is set for the size of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit, and the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is Without determining the free space, if the size of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit exceeds a predetermined upper limit, all commands cannot be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. Also, in the peripheral board command transmission processing executed in the next timer interrupt processing, the remaining commands may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  The upper limit may be set to be equal to or smaller than the amount of data that can be transmitted by the serial communication circuit (SIO) in one timer interrupt cycle. For example, when the communication speed of the serial communication circuit is 20 kbps and the timer interrupt cycle is 4 ms, serial communication of about 80 bits can be performed in one timer interrupt cycle. If one command is composed of 20 bits, 80 ÷ 20 = 4, so it is preferable to set the upper limit to 4 commands. In practice, one more five commands may be set as the upper limit. This is because the maximum command length is assumed to be 20 bits, but many commands are shorter than the maximum length.

  Regardless of whether a predetermined upper limit is set for the data amount of a command stored in the transmission information storage area in one command transmission process, the command is stored in the transmission information storage area so that the transmission information storage area does not become full. The capacity of the storage area for storing the previous command may be smaller than or equal to the capacity of the transmission information storage area.

  Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2480). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, setting one word clears the watchdog timer. Thereafter, the bank of the register is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2481), and the process returns to the process before the interruption.

  In the timer interrupt process for the setting change process shown in FIG. 229, unlike the other timer interrupt processes, the random number update process (R_ATART_K) is not executed. However, since the hard random number has been activated in S2438, the hardware interrupt is not executed. Like the random number, the random number updating process may be executed in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process.

  In the third example, even if the test signal output process is executed in the timer interrupt process for the normal game (for example, the output data setting process S2505 in FIG. 230), the test signal output process is called in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process. Is also good.

  FIG. 230 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process for a normal game executed by the main control MPU 1311.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2490). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which is used as a bank 0 register group, and the other is used as a bank 1 register group. Thus, any of the banks can be used. In this embodiment, the register bank 0 is used in the main control-side main processing, and the register bank 1 is used in the setting processing or the timer interrupt processing for a normal game. Therefore, an instruction to switch to bank 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but there is no need to execute an instruction to switch to bank 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of the interrupt. Return from the stack area by executing the instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also returned to the original state. When a configuration in which the state of the bank is not stored in the flag register is adopted, it is necessary to execute a bank switching instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing to return to the bank 0.

  Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not an interrupt is permitted, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting the interrupt to be enabled. It should be noted that the flag for controlling whether or not an interrupt is possible is set to an interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless the interrupt is permitted (such as the EI instruction) or the RETI instruction is executed during the timer interrupt processing, the interrupt is not permitted.

  Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, the value is set to 0 (step S2491).

  Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2492). In the switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and stored as input information in an input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

  Subsequently, a random number update process 1 is executed (step S2493). In the random number updating process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, respective values for changing the initial values of the big hit symbol determining random number and the small hit symbol determining random number updated in the random number updating process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. Update the initial value determination random number.

  Thereafter, a switch input special process is executed (step S2494).

  Thereafter, a timer update process is executed (step S2495). In the timer updating process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 is turned on according to the variation display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the normal symbol variation determined in the normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process In addition to the time during which the ordinary symbol display 1189 is turned on in accordance with the display pattern, a payer ACK signal is transmitted to the effect that the payout control board 951 has successfully received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). When determining whether or not the ACK signal is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption cycle is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction processing is performed, the fluctuation time is reduced by 4 ms. When the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is accurately measured.

  Subsequently, a prize ball control process is executed (step S2496). In the prize ball control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and the calculated number is written to the main control RAM 1312. Also, based on the calculation result of the number of award balls, a self-check for creating award ball commands for paying out game balls or checking a connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is performed. Or create a command. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created award ball command and the self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. The main control MPU 1311 has a two-channel output serial communication circuit, transmits a command to the peripheral control board 1510 on one channel, and transmits a command to the payout control board 951 on another channel. The transfer rate (baud rate) of the serial communication can be set for each channel. For example, in step S2437, the transfer rate of the serial communication circuit is set. For example, the transfer rate may be set such that the transfer rate on the payout control board 951 is lower than the transfer data on the peripheral control board 1510. This is because the prize ball controlled by the payout control board 951 is accompanied by a game value, so that it is hardly affected by noise or the like, and is transferred at a low speed so as not to become an abnormal prize ball command due to command conversion or omission. On the side of the peripheral control board 1510, since a command for production without a game value is transmitted, it is sufficient that the production is returned by the next command. Further, a large number of commands are transmitted, and the production is performed with good response, It is desirable to transmit the command to the peripheral control board 1510 early so as not to give a strange feeling to the user. Note that the response of the effect is poor (for example, even if a game ball wins in the starting winning opening and the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 starts to change, the decorative symbol does not start to change in the effect display device 1600). This is because the player feels uneasy about the malfunction.

  Subsequently, a frame command receiving process is executed (step S2497). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error canceling navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release notification command based on a detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command receiving process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to that effect is sent to the payout control board 951 in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame state display command, an error release notification command, and the like), and stores the transmission information storage area described above. To memorize. Specifically, in the frame command receiving process, in order to perform notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951, the command system conforms to the command system for transmitting the command received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, the command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO) in the same manner as other generated commands. When a command from the payout control board 951 is normally received, a signal for controlling the output of the main ACK signal is generated. The main ACK signal is output directly from the output port to the payout control board 951 instead of the serial communication circuit. The main ACK signal may be output as a command from the serial communication circuit.

  Subsequently, a fraud detection process is executed (step S2498). In the fraud detection processing, an abnormal state related to fraud (magnetism, vibration, winning abnormality, etc.) is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the game switch is not in the big hit game state and it is detected by the count switch that a game ball has entered the special winning opening 2005 or 2006, the main control program is executed. Creates a prize abnormal display command which is classified into an alert display as an abnormal state and stores it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  Next, a command corresponding to a winning switch or a start-up switch is generated at the time of detection of the passage of various switches, and a switch passing command output process for setting the command in the transmission information storage area is executed (step S2499).

  Then, the flag register is evacuated to the stack area in the game control area (step S2500), and a base display output process is executed (step S2501). Unlike other processes, the base display output process is a process executed using the second area outside the game control area, and is a common process that is not affected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in order to ensure the independence of the base display output process, before and after the execution of the base display output process, predetermined data such as a flag register is saved in a stack area in the game control area, and the base display is output. It is not updated during output processing. Thereafter, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2502).

  Subsequently, a special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed (step S2503). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, it is determined whether or not the random number value for the big hit matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, and the probability variation state is set based on the random number value for the big hit symbol. It is determined whether or not to shift. Then, when the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value, it is determined whether or not to open / close the big winning ports 2005 and 2006. When opening or closing the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 based on this determination, the game state where the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (or enlarged) so that game balls can be received in the special winning openings 2005 and 2006. As a result, the game state shifts to an advantageous gaming state for the player. In addition, when the certainty change condition is satisfied, the game state shifts to a probability change state, and when the certainty change condition is not satisfied, the game state changes to a game state other than the certainty change state. Here, the “probability variation state” refers to a state (high-probability state) in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state (low-probability state).

  Subsequently, a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process is executed (step S504). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal has been input to the input terminal, a normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted, and it is determined whether or not the random number matches a normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM ("" Ordinary lottery ”). Then, it is determined whether or not to open and close the second starting port door member 2549 according to the lottery result of the normal lottery. When the opening / closing operation is performed according to this determination, the second starting port door member 2549 is in an open (or enlarged) state, so that the starting port 2004 is in a game state in which game balls can be accepted, and a game advantageous to the player is provided. Transition to the state.

  Subsequently, an output data setting process is executed (step S2505). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951, or the big hit game In this state, a drive signal is output to an attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) for opening and closing the opening and closing members 2107 of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the starting port (second starting port door member 2549), as a piece of output information to the hall computer, a probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information Output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, information output information during time reduction, start Various information regarding the game, such as a winning information output signal to output the (game information) signal and security signals to the external terminal board 784. In the output data setting process, a test signal output process may be performed to output a test signal.

  In the output data setting processing, a signal corresponding to the number of out-balls counted in the switch input special processing (step S2494) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal plate 784 every predetermined number of out balls (eg, 10 balls).

  In the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a normal symbol or a special symbol.

  Further, a peripheral board command transmission process for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2506). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area that is a transmission buffer of a plurality of bytes in a FIFO format, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2507). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, setting one word clears the watchdog timer. After that, the bank of the register is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2508), and the process returns to the process before the interruption.

[12-18. Another example 4 of setting change / confirmation processing]
Next, another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function will be described. In another example 4 described below, the processing related to the setting change is executed in the main control side main processing instead of the timer interrupt processing. The processing other than that described below is the same as that of the above-described third example.

  In the fourth example, similarly to the second example, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. However, the original main control RAM 1312 of the RAM clear switch 954 is used. In order to distinguish between the initialization function and the setting change function, the operation for changing the set value may be described as a setting change switch 972.

  FIG. 231 is a flowchart of the main control-side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control-side main processing is executed after step S2440 of the power-on processing (FIG. 227). The main control-side main process of the other example 4 executes steps S2481 to S2484 instead of step S2452 of the main control-side main process of another example 3 (FIG. 228). The setting change and the setting confirmation processing are executed in the main processing on the main control side in addition to the case where the timer interrupt processing for the setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for the normal game processing are separately provided as in another example 4. The present invention is also applicable to other examples 1 and 2. For example, the main control main processing shown in FIG. 231 includes a first main loop processing for setting processing (steps S2450 to S2453) and a second main loop processing for normal game (steps S2457 to S2458). Also in the main loop processing, one timer interrupt processing (FIG. 196 of another example 1 and FIG. 223 of another example 2) is executed. In the timer interrupt processing, setting processing (step 2068 of FIG. 190, step S2341 of FIG. 223) ) And a normal game process are executed. In this case, since only one timer interrupt process is executed in the main loop, it is not necessary to switch the CTC in steps S2454 and S2455 described later.

  In the main control-side main process shown in FIG. 231, the same reference numerals are given to the same processes as the main control-side main process of another example 3 (FIG. 228).

  First, the main control MPU 1311 executes a first main loop process for setting processing (steps S2450 to S2453). In the first main loop process, first, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure notice signal, and determines whether a power failure has occurred based on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2450). In the fourth example, the power outage is monitored in the main process. However, the power outage may be monitored by monitoring the power outage by the timer interrupt process and detecting the occurrence of the power outage. For example, when at least one of the start and end of the timer interrupt, it is determined whether the power failure notice signal is ON, and a period during which the power failure notice signal is continuously output is counted. May be determined that a power failure has occurred. In another example 4, since the timer interrupt process for the setting process and the timer interrupt process for the normal game process are provided separately, the power failure may be monitored in any of the timer interrupt processes. A power outage may be monitored. Therefore, by substituting the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process into subroutines and executing these subroutines (power failure monitoring process, power failure process) in each of the two timer interrupt processes, the same program (code ) Does not need to be incorporated into each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

  When the power failure notice signal is detected, the power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so that the interruption is set to be prohibited (step S2451), and the setting process shown in FIG. 224 is executed (step S2482). Thereafter, the setting display processing shown in FIG. 225 is executed (step S2483).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting change / setting confirmation processing has been completed based on whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2484). Specifically, it detects the edge of the setting key 971 from ON to OFF, or detects whether a predetermined period has elapsed since the change from ON to OFF. If the operation for ending the setting change / setting confirmation process has been performed, the process proceeds to step S2454 to start the normal game. On the other hand, if the setting change / setting confirmation processing is not completed, the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is cleared (step S2485). The clearing of the edge information prevents the setting value from being changed a plurality of times by one operation. This is because the first main loop process may be executed a plurality of times while the timer interrupt process for detecting the edge of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 is executed once, so that the setting is changed once. This is to prevent the setting from being changed using the same edge information as the previous time in the first main loop process executed later. Note that the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 may be cleared without clearing the edge information of the setting key 971. Thereafter, the interrupt is set to be permitted (step S2453), and the process returns to step S2450, and the first main loop process for the setting change process is repeatedly executed. The reason why the interruption is disabled in the processing from S2482 to S2485 is to prevent the setting change processing and the setting confirmation processing from being interrupted by a timer interrupt.

  In the first main loop processing for the setting processing (steps S2450 to S2453), the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is continuously cleared, and when the game shifts to the normal game (execution of the second main loop processing) In the middle), the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not referred to.

  If it is determined in step S2484 that the setting change / setting confirmation processing has been completed, a second main loop processing for a normal game (steps S2457 to S2458) is executed. When executing the second main loop process, first, the timer interrupt cycle time is set in the normal game CTC1 (step S2454), the interrupt of the CTC0 is stopped, and the interrupt of the CTC1 is activated (step S2455), CTC1 is set to allow interrupts (step S2456).

  Thereafter, a power failure notice signal is acquired, and it is determined whether a power failure has occurred based on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2457). When the power failure notice signal is detected, the power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. On the other hand, if the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, and the random number update process 2 is executed (step S2458). The random number update processing 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than random numbers for performing a winning determination in a special lottery or a normal lottery. Thereafter, the process returns to step S2457, and the second main loop process for the normal game is repeatedly executed. If the main control MPU 1311 detects that the setting key 971 has been operated to be ON during the normal game (after entering the second main loop), the main control MPU 1311 generates a command notifying the fact and performs the peripheral control. The substrate 1510 may perform a notification effect on the display device. Since this notification effect is performed during the normal game, it is desirable that the notification effect does not hinder the progress of the normal game. For example, only a specific LED is lit and displayed, or a character is displayed in a narrow area of the effect display device 1600. Or a specific symbol may be displayed, or a specific character indicating that the setting key 971 has been turned ON may be displayed in accordance with the progress of the game.

  If a power failure notice signal is detected in steps S2450 and S2457, power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

  In the power-off process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the power failure occurred is executed. Specifically, first, the interrupt is prohibited (step S2462). As a result, the timer interrupt processing described later is not performed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (Step S2463). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid / power failure clear / ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared. For example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the processing at the time of power-off at the main board side is reduced, and the processing at the time of power-off at the main board side can be surely ended.

  Thereafter, the flag register is evacuated to the stack area in the game area (step S2464), the power-off processing is executed, and the necessary processing is executed for the work area outside the game area before the power is cut off (step S2465). ). Details of the power-off processing are shown in FIG. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area is restored (step S2466).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 to determine whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held, It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2467). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. Note that the area for which the checksum is calculated is a setting state management (setting value) which may be changed in the work area in the game control area after the power is turned on and before the main control side main processing is executed. And the value of the setting state management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area.

  Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off process has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S2468). Thereby, the storage of the game backup information is completed. Lastly, the setting values of the RAM protection valid (write prohibition) and the invalidity of the prohibition area are written to the RAM protection register, the writing of the main control RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S2469), and the system stands by until the power is restored (step S2469). infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and, when an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed, determining that the area is abnormal and resetting it. In the present embodiment, the reset function by accessing the prohibited area is released to enable access to the entire area. When the unused area in the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area and the prohibited area is set as valid in the RAM protect register, when the access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 It may be reset.

  In the above-described processing, the processing is executed in the order of clearing the output port (step S2463), power-off processing (step S2465), calculating the checksum (step S2467), and setting the backup flag (step S2468). However, the execution order of these four processes is not limited to the illustrated one, and may be another order.

  In the fourth example, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the main control-side main processing. However, the occurrence of a power failure may be monitored by a timer interrupt processing, and the power failure processing may be executed based on the monitoring result. For example, in each of the two main loops, the power failure signal is checked at least at the start and end times, the period during which the power failure signal is continuously output is measured, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined value. It is advisable to detect the occurrence of a power outage. In another example 4, since the timer interrupt process for the setting process and the timer interrupt process for the normal game process are provided separately, the power failure may be monitored in any of the timer interrupt processes. A power outage may be monitored. Therefore, by substituting the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process into subroutines and executing these subroutines (power failure monitoring process, power failure process) in each of the two timer interrupt processes, the same program (code ) Does not need to be incorporated into each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

  In the main processing on the main control side shown in FIG. 231, two main loops are provided corresponding to each of the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing and the timer interrupt for the normal game. Of the timer interrupt process. In addition, at this execution timing, the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing may not be executed (for example, when branching to YES in step S2454). By providing two main loops in this manner, a process of calculating a base value is performed in a main loop (timer interrupt process) for a normal game, and an unnecessary base value is calculated in a timer interrupt process for a setting change process. Whether to execute the process of calculating the base value can be switched so that the process is not executed.

  FIG. 232 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process for a setting change process executed by the main control MPU 1311. In another example 4, the setting change / setting confirmation processing is repeatedly executed in the main loop for the setting processing. Therefore, in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process in the fourth embodiment, the process (steps S2577 to S2478) for changing the setting and confirming the setting in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process in the third embodiment (FIG. 229) is deleted. It is a thing.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2470). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which is used as a register group of bank 0, and the other is usable as a register group of bank 1, and performs bank switching. Without using the registers of both banks. The register bank 0 is used in the main processing on the main control side, and the register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, an instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but there is no need to execute an instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of the interrupt. Return from the stack area by executing the instruction. Therefore, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register returns to the original state by executing the RET instruction. When a configuration in which the state of the bank is not stored in the flag register is adopted, the bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, and the bank is returned to bank 0.

  Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not an interrupt is permitted, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting the interrupt to be enabled. It should be noted that the flag for controlling whether or not an interrupt is possible is set to an interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless the interrupt is permitted (such as the EI instruction) or the RETI instruction is executed during the timer interrupt processing, the interrupt is not permitted.

  Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, the value is set to 0 (step S2471).

  Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2472). In the switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and stored as input information in an input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

  Since the switch input process 1 in step S2472 is a process related to a winning signal, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, even if a winning is detected, payout of award balls, special symbols, normal The processing related to the progress of the game, such as changing the display of symbols, is not executed. In addition, a prize is detected with respect to the progress of the game, but a detection with respect to impropriety such as a magnet or impact (vibration) is not performed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by the employees of the hall. In the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, illegal operations such as magnets and shocks (vibrations) are not performed. This is because it is considered that it is desirable not to detect.

  Note that even in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may detect in the switch input processing 1 and monitor a specific type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect a fraudulent act of forcibly activating the setting change mode by, for example, radiating radio waves by a person who intends to perform fraud (Goto).

  Then, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2473). In the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing, the value of the game state management area does not have to be determined. This is to cope with a fraudulent act of illegally shifting to the setting change process. Whether the value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area is determined before the switch input process 1 (step S2472), and the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area. If so, the process may proceed after the peripheral board command transmission process (step S2479).

  If the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2479 without executing the processing for changing and displaying the setting value (steps S2474-S2476). When a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area, an abnormality notification command for notifying that abnormal timer interrupt processing is being executed may be generated. This is because if a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area, the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing shown in FIG. 232 is not executed, and some abnormality has occurred. In the form of the abnormality notification, a notification using a liquid crystal, a lamp, or a sound, such as notification of a magnet, a radio wave, or vibration, or a security signal may be output from the external terminal plate 784. You may employ | adopt one or more of these notification modes, and may notify by one or combination.

  On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the specific output port is cleared (step S2474). For example, the signal cleared as the specific output port in step 2474 is a power failure clear signal. And a response signal (ACK) when a command to the payout control board 951 is received. Thereafter, the LED common port is turned off (step S2475). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the time for turning off the LED is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the display switching of the LED is mixed appears. And flickering of the LED is prevented.

  Thereafter, a security signal is output from the external terminal plate 784 (step S2476). The process of outputting the security signal may be executed in the main loop for the setting change process of the main control-side main process shown in FIG. 231 similarly to the process of the setting change / setting confirmation.

  Further, a peripheral board command transmission process for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2479). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area that is a transmission buffer of a plurality of bytes in a FIFO format, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral board command transmission processing may be executed after the end of the processing of S2480 or S2481 of the main processing instead of the timer interruption processing.

  Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2480). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, setting one word clears the watchdog timer. Thereafter, the bank of the register is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2481), and the process returns to the process before the interruption.

  In the timer interrupt process for the setting change process shown in FIG. 232, unlike the other timer interrupt processes, the random number update process (R_ARTART_K) is not executed. This is because it is not necessary to update the random number generated by software when the RAM is abnormal, but a random number update process may be executed.

[13. Pachinko machine with light guide plate]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine including a light guide plate will be described. Recent pachinko machines include a light guide plate that emits light by illumination on the front side of the effect display device 1600, and performs an effect of a special symbol change display game together with the effect display device 1600. In this type of pachinko machine, a complicated effect is possible by using an effect display device and a light guide plate to superimpose images, for example. Further, since the light guide plate is provided on the front surface of the effect display device, an effect having a three-dimensional effect is displayed together with the image displayed on the effect display device. In addition, there is a light guide plate capable of stereoscopic viewing using parallax between the left and right eyes, and displays an effect with a greater stereoscopic effect.

  However, the effect using the light guide plate is becoming rut, and it is necessary to improve the interest by a new light emitting effect. Further, there is a light guide plate that can display a plurality of patterns with one sheet, and there is a demand for a more entertaining effect by displaying more various patterns.

[13-1. Construction]
FIG. 233 is an exploded perspective view of the front center unit 2500 and the presentation effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 of the gaming board 5 as viewed from the front. FIG. 234 is a front view showing a state in which the first pattern is illuminated and displayed in the presentation effect unit. FIG. 235 is a front view showing a state where the second pattern is illuminated and displayed in the presentation effect unit.

  The presentation effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the center role 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500. The presentation effect unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center role 2500. The rendering unit 2600 includes a transparent flat light guide plate 2610 for closing the frame of the center role 2500, and a first pattern substrate 2611 and a second pattern substrate mounted on the rear side of the center role 2500. 2612. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2613 capable of irradiating light to the right side of the light guide plate 2610 are mounted on the first design substrate 2611, and light is applied to the upper surface of the light guide plate 2610 on the second design substrate 2612. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2614 capable of irradiating light are mounted.

  The first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are arranged perpendicular to the light guide plate 2610 so that light can be applied to the side surface of the light guide plate 2610. For this reason, from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, only the side surfaces of the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are visible, and the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are visible from the player side. This makes the game area 5a look better.

  In this embodiment, the light guide plate (front light guide plate) 2610 will be described. However, another back light guide plate may be provided between the light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600.

  The light guide plate 2610 includes a first pattern 2621 (see FIG. 234) formed by an innumerable number of first reflecting portions having an uneven shape for reflecting light from above to the front side, and light from the lateral direction to the front side. And a second pattern 2622 (see FIG. 235) formed by an innumerable number of second reflecting portions having an uneven shape for reflecting the light to the second direction. That is, when the LED for the light guide plate of the first pattern substrate 2611 emits 2613 light, the display effect unit 2600 can display and display the first pattern 2621 on the light guide plate 2610, and the LED for light guide plate 2614 of the second pattern substrate 2612 is displayed. When light is emitted, the second pattern 2622 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 by light emission. The plurality of LEDs 2613 and 2614 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are desirably full-color LEDs, and have a strong directivity for irradiating light in a narrow range (LED with lens). Is desirable. By using a full-color LED, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 can be transferred to the light guide plate 2610 in any single color or a plurality of colors (for example, seven rainbow colors).

  On the light guide plate 2610, irregularities forming a plurality of first reflecting portions for copying the first pattern 2621 and unevenness forming a plurality of second reflecting portions for copying the second pattern 2622 are finely formed. In a state where the LED 2613 for the light guide plate of the first pattern substrate 2611 and the LED 2614 for the light guide plate of the second pattern substrate 2612 do not emit light, the light guide plate 2610 transmits light, and the back surface disposed on the rear side. The various decorations of the unit 3000 and the effect images and the like displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized well. Even when the light guide plate LEDs 2613 and 2614 are in a light emitting state, the light guide plate 2610 has a transmission area where the effect display device 1600 provided on the back side can be seen through, and does not reflect the light applied to the light guide plate 2610 and is polished. A glass-processed mat area, a lame area where a reflection pattern for reflecting transmitted light is formed irrespective of the traveling direction of light in the light guide plate 2610, and a light emitting portion of the light guide plate LED 2613 ( That is, a moving area in which a reflection pattern is formed so as to change whether light is emitted or not depending on the traveling direction of light in the light guide plate 2610) is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 234, the first pattern 2621 is part of the effect of the special symbol change display game together with the image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as described later. The first picture 2621 includes moving areas 2621a and 2621c, glitter areas 2621b and 2621d, and a mat area 2621e. The outside of the first pattern 2621 is a transmission area 2621f. The moving areas 2621a and 2621c emit light in the moving area 2621a and light in the moving area 2621c by turning on a part of the LED 2613 for the light guide plate of the first picture substrate 2611 and switching the lighting location. Therefore, by blinking the light guide plate LED 2613, the size of the first pattern 2621 can be changed.

  In the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234, the moving area and the lame area are arranged twice, but may be repeated any number of times. By composing the first pattern 2621 by repeating the moving area and the lame area a plurality of times, a complicated movement can be represented by the first pattern 2621. In the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234, the moving region and the glitter region are alternately repeated. Moving regions having different light incident positions) may be arranged adjacent to each other.

  By causing the light guide plate LED 2613 to emit light so that the light emission color is changed by the light guide plate LED 2613, the color can be changed for each moving area 2621a to emit light. Then, by sequentially changing the light emission color of the light guide plate LED 2613 (for example, repeating red → orange → yellow → green → blue → indigo → purple → red), the picture appears to move as the color changes. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 235, the second picture 2622 is a picture in which a plurality of light lines extend obliquely downward. The second pattern 2622 is formed such that the obliquely extending streaks of light correspond to the positions of the light guide plate LEDs 2614 mounted on the second pattern substrate 2612. That is, when one light guide plate LED 2614 emits light, a streak of light that extends obliquely downward from the top of the light guide plate 2610 to the lower part of the light guide plate 2610 starting from the portion of the light guide plate LED 2614 that has emitted light.

  Since the second pattern 2622 is farther from the light guide plate LED 2614 as it goes down the light guide plate 2610, the brightness of the light streak becomes darker as it goes down the light guide plate 2610. Thus, when the second pattern 2622 is viewed from the front (from the player side), the light streaks appear to extend rearward toward the lower side of the light guide plate 2610, and the light is emitted three-dimensionally. Thus, the illusion effect can be enjoyed by the light guide plate 2610.

  Further, it is preferable to arrange the reflecting portion so that stereoscopic viewing by parallax between the left and right eyes is possible. For example, when focusing on one light streak forming the second picture 2622, the second reflector that emits light that causes the light streak to be imaged on the retina of the player is different between the left and right eyes of the light guide plate 2610. By arranging them at the positions, parallax between the left and right eyes of the player can be generated, and a second pattern having depth can be shown.

  As shown in FIG. 234, the light guide plate 2610 according to the present embodiment changes the first pattern 2621 projected by irradiation of light from one direction with the mat area 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light or the traveling direction of the light. Instead, it is composed of lame areas 2621b and 2621d in which a reflection pattern that reflects transmitted light and moving areas 2621a, 2621c, and 2622a in which a reflection pattern that reflects light in a specific traveling direction are formed. A moving picture area (dynamic picture) that looks like moving the first picture and a static picture area (static picture) that looks still.

  Further, a single light guide plate 2610 can project a first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234 and a second pattern 2622 shown in FIG. 235 depending on the direction of illumination. For this reason, light of a single color (for example, red of a single wavelength or white in which light of a plurality of wavelengths is mixed) is irradiated from the lateral direction, and light of a plurality of colors is irradiated from above (for example, adjacent LED groups). 2614 emits light with different wavelengths), a single light guide plate 2610 can produce an effect of a rainbow pattern (rainbow beam) shining in seven colors and a single color pattern.

  In the light guide plate 2610 according to the present embodiment, by irradiating light from the lateral direction, a still picture is displayed in the mat area 2621e and the lame areas 2621b and 2621d of the first picture 2621, and a moving picture that appears to move in the moving areas 2621a, 2621c and 2622a. Is projected. That is, the light guide plate effect by both the still picture and the moving picture is performed by the first picture 2621 by the light irradiation from the lateral direction. In this case, the still picture and the moving picture by the first picture 2621 are projected at the same time.

  Unlike the above, the first pattern 2621 is configured by a mat area and a glitter area, and the first pattern 2621 may not include a moving pattern. In this case, a light guide plate effect is produced by a still picture by the first picture 2621 by irradiation of light from the lateral direction and a second picture 2622 by irradiation of light from above. In this case, the still picture by the first picture 2621 and the moving picture by the second picture 2622 can be projected at different timings. That is, the moving picture may be projected after the still picture is projected, or the still picture may be projected after the moving picture is projected. As described above, various effects can be performed by projecting the still picture and the moving picture at different timings. In particular, by displaying a rainbow pattern as a moving pattern and then displaying a specific character with a still pattern, it is possible to perform an effect such that the character comes down. On the other hand, by displaying the character in a moving pattern after displaying the background in a still pattern, it is possible to perform an effect such that the character moves at a specific place.

  In the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be arranged so as to overlap. In the case where light is irradiated from the horizontal direction and the upper direction, in a region where the two patterns overlap on the light guide plate 2610, the reflection patterns of the two patterns are provided in a mixed manner, so that both the patterns can be recognized. . However, when the first pattern 2621 is a pattern viewed in a plan view and the second pattern 2622 is a pattern viewed in a stereoscopic manner, it may be difficult to perform a stereoscopic view in a region where two patterns are mixed. When the reflection pattern of the first pattern 2621 is not provided, the transmission area 2621f that allows the back side (the effect display device 1600) to be seen through is provided, and when the pattern based on the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622 is projected, the second pattern 2622 is played. This makes it easy for a person to view stereoscopically.

  In the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be arranged in different regions without overlapping. When the first pattern 2621 is a pattern viewed in a plan view and the second pattern 2622 is a pattern viewed in a stereoscopic manner, it may be difficult to perform a stereoscopic view in a region where two patterns are mixed. By dividing the area where the reflection pattern of the pattern 2621 is provided and the area where the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622 is provided, and projecting the pattern based on the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622, the second pattern can be easily three-dimensionally displayed to the player. Can be seen.

[13-2. Configuration of Light Guide Plate]
Next, a specific configuration of the reflection unit will be described. FIG. 236 is a diagram illustrating the structure of the light guide plate 2610 (particularly, the arrangement of the reflection unit).

  As described above, the light guide plate 2610 includes, on the back surface side (the effect display device 1600), a transmissive area 2621f that can be seen through, a mat area 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light, and There are provided lame regions 2621b and 2621d where reflection patterns for reflecting transmitted light are formed, and moving regions 2621a, 2621c and 2622a where reflection patterns for reflecting light in a specific traveling direction are formed.

  FIG. 237 is a diagram illustrating the structure of the reflection unit.

  The reflection portion is formed by a concave portion provided on the back surface side of the light guide plate 2610, and reflects light traveling on the inside of the light guide plate 2610 to the front surface side of the light guide plate 2610 by reflection of light on the boundary surface (reflection surface 2651). Then, the pattern portion of the light guide plate 2610 is caused to emit light, and the pattern is visually recognized by the player. In the light guide plate 2610, light incident from the light guide plate LED 2614 travels inside the light guide plate 2610 with a certain spread (for example, ± 30 degrees). The light streaks forming the second picture 2622 are visible when light traveling in the direction of the light streaks is reflected by a reflecting portion 2650 described below.

  In the reflecting portion of the moving region 2622a illustrated in FIG. 237 (A), a plurality of reflecting portions 2650 are arranged along the streaks of light. The size of the reflecting portion 2650 is desirably several hundred micrometers to several millimeters, which is extremely smaller than the streak of light appearing on the light guide plate 2610, but is shown larger in the figure.

  The reflecting portion 2650 includes a reflecting surface 2651 that reflects light, an inclined surface 2652 on the back side of the reflecting surface 2651, and a side surface 2653 formed by a curved surface. The reflection surface 2651 is arranged at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610, and the direction perpendicular to the reflection surface 2651 and the incident direction of the reflected light are approximately 45 degrees. Therefore, light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 and hitting the reflection surface 2651 of the reflection portion 2650 is reflected to the front side of the light guide plate 2610 as shown in FIG. 237 (B).

  In addition, light traveling in a direction perpendicular to the streaks of light appearing in the moving area 2622a, that is, light traveling along the reflecting surface 2651 and parallel to the reflecting surface 2651 does not hit the reflecting surface 2651, but is reflected by the reflecting portion 2650 to be reflected by the light guide plate 2610. Does not exit from the surface. Similarly, light traveling in a direction having an angle (especially, an acute angle) with the streak of light appearing in the moving area 2622a impinges on the reflection surface 2651 in a small amount, and the reflection portion 2650 reflects only a small amount of light. Only weak light is emitted from the surface of the light plate 2610. For this reason, light having a wavelength that reaches a large amount is visible to the player's eyes, and a pattern can be shown with the color of the light guide plate LED 2614 that emits light at a specific position.

  At this time, the emission direction of the reflected light may be slightly shifted left and right from the direction perpendicular to the light guide plate 2610 by slightly tilting the reflection surface 2651. Since the light source that irradiates the light guide plate 2601 according to the present embodiment irradiates light with strong directivity, the reflected light from the reflector 2650 also reaches the player as a directional light beam. For this reason, parallax between the left and right eyes of the player can be generated, and a second pattern having depth can be shown. That is, since the reflector 2650 that reflects the light that reaches the right eye and the reflector 2650 that reflects the light that reaches the left eye are at different positions, the light that reaches the right eye and the light that reaches the left eye are different. The virtual intersection is not on the light guide plate 2610. In other words, if the virtual intersection of the light reaching the right eye and the light reaching the left eye is behind the light guide plate 2610, the picture appears to be in a recessed position, and the light reaching the right eye and reaching the left eye If the virtual intersection with the light to be emitted is ahead of the light guide plate 2610, the picture can be seen at the near position.

  The inclined surface 2652 provided on the opposite side of the reflection surface 2651 may be provided at an angle of about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610 as in the case of the reflection surface 2651, or light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610. May be formed at an angle that does not reflect the front surface of the light guide plate 2610 (for example, perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate 2610).

  The side surface 2653 is processed into a curved surface. By processing the side surface 2653 into a curved surface instead of a flat surface, it is possible to prevent a pattern displayed by light arriving from a direction other than a specific direction without strongly reflecting light incident from one direction.

  The reflecting portions 2660 of the lame regions 2621b and 2621d shown in FIG. 238 are constituted by spherical concave portions provided on the back surface side of the light guide plate 2610, advance in the light guide plate 2610, and from a plurality of directions (that is, from a plurality of directions). The light arriving at the reflector 2660 (by a plurality of paths) is reflected and emitted to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. Since the reflection portion 2660 in the glitter region reflects light from the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2614, when each of the light guide plate LEDs 2614 blinks at a different timing, the glitter region 2621b will shine. When the light guide plate LED 2614 emits light of a different color, the lame region 2621b emits light of a mixture of a plurality of colors. Further, when the light guide plate LED 2614 blinks in a different color, the lame area 2621b is mixed and glittered in a plurality of colors.

  Note that the mat portion 2621e is not provided with a reflection portion, but is processed into irregular ground irregularities like a ground glass, and does not reflect light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 to the front side.

  So far, the light guide plate 2610 representing the first pattern and the second pattern has been described. Next, an embodiment of the light guide plate representing a different pattern will be described. FIG. 239 is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the LED and the reflection portion in the light guide plate constituting the picture shown in FIGS. 240 to 242.

  The light guide plate 2610 shown in FIG. 239 is formed on the back surface, reflects light incident from any one of the plurality of specific light input portions 2630 on the upper surface of the light guide plate 2610, and emits the light to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. And a plurality of minute reflecting portions 2670 which are to be formed. The plurality of specific light input portions 2630 of the light guide plate 2610 are for introducing light so that the light travels through the light guide plate 2610 from a plurality of positions. Although the plurality of specific light incident portions 2630 are illustrated as four of a first specific light incident portion 2630a, a second specific light incident portion 2630b, a third specific light incident portion 2630c, and a fourth specific light incident portion 2630d, The components from the specific light incident portion 2630a to the seventh specific light incident portion are provided. In this case, seven specific light-entering portions 2630 (LED group 2614) are repeatedly provided for a rainbow effect of causing the light guide plate to emit light in seven colors, and the number of the specific light-entering portions may be determined according to the type of light emission color. The first specific light input portion 2630a to the seventh specific light input portion (not shown) repeat the upper surface of the light guide plate 2610 from left to right in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in the figure) in order from the left (the seventh specific light input portion). (In the order of returning to the beginning and becoming the first specific light incident portion 2630a).

  The reflecting portion 2670 extends in a direction perpendicular to a straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2630 (the direction in which light incident from the specific light incident portion 2630 travels in the light guide plate 2610) and guides the light. It has a boundary surface inclined 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light plate 2610. The reflecting portion 2670 is concave in a pent roof shape triangle. The reflection unit 2670 reflects light incident from the corresponding specific light input unit 2630 and emits the light in a direction substantially perpendicular to the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. In addition, the reflection unit 2670 reflects the light that has entered from the unspecified specific light entrance unit 2630 and emits the light in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate 2610.

  As a result, as shown by a broken line in FIG. 239, the light incident from the corresponding specific light incident portion 2630 is reflected by the reflecting portion 2670 on the front side of the light guide plate 2610 (in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface). Then, from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, the reflecting portion 2670 appears to emit light. On the other hand, as indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 239, light incident from the unspecified specific light incident portion 2630 is reflected by the reflecting portion 2670 in a direction other than the front front of the light guide plate 2610, and the pachinko machine 1 From the player sitting in front of, the reflection section 2670 does not seem to emit light.

  In the present embodiment, as the reflecting portion 2670, a reflecting portion that is concave in a triangle and extends in a direction perpendicular to a straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2630 is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be any as long as it extends in a direction perpendicular to a straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2630.

  The plurality of reflection units 2670 correspond to any of the plurality of specific light entrance units 2630, and the plurality of first reflection units 2670a and the second specific light entrance units 2630b corresponding to the first specific light entrance unit 2630a. , A plurality of third reflectors 2670c corresponding to the third specific light incident portion 2630c, and a plurality of fourth reflections corresponding to the fourth specific light incident portion 2630d. Unit 2670d and the like.

  In addition, the light guide plate 2610 can display a plurality of patterns 2623 that can emit light in different modes by reflecting light forward by a specific reflecting portion 2670 of the plurality of reflecting portions 2670. The plurality of patterns 2623 include a pattern 2623a including a plurality of first reflecting portions 2670a, a pattern 2623b including a plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b, a pattern 2623c including a plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c, and a plurality of fourth reflections. And a picture 2623d composed of a portion 2670d.

  As shown in FIGS. 240 to 242, the pictures are arranged in order from the center to the outside and circulate in order.

  The second pattern substrate 2612 is in the shape of a strip extending left and right, and LEDs 2614 are mounted at positions corresponding to the specific light incident portions 2630. The plurality of LEDs 2614 include a first LED group 2614a corresponding to the first specific light incident portion 2630a, a second LED group 2614b corresponding to the second specific light incident portion 2630b, and a third specific light incident portion 2630c. , A fourth LED group 2614d corresponding to the fourth specific light incident portion 2630d, and a fifth LED group corresponding to the fifth specific light incident portion (not shown). (Not shown), a sixth LED group (not shown) corresponding to the sixth specific light input section (not shown), and a seventh LED group corresponding to the seventh specific light input section (not shown). (Not shown). In FIG. 239, the first to fourth LED groups 2614a to 2614d are illustrated, and the fifth to seventh LED groups are not illustrated. Each LED group divides a plurality of LEDs 2614 arranged in a longitudinal direction (left-right direction in the drawing) on the second picture substrate 2612 in the left-right direction of the second picture substrate 2612, and sequentially divides them from left to right. (The order after the seventh LED group returns to the beginning and becomes the first LED group 2614a). In this embodiment, each LED group has six LEDs 2614 each.

  Next, the light emitting effect by the display effect unit 2600 of the present embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED group 2614a of the second pattern substrate 2612 emits light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the first specific light incident portion 2630a, and is reflected to the front of the light guide plate 2610 by the first reflection portion 2670a. Other second reflectors 2670b, third reflectors 2670c, fourth reflectors 2670d, and the like reflect outside the front, so that only the first reflector 2670a appears to be shining from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the picture composed of the plurality of first reflectors 2670a can emit light.

  When the second LED group 2614b of the second pattern substrate 2612 emits light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the second specific light incident portion 2630b, and is reflected by the second reflection portion 2670b toward the front of the light guide plate 2610, The other first reflecting portion 2670a, third reflecting portion 2670c, fourth reflecting portion 2670d, and the like reflect light to other than the front, so that only the second reflecting portion 2670b appears to be shining from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, it is possible to emit light from the picture composed of the plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b.

  When the third LED group 2614c of the second pattern substrate 2612 emits light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the third specific light incident portion 2630c, and is reflected to the front of the light guide plate 2610 by the third reflection portion 2670c. The other first reflector 2670a, second reflector 2670b, fourth reflector 2670d, and the like reflect outside the front, so that only the third reflector 2670c appears to be shining from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, it is possible to emit light from the picture composed of the plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c.

  When the fourth LED group 2614d of the second pattern substrate 2612 emits light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the fourth specific light incident portion 2630d, and is reflected to the front of the light guide plate 2610 by the fourth reflection portion 2670d, The other first reflector 2670a, second reflector 2670b, third reflector 2670c, etc., reflect outside the front, so that only the fourth reflector 2670d appears to be shining from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the picture composed of the plurality of fourth reflecting portions 2670d can emit light.

  Similarly, when each LED group emits light from the fifth LED group to the seventh LED group 2614, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the corresponding specific light incident portion 2630, and the light is reflected from the light guide plate 2610 by the corresponding reflection portion 2670. The light is reflected to the front, the light is reflected to other than the front in the other reflection unit 2670, and only the corresponding reflection unit 2670 appears to be shining from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and is constituted by the corresponding reflection unit 2670. It is possible to emit a picture that is present.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by switching the LED group to emit light, it is possible to emit a plurality of pictures 2623, respectively, and to emit a plurality of pictures in sequence to create a moving animation. Such a light emission effect can be performed. In particular, as shown in FIG. 240, in a light guide plate 2610 on which a similar pattern is superimposed, a moving effect in which a pattern emits light as in an animation in which a motion spreads from the center to the outside or shrinks from the outside to the center. Can be.

  FIG. 240 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pattern displayed in the moving effect using the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 240, a moving effect in which the size of the picture is changed is performed by switching the position of the LED group that emits light over time.

  As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident portion 2630a to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, and the first LED group 2614a corresponds to each of the specific light incident portions 2630a to 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. In FIG. 240, the position corresponding to each specific light incident portion is represented by the last letter of the code.

  As shown in FIG. 240A, when the sixth LED group 2614f and the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on and light enters from the sixth specific light input portion 2630f and the seventh specific light input portion 2630g, the light enters the light guide plate 2610. The incident light is reflected by the sixth reflection portion 2670f and the seventh reflection portion 2670g, and the pattern on which the sixth reflection portion 2670f and the seventh reflection portion 2670g are arranged emits light, so that the player can recognize the light.

  Thereafter, when the fifth LED group 2614e and the sixth LED group 2614f are turned on and light enters from the fifth specific light incident portion 2630e and the sixth specific light incident portion 2630f, the light incident on the light guide plate 2610 is reflected by the fifth reflecting portion. The 2670e and the sixth reflector 2670f are reflected, and the picture on which the fifth reflector 6670e and the sixth reflector 2670f are arranged emits light, so that the player can recognize the pattern.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 240 (B), when the fourth LED group 2614d and the fifth LED group 2614e are turned on and light enters from the fourth specific light incident portion 2630d and the fifth specific light incident portion 2630e, the light guide plate is activated. The light incident on 2610 is reflected by the fourth reflecting portion 2670d and the fifth reflecting portion 2670e, and the pattern in which the fourth reflecting portion 2670d and the fifth reflecting portion 2670e are arranged emits light, so that the player can recognize the light.

  Then, when the third LED group 2614c and the fourth LED group 2614d are turned on and light enters from the third specific light incident portion 2630c and the fourth specific light incident portion 2630d, the light incident on the light guide plate 2610 is reflected by the third reflecting portion. The 2670c and the fourth reflector 2670d are reflected, and the picture in which the third reflector 2670cd and the fourth reflector 2670d are arranged emits light, so that the player can recognize the pattern.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 240 (C), when the second LED group 2614b and the third LED group 2614c are turned on and light enters from the second specific light input portion 2630b and the third specific light input portion 2630c, the light guide plate The light that has entered the light 2610 is reflected by the second reflector 2670b and the third reflector 2670c, and the pattern in which the second reflector 2670b and the third reflector 2670c are arranged emits light, so that the player can recognize it.

  In this way, by changing the position without changing the number of LED groups (LED elements) to emit light, a moving effect of changing the size of the picture and emitting the picture so as to move outward from the center can be performed. At this time, the LED group may emit light of a single color, or each group may emit light of a different color (that is, depending on a position).

  FIG. 241 is a diagram illustrating an example of a picture displayed in another moving effect using the light guide plate. In the example illustrated in FIG. 241, a moving effect in which the size of a picture is changed by changing the number of LED groups that emit light over time is performed.

  As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident portion 2630a to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, and the first LED group 2614a corresponds to each of the specific light incident portions 2630a to 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. In FIG. 241, the position corresponding to each specific light incident portion is represented by the last letter of the code.

  As shown in FIG. 241 (A), the second LED group 2614b to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the second specific light incident portion 2630b to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g is reflected by the second reflecting portion 2670b. The seventh reflecting portion 2670g reflects, and the pattern on which the second reflecting portion 2670b to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light, so that the player can recognize it.

  Thereafter, the third LED group 2614c to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the third specific light incident portion 2630c to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g is reflected by the third reflecting portion 2670c to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g. Then, the pattern in which the third reflecting portion 2670c to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light, so that the player can recognize it.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (B), the fourth LED group 2614d to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the fourth specific light incident portion 2630d to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g is fourth reflected. The portion 2670d to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g reflects, and the pattern on which the fourth reflecting portion 2670d to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g is arranged emits light, so that the player can recognize it.

  Thereafter, the fifth LED group 2614e to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the fifth specific light incident portion 2630e to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g is reflected by the fifth reflection portion 2670e to the second reflection portion 2670g. Then, the pattern on which the fifth reflecting portion 2670e to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light, so that the player can recognize it.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (C), the sixth LED group 2614f to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the sixth specific light input portion 2630f to the seventh specific light input portion 2630g is subjected to the sixth reflection. The portion 2670f to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g reflects, and the pattern in which the sixth reflecting portion 2670f to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g is arranged emits light, so that the player can recognize it.

  As described above, by changing the number of LED groups (LED elements) to emit light, it is possible to change the size (light emission range) of the picture and to perform a moving effect of causing the picture to emit light so as to shrink. At this time, the LED group may emit light of a single color, or each group may emit light of a different color (that is, depending on a position).

  FIG. 242 is a diagram illustrating an example of a picture displayed in another moving effect using the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 242, a moving effect in which the color of the picture changes by changing the emission color of the LED group over time is performed.

  As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident portion 2630a to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, and the first LED group 2614a corresponds to each of the specific light incident portions 2630a to 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. The first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are configured by full-color LEDs, and can emit light in multiple colors. In FIG. 242, the position corresponding to each specific light input portion is represented by the last letter of the code.

  As shown in FIG. 242 (A), the first LED group 2614a lights up in red, red light incident from the first specific light incident portion 2630a is reflected by the first reflecting portion 2670a, and the first reflecting portion 2670a is arranged. The drawn pattern emits light in red, and the player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b is lit in orange, and the orange light incident from the second specific light incident portion 2630b is reflected by the second reflecting portion 2670b, and the picture is emitted in orange. In addition, the third LED group 2614c is turned on in yellow, and the yellow light incident from the third specific light incident portion 2630c is reflected by the third reflecting portion 2670c, and the picture is emitted in yellow. In addition, the fourth LED group 2614d is lit in green, and the green light incident from the fourth specific light incident portion 2630d is reflected by the fourth reflecting portion 2670d, and the pattern emits green light. Further, the fifth LED group 2614e is lit in blue, and the blue light incident from the fifth specific light incident portion 2630e is reflected by the fifth reflecting portion 2670e, and the pattern emits blue light. Further, the sixth LED group 2614f is turned on indigo blue, and the indigo light incident from the sixth specific light incident portion 2630f is reflected by the sixth reflecting portion 2670f, and the picture is emitted in indigo blue. In addition, the seventh LED group 2614g is turned on in purple, and the seventh reflector 2670g reflects the violet light incident from the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, and the picture is emitted in purple.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 242 (B), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue and indigo, respectively, and the color of the picture changes. When the time further elapses, as shown in FIG. 242 (C), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g light up in blue, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, respectively, and The color changes.

  In this way, the color of the light emitted from the LEDs constituting the LED group is changed, and the color of the pattern is sequentially changed (for example, every 0.5 seconds). The human eye gazes at a pattern that emits light in the same color, so that a moving effect in which the pattern emits light so as to move inward can be performed.

  FIG. 243 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the patterns on the light guide plate 2610 and the arrangement of the LED group 2614.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of LED groups 2614 correspond to the reflecting portion 2670 forming one picture, and the plurality of LED groups 2614 emit light in a predetermined pattern to display one picture. Specifically, the control is performed such that the light emission pattern of the LED group 2614 (specific light incident portion 2630) is repeated using the seven LED groups as a repeating unit. Further, the LED emits light with directivity, and is configured to illuminate a predetermined angle range from the front of the LED.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 243, the illumination range of the LED emitting light in the same pattern (which is a light emission source of light constituting one picture) is a range shown by a fan shape in the figure, and the second picture substrate 2612 In the vicinity, there is a range where light from the LED does not reach.

  For this reason, a picture is provided at a position separated by a predetermined distance from the end where light enters the light guide plate 2610. For example, when the illumination range of the LED is 60 degrees (full width at half maximum θ = ± 30 degrees), the range in which light from the LED does not reach is a regular triangle, so the length of the repeating unit of the LED group (with the same pattern) The pattern is provided apart from the end of the light guide plate 2610 by a length of 0.87 times (the interval between the LEDs that emit light) α.

In general, if the length α of the repeating unit of the LED group, θ is the illuminating angle of the LED, and L is the distance separating the picture from the end of the light guide plate 2610, the following relationship is obtained.
L = tan θ × α / 2

  In this way, when the moving pattern that looks moving is composed of light from a plurality of LED groups, the moving pattern must be arranged at a position separated from the end of the light guide plate 2610 by a predetermined distance. In other words, the moving picture area for displaying a moving picture is smaller than the still picture area for displaying a still picture. When the light guide plate 2610 has the same size as the display area of the effect display device 1600, the moving effect by the light guide plate 2610 can be performed in an area smaller than the display area of the effect display device 1600. For this reason, in the effect of the variable display game, the player can recognize the progress of the variable display game without hindering the visual recognition of the special symbol normally displayed near the end of the display area of the effect display device 1600. . In addition, by performing the moving effect at the center of the effect display device 1600 that the player gazes at, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the player's excitement due to the moving effect.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example was described in which the center role 2500 light guide plate 2610 of the front unit 2000 was attached. In this case, however, the inner frame of the center role 2500 (from a player located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1). An area where a moving effect is not possible within a predetermined distance from the end of the light guide plate 2610 is formed in the visible opening window portion), and the area where the moving effect is not possible can be visually recognized by the player. In addition, the area where the moving effect can be performed is narrowed, and the effect of the effect is reduced.

  Therefore, unlike the above, the light guide plate 2610 may be attached to the back unit 3000. In this case, since the light guide plate 2610 can be made larger than the inner frame of the center role 2500, the area where the moving performance cannot be performed is hidden by the center role 2500, and the area where the moving performance cannot be performed is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600. It is arranged on the outside, and a moving effect can be performed in all (or most) areas of the inner frame of the center role 2500. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the end of the light guide plate 2610 is located at a position outside the periphery of the effect display device 1600 or the outer periphery of the center role 2500.

  Since the back unit 3000 is provided with various decorations (decoration unit 3050, movable effect units 3100, 3200, 3300, 3400, 3500, etc.), the end of the light guide plate 2610 is positioned behind these decorations. The light guide plate 2610 is provided, and the light-emitting devices (the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612) can be located behind the decorative body. As a result, the substrate serving as the light source can be arranged at a position invisible to the player, and the decorativeness can be secured.

  Further, an LED for the light guide plate 2610 (LEDs 2613 and 2614 for the light guide plate) and an LED for emitting light from the decorative body may be mounted on one substrate.

  By attaching the light guide plate 2610 to the back unit 3000 in this way, the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 can be made an area where a moving effect can be performed, and the player does not notice unnaturalness due to the limitation of the moving effect area. Can be.

  FIG. 244 is a diagram illustrating an example of a picture displayed in another moving effect using the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 244, a moving effect in which the color of the picture changes by changing the emission color of the LED group with the passage of time is performed.

  As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident part 2630a to the seventh specific light incident part 2630g, and the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED corresponding to each specific light incident part. A group 2614g is arranged. The first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are configured by full-color LEDs, and can emit light in multiple colors. In FIG. 244, the position corresponding to each specific light incident portion is represented by the last letter of the code.

  As shown in the drawing, the first LED group 2614a is lit in red, the red light incident from the first specific light incident portion 2630a is reflected by the first reflecting portion 2670a, and the pattern on which the first reflecting portion 2670a is arranged is red. , And the player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b is turned on in orange, and the orange light incident from the second specific light incident portion 2630b is reflected by the second reflecting portion 2670b, so that the picture is emitted in orange. Further, the third LED group 2614c is turned on in yellow, and the yellow light incident from the third specific light incident portion 2630c is reflected by the third reflecting portion 2670c, so that the picture is emitted in yellow. Also, the fourth LED group 2614d is lit in green, and the fourth reflector 2670d reflects the green light incident from the fourth specific light incident portion 2630d, and the picture is emitted in green. Further, the fifth LED group 2614e is turned on in blue, and the blue light incident from the fifth specific light incident portion 2630e is reflected by the fifth reflecting portion 2670e, and the pattern emits blue light. In addition, the sixth LED group 2614f lights in blue, and the sixth reflector 2670f reflects the blue light incident from the sixth specific light incident portion 2630f, and the pattern emits blue light. In addition, the seventh LED group 2614g is turned on in purple, and the seventh reflector 2670g reflects the violet light incident from the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, and the picture is emitted in purple.

  Thereafter, each of the first to seventh LED groups 2614a to 2614g lights in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, and the color of the picture changes. As the time further elapses, each of the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g lights in blue, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, and the color of the picture changes.

  In this way, the color of the light emitted from the LEDs constituting the LED group is changed, and the color of the pattern is sequentially changed (for example, every 0.5 seconds). Since the human eye gazes at a pattern that emits light in the same color, it is possible to perform a moving effect in which the pattern emits light such that streaks of light of seven colors flow.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, even in the light guide plate 2610 having a pattern in which two lines of light intersect as shown in FIG. 235, by changing the emission color of each LED group 2614 as described in FIG. The color of the pattern (light streaks) changes, and a moving effect that makes the pattern emit light so that the light streaks of the seven colors flow. In addition, if the streak of light is made to appear deeper or closer to the front as the distance from the light source is increased by using the left-right parallax, a pattern having a three-dimensional effect can be displayed.

  Next, a three-dimensional pattern and a two-dimensional pattern by the light guide plate 2610 will be described.

  FIG. 245 is a diagram illustrating a manner in which a picture viewed in plan by the light guide plate 2610 is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 245 (B), since the reflecting portion 2660 provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 has a curved reflecting surface, light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in a plurality of directions. Reaches the right eye 10R and the left eye 10L of the player. In addition, the reflector 2660 travels inside the light guide plate 2610, reflects light that arrives at the reflector 2660 from a plurality of directions (that is, along a plurality of paths), and emits the light to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. As a result, as shown in FIG. 245 (A), there is no parallax between the left and right eyes in the pattern 2621 formed by the reflection portion 2660, and the player can move the pattern 2621 to a planar pattern at the position of the light guide plate 2610. Will be seen as

  FIG. 246 is a diagram illustrating a manner in which a picture viewed in plan by light guide plate 2610 is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 246 (B), a reflecting portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 reflects light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the left eye 10L of the player. The light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected toward the right eye 10R of the player. However, since the reflecting portion 2650L and the reflecting portion 2650R are disposed close to each other (for example, 1 mm or less), as shown in FIG. The parallax of the eyes is small, and it can be said that the pattern for the left eye constituted by the reflector 2650L and the pattern for the right eye constituted by the reflector 2650R are arranged at the same position. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 as a planar pattern located at the position of the light guide plate 2610.

  FIG. 247 is a diagram illustrating how a light guide plate 2610 displays a stereoscopically visible pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 247 (B), the reflection surface 2651 of the reflection portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set at an angle at which light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in the direction of the left eye 10L of the player. The reflection surface 2651 of the reflection unit 2650R is set at an angle at which the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in the direction of the right eye 10R of the player. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 247 (A), on the light guide plate 2610, the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are shifted from each other by the distance between the reflection unit 2650L and the reflection unit 2650R, and the player is left and right eyes A right-eye image and a left-eye image having parallax are recognized. In the state shown in FIG. 247, the light reaching the left eye 10L and the light reaching the right eye 10R of the player intersect at a point 2621C on the back surface side of the light guide plate 2610. For this reason, the player sees the picture 2621 formed by the reflection portions 2650L and 2650R as a three-dimensional picture located at a position behind the light guide plate 2610.

  FIG. 248 is a diagram illustrating how a light guide plate 2610 displays a stereoscopically visible pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 248 (B), the reflection surface 2651 of the reflection portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set at an angle at which light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in the direction of the left eye 10L of the player. The reflection surface 2651 of the reflection unit 2650R is set at an angle at which the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in the direction of the right eye 10R of the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 248 (A), on the light guide plate 2610, the left-eye image 2621L and the right-eye image 2621R are shifted from each other by the distance between the reflection unit 2650L and the reflection unit 2650R, and the player is left and right eyes. A right-eye image and a left-eye image having parallax are recognized. In the state shown in FIG. 248, the light reaching the left eye 10L and the light reaching the right eye 10R of the player intersect at a point 2621C on the surface side of the light guide plate 2610. For this reason, the player sees the pattern 2621 formed by the reflection portions 2650L and 2650R as a three-dimensional pattern in front of the light guide plate 2610.

  As described above, according to the presentation effect unit 2600, a plurality of different patterns can be emitted by one light guide plate 2610, so that it is necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates for each pattern in order to perform animation display or the like. In addition, the thickness of the presentation effect unit 2600 in the front-rear direction can be reduced as much as possible. In addition, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center role 2500, the light guide plate 2610 can be positioned as close as possible to the player side, and it is easy to secure a wide space behind the light guide plate 2610. it can. Therefore, since a wide space can be secured behind the light guide plate 2610, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like can be arranged behind the light guide plate 2610. The pachinko machine 1 can improve the appearance in the game area 5a and have a high appeal to the player, and in addition to the production by the light emission display of the pattern 2623, the lower movable production unit 3100, the upper rear movable production unit 3200, and By performing a movable effect using the upper front movable effect unit 3300 or the like, a variety of effects can be provided to the player, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, by arranging the light guide plate 2610 in front of the effect unit, the decorative body, and the effect display device 1600, a plurality of translucent patterns due to the light emission of the plurality of reflectors 2670 emerge to show a light-emitting decoration that moves like an animation. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to a player who is familiar with the luminous effect using the conventional light guide plate, to surprise and entertain the player, and to have something good for the player. It is possible to make the player think that there is a chance, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Also, since only the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the luminous display of the pattern by the light guide plate 2610 satisfactorily, the luminous display of the pattern 2623 from other players who are away from the front. Can be hard to see, it is difficult for other players to notice that the effect using the light guide plate 2610 is being performed, and it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention, The player can play the game without hesitation and can enjoy the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the light guide plate 2610 is mounted in the frame of the center role 2500 where the center role 2500 is mounted at the center in the front-viewing game area 5a, the patterns 2621 and 2622 are illuminated and displayed by the LEDs 2613 and 2614. Also, the illuminated display pattern does not hinder the game in the game area 5a, and the area in which the game is actually performed can be visually recognized in a good state from the player side, and the game becomes hard to see. The game can be enjoyed in a good condition by preventing the player from being distrusted.

  In addition, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center role 2500, the periphery of the light guide plate 2610 is aligned with the frame of the center role 2500, so that the periphery of the light guide plate 2610 (the first pattern substrate). 2611 and the second picture substrate 2612) can be hardly seen from the player side, and it is difficult for the player to notice the presence of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the light guide plate 2610 is present when the picture is displayed by light emission. A strong impact can be given to a player who has not considered to be surprised, and it is possible to entertain the luminous display of a plurality of pictures by the light guide plate 2610, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image is provided behind the light guide plate 2610, the light emitting display of the plurality of different patterns by the light guide plate 2610 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600 are combined. Since the effects can be shown to the player, various effects can be performed by appropriately combining the effects, making it difficult for the player to get tired, and at the same time, allowing the player to entertain by the effects of the light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600. Can be suppressed, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 is disposed behind the light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the light guide plate 2610 is different from the distance to the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to display an effect image related to a plurality of patterns 2623 illuminated and displayed on the light guide plate 2610, and to impart a sense of depth and a three-dimensional effect to the pattern 2623 illuminated and displayed. An effect (display effect) that can strongly attract the interest can be shown to the player, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, the LEDs 2613 and 2614 may be single-color LEDs or full-color LEDs. In addition, the number of specific light-entering portions, reflecting portions, and LED groups can be appropriately selected according to the number, shape, and size of the pictures.

[13-3. Production example]
Next, an example of the effect display using the light guide plate in the special symbol change display game will be described. FIG. 249 to FIG. 254 are diagrams illustrating an example of an effect using the light guide plate.

  In the effect display shown in FIG. 249, the light guide plate 2610 emits light so that a predetermined pattern is reflected on the light guide plate 2610, and a movement effect of moving an image toward the predetermined image is displayed on the effect display device 1600. This effect display may be executed in a specific special symbol variation display game (for example, as a specific reach effect or a notice effect).

  Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 249 (A), nothing is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the entire screen darkens (blacks out). This blackout allows the player to gaze at the effect display device 1600.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 249 (B), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned on, and the first pattern 2621 is projected on the light guide plate 2610. This allows the player to gaze at the first pattern 2621. Then, as shown in FIG. 249 (C), a movement effect of displaying an image moving toward the first pattern 2621 on the effect display device 1600 is performed. As shown in FIG. 249 (D), in the movement effect, the image 1611 may be moved from a plurality of positions (ie, a plurality of directions) of the effect display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621. The image 1611 displayed by moving to the effect display device 1600 may be the same color as the first pattern 2621 or a different color. Further, the image 1611 moved and displayed on the effect display device 1600 may have the same shape (similar shape) as the first picture 2621 as shown in FIG. 249, or may have a different shape as shown in FIG. In addition, the image 1611 and the first pattern 2621 that are moved and displayed are the same character image (the pose or face may be the same or different) or the same character (for example, the name of the character) and the font and color are different. They may be the same or different. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the light guide plate 2610 is disposed on the front side of the effect display device 1600, the back of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 as shown in FIG. An image may be displayed by the effect display device 1600.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 249 (E), in the moving effect, the number of images 1611 moving toward the first pattern 2621 and the ratio of the moving image 1611 in the display area of the effect display device 1600 elapse over time. May be changed along with.

  During the movement effect, the mode of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed. For example, as shown in FIG. 251, the color and brightness of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the movement effect. The color and brightness of the first picture 2621 may be changed continuously (gradually) or stepwise (stepwise).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 252, the size of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the movement effect. In this case, it is preferable to provide a plurality of light guide plates and project a pattern having a different size using another light guide plate. In addition, since the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions, a direction different from the irradiation direction (lateral direction) for projecting the first pattern 2621 having the initial size (for example, the horizontal direction). The first pattern 2621 having a different size (large or small) may be projected by irradiating light from an oblique direction.

  After performing the movement effect for a predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 249 (F), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned off, and the first pattern 2621 is turned off from the light guide plate 2610. Further, the image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is also erased, and the entire screen darkens (blacks out) to black. With this blackout, the player is gazed at the effect display device 1600, and a space is created for improving the expectation for the next effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 249 (G), the first pattern 2621 and an image 1612 (for example, a character with high reliability of hitting) different from the moving and displayed image are displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, as shown in FIG. 249 (H), the size of the character image 1612 is changed. For example, when the size of the character image 1612 is increased, the expectation of the player hitting is increased, but when the size of the character image 1612 is reduced, the expectation of the player hitting is reduced. Note that the color and expression of the character image 1612 may be changed. The character image 1612 may be displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the first pattern 2621. Further, along with the display of the character image 1612, the light guide plate 2610 may be irradiated from above to project a rainbow pattern (see FIG. 235).

  The character image may be displayed on the light guide plate 2610. As described above, since the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions, the light guide plate 2610 can project a different pattern (for example, obliquely) from the irradiation direction (lateral direction) for projecting the first pattern 2621. The character image may be projected by irradiating light from (direction). Further, a plurality of light guide plates may be provided, and the character image may be projected on another light guide plate. When a light guide plate provided in addition to the light guide plate 2610 displays character images having different sizes and expressions, unlike the flat effect display device 1600, an effect display with a sense of depth becomes possible.

  As described above, in the moving effect in which the image moves toward the first pattern 2621, the image on the effect display device 1600 moves after the first pattern 2621 is projected, but the image on the effect display device 1600 moves. , The first pattern 2621 may be displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 253, after the blackout (FIG. 253 (A)), before the first pattern 2621 is projected, as shown in FIG. A movement effect for displaying an image moving toward the position to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 253 (C), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern board 2611 is turned on, and the first pattern 2621 is projected on the light guide plate 2610. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 253 (D), the movement effect in which the image moves toward the first pattern 2621 is continued.

  As described above, the time during which the first pattern 2621 is projected (the time of the light guide plate effect) and the effect time during which the image 1611 moves (the time during which the moving image is displayed on the effect display device 1600) are equal to the first pattern 2621. May be started before or after the effect in which the image 1611 moves. Further, the time of the light guide plate effect in which the first pattern 2621 is projected may be longer or shorter than the effect time in which the image 1611 moves.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 254, the effect of the variable display game may be performed by switching between a moving pattern in which the pattern at which the images are gathered appears to move and a static pattern in which the pattern does not move.

  In the light guide plate effect shown in FIG. 254, an effect with a high expectation for a big hit is exhibited when a moving picture appears, and an effect with a low expectation for a big hit is exhibited only when a still picture appears. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 254 (A), a still picture 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 in accordance with the progress of the variable display game, and the displayed still picture is displayed as shown in FIG. 254 (B). A moving effect of displaying an image 1611 moving toward 2621 on the effect display device 1600 is performed. Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 254 (C), the still picture 2621 is switched to the moving picture. Further, as shown in FIG. 254 (D), a movement effect of moving the image 1611 from a plurality of positions (ie, a plurality of directions) of the effect display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621 may be performed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 254 (E), a still picture 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 in accordance with the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. 254 (F), the still picture 2621 is displayed. A moving effect of displaying the moving image 1611 on the effect display device 1600 is performed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 254 (G), a moving effect of moving the image 1611 from a plurality of positions (ie, a plurality of directions) of the effect display device 1600 toward the picture 1613 as shown in FIG. Good. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 254 (H), the variable display game ends in a loss without switching the still picture 2621 to the moving picture.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 254, when a specific display effect (for example, a specific reach effect, a pseudo continuous effect, or a specific look-ahead effect) is selected in the special symbol change display game, the effect is displayed in the specific display effect. The specific image 1611 performs an effect integrally with the moving effect by the first pattern 2621, and in other cases, the moving effect may not be performed on the first pattern.

  As described above, in the effect of the variable display game shown in FIG. 254, an effect in which a still image and a moving image are selectively displayed by the light guide plate 2610 is performed, so that the player has a sense of expectation in the development of the variable display game. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Next, an example of an effect in which an effect by an operating body is added to the effect display using the light guide plate in the special symbol change display game will be described.

  FIG. 255 and FIG. 256 are diagrams illustrating examples of effects using the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 255, one pattern is composed of the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601 appearing on the front of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 255 (A), a part of the movable body 3601 appears or disappears from the upper part of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in a short period in accordance with the progress of the variable display game. Repeatedly, increase the expectations of the jackpot for the player. Then, as shown in FIG. 255 (B), the entire movable body 3601 appears on the front surface of the display screen of effect display device 1600.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 255 (C), a moving effect of displaying a pattern 2621 superimposed on the movable body by the light emission of the light guide plate 2610 and displaying an image 1611 moving toward the movable body 3601 on the effect display device 1600 is performed. Do. Further, with the progress of the variable display game, as shown in FIG. 255 (D), a movement effect of moving an image from a plurality of positions (that is, a plurality of directions) of the effect display device 1600 toward the picture 2621 may be performed. .

  The movable body 3601 may emit light at the timing when the movement effect starts or during the movement effect. The light emission mode (light emission color and light emission timing) of the movable body 3601 may be the same as or different from the light emission mode of the light guide plate 2610.

  By selectively performing either the effect display in which the movable body 3601 does not appear in FIG. 249 or the effect display in which the movable body 3601 appears in FIG. 255, the player's expectation of the development of the variable display game can be obtained. It is possible to increase the pachinko machine with high interest.

  In the above-described example, the movable body 3601 appears instead of the pattern where the images are gathered. However, one character may be configured by the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601. For example, when the movable body 3601 represents the body and the light guide plate 2610 represents the face, the facial expression can be changed by switching the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2610. As described above, in addition to the effects produced by the effect display device 1600, various effects produced by the light guide plate 2610 can be realized.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 256, the light guide plate 2610 is used as an effect indicating the appearance of the movable body 3601. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 256 (A), a pattern 2621 is displayed by light emission of the light guide plate 2610 in accordance with the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. A moving effect of displaying an image 1611 moving toward the displayed pattern on the effect display device 1600 is performed. Further, with the progress of the variable display game, as shown in FIG. 256 (C), a movement effect of moving the image 1611 from a plurality of positions (ie, a plurality of directions) of the effect display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621 is performed. You may. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 256 (D), the movable body 3601 appears from the upper part of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and stops at a position overlapping the pattern 2621 of the light guide plate 2610.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 256 (E), a picture 1613 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in accordance with the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. A moving effect of displaying the moving image 1611 on the effect display device 1600 is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 256 (G), with the progress of the variable display game, a movement effect of moving the image 1611 from a plurality of positions (ie, a plurality of directions) of the effect display device 1600 toward the design 1613 may be performed. Good. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 256 (H), the variable display game ends with a loss without the movable body appearing.

  Thus, in the effect shown in FIG. 256, an effect indicating that the movable body comes out can be performed using the light guide plate.

[14. Pachinko machine using main control MPU with serial communication function]
The main control MPU 1311 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a synchronous serial communication function in addition to a conventional communication function using an 8-bit parallel bus.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, the input / output signals of the main control MPU 1311 in the main control board 1310 are transmitted using a parallel port in which one signal is transmitted through one signal line or an 8-bit bus. In some cases, data output from the main control MPU 1311 is read, or an illegal signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 to perform an illegal act. For this reason, there is a demand for a configuration in which the input / output signals of the main control MPU 1311 are difficult to detect from the outside. If a serial communication function of continuously transmitting data at a predetermined timing over one signal line is used, the serial communication It is difficult to read data or input data in line with the line timing.

  Further, the main control board 1310 has a test signal output circuit for monitoring a signal when the inspection organization inspects the pachinko machine. For example, when inspecting the operation of the special electric accessory, a signal (for example, 5 V ON / OFF) input to a solenoid driving driver (transistor) for monitoring an output signal of a solenoid that opens and closes the special electric accessory is monitored. Signal) to make a signal for inspection. If the serial signal transmitted in the main control board 1310 is output as a signal for inspection, it is difficult for an inspection organization to use a device for analyzing the serial signal, so that it is difficult to use the serial signal for the signal for inspection. It is. For this reason, in a pachinko machine that transmits a signal by serial communication in the main control board 1310, it is necessary to devise an output of a test signal. For this reason, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, by inputting one serial signal to two serial-parallel conversion circuits connected in parallel, an inspection signal for changing the level at the same timing as the solenoid driving signal is used. Is generated. If the output transistor of the serial / parallel converter is constituted by an open collector (or open drain), the voltage level is different by changing the voltages (5 V and 12 V) applied to the two serial / parallel converters connected in parallel. Two synchronized signals can be generated.

  Further, it is necessary to reduce the number of steps of a program for detecting an input by serial communication and reduce a software load. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, a part of the signal input to the main control MPU 1311 is input to the parallel / serial conversion circuit and a part is directly input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311. A device is needed to accept the input signal. For example, a signal whose input level needs to be determined immediately after power-on may not be input to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit, but may be input directly to a general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311. This is because the level of the signal input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311 can be detected even before the execution of the interrupt processing, so that the signal level can be detected even immediately after power-on, other than the timer interrupt processing.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, depending on the number of signals directly input to the main control MPU 1311, it is not necessary to use the extended I / O using the chip select, and the signal is input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311. The signal level can be captured in bit units for each clock, and the signal level can be detected in real time without waiting for reception of a serial signal.

  FIG. 257 is a block diagram around the synchronous serial interface of the main control board 1310, FIG. 258 is a circuit diagram showing the connection between the serial / parallel conversion circuit and the LED, and FIG. 261 is the main control MPU 1311 and the periphery. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an arrangement of components on a main control board 1310. In FIGS. 257, 258, and 261, thick lines indicate transmission lines for parallel signals, and thin lines indicate transmission lines for serial signals.

  The main control MPU 1311 according to the present embodiment includes an asynchronous serial communication port (asynchronous serial communication function) for communicating with another board (the peripheral control board 1510, the payout control board 951, and the like), and a main control board 1310. Synchronous serial communication port (synchronous serial communication function) for communicating with the interface circuit, outputs control signals for other devices (such as solenoids), and outputs from abnormality detection sensors such as vibration detection sensors and magnetic detection sensors It has a general-purpose port to which signals are input.

  The synchronous serial communication function of the main control MPU 1311 has a plurality of transmission / reception ports and a plurality of transmission ports. The communication partner of the transmission / reception port is selected by a chip select signal output from the main control MPU 1311.

  The transmission / reception port includes a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX), a reception signal input terminal (SERRX), a chip select output terminal (SERS0 to SERS3), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCK). The transmission port includes a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTXT), a chip select output terminal (SERST), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCKT).

  As shown in FIG. 257, one parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 and two serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are connected to the transmission / reception port. The number of parallel / serial conversion circuits connected to the transmission / reception port is not limited to the illustrated one.

  Note that more serial / parallel converters may be connected by connecting like the parallel / serial converter 1341 without using the chip select terminal. In this case, the types of signals output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit do not increase.

  The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 connected to the transmission / reception port fetches the parallel data input when CLEAR / LOAD (negative logic) is at a 0 level, and outputs a predetermined clock after CLEAR / LOAD (negative logic) rises to 1. Data is output from the serial port at the timing of. The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 receives signals from a game ball detection switch (start winning port, large winning port count switch, normal winning port, specific area switch, normal symbol gate switch, game board discharge switch), a photo sensor, and the like. The game ball that mainly flows down the game area 5a is detected. Although the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 has a configuration having a 16-bit input port, an integrated circuit having an 8-bit input port may be connected in parallel to form a 16-bit configuration.

  Specifically, since a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX) is connected to CLEAR / LOAD (negative logic) of the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341, the serial control signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is at the 0 level. The output signal of the game ball detection switch is taken in, and after the serial transmission signal (SERTX) rises to 1, serial data corresponding to the level of the game ball detection switch is output from the serial port at a predetermined clock timing. As described above, since the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341 captures the output signal of the game ball detection switch with the SERTX signal as a trigger, the data of the ball detection sensor can be captured at an arbitrary timing.

  Each of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343 connected to the transmission / reception port outputs a signal for turning on an LED (function display unit 1400, base display 1317). The data transmission destination is selected by the chip select signal from the main control MPU 1311. The serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 capture the input serial data according to a predetermined clock signal when the chip select (CS) signal is at the 0 level, and output a signal from the parallel port when the chip select signal rises to 1. I do. The output level from the parallel port is latched in the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, and is maintained until the next time the chip select signal rises to 1.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 258, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1342 is connected to the segment side of the LED, and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343 is connected to the common side of the LED. When the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343 outputs a signal at a predetermined timing, the LED is dynamically lit. Although the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 have a configuration having 16-bit output ports, they may have a 16-bit configuration by connecting integrated circuits having 8-bit output ports in parallel.

  The main control MPU 1311 outputs a common signal at the timing of outputting 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS0), sets the display digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317, and outputs 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS1). The segment signal is output at the timing to turn on the LED.

  In this embodiment, a 7-segment LED in which the anode side of the LED is a common terminal is used for the base display 1317. When the LED is lit, a drive current flows from the common terminal on the anode side to the segment terminal on the cathode side. Flows. However, since an integrated circuit having the same configuration is used for the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343, the direction of the current output from the driver circuit in each of the conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 (the output transistor of the driver circuit) Polarity) will be the same. For this reason, a driver circuit 1344 is provided after the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343 so that a current can be supplied to the common terminal on the anode side. That is, the driver circuit 1344 has a function of outputting a drive current for lighting the LED, and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343 has a function of drawing in the drive current for lighting the LED.

  In other words, the common side of the LED (function display unit 1400, base display 1317) is connected to a serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343 and a driver circuit 1344 functioning as signal direction regulating means for regulating the signal direction. That is, two stages of signal direction regulating means are provided on the common side of the LED. On the other hand, a serial / parallel conversion circuit 1342 is provided on the segment side of the LED, and one-stage signal direction regulating means is provided.

  The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341, and the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 may use an integrated circuit having only a parallel / serial conversion function and an integrated circuit having only a serial / parallel conversion function, respectively. Further, an integrated circuit capable of mutually converting a serial signal and a parallel signal may be used by switching between a parallel-serial conversion function and a serial-parallel conversion function.

  Further, two serial / parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 are connected to the transmission port of the main control MPU 1311. The serial / parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 fetch the serial data input when the chip select (CS) is at the 0 level according to a predetermined clock signal, as in the case of the aforementioned serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343. Is output from the parallel port at the timing of rising. The output of the parallel port is provided with a driver transistor, and switches the voltage applied to the driver transistor to generate an output signal. That is, output signals of various voltages can be generated depending on the voltage applied to the driver transistor.

  An external terminal plate 784 is connected to the output ports (PA0 to PA7) of channel A of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345, and signals output from the external terminal plate 784 (for example, a security signal and a ball payout signal). Is output. Various solenoids are connected to the output ports (PB0 to PB7) of channel B of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345, and drive signals for the various solenoids are output. A test terminal 1348 is connected to the output port (PB0 to PB7) of channel B of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346, and a signal output from the test terminal 1348 (for example, a special electric accessory opening signal, Normally, a motor-operated accessory opening signal is output. Nothing is connected to the output port of channel A of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346.

  The transmission port of the main control MPU 1311 can control only one channel (16 bits), and the same signal branched including the chip select is input to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346. Therefore, the same signal is output to the parallel side. Therefore, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 generate a set of parallel signals that change at the same timing from one serial signal. That is, the solenoid drive signal output from the output port (PB0 to PB7) of channel B of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the inspection signal output from the output port (PB0 to PB7) of channel B of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346. The signal changes at the same timing. Therefore, the movement of the solenoid can be accurately output from the inspection terminal 1348. In addition, +12 V is applied to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345 to drive the solenoid at 12 V, and +5 V is applied to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346 to output a 5 V inspection signal. As described above, by using the two serial / parallel conversion circuits to which different voltages are applied, synchronized signals having different voltage levels can be generated.

  Among the outputs from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346, the pattern on the output side of the solenoid drive signal through which a relatively large current flows is made thick, and the pattern on the output side of the inspection signal through which only a relatively small current flows. The pattern may be thin. It is sufficient to reduce the resistance of the pattern without increasing the thickness of the pattern, and to increase the substantial cross-sectional area by forming the pattern on both the front and back surfaces, or to increase the substantial cross-sectional area by forming the inner layer pattern. May increase.

  Further, since the two serial / parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 operate independently, even if the load on one of the conversion circuits becomes large, the waveform of the output signal of the other conversion circuit is not disturbed and the output signal is not affected. Does not occur. That is, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346 can output an inspection signal having the same waveform as the original waveform of the drive signal of the solenoid regardless of the operation of the solenoid connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345, which is useful for accurate inspection. .

  A reset signal is input from the reset circuit 1335 to the main control MPU 1311. The reset signal output from the reset circuit 1335 is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the two inverter buffers of the buffer circuit 1336. When receiving the reset signal, the main control MPU 1311 resets its operation and executes the program from the head address.

  The reset signal is also input from the reset circuit 1335 to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 via the two inverter buffers of the buffer circuit 1336. When the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 receive the reset signal, the operation is reset, and the display contents of the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are returned to the initial state (for example, the display is erased).

  The buffer circuit 1336 has at least four inverter buffers. Two inverter buffers are arranged between the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311. The reset circuit 1335 and the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342, 1343 And two inverter buffers. The reason why the inverter buffers having the same characteristics are arranged on the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the main control MPU 1311 and the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 is that the output from the reset circuit 1335 is performed on two paths. This is to make the waveform and timing of the reset signal to be the same as much as possible.

  The inverter / buffer of the buffer circuit 1336 functions as a signal direction regulating unit that allows a signal to pass in only one direction. By restricting the signal direction on the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, it is possible to suppress the noise that enters from the outside from reaching the main control MPU 1311. However, when the reset circuit 1335 is directly connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, the reset signal is sent to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 at a timing different from the reset signal input from the reset circuit 1335 to the main control MPU 1311. Will be entered. That is, the transmission of the reset signal to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 provided by the two-stage inverter / buffer provided on the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the main control MPU 1311 is accelerated and controlled by the main control MPU 1311. The reset command reaches the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 first.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, a two-stage inverter buffer is mainly provided on the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the control MPU 1311 and the path to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, and the main control MPU 1311 and the serial A reset signal is transmitted to the parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 at the same timing, and each circuit is reset at the same timing. As described above, the inverter buffer arranged on the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the main control MPU 1311 is infinitely matched with the transmission timing of the reset signal input to the path to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343. At first glance, the circuits provided in the two paths look the same, but perform different functions.

  In general, it is not necessary to arrange a special circuit in a path for transmitting a reset signal output from the reset circuit. However, from the viewpoint of aligning the timing of the reset signal as in the present case, a buffer (timing adjustment unit) is used. ) Is required.

  Further, in order to match the signal timing (delay the signal), the present invention is not limited to the above-described inverter / buffer, and another type of circuit that matches the timing may be used. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 259 and 260, an IC accommodating six inverter buffers is employed. However, the packaged IC has one integrated six inverter buffers. Formed on a semiconductor chip. In a semiconductor chip, a plurality of sets of circuits are formed through several processes on a silicon wafer cut out of single crystal silicon (ingot). This is diced to separate the circuit, and the chip-shaped circuit is packaged to form an IC. Therefore, the variation in the characteristics of each of the plurality of circuits formed on the same silicon wafer is small. In this case, in consideration of the above, the inverter buffers housed in one IC are arranged in two paths so that the signal transmission characteristics on the paths are the same.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the function display unit 1400 is arranged on the hinge side for opening and closing the frame, and the prize ball payout mechanism is also arranged on the hinge side. The game ball supplied from the island facility in which the pachinko machine is installed moves in the prize ball payout mechanism in a charged state. The game ball is further charged by friction with the resin member constituting the prize ball payout mechanism. When the charged game ball discharges static electricity, electromagnetic noise is generated, and the noise enters the electronic circuit directly or via a signal path (electric wire forming a harness).

  As described above, the main control board of the present embodiment executes the game control by the interrupt processing of a fixed period (the above-described initialization processing to timer interrupt processing: FIGS. 21 to 23). Therefore, even if the information is reset, if the main control MPU 1311 is operating normally, new information (display data) is mainly stored in the next interrupt cycle (after 4 ms in this case) even if the information is reset. The operation is returned from the control MPU 1311 to a normal operation.

  However, when the main control MPU 1311 is reset, the time required for the initialization processing of the peripheral control board 1510 for controlling the effect display device 1600 is waited, so that the command to the function display unit 1400 is interrupted, and the function is stopped. The display on the display unit 1400 disappears, and the player is concerned about whether the game can be continued. For this reason, it is desirable not to reset the main control MPU 1311.

  Next, the arrangement of the inverter buffer in the IC package and the connection of the terminals will be described. FIGS. 259 and 260 are diagrams illustrating connection examples of terminals of an IC that accommodates an inverter buffer.

  The IC shown in FIGS. 259 and 260 has a shape in which terminals are arranged side by side (that is, in two rows) on both sides of the IC package (for example, a dual-in-line package of an insertion mounting type or a small outline package of a surface mounting type). ), And has six inverter buffers, and the input and output terminal numbers of each inverter buffer are 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 9-8, 11-10, and 13-12. Has become.

  Each inverter buffer is not limited to a simple inverter buffer, but may be a Schmitt trigger type inverter buffer having a hysteresis characteristic. By providing the inverter buffer with the hysteresis characteristic, the waveform of the reset signal can be reliably shaped, and the resistance to noise can be improved. Further, by using a Schmitt trigger type buffer, it is possible to cope with a waveform in which an input signal rises slowly. That is, in the CMOS, when the level of the input signal is near the threshold for a long time, a large current may flow in the gate and cause latch-up. However, by using a Schmitt trigger type buffer, the rising of the input signal may be caused. Latch-up can be suppressed even with slow waveforms.

  In the connection example shown in FIG. 259, the reset signal output from the reset circuit 1335 is input to the terminals 3 and 11, and the reset signal input to the terminal 3 is output from the terminal 4 via the inverter buffer. , And input to a terminal 5, further output from a terminal 6 via an inverter buffer, and input to serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343. On the other hand, the reset signal input to the terminal 11 is output from the terminal 10 via the inverter buffer, input to the terminal 9, further output from the terminal 8 via the inverter buffer, and input to the main control MPU 1311. Is done.

  As described above, in the connection example shown in FIG. 259, the reset signal sent to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 is passed through one terminal of an IC package in which terminals are arranged side by side (that is, in two rows), and Since the reset signal sent to the main control MPU 1311 is passed through the terminal on the other side, the two reset signals do not intersect, and noise induced on the signal lines to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 is transmitted to the main control MPU 1311. Input can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the connection example shown in FIG. 260, the reset signal output from the reset circuit 1335 is input to the terminals 1 and 3, and the reset signal input to the terminal 1 is output from the terminal 2 via the inverter buffer. The output is input to the terminal 13, further output from the terminal 12 via the inverter buffer, and input to the main control MPU 1311. On the other hand, the reset signal input to the terminal 3 is output from the terminal 4 via the inverter buffer, is input to the terminal 11, and is further output from the terminal 10 via the inverter buffer. 1342 and 1343.

  As described above, in the connection example shown in FIG. 260, the reset signals sent to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are collected and passed to a part of the IC, and the reset signals sent to the main control MPU 1311 are collected and collected at another part. Therefore, the two reset signals do not intersect with each other, and the input of noise induced on the signal lines to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 to the main control MPU 1311 can be suppressed.

  Next, the arrangement of the main control MPU 1311 and peripheral components on the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 261, a main control MPU 1311 is mounted on a main control board 1310, and various interface circuits are arranged around the main control MPU 1311. An inspection circuit arrangement area is provided on the main control board 1310, and a serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346, an interface circuit 1347, and an inspection terminal 1348 are provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area. Circuit components (serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346, interface circuit 1347, inspection terminal 1348, etc.) provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area are mounted only on the pachinko machine 1 to be inspected by the inspection organization, and are generally marketed pachinko machines. No. 1 is not mounted (a pattern for mounting components is provided). That is, a connector that relays a signal output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345 to the solenoid is mounted on the generally marketed pachinko machine 1, but the inspection signal output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346 is transmitted. The inspection terminal 1348 to be relayed is not mounted. For this reason, the commercially available pachinko machine 1 has a configuration in which the inspection signal is not detected by the wrongdoer and is not used for the wrongdoing.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 for commercial use, a printed pattern (for example, a data bus connected to the interface circuit 1347) is provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area, although no components are mounted. For this reason, since noise may be induced on the data bus and cause a malfunction, the wiring (print pattern) in the test circuit arrangement area is pulled up to the power supply (+5 V) via a resistor (or to GND). (Pull down) to reduce the effect of noise.

  Further, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, the surface mounted components are not used in the pachinko machine 1 that is commercially available, but the circuit components provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area are not mounted on the pachinko machine 1 that is commercially available. Surface mount components can be used. For this reason, the components of the inspection circuit can be reduced in size, the inspection circuit arrangement area can be reduced, and the main control board 1310 can be reduced in size. Similarly, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, the commercially available pachinko machine 1 has no components mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310, but the circuit components provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area are the commercially available pachinko machines. 1, components can be mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310.

  Note that, among the components of the inspection circuit, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the inspection terminal 1348 may be provided on another board arranged near the main control board 1310. This separate board is mounted only on the pachinko machine 1 to be inspected by the inspection organization, and is not mounted on a generally marketed pachinko machine 1. In this case, the inspection signal is not output from the pachinko machine 1 which is generally commercially available.

  In this way, by arranging the circuit components used for the inspection of the pachinko machine 1 in the inspection circuit layout area, it is easy to find missing parts in the commercially available pachinko machine 1, and to add additional components for fraud. Easy to find installation. Further, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the interface circuit 1347 can be arranged near the inspection terminal 1348, so that the main control board 1310 having high noise resistance can be configured.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 261, the circuit components arranged in the inspection circuit arrangement area have a different orientation (for example, 180 degrees as shown in the drawing) from the same type of circuit components arranged elsewhere in the main control board 1310. (Rotated direction). In this way, by arranging the circuit components in different directions in the inspection circuit arrangement area and other places of the main control board 1310, it becomes possible to easily distinguish the components used for the normal game from the components for the inspection. In the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1 on the market, it is possible to prevent erroneous mounting in which components are erroneously arranged in the inspection circuit arrangement area.

  The symbols and numbers (or a combination thereof) of the mounted circuit components are displayed on the main control board 1310 by, for example, silk printing, but the symbols and the numbers of the circuit components arranged in the inspection circuit arrangement area are displayed. The numbers may be grouped by symbols or numbers following the symbols or numbers of the circuit components used for game control. For example, integrated circuits for game control are IC1 to IC11, and integrated circuits arranged in the inspection circuit arrangement area are denoted by symbols subsequent to IC12. In this way, the circuit components for game control mounted on the pachinko machine 1 on the market can be given symbols or numbers that do not jump, and the checks after the circuit components are mounted on the main control board 1310 can be easily performed. it can.

  Furthermore, if the symbols and numbers of the inspection terminals are different from the symbols and numbers of the connectors connected to the game control components, the connectors connected to the game control components and the inspection terminals can be easily connected. It can be distinguished, and erroneous wiring for incorrectly connecting cables can be prevented. In particular, if the symbols and numbers of the inspection terminals are the same as the symbols and numbers of the connection destinations of the inspection device of the other party, it is convenient to connect the cables at the time of inspection, and it is possible to reduce connection errors.

  In addition, some of the general-purpose ports of the main control MPU 1311 are unused ports that are not used, and the empty ports may be arranged so as to be collected at adjacent terminals of the main control MPU 1311. That is, regardless of whether the unused port numbers are consecutive or not, the unused port terminals may be arranged in a consolidated position. By arranging the unoccupied terminals, the area where the printed pattern is not provided on the main control board 1310 is collected, and it is easy to find missing parts, and to find attachment of additional parts for fraud. It is easier.

  In addition, the terminal of the empty port is disposed at a position close to the connector through which a relatively large current flows (for example, to which a solenoid is connected) in a positional relationship with the connector. That is, in the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311, connectors for inputting and outputting game control signals are arranged on the left and right sides (up and down in the figure) of the side where the terminal of the empty port is located. Therefore, when adding an additional function to the pachinko machine 1, the design of the main control board 1310 can be easily changed without routing a long pattern.

  As described above, by using serial communication for signal transmission in the main control board 1310, it is possible to reduce the number of data bus wires and to easily find attachment of an additional component due to fraud. In other words, a large number of data buses connected to a plurality of parallel interface circuits are eliminated, and some signal lines including control lines are used. Therefore, a simple circuit pattern is obtained. In addition, the main control board 1310 that is resistant to noise can be configured by shortening the data line routing distance.

  Further, since the number of data lines is reduced, circuits can be arranged without being affected by the routing of the data lines, so that an I / O IC (parallel interface circuit, serial interface circuit) can be arranged near the main control MPU 1311.

  In addition, since the number of circuit patterns is reduced, the number of ground patterns can be increased without changing the area of the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 that is more resistant to noise can be configured.

  FIG. 262 is a diagram showing an arrangement of ports in the main control MPU 1311.

  The parallel output port of the address D2 (chip select SERS0) is a serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343. As shown in FIG. 258, the output ports PA0 to PA3 of channel A are connected to the common side of the function display unit 1400 (the anode terminal of the LED). And the output ports PA4 to PA7 are connected to the common side of the base display 1317 (the anode terminal of the 7-segment LED). The output ports PB0 to PB7 of channel B of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343 are not used.

  The parallel output port of the address D3 (chip select SERS1) is a serial / parallel conversion circuit 1342. As shown in FIG. 258, the output ports PA0 to PA7 of channel A are connected to the segment side of the function display unit 1400 (cathode of LED). The output ports PB0 to PB7 of channel B are connected to the segment side of the base display 1317 (cathode terminal of a 7-segment LED).

  The common port of the LED (the anode terminal of the LED) switches the output port to be turned on at a constant period (for example, every 4 ms). Focusing on the output port of channel A, only PA0 is turned on in the timer interrupt processing, only PA1 is turned on in the next timer interrupt processing (after 4 ms),..., Only PA7 in the next timer interrupt processing (after 4 ms) Is repeated at a constant cycle (4 ms × the number of ports). That is, when repeatedly switching eight ports, each port is turned on every 32 ms. Alternatively, when the output ports PA0 to PA3 and PA4 to PA7 of the channel A are grouped and attention is paid to the output ports of the channel A, only PA0 and PA4 are turned on in the timer interrupt processing, and in the next timer interrupt processing (after 4 ms). Only PA1 and PA5 may be turned ON,..., And only PA3 and PA7 may be turned ON in the next timer interrupt process (after 4 ms) at a fixed cycle (4 ms × the number of ports). By making the operation of the fixed cycle a serial communication, it is difficult to detect the operation timing of the main control MPU 1311.

  The parallel input port of the address D5 is a parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341, and switches (ball detection sensors) for detecting game balls are connected to the inputs PA1 to PA7 and PB0 to PB7. Outputs of these ball detection sensors are input to the main control MPU 1311 as serial signals, and are read as signals of the address D5.

  Furthermore, the operation information of the setting key 971, the operation information of the RAM clear switch 954, the power failure notice signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the detection signal of the frame opening detection switch are input to the general-purpose input ports INP0 to INP4 provided in the main control MPU 1311. ing. Since these signals need to be monitored in real time (at the time requested by the program) or monitored outside the timer interrupt processing (for example, immediately after power-on), the main control is performed without going through the parallel / serial conversion circuit. It is directly input to the MPU 1311.

  Further, detection signals of a radio wave detection sensor, a detection signal of a vibration detection sensor, a detection signal of a magnetic detection switch, and a detection signal of a proximity error switch are provided to general-purpose input / output ports (input / output) IOP0 to IOP3 provided in the main control MPU 1311. Has been entered. These signals are output when an abnormality (misconduct, failure, etc.) has occurred in the pachinko machine 1, and requires monitoring in real time (at the time requested by the program). It is directly input to the main control MPU 1311 without intervention. Further, based on the detection signals of these sensors and switches, an abnormality is notified by the effect display device 1600 or sound. By this abnormality notification, the employee of the hall comes to check the state of the pachinko machine, so that the game is substantially stopped. If the abnormality notification is a false notification, the player is uncomfortable, so it is necessary to suppress the false detection. Therefore, it is preferable to input these signals to the general-purpose input / output port and detect them a plurality of times in a short period of time (so-called double reading) to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise.

  In the double reading process, in one timer interrupt process, a read instruction is continuously executed to determine a signal level input to a general-purpose input / output port (or a general-purpose input port) at short time intervals, Executes a plurality of read instructions sandwiching several instructions to judge the signal level input to the general-purpose input / output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals, or performs multiple read operations with a wait of several clocks This is performed by executing an instruction and determining the signal level input to the general-purpose input / output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals. Therefore, when the level of the port is continuously determined through the parallel-serial conversion circuit, the level can be detected only at intervals of several tens of microseconds, whereas when the level of the general-purpose port is continuously determined, it is 1 microsecond. The level can be detected at the following intervals, and the signal level can be detected in a short cycle.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, signals of various switches and sensors that require real-time properties are directly input to the general-purpose input port and the general-purpose output port without using the extended I / O using the chip select. Since the level of the signal input to the general-purpose input / output port (also used for input / output) is taken in bit units for each clock, the signal level can be detected in real time without waiting for reception of a serial signal.

  Although the general-purpose input / output ports (input / output) IOP4 to IOP7 are not used, a part of the signal input through the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341 is used for general-purpose input / output ports (input / output) IOP4 to IOP7. May be entered.

  Although not shown, the main control MPU 1311 may have a general-purpose output port.

  When the general-purpose input port is an unused terminal, the terminal is pulled up to 5 V via a resistor or pulled down to GND to prevent the terminal from being at an intermediate potential, and to reduce the influence of noise induced on the power supply line. It is better to reduce it. If the general-purpose output port is an empty terminal, it may be left open. However, it may be pulled up to 5 V or pulled down to GND via a dummy resistor so that a change in the level of the output port does not become noise.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the inspection signal is output from the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311 and the signal used for game control is output via the serial / parallel conversion circuit. For this reason, the winning ball detection signals are collected and input to one port and are easily handled by the game control program.

  Also, of the signals input to the main control MPU 1311, a signal that needs to be detected a plurality of times in a short time (so-called double reading) is input to a general-purpose port, and a signal that does not need to be read twice is serially input. The data is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the parallel conversion circuit. Since the general-purpose port can check the signal level in real time, the signal level can be detected a plurality of times in a short time, and the determination can be made without the influence of noise. If the general-purpose input port is vacant, the port may be assigned so that a signal that does not need to be read twice is input to the general-purpose port.

  A signal input to the main control MPU 1311 can be assigned to the general-purpose input port, but a signal input to the main control MPU 1311 and a signal output from the main control MPU 1311 are allocated to the general-purpose input / output port (input / output). Since all can be assigned, the general-purpose input / output port is highly versatile with respect to changes in specifications. For this reason, it is desirable that a port reserved as a spare for addition of a new function be a general-purpose input / output port (also used for input / output), and that the general-purpose input port be assigned with priority.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 263, a description will be given of data output and capture timings using a synchronous serial signal.

  When the main control MPU 1311 outputs 0 (LOW) from the chip select terminal SERS0, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343 is selected, and the main control MPU 1311 outputs a selection signal on the common side of the base display 1317. In the figure, PA7 (COM4) is selected from PA7 to PA4. After that, the main control MPU 1311 outputs a selection signal on the common side of the function display unit 1400 from the serial signal transmission terminal SERTX. In the figure, PA3 (LED-C4) is selected in PA3 to PA0.

  Since no output is assigned to the B channel port of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343, nothing is output at the data fetch timing of PB7 to PB0, and 1 (HIGH) is maintained. However, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the serial transmission signal SERTX output from the main control MPU 1311 is connected to the CLR / LOAD terminal that determines the data fetch timing of the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341, and this signal is 0 ( LOW), data is fetched from PA0 to PB7. Therefore, the serial transmission signal SERTX is set to 0 (LOW) at any timing of PB7 to PB0, and data is fetched from PA0 to PB7 of the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341.

  The parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341 fetches the data, and after the serial transmission signal SERTX rises to 1 (HIGH), outputs the serial data from the serial signal output terminal (Q8C) according to the clock signal. During this time, the serial transmission signal SERTX is maintained at 1 (HIGH), and control is performed so as not to take in new data.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, since the transmission signal of the vacant output port is used as a trigger for capturing the output of the game ball detection sensor, data of the ball detection sensor can be captured at an arbitrary timing.

  Next, another arrangement of the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 264 and 265.

  It is desirable that the main control board 1310 is commonly used by a plurality of models without redesign. However, the input / output signals of the main control board 1310 may vary depending on the model and specifications. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the input / output interface of the main control board 1310 that differs depending on the model is mounted on another board (input / output board 1351), and the periphery of the main control MPU 1311 common to each model is mounted on the main control board 1310. Configuration. By making the main control board 1310 common among a plurality of models, that is, by making the board size, the circuit design, the artwork of the printed circuit board, and the component arrangement the same, the performance (for example, noise resistance performance) is evaluated and designed. The main control board 1310 having stable quality can be used in common by a plurality of models without redesign.

  In addition, when the input / output interface of the main control board 1310 is mounted on another input / output board 1351, there is a problem where the circuits are divided. One is a method of separating with a serial signal line, and the second is a method of separating with a parallel signal converted from a serial signal. The former case is preferable because the number of wirings between the substrates can be reduced as compared with the latter case. In addition, even if the serial signal is acquired, it is difficult to know the order in which the data is transmitted, and it is unknown at what timing which data is transmitted. Further, the clock is output at a speed synchronized with the clock for the serial signal, and this synchronous clock may be different from the operation clock of the main control MPU 1311 and can be changed. For this reason, it is difficult to estimate the data rate from the outside, and even if a serial signal is acquired, it is difficult to know the contents of the transmitted data. For this reason, it is preferable that the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 be connected by a serial signal line.

  As shown in FIG. 264, an input / output board 1351 attached to the main control board 1310 is provided, and the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 are mounted in the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 has a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once closed, and is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 in a sealable manner. On the input / output board 1351, a parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341 and a serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 are provided. The main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 (the main control MPU 1311 and the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345) are connected by a serial communication line, and are connected by a parallel bus or a general-purpose port. It is possible to connect the substrates with a smaller number. The serial signal line may be connected by an electric wire or a connector between boards.

  Further, if serial communication is performed between the boards, even if the signal is obtained, it is difficult to analyze the data. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the contents of the transmitted data are known to the wrongdoer. Also, the input / output board 1351 for inputting / outputting a signal for game control is configured separately from the main control board 1310, and the input / output signal that changes depending on the model is set in the input / output board 1351, so that the main control board 1310 is modified. The number of models that can be applied without increasing the number of models can be increased, and versatility of the main control board 1310 can be improved.

  Further, by housing the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 in one main control board box 1320, the signal line for serial communication can be shortened.

  When the main control board 1310 is used for another model, the design of the input / output board 1351 may be changed, and the relationship between the connector of the main control board 1310 and the main control MPU 1311 does not change depending on the model. The main control board 1310 whose performance (for example, noise resistance performance) is evaluated and whose design quality is stable can be used. If the size of the input / output board 1351 and the position of the mounting hole are not changed, the conventional main control board box 1320 can be used without redesigning the main control board box 1320. In addition, the countermeasure against noise that changes for each model may be performed not by the main control board 1310 but by the input / output board 1351.

  The serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 for outputting the drive signal of the base display 1317 are preferably arranged on the main control board 1310. When the base display 1317 is disposed on the input / output substrate 1351, the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are disposed on the input / output substrate 1351, and a signal for driving the function display unit 1400 is transmitted to the input / output substrate 1351. It is good to output from 1351.

  Further, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346 that generates the inspection signal may be provided on the main control board 1310. That is, the inspection circuit arrangement area and the inspection terminal 1348 are preferably provided on the main control board 1310. This is because a part of the signal output from the inspection terminal 1348 is output from the main control MPU 1311 via a parallel bus, so that if the inspection terminal 1348 is arranged on the input / output board 1351, This is because the number of connection lines with the substrate 1351 increases.

  As shown in FIG. 265, main control board 1310 may be housed in main control board box 1320, and input / output board 1351 may be mounted outside main control board box 1320.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 265, since the input / output board 1351 is provided outside the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 can be commonly used even if the size of the main control board box 1320 changes. Further, since the input / output board 1351 and the main control board 1310 are housed in separate board boxes, the degree of freedom in arranging the boards is improved. Further, when the main control board box 1320 in which the main control board 1310 is housed and the input / output board box 1350 in which the input / output board 1351 is housed are provided separately, each board box becomes small and the board installation position becomes free. . Further, since the main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317, an LED for displaying an error code, and a setting key 971, it is necessary to appear on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, but the input / output board 1351 Since it is not necessary to be visible from the back side of the machine 1, the substrate installation position is free. Thus, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 265, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 265, the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output outside the main control board box 1320. The main control MPU 1311 outputs data from the data bus in addition to the serial signal. In the case of a pachinko machine, it is desirable not to output the data bus output from the main control MPU 1311 outside the sealed main control board box 1320 in order to prevent the operation of the pachinko machine from being perceived by a fraudster. . However, even if the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output to the outside of the main control board box 1320, there is a low possibility that the operation status of the pachinko machine is perceived by a fraudster. This is because the data bus outputs data according to the operation clock of the main control MPU 1311 and the data rate is constant, so that the data rate can be easily estimated from the outside. As a result, the signal transmitted on the data bus is obtained. Sometimes. However, the serial signal is output at a speed synchronized with the clock for the serial signal, and the speed of the synchronous clock may be different from the operation clock of the main control MPU 1311 and can be changed. For this reason, it is difficult to estimate the data rate from the outside, and even if a serial signal is acquired, it is difficult to know the contents of the transmitted data.

  In the above, the example in which the input / output board 1351 is provided separately from the main control board 1310 and the input / output function of the signal depending on the model is mounted on the input / output board 1351 has been described. If there is a portion where the resistance to fraud or noise does not decrease even if it is arranged, it may be mounted on the input / output board 1351. For example, output of a signal requiring a drive current of a solenoid or a motor attached to the game board 5, output of a drive signal of the function display unit 1400, various sensors (winning ball detection, radio wave sensor, magnetic sensor, vibration sensor) Is a function that may be mounted on the input / output board 1351. In addition, communication with the payout control board 951, output of a signal output from the external terminal board 784, power failure detection, input of the setting key 971 (the setting key 971 itself may be provided outside the main control board 1310), base display The output to 1317 is a function that is preferably mounted on 1310 on the main control board.

  The parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 mounted on the input / output board 1351 receive a dummy signal (0 V or 5 V) to an empty input terminal or connect a dummy resistor to an empty output terminal. Good. This is because if nothing is connected to the empty terminal, noise may be taken in and the circuit may malfunction.

  In particular, if some of the multiple signals that a fraudster wants to acquire are transmitted through a parallel bus or general-purpose port, and other signals are transmitted as serial signals, serial signal analysis is difficult. It is necessary for the wrongdoer to acquire signals from a plurality of places including the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351, thereby increasing the deterrence against fraud.

[15. Slot machine]
So far, the arrangement of the programs and data stored in the ROM of the pachinko machine has been described. Next, the arrangement of the programs and data stored in the RAM and ROM of the slot machine (rotary-type gaming machine) will be described. The pachinko machine has been schematically described with reference to FIG. 26, but programs and data are arranged in a RAM and a ROM as in the case of the slot machine 4000 described below.

[15-1. Construction]
First, the structure of the slot machine 4000 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 266 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000, and FIG. 267 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000 with the front member 4200 opened.

  As shown in FIGS. 266 and 267, in the slot machine 4000 of this embodiment, various devices are provided inside a box-shaped housing 4100 having an open front, and a front member is provided on the front of the housing 4100. 4200 is provided so as to be able to open and close in a one-sided format. Above the front member 4200, there are provided an image display body 4500 that performs display effects and information display according to the progress of the game, a speaker that performs sound effects, and the like. The image display 4500 is configured by, for example, a liquid crystal display panel, and displays various information in addition to the effect display related to the game. Various effect displays and history information displays on the image display 4500 are controlled by the effect control board 4700. That is, the image display body 4500 constitutes an effect display means capable of displaying an effect according to the progress of the game, and the effect control board 4700 implements a display control means capable of performing display control of the effect display means. Eggplant

  At the center of the front member 4200, a front panel on which a pattern for decoration and the like are drawn is arranged at the center of the front member 4200, and the rear is visible at the center of the front panel (for example, a transparent panel). ) A symbol display window 4401 is formed. In addition, the front panel may be configured by a display device. In a state where no image is displayed on the symbol display window 4401, the reel 4301 is made visible, and an image for producing a game is displayed mainly around the symbol display window 4401. I do. In this case, it is also possible to display an image for producing a game in the symbol display window 4401.

  Through the symbol display window 4401 (window portion), it is possible to visually recognize a symbol that is variably displayed by the rotation of the reel 4301 disposed in the housing. The reel 4301 includes a cylindrical left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c arranged in a horizontal direction. A plurality of symbols are arranged in accordance with a predetermined arrangement by winding a strip-shaped sheet on which a plurality of symbols are drawn along the longitudinal direction on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c.

  Each of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is provided with a reel drive motor 4341a, 4341b, 4341c (see FIG. 268), which is a stepping motor. The reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are independently driven and stopped. It is possible to do. That is, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c form a drive source for the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. Further, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b and 4341c are controlled by a two-phase excitation method, similarly to the payout motor 839 of the pachinko machine 1, to increase the drive torque and the static torque. As a result, a small motor can be used as the drive source, and the cost can be reduced.

  Hereinafter, the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are referred to as a left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c, respectively, as necessary. The corresponding reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, and 4211c are respectively referred to as a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c. Further, the reel drive motors 4341 corresponding to the respective reels are a left reel drive motor 4341a, a middle reel drive motor 4341b, and a right reel drive motor 4341c.

  Further, by rotating the reel 4301 by the reel drive motor 4341, a plurality of types of symbols visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401 are changed so as to circulate, for example, from top to bottom (variation display). On the other hand, in a state where the reel 4301 is stopped, a predetermined number (for example, three) of consecutive symbols, that is, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3, through the symbol display window 4401 for each of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c. It is visible. That is, through the symbol display window 4401, the effective display portions of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c for deriving and displaying the game stop result can be visually recognized.

  For a 3 × 3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401, a predetermined enableable line is set. In this embodiment, a line (middle line) crossing the middle symbol of each of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, and a line obliquely crossing each of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c from the lower stage of the left reel 4301a to the middle stage of the middle reel 4301b to the upper stage of the right reel 4301c. A line that obliquely crosses each of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c from the upper stage of the left reel 4301a to the middle stage of the middle reel 4301b to the lower stage of the right reel 4301c is a valid line. Then, the player can insert a medal or input from a credit (hereinafter, referred to as a "bet operation") to activate a line that can be activated, and based on a symbol combination mode (rolled) formed on this activated line. It is determined whether a winning (role) has been established or not.

  When a winning is achieved, three predetermined symbols may be arranged on the activated line, or three predetermined symbols may be arranged on other lines in appearance. As such a line, there is a line (upper line) crossing the upper symbol of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. It should be noted that a line (lower line) crossing the lower symbol of each of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c and a front portion (visible portion) facing the symbol display window 4401 of each of the other reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. The symbols may be arranged visually on the virtual line located. Hereafter, the lines that can be activated (middle, upward and downward lines), lines on which the symbols can be visually aligned at the time of winning (the upper line), and other lines (the lower line, etc.) are combined into a symbol stop line (the symbol alignment). Line).

  The upper, middle, lower, upward-sloping and downward-sloping lines are activated lines, and a predetermined activation line is activated in accordance with the bet amount. Based on the symbol combination mode formed on the activated line, a prize ( It is determined whether the role has been established or not. For example, in the case of the bet number 1, the middle line is an effective line, in the case of the bet number 2, the upper and lower lines are effective lines in addition to the middle line, and in the bet number 3, the upper right, lower right lines are effective lines in addition to the upper, middle and lower lines. And Also, regardless of the bet amount (even if the bet amount is 1 or 2), all the lines may be made valid, or three lines may be used exclusively.

  A payout number display LED 4562 that displays the number of medals paid out by the game is provided around (for example, below) the symbol display window 4401. A credit display for displaying the number of medals stored in the slot machine 4000 and a count display for displaying the number of remaining games during the special prize may be provided.

  A step portion protruding forward is formed below the symbol display window 4401, and the upper surface of the step portion is an operation portion 4202 inclined downward toward the front side. The operation unit 4202 is provided with a medal insertion slot 4203, a single insertion button 4205, and a max bet button 4206 as a progress operation unit for advancing the game.

  The medal slot 4203 is provided on the right side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. When a player inserts medals into the medal insertion slot 4203 and performs a betting operation, the game can be executed. In a path through which medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 pass, an insertion sensor 4207b for detecting the passage of medals is provided, and the number of inserted medals is counted based on information detected by the insertion sensor 4207b.

  The one-sheet insertion button 4205 and the max bet button 4206 are provided on the left side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. The one-sheet insertion button 4205 can be input one by one from credits by performing a pressing operation once. The max bet button 4206 can be input from credits to the upper limit of the number of bets (for example, three) by performing a pressing operation once. If the number of credits is less than the upper limit, the number of credits is input as a bet amount. It has become.

  Below the operation unit 4202, a payout button 4209, a start lever 4210, a return button 4208, a reel stop button 4211, a key device 4215, and the like are provided. The payout button 4209 is a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203, a medal (bet medal) input as a bet amount by the single bet button 4205, or the max bet button 4206, or stored as a credit when paid out is established. It is used when giving a command to return the used medals (reserved medals) to the medal tray 4201. Note that when a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 after the automatic betting operation based on the establishment of the replay winning (replay winning), a medal exceeding a predetermined number that can be stored as a credit is also transmitted to the medal selector 4207 via the medal selector 4207. It is returned to the tray 4201.

  The starting lever 4210 is an operation lever for starting a one-section game. The key device 4215 is for inserting a key when opening the front member 4200 or resetting an error (for example, a hopper error) state of the slot machine 4000. The return button 4208 is used to return medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and jammed in the medal selector 4207 to the medal tray 4201.

  The reel stop button 4211 includes a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c provided in one-to-one correspondence with the left reel 4301a, the middle reel 4301b, and the right reel 4301c. This is for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c in response to the stop operation.

  Further, a decorative plate (decorative panel) constituting a lower region of the front member 4200 is provided below a portion where these operation buttons are provided. Further, a medal tray 4201 for storing medals, a medal payout port, a speaker 4512 for outputting sound, and the like are provided below the decorative plate and at the lowermost part of the front member 4200.

  A main board (game control device) 4600 (see FIG. 268) for controlling the entire slot machine 4000 is provided in an upper portion inside the housing. On the main board 4600, an accessory ratio display 1317 and a display switch 1318 are provided. The accessory ratio display 1317 is configured by, for example, a 4-digit, 7-segment LED similarly to the pachinko machine described above. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be constituted by an effect display device provided on the main board 4600.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 is not provided on the main board 4600, but is also used as another display (for example, the payout number display LED 4562 or the image display body 4500) provided on the front of the slot machine 4000, and the payout number display LED 4562 is provided. Alternatively, the accessory ratio may be displayed on the image display body 4500.

  By operating the display switch 1318, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. It may be displayed on the printed circuit board or the housing 4100 near the display switch 1318 that a switch for operating the display of the accessory ratio is displayed (printing, engraving, sticker, or the like). The display switch 1318 is desirably provided in the vicinity of the accessory ratio display 1317. However, the display switch 1318 is not limited to the main control unit 1300 but may be provided on another board (for example, the effect control board 4700) as long as the operation is easy. , Power supply device 4112), housing 4100, or front member 4200. Further, as described later, the display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate, it is possible to prevent the player from operating by mistake.

  A symbol variation display device 4300 is provided substantially at the center of the inside of the housing, and rotatable reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are mounted thereon. Further, an external relay terminal plate 4131 for outputting a signal from the main board 4600 to an external device is provided inside the housing of the slot machine 4000.

  Further, a medal payout device (hopper) 4110 is provided in a lower portion inside the housing. The medal payout device 4110 receives and stores medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and guided by the medal selector 4207, and when a predetermined symbol combination mode is formed on the activated line and a prize is established, this prize is won. Are paid out to the medal tray 4201 by the number of medals (payout medals) corresponding to the number of medals or the number of medals exceeding the upper limit of the credit due to the addition according to the winning. By operating the payout button 4209, the medal for the credit is paid out to the medal tray 4201 by the medal payout device 4110. On the right side of the medal payout device 4110, medals overflowing from the medal payout device 4110 are stored, and the inflowing medals are transferred to a medal collection mechanism on an installation island where the slot machine 4000 is installed. An overflow tank for guiding is provided.

[15-2. Internal configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 268 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operation members, and the like provided in the slot machine 4000. The slot machine 4000 has a main board 4600 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game. The main board 4600 is equipped with a CPU 4601, a ROM 4602, a RAM 4603, an input / output interface 4604, and the like.

  Further, as described above, the main board 4600 is provided with the accessory ratio display 1317 for displaying the accessory ratio calculated by the CPU 4601 and the display switch 1318 for switching the display of the accessory ratio display 1317. The display switch 1318 may be constituted by a push button switch that performs a momentary operation, but may be another type of switch. By operating the display switch 1318, the accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317.

  The one-sheet insertion button 4205, the max bet button 4206, the start lever 4210, the reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c, the payout button 4209, and the like are all connected to the main board 4600, and these operation buttons are sensors not shown. , And outputs a detected operation signal to the main board 4600. Specifically, when the start lever 4210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the above-described symbol variation display device 4300 (starting rotation of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c) is output to the main board 4600, and the reel stop button 4211a , 4211b, and 4211c are operated, an operation signal for stopping the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c is output to the main board 4600.

  Further, the slot machine 4000 houses other devices together with the main board 4600, and various signals are input to the main board 4600 from these devices. The devices include a medal payout device 4110 in addition to the symbol variation display device 4300.

  As described above, the symbol variation display device 4300 includes the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c for rotating the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, respectively (the left reel drive motor 4341a, the middle reel drive motor 4341b, the right). Reel drive motor 4341c). The reel drive motor 4341 is composed of a stepping motor, and each of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c can rotate and stop independently. At the time of rotation, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed on the symbol display window 4401 from above. Displayed continuously changing downward.

  The reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c have position sensors 4331a, 4331b, and 4331c for detecting reference positions for rotation of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c. The reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c have position sensors 4331a, 4331b, and 4331c, respectively. It is provided corresponding to the inside of the reel (left reel position sensor 4331a, middle reel position sensor 4331b, right reel position sensor 4331c). By inputting detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 4600, it is possible to obtain stop position information of each reel on the main board 4600.

  In the medal selector 4207, the above-described solenoid 4207a and the insertion sensor 4207b are provided. The insertion sensor 4207b detects a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203, and outputs a medal detection signal to the main board 4600. When the solenoid 4207a is off, the inserted medals are detected by the insertion sensor 4207b. Conversely, when the solenoid 4207a is ON, the passage reaching the insertion sensor 4207b in the medal selector 4207 is locked out, so that the insertion of the medal is not accepted. The medals that have flowed through the return gutter return to the medal tray 4201. At this time, since the function of the insertion sensor 4207b is invalidated, neither the betting nor the storing of medals due to the insertion of medals is performed.

  The medal payout device 4110 has a payout sensor 4110e for detecting paid out medals one by one in the discharge port, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 4600 from the payout sensor 4110e. . The auxiliary storage box for game medals is provided with a medal full sensor 4111a, and when the number of stored medals exceeds a predetermined quantity, a detection signal indicating that the medals exceed the predetermined quantity is sent to the main board 4600. Output to At this time, an error display notifying the abnormality of the medal storage is performed by the image display body 4500, the error lamp 4554, and the like, thereby notifying the player, the hall employee, and the like that the abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 4600 to the symbol variation display device 4300 and the medal payout device 4110. That is, a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c described above is output from the main board 4600. In addition, a drive signal is input to the medal payout device 4110 from the main board 4600 in accordance with the type of combination of symbols stopped on the activated line, and in response thereto, the medal payout device 4110 performs a medal payout operation. At this time, if the number of medals necessary for payout is insufficient in the medal payout device 4110 or if there is no medal at all, the number detection by the payout sensor 4110e is delayed. When a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) elapses, a payout medal abnormality signal is output from the payout sensor 4110e to the main board 4600, and in response to this, the main board 4600 notifies that an abnormality has occurred in medal payout. Is displayed on the error lamp 4554, the image display body 4500, or the like to notify the player or the hall employee that an abnormality has occurred.

  The slot machine 4000 includes an effect control board 4700 in addition to the main board 4600. The effect control board 4700 includes a CPU 4701, a ROM 4702, a RAM 4703, an input / output interface 4707, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 4704, and an AMP (audio amplifier). 4705), a sound source IC 4706, and the like. The effect control board 4700 receives various command signals from the main board 4600, and controls the display of the image display body 4500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, off, etc.) of the lighting device 4502 and the operation of the speaker 4512.

  Further, an external relay terminal plate 4131 is provided, and the slot machine 4000 is connected to the hall computer 4800 of the game hall via the external relay terminal plate 4131. The external relay terminal plate 4131 has a role of relaying various signals (insertion medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 4600 to the hall computer 4800.

  The power supply device 4112 creates a plurality of types of DC power supplies from a power supply of AC 24 volts (AC 24 V) supplied from the island facility. For example, three types of power supplies of DC +5 V (hereinafter, “+5 V”), DC +12 V (hereinafter, “+12 V”), and DC +24 V (hereinafter, “+24 V”) are created. The three types of power of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V generated by the power supply device 4112 are supplied to each component included in the slot machine 4000. For example, the two types of power of + 5V and + 12V are supplied to the reel 4301 and the reel driving motor 4341. Is supplied to the symbol variation display device 4300 provided with

  In addition, the power supply device 4112 is provided with a setting change key switch 4112t, a reset switch 4112u, a power switch 4112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed outside the slot machine 4000, and can only be operated by opening the front member 4200. The power switch 4112v is for turning on and off the power supply to the slot machine 4000, and the setting change key switch 4112t is for changing the settings (for example, settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 4000. The reset switch 4112u is for canceling an error generated in the slot machine 4000, and is also operated when setting is changed together with the setting change key switch 4112t.

  The main board 4600 is provided with a reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. When the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 is rotationally driven to obtain the drive torque for rotating the reel 4301, the CPU 4601 sets the logic of the voltage switch signal (for example, HI) and sets the reel drive motor voltage switch circuit 4605. To control the supply of +12 V to the reel drive motor 4341 as a motor drive voltage. On the other hand, when obtaining the static torque for maintaining the stopped state of the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341, the CPU 4601 sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, LOW) and sets the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. Is supplied to the reel drive motor 4341 as a motor drive voltage.

  The above is an example of the configuration of the slot machine 4000. In the game using the slot machine 4000, when the player operates the start lever 4210 with the number of medals determined, the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c rotate, and thereafter, the player stops the reels by pressing the reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, and 4211c. Is operated, the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are stopped and controlled. When all the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are stopped, the game result is determined from the combination of symbols on the activated line, and the game result is determined as necessary. In accordance therewith, a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination are awarded.

  As described above, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is provided with a reel band on which a design is drawn. Then, when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is determined from the display content (combination of symbols displayed on the activated lines) displayed in the symbol display window 4401. It is determined whether the combination mode (symbol combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the combination mode of the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned activated line in the symbol display window 4401. It is determined whether a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination is displayed on each of the plurality of activated lines. As a result, when it is determined that the symbol combinations of a plurality of winning combinations are displayed, medals are paid out in a total number of the payout numbers corresponding to the displayed winning combinations.

[15-3. Configuration of Storage Area]
Subsequently, a storage area provided by the ROM 4602 and the RAM 4603 provided on the main board 4600 will be described. Although the storage area of the pachinko machine has been schematically described with reference to FIG. 24, it has the same configuration as that of the slot machine 4000 shown in FIGS. 269 to 272. FIG. 269 is a diagram illustrating details of an access area in the game control of the slot machine 4000 and a ROM area 5100 that is a storage area corresponding to the ROM 4602 in the present embodiment.

  The storage area in the present embodiment is provided by a medium such as the ROM 4602 and the RAM 4603, and is provided as one access area to which addresses from “0000H” to “FFFFH” are assigned. The access area according to the present embodiment is divided into predetermined areas corresponding to the medium that provides the access area, and includes a ROM area 5100, a RAM area 5200, an I / O area 5300, and a parameter information setting area 5400. Have been. Each area does not necessarily have to correspond to a medium that provides an access area, and one area may be provided by a plurality of media, or a plurality of areas may be provided by one medium.

  With the access area of the present embodiment configured as described above, the CPU 4601 can access programs and data without being aware of the medium that actually provides the access area by specifying an address. Hereinafter, details of the access area will be described.

[15-3-1. ROM area]
First, the configuration of the ROM area 5100 will be described. ROM area 5100 corresponds to a storage area provided by ROM 4602. The ROM 4602 is a non-volatile storage medium that retains the stored contents even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and the stored data can be read out, but is updated or deleted. You can't do that. Note that the ROM 4602 may be a non-volatile storage medium, and data stored in the ROM area 5100 may be updated.

  Addresses from “0000H” to “1FFFH” are assigned to the ROM area 5100. The CPU 4601 can access the data stored in the ROM 4602 by designating the address “0000H” to “1FFFH”.

  The ROM area 5100 includes a first control area, a first isolated area, a first data area, a second control area, a second isolated area, a second data area, a third control area, a third isolated area, and a fourth isolated area. included. A start address and an end address are set in each area.

  The first control area is a game control area in which a program for performing game control and the like are stored. The first data area is a game data area in which data necessary for performing game control is stored. That is, the game stored in the first control area is executed, and the game control is performed with reference to the data stored in the first data area. Note that an area (first control area, first data area) used for game control is a game control area (first storage area).

  The second control area stores a program for debugging (functional inspection) the control program and the like. The second data area is an area for storing data for performing debugging (function inspection). The second data area is not always necessary, and data for debugging may be stored in the second control area. In addition, an area (second control area, second data area) in which a program and data for performing debugging (functional inspection) of the game control program without being used for game control are stored is set as a debugging (inspection function) area ( (Second storage area).

  The third control area stores a program for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio, and the like. In the third control area, data for calculating the accessory ratio is also stored. A third data area for storing data for calculating the ratio of the accessory may be provided. Note that an area (third control area) in which a program and data for calculating an accessory ratio that are not used for game control are stored is defined as an area for calculating an accessory ratio (third storage area). In this way, by designing the character ratio calculation / display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in another area, the inspection of the character ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the game control code 13131 are performed. And the inspection of the slot machine 4000 can be reduced separately. Further, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 can be used in common by a plurality of models without depending on the model.

  The first isolated area, the second isolated area, the third isolated area, and the fourth isolated area are areas allocated between the control area and the data area, and are areas where access is prohibited. In the processing by the CPU 4601, when the isolated area is accessed, the reset processing is forcibly executed. The first isolated area, the second isolated area, the third isolated area and the fourth isolated area are areas that are continuous with the preceding and succeeding areas. For example, the start address of the first isolated area is next to the end address of the first control area. (“0A00H”), and the end address of the first isolated area is the address immediately before the first data area (“0AFFH”). The third isolation area is arranged between the game control area and the debug (function test) area, and is treated as a game control area in FIG. 30. However, the debug (function test) area You may make it treat as. Similarly, the fourth isolation area is disposed between the debug (function inspection) area and the accessory ratio calculation area. In FIG. 269, the fourth isolation area is treated as a debug (function inspection) area. It may be handled as an object ratio calculation area.

[15-3-2. RAM area]
Next, the configuration of the RAM area 5200 will be described. FIG. 270 is a diagram illustrating details of the RAM area 5200 in the present embodiment. RAM area 5200 corresponds to the storage area provided by RAM 4603. The RAM 4603 is a volatile storage medium from which stored contents are erased when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and allows reading and writing of stored data. The RAM area 5200 temporarily stores programs and data stored in the ROM area 5100 and stores data derived by executing the programs. Note that the RAM 4603 only needs to be able to read and write data, and may be a nonvolatile storage medium. Further, when a power failure occurs, the data stored in the RAM 4603 can be held for a predetermined period by the backup power supply.

  The RAM area 5200 has addresses from “3000H” to “31FFH”. The CPU 4601 can access the data stored in the RAM 4603 by designating the addresses “3000H” to “31FFH”.

  The RAM area 5200 includes a game control work area, a debug (inspection function) work area, a save area, and an isolated area. A start address and an end address are set in each area.

  The game control work area is a work area (temporary area) used when executing game control (first control). The work area for debugging (inspection function) is a work area used when executing debug control (second control) of the program. The work area for calculating the accessory ratio is an area for storing data for calculating the accessory ratio and the calculated accessory ratio (such as the accessory ratio, the continuous agent ratio, and the advantageous section agent ratio). It is not always necessary to secure a dedicated work area for the work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio, and a work area for game control may be used. A work area for debugging (inspection function) or a work area for calculating an accessory ratio may be allocated to the work area. In this case, the independence of the game control area, the control area for debugging (inspection function), and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio is reduced. However, if the program configuration does not use the work area for debugging (inspection function) or the work area for calculating the ratio of the accessory, the work area for debugging (inspection function) or the work area for calculating the ratio of the accessory will not necessarily be used. Is also good.

  The evacuation area is an area for temporarily storing data used in game control, debugging (inspection function) control, or calculating the accessory ratio. For example, when an interrupt occurs and a predetermined process is executed, before executing the predetermined process, the values of various registers (operation registers, flag registers, stack pointers, etc.) of the CPU are copied to a save area, After the processing is completed, the copied values are returned to various registers of the CPU. The evacuation area may be used in common for game control, debugging (inspection function), and calculation of the accessory ratio. However, similarly to the work area, the evacuation area is used for game control, debugging (inspection function), and the ratio of the accessory. The calculation may be separately performed. As a result, the game control, the debug (inspection function) control, and the accessory ratio calculation can maintain more independence.

  The isolation area includes a work area for game control, a work area for debugging (inspection function), and a work area for calculating the accessory ratio, a work area for debugging (inspection function), an evacuation area, and an evacuation area for calculating the object ratio. , And is a region that is continuous with each region (regions before and after). For example, the start address of the isolated area between the game control work area and the debug (inspection function) work area is the next address (“3076H”) after the end address of the game control work area, and the end address is This is the address ("307FH") immediately before the work area for debugging (inspection function). The isolated area is an area where access is prohibited, and is configured to forcibly execute reset processing when accessed in the processing by the CPU 4601.

  FIG. 270 shows details of the work area for calculating the accessory ratio on the right side thereof. The work ratio calculation work area may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of the data stored in the main area is stored in addition to the main area in which the calculation result of the duty ratio is stored. . One or more backup areas may be provided. A check code for detecting a data error is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the slot machine 4000 is turned on, is set each time data in the main area is updated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, or is initialized (step S1020 in FIG. 273). ) May be set. In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 273). Good. The check code may be used also as a power interruption flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code of the main area, it may be determined that the power interruption flag is set. If a predetermined value is set in the power interruption flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

  In the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 273), it is determined whether the data in the backup area is normal or not, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal may be copied to the main area. Further, in the power-off processing executed when the power is turned off, the value of the main area may be copied to each backup area.

  An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be kept away, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digit of the address.

  FIG. 271 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the work area for calculating the ratio of characters.

  FIG. 271 (A) shows the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 271 (A), the number of paid-off items, the number of consecutive paid-out items, the total number of paid-out items, the ratio of bonuses, the ratio of consecutive valuables, the number of advantageous section games, the number of non-advantage section games, and the number of advantageous sections Store the percentage. The number of bonuses paid out is the number of medals paid out during the operation of the bonuses (for example, during the regular bonus). The number of continuous-acquisition-acquisition balls is the number of medals paid out during the operation of the continuous-accompaniment (eg, during the big bonus). The total number of payouts is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The duty ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of paid out items / the total number of paid out items. The ratio of consecutive bonuses can be calculated by dividing the number of consecutive bonuses paid / the total number of paid outs. The number of advantageous section games is the number of games executed in a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a gaming state in which the number of medals on hand such as ART (assist replay time) is difficult to decrease), and the number of non- advantageous section games is , The number of games executed in a gaming state other than the advantageous section. The advantageous section ratio can be calculated by the number of advantageous section games / (the number of advantageous section games + the number of non- advantageous section games).

  In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 271 (A), the number of bonuses, the number of consecutive bonuses, the total number of bonuses, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-favorable section games are shown in FIG. It is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, each of which corresponds to a cumulative total, and can store a numerical value up to 16777215 or 4294767295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. The accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are 1-byte storage areas, and can store a numerical value up to 255 in decimal.

  The number of bonuses, the number of consecutive bonuses, the total number of bonuses, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-favorable section games are updated in the area ratio calculation area update process (step S1038 in FIG. 273). , The continuous character ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the character ratio calculation / display process (step S1119 in FIG. 274).

  FIG. 271 (B) shows a structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 271 (B), the number of replays, the number of prize payouts, the number of payables, the number of consecutive payouts, the number of games, the role ratio, the continuous role ratio, the number of advantageous section games, The number of advantageous section games and the advantageous section ratio are stored. The storage area of each data is constituted by a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of games (for example, 15 storage areas for every 400 games). When the number (400 times) is reached, the write pointers of all data move, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after the data of the predetermined number of games is stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area.

  Note that the write pointer and the read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers of all data move every predetermined number of winning balls. The read pointer also moves with the movement of the write pointer. The read pointer indicates a storage area one time behind the write pointer. This is for calculating the accessory ratio using data for 400 games.

  The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the accessory ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is a value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer makes a round and is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the accumulated value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total sum of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, the cumulative value of the accessory ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer goes around Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the total cumulative value including the data of the cleared area is calculated.

  In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 271 (B), the number of replays, the number of prize payouts, the number of payouts, the number of consecutive payouts and the number of games in the ring buffer are 2-byte storage areas. Numerical values up to 65535 in decimal can be stored. Each of the number of replays, the number of winnings, the number of bonuses, the number of consecutive bonuses, and the total number of games is a 3-byte storage area, and can store a value up to 16777215 in decimal. Since the total is, for example, the sum of data for 400 games × n (6000 games when n = 15), a large storage area is prepared. The total number of replays, winnings, payouts, consecutive payouts, and the total number of plays is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes each, and can store a numerical value up to 16777215 or 429767295 in decimal. Since the total total is not erased unless an error occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. Each of the total and the total of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio is a storage area of 1 byte, and can store a numerical value up to 255 in decimal. The number of advantageous section games and the number of non- advantageous section games are each a 3-byte storage area, and can store a numerical value up to 16777215 in decimal. The advantageous section ratio is a storage area of 1 byte, and can store a numerical value up to 255 in decimal.

  By increasing the number of games corresponding to the data stored in each storage area constituting the ring buffer (for example, 600 games), the number of continuous storage areas for storing time-series data ( Even if n) is reduced to 10, the same data for the same 6,000 games can be stored. Therefore, the size of the storage area used as the ring buffer can be reduced.

  In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 271 (B), the number of bonuses paid, the number of consecutive bonuses, the ratio of bonuses, the ratio of consecutive bonuses, the number of advantageous section games, the number of non-favorable section games, and the proportion of advantageous section are This is the same as the description in FIG. 271 (A). The number of replays is the number of replayed games. The winning and payout number is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The number of games is the number of games executed, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves.

  The number of replays, the number of winnings, the number of bonuses, the number of consecutive bonuses, the total number of bonuses, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-favorable section games are updated in the area ratio calculation area update process (step S1038 in FIG. 273). ), The accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S1119 in FIG. 274).

  In the data structure shown in FIG. 271 (A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the work area for calculating the ratio of the accessory is deleted in the initialization processing (step S1020 in FIG. 273). However, the data is not deleted on other occasions. For this reason, the data of the work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Similarly, the total sum of FIG. 271 (B) may be deleted every predetermined period.

  In addition, the data of the work area for calculating the accessory ratio or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value (for example, the accessory ratio exceeds 100%, and the calculation result of the accessory ratio greatly changes from the previous calculated value. In the case where the number of payouts is greater than the total number of payouts, the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be deleted. If the data of the work area for calculating the accessory ratio or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that the data is abnormal. Alternatively, the data in the backup area may be inspected using the check code, the data in the normal backup area may be copied to the main area, and then the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[15-3-3. Configuration of I / O Area]
Subsequently, the I / O area 5300 will be described. The input / output ports correspond to the I / O area 5300, and the CPU 4601 can access the respective input / output ports by accessing the I / O area 5300. The input / output port corresponds to, for example, a port related to input of a switch or the like, or a port related to output of a special winning opening solenoid, an LED drive signal, or the like. The setting of the input / output port (setting regarding use / non-use such as input setting and output setting) is set based on the setting value of the parameter information setting area 5400.

[15-3-4. Parameter information setting area]
Subsequently, the parameter information setting area 5400 will be described. FIG. 272 is a diagram illustrating details of the parameter information setting area 5400 according to the present embodiment. The parameter information setting area 5400 is an area where various settings can be made. For example, the various settings include the start / end addresses of each control area and data area as shown in FIG. In FIG. 272, the definition of the start address and the end address of each of the third control area, the work area for calculating the ratio of the accessory, and the evacuation area for calculating the ratio of the accessory is not shown. And the third control area end setting is defined in the same manner as the start and end settings of the other control areas, the work area start setting for the accessory ratio calculation and the work area end setting for the accessory ratio calculation are the start and end of the other work areas. Defined in the same manner as the end setting, the starting ratio setting area for calculating the accessory ratio and the end area setting for the saving area for calculating the ratio are defined in the same manner as the start and end settings of the other evacuation areas. An area other than the area set here is an unused (unset) area. Thereby, when the CPU 4601 accesses an unused area, a reset signal is forcibly input to the CPU 4601. In FIG. 272, continuous areas are set, but the areas need not be continuous as set areas. For example, parameters may be grouped and arranged at predetermined intervals.

  In this embodiment, when an area other than the setting area (the first to fourth isolated areas of the ROM 5100 and the isolated area of the RAM 5200) is accessed, a reset is forcibly generated. Therefore, the reset is generated by intentionally accessing the isolated area, so that the initial start of the program can be performed. In the slot machine, since the processing is sequentially executed, the initial setting can be executed again by executing the program from the start-up processing by accessing the isolated area after the completion of the last game processing. Thereby, even if the function of the initial setting is set to a value different from the set value due to noise or the like during the game, it is possible to reset the normal value by executing the initial setting again. Further, in the initial setting process, the RAM clear is determined based on the power cut flag. However, it is possible to forcibly generate the RAM clear by accessing the isolated area without setting the power cut flag. Become. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned pachinko machines, the game is played in parallel, so if the game itself is initialized, the game cannot be continued, but in the case of a slot machine, it becomes unnecessary after the game is over. Since it is necessary to initialize the information in the RAM, the process for initializing the information in the RAM can be made unnecessary by accessing the isolated area.

  The values set in the parameter information setting area 5400 are not sequentially set by the user program processing such as the initial setting of the CPU 4601. Instead, the address and the set value of the parameter area are set in the ROM 4602 separately from the program. Before the CPU 4601 starts the control program at the time of starting, the parameter information set in the ROM 4602 is sequentially set in each function setting register of the CPU. Thus, various parameters can be set when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. The set values of the various parameters are set in the ROM 4602 in which the game control program is stored for information managed (determined) by the user.

[15-4. Game control]
[15-4-1. System reset startup processing]
Subsequently, control of the slot machine of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 273 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a system reset activation process executed when the slot machine 4000 is reset. The system reset activation processing is executed when the power of the slot machine 4000 is turned on or when a power failure occurs, and is activated when a reset signal is input to the CPU 4601.

  When the system reset activation process is started, the CPU 4601 first executes a parameter setting process for setting various parameters required for executing a game (step S1010). Specifically, the setting value stored in the parameter information setting area 5400 included in the storage area is set in each function setting register of the CPU 4601, and the address of each area assigned to the access area is set as the setting value. By setting the address of each area as a set value, for example, a work area or a save area is allocated as a use area in the RAM area 5200, and an area not allocated as a use area (an isolated area in FIG. 270) is set as an unused area. Assigned. The work area and the save area are each divided into a game control area and a debugging (inspection function) area (or other uses). In the ROM area 5100, similarly to the RAM area 5200, an area for storing programs and data is allocated as a used area, and an area not allocated as a used area is allocated as an unused area.

  Next, the CPU 4601 executes a security check process (step S1012). The security check process is a process of determining whether data stored in the ROM 4602 is normal data. If the data stored in the ROM 4602 is not normal data, for example, the startup of the slot machine 4000 is stopped because the ROM 4602 may have been replaced with an incorrect ROM. Further, the CPU 4601 waits until the time required for the security check elapses (step S1014).

  Note that the processing from the power-on of the slot machine to the end of the security check (processing up to step S1014) is not processing defined by the user program, but processing composed of hardware in the CPU that cannot be changed by the developer. It has become.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a device initialization setting process for performing initialization (step S1016). In the device initialization setting process, a process such as activation setting of a periodic process (FIG. 274, timer interrupt process) for periodically executing a predetermined process is executed. In the present embodiment, a function for preventing settings related to the lottery of a game, such as a setting of a random number function, from being rewritten by a user program after a security check is executed in a parameter setting process, and other than these functions, a device initialization setting process is performed. Running on By dividing the initialization of the CPU 4601 into the parameter setting process and the device initialization setting process in this way, the degree of freedom of the game control is increased and the illegality is hardly performed in the game.

  Further, the CPU 4601 determines whether or not to initialize the RAM 4603 (step S1018). In the process of step S1018, it is determined whether to perform a cold start for initializing the RAM 4603 or to perform a hot start for returning to the game with the contents of the backed-up RAM 4603.

  When performing a cold start for initializing the RAM 4603 (result of step S1018 is “Yes”), the CPU 4601 executes an initialization process for initializing the RAM 4603 (step S1020). The cold start is performed when a setting change operation of the pachinko machine 1 is performed, when an abnormality occurs in the contents of the RAM 4603, or when the power interruption flag is not set.

  On the other hand, when performing a hot start of returning to the game based on the contents of the RAM 4603 (the result of step S1018 is “No”), the CPU 4601 executes a process of returning the game based on the backed-up contents of the RAM 4603. (Step S1022). At this time, the return processing returns to the processing interrupted at the time of the power failure. More specifically, in any one of steps S1024 to S1042 of the system reset activation process described later or steps S1110 to S1130 of the periodic process (FIG. 274), the process is returned to the process interrupted at the time of power failure.

  In the slot machine 4000 according to the present embodiment, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the RAM 4603 when a power failure occurs and when a return process is performed. At this time, only the game control work area, excluding the debug (inspection function) work area, of the entire area in which the checksum calculation target is used as a work (the game control work area and the debug (inspection function) work area) It may be. The reason for calculating the checksum only in the game control work area is that the debug (inspection function) process is designed to maintain independence from the game control process, and that the game result is affected. Since there is no processing, there may be some bugs due to insufficient verification. In this case, a work area for debugging (inspection function) that retains information obtained by performing such processing is considered. Using the checksum as a calculation target may impair the reliability of a normal recovery from a power failure. On the other hand, since the game control process is directly related to the game, if it is mounted on a product with a bug or the like remaining, a serious trouble will occur in the market. In some cases, sales may be discontinued and the product may need to be recalled. In this case, it is extremely likely to cause enormous cost and other damages to manufacturers and halls, so thoroughgoing. This is because the game control work area is higher in reliability than the debug (inspection function) work area because the verification is performed in an efficient manner.

  Upon completion of the initialization process or a series of games, the CPU 4601 executes a game initial setting process to start a new game (step S1024). In the game initial setting process, a process of temporarily returning information in the RAM 4603 that is no longer necessary for performing a series of game controls to the initial setting state is executed.

  When the game initial setting process ends, the CPU 4601 executes an information signal 1 output process for outputting a debug (inspection function) signal at the start of the game (step S1026). In the information signal 1 output processing, processing such as setting a debug (inspection function) signal to an initial state is performed. In the information signal output process, information signal 1 to N output processes are defined, and a necessary module is called at the timing of outputting the information signal. For example, when a debug (inspection function) signal (information on start of reel rotation, start lever ON, winning combination) associated with the start of the game is output in the game start process, debug (stop) of each reel is stopped in the symbol stop process. Inspection function) When a signal (stop operation signal, stopped symbol information, etc.) is output, a debug (inspection function) signal related to the fixed position in the winning determination process (fixed position stopped and displayed on each reel, payout accompanying the fixed position) When outputting the number information and output signal information (number of payout medals) related to the number of payouts at the time of payout, the “information signal N output process” module required for the process is appropriately called and executed.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a standby process of performing a process at a stage before the player operates the starting lever 4210 (step S1028). Before operating the start lever 4210, for example, it is determined whether or not an instruction to execute a replay (replay) has been made, whether or not medals have been inserted, whether or not medals have been cleared, and the like. Confirmation of game setting values and the like are performed.

  When start lever 4210 is operated, CPU 4601 executes a game start process for starting a game (step S1030). In the game start process, a random number value for performing a lottery of a game is acquired, a winning combination is determined, and the rotation of the reel 4301 is started. Thereafter, the CPU 4601 executes a Wait process for waiting until the reel 4301 reaches a normal rotation speed (step S1032).

  When the reel 4301 reaches the normal rotation speed, the CPU 4601 enables the input of the reel stop button 4211 and executes a symbol stop process for performing a process until all the reels 4301 stop (step S1034).

  Further, when all the reels 4301 have stopped, the CPU 4601 executes a winning determination process for determining a winning combination based on the stopped symbols (step S1036). In the winning determination process, a winning combination is determined, and when it is determined that a winning is achieved, a setting corresponding to the winning combination is performed, and a setting for executing a payout process corresponding to the winning combination is performed.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines the current gaming state, adds the number of award medals to be paid out as a gaming value to an area corresponding to the current gaming state, and sets a work area for calculating an accessory ratio in the RAM area 5200 (FIG. 270 (see FIG. 271) is updated (step S1038). If there is no prize to be paid out in step S1036, the processing in step S1038 can be skipped, and the load on the CPU 4601 can be reduced.

  Note that even when the slot machine 4000 detects a fraud and stops the game, it executes the accessory ratio calculation area update processing (step S1038). Regardless of whether or not fraud has been detected, by executing these processes, data for calculating the accessory ratio can be collected even during fraud notification.

  Finally, the CPU 4601 executes a game termination process for performing a process at the time of terminating the game (step S1042). In the game ending process, a payout process corresponding to the winning combination is executed, and if no prize has been won, or if the prize has no payout, the process is skipped. When the game ending process ends, the process returns to the game initial setting process, and executes a main loop process from step S1024 to step S1038.

[15-4-2. Periodic processing]
Next, a description will be given of a periodic process which is an interrupt process started at a predetermined cycle while the main loop process of the system reset initial start process is being executed. FIG. 274 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the periodic process.

  When the periodic processing is executed, the CPU 4601 first saves the values stored in all the registers (step S1110). At this time, the saved data is stored in the game control save area shown in FIG. As described above, the periodic process is an interrupt process that is started while the main loop process is being executed. Therefore, by saving the CPU register used in the main loop process, the process can be continued after the return. Need to be

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 resets a watchdog timer built in the CPU (step S1112). As a result, the watchdog timer can be cleared periodically.

  Next, the CPU 4601 executes a switch input process of sampling input signals from various switches (step S1114). Further, a game state check process is executed (step S1116). In the game state check processing, processing relating to drive control of a driving body (stepping motor) that rotates the reel 4301 is performed. Specifically, pulse output of the stepping motor, detection of the origin position, and the like are performed.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a timer measurement process for updating various timers used in the game control (step S1118). Since the periodic processing is executed periodically, the set time is the execution interval of the periodic processing × the set number of times.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines whether the display switch 1318 has been operated, and if the display switch 1318 has been operated, invokes the accessory ratio calculation / display process, and stores the medal stored in the accessory ratio calculation work area. Calculate the accessory ratio with reference to the number of payouts. Then, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio indicator 1317 (step S1119). The process of calculating and displaying the accessory ratio is the same as the process of calculating and displaying the accessory ratio described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1 (FIGS. 24 and 25). The specific calculation method of the accessory ratio and the specific display method of the accessory ratio are the same as those described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, by calling the accessory ratio calculation / display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the accessory ratio, it is possible to confirm the accessory ratio (the gambling of the slot machine 4000) based on the latest data.

  Note that when the display switch 1318 is operated, all types of values (accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, total, total total) may be calculated. Only the value to be calculated may be calculated. Alternatively, the accessory ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 when the display switch 1318 is operated.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes an LED output process for controlling the LED (step S1120). The control target LED is controlled by the main board 4600, and is, for example, a payout number display LED 4562. In addition, data for displaying the accessory ratio on the LED is output.

  The CPU 4601 executes an information output process of outputting a signal to the external relay terminal plate 4131 (Step S1122). The output signal is transmitted to the hall computer 4800 via the external relay terminal plate 4131. Further, CPU 4601 outputs the command stored in the command buffer to effect control board 4700 (step S1124).

  The CPU 4601 executes a random number update process for updating a random number used for the game (Step S1126). In the random number update process, a random number to be generated by software processing is updated. Here, in addition to the random numbers generated only by software, a process of updating soft random numbers built in the CPU is executed. In the case of the soft random number built in the CPU, the count itself is executed by hardware, but the trigger of the update is determined by this processing. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of program processes related to random number updating.

  When the random number update process ends, the CPU 4601 performs a process for returning to the interrupted process (main loop process). Specifically, the value of the register saved in the process of step S1110 is restored (step S1128). Further, execution of an interrupt is permitted (step S1130). During the execution of the periodic processing (timer interrupt processing), even if a new timer interrupt occurs, the new timer interrupt is suspended, and the immediately preceding timer interrupt processing is normally completed and the interrupt is enabled. Is to be executed. For this reason, it is configured such that the periodic processing (timer interrupt processing) is not performed in multiplex.

[15-4-3. Information signal output processing]
Subsequently, an information signal output process executed in a system reset activation process or the like will be described. The information signal output processing is provided according to each function (1 to N) of the output signal, and is configured by a plurality of modules. For example, there are “condition device output signal (signal output related to condition device operation)” and “lottery determination process (signal output related to lottery)”. Although the signals to be output are different, the configuration of each information output process is basically the same, and the description of each flow will be omitted. FIG. 275 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the information signal output process according to the present embodiment.

  When the information signal output process is started, the CPU 4601 first saves the values of all registers of the CPU (step S1210). This is to prevent the value set in the register from being destroyed by executing the information signal output processing (to ensure that the value is restored even if destroyed), and to save the values of all registers to the stack area. It is made to let. The stack area used at this time is assigned to a debug (inspection function) save area, and is assigned to a different area separated from the game control save area.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 obtains, from the RAM 4603, information to be referred to for selecting (ON / OFF) an information signal to be output (a signal for debugging (inspection function)) (step S1212). In each information signal output process, only data stored in the RAM 4603 is referred to, and data is not written in the RAM 4603 during the process. If writing is necessary, information is output to a work area for debugging (inspection function). A dedicated work is provided, and the work is configured not to be used (including reference) in processing other than the information signal output processing. Thereby, even if the program for executing the information signal output processing is arranged in a different place from the other game control programs, the independence from the other game control programs can be secured without using the common area. .

  Next, the CPU 4601 generates an information signal to be output based on the information acquired in the processing of Step S1212 (Step S1214), and outputs the generated signal to a corresponding port (Step S1216). Further, it waits until the information signal output time, which is the time for maintaining the output signal, has elapsed (step S1218). The information signal output time is determined in advance, and by setting a sufficient time, a debugging (inspection function) signal can be reliably transmitted to the transmission destination. Thereafter, the values of all the registers saved in the process of step S1210 are restored (step S1220), and the process ends.

  As described above, an information signal (a signal for debugging (inspection function)) is generated and output in the processing from step S1210 to step S1220. Then, the processing from step S1210 to step S1220 is executed for the output of the debugging (inspection function) signal. Different types and numbers of signals are output for each function (1 to N) of the output signal. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of information signal output processing are defined for each function. However, a table defining output signals corresponding to the functions is stored in the debug (inspection function) area in the fourth area. The information signal output processing may be made common by providing two data areas and selecting and outputting a signal corresponding to a function specified by the caller.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a program (signal output program) for executing information signal output processing and the like is stored in an area clearly distinguished from an area for storing a game control program (game control area). By providing an area (an area for debugging (inspection function)), a program for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1 can be independently arranged. The signal output program is used for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1 and is a process that does not affect the result of the game, and does not impair the fairness of the game. In addition, for other purposes (for example, to arrange a game control program or a general-purpose program to compensate for the lack of capacity of the game control area), the program is not arranged in the debug (inspection function) area. It has become.

  The signal output program is executed after being statically called from the game control program. At this time, the address of the call destination is specified. Further, the signal output program is modularized for each function, and when called, protects all registers used in the game control area. Also, as described above, when the program processing of the game control area is being executed, access to the debug (inspection function) work area is prohibited, and the program processing of the debug (inspection function) area is executed. In such a case, only the reference to the game control work area is permitted, and writing is prohibited. Further, it is configured to prohibit calling of a module (including a subroutine) arranged in the game control area from the debug (inspection function) area. The program arranged in the debug (inspection function) area including the signal output program is always called in the form of a subroutine, and after the subroutine is completed, the program is returned immediately after the calling by the return instruction. The modules stored in the debugging (inspection function) area are configured for each purpose. With this configuration, the execution of the game control program is not affected by the execution of the signal output program (the program arranged in the debug (inspection function) area).

  In the embodiment of the slot machine 4000, the erasing timing of the RAM (work area for game control and work area for calculating the ratio of the accessory) may be the same as that of steps S18 to S26 in FIG. The slot machine 4000 does not have a RAM clear switch, and if the setting change key switch 4112t is operated, the game state backup data is deleted.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, in addition to the effects described in the above-described example of the pachinko machine, the accessory ratio of the operating slot machine can be accurately calculated, and the gambling of the operating gaming machine can be improved. You can check.

  As described above, the present invention has been described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings. However, the present invention is not limited to such a specific configuration, and various changes and equivalents within the spirit of the appended claims. It includes the configuration.

Means 1: In a gaming machine,
"A translucent flat decorative member provided with decoration,
A transparent and flat radiating plate that is provided behind the decorative member and can radiate light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness forward,
A plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light in a direction along a plate surface within a thickness of the radiation plate are mounted on a front surface, and a rendering member including a decorative substrate provided behind the radiation plate. It is characterized by having.

  Here, the “decorative member” may be configured by one member, or may be configured by a plurality of members (for example, a relief portion formed by three-dimensional relief). ) And a decorative sheet having a picture).

  The “decoration” of the decorative member includes “three-dimensional relief”, “two-dimensional pattern”, “three-dimensional relief and two-dimensional pattern”, and the like. . In addition, "decorations" include "decorations with logos and characters in line with gaming machine concepts", "decorations with characters in line with gaming machine concepts", and "items in line with gaming machine concepts. Decoration "," decoration having a scene in line with the concept of a gaming machine ", and the like.

  Further, the “radiating plate” includes “a plurality of LED receiving portions that are formed so as to be depressed from the rear surface toward the front and that receive the LEDs of the decorative substrate from the rear”, “a plate within the plate thickness”. Those having a plurality of reflectors for reflecting light in the direction along the surface forward substantially on the entire surface ", and a plurality of reflectors for reflecting light in the direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the plate forward. Some of them have ".

  Examples of the “LED” mounted on the decorative board include “side-view type LED”, “top-view type LED mounted sideways”, and the like. Examples of the “LED” include “full-color LED”, “single-color LED”, and “two-color LED”.

  In addition, as a configuration for irradiating light in a direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiation plate, there are “a configuration for irradiating light from the inner surface of a hole penetrating the radiation plate to the inside of the thickness”, and “a configuration for emitting light. `` A configuration that irradiates light into the plate thickness from the inner surface of the slit that is penetrated and opened to the side surface of the radiation plate '', `` From the inner surface of the concave portion that is recessed forward from the rear surface of the radiation plate A configuration for irradiating light into the plate thickness ", a configuration for irradiating light from the side surface of the radiation plate into the plate thickness, and the like.

  Further, the "producing member" may be movable or may be fixed without moving.

  According to the configuration of the means 1, the game machine is provided with a light-transmitting flat decorative member provided with a decoration, and provided behind the decorative member, in a direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness. A transparent and flat radiating plate capable of emitting light in the forward direction, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light in a direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiating plate are mounted on the front surface. And a decorative substrate provided on the rear side.

  Thereby, when the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decoration member and the decoration board behind the radiation plate are caused to emit light, the light from the LEDs is irradiated in the direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiation plate. The light that is emitted forward by the radiation plate and emitted forward from the radiation plate causes the light-transmissive decorative member provided with the decoration to be decorated. At this time, the light emitted from the LED in the direction along the plate surface of the radiating plate is reflected forward within the plate thickness of the radiating plate so that the decoration member emits light, so that the LED is moved forward. In comparison with the conventional method that irradiates light toward the radiating plate, the distance from the front of the radiating plate until the light of the LED is radiated forward can be made longer, and the light from the LED can be diffused widely to make the radiating plate Can radiate forward. Therefore, when the LED emits light, the light from the LED can be widely diffused, and it can be suppressed that the LED appears to emit light in a dot-like manner. It is possible to make the player look beautiful, to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in interest. In the effect member, since the decorative substrate is provided behind the flat decorative member and the radiating plate, the dimension in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and the space for arranging the effect member can be easily secured. At the same time, it is possible to easily secure a space for disposing other effect members, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can make the player more enjoyable by providing various effect members.

  In addition, the decorative member, a transparent flat plate-shaped decoration body having an embossed portion that forms at least a part of the decoration and is formed by three-dimensional embossing, and is provided behind the decoration body, It is desirable that the decorative sheet is composed of a sheet-shaped decorative sheet having a pattern constituting the rest of the decoration. Thereby, since the decorative member provided with the decoration is constituted by the decorative body having the relief and the decorative sheet having the picture, the relief can give the decoration a three-dimensional effect. In addition, it is possible to impart a sense of depth to the pattern of the decorative sheet provided at the rear by the lens effect by the relief of the relief portion. Accordingly, the three-dimensional decoration having a sense of depth can be shown to the player by the relief portion of the decoration body and the pattern of the decoration sheet. Therefore, even if the thickness of the decoration member (dimension in the front-rear direction) is reduced, the decoration is achieved. The effect does not decrease, it is possible to attract and entertain the player's interest, and the effect member can be made thinner via the decorative member, so that the above-described operation and effect can be reliably achieved. it can.

  Further, as described above, when the decorative member is configured by the decorative body and the decorative sheet, the decorative sheet having the pattern is provided behind the decorative body having the embossed portion, so that the transparent decorative body is provided. Even if the decorative body is not colored, the decorative body can be seen to be colored by the color of the design of the decorative sheet, and the cost of the decorative body can be reduced. Also, in this case, the decoration of the decorative body (decorative member) can be easily changed by changing the design of the decorative sheet, so that the gaming machine can easily cope with a model change or a design change. Can be.

  Further, the decoration member may have a hologram part which forms a part of the decoration and displays a pattern by interference fringes of light. Thereby, light from the LED on the decorative board, light from other light emitting means provided in the gaming machine, light in the gaming hall where the gaming machine is installed, etc. hit the hologram section, Since the predetermined hologram can be shown by the interference fringes, the appearance of the decoration can be improved by the hologram, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It is possible to give a three-dimensional effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the thinness even if the effect member is made thin.

  Further, after the decorative member has a hologram portion, when the decorative member is configured by a decorative body and a decorative sheet, by the hologram portion, by configuring at least a part of the pattern in the decorative sheet Is also good. Since a part of the pattern of the decorative sheet is constituted by the hologram portion, the hologram can be seen through the transparent decorative body having the relief portion. It is possible to give a sense of depth to the pattern, and to show the player a decoration that can strongly attract the player's interest. Further, in this case, since the decorative sheet has the hologram section, it is possible to use a printing technique for forming the hologram section, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost.

  Further, when the decorative member is composed of the decorative body and the decorative sheet, the decorative sheet is formed to be the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body after the rear surface of the decorative body is formed flat. Is desirable. Thereby, since the rear surface of the decorative body is flattened and the outer shape of the decorative sheet is the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body, it is possible to decorate the outer peripheral edge of the transparent decorative body with the pattern of the decorative sheet, Since there is no such thing as a frame on the outer periphery of the decoration, it is possible to give a feeling of opening to the decoration of the effect member and to make the decoration look large. Therefore, the decoration of the production member (such as the pattern of the decorative sheet) can be made more conspicuous, the decoration effect of the production member can be sufficiently exhibited, and the decoration of the production member can attract the interest of the player strongly. A gaming machine that can entertain a player can be provided.

  Further, as described above, when the rear surface of the transparent decorative body is made flat, the decorative sheet comes into contact with (abuts on) the rear surface of the decorative body, so that light is diffusely reflected between the decorative body and the decorative sheet. It is possible to make the pattern of the decorative sheet more visible through the transparent decorative body, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the decorative sheet can be sufficiently exhibited.

  In addition, as described above, when the rear surface of the decorative body is flattened, the dimension in the front-rear direction of the decorative member including the decorative body and the decorative sheet can be reduced as much as possible. It is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the thickness of the members can be reduced and the above-described effects can be realized.

  Further, as described above, when the decorative sheet is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body, it is possible to decorate the outer peripheral edge of the effect member (decorative body) with the pattern of the decorative sheet. By making the decoration mode of the member adjacent to the production member a decoration that is continuous with the decoration of the production member, a large decoration with a sense of unity can be shown to the player, and the visual impact on the player Can be paid attention to, and a large decoration can be enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  In addition, it is preferable that the radiation plate has a plurality of LED housing portions that are formed so as to be recessed from the rear surface toward the front, and accommodate the LEDs of the decorative board from the rear. This allows the rear surface of the radiation plate and the front surface of the decorative substrate to be as close as possible by accommodating the LEDs in the LED accommodation portion of the radiation plate from the rear, thereby reducing the thickness of the effect member in the front-rear direction. A gaming machine that can be made thinner and has the above-described effects can be embodied reliably.

  Further, in the case where the radiation plate has an LED housing portion that is recessed toward the front in which the LED can be housed, light from the LED can be irradiated from the inner surface of the LED housing portion to the inside of the plate thickness. In comparison with the case where light is radiated from the outer peripheral surface of the radiation plate, even in a portion of the radiation plate where light from the outer peripheral surface is difficult to reach (for example, a central portion), an LED housing portion is provided in the corresponding portion. By irradiating light from the inner surface, the portion can be made to emit light brightly, and the decorative member can be made to emit light evenly.

  Further, it is desirable that the LED on the decorative substrate be of a side-view type that can emit light in a direction along the plate surface of the radiation plate. By mounting the LED on the decorative substrate and emitting light, the LED can emit light in the direction along the plate surface of the decorative substrate (radiating plate), so that the light from the LED is directly emitted. Irradiation into the thickness of the plate can be facilitated, and the above-described effects can be easily achieved.

  Further, it is desirable that a plurality of reflecting portions for reflecting light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness forward are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the radiation plate. Thereby, when light is emitted in the direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiation plate from the LED of the decorative substrate, it can be reflected forward by the plurality of reflection portions provided on substantially the entire rear surface, Since light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface of the radiating plate, the entire decoration member can be illuminated and decorated, and the same operation and effect as described above can be achieved.

  Further, when a plurality of reflecting portions are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the radiating plate, light can be radiated to substantially the entire decoration member. It is not necessary to change the part, and it is possible to easily cope with a change in the decoration of the decorative member, and to provide a gaming machine that can easily cope with a model change, a design change, and the like.

  Further, it is desirable to mount electronic components such as ICs and resistors provided on the decorative substrate on the rear surface of the decorative substrate. As a result, as compared with the case where electronic components such as ICs and resistors without LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate, the radiation plate is increased by the height of the electronic components from the substrate surface of the decorative substrate. Can be made to approach the front surface of the decorative substrate, and the thickness of the effect member can be further reduced.

  In addition, as described above, when electronic components such as ICs and resistors are mounted on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, when a side-view type LED is used, light is emitted in the direction along the front surface of the decorative substrate. It is possible to prevent the light from the LED from being blocked by the electronic component, and to sufficiently transmit the light from the LED. Therefore, since the shadows due to the electronic components cannot be formed, the entire decoration member can be uniformly illuminated and decorated, so that the player can be entertained with a good-looking luminous effect, and the entire decoration member can be formed with a small number of LEDs. Can be light-emission-decorated, thereby suppressing an increase in cost of the gaming machine.

Means 2: In the structure of the means 1,
"The decorative member is
A transparent and flat decorative body having an embossed portion that forms at least a part of the ornament and is formed by three-dimensional embossing,
And a sheet-shaped decorative sheet having a picture constituting the rest of the decoration. "

  Here, as the “decorative body”, the embossed portion may have both the front surface and the rear surface, or the embossed portion may have only the front surface, The portion may be provided only on the rear surface.

  Further, as the “decorative sheet”, “a sheet having a hologram section in which a pattern is displayed by interference fringes of light”, “a sheet having a prism section in which countless minute prisms are formed” , "The one having a lens portion on which countless minute lenses are formed", "the one having an opaque portion that makes the rear invisible", and the like.

  As for the relationship between the embossed portion of the decorative body and the design of the decorative sheet, the embossed portion and the design may be related to each other, or the embossed portion and the design may be completely unrelated.

  According to the configuration of the means 2, the decorative member is provided with a transparent flat plate-shaped decoration body having at least a part of the decoration and having an embossed portion formed by three-dimensional embossing, and a rear side of the decoration body. And a sheet-shaped decorative sheet provided with a picture constituting the rest of the decoration.

  Thereby, since the decorative member provided with the decoration is constituted by the decorative body having the relief and the decorative sheet having the picture, the relief can give the decoration a three-dimensional effect. In addition, it is possible to impart a sense of depth to the pattern of the decorative sheet provided at the rear by the lens effect by the relief of the relief portion. Accordingly, the three-dimensional decoration having a sense of depth can be shown to the player by the relief portion of the decoration body and the pattern of the decoration sheet. Therefore, even if the thickness of the decoration member (dimension in the front-rear direction) is reduced, the decoration is achieved. The effect does not decrease, it is possible to attract and entertain the player's interest, and the effect member can be made thinner via the decorative member, so that the above-described operation and effect can be reliably achieved. it can.

  In addition, since the decorative sheet having the pattern is provided behind the decorative body having the embossed portion, the decorative body is colored by the color of the pattern of the decorative sheet without coloring the transparent decorative body. And the cost of the decorative body can be reduced. Further, the decoration of the decorative body (decorative member) can be easily changed by changing the design of the decorative sheet, so that the gaming machine can be easily adapted to a model change, a design change, and the like.

Means 3: In the structure of the means 1 or 2,
"The decorative member is
And a hologram part which constitutes a part of the decoration and displays a pattern by interference fringes of light. "

  Here, the “hologram section” includes “transmission hologram”, “rainbow hologram”, “Lipman hologram”, and the like. Further, the hologram unit may be provided on the surface of the decorative member, or may be provided on the rear surface of the decorative member.

  According to the configuration of the means 3, the decorative member has a hologram part which forms a part of the decoration and displays a pattern by interference fringes of light.

  Thereby, light from the LED on the decorative board, light from other light emitting means provided in the gaming machine, light in the gaming hall where the gaming machine is installed, etc. hit the hologram section, Since the predetermined hologram can be shown by the interference fringes, the appearance of the decoration can be improved by the hologram, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It is possible to give a three-dimensional effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the thinness even if the effect member is made thin.

Means 4: In the configuration of Means 3,
"The hologram section is
It constitutes at least a part of the picture in the decorative sheet. "

  According to the configuration of the means 4, the hologram section constitutes at least a part of the picture on the decorative sheet.

  Since a part of the pattern of the decorative sheet is constituted by the hologram portion, the hologram can be seen through the transparent decorative body having the relief portion. It is possible to give a sense of depth to the pattern, and to show the player a decoration that can strongly attract the player's interest.

  In addition, since the decorative sheet has a hologram portion, it is possible to use a printing technique for forming the hologram portion, thereby suppressing an increase in cost.

Means 5: In any one of the structures from the means 2 to the means 4,
"The decorative body has a flat rear surface, and
The decorative sheet is formed in the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body. "

  By the way, in the conventional technology such as Patent Literature 1, the decorative body provided at the foremost side of the effect member has a flange-like portion projecting rearward over substantially the entire outer periphery. Therefore, when a sheet-shaped decorative sheet is provided behind the decorative body, the size of the outer periphery of the decorative sheet needs to be smaller than the size of the inner circumference of the flange-shaped portion of the decorative body. The appearance of the flange on the outer periphery of the picture of the decorative sheet seen through it makes it seem that it is fitted to the frame with a small size, the decoration of the production member looks small, and the decoration effect can be fully exhibited There is a risk of disappearing.

  According to the configuration of the means 5, the rear surface of the decorative body is formed flat, and the decorative sheet is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body.

  Thereby, since the rear surface of the decorative body is flattened and the outer shape of the decorative sheet is the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body, it is possible to decorate the outer peripheral edge of the transparent decorative body with the pattern of the decorative sheet, Since there is no such thing as a frame on the outer periphery of the decoration, it is possible to give a feeling of opening to the decoration of the effect member and to make the decoration look large. Therefore, the decoration of the production member (such as the pattern of the decorative sheet) can be made more conspicuous, the decoration effect of the production member can be sufficiently exhibited, and the decoration of the production member can attract the interest of the player strongly. A gaming machine that can entertain a player can be provided.

  In addition, since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body is flat, the decorative sheet comes into contact with (abuts) the rear surface of the decorative body, so that light is not diffusely reflected between the decorative body and the decorative sheet. In addition, the pattern of the decorative sheet can be made more visible through the transparent decorative body, and the decorative effect by the pattern of the decorative sheet can be sufficiently exhibited.

  Further, since the rear surface of the decorative body is flat, it is possible to reduce the dimension in the front-rear direction of the decorative member composed of the decorative body and the decorative sheet as much as possible. It is possible to provide a gaming machine whose thickness can be reduced and which can realize the above-described effects.

  Furthermore, since it is possible to decorate the outer peripheral edge of the effect member (decorative body) with the pattern of the decorative sheet, the decoration mode of the member adjacent to the effect member and the decoration that is continuous with the decoration of the effect member can be changed. By doing so, it is possible to show a large decoration with a sense of unity to the player, to give the player an apparent impact and to pay attention, and to make the large decoration entertain and to reduce the interest of the player Can be suppressed.

Means 6: In any one of the structures from the means 1 to the means 5,
"The radiation plate is
It is formed so as to be depressed toward the front from the rear surface, and has a plurality of LED housing portions for housing the LEDs of the decorative board from the rear. "

  Here, as the “LED housing section”, “a hole-shaped one penetrating the radiation plate in the front-rear direction”, “a bottomed concave one that is recessed forward from the rear surface of the radiation plate”, “radiation A slit-shaped member that penetrates the plate in the front-rear direction and is open to the side surface ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 6, the radiation plate is formed so as to be depressed forward from the rear surface, and has a plurality of LED housing portions for housing the LEDs of the decorative board from the rear.

  Thereby, since the radiating plate has an LED accommodating portion capable of accommodating the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative board, the LED accommodating portion accommodates the LED from the rear, thereby allowing the rear surface of the radiating plate to be accommodated. The front surface of the decorative substrate can be brought as close as possible, the thickness of the effect member in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and a gaming machine having the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  In addition, since the radiation plate has the LED housing portion that can be recessed forward and can accommodate the LED, light from the LED can be emitted from the inner surface of the LED housing portion to the inside of the plate thickness. . Accordingly, compared with the case where light is emitted from the outer peripheral surface of the radiation plate, even in a part of the radiation plate where light from the outer peripheral surface is difficult to reach (for example, a central part), the LED housing part is provided in the part. By irradiating light from its inner surface, the part can be made to emit light brightly, and the decorative member can be made to emit light evenly.

Means 7: In any one of the structures from means 1 to means 6,
"The LED is
Of a side view type capable of irradiating light in a direction along the plate surface of the radiation plate.

  According to the configuration of the means 7, the LED of the decorative substrate is of a side view type capable of irradiating light in a direction along the plate surface of the radiation plate.

  By mounting the LED on the decorative substrate and emitting light, the LED can emit light in the direction along the plate surface of the decorative substrate (radiating plate), so that the light from the LED is directly emitted. Irradiation into the thickness of the plate can be facilitated, and the above-described effects can be easily achieved.

  In the decorative board, it is desirable to mount electronic components such as ICs and resistors on the rear surface of the decorative board. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light from the side-view type LED, which irradiates light in the direction along the front surface of the decorative substrate, from being blocked by the electronic components, and to sufficiently transmit the light from the LED. You can make it. Therefore, since the shadows due to the electronic components cannot be formed, the entire decoration member can be uniformly illuminated and decorated, so that the player can be entertained with a good-looking luminous effect, and the entire decoration member can be formed with a small number of LEDs. Can be light-emission-decorated, thereby suppressing an increase in cost of the gaming machine.

Means 8: In any one of the structures from means 1 to means 7,
"The radiation plate is
A plurality of reflectors for reflecting light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness forward are provided on substantially the entire rear surface. "

  Here, as the “reflecting portion”, “a quadrangular pyramid-shaped one”, “a triangular pyramid-shaped one”, a “cone-shaped one”, a “pent roof (gable) -shaped one”, a “hemispherical one”, And the like. Further, the “reflecting portion” may be provided in a fixed pattern irrespective of the position of the LED on the decorative substrate, or may be provided on a concentric arc centered on the corresponding LED.

  According to the configuration of the means 8, a plurality of reflecting portions for reflecting light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness forward are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the radiation plate.

  Thereby, when light is emitted in the direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiation plate from the LED of the decorative substrate, it can be reflected forward by the plurality of reflection portions provided on substantially the entire rear surface, Since light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface of the radiating plate, the entire decoration member can be illuminated and decorated, and the same operation and effect as described above can be achieved.

  In addition, since a plurality of reflecting portions are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the radiation plate and light can be emitted to substantially the entire decoration member, even if the decoration provided on the decoration member is changed. There is no need to change the reflecting portion, and it is possible to easily respond to a change in the decoration of the decorative member, and to provide a gaming machine that can easily respond to a model change, a design change, and the like.

Means 9: In the gaming machine,
"A transparent plate-shaped decorative body which forms a part of the decoration and has an embossed portion formed by three-dimensional embossing and has a flat rear surface, and is provided behind the decorative body. A sheet-shaped decorative sheet having a hologram portion in which a part of the pattern is displayed by interference patterns of light as well as a pattern constituting the rest of the decoration and having the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body; A translucent flat plate-shaped decorative member composed of:
A plurality of LED housing portions provided behind the decorative member and formed so as to be depressed from the rear surface to the front, and reflect light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness to substantially the entire rear surface. A plurality of reflecting portions, having a transparent flat plate-shaped radiation plate capable of emitting light in a direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness by the plurality of reflecting portions to the front,
A plurality of side-view type LEDs which are accommodated from behind in the LED accommodating portion of the radiation plate and which can irradiate light in a direction along a plate surface within a thickness of the radiation plate are mounted on a front surface of the radiation plate. And a decorative substrate provided on the rear side of the plate. "

  According to the configuration of the means 9, the gaming machine has a transparent plate-shaped decorative body which has a relief portion which forms a part of the decoration and is formed by three-dimensional relief and has a flat rear surface. And a hologram section provided behind the decorative body and constituting a part of the decorative pattern and a part of the pattern by light interference fringes, and formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body. A sheet-shaped decorative sheet, a flat decorative member having a light-transmitting property constituted by a sheet-shaped decorative sheet, and a plurality of LED housing portions provided behind the decorative member and formed so as to be depressed forward from the rear surface, And a plurality of reflectors for reflecting light in a direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness substantially on the entire rear surface, and a plurality of reflectors in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness. A transparent flat radiating plate capable of emitting light forward, A plurality of side-view type LEDs that can be illuminated in the direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiating plate that are housed in the LED housing section of the plate from the rear are mounted on the front, and provided behind the radiating plate And an effect member provided with the decorative substrate.

  Thereby, in the effect member, the transparent radiating plate and the decorative substrate are provided behind the decorative member composed of the decorative body and the decorative sheet, and the plurality of LEDs formed on the rear surface of the radiating plate are provided. A side view type LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative board is inserted into each of the housing portions so as to be housed. When the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative board emit light, the light from the LEDs is radiated from the inner surface of the LED accommodating portion in the direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiating plate, and the rear surface of the radiating plate is illuminated. The light is reflected forward by a plurality of reflectors formed on substantially the entire surface, and is emitted forward from the front surface of the radiation plate. Then, the light radiated forward from the radiation plate is radiated forward through the decorative sheet and the decorative body constituting the decorative member, so that the translucent decorative member provided with the decoration is provided. It will be decorated with light. At this time, the light emitted from the LED in the direction along the plate surface of the radiation plate is reflected forward by a plurality of reflection portions within the plate thickness of the radiation plate, so that the decorative member is illuminated and decorated. As compared with the case where the LED is irradiated with light forward, the distance from the front of the radiating plate until the light of the LED is radiated forward can be increased, and the light from the LED can be broadened. It can be diffused and radiated forward from the radiation plate. Therefore, when the LED emits light, the light from the LED can be widely diffused, and it can be suppressed that the LED appears to emit light in a dot-like manner. It is possible to make the player look beautiful, to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the effect member, since the decorative substrate is provided behind the flat decorative member and the radiating plate, the dimension in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and the space for arranging the effect member can be easily secured. At the same time, it is possible to easily secure a space for disposing other effect members, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can make the player more enjoyable by providing various effect members.

  Furthermore, since the decorative member provided with the decoration is composed of the decorative body having the embossed portion and the decorative sheet having the picture, the embossed portion can give the decoration a three-dimensional effect. The sense of depth can be given to the pattern of the decorative sheet provided at the rear by the lens effect by the relief of the relief. Accordingly, the three-dimensional decoration having a sense of depth can be shown to the player by the relief portion of the decoration body and the pattern of the decoration sheet. Therefore, even if the thickness of the decoration member (dimension in the front-rear direction) is reduced, the decoration is achieved. The effect does not decrease, it is possible to attract and entertain the player's interest, and the effect member can be made thinner via the decorative member, so that the above-described operation and effect can be reliably achieved. it can.

  In addition, since the decorative sheet having the pattern is provided behind the decorative body having the embossed portion, the decorative body is colored by the color of the pattern of the decorative sheet without coloring the transparent decorative body. And the cost of the decorative body can be reduced. Further, the decoration of the decorative body (decorative member) can be easily changed by changing the design of the decorative sheet, so that the gaming machine can be easily adapted to a model change, a design change, and the like.

  In addition, the decoration sheet of the decoration member has a hologram part in which a part of the design as a decoration is displayed by interference fringes of light, and the light from the LED of the decoration substrate is provided in the gaming machine. Light from other light emitting means, light in the game hall where the gaming machine is installed, etc. hit the hologram portion, so that a predetermined hologram can be shown by interference fringes of light, so that the hologram makes the decoration look good. Can be improved, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the hologram can give a part of the decoration of the decoration member a three-dimensional effect. It can be made not to feel thin.

  Furthermore, since a part of the pattern of the decorative sheet is constituted by the hologram part, the hologram can be seen through the transparent decorative body having the relief part, so that the pattern of the hologram or the like is formed by the lens effect by the relief part. , A sense of depth can be given to the player, and a decoration that can strongly attract the player's interest can be shown to the player. In addition, since the decorative sheet has a hologram portion, it is possible to use a printing technique for forming the hologram portion, thereby suppressing an increase in cost.

  Further, in the decorative member, since the outer surface of the decorative sheet is made the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body by flattening the rear surface of the decorative body, it is possible to decorate the outer peripheral edge of the transparent decorative body with the pattern of the decorative sheet. Since there is no such thing as a frame on the outer periphery of the decoration, it is possible to give the decoration of the effect member a sense of openness and to make the decoration look large. Therefore, the decoration of the production member (such as the pattern of the decorative sheet) can be made more conspicuous, the decoration effect of the production member can be sufficiently exhibited, and the decoration of the production member can attract the interest of the player strongly. A gaming machine that can entertain a player can be provided.

  In addition, since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body is flat, the decorative sheet comes into contact with (abuts) the rear surface of the decorative body, so that light is not diffusely reflected between the decorative body and the decorative sheet. In addition, the pattern of the decorative sheet can be made more visible through the transparent decorative body, and the decorative effect by the pattern of the decorative sheet can be sufficiently exhibited. Further, since the rear surface of the decorative body is flat, it is possible to reduce the dimension in the front-rear direction of the decorative member composed of the decorative body and the decorative sheet as much as possible. It is possible to provide a gaming machine whose thickness can be reduced and which can realize the above-described effects.

  Further, the decorative sheet is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body, and can be decorated up to the outer peripheral edge of the effect member (decorative body) by the pattern of the decorative sheet. By making the decoration mode of the member that is being decorated a decoration that is continuous with the decoration of the effect member, a large decoration with a sense of unity can be shown to the player, giving the player a visual impact and attracting attention And at the same time, a large decoration can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest of the player can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the radiation plate has a plurality of LED accommodation portions in which the LEDs of the decorative board are accommodated from behind, the LEDs are accommodated in the LED accommodation portions of the emission plate from behind, so that the rear surface of the emission plate can be removed. The front surface of the decorative substrate can be brought as close as possible, the thickness of the effect member in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and a gaming machine having the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  In addition, since the LED of the decorative board is accommodated in the LED accommodating portion of the radiating plate and the light from the LED is radiated from the inner surface of the LED accommodating portion to the inside of the thickness, the light is radiated from the outer peripheral surface of the radiating plate. In comparison with the case where the light is transmitted from the outer peripheral surface, even in a portion of the radiation plate where light from the outer peripheral surface is difficult to reach (for example, a central portion), the LED housing portion is provided in the relevant portion and light is emitted from the inner surface. Thus, the portion can be made to emit light brightly, and the decorative member can be made to emit light without unevenness.

  Furthermore, since the LED on the decorative board is of a side view type, it is only necessary to house the LED in the LED housing portion of the radiating plate and emit light, and to follow the plate surface within the thickness of the radiating plate from the inner surface of the LED housing portion. Light can be emitted in the different directions, and a gaming machine having the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Further, a plurality of reflecting portions are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the radiation plate, and light can be radiated to substantially the entire decoration member. It is not necessary to change the part, and it is possible to easily cope with a change in the decoration of the decorative member, and to provide a gaming machine that can easily cope with a model change or a design change.

Means 10: In any one of the structures from means 1 to means 9,
The gaming machine is
A game area into which game media is driven by a player's operation,
A plurality of reception ports that are arranged in the game area and can receive game media,
It is a pachinko machine provided with a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with the reception of game media into the reception port.

  Here, the "accepting entrance" includes "a general winning opening which is always open in the gaming area", and "an open gaming state which is always open in the gaming area, and an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by receiving the game medium. The start winning prize port (start port) in which a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate the game media, and the specific reception port (chucker) in the game area accepts the game medium. Variable winning prize opening (variable starting opening, character winning prize opening, etc.) that can be accepted "," Normal lottery that is drawn by passing game media through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) in the game area Depending on the result, the game medium is set to a variable prize port (variable starting port, character prize port, etc.) that allows reception of the game medium, and a specific area (eg, gate, chucker, etc.) in the game area. Through In accordance with the result of the normal lottery that is selected by lottery, it is possible to receive the game medium, and a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not the reception of the game medium generates an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage. Mouth (variable starting opening) "," V winning opening which generates an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage when the game medium received in the bonus winning opening is distributed and received by the distribution means "," Game " As the advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous, there are a large winning opening and a bonus winning opening that can be opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to receive a game medium.

  In addition, as the “pachinko machine”, “a lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous game state in which a player is advantageous by receiving a game medium into the starting port, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means A special lottery result display means for displaying a special lottery result by displaying a special lottery by a combination of the special symbols displayed stopped, and displaying a special lottery result by displaying the special symbol fluctuated according to the special lottery result. (A so-called digi-pachi machine) comprising a special game state generating means for generating a special game state by opening and closing a special winning opening in a predetermined pattern when the special lottery result to be generated is displayed. A distribution means for distributing the game medium received in the mouth, and, when the game medium distributed by the distribution means is received in the V winning opening, the accessory winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. (A so-called “floating machine”) having an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state in which a player is advantageous, and “a game medium having a large winning opening and a role winning opening, and a starting medium. Opening and closing the special winning opening or the special winning opening in a predetermined pattern according to the special lottery result drawn by accepting the game, and the gaming media accepted by the special winning opening is distributed to the V winning opening, the special winning opening Or, an apparatus provided with an advantageous game state generating means for opening and closing a special winning opening in a predetermined pattern to generate an advantageous game state in which a player is advantageous (a so-called multifunction device).

  According to the configuration of the means 10, the gaming machine is provided with a game area into which a game medium is driven by a player's operation, a plurality of reception ports arranged in the game area, capable of receiving the game medium, and a game to the reception port. And a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with the reception of the media. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, the operation and effect of any of the above-described means can be obtained.

  In addition, it is desirable that the effect of emitting and decorating the decoration member by the light emission of the LED mounted on the decoration board (light emission effect) is executed by the game medium driven into the game area being received in the reception port. Thus, when the game media is received in the reception port, in addition to the predetermined number of game media being paid out, an effect is performed in which the decoration member of the effect member is illuminated and decorated, so that the player can enjoy the game. It is possible to easily continue the driving of the game medium aimed at the entrance, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, when a special lottery is performed to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage by receiving the game medium into the starting port, the special lottery result is presented to the player when suggesting the special lottery result to the player. As one of the effects to be performed, the decorative member of the effect member may be decorated with light emission. With this, the decorative member is light-emission-decorated, so that it is possible to entertain the player by giving a strong impact by the above-described operation and effect, and the special lottery result drawn to the player is Can be considered to be in an advantageous game state in which an advantageous game state occurs (for example, “big hit”), and the sense of expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous game state can be increased to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, as described above, since the light emitting effect with a higher effect can be shown to the player by performing the light emitting decoration of the decorative member, the effect for indicating the special lottery result of the lottery to the player (for example, The present invention can be suitably used for a “reach effect”, and it is possible to entertain a player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 11: In any one of the structures from means 1 to means 9,
The gaming machine is
A plurality of torso each having a plurality of designs,
A starting operation unit that rotates a plurality of the rotating bodies by operating the player after the insertion of the game medium,
A plurality of stop operation units for respectively stopping the rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies;
A payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with a combination of stop symbols by all the rotating bodies that have been rotated and stopped by the player operating the plurality of stop operation units, respectively. There is a feature.

  Here, as the “slot machine”, “one in which the number of active lines for determining the combination of stop symbols changes according to the number of game media (medals) used in one game”, “ An internal lottery is executed with the start of rotation, and a bonus that gives a player an advantage according to the combination of stopped symbols and the result of the selected internal lottery is provided. Has been done. " The “privileges” include “big bonus (BB)”, “regular bonus (RB)”, “cherry rush bonus (CRB)”, “replay”, “long replay time (LRT)”, “assist time ( AT) ".

  According to the configuration of the means 11, the gaming machine has a plurality of rotating bodies each having a plurality of symbols, and a starting operation section for rotating the plurality of rotating bodies by operating the player after inserting the game medium. According to a combination of a plurality of stop operation units for stopping the rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies, and a stop symbol by all the rotating bodies stopped by the player operating the plurality of stop operation units, respectively. And a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media. Thereby, in the pachislo machine, the operation and effect of any of the above-described means can be obtained.

  In addition, for the effect of emitting and decorating the decoration member by the light emission of the LED mounted on the decoration board (light emission effect), the combination of the symbols stopped rotating except for one on the activated line is the combination of the winning combination symbols. When the content is satisfied (so-called reach), as one of the effects presented to the player, the decorative member of the effect member may be illuminated. Thereby, the decorative member is illuminated and decorated, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the operation of the stop operation unit can be enjoyed so as to be a winning combination. In addition, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination, the decorative member may be illuminated and decorated, so that the decorative member is illuminated and decorated, so that a strong impact can be given to the player. When the player stops at a specific symbol combination, the player can be made to think that an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous (for example, “BB”) is generated, and the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state is increased. By doing so, a decrease in interest can be suppressed. In addition, as described above, since the light emitting effect with a higher effect can be shown to the player by causing the decorative member to emit light, it is suitable for the effect to suggest the internal lottery to the player. It can be used to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 12: In any one of means 1 to 9,
The gaming machine is
It is a fusion machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

  Here, the "fusing machine" in which the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine are fused is a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols according to the operation of a starting operation unit (for example, an operating lever) after a plurality of game media are inserted. , And thereafter, the variation of the symbol row is stopped in response to the operation of the stop operation unit (for example, the stop button), and the game medium is paid out according to the combination of the stopped symbols, or a privilege (eg, , An advantageous game state). If the stop operation unit is not operated after the lapse of the predetermined time, the variation display of the symbol row may be stopped in response to the lapse of the predetermined time.

  According to the configuration of the means 12, the gaming machine is a multi-functional machine combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Thus, in the multifunction machine in which the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine are merged, any one of the above-described means can be achieved.

  In addition, for the effect of emitting and decorating the decoration member by the light emission of the LED mounted on the decoration board (light emission effect), the combination of the symbols stopped rotating except for one on the activated line is the combination of the winning combination symbols. As one of the effects presented to the player when the condition is satisfied (so-called “reach”), the decorative member of the directing member may be illuminated, or the lottery result of the internal lottery may be a winning combination. At this time, the decorative member may be illuminated and decorated, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 276 to 287. FIG. 276 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 277 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 278 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 279 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 280 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 281 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 282 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 283 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the production operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 284 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the production operation unit is in the raised position, viewed from the front right. is there. FIG. 285 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 286 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the device as viewed from behind after being disassembled.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable and is mounted on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a player that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 365) is driven.

  The outer frame 2 is formed as a rectangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 with the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 extending vertically and separated from each other. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other, and the outer frame upper member 30 And an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the upper outer frame assembly 40.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility of a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the upper frame hinge assembly 50 and the lower frame lower hinge member 60 allow the outer frame 2 to be connected to the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported coaxially, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in front view.

  Also, when the main frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 is inverted in phase and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper sound.

  The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by a player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player separately from the handle 182. When the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates the effect operation unit 301. Thus, the player can participate in the effect, and the player can be entertained by operating the effect operation unit 301 in addition to the game using the game ball B.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. A main frame upper hinge member 510 and a main frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launching device 540 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and a game board attached to the main frame base 501 A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of, and includes an outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, a.

  The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side, and uses the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front left side front end, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the open front side is closed. Is mounted so that it can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and a board attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game situation based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral arranged behind the game panel 1100 A control unit 1500 (see FIG. 287) and an effect display device arranged at the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image. 1600, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 includes various effect units that can perform a movable effect or a light emitting effect according to a game state.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N which are in contact with the game balls B and are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by receiving or passing the game balls B. (For example, a payout of a predetermined number of game balls B), a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first winning opening 2005, and a second winning opening 2006. And The obstacle nail N is implanted in the front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate section 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first winning opening 2005, and the second winning opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  In the gaming area 5 a of the gaming board 5, the player can hit the game ball B by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. Thereby, the game ball B is set to the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate unit 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first winning opening 2005, the second winning opening 2006, and the like in the gaming area 5a. The player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182 so as to be accepted or passed.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to a game state that is changed by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a, the rear effect unit 3100, and the lower back. Left production unit 3200, Ura lower right production unit 3250, Ura lower middle production unit 3300, Ura upper production unit 3400, Ura rear left production unit 3500, Ura rear right production unit 3600, Ura front left production unit 3700, Ura front right production The player can be entertained by causing the unit 3800 or the like to perform a luminous effect, a movable effect, or the like.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 288 to 293. FIG. 288 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 289 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 290 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 291 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 292 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 293 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 is formed as a rectangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically.

  As shown, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 that are vertically separated and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. An outer frame upper member 30 connecting upper ends thereof, an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and an upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

  The outer frame 2 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 when the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward with its phase inverted.

  The outer frame 2 allows the outer frame hinge assembly 50 to detachably support the body frame upper hinge member 510 of the body frame 4. The outer frame 2 supports the upper body frame hinge member 510 and the lower body frame hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 coaxially and rotatably by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 294 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are respectively disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend up and down, and are disposed apart from each other. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 support the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 so as to be rotatable coaxially. This is for mounting the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 extending vertically in a front-rear direction with a constant width (depth), and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to an upper right end of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flatly depressed rightward in a rear portion of the left side surface obtained by dividing the front-rear direction into three equal parts, and a right portion from a portion opposite to the concave portion 11a in the right side surface. It has a bulging portion 11b bulging to the right and a hollow portion 11c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 are increased by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

  The outer frame left member 11 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of the upper portion 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c of the rear side to be inserted into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, and causes the horizontal fixing portion 12a to abut on the upper end of the outer frame left member 11; By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 with the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c abutting on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 makes the horizontal fixing portion 12a abut on the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30 and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the cutout portion 30a on the left side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (the outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat upper and lower side extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. A fixing portion 13b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b behind the horizontal fixing portion, and a right side from a rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. And a flat contact portion 13d extending short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 causes the rear surface of the contact portion 13d to contact the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. In contact with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, so that the outer side is fixed. It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41 and causes the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the left side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  Next, an outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically in a front-rear direction with a constant width (depth), and an upper right connecting member attached to an upper left end of the outer frame right member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side of the outer frame right member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and an outer frame right member 21. A lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a which is flatly depressed to the left at a rear portion of the right-side surface where the front-rear direction is divided into three equal parts, and a left portion which is leftward from a portion opposite to the concave portion 21a on the left side surface. It has a bulging portion 21b bulging in the upward direction, and a hollow portion 21c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

  The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 22a extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the rear lower fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21 and makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the upper end of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from outside the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c abutting on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. The upper right connecting member 22 causes the horizontal fixing portion 22a to abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30 and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout portion 30a on the right side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (the outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b behind the horizontal fixing portion, and a left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. And a flat contact portion 23d extending shortly toward the right side. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 causes the rear surface of the contact portion 23d to abut on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. By contacting the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from outside the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. The lower right connecting member 23 makes the horizontal fixing portion 23a abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout portion 41a on the right side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, whereby the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

  The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are used to hook an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hooking member 24 extends up and down with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is a flat attachment portion 24a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a plate-shaped hooking piece 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the cage is hooked.

  The lower hook member 25 extends up and down with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is a flat attachment portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 25a. And a flat-shaped hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 penetrates forward and backward through the hooking piece 25b. And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with cutouts 30a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction while penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides. The upper and lower fixing portions 12b and the upper and lower fixing portions 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutouts 30a at both left and right ends, respectively, while the upper and lower fixing portions 12b and 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are inserted.

  Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b in which the upper surface and the front surface are depressed from the general surface at the left end. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 295 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame assembling the outer frame lower assembly as viewed from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right, and extends left and right, and an outer frame lower member 41, A box-shaped front panel member 42 that is disposed in front of the member 41, extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41, and has an open rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42. A left and right box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and is open frontward, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43 And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by The length of the outer frame lower member 41 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with cutouts 41a that are respectively recessed toward the center in the left-right direction while penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at both left and right ends in a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c and the lower right connecting member 23 are respectively inserted. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is concave from the upper surface, and has a concave portion 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and escapes to the front end side from a rearward position at the center in the front-rear direction. The concave portion 41b maximizes the capacity of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The curtain plate front member 42 has a length in the left-right direction extending to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height, The entire rear side is open. The front panel 42 is closed by the rear panel 43 so that the open rear side cooperates with the rear panel 43 to become a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 has a long hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends right and left on the front surface near the right end.

  The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front panel 42 to the front surface of the rear panel 43, the front panel 42 cooperates with the front panel 42 to form a panel internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The rear part 43 of the curtain plate has a tubular connection tube part 43a extending left and right and projecting upward at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicating with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The connection cylinder portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end is located upward as it goes rearward from the front end side, which coincides with a general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is about ３ of the entire length of the rear plate 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the whole rear member 43. Are also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection tube portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to an upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43 a, The enclosure 624a is in communication with the internal space of 620a.

  The ball-meshing preventing mechanism 44 causes the game ball B to stay between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 by staying the game ball B at the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. This is for preventing the pinching.

  The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and has a mounting portion 44 a formed flat so as to be touched by an outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later; A first discharge port 44b opening upward at the left end of 44a, a second discharge port 44c opening upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b of the mounting portion 44a, A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placing portion 44a; and an upper end protrusion projecting forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and being inclined so that the upper surface is located upward as going backward. A portion 44e.

  The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game balls B to pass. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the inner space 40a of the curtain plate, and open to the rear surface of the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is used when an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d that rises from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent unauthorized entry of a tool. Even if the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the upright wall portion 44d, even if it bends upward, it comes into contact with the forwardly projecting upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d, and further intrusion occurs. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, in the case where the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game sphere B which has fallen on the placing portion 44a for some reason becomes the standing wall portion. Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game balls B easily stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game balls B are staying on the placing portion 44a, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B are sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4. As a result, there occurs a problem that the main frame 4 cannot be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is moved to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first hole. Through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the rear panel member 43 (the rear of the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes the pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the front panel 42 and the rear panel 43 so as to be separated from each other, and the opening 42a of the front panel 42 from the rear side. A grill member 46 having a flat plate shape, and a port member 47 having two cylinders that are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween and have two cylinders extending in the front and rear directions. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43.

  When the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the pair of guide members 45 abuts on the lower ends of the door frames 3. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having a low frictional resistance, makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 easy to slide, and facilitates opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having countless small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate inner space 40 a (enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies a low sound emitted rearward (in the enclosure 624) from the main frame speaker 622 by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, a rich bass can be radiated to the front of the outer frame 2 (the player side). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear heavy bass.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the seal member 48 is sandwiched between the upper end of the connection tubular portion 43 a and the lower end of the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 and is compressed. This prevents sound in the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 from leaking from between the connection tube 43a and the connection 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 296 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 296 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the lower front. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinged. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the concave portion 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. And an attachment screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b, and an upper fixing portion; A flat horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and a lower portion extending from the edge extending from the left side to the front side of the front extension portion 51b to a portion where the bearing groove 51c is open. And a flat edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 described later in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending forward and backward, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from a rear end of the lock body 52a, and a lock member 52 extending leftward from a rear end of the lock body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending diagonally left forward and a mounting hole 52d vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is formed of a synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably mounted on the lower surface of the front extension portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by a mounting screw 53 at a position rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

  When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock body 52 a can block the bearing groove 51 c in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The edge wall portion 51e extends forward so as to be able to contact a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The distal end of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall 51e of the outer frame hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 is in contact with the edge wall 51e. In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 51c at a position on the front side of the lock body 52a so as to accommodate the hinge pin 512 on the body frame of the hinge member 510 on the body frame.

  By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end moves to the left, whereby the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c Can be in a state of being all over. Thus, the upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under outer frame]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like rising portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a behind the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d sized to penetrate vertically through the horizontal portion 60a and allow only one game ball B to pass therethrough. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoid with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated conical shape in which the upper end is narrower at the upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a position near the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 60b and to extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a in an inverted U-shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60 a is mounted on the mounting portion 44 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. Thus, it is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain. The rising portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a of the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge holes 60 d coincide with the first discharge ports 44 b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) behind the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main frame are closed as the main frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually narrows, so that the rolling is performed to the rear side with a large interval, and the air can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling backward from the main body frame 4, and It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the position of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 297 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 298 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 299 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 300 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 301 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 302 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 303 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 304 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 305 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind.

  The door frame 3 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extending vertically when viewed from the front. The inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Have been. The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by a player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 includes a quadrangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having an outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that closes the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover a lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear, and a door frame base unit 100 A handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the tray, a dish unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper side of the dish unit 200 attached to the left front of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400 and the upper side of the plate unit are attached to the right front part of the door frame base unit 100. A frame right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a square (rectangular) shape whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically and having a door window 101a that penetrates forward and backward, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. A handle mounting member 102 mounted below, a speaker duct 103 mounted on the rear lower right corner on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and mounted near a rear right lower end on the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101. Door frame main relay board 104, a door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view of the door frame main relay board 104, and a door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view of the door frame sub relay board 105. The relay frame 106 after the handle, the door frame relay substrate cover 107 that covers a part of the door frame main relay substrate 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay substrate 105 from the rear side, A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. An under-frame hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached behind the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the lower right portion of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view.

  The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 to provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

  The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) fired by the ball firing device 540 and not reaching the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by a player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved by the ball launching device 540 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is for playing a game to drive into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 306 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 306 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 307 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 308 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is mounted on the left side of the main frame 4 so as to be hinged rotatable with respect to the main frame 4, closes the front surface of the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, and has a game board mounted on the main frame 4. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a quadrangular flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 having an outer shape extending vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right of the front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, And a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view at a rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 and a door frame main relay at a rear lower portion of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the board 104 in rear view, and a handle rear relay board mounted on the rear view of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the rear lower portion of the rear side of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to cover a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and a door frame base 101. And a cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. An under-frame hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached behind the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the lower right portion of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view.

  The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is mounted on the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is mounted on the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

  A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates back and forth, and whose inner peripheral shape in a front view is formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically. In the door window 101a, the upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. As described above, the entire door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed at the lower right corner in front view of the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b whose left end is inclined slightly forward from the right end side, a handle mounting seat surface 101b, and a door window 101a. Between the front side and the right end in the front view, from the rear side to the front side, and into the insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b, which penetrate back and forth on the front left side in front view, and pass through the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 in front. And a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the ball.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is located to the left from the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the ball for the lower plate that faces the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 forward. A passage opening 101f, a ball passage opening 101g for an upper plate that penetrates back and forth so as to be adjacent to a lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in a front view and that faces a through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150; A glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

  The door frame base 101 has a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i formed at the lower left corner in front view (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) and penetrating back and forth. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, the plurality of slits 101i are provided such that the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located forward and the body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the body frame 4 is located rearward when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main frame speaker 622 can be emitted forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth above the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the door window 101a. The through hole 101j is a hole through which a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted, and penetrates the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting a handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a, A plurality (three in this embodiment) of ridges 102c protruding into the portion 102a and extending over the entire length of the cylindrical portion 102a in the axial direction and arranged at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a. And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

  The handle mounting member 102 is mounted to the handle mounting seat surface 101b with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

  The inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper part of the cylindrical part 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower part of the cylindrical part 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base 181a of the handle base 181 into the cylindrical portion 102a only in a state where the three protrusions 102c and the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotation position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be regulated.

  The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicular to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a state of being similarly inclined.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the tubular portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Accordingly, the sound (sound) emitted (output) from the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101 i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker opening 211b of the plate unit base 211, it is possible to satisfactorily guide the pachinko machine 1 to the front (player side).

  Further, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on a rear surface below the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103a is disposed on the left side in front view of the door frame relay board cover 107, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board / door frame sub relay board / handle relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the post-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner in rear view at the lower rear portion of the door frame base 101. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the relay board 106 after the handle and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 (FIG. 358) extending from the main body frame 4. 359) is connected.

  The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L-shape in which an external shape is combined with a rectangular shape extending left and right on the right side in a front view of an upper part of a rectangular shape extending vertically and extending vertically. The frame main relay board 104 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side in rear view. The door frame auxiliary relay board 105 includes a handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the in-window decorative part decorative board 413, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 such that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are assembled with the door frame base unit 100 in such a manner that a portion extending up and down of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is a door. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150 on the rear side.

  The handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangular shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear of the handle attachment seat surface 101b below the ball feed opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The relay board 106 after the handle is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the handle rotation sensor 189, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-button operation sensor 194 of the handle unit 180, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. Is for relaying. The relay board 106 after the handle is in a state where the rear side is covered by the relay board cover 108 after the handle in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, relay board cover after handle, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the relay board cover after the handle 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 306 to 308. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board (a vertically extending portion in an inverted L-shape) are provided. It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape that is open at the front and at the left in front view. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107, and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side and connected to these terminals.

  The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and connects a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed near the left end on the front surface and in the center in the left and right direction on the lower surface.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and to provide the door frame base unit 100 with rigidity. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 includes a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 that are vertically separated and are disposed at right and left sides and a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 that connect upper ends of the left reinforcement frame 111 and the right reinforcement frame 112 to each other. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end is attached to a position closer to the upper side from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extends rightward to near the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 connecting the right reinforcement frame 112 and a plurality of cylinders are vertically mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcement frame 112 so as to be vertically separated from each other. And a hook member 116 to be provided.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend up and down with a length substantially equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are vertically separated from each other and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes. The upper reinforcement frame 113 has a constant width in the up-down direction, and extends left and right with a length substantially equal to the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends left and right in a vertical direction that is wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a cut squarely downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b penetrating back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is spaced apart left and right and has a pair of rear pieces formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear pieces facing each other. A pair of side pieces extending in a flat shape from the sides to the front, and a flat front piece connecting the sides of the front ends of the pair of front extensions are provided. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that projects forward when viewed in plan. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole that penetrates forward and backward. The hook members 652 of the locking unit 650 are locked by these hook members 116.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are formed by punching a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcement unit 110, the left reinforcement frame 111, the right reinforcement frame 112, and the upper reinforcement frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 is And the door frame base 101 is located below the door window 101a.

  The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 match the upper plate ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. And the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 306 to 308. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in a front view. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 movably in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat mounting piece 121a having a rectangular shape in a front view, and a flat protruding piece 121b extending forward from upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has a mounting piece 121 a mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. In the state where the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, a vertically extending part penetrates from below near a front end of the pair of protruding pieces 121 b of the hinge bracket 121, and an upper end is an upper end. A portion that extends above the protruding piece 121b and extends horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame is rotatably inserted into the upper hinge hole 511 a for the door frame of the upper hinge body 511 of the upper frame body hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The flange member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is covered between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121 around a portion extending vertically of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is urged upward by the lock spring 124 via the flange member 123.

  The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by a lock spring 124, and a horizontally extending portion at the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower projecting piece. By abutting on the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame projects a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

  When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the hinge assembly 120 moves the entire upper hinge pin 122. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 allows the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to be inserted into or pulled out of the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the main frame upper hinge member 510 from below. it can. By inserting the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the body frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 in the front view can be hinged with respect to the body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

  Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with a door frame lower hinge pin 126 of a door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thus, the door frame 3 can be hinged in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1h. Hinge member under door frame]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 306 to 308. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110 and has a rectangular flat plate-like mounting piece 125a in front view, a flat protruding piece 125b extending forward from a lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. And a hinge pin 126 below the door frame (see FIG. 297) protruding downward from a lower surface near the front end of the front end 125b.

  The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The hinge pin 126 below the door frame is a cylindrical metal rod, and a tapered chamfer is applied to the outer periphery of the lower end. The hinge pin 126 below the door frame, when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, is coaxial with a portion of the protruding piece 125b that extends vertically above and below the hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame. Installed.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main frame side lower hinge member. Can be.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The cylinder lock 130 is mounted on the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locking. The cylinder lock 130 has a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a regular A rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from behind, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and moves forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches cut out. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed such that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the rotation of the rotation transmission member 133 is achieved by inserting a pair of projections of the transmission cylinder 654 into a pair of notches. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder main body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252 h of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200 (see FIG. 297 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 309 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 309 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 310 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit exploded and viewed from the front, and FIG. 310 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and play the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate pull button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game balls B are supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b opening below the entrance 141a. Is a box-shaped front cover 141 having an open front end, and a game ball which has entered a front cover 141 which is formed in a box shape having a front end opened and closed at the rear end thereof, which penetrates in a front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a hit ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball firing device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. At the rear side of the ball 141, a ball removing member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b, and the game balls B on the partition portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 are provided one by one in the rear cover 14. The ball feeding member 144 is rotatably supported around a vertically extending axis between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. And a ball feeding solenoid 145.

  As shown in the drawing, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 disposed on the right side of the entrance 141a when viewed from the front, and a ball ejection member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is disposed on the right side of the feeding member 144.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball ejection member 143 on the left side of the ball outlet 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 described later extends forward from 141c. The front cover 141 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit for removing the upper bowl ball 240 is provided. Further, a portion that is open rearward on the upstream end side of the ball guide path 241c is formed to be closed from the rear side.

  The ball removing member 143 has a partition part 143a below the entrance 141a and between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b, the upper surface of which is lower in the direction of the ball feeding member 144, and a partition part 143a. Around the axis extending downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bent in a V-shape from near the center in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod portion 143b rotatably supported by the rotating rod portion 143b, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from an upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b below the operating rod 143c. And a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side to the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 309 (a)). The operating rod 143c is connected to the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray removing slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper tray removing button 222 of the tray unit 200 via the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 (see FIG. (Upper surface).

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking portion 144a having a fan shape in a plan view centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction and facing the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removing member 143, and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a. The ball holder 144b includes an arc-shaped recess 144b extending from the end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holder 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size that can hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod 144c disposed at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation in the left-right direction.

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and a ball holding portion 144b in a direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and a ball holding portion 144b in which the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to pivot between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is at the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball firing device 540, and enters the partition 143a from the entrance 141a. The movement of the game ball B toward the ball holding unit 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) is blocked by the blocking unit 144a, and the game ball B stays on the partition unit 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partitioning portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the hit ball supply port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition 143a is held in the ball holding unit 144b.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip swings up and down by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip that swings up and down in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 for rotating the ball feeding member 144 about an axis extending in the up-down direction while rotating about an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the movement of the ball.

  The ball feeding operation rod 146 includes an iron plate 146 a at a position below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. Have been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is drawn toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the magnetic force generated when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven. The left end portion near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. Thereafter, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears, and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, so that the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves around the right end part downward. To return to the initial state. As a result, the ball feeding operation rod 146 causes the ball feeding solenoid 145 to swing the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 in the vertical direction.

  The ball feeding crank 147 is engaged with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and is engaged with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft 147b that is disposed on the opposite side to the side and that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extending upward from the shaft 147b. And a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 310 (b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

  The ball feeding unit 140 drives the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 moves the ball feeding operating rod 146 away from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip thereof is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 144 is located at the supply position. Also, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145, and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held at the holding position. To rotate. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball firing device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 481) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is configured to apply a moment such that it rotates in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the ball removing member 143 rotatably supported by the shaft or the weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removing member 143 contacts the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper ball removing slider 242 operated by pressing the upper ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. In the normal state, the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removing portion 141b to partition the ball. The game ball B does not invade.

  Then, when the player presses the upper bowl removing button 222 of the bowl unit 200 downward, the upper bowl removing slider 242 slides down together with the operation transmitting section 242b, and the operation transmitting section 242b moves downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, the ball removing member 143 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the partition 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. The partition is released. As a result, the game ball B entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball guide path 241c of the unit 240 after the upper plate ball is removed from the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

  In addition, since the upper countersunk ball removing slider 242 in which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the operating member 143c of the removing member 143 contacts is formed by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition 143a. , The impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball punching member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B can be separated from the partitioning portion. At 143a, it is possible to prevent bouncing.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 310 (b) and the like) that is recessed forward and to the upper right in a rear view of the hit ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, and A fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

  The anti-fraud member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape in a front view extends left and right, and is separated vertically at a substantially vertical center at a predetermined distance from the right side to the left, and A lower piece 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of opposing sides of the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b are provided. . The upper piece 148a of the anti-fraud member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-fraud member 148 so that the right end in front view projects rearward. The lower piece 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. Thus, in a plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that spreads rightward.

  The anti-fraud member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

  According to the anti-fraud member 148, the illegal game ball B to which the string is attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140, and is attached to the illegal game ball B. When an illegal action is performed such that the illegally operated game ball B is moved into and out of the first starting port 2002 or the like by operating the provided string, the illegal game ball B fired (hit by the ball) by the ball launching device 540 is performed. The V-shaped formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b after inserting the string attached to the illegal game ball B by the momentum between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed portion, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using the illegal game ball B to which the string is attached.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
Fail cover unit 150 of door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 311 and 312. FIG. 311 (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 3 (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 312 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which has been fired by the ball firing device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As illustrated, the foul cover unit 150 is mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and has a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 with an open front side, and a flat lid member mounted on the front surface of the unit main body 151. 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates forward and backward at the upper left corner in front view, and penetrates the lower normal dispensing passage 610 a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper tray ball supply port 211 a of the tray unit 200. A ball passage 150a and a full tank receiver which is open rearward at the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a in a front view and which can communicate with the lower full tank discharge passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4. And a mouth 150b.

  Further, foul cover unit 150 opens upward on the right side in front view of full-ball receptacle 150b, and does not reach game area 5a despite being fired by ball firing device 540 of main body frame 4. Ball receiving port 150c for receiving a game ball B (a foul ball), and a game ball B opened forward near the lower right corner in front view and received in a full tank receiving port 150b and a foul ball receiving port 150c. And a ball discharge port 150d that communicates with the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit 200.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharging port 150d by the unit body 151 and the cover member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible area is provided.

  The through ball passage 150a is formed so as to extend over both the unit body 151 and the cover member 152. The full tank receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150 e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  Further, foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of storage passage 150e, and has a flat movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to unit body 151 and lid member 152, and movable piece 153. And a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

  When the inside of the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 moves into the storage passage 150e to some extent. Game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. Then, the movable piece 153 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. This makes it possible to determine that the lower plate 202 is full with the game balls B, and stops the further payout of the game balls B when the full tank is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. At the same time, the fact can be notified to a player, a staff member of a game hall, or the like, and a prompt can be made to cancel the fullness of the lower plate 202.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through ball passage 150 a, and a discharge passage opening / closing door of a lower full tank path unit 610 in a discharge unit 560 described later of the main body frame 4. 613 is provided with a door opening / closing contact portion 150f to which the operating protrusion 613a can contact (see FIG. 366). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined such that the rear surface moves forward as the rear surface goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 abuts on the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b ( Front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is detachably mounted. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and The front of the area 5a is closed.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-like glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attaching portion 101h, and the inside of the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to the door frame base 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. And a mounting member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending in a flat plate shape outward from a position below the upper left and right corners in front view, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the projection 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 372). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161 respectively, and are separated from each other so as to form a space between each other (see FIG. 372).

  The glass unit mounting member 163 includes a disk-shaped base 163a rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes from the base 163a in a rod shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. Projecting portion 163b. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the rear of the door frame base 101, outside the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a.

  In order to attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is positioned above the base 163a. I do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking pieces 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 are inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated such that the protrusion 163b is positioned below the base 163a, and the protrusion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thus, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, it can be removed in the reverse procedure. Thus, the glass unit 160 is detachable from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is at a rotational position located below the base 163a, the protruding portion 163b regulates the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit attachment member 163, the projection 163b does not rotate to a position above the base 163a. Therefore, the regulation of the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not released naturally, and the glass unit 160 does not naturally come off the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 has a flat main body 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat rear protruding piece 172 projecting rearward shortly along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed such that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. The upper end of the main body 171 is formed along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002, an out guiding part 1003, a part of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000 described later. The pachinko machine 1 is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state where the rear projecting piece 172 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  The rear protruding piece 172 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state where the rear protruding piece 172 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, the game ball B (the game ball B fired by the ball firing device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not abut on the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the game area. The hitting of the game ball B into 5a is not inhibited.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  In the state where the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a portion where the front surface of the main body 171 contacts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161) and projects rearward from the lower side of the main body 171. The removed rearward projecting piece 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 has a state in which the rear protruding piece 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009 prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 313 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 313 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from behind. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by a player to drive the game ball B in the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Things.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. A cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181, a handle decoration board 184 mounted on the front side of the cover base 183 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the handle decoration board 184. And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183.

  The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 behind the handle 182 and a handle 182 attached to the front end, and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181 to the outer periphery. A handle member 181 having a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 188; A handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base and the base 186.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to an initial rotation position (a counterclockwise rotation end in front view). The urging handle return spring 190 and one end side attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 urged in the direction.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end side projecting outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single button 193 whose end side is rotatably mounted on an axis extending back and forth on the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a single button mounted on the handle base 181 by detecting a pressing operation of the single button 193. An operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 has a cylindrical base 181a extending forward and backward, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding in the radial direction from the front end of the base 181a, and a depression from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. The three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a in the handle mounting member 102. Accordingly, the base 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, and the ridges 102c are respectively formed in the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

  The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d, which protrude outward from the outer peripheral surface in a circumferential direction, and a rotating shaft (a shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, and the other end of the handle return spring 190 is locked. And a locking projection 182f.

  The four first projections 182a, the second projections 182b, the third projections 182c, and the fourth projections 182d are sequentially provided in a clockwise direction in a front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a is formed such that a side surface in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front of a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and the first protrusion 182a is the opposite side. Side is concave (gouge) so as to curve inward. The second projection 182b is such that a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first projection 182a by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees in a clockwise direction. It protrudes slightly lower. The second protrusion 182b has a side surface in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front of the most protruding portion bulging outward, and the opposite side surface in the counterclockwise direction curves inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

  The third protrusion 182c is such that a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from a most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees in a clockwise direction. It protrudes at about half the height. The side surface of the third protrusion 182c is substantially linearly inclined on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is more gradually inclined than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction, which is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c by a clockwise rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and It protrudes slightly higher. The side surfaces of both sides of the fourth protrusion 182d are substantially linearly inclined, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this embodiment, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle cover 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and round, and has translucency. The handle cover 185 has a lens member formed three-dimensionally of a transparent member inside. The handle cover 185 is illuminated and decorated by appropriately illuminating the LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184.

  The handle unit 180 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle mounting member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined such that the right end side is located behind the left end side in plan view and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 that is attached via is also inclined outwardly in plan view (in other words, its tip end is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). To be fixed to the door frame 3. This makes it easy for the player to grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the rotation operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor. When the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball firing device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player contacts the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting from the player, and the player touches the handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is activated with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 by some method without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. For this reason, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and cannot hit the game ball B. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 in a different manner from the original and playing the game, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  In addition, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while the player rotates the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the handle control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 controls the handle unit 180. The driving of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thus, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and the operation before the operation of the single-shot button 193 is performed by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

  Further, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 is most rotated clockwise in a front view. Then, when the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 182d is pressed by the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, the handle 182 can be maintained in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state by changing the handle 182 by using the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, The player's feeling of fatigue can be reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

[3-5. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 314 to 317. FIG. 314 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 315 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 316 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 317 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. The plate unit 200 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball provided below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 or the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 mounted on the front surface of the plate base unit 210. , And an effect operation unit 300 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

  The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending in the left and right directions, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having the upper plate 201, and a right side of the upper plate main body 212. A mounting base 213 mounted on the mounting base 213 and protruding forward, a plate unit relay board 214 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213, a ball rental operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213, The unit includes an upper tray removing unit 230 attached below the mounting base 213, and an upper tray removing unit 240 attached behind the upper tray removing unit 230.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower part of the front of the dish unit base 211 and has a lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202, and is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252, a lower dish removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251, a dish upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit body 252, and separated from each other left and right. A dish upper right decoration unit 275, a dish lower left decoration unit 280 and a dish lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The rendering operation unit 300 includes, as the rendering operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 for rotatably mounting the transmission ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to a lower surface of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 for decorating the effect operation ring 330 with light, a decorative substrate cover 353 for covering the upper side of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and the operation unit base 320. Vibration speaker 354, an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330, and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And

  The plate unit 200 is entirely bulged forward, and the effect operation unit 300 is disposed so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces obliquely upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. A ball rental operation unit 220 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300 with the upper plate 201, and a lower plate 202 is disposed on the left side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 314 to 317 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212. The upper plate 201 is formed in a container shape that bulges forward to a large extent on the left side from the left and right center in front view and opens upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion which is about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges forward most. The upper plate 201 has a front end receding rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, and a depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 321). ). The upper plate 201 is inclined so that the entire bottom surface including the guide passage portion 201a is lower on the right end side, and the right end side in front view of the guide passage portion 201a is sunk below the ball lending operation unit 220.

  In a state where the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface thereof is positioned at a position below the upper plate ball supply port 211 a of the plate unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211 e. B is inclined so as to be lower toward a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. Thereby, the game balls B released forward from the upper dish ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper dish 201, and the received game balls B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper dish feeding port 211e.

  The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal grounding member 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B contacts (rolls), thereby causing the game ball B to contact (roll). It is possible to remove static electricity charged to B.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 314 to 317 and the like. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower plate ball hole 202a which penetrates up and down the bottom wall so that the game balls B can be discharged. The lower bowl 202 is closed by a lower bowl removing unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially square shape having a plan view extending left and right, and a front end on the left side from the center in the left and right direction projects forward from the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is disposed near the front end near the right end. The lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate hole 202a. The lower bowl 202 of the lower bowl 202 is located below the effect operation unit 300 in front of the lower bowl supply port 211c in a state where the lower bowl 202 is assembled to the pan unit 200.

  The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c while the lower plate hole 202a is closed, and open the lower ball hole 202a. Can be discharged below the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). In addition, in a state where the lower dish ball hole 202a is opened, the lower dish ball hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. The released game balls B can be promptly discharged downward from the lower bowl extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 of the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 318 is a perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 319 is a perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 320 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 321 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there. The dish base unit 210 is mounted below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are mounted on the front surface.

  The plate base unit 210 is a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having the plate 201. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 which is mounted on the upper right side of the upper plate main body 212 in the upper front part of the plate unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and which is mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213 on the front side of the plate unit base 211. And a dish unit relay board 214.

  The plate base unit 210 includes a ball rental operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213, and an upper plate ball removal unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. And a unit 240 for removing an upper tray ball attached to the rear of the tray unit base 211 behind the unit 230 for removing the upper tray ball.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the right and left direction over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (a shallow open rear portion). (Box shape).

  The plate unit base 211 penetrates forward and backward near the upper left corner in a front view, and extends rearward and downward under the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b having a punched metal mounted on the front side, a lower tray ball supply port 211c penetrating back and forth at a lower portion on the left side with respect to the right and left center in front view, and extending rearward in a tubular manner; A cutout portion 211d, which is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass therethrough, on the right side wall of the portion that extends cylindrically behind the ball supply port 211c, and front and back at the upper right side in front view of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. And an upper plate ball feed port 211e which extends vertically and has an upper portion located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

  Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward to the right of the upper plate ball feed port 211e, and has a mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is mounted, and an upper portion at the left of the upper plate ball feed port 211e. A slider insertion opening 211g through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray ball removing slider 242 of the upper tray removing unit 240 penetrates forward and backward below the tray body, and penetrates forward and backward at the lower right corner in front view. A handle insertion opening 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates back and forth near the right corner in front view. Port 211i.

  The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is opened to the rear wall of the upper plate 201 in a state where the upper plate ball supply port 211a is assembled to the door frame 3, and the cylindrical rear end thereof passes the upper plate ball for the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 are supplied (paid) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

  In a state where the lower dish ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end is opened to the rear wall of the lower dish 202, and the cylindrical rear end is connected to the lower dish ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball outlet 150 d of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game balls B flowing in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The downstream end of the ball guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after the upper ball is removed is connected to a notch 211d formed at a portion of the lower ball supply port 211c that extends in a cylindrical shape. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 are moved to the upper plate ball outlet 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feed unit 140, by operating the upper ball drain button 222. The ball is discharged from the lower bowl supply port 211c into the lower bowl 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 after the tray is removed.

  The upper bowl feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper bowl removing unit 240 when assembled to the bowl base unit 210. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211, and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper part and the rear part opened. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and the left side is larger than the left and right center in front view and bulges forward. The upper plate main body 212 has a front end that is receded rearward from the part that swells most forward to the right in front view, and a depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined such that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 has its upper part near the right end closed.

  The upper plate main body 212 is attached so that a portion near the right end, which is closed at the top, is sunk below the ball rental operation unit 220 in a state where the upper plate main body 212 is assembled to the plate unit 200. The upper plate main body 212 has an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a formed at an upper middle portion in the left-right direction, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the plate unit base 211, and the ball rental operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape whose upper part is open. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion hole 213a vertically penetrating near the left end, and a through hole 213b vertically penetrating at the rear right corner.

  The front slider 232 of the unit for removing upper and lower balls 230 is inserted through the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. In addition, a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted into the through hole 213b.

[3-5c-4. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 includes the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the upper left decorative board 273, the upper right decorative board 278, the lower left decorative board 283, and the lower right decorative board 288. , And for relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The plate unit relay board 214 is attached to the front of the plate unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f. When the plate unit relay board 214 is attached to the plate unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 314 to 321 and the like. The ball rental operation unit 220 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 via the mounting base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 (illustrated in the drawing). After omission of cash or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B are lent to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, and the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine is displayed. It is for returning the cash or the prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine by subtracting the lending of the game ball B.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper flat ball removal button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper flat ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is disposed to the right of the extraction button 222 and has a translucency, a ball lending button 224 that is disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation It includes a return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the base 223, and a ball rental display unit (not shown) disposed below the rear of the ball rental operation base 223.

  The upper bowl removing button 222 protrudes upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display section is constituted by three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 while emitting light.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. When a ball rental button 224 is pressed after a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game ball B that has been lent is deducted and returned to the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine. The ball lending display section displays the amount of cash or prepaid card remaining in the ball lending machine. An error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Unit for removing the upper plate ball and unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit 230 for removing the upper tray ball and the unit 240 for removing the upper tray ball in the tray base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 320 and 321. When the upper ball removing button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, the upper ball removing unit 230 and the upper ball removing unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to form the upper plate 201. This is for discharging the game balls B stored therein to the lower plate 202.

  The upper bowl removing unit 230 is attached to the front of the bowl unit base 211 to the left of the mounting protrusion 211f and below the ball lending operation unit 220. The unit for removing the upper tray ball 240 is attached to a rear portion of the unit for removing the upper tray ball 230 on the rear surface of the tray unit base 211.

  The upper bowl removing unit 230 is attached to the front of the bowl unit base 211 and has a vertically extending tubular front base 231, and a front barrel 231 that is vertically movably inserted into the barrel of the front base 231. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 near the front of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically and has an upper end abutting on the lower end of the upper counter ball removing button 222 and a lower end of the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper counter ball removing slider 242 of the upper counter ball removing unit 240. It is in contact with the upper surface.

  The unit 240 for removing the upper tray ball is provided with a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feed port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. A slider 242 that is slidably mounted on the upper plate, a spring 243 that urges the slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 that is mounted on the rear side of the rear base 241. It has.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion to which the upper ball removing slider 242 is slidably attached and opens forward, and has a ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving port 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward at the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides the ball backward, and a game at a position lower than the ball feeding guide path 241b at the rear surface of the rear base 241. And a guiding path 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in rear view.

  The ball receiving port 241a is assembled with the plate base unit 210, and forwardly passes through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at the position where it opens. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed such that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower portion in a state where the ball feeding guiding path 241b is assembled to the door frame 3. Thereby, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

  The portion extending to the left and right of the ball guide path 241c protrudes rightward in rear view from the portion where the upper plate ball slide slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. And is open on the right side in rear view. A portion extending left and right of the ball guide path 241c is closed by a rear cover 244 on the rear side. In a state where the ball guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper portion of a portion extending vertically below the ball feed guide path 241b is located in front of the ball outlet 141b of the ball feed unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending left and right in the rear view is formed so as to be connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c in the dish unit base 211. Thereby, the game ball B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202 via the ball guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

  The upper bowl removing slider 242 has a square shape in a front view, and has an operation receiving portion 242a protruding forward from the upper left corner, and protruding rearward from a rear surface on the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. And an operation transmission unit 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined such that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  In the state where the slider 242 for removing the upper tray ball is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242 a penetrates the slider insertion opening 211 g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the operation receiving portion 242 a The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper bowl removing unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the head. Further, in the state in which the upper plate ball removing slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242 b protrudes rearward of the rear base 241, and the operation of the ball removing member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface. The rod 143c is in contact.

  The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper countersunk slider 242, and urges the upper counterslider 242 upward. Therefore, the slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by opposing the urging force of the spring 243.

  The unit for removing the ball from the upper ball 230 and the unit after removing the ball from the upper ball 240 are positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the slider for the upper ball from the ball is removed. The upper ball removing button 222 is positioned at the moving end upward through the front slider 232 in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. In addition, since the upper countersunk ball removing slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c abutting on the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition 143a of the ball removing member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b to partition between them.

  Accordingly, in a state where the upper plate ball removing button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and are sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving portion 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 through the entrance 141a and the ball feed member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper disc removing button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper disc removing slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the operation of the upper disc removing slider 242 is performed. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball removing member 143 rotates by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removing member 143, and the partitioning portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. Thereby, the game ball B which has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b opened below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball ejection guide path 241c, and is then lowered from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. The game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the plate 202 and is discharged into the lower plate 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper tray removing button 222 is released, the upper tray removing slider 242 is moved upward by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is removed via the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball pullout button 222 is raised, the ball pullout member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c abutting on the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the partition 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball dropout 141b. It will return to the original state.

  In this manner, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is sent to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feed unit 140 by the unit for removing the upper plate ball 230 and the unit for removing the upper plate ball 240, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 322 to 325 and the like. FIG. 322 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 323 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 324 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 325 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has the lower dish 202, is attached to the front of the dish base unit 210, and has the effect operation unit 300 attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower part of the front of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish 202, and a dish unit base 251 covering the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252 attached to the front of the 211, a lower dish emptying unit 260 attached to the lower face of the lower dish main body 251, and a dish attached to the upper part of the front of the dish unit main body 252 with a space left and right. The upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275, and the lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit attached below the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252, respectively. 285.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 322 to 325 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that extends left and right and that is open at the top and rear. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a lower left portion of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 from the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

  The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in plan view and extends left and right, and a front end on the left side from the center in the left and right direction projects forward from the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball hole 202a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the right front end in plan view. The lower plate main body 251 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate hole 202a. The lower bowl removing hole 202a is openably and closably closed by a lower bowl removing unit 265.

  The lower plate main body 251 is in a state where the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252 in a state where the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250. In addition, when the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball hole 202a supplies the lower plate ball. It is located in front of the mouth 211c. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 322 to 325 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front of the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210, and decorates the front of the plate unit 200. The plate unit body 252 protrudes so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and protrudes forward on the left side in the left-right direction on the lower side. The upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape opened rearward.

  The plate unit main body 252 bulges forward from the left and right ends to the center in the left and right direction at the upper part and extends downward and is separated to the left and right. Has a lower front decorative portion 252b bulging forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251; and a bottom plate portion 252c extending rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. .

  The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with an open rear, and have a dish upper left decoration unit 270, a dish lower left decoration unit 280, a dish upper right decoration unit 275, and a dish lower right decoration unit on the front surface, respectively. 285 are attached. The right side of the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower end of the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  The plate unit main body 252 has a lower plate opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging portion 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows a player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed such that the top and bottom become wider toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending forward and backward by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

  Further, the plate unit body 252 includes a front notch 252e cut out upward from a lower front end of a portion of the lower front decorative portion 252b covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. And a bottom notch 252f which is cut out at a portion below the bottom. In the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f, the lower tray removing unit 260 is inserted.

  Further, the plate unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and has a handle insertion opening 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion opening 252g. The effect operation unit is formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b back and forth and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side swelling portions 252a that are located at the center in the left-right direction. And a production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which the attachment 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width that is approximately １ ／ of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

  The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the plate base unit 210 when assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. . Further, in a state where the lower plate removing unit 260 is assembled with the lower plate removing unit 260, the lower plate removing button 260 of the lower unit removing unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate removing base 260 of the lower unit removing unit 260 is attached. The bottom notch 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are on the same plane.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate empty unit]
The lower bowl removing unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 322 to 325 and the like. The lower dish ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower dish ball extracting hole 202 a, the game balls B are stored in the lower dish 202 or the game balls B are discharged from the lower dish 202. It is to make it.

  The lower plate removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and has a plate-like lower plate removing base 261 having a through hole vertically penetrating at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower plate removing unit 261. A slider 262 mounted on the upper surface side of the base 261 so as to be slidable forward and backward, a lower counter ball removal button 263 mounted on a front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 for urging the slider 262 forward; The slider 262 is provided with a lower ball removing cover 265 that opens and closes a through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower ball removing cover 265 through the slider 262 in an open state.

  The lower plate empty base 261 is formed in a size to close the bottom cutout 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and is vertically moved to a position corresponding to the lower plate empty hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (lower plate main body 251). A penetrating through hole is formed. The through hole of the lower bowl removing hole 261 is formed in the same size as the lower bowl removing hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-back direction, and is slidably mounted in the left-right center of the lower dish removal base 261 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that protrudes upward in a columnar shape.

  The lower ball removing cover 265 is attached to the lower ball removing base 261 at a position on the left side of the slider 262 at a position on the left side of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically. And the right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower bowl removing lid 265 is formed with a left-right extending slit into which the protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  In the state where the lower dish removing unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish removing base 261 closes the bottom cutout 252f of the dish unit main body 252, and the lower face of the lower dish removing base 261 is closed. It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit main body 252. In the lower tray removing unit 260, in a normal state, the slider 262 is located at the front moving end by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower tray removing lid 265 is located immediately above the through hole. And the through hole (lower countersunk ball hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower bowl 202 is closed by the lower bowl removing lid 265, and the lower bowl 202 can store the game ball B. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower bowl removing button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

  In a normal state, when the lower counter button 263 is pressed rearward to move rearward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower counter button 263. Becomes When the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower bowl removing lid 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower bowl removing lid 265 centers on the left end side and the right end side moves backward. It turns in the moving direction. Then, the right end side of the lower dish ball removing cover 265 located immediately above the through hole moves rearward from the position of the through hole, whereby the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removing hole 202a is opened. The game balls B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate hole 202a.

  When the slider 262 is moved rearward by the pressing of the lower plate removing button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower plate removing button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the urging force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower bowl removing lid 265 is kept rotating backward, the lower bowl removing hole 202a is kept open, and the game balls B in the lower bowl 202 are continuously connected. It can be discharged downward.

  To close the lower bowl removing hole 202a from this state, when the lower bowl removing button 263, which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b, is pressed backward, the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. You. Then, when the pressing of the lower ball removing button 263 is released, the slider 262 is moved forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower ball removing button 263 is returned to a state in which it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower countersunk ball cover 265 rotates and the right end side is located immediately above the through-hole, and the lower countersunk ball hole 202a is closed by the lower countersunk ball cover 265. Thereby, the game balls B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decorative unit and plate upper right decorative unit]
The upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 322 to 325 and the like. The upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper front side of the upper side bulging portion 252 a of the dish unit main body 252. The upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 above the dish unit 200.

  The upper left dish decoration unit 270 has a semi-cylindrical shape, extends left and right and has a translucent upper left dish decoration 271, an upper left dish reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the upper left dish decoration 271, And a dish upper left decorative board 273 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on its front surface.

  The upper left dish 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper left decorative body 271 has a shape in which a semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end, and a central axis extending left and right at the right end, and the half cylinder is twisted. Is formed. The upper left decorative body 271 is formed in milky white.

  The upper left dish reflector 272 is inserted from the rear inside the upper left decorative body 271, and a through-hole is formed in a portion of the upper left dish substrate 273 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper left decorative board 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish upper left decorative body 271 can be made to emit light.

  The upper left plate decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. And is continuous. Since the upper left dish decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction in the upper left dish decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper left decoration board 273 emit light, the entire front of the upper left dish decoration 271 is illuminated. Light emission decoration can be performed substantially uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The plate upper right decorative unit 275 is a semi-cylindrical shape, extends right and left, and has a translucent plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the plate upper right decorative body 276, and And a dish upper right decorative board 278 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side.

  The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a shape in which a semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending obliquely right and upper at the right end, and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the half cylinder is twisted. Is formed. The dish upper right decorative body 276 is formed in milky white.

  The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper right decorative board 278 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decorative board 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish upper right decorative body 276 can be made to emit light.

  The dish upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. And is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decorative board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is illuminated. Light emission decoration can be performed substantially uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 partially protrude upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a in the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250 when assembled in the door frame 3. The upper left side decorative unit 270 and the upper right side decorative unit 275 side of the upper side bulging portion 252a can form a step. Thus, the player can hook his / her finger using the step between the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game balls B in the upper plate 201 are evenly distributed. It can be used as a fingerhold when performing, or operating the effect operation unit 301 described later. In addition, due to the steps between the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, it is possible to prevent the game balls B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5d-5. Bottom left dish decoration unit and bottom right dish decoration unit]
The lower left dish decoration unit 280 and the lower right dish decoration unit 285 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 322 to 325 and the like. The lower plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front side of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. Can be The lower left dish decoration unit 280 and the lower right dish decoration unit 285 cooperate with the upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the dish unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

  The lower left dish decoration unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape, extends left and right, and has a translucent lower dish decoration 281, a lower left dish reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left dish decoration 281, A lower left dish decoration board 283 mounted on the rear side of the lower dish reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front.

  The lower left dish decoration 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. Is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. In the lower left dish decoration 281, a semicircular arc bulging forward with a smaller radius than the upper left decoration 271 and the upper right decoration 276 has a central axis extending slightly obliquely to the upper left rear at the left end, and a center at the right end. The shaft extends left and right, and is formed in a shape such that a half cylinder is bent. The lower left corner of the dish 281 has a spherical shape at the left end. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the lower left decorative plate 281 becomes thinner toward the left end. The lower left decoration 281 is formed in milky white.

  The lower left dish reflector 282 is inserted from the rear inside the lower left decorative body 281, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the lower left decorative board 283 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left dish decoration board 283 are full-color LEDs, and the lower left decoration body 281 can be made to emit light by emitting light.

  The lower left dish decoration unit 280 is located on the lower left side of the upper left dish decoration unit 270 in a state where the lower left decoration unit 280 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end of the lower left dish decoration unit 312 b of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300 is located. It is continuous with the left end. In the lower left dish decoration unit 280, the left end of the lower left decoration body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the left end appears to be sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower left dish decoration unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decoration piece 281 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower left decoration board 283 emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decoration piece 281 is illuminated. Light emission decoration can be performed substantially uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The lower right decoration unit 285 is a semi-cylindrical shape, extends right and left, and has a translucent lower right decoration 286 and a lower right lower dish attached to the rear side of the lower right decoration 286. It comprises a reflector 287 and a lower right decorative plate 288 mounted on the rear side of the lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  The dish lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as going from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the right upper side bulge 252a. The lower right dish decoration 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left decoration 271 and the upper right decoration 276. The central axis extends left and right, and is formed in a shape such that a half cylinder is bent. The right lower end of the dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the lower right decoration 286 becomes thinner toward the right end. The lower right decoration 286 is formed in milky white.

  The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted from the rear inside the dish lower right decorative body 286, and a through hole is formed in a part of the dish lower right decorative board 288 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right decoration plate 288 are full-color LEDs, and the lower right decoration body 286 can be illuminated by emitting light.

  The dish lower right decorative unit 285 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is located below the right end of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, and the left end is the dish center lower decorative body 312 b of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous with the right end of In the lower right dish decoration unit 285, the right end of the lower right decoration body 286 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the right end appears to be sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower right dish decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the lower right decoration piece 286 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the lower right decoration board 288 emit light, the lower right decoration body 286 The entire front surface can be almost uniformly illuminated and decorated, and it can be seen that the fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of staging operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 326 to 329 and the like. FIG. 326 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as viewed from the direction in which the effect operation button moves forward and backward. FIG. 327 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 327 is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 328 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 329 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. The effect operation unit 300 is provided at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200, decorates the plate unit 200, and, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates and participates in the effect. Is what you can do. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player. The rendering operation unit 301 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about に 対 し て of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. . The pressing operation unit 303 is disposed at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a center pressing operation unit 303 a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, and an outer periphery of the center pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operation unit 302. And an annular outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b disposed between the inner periphery and the inner periphery.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotating operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330 An operating ring transmission gear 350 for transmitting rotation to and from the portion 302 and a gear mounting member 351 for rotatably mounting the operating ring transmission gear 350 to the operating section base 320 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330 and has a plurality of effect operation ring decoration substrates 352 and effect operation ring decoration substrates 352. The decoration board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the display unit, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit facing the inside of the effect operation ring 330. An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 328 and FIG. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left and right direction of the dish unit 200. The production operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape with the upper part and the rear part opened.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is depressed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 attached to the upper front end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulging forward, A dish center upper reflector 313 attached from the rear inside the dish center decoration body 312a of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center reflector 313 and capable of irradiating light forward are mounted. The dish center upper decorative board 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 attached from the rear inside the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the front light And a decorative board 316 below the center of the dish on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating the LED are mounted.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape that bulges downward at the front side from the center rearward in the front-rear direction, and the rear side of the unit lower cover 311 is a production operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252. 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state such that an axis perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed on an upper end edge extending in a front semicircular shape is located forward as it goes upward. In the present embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a formed at the lowest part when assembled to the dish unit 200.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular shape whose front view is bulged forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and is formed on the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a dish center upper decorative body 312a in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends along a front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a forward part below the dish center upper decorative body 312a. A lower plate center decoration 312b in which the protruding semi-arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semi-arc shape. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312 b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

  The plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by halving a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius), and extending in a semi-arc shape with the split surface toward the center. It is formed in a shape bent as described above. The lower plate center decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the plate center upper decoration 312a, and the plate center lower decoration 312b has a slightly smaller thickness than the plate center upper decoration 312a. Is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. In addition, when assembled to the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish upper decorative body 312a are respectively continuous with the right end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, and the dish center lower decorative body The left and right ends of 312b are respectively connected to the right end of the lower left decorative unit 280 and the left end of the lower right decorative unit 285. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is formed in milky white.

  The unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and its front end is the front end of the door frame 3. The distance from the front of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is equal to the door frame. The distance is about の of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular shape bulging forward, and is inserted from the rear into the dish center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 and attached thereto. The dish center reflector 313 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center decoration board 314 from leaking rearward (inward). The dish center decoration board 314 is formed in a semicircular shape along the dish center decoration body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center decoration board 314 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center decoration body 312a can be made to emit light by emitting light.

  The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular shape bulging forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312. The dish bottom reflector 315 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish bottom decorative board 316 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and has a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 are full-color LEDs, and the light emitting decoration of the dish center lower decorative body 312b can be performed by emitting light.

  Since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the semi-circular shape of the upper plate decoration 312a and the lower plate decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312, When the LED of the upper center decorative board 314 and the LED of the lower plate center decorative board 316 emit light, the whole of them can be made to emit light almost uniformly, and it can be seen that the fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 has a front end protruding farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 when assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the plate center upper decorative body 312a is continuous with the plate upper left decorative body 271 and the plate upper right decorative body 276, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is the plate lower left decorative body 281 and the plate right. It is continuous with the lower decorative body 286. As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by integral decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 328 and FIG. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the effect operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is the effect operation unit mounting of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape whose upper part is opened.

  The operation unit base 320 has a substantially cubic box-shaped outer shape, and a main body 321 whose upper part is open, and extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer periphery. Flange portion 322, a plurality of (here, four) legs 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper mounting portion formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and mounted to the dish base unit 210. A portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that opens upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. The main body 321 has a vibration speaker 354 attached to the bottom wall from below, and a portion of the lower surface where the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, and can amplify the vibration and convert the vibration into sound such as voice or music and output the sound. it can.

  The leg 361b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body 321. In the main body 321, a through hole for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321 is formed on the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the main body 321, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

  The outer diameter of the flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter substantially coincident with the inner circumference of the upper plate center decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the decoration substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear mounting member to mount the operation ring transmission gear rotatably around an axis extending left and right. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 projects upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has a flange portion. 322 is exposed outside.

  When the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in a state where the vibration speaker 354 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to a lower surface of the main body 321.

[3-5e-3. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 330 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 330 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from the lower front. FIG. 331 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 331 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by a player. The effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation section 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) approximately twice as large as the dimension in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and an inner diameter of approximately 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

  The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring mounting base 331 mounted on the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation section base 320, an annular rotating base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring mounting base 331, and a rotating base. A plurality of bushes 333 which are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the shaft 332 and are rotatably mounted around an axis which extends vertically to the ring mounting base 331, and which are mounted on the ring mounting base 331 to move the rotary base 332 upward. And a restricting ring retaining member 334.

  The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to a lower outer ring cover 335 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and a lower side of the outer ring cover 335. The outer ring lower cover 336 forming a part of the rotary operation unit 302 and the inner peripheral side of the ring outer upper cover 335 are mounted on the upper surface of the rotary base 332 to form a part of the rotary operation unit 302. And a ring inner cover 337. The outer ring upper cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 are each formed in a translucent annular shape.

  The outer diameter of the ring mounting base 331 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and the inner diameter is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is separated from the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge on which the rotating base 332 is mounted so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction, in the outer circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. And a boss 331b for cylindrically protruding upward from a plurality of (four in this case) portions for rotatably mounting the bush 333 and a circumferentially spaced outer side than the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. And a through hole 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of portions. The plurality of through-holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs on the effect operation ring decorative board 352.

  The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring attachment base 331, and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring attachment base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332a protruding downward from the lower surface and extending in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the rendering operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state where the ring gear 332a is assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a three-dimensional shape on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which a circular arc constituting the outer and upper part of the circle extends in an annular shape. And a plurality of outer upper cover attachment portions 335c extending downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extending to the center side and arranged in the circumferential direction. I have. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc of a quarter of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative part 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attachment portion 335c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a, and is attached to the upper surface of the rotating base 332.

  The ring outer lower cover 336 includes an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc forming an outer and lower portion of a circle extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of circumferentially projecting upper and lower portions protruding from the inside of the outer lower surface portion 336a. And an outer lower cover mounting portion 336b arranged. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

  The ring inner cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc forming an inner and upper part of a circle extends in an annular shape, and a tube extending downward from an inner end of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel with the central axis. A cylindrical surface portion 337b and an inner cover mounting portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which a circular arc extending in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner surface 337 b has the same cylindrical inner diameter as the rotary base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The outer upper cover 335, the outer lower cover 336, and the inner cover 337 are assembled to the rendering operation ring 330, and the outer upper surface 335a, the outer lower surface 336a, and the inner surface 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion of a half or more of a circle, and the entire portion has a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotary drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 332 to 334 and the like. FIG. 332 (a) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 332 (b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 333 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the front right, and FIG. 334 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation axis projects leftward. A drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342; a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343; and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. The gear cover 345, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably mounted in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and are covered from the left side of the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345. 346.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left.

  The rotation drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. I have. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detecting gear member 345 has a larger diameter (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) than the transmission gear 344, and a leftward protruding portion from the left side of the gear portion 345a. A plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detecting pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval apart in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detecting pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals different from integral multiples of the intervals of the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Accordingly, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them detects the detection piece 345b first. It has become. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

  When the rotation drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper part of the gear part 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed part of the gear part 345a is the drive side gear part 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Meshes with In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 is located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 as a whole in a state where the rotation drive unit 340 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotation drive unit 340 drives the operation ring drive motor 342 to drive the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 through the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear. Can be rotated in the direction of. In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 causes the drive gear 343 to repeat forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined rotation angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342, thereby causing the rotary operation unit 302 to reciprocate and vibrate. it can.

  In addition, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the rotation drive unit 340 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring drive is performed in the same rotation direction as the rotated operation. By driving the motor 342, the rotation operation of the player can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling or a click feeling according to the content of the player participation type effect.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operating ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 328 and 329 and the like. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and the gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing 325.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is a bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and rotates integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a to detect transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. And a drive-side gear portion 350b in the form of a spur gear meshing with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring gear 350a and the drive gear 350b have the same pitch circle diameter. The bevel gear ring side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 such that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 from above and the gear attachment member 351 being attached to the operation portion base 320. Can be

  When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring gear 350a is meshed with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the drive gear 350b is The transmission drive gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 meshes with the gear 345a. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and also controls the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Directional operation ring decorative board]
The effect operation ring decorative board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 328 and FIG. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be light-emitting decorated by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which the ring is divided into front and rear, and is composed of a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. On each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b, a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row along the outer periphery. The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are full-color LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decorative board 352 is located below the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state where the effect operation ring decorative board 352 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a decorative substrate cover 353 having a transparent upper side. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed in a form divided into front and rear similarly to the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352 a from the upper side and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and passes through the decoration substrate cover 353 and the through-hole 331c of the ring attachment base 331 to form the rotation operation portion 302 on the outside of the ring. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be illuminated from inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration in which the LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 328 and FIG. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. It is.

  The vibration speaker 354 can output sound (sound) such as voice or music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a vibration plate. In addition, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire production operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device in which an eccentric weight is rotated by a motor, and can present a wider variety of effects to a player.

[3-5e-8. Direction operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 335 to 337 and the like. FIG. 335 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 336 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as exploded from the lower front. FIG. 337A is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lowered position, and FIG. 337B is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

  The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery, and is arranged symmetrically with a button unit base 361 attached in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and a center axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward and in a columnar shape, and a disc-shaped connecting the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 to each other and having a circular outer shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is mounted between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. The disc-shaped lifting base 364 and a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted respectively. It includes a pair of lift springs 365, the a and elevating base 364 is being biased upward.

  The effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 extending upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a columnar shape and having an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation axis on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button elevating drive motor 367 mounted to protrude upward, the spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368 mounted on the rotating shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-like driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevating cam drive gear member rotatably mounted by being rotated by the driven gear 369 so that the central shaft 366 is inserted therethrough. 370, the lower and upper cam drive gear member 370 are connected to the lower end, and the central shaft The elevating cam member 371 which is rotatably mounted and rotatably attached to the elevating base member 364, and the elevating driving gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam driving gear member 370 are covered from above. And a disc-shaped gear cover 372 mounted on the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Furthermore, the production operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted above the elevating base 364 so as to be movable vertically by a pair of guide shafts 362. Center button body 373, a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the center button body 373 and the elevating base 364 and urging the center button body 373 upward, and substantially the same as the center button body 373. A central button cover 375, which is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having a closed upper end with a diameter and is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover above the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. And a center button decoration board 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the center button main body 373 and the center button cover 375 constitute a center pressing operation section 303a.

  The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion of the upper surface of the elevating base 364 outside the center button main body 373 and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and an outer peripheral portion. An outer peripheral board cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and the outer periphery of the central button body 373, and a portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 which covers the outer periphery of the central button body 373. A cylindrical outer decorative lens 379 having a three-dimensional decoration and disposed on the outer peripheral side and above the outer peripheral button decorative board 377, and ascending and descending so as to cover the outer peripheral and upper surfaces of the outer decorative lens 379. A transparent outer peripheral button attached to the base 364 with the central button cover 375 facing upward at the center Is provided with a bar 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b.

  Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. The pressing detection sensor 381 is attached to the button unit base 361. An elevation detection sensor 382 that detects the elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a and a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The outer diameter of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lifting / lowering cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 mounted on the upper surface, and a pressing detection sensor 381 and a lifting detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is attached. The button unit base 361 has the lower end of the leg 361 b attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are mounted on the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 forward and backward from the center, respectively, at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and the lower ends thereof are in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361, and the upper ends are in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

  The elevating base 364 has an outer diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which the pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b vertically penetrating at the center so as to allow the elevating cam member 371 to pass therethrough. An upright wall portion 364c that protrudes upward from the periphery of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d that project toward the inside of the central hole 364b near the lower end of the upright wall portion 364c. I have. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are rotatably mounted around the axis.

  The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be able to move up and down in a vertical direction by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into a pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 has a space in which the bottom part 373b of the center button body 373 can move between the upper base 363 and the upper part 363, while the upper end of the upright wall part 364c abuts on the upper base 363. Has formed. Further, the lifting base 364 is moved up and down by a pair of guide pins 364 d being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the lifting cam member 371.

  The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to a lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. And an elevation detecting piece 370c which is cylindrically protruded downwardly from and is notched at two locations facing each other, and is detected by an elevation detecting sensor 382. The lifting cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably mounted by inserting a central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably mounted by inserting a central shaft 366 at the center. The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar shape and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the lifting base 364.

  The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis, a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from an end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 337). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

  In addition, the lifting cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the lifting cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

  The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed as follows. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the cam portion 371a guides the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 to move the elevating base 364 up and down.

  The central button body 373 has a cylindrical tubular portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tubular portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts penetrating the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which the 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the upright wall 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom 373b. It includes a pressing detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b in a columnar shape and are inserted into the button spring 374.

  The center button body 373 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a cylindrical portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button main body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a protrudes above the upper base 363. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends shortly downward, and its lower end abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364, whereby the downward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the center button main body 373.

  The center button body 373 is urged upward by a pair of button springs 374 into which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that the lower ends extend downward through the elevating base 364, and the lower ends are attached with screws into which washers are inserted. When the washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f contacts the lower surface of the elevating base 364, the upward movement of the center button main body 373 is restricted.

  The pressing detection piece 373 e of the center button body 373 is moved up and down when the bottom 373 b (lower end of the center opening 373 d) of the center button body 373 comes into contact with the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. 364 is formed so as to penetrate downward. The center button body 373 is formed opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a smaller urging force than the lifting spring 365.

  The center button cover 375 includes a disc-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tube portion 373a of the center button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided so as to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. In the center button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375 b is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373 a of the center button body 373.

  A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the center button decoration board 376 are full color LEDs. The center button decoration board 376 can cause the center button cover 375 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the outer periphery button decoration board 377 are full color LEDs. The outer peripheral button decoration board 377 can make the outer peripheral decorative lens 379 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers an upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular board section 378 a is extended from the inner periphery of the board section 378 a in a cylindrical shape. A cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparent.

  In the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction upward are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is mounted on the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 above the substrate portion 378a. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a covering the outer periphery of the outer decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b extending from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a to the center. In the outer peripheral button cover 380, the lower end of the cylindrical portion 380a is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular portion 380b has an inner diameter substantially the same size as the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  When the effect operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. 337 (a), the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364 are moved in a state where the elevating base 364 is urged upward by a pair of elevating springs 365. The lifting cam member 371 is inserted from below into a locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in a lowered position in which the elevating base 364 has moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. In this state, the center button main body 373 is located at the upper moving end by the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the center button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

  Therefore, in the state assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrude upward (see FIG. 338 and the like).

  In this state (the state of FIG. 337 (a)), when the center button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward to move downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button body 373 is pressed. Is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation section 303a is detected. When the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the center button cover 375 has a height substantially coincident with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 340 (c)).

  Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the center button main body 373 is pressed. There is no detection by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  In this lowered position, when the elevating drive gear 368 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the elevating cam drive is driven via the driven gear 369 meshed with the elevating drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the lifting cam member 371 connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. 337 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves from the locking portion 371c to the fourth position. Rolling to the left part of the locking portion 371c of the one cam 371b, the lifting base 364 moves downward via the guide pin 364d against the urging force of the lifting spring 365.

  Then, when the guide pin 364d that relatively rolls leftward along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d by the urging force of the elevating spring 365. At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises to the state of the ascending position.

  In the state of the ascending position, as shown in FIG. 337 (b), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the operation of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the state of the ascending position, the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevating base 364 is restricted. In the state of the ascending position, the positional relationship between the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the time of the lowering position is maintained. In addition, the entire pressing operation portion 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 has moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has protruded above the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  If the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved to the ascending position in a state where they are assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are projected more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (FIG. reference).

  When the center button cover 375 (the center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in the state of the raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 are attached to the button spring 374. The central button body 373 moves downward against the force and comes into contact with the lifting base 364. When the center button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373 e of the center button body 373 protrudes below the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is connected to the button unit base 361. , The pressing detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

  When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward by a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374, After the center button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the lifting base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, and the lower end of the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and together with the elevating base 364, the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b) is also in the lowered position.

  As described above, when the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361 in a state where the center button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 projecting downward from the lifting base 364. Is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and pressing of the center button cover 375 (the center pressing operation unit 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b) is pressed downward by a force greater than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the state of the ascending position, the elevating base 364 is moved via the outer peripheral button cover 380 to the elevating spring. It moves downward against the urging force of 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the elevating base 364 are in the lowered position. However, since the center button cover 375 (central pressing operation part 303a) projects upward by the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button body The pressing detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the elevating base 364, and the pressing detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation section 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 rotates the elevating cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in plan view. When this is done, in FIG. 337 (b), the third cam 371e in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves rightward (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevating base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d is moved to the first cam. Rolls along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c depressed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the original lowering position is restored.

[3-5e-9. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 328 and FIG. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to a rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 mounted on the rear surface of the main body section 321 of the operation section base 320, and an operation section relay board 392 mounted in the board box 391.

  The substrate box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled to the rendering operation unit 300. The operation section relay board 392 includes a dish center upper decoration board 314, a dish center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, an effect operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the center button decoration board 376, the outer periphery button decoration board 377, the press detection sensor 381, and the elevation detection sensor 382, and the connection between the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 and the relay. I have.

[3-5e-10. Operation of the production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 338 to 340 and the like. FIG. 338 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the rendering operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the rendering operation unit. FIG. 339 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 340 (a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 340 (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is at the raised position, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the plate unit when the operation unit is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 includes a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 includes a cylindrical center pressing operation unit 303a located at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and an annular outer circumference pressing operation unit disposed between the center pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. 303b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the outer ring upper cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The center pressing operation unit 303a is formed by the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer pressing unit 303b is formed by the outer button cover 380 and the outer substrate cover 378.

  The production operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in a state where the front side of a virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the circular rotation operation unit 302 (production operation ring 330) is inclined to be lower. Accordingly, the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion 303 disposed in the ring of the rotary operation portion 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). .

  In the effect operation unit 300, in a normal state, the pressing operation unit 303 projects slightly upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. More specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 338 and the like).

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. Rotates in the clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation ring 330 rotates counterclockwise in the plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and can rotate and reciprocate the rotary operation unit 302 by repeating forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined rotation angle range. This vibration is different from the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotary operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by a player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated clockwise in the left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and is rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in left side view. The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b with the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the interval between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 that are separated in the circumferential direction is different from the interval between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , The interval is not an integral multiple. Thus, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

  In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in a left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. I do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the left side, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b of the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  Thus, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is driven to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be made heavy or a click feeling can be given.

  The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by the outer ring upper cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which a half or more arc of a circle extends annularly. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. And, as shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, and thus is formed in a shape that is easy to grasp by a player's hand. .

  This allows the player to touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated in a manner that the player can easily perform. Sex is raised. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can perform a rotation operation even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the lower position or the upper position. In addition, since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

  As shown in FIG. 339, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape below the effect operation ring 330. Thus, by turning on the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be light-embellished. Further, in the effect operation ring decoration board 352, a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, so that the plurality of LEDs arranged in order are rotated in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating can be made to emit light. Thereby, it is possible to give an illusion to a player as if an LED (decorative board) is provided in the rotating operation unit 302 that rotates.

  In the effect operation unit 300, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 340 (a), the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in the state of the descending position that projects slightly upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the center pressing operation unit 303a of the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the center pressing operation unit 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380). Pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

  In the normal (down position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b of the pressing operation section 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b (the outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressing detection is performed. No pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

  In a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 causes the pressing operation portion 303 to vigorously protrude upward together with the elevating base 364 to a state of the ascending position (see FIG. 340 (b)). In the state of the raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above the upper surface of the rotating operation unit 302. In other words, the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upward more than the upper surface of the rendering operation ring 330.

  When the center operation unit 303a is pressed downward in the state where the operation unit 303 is in the raised position, first, the center operation unit 303a moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the center operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressing detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressing. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operating portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b It will be in the state of substantially the same height as the upper surface (see FIG. 340 (c)). In this state, the pressing detection sensor 381 detects pressing.

  Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b is pressed downward in a state where the pressing operation section 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation section 303a is projected upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b. The outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is substantially at the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (see FIG. 340 (a)). . In this state, the pressing detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressing.

  As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to press the center pressing operation unit 303a firmly, and thus, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the production operation unit 301 in the player participation type production. , It is possible to further entertain the player-participating type production.

  Note that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the rotation operation is facilitated by the player using the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the rotation operation is difficult due to the pressing operation unit 303 becoming a hindrance. As a result, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 341 to 343. FIG. 341 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 341 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 342 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 343 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is mounted on the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outside of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 includes a door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame left side base 401 attached to the front surface of the door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decorative board 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402, And a door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

  The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape extending vertically and opening forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and includes a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 are full color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 can emit and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a penetrating front and rear at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative board 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a translucent milky white. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. Thereby, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the upper left dish decoration 271 of the upper left dish decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. 453 is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 344 to 346. FIG. 344 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 344 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 345 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 346 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right side of the front of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outside of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 in a flat plate shape, and penetrates in the left-right direction. And a plurality of decorative portions 410b inside the side window capable of emitting light, which are arranged in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult for the pachinko machine 1 where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to obscure the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine disposed on the right side, and the player playing with the right pachinko machine. Thus, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 difficult to see, and to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window decoration member 412 attached to the front surface and having a plurality of side window decoration portions 410b extending cylindrically forward and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on portions corresponding to the in-window decorative portion 410b, and a plurality of side-window decorative portion decorative substrates 413 mounted on the front side of the door frame right side base 411, and a plurality of side-window decorative members 412 are provided. And internal reflectors 414 inserted into the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is disposed on the front side of the front end of the side window interior decoration member 412 and extends up and down, and is attached to the door frame right side base 411. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and that has a through hole 416a that penetrates in the left and right direction and forms a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411, and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical and front and rear directions so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. Frame that has a through-hole 417a that extends in the shape and penetrates in the left-right direction and forms a side window 410a. A side panel 417, and a.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 and covers the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted and the front side of the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape extending vertically and opening rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality (three in this case) of side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The decorative portion 410b in the side window of the decorative member 412 in the side window has a front end side formed in a truncated conical cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than a rear end side, and a front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The decorative member 412 in the side window is attached to a portion of the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame from a position lower than the center in the vertical direction to an upper portion. The side window interior decorative member 412 is formed in a milky white color having a light transmitting property.

  The in-side window decorative portion decorative board 413 is attached to the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 at a position behind the connection base 412a of the in-side window decorative member 412. The plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative portion decorative board 413 in the side window are full-color LEDs. In the side window decorative portion decorative substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a vertical and horizontal cross shape around the axis of the side window decorative portion 410b at a position behind each of the plurality of side window decorative portions 410b. Have been.

  The internal reflector 414 is formed in an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the inside of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, up, down, left, and right.

  The right side reflector 415 extends up and down at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and is formed in a wavy shape such that the shape in the front-rear direction moves forward and then rearward from the upper end to the lower end. Have been. The right side reflector 415 is formed with a plurality of through holes 415a that penetrate back and forth, and in which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative board 418 face forward.

  The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends up and down and front and rear, and has a rear side extending vertically and linearly, and a front side extending wavy along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in an elliptical shape extending vertically, and a front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. The right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed opaque.

  The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame has a flat plate shape and extends up and down and back and forth. The rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends wavy along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in an elliptical shape extending up and down, and a front side of the connection base 412a of the side window decorative member 412 and the door frame. The right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side decorative board 418 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and is composed of a right side upper decorative board 418a and a right side lower decorative board 418b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 418 are full color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 can emit light and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a translucent milky white. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically in a wavy manner along the right side reflector 415. Thereby, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened rearward.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed so that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the upper right decorative plate 276 of the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. The body 453 is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end.

  The door frame right side unit 410, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 419 has a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks embedded. The front side (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy manner so that a ４ portion from the top projects most forward, and is formed in a screen shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration section 410b extending in the front and rear direction within the side window 410a, and emits light from the LED of the side window interior section decoration board 413. Thus, the decorative portion 410b in the side window can be decorated with light. Then, by illuminating the decoration portion 410b inside the side window, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be hardly seen through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the LEDs of the side window decoration unit decorative board 413 for emitting and decorating the plurality of side window decoration units 410b are turned off. The game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the space between the three side window decorations 410b at 410a. Therefore, a player who is searching for the present pachinko machine 1 (the main game board 5) as a pachinko machine for playing does not need to move to the front of the present pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities to easily operate the present pachinko machine 1. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game in the present pachinko machine 1 and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, even if the side window 410a penetrates through the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window interior decoration part 410b can block the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity. The player can make the entire game area 5a hard to see from the player, and make it difficult for the player to feel as if viewed by another player, so that the player can play the game without hesitation. .

  Furthermore, when the three side window decoration portions 410b are made to emit light by the LEDs of the side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the light can make the inside of the side window 410a dazzling and change the visibility through the side window 410a. Let it. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are formed in a columnar shape, light is radiated in a band shape and radially. This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the game area 5a, and makes it difficult for another player, such as an adjacent player, to look inside the game area 5a. As described above, since it is possible to make it difficult for the inside of the game area 5a to be seen, it is possible to prevent another player from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, and therefore, the attention is paid to the other player. You can prevent discomfort from becoming unable to concentrate on the game as a result of being unable to concentrate on the game, and prevent the mood from being lost by inducing mistakes, and make the game more fun by focusing the player on the game In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 347 to 349 and the like. FIG. 347 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, FIG. 347 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the state which carried out. FIG. 348 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 349 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the lower front. The door frame top unit 450 is mounted on the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and covers both left and right sides and the front upper part of the door frame top base 451. , A top frame cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, a door frame top decoration 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, a lower end of the door frame top decoration 453, and the door frame top base 451. And a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the door frame.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front of the top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has a door frame top central decorative board 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a door. A door frame top left decorative board 456 attached to the left of the door frame top center decorative board 455 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and in front of the top upper cover 452, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; A door frame top right decorative board 457 attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front. Have.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a top central reflector 458 disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and a door frame top decoration. A top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front of the top top cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 And a top right reflector 460 attached to the front of the top top cover 452.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached to the central speaker box 461 downward, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 respectively attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. A bottom cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454; a bottom cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top bottom cover 465 from below; Door frame top relay board attached near the upper right end of the base 451 67, includes a door frame top top plate 468 is attached to the top on the cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451, a.

  The door frame top base 451 includes a flat main body 451a extending to the left and right at the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left and right direction, and near the left and right ends on the front surface of the main body 451a. And a front protruding portion 451b protruding forward. The main body 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the center in the left-right direction is located upward so that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101. The left and right front protruding portions 451b are inclined so that the front ends move rearward as the front ends downward, and are formed in a box shape opened rearward. The front protruding portion 451b on the right side in the front view is also opened upward.

  The top upper cover 452 has a shape in front view substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451. The top upper cover 452 covers the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451, and is formed in a shape that connects between the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 has the center in the left-right direction most protruding forward, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and backward from the center in the left-right direction to both ends in the left-right direction. In addition, the top top cover 452 has an opening 452a on the upper surface that is largely cut away from the rear end toward the front. This opening 452a is closed by a door frame top top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in milky white having a light transmitting property. The door frame top decoration body 453 has a form in which the semicircular arc bulging forward becomes smaller in curvature from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top cover 452. Is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened rearward. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. So that it extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction projects downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is spaced apart in the left-right direction, connects the front end and the rear end, and extends vertically between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a. It has a pair of center speaker openings 454b facing the top center speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating vertically at the left and right outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top center decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 can make the center part of the door frame top decorative body 453 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left part of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can make the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and are connected to the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Through holes are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs, respectively.

  The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and is attached so that a pair of top central speakers 462 face downward and forward. The center speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker, and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protruding portions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high range of sound such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having countless through holes. The sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top center decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

  The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively, and form an integral decoration. I have. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice and music to the player side by a pair of top center speakers 462 and a pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 350 and the like. FIG. 350 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending in the vertical direction and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is entirely surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

  A dish upper left decorative body 271, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and a door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape, the player can see a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

  In the door frame 3, a dish upper left decorative body 271, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, and Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, a dish upper left decorative board 273, a dish upper right decorative board 278, a dish center upper decorative board 314, a door frame left side decorative board 402, a door frame right side decorative board 418, a door frame top center decorative Since the board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting LEDs on the decorative boards, A light emission effect can be shown to a player so that light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, on the upper surface, an annular donut-shaped rotary operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 and a coaxial arrangement in the ring of the rotary operation unit 302. A pressing operation portion 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation portion 303a is attached, and a semi-circular arc similar to the rotation operation portion 302 below the rotation operation portion 302. The two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tubular) and large-diameter dish upper decorations 312a and 312b are attached vertically spaced apart from each other at the top and bottom of the dish. The door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side unit 41 of the door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  Thus, in the plate unit 200, the three operation parts 302 and the two upper plate center decorations 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b are vertically arranged with three donut-shaped members. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made more conspicuous.

  Also, the upper left dish decoration 271, the upper right dish decoration 276, and the lower left dish decoration 281, the lower right dish decoration 286, and the lower middle dish decoration 312 b arranged below the upper dish decoration 312 a are cut in half. The thickness of the tube-shaped tube is made slightly thinner, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Thereby, in the effect operation unit 300, since it becomes larger upward from the lower end, the sense of perspective in the vertical direction can be emphasized, and the rotation operation unit 302, which can be operated by the player arranged on the upper side, The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, a donut-shaped rotary operation unit 302 is rotatably mounted on an upper surface of the plate unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be located forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotary operation unit 302 has a front end side. Since the state is inclined so as to be lower, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 faces the direction of the head (face) of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player. The entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made easily visible, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player immediately rotates. The rotation of the operation unit 302 can be performed, and the player's participation-type effects can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the diameter of the rotary operation unit 302 is larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameter of the upper plate decoration 312a and the lower plate decoration 312b is larger than that of the rotary operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotating operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b protrude forward more than the upper plate 201, and the plate center 200 Since the decorative body 312a and the lower plate center decorative body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b can be largely conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 can be improved by the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the pachinko machine 1 is different from the other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and to appeal to the player. And the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 351 to 357. FIG. 351 is a front view of the main frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 352 is a rear view of the main frame of the pachinko machine. 353 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 354 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 355 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the rear. FIG. 356 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 357 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind.

  The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side, and uses the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably mounted on the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall on the upper and lower sides of the front left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a left front view of the main body frame base unit 500. A main frame upper hinge member 510 which is rotatably mounted on the upper frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably mounted to the upper frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3; Main frame lower hinge assembly which is attached to the lower left end of the base unit 500 on the front view and is rotatably mounted to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably mounted. And a solid 520.

  The main body frame 4 is mounted on the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in a front view, and is mounted on the lower front part of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launching device 540 for hitting the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 mounted on the rear side for paying out game balls B to the player side, a board unit 620 mounted on a lower rear portion of the main frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main frame base unit 500 A back cover 640 that is attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable, and covers a rear side of the game board 5; 0 viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The body frame base unit 500 has a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically and a connection cable guide member that guides a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and opened upward in a box shape extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to an upper end of the tank rail 553, The second rail cover 555 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a distance from the one rail cover 554 to the left as viewed from the front, and the tank rail 553 is located at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end, and a ball stopper 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553; It is equipped with a.

  The payout unit 560 is configured to guide the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner downward, and to send the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 that pays out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game balls B that pass through the upper full ball path unit 600 by the door frame 3 side. Or a lower full tank path unit 610 for guiding to the substrate unit 620 side.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked to the outer frame 2, a door frame hook 652 or a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that is urged and urges the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward is provided.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The body frame base unit 500 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 351 to 359 and the like. FIG. 358 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left front corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 358 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left front corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. 359 (a) to (c) are explanatory views showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main frame. The body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted from the front into the frame of the outer frame 2 and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501 and the main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to a lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 in a detachable manner. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a having a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and about ／ of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion opening 501b penetrating the game board 5 from the front side, and a game board forming a lower side of the game board insertion port 501b and having the game board 5 placed thereon. The game device includes a placement section 501c and a game board regulation section 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placement section 501c in the left-right direction and regulates movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rear.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side in front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and has a firing device mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball firing device 540; The cylinder unit 501e penetrates back and forth on the right side in front view of the unit 501e, and the cylinder unit 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and the board unit penetrates back and forth on the lower left side in front view of the game board mounting unit 501c. At 620, a circular speaker opening 501g of the main unit frame 620a of the speaker unit 620a facing the front and a main frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. A cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable mounting recess 501h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 extends rearward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b of the base main body 501a in a plate shape in a plate shape, and a locking unit 650 is attached to a right side surface, and a back cover 640 is provided at a rear end. A rearwardly extending portion 501j rotatably attached and formed near the upper and lower ends on the left end in front view of the rear surface of the base body 501a for attaching the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. And an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

  A game board lock member 505 is attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The game board lock member 505 is capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b can be detached.

  The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right of the speaker opening 501g to a position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable mounting concave portion 501h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and can be rotatably mounted on the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat guide body 502a extending to the left and right, and protrudes forward at both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a and extends to the right from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b protruding, a column-shaped mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b to each other, and penetrating front and rear at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a. And a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in the direction.

  The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting concave portion 501h of the main body frame base 501, and is large enough to be accommodated in the cable mounting concave portion 501h. Is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that the attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis that extends vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Accordingly, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side projects forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of which is the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame auxiliary. Connected to relay board 105.

  Next, the function and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 359 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end (right end) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 in the left and right direction is hingedly mounted on the main body frame base 501 (left side). ) Is rotatably mounted around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. In a state in which the guide body 502a is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a, the left and right directions of a plurality of through holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are changed. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being fastened together with the guide main body 502a by the binding band 504 inserted into the pair of through holes 502d at the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the rear of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main frame 4. (See FIG. 359 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is disposed on the left side of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

  When the hinge is rotated so that the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 in this state, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates around the right end mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 359 (b)).

  The open angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degree when the door frame 3 is closed (the open angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degree). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but stops increasing when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes as follows. In the present embodiment, the maximum angle of the opening angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the connection cable 503 presses the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 rearward. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves backward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction. Can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees. You can add a habit. Accordingly, when the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back by 180 degrees is changed to open by opening the door frame 3, a force for closing the connection cable 503 due to the bending habit acts. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (the connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the fold of the door frame 3, and to prevent the connection cable 503 (the connection cable guide member 502) from moving. The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

  Further, on the side of the door frame 3, the folded connection cable 503 is connected to the cable holder 103 a at a position closer to the center axis (axial center) of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is moved by the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103 a when the door frame 3 is closed. It can be pulled toward the center axis (axial center) of the hinge pin 126 below the door frame.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the center of rotation of the connection cable guide member 502, and is centered on the center axis (axis) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame. An angle at which a tangent to a circle passing through a portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the center axis (axis center) side of the frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 intersects the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503 to close the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503. As the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. In addition, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) as the door frame 3 opens and closes can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on body frame]
The main frame upper hinge member 510 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 356 and 357 and the like. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3 Is mounted on the door frame hinge assembly 120 so as to be rotatable.

  The main frame upper hinge member 510 has an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent downward in an L-shape, and protrudes upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 511 in a columnar shape. And an upper hinge pin 512 that is pivotally supported by the outer hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates vertically on the left side of the main frame upper hinge pin 512 when viewed from the front in a horizontally extending portion, and has an upper hinge hole 511 a for a door frame for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. Have.

  The main frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to an upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is rotatably supported by inserting the body frame upper hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 of the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 such that the body frame 4 can be hinge-rotated. 3 can be mounted so that it can be hinged.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under body frame]
The below-frame hinge assembly 520 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 356 and 357. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 is mounted on the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, and is rotatably mounted on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3. Door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

  The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped material is bent upward in an L-shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of the flat plate-shaped plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L-shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 includes a horizontally extending part of the lower hinge second main body 522 arranged at an interval upward from a horizontally extending part of the lower hinge first main body 521, and a lower part. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 vertically penetrates near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above into the lower door frame lower portion. A hinge hole 522a and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is provided. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  In the main frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Can be The body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can cooperate with the body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame 3 to the body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 356 and 357. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view formed in a U-shape whose right side is opened, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and vertically behind a portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove 530a that is opened to the right and extends vertically on the front side formed in a U-shape with the right side opened in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcement frame 111 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into the groove 530 a. When the left reinforcing frame 111 is inserted into the groove 530a, the gap between the main frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 is in a meandering state in a plan view, and an incorrect tool is inserted from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also passes through the space between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 inside the main body frame 4 (from the left side). The illegal insertion of a tool into the game board 5) is prevented.

[4-5. Ball launching device]
The ball launching device 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 360 and the like. FIG. 360 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 360 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device viewed from the back. The ball launching device 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is mounted on the main body frame 4. 5 for driving into the game area 5a. The ball firing device 540 can hit the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 540 is attached to a flat launch base 541 attached to the launching device attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the firing base 541 on the right side in a front view and rotates. A firing solenoid 542 composed of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a hitting hammer 543 having a base end attached to the rotation axis of the firing solenoid 542, and a vicinity of the tip of the hitting hammer 543. A launch rail 544 attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

  In the ball launching device 540, the game balls B are supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the firing rail 544, and the game balls B are supplied to the upper right end of the firing rail 544. When the handle 182 is turned while the player is in the state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the turning operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting hammer 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hammer 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the firing rail 544, and is hit into the game area 5a.

  In the case where the hit ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the strength of the hit of the game ball B or the like, the firing rail 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) are used. From there, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 361 and the like. FIG. 361 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 361 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit viewed from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L-shape, and is attached to the rear side of the body frame base unit 500.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to a rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the front-rear direction with a substantially constant width in the left and right direction, and a width in the front-rear direction from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front view is substantially the same as the top plate portion and extends downward. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c whose front-rear width is approximately the same width as the top plate portion 551a and extends downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. And a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the rear side to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and extending from the position closer to the front side than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b rightward to the lower end with a substantially constant width. Left back plate portion 551e, inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of left plate portion 551b, and rightward from the front of the lower side of left plate portion 551b. Extends to almost the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e It includes a bottom plate portion 551g and a connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L-shape in a front view, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and inward in the L-shape.

  In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends left and right with a length substantially equal to the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left plate portion 551b has upper and lower sides of the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends up and down with the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left plate portion 551b, and the right plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501.

  The payout base 551 has a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the left back plate portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 protrudes rightward in the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f in a front view, and has a back cover attaching portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a ball tank 552 attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and extending upward and left in a box shape extending left and right, and a portion extending left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward.

  Further, the dispensing base unit 550 is provided at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with a first rail cover 554 attached at an intermediate position in the left-right direction, and at the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a distance from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball retaining member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

  The ball tank 552 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551, and the length in the front-back direction is shorter than the depth in the front-back direction of the top plate 551a. Is formed. The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate 551a at a position closer to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

  The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The tank rail 553 has a shape in plan view in which the depth in the front-rear direction is diagonally left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and is formed to extend straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. An opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with an upper end opening of the guiding passage 570a in the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

  Also, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower at an appropriate angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate 551a such that the rear end of the portion extending straight leftward substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate 551a. The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. Things.

  The ball rectifying member 556 is provided at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with respect to an axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. Mounted rotatably. The ball straightening member 556 includes a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 367). This rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B circulating in the upper and lower stages, and rectifies them so that they flow in a single stage on the downstream side. Even if the height decreases, the ball is not clogged.

  The ball stopping member 557 is slidably mounted on the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view, and is slidable in the left and right direction. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

  Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in a front view on the upper surface of a portion extending right and left of the payout base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall structure of payout unit]
The entire configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 362 and 363 and the like. FIG. 362 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 362 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit viewed from the back. FIG. 363 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 363 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the left back plate portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 and is guided by the ball guiding unit 570. Payout device 580 that pays out the game balls one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout apparatus 580 downward, and an upper full tank path unit And a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the payout device 580 with the game balls B arranged in a line by the tank rail 553. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball ejection passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 580a. The game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, and the upper full tank path unit is operated from the ball discharge path 580b where the ball release lever 593 is operated. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game balls B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B discharged from the ball discharge passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is released from the ball discharge path 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 362 and 363. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

  The ball guiding unit 570 has a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that has a guiding path 570a extending in a meandering shape through which the game balls B can flow and is opened forward, and closes the front side of the guiding unit base 571. A flat guide path front cover 572, a movable piece member 573 that is movable by the game balls B flowing through the guide path 570a, and a game ball B in the guide path 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball-cut detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence or absence of the ball (see FIG. 367).

  In the ball guiding unit 570, the shape of the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding path front lid 572 in a front view is formed in a quadrangular shape extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center of the guide unit base 571 in the height direction, and then bends rightward to guide the vehicle. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning over the width in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571.

  The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front, rear, right and left directions and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B flows. Can be guided in a row.

  In the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached near the upper part so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably mounted around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at the right outer side of the guide passage 570a in front view, and a part of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. It is formed so that. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B abuts on a portion projecting into the guide passage 570a, whereby the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. Becomes

  When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and the movable piece member 573 retreats from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide path 570a.

  In a state where the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570 a is connected to the discharging passage of the discharging device 580. 580a communicates with the upstream end. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding path 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding path 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are provided in the guiding path 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guiding unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, it detects the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 362 to 365 and the like. FIG. 364 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade. FIG. 365A is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and FIG. It is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the rear of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear below the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back plate portion 551e.

  The dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing device main body 581 having a dispensing passage 580a having a box shape opened backward and through which game balls B can flow, and a ball removal passage 580b branching from the middle of the dispensing passage 580a. The dispenser includes a flat plate-shaped dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and opened rearward. ing.

  The dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotation axis protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached thereto, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshed with the drive gear 585, and rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583; A second transmission gear 587 meshing with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583; Between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583 having a spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a and a plurality of detecting pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a. It has a dispensing gear member 588 rotatably mounted, and a plurality of blade pieces 589a that are integrally rotated with the dispensing gear member 588 and protrude into the dispensing passage 580a between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. And a blade rotation detecting sensor 590 attached to the rear side of the dispensing device main body 581 and detecting the detecting piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588.

  Further, the payout device 580 is attached at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582, and detects a game ball B, a payout detection sensor 591, and the payout device main body 581 and the payout device. The ball removal movable piece 592 is attached to the portion that branches off from the payout passage 580a by the lid 582 so that the ball removal passage 580b can be opened and closed, and can be held at the position where the ball removal movable piece 592 closes the ball removal passage 580b. And a ball ejection lever 593 slidably mounted in the up-down direction by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582.

  The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape whose plan view shape extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger rightward in front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 364, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward at a position closer to the left from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end at a position near the right end in the left-right direction in rear view. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper end to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move leftward as it goes downward from the upstream end, and after being bent slightly diagonally rightward from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the dispensing blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after being bent rightward in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the payout blade 589 and the outer periphery thereof. Is formed so as to form a circular arc concentric with the dispensing blade 589, and extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear surface of the dispensing blade 589 in a rear view.

  In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is disposed below the dispensing blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

  The ball passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end of the payout passage 580a and bends rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view, and extends vertically to the bottom in rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

  The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the dispensing passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b are branched and on which the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached. A main-body-side guide wall 581a that projects rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and that is formed so as to be continuous with the left side wall of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b when viewed from the rear. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend rightward in rear view at a height of about 1/3 from above in rear view. It is formed at the left position. The main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed diagonally upward to the left when viewed from the rear, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side wall of the ball passage 580b. The ball-moving movable piece 592 rotates between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a.

  The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right side in the rear view of a portion of the dispensing device main body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are disposed in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered by a dispensing device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat detecting pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The dispensing blade 589 is disposed between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. The dispensing blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends from the upper side in the payout passage 580a toward the rotation axis and then extends rightward in rear view so that the distance between the blade and the side wall of the payout passage is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball B. And protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball housing portion 589b that is recessed by a circular arc having a radius larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b. Thus, the payout blade 589 can restrict the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving downstream of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and also rotates clockwise in rear view. This allows the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b to move to the downstream side.

  The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are attached coaxially and integrally rotatable by a dispensing device rear lid 582 and a dispensing device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is disposed on the left side of the rotation axis of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588 b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

  The ball-moving movable piece 592 has an upper end rotatably mounted on an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is bent in a rectangular shape, and is attached so that the concave side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a. Through the gap between them, it can protrude into the ball ejection passage 580b or retreat outside the ball ejection passage 580b.

  The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side in rear view near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592. The ball pull lever 593 partially projects through the payout device rear lid 582 and projects rearward, and can be slid by operating the projecting portion. By positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the lower end, the lower portion can contact the ball removal movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Further, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 365).

  When the ball removal lever 593 is raised to make the ball removal movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state like a rosary connected upstream of the ball removal movable piece 592, becomes a ball removal movable piece 592. And flows down to the ball removal passage 580b. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight and straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows down straight to the ball removal passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as suppressing the flow of the game ball B like the payout blade 589, so that the game ball B is moved from the payout passage 580a side. Will also flow down quickly.

  As described above, in a state where the ball-moving movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball-pulling passage 580b, so that the ball-moving movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-pulling passage 580b. Game ball B abuts vigorously against the lower end of the payout device, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582. Since it is possible to move outside the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the contacting force causes the ball removal movable piece 592 to move to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball is not sandwiched between the wall of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and a strong force is not applied to the movable ball 592 by the game ball B, and the ball is movable by the collision of the game ball B. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  Because of this, the ball-moving movable piece 592 can be hardly damaged, so that more game balls B can be discharged to the island facility side downstream of the ball-pulling passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

  When the ball-moving movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball-moving movable piece 592 passes through a space between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a at a smaller interval than the game ball B, and the ball removing passage 580b. When the game ball B comes into contact with the ball-moving movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-pulling passage 580b, the ball-moving movable piece 592 moves between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a. When moving outward through the gap, even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592, the game ball B is spaced more than the game ball B. Between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward.

  The movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball-movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the movable pulling piece 592 is based on the inertial force, no strong force acts on the movable ball removing piece 592, and the movable ball removing piece 592 can be hardly damaged, and the main body side guide can be used. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 362 and 363. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached to the payout base unit 550 from the rear below the payout device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a square shape whose front view shape extends vertically.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 with a rear open side, and a box-shaped mount attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and has an open front side. And a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably mounted near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in front view, and includes a back cover attaching portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 opens upward near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a height of about ／ of the total height. The ball receiving passage 600a communicates with the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, extends rightward in a front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from below to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal discharge passage 600c extending downward from the left and right sides of the upper ball storage passage 600b from the center in the left-right direction and opening downward at the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal discharge passage 600c. An upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side in front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward at the lower surface, and near the right end in front view on the upper surface. And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 367).

  On the lower surface of the upper full tank path unit 600, an upper normal discharge passage 600c, an upper full discharge passage 600d, and an upper ball discharge passage 600e are sequentially opened downward from the left side when viewed from the front. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving path 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the payout path 580a in the payout device 580, and The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. As a result, the game balls B released (paid) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 pass through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then pass through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. Is released downward from any of the. Further, the game balls B discharged downward from the ball discharge passage 580b of the payout device 580 are discharged downward through the upper ball discharge passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 362 and 363. The lower full tank path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B discharged downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge path 610b, and a lower ball discharge passage 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 mounted on the upper side of the lower full base 611, and a lower normal dispensing passage 610a mounted on the front end of the lower full base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharge passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. And a closing spring 614 that is biased.

  In the lower full tank path unit 610, a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball discharge passage 610c are arranged in order from the left in front view on the upper surface of a portion extending above the rear end. In this state, the respective upstream ends are open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state where they are arranged side by side, and open forward at the front end of the lower full tank path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the front-rear direction.

  The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably mounted at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is urged in a clockwise direction in a front view by a closing spring 614. In a normal state, the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b have respective front end openings (downstream ends). Opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 includes an operation protrusion 613a that protrudes forward. The operation projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centering on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and as the front end face approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined to protrude forward. The operation protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

  When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout path 610a, the lower full fill payout path 610b, and the lower ball emptying path 610c, which are open upward at the rear upper end, are respectively filled with the upper full tank. It is located immediately below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball discharge passage 600e of the tan ball path unit 600. As a result, the game balls B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flow through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game balls B discharged downward from the upper full payout passage 600d are lower full fill payout passages 610b. , And the game balls B released downward from the upper ball passage 600e flow through the lower ball passage 610c.

  When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610 b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It is open immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b. The downstream end of the lower ball passage 610c is open to face the ball guide portion 627 of the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 that opens to the left.

  In the lower full tank path unit 610, in a normal state (a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 contacts the door opening / closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting on the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b are open, and communicated with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided. Is rotated clockwise in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full fill payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full fill payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Game ball flow in payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball ejection lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball ejection passage 580b branched from the ejection passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. In the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in an open state.

  In the ball tank 552 that is open upward, a predetermined number of balls are detected from the game hall island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the detection of the ball being cut by the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a line by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game balls B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout blades 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay at the upstream side of the payout blades 589. Becomes

  Then, the game ball B in the guiding path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thus, it can be seen that the game balls B are stored in at least the passage from the movable piece member 573 to the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the payout motor 584 causes the payout blade 589 to rotate clockwise in the rear view, the game ball B accommodated in the ball housing portion 589b moves clockwise in the rear view, and the payout blade in the payout passage 580a. It is discharged downstream from 589. Then, the game balls B released from the payout blades 589 (ball storage portion 589b) are sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

  The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 normally passes through the upper ball storage passage 600b and is disposed immediately below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. The game balls B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c pass through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and pass through the plate unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, it becomes impossible to discharge the game balls B forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game ball B paid out from the 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower side of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that is in communication. Then, when the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the inside of the upper normal payout passage 600c is full of the game balls B, the upper normal payout passage 600c enters the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. The game balls B start to stay, and the game balls B start flowing down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

  The game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout path 600d passes through the lower full tank payout path 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and fills the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received. Thereafter, the game balls B received by the full tank receiving port 150b are discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. Thus, when the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game ball B, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  When the lower plate 202 is full with the game balls B and the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further paid out, the lower plate The game balls B are retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is notified that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detection state.

  When discharging the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 from the pachinko machine 1 at the time of maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball ejection lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the lower end position. Slide to the state of the rising end position. Thereafter, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B, and rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a. , And is pushed out of the ball passage 580b. As a result, the game balls B can enter the ball passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game balls B are discharged downward through the ball passage 580b.

  At this time, at the portion of the ball-moving movable piece 592, the falling game ball B abuts more strongly on the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover-side guide wall 582a than the ball-moving movable piece 592. Is hard to break.

  Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball empty passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball empty passage 600e of the upper full ball empty path unit 600 and the lower ball empty passage 610c of the lower full ball empty path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the ejection ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the outside outside (the game hall) of the pachinko machine 1. To the island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 368 to 372 and the like. FIG. 368 (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 368 (b) is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from the back. FIG. 369 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the lower rear. FIG. 370 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 371 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. FIG. 372 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower portion of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to a lower rear portion of the main frame base unit 500.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame that covers a part of the speaker unit 620a from behind. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from behind.

  The speaker unit 620a includes a speaker cover 621 mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board placement portion 501c, and a front side near the left end in front view of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. The main body frame speaker 622 is mounted on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 mounted on the rear side of the speaker cover 621 and opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end in front view, and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed by a plurality of vertically extending slits, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. A space front concave portion 621b that is depressed so as to bulge forward from the rear side on the right side of the view, and protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front concave portion 621b and extends in the left-right direction and diagonally downward toward the rear. And an open connection portion 621c.

  The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs bass sound.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is opened forward, and a portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward. Is formed so that the protrusion of the boss becomes small. As a result, it is possible to secure a sufficient space behind the speaker box 623 on the right side from the center in front view, and to arrange the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connection portion 621c.

  The speaker unit 620a includes the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623, and forms a part of the enclosure 624 that contains the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear. In the enclosure 624, since the space front concave portion 621b bulging forward is formed on the right side of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it goes rightward. Even if it is formed in a step shape so as to reduce the amount, the space to the right of the main frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

  When the main unit frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connection tube portion 43 a so as to sandwich the seal member 48 between the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621, and the rear of the main frame speaker 622. And the inner space 40a of the outer frame 2 communicate with each other. Accordingly, a wide space enclosure 624 can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43 on the rear side of the main frame speaker 622. Can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the front panel 42 of the curtain plate.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to a relatively large depth to the right in front view, and the connection unit 621c and Since the outer frame lower assembly 40 is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear is not attenuated particularly in the bass range, and the lower frame assembly 40 is not attenuated. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted bass range is resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47, and can be radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front panel 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted. The sound radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the 200 resonates so as to amplify the sound, so that even if the body frame speaker 622 has a small diameter, a loud sound with heavy bass can be output.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear heavy bass. Thereby, the sound output from the front surface of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are obtained. This allows the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between a lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess 621b for space is formed in the speaker cover 621, and a speaker box 623 is formed. In addition, a through-tube 623a which extends in a tubular shape in communication with the through-hole 621d and penetrates forward and backward is formed. When assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a communicate with each other and become independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted into the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a.

  The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which the 620c is attached.

  Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B discharged from the lower ball passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610, and is viewed from the front. A ball guide unit 627 that guides the ball to the right, and a discharge ball receiving unit that receives the game ball B discharged upward from the game board 5 and opened upward on the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball guide unit 627. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game ball B having passed through the ball guide unit 627 and the discharged ball receiving unit 628 downward.

  The ball-pulling guide 627 has an upstream end opening leftward at an upper portion of a left side in a front view, and a downstream end opening leftward of the discharged ball receiving portion 628. In the state in which the ball-pulling guide unit 627 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the opening at the upstream end is opposed to the downstream-end opening of the lower ball-pulling passage 610 c of the lower full-ball path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharged ball receiving portion 628.

  The ejection ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends left and right. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 has a left end in front view continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game ball B pulled out from the ball tank 552 or the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in a front view by a ball pull-out guiding unit 627 or a discharged ball receiving unit 628, and Since the air is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a wide space on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having richer bass than a conventional pachinko machine.

  The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631.

  The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (see FIG. 372). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball rental button 224 of the ball rental operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5 or the like. This is for controlling and paying out the designated number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed such that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, thereby increasing the deterrence against illegal acts.

  The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear face of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. And an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

  The board base 634 is attached to the rearmost surface of the speaker box 623, which is the rearmost part of the main frame speaker 622, and most protrudes rearward. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (the body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right of the board base 634 (interface board 635) in front view so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 351 to 357. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 which is inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached thereto. The back cover 640 has a right side in front view attached to a vertically extending rear end of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and a left side thereof is a payout base 551. And the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600.

  The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of the flat plate extending in the up, down, left, and right directions when viewed from the front is bent forward, and in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the rear surface of the back cover 551 d of the payout base 551 is formed. It is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate back and forth and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 373 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 373 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit viewed from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 and locks between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locking units 650 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and engageable with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651, and the door frame depends on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction.

  Further, the lock unit 650 urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, the transmission cylinders 654, and the outer frame unlocking lever 656 move forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501 f of the main body frame base 501, and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted by being engaged with the transmission member 133 and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hooking members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of outside members are provided. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, a plurality of locking units 650 are transmitted through the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In a state where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main frame 4, when the unlocking lever 656 for the outer frame is slid downward, the plurality of hooks 653 for the outer frame move downward, and the outer frame 2 is moved relative to the main frame 4. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip ends of the door frame hooks 652 and the outer frame hooks 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the hook 652 for the door frame and the hook 653 for the outer frame become the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the lower hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25, the lock state is established by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed Configuration of Upper Body Frame]
Subsequently, a detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 374 to 381. FIG. 374 (a) is a plan view of the main frame, and FIG. 374 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. FIG. 375 is an enlarged view showing an upper portion in an enlarged manner in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from behind. FIG. 376 (a) is a perspective view from the upper front in a state where the tank rail and the like are assembled to the ball tank, and FIG. 376 (b) is a perspective view from the lower front in FIG. FIG. 377 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 376 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 378 is an explanatory diagram showing an area in the upper part of the main body frame where game balls overflowing from the ball tank circulate. FIG. 379 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 380 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 381 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind the hinge side.

  As described above, the body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the outer frame 2 by the upper body frame hinge member 510 and the lower body frame hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 rotatably mounted and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped body mounted along the upper side and the left side of the rear side of the body frame base 501 in front view. A dispensing base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the dispensing base 551 and extending upward and downward in a box-like (container) shape extending left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. A tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail 553 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to an upper end of the clair 553, a ball rectifying member 556 attached to an upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and a tank rail. A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of 553; a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 to pay out the game ball B to the player side; , Is provided.

  The spherical tank 552 is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction in a plan view, and has a bottom wall 552a that is inclined so that the left side is lower in a front view, and a front side and a rear side of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape having an open upper side. Have been. In the ball tank 552, game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed are stored.

  Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut out from above on the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f has a length of about ／ of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the end of the left wall 552d to the end of the front wall 552b on the opposite side (the side of the right wall 552e). It is formed throughout.

  The tank rail 553 has a right end side (upstream side) communicating with the inside of the ball tank 552 in a front view, and a downstream side extending to one side in the left-right direction (left side) so as to be away from the ball tank 552. . The tank rail 553 extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom, and has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a in which the width direction orthogonal to the flowing direction of the game balls B is formed so that only one game ball B can flow. Have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. In plan view, the main guiding portion 553a extends from the right end to the left in the left-right direction after extending from the right end to a position about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel with an axis extending leftward and rightward from the right end side. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to a position about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes, and extending to the left end in parallel with an axis extending in the left-right direction from there. . The tank rail 553 has a portion extending in the main guide portion 553a parallel to an axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the right and extending to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed such that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game balls B are formed at the downstream end. Is formed at a height at which only one can be circulated (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  In addition, the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed above the main guiding portion 553a, and the main rail 553 is arranged such that a plurality of game balls B are arranged in a width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b bulging wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and narrowing in width direction from the upstream end to the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. I have. By the bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have been spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. The bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side to the lower main guiding portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b such that the width direction becomes one line as it goes downstream and downward.

  The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature disposed inside, and is formed into a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is disposed above the main guiding portion 553a, the bulging portion 553b slightly extends at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b in the tank rail 553. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b that comes into contact. It changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball dust in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a shape extending constantly, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B flowing through the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is difficult to disperse, the inside game ball B is always pushed in a fixed direction, so that the game ball B becomes difficult to escape and ball clogging (ball dust) is liable to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B, so that the inside circulates. By dispersing the direction in which the plurality of game balls B are pushed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball damage) can be suppressed.

  The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material, and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. Accordingly, even if a ball jam (ball ball) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the place where the ball is jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, the clogging of the ball in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, so that the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the clogging can be shortened as much as possible. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (the back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a malfunction occurs in the movable effect unit or the like, it is possible to confirm the status of the transmission motors, the gears, the belts, and other transmission mechanisms while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4. The effect of the invention can be obtained.

  The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and has the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. Of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface 501m and the rear end of the overflow tank 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b of which the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. And is inclined so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction becomes lower, and the overflow surface from the ball tank 552 A bypass passage 552g to induce some of the game balls B full of 501m, and a.

  In addition, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 out of the left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g, and the space in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. A discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m on a side opposite to the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j interposed therebetween. An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring can be connected from the rear, and an upper surface of the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558) are covered. A terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

  The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m has a flat plate shape from a lower position at a distance of 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from an upper side of a rear surface of the base body 501a having a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. Has been extended to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of one-third of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. In this overflow surface portion 501m, a gap having a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the overflowing surface portion 501m and the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

  The main body frame base 501 is disposed on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and extends in a substantially horizontal manner at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m. The upper end is higher than the left step part 501n and the right step part 501o at the left and right outer sides of the left step part 501n and the right step part 501o, respectively, and extends in the front and rear direction in a strip shape. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged in rows at a smaller interval than the diameter. The left step part 501n is formed to be shorter in the left-right direction than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left-stage portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the right corner at the rear end becomes slightly lower in a front view. The right step portion 501o is formed to be longer in the left-right direction than the length in the front-rear direction. The right step part 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear left corner is slightly lower in a front view.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. Is formed at a height that is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  The main body frame base 501 is assembled with the main body frame 4 and, when viewed from the front, the right end of the overflow surface 501m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the spherical tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface 501m. The left end of the right side of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left end of the bypass passage 552g, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left and right direction.

  The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. Hereinafter, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a spherical tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends in a flat plate shape to the left from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552, and has a front end that is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and is inclined so that the rear end is lower. And a weir extending upward from an end of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g has a rear end on the left end side (the weir portion 552i side) extending rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in a front view, and the left end side thereof. From the right to the right end. Note that the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination that is horizontal.

  The detour passage 552g is assembled with the main body frame 4 such that the rear end thereof extends along the front end side of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction and extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. Extending. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided rearward by the detour passage 552g changes its distribution direction from the slanted rear end to be perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (in the direction in which the game ball B flows in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the bypass passage 552g is formed at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. From the game ball B. Further, since the game balls B are supplied from the bypass path 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular to the flow direction) of the game balls B, the tank rails formed by the game balls B from the bypass path 552g. Ball clogging in 553 can be made difficult to occur.

  Since the detour passage 552g extends obliquely in the left-right direction so that the rear end moves rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the game ball B can be released to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side, where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower, due to the rear end that extends diagonally. By discharging the gas to a wide area, the occurrence of ball dust in the tank rail 553 can be suppressed.

  In addition, the portion where the game ball B is guided by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the outside of the rear portion of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left portion of the rear wall 552c in the front view on the tank rail 553. A game ball B that flows under the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 (on the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flows from the inside of the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, in the portion of the tank rail 553 behind the bypass passage 552g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is equal to the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). Height). Therefore, on the tank rail 553 downstream of the ball tank 552, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, a space (empty space) where the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured, and thus the bypass passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided backward can be reliably received on the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

  The spherical tank 552 has a flat plate shape that extends rightward from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f of the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side in a front view from a position about 1/3 of a total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from a left end of the front wall 552b, and a right end side in a left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b at about 1/9 of the total length to a position near about 1/2 of the total length of the left side wall 552d in the front-rear direction, and extending parallel to the left side wall 552d to near the rear wall 552c, The rear wall 552c extends from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position approximately one-third of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c with a constant width in parallel with the rear wall 552c.

  The ball tank 552 has a straight line connecting the right end of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the shape as described above and the end of the right end on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side in plan view. Has an opening 552k formed to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 has a flat flange extending in the left-right direction outward and the vertical direction on the same surface as the front wall 552b at the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. The spherical tank 552 is configured such that the height of the upper edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the height of the upper edges of the two flange portions 552l are equal to the upper edges of the left wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the body frame base 501). (The upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled to each other, the upstream end (the right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. The obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in plan view and the portion extending straight leftward in the left-right direction are located behind the ball tank 552 (projecting). )are doing. The rear end of the left side detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of an obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharge section 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge portion 551j is assembled in the main body frame 4 such that the discharge portion 551j gradually decreases rearward from a height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 in a stepwise manner. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in the front view to the tank rail 553, a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 to the left along the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). Nearby position) and then extend rearward.

  The external terminal plate 558 is mounted on the rear surface in a state where a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are arranged in the left-right direction. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal that can open a grip portion by operating a lever to grip the end of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is disposed in a state where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 when assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

  Next, the operation and effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the bypass passage 552g are arranged such that the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are lower on the rear end side as shown by the white arrows in FIG. 378. The left stage 501n is inclined such that the right end of the rear end is lower, and the right stage 501o is inclined such that the left end of the rear end is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end sides thereof are lower in a front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined such that the right end side in the opposite direction to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

  Then, when the amount of the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island facility, first, the game balls B exceed the lowest overflow portion 552f of the outer peripheral upper end edge. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface portion 501m, and can flow out of the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface 501m (see FIG. 379). Therefore, the further increase of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 can be prevented, so that it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing each other (increase in ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. In addition, the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball dust) due to the engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 can be prevented.

  Further, since the detour path 552g is provided, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour path 552g, as shown in FIG. 380. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the backward pressing force from strongly acting on the game balls B in the ball tank 552 by the game balls B accumulated on the overflow surface 501m, and the game balls B in the ball tank 552 are clogged. Can be prevented. Further, since the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 through the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to prevent the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m from spilling outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a problem that the game ball B spilled outside the main frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 so that the main frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

  Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass path 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from strongly pressing each other in the tank rail 553 to prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

  Further, since the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is formed. The upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction in the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, after the ball 552 overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m over the overflow portion 552f, the game ball B flowing from the overflow surface 501m to the bypass passage 552g is moved to the left side on one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour passage 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 to cause the ball to move. It is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552.

  Further, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is closer to the rear end of the overflow surface 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). , The game ball B can be prevented from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass 552g without passing through the overflow surface 501m. Thus, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) into the bypass passage 552g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is rearward from the overflow surface 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a certain direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the detour passage 552g can be in a certain direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, the directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B are different from each other, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing and biting each other, and to prevent the game balls B from being clogged. Can be prevented.

  Further, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a, and are aligned in the left-right direction. Since they are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the upper portion of the tank rail 553 has a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged, a game discharged from the rear end of the detour passage 552g is provided. The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is extended from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end to the downstream side so that the width of the main guiding portion 553a is reduced. Since the game balls B are changed so as to coincide with each other, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned so as to be aligned in the width direction as the plurality of game balls B move downstream in the bulging portion 553b. Further, since the upper portion of the tank rail 553 is closed so that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side). A plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction are flowed downstream through a portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, thereby reducing the number of stages in the height direction and forming one row. Can be aligned. Therefore, the plurality of game balls B can be guided to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a line by the tank rail 553.

  Furthermore, since the overflow surface 501m and the bypass passage 552g are provided, a certain number of the game balls B can be stored therein, and the tank rail 553 has the bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  Further, an external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (on the side opposite to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j therebetween). Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be farther from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility jumps or is supplied vigorously at the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, it is difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. However, there is no problem such as a short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

  In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facilities to the ball tank 552 is used for the ball 552. When the game ball B jumps on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made harder to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it jumps at the overflow surface 501m. It is possible to easily avoid occurrence of such a problem.

  Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface 501m to the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 379) due to the inclination of the guide surface 552j. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the game balls B on the guide surface portion 552j from being pressed in the downstream direction with respect to the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and the game balls B are clogged in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

  Also, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 jumps at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m, and rides on the left and right steps 501n and 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 379, the game balls B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g by their inclination, and a problem occurs when the game balls B spill out of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented.

  Further, when the game balls B flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game balls B pass under the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game balls stacked on the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the tank rail 553, downstream of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j), that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (vacant space) where the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured. The game ball B guided by the bypass path 552g can be reliably received.

  Furthermore, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of a portion of the tank rail 553 in which the upper side is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, it is not affected. The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[5. Overall configuration of gaming board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 382 to 390. FIG. 382 is a front view of the game board in which the front components, the game panel, the front unit, and the like are opaque in the pachinko machine. 383 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 382 viewed from the front right, FIG. 384 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 382 viewed from the front left, and FIG. 385 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. . FIG. 386 is a front view of the game board in a state where the front components, the game panel, the front unit, and the like are transparent. FIG. 387 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 388 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. FIG. 389 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 382. FIG. 390 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut in parallel with the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and obstacle nails.

  In the following, when the shape of the LED mounted on the decorative substrate is square when viewed from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative substrate, the LED irradiates light in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative substrate. When the LED mounted on the decorative board has a rectangular shape, it indicates that the LED emits light in a direction parallel to the surface of the decorative board (side-view LED). Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is hit by a player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001 for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, a payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B, a first starting port 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting port 2004, a first winning port 2005, and a second winning port 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B is provided with a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first winning opening 2005, and a second winning opening in the gaming area 5a. In 2006 or the like, a game is performed in which the driving operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game balls B in the game area 5a are enjoyed so as to be accepted or passed.

  The game board 5 partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a front component 1000 whose outer shape is substantially square when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 to partition the rear end of the game area 5a. And a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 390 and the like) in contact with the game balls B are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The game board 5 has a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100 and a game carried out by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear face of the board holder 1200. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 389 and 481) for controlling the contents.

  Further, the game board 5 displays a game state based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. In addition, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

  The front component 1000 is formed entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The inner shape of the inner shape defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

  The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds a transparent flat panel plate 1110 and an outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (refer to FIG. 391 and the like) to which the rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear side and to the rear side.

  The drive board unit 1700 is provided in the front panel unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 and a panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. An effect drive board 1720 for driving a decorative board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, and the like, and a drive board box 1730 accommodating the panel relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720. The drive board box 1730 has a left side on the rear view, which is hingedly mounted on a rear surface of the back box 3010 of the rear unit 3000, and a right side on the rear view, which is detachably mounted on a rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

  The table unit 2000 includes a plurality (four in this example) of general winning ports 2001 which are always open to accept the game balls B driven into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning ports 2001. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball B at a different position in the game area 5a, a gate section 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detecting passage of the game ball B, A second starting port 2004 in which game balls B can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game balls B through the gate unit 2003; and a first starting port 2002 or a second starting port 2004. A first special winning opening 2005 in which game balls B can be received in accordance with a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result which is drawn by receiving game balls B, and a first starting opening 2002 or a second starting opening. 2004 Includes the second special winning opening 2006 which is possible to accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is the lottery by accepting game balls B, and.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is provided at the lower end of the game area 5a and is provided with an out port 2010 for discharging the game ball B from the inside of the game area 5a. A first sub-out port 2011 and a second sub-out port 2012 for discharging the game from the game area 5a.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, right above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first opening port 2002 and a front opening unit 2100 having a first starting port 2002. A side unit 2200 provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and having three general winning openings 2001, and an upper left unit provided slightly above the side unit 2200 on the left side in a front view 2300, and a second starting port 2004, a first winning port 2005, and a first sub-out port 2011, which are provided to the right of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in front view in the game area 5a, in front view. Above the first attacker unit 2400, the starting port unit 2100, and the side unit 2200, and the front in the game area 5a. A frame-shaped center item 2500 provided substantially at the center and slightly above, and a second large winning opening 2006 provided on the right side of the center item 2500 and above the first attacker unit 2400. A second attacker unit 2600, a middle right side unit 2700 provided above the second attacker unit 2600 and having one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012, and a portion above the middle right side unit 2700 And a gate member 2800 having a gate portion 2003.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 and has a box-like shape having an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a in the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is provided at the lower part of the front end of the back box 3010 in the form of a flat back front left decorative body 3030 and a back front right decorative body 3040 provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, respectively. The rear guidance unit 3050 provided at the rear end of the rear box 3010, the rear production unit 3100 provided at the rear end of the rear box 3010, and the rear guidance unit 3050 at the lower portion of the rear box 3010 are provided left and right apart from each other. The lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back right rendering unit 3250, and the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 provided behind the back lower left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back right rendering unit 3250 in the back box 3010. Have.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 in front of the back rear presentation unit 3100 and in the back box 3010, and is provided in the back of the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. Left back production unit 3500, back right production unit 3600 provided behind back right decoration 3040 in back box 3010, rear left decoration 3030 inside back box 3010 and back left A front left production unit 3700 provided between the production unit 3500, and a front right production unit provided between the rear right decoration 3040 and the rear right production unit 3600 in the back box 3010. 3800.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 391 (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 391 (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the back.

  The front component 1000 is formed entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The inner shape of the inner shape defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a. An outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape from the lower left end to the left in the left-right direction in the front view and extending in the clockwise circumferential direction from the center in the front view and passing through the upper center in the left-right direction in the front view to the upper right diagonal, An inner rail 1002 that is disposed substantially inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, and a game is played on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in front view. An out guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear (the out port 2010).

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in a front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. A right rail 1005 extending from the right end to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and having an upper portion curved inside the front component 1000; an upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail An impact portion 1006 that connects the upper end of the game ball 1001 and abuts the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to be rotatable, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the inner rail 1002 and the front view clock. A backflow preventing member which is turned by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable only in the open position where it is turned around and opened between the outer rail 1001 and returned to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 2010 that penetrates forward and backward at the rear end of the out guiding section 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in front view within the frame. The out port 2010 penetrates the game balls B with a width that is sufficiently aligned in the left-right direction. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guiding unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 2010 and an out ball detection member 3080 of the back unit 3000 described later.

  In addition, the front component 1000 is located outside the vicinity of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, below the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and outside the right rail 1005. Each part is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 of the door frame 3 is formed in the security recess 1009. It will be in the inserted state. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009 prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the lower full tank path passes through the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

  Furthermore, the front component 1000 is formed at the upper left corner in a front view, and includes a function display unit attaching portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed at the lower left corner. I have.

  In addition, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent so that the game panel 1100, the back unit 3000, and the like disposed on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front. Since the front component 1000 is formed transparent together with the game panel 1100 mounted on the rear side, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5. In addition, a sense of openness can be given to the player, and the actual size of the game area 5a does not change, but the game area 5a can be made large (wide) for the player.

  In addition, since the front component 1000 is transparent together with the game panel 1100, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the like is reflected or refracted forward (toward the player). It is possible to make it look as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 391 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and has the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel plate 1110 having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the panel board 1110 in the gaming panel 1100 (see FIG. 390 and the like).

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of the panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even when the obstruction nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It has been. In the present embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 2010 of the front component 1000 is depressed upward from the lower end. The panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate back and forth to mount the front unit 2000.

  In addition, although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is separated in the left and right direction at an upper edge and a lower edge from a plurality of positioning holes formed in a round hole and a short elongated hole penetrating front and rear, respectively. And a plurality of engaging steps each having a small thickness. The positioning holes are for positioning with respect to the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engaging step is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engaging claw (not shown) or an engaging piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 391, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center role 2500, which is offset to the upper right from the center in front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and when viewed from the front, the width orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B (the circumferential direction of the frame) is a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center. The ball B has a wide width in which the balls B can be arranged, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be arranged.

  The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in the present embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step (not shown) which is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a holding step having a size substantially equal to the game area 5a. A through-hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a cutout portion 1122 cut out upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch portion 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch portion 1010 of the front component 1000. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion penetrate through the notch portion 1010 and the lower full tank. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the route unit 610 face forward.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 has an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 2010 and is recessed forward from the rear surface. The upper part of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 2010. The cylindrical portion 3081 of the out ball detecting member 3080 in the back guiding unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 described later is inserted into the out concave portion 1123.

  Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 protrudes forward from the holding step and is disposed outside the holding step with a plurality of projecting pins that are inserted into a plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110 respectively. And three engaging claws elastically engaging with the engaging step portions at the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and projecting upward from the lower outer side of the holding step portion. And a pair of engagement pieces respectively engaged with the two engagement steps on the lower side. The panel holder 1120 engages the engagement step on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 from the upper front with an engagement piece, and then moves the upper portion of the panel plate 1110 rearward to tilt the upper and lower left sides. By elastically engaging the engaging step portion of the portion where the panel plate 1110 is engaged with the engaging claw, the panel plate 1110 can be removably attached while housed in the holding step portion. At this time, the projecting pins of the panel holder 1120 are inserted into the positioning holes of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

  Since the game panel 1100 is formed transparently together with the front component 1000 attached to the front side, it is possible to reduce the possibility of clearly seeing the boundaries of the game area 5a when assembled to the game board 5, A sense of openness can be given to the player, and although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change, the game area 5a can be made large (wide) for the player.

  Further, since the game panel 1100 is transparent together with the front component 1000, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the like is reflected or refracted forward (toward the player). It is possible to make it look as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 387 and 388. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top and the front open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut away from the front end toward the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state where the board holder 1200 is assembled on the game board 5, and has the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is mounted.

  When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located immediately above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620 b of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4 and the back unit 3000 is out. It is located immediately below the ball detecting member 3080. The substrate holder 1200 can receive all the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and discharges the game balls B from the discharge portion 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 below. Can be.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 387 to 389 and the like. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 481) for controlling the content of the game and the payout of the game ball B, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And

  The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Must be performed, and a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the improper act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. The main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first starting port sensor 3052, a gate sensor 2801, a second starting port sensor 2401, a general winning port sensor 3051, a first winning port sensor 2402, and a second winning port. The sensor 2601 is connected to the out-port sensor 3053, the first sub-out port sensor 2403, the second sub-out port sensor 3054, the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, and the like.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 382 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (the player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state where the function display unit 1400 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  The function display unit 1400 includes a state indicator made up of three LEDs for displaying a game state, and a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate unit 2003. It has a normal symbol display consisting of two LEDs, and a normal reservation display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the passage of the game ball B at the gate section 2003.

  Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display including eight LEDs for displaying a first special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and a first starting port 2002. The first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the reception of the game balls B to the second ball and the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game balls B to the second starting port 2004 A second special symbol display comprising eight LEDs to be displayed, and a second special reserve number display comprising two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. ing.

  Further, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “hit” or the like, the function display unit 1400 repeats the opening / closing pattern (the number of rounds) of the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006. , A round indicator comprising five LEDs.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, symbols, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 385, 388, and 389. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 481) that controls an effect presented to a player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Effect display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 387 and 388. The effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to a substantially central rear surface of a rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the inside of the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled.

  The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color effect display device using a white LED as a backlight, and has substantially the same width as the width of the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601 projecting upward from the upper end face, and one lower fixing piece 1602 projecting downward from the lower end face. The effect display device 1600 includes two fixing grooves 3010c opening on the upper inner peripheral surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described below, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601 from diagonally behind 3010, the lower fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the lower fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. Is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding to the right.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 392 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 392 (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front face of the panel board 1110, and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112 of the panel board 1110. And project rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving a game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and has a plurality (four in this example) of general prize ports 2001 that are always open and a plurality of general prize ports 2001. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a different position in the area 5a, a gate section 2003 provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting the passage of the game ball B, To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 in which the game balls B can be received in accordance with the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game balls B through the gate portion 2003. Is different from the first special winning opening 2005 and the first special winning opening 2005 in which the receiving of the game ball B can be performed according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is drawn by receiving the game ball B. position The first special lottery result provided by receiving the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 or the second special lottery result enables the receiving of the game ball B according to the second special lottery result. And two major winning openings 2006.

  A plurality of (four in this example) general winning openings 2001 are arranged on the left side with respect to the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is in the vertical direction on the right part in the game area 5a. It is arranged above the center. The first start port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 2010 at the lowermost end at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate section 2003 is arranged at a height of about 3/4 from below in the up-down direction near the right end in front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged at the lower right corner of the gaming area 5a at a height slightly higher than the general winning opening 2001 at the left end. The first winning opening 2005 is disposed between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. The second special winning opening 2006 is disposed above the second starting opening 2004 and directly below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side.

  The first sub-out port 2011 is disposed below the second starting port 2004, and the second sub-out port 2012 is disposed on the right side of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, right above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first opening port 2002 and a front opening unit 2100 having a first starting port 2002. A side unit 2200 provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and having three general winning openings 2001, and an upper left unit provided slightly above the side unit 2200 on the left side in a front view 2300, and a second starting port 2004, a first winning port 2005, and a first sub-out port 2011, which are provided to the right of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in front view in the game area 5a, in front view. Above the first attacker unit 2400, the starting port unit 2100, and the side unit 2200, and the front in the game area 5a. A frame-shaped center won game 2500 provided substantially at the center slightly above closer, and a.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is provided above the first attacker unit 2400 to the right of the center role 2500 and has a second attacker unit 2600 having a second big winning opening 2006 and a second attacker unit 2600. And a middle right side unit 2700 having one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012, and a gate portion 2003 provided above the right side middle unit 2700. And a gate member 2800.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 393 to 395 and the like. FIG. 393 (a) is a perspective view of the starting port unit and the side unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, FIG. 393 (b) is a perspective view of the starting port unit and the side unit of the front unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. () Is a left side view of the starting port unit, and (d) is a left side view of the side unit. FIG. 394 is an explanatory diagram comparing the inclination of the front surface of the general winning opening with the inclination of the door member of the variable winning opening in the open state. FIG. 395 is an enlarged front view showing portions of the starting port unit and the side unit in the game board. The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is disposed immediately above the out port 2010 near the lower end in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

  The starting port unit 2100 includes a front wall portion 2101 extending parallel to the surface of the game area 5a (game panel 1100), a peripheral wall portion 2102 extending rearward from a peripheral edge of the front wall portion 2101, and a peripheral wall portion 2102. A flat flange portion 2103 extending outward in the left-right direction from the middle in the front-rear direction, and is entirely formed of a transparent member. The front wall portion 2101 is formed in a shape as viewed from the front by combining a rectangular portion that is long on the left and right and a semicircular portion having a lower side of the rectangular portion as a chord. The peripheral wall portion 2102 extends rearward from the peripheral edge excluding the upper side of the front wall portion 2101, and is formed in a gutter shape with an open upper part. The bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is inclined so that the rear end side is lower, and can guide the game ball B backward.

  The starting port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110 in a state where a flange portion 2103 extending in the left-right direction from the middle of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The starting port unit 2100, when attached to the panel plate 1110, forms a first starting port 2002 capable of receiving the game ball B by a front wall portion 2101 and a peripheral wall portion 2102 protruding forward from the panel plate 1110. Has formed.

  The starting port unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100 so that the first starting port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, and the stage 2513 of the center role 2500 is opened. It is located just below the center of. Therefore, when the game ball B is released downward from the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513, it is accepted to the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

  The starting port unit 2100 guides the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100 by the inclination of the gutter-shaped peripheral wall portion 2102 in a state where the starting ball is attached to the game panel 1100, and the back unit 3000 Can be delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the above. The game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3052 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

  Although not shown, a decorative sticker is attached to the front surface of the front wall portion 2101 so that the sticker is more prominent than the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. As a result, the player's interest can be directed to the first starting port 2002 rather than the general winning opening 2001, and the player can be prompted to drive the game ball B aiming at the first starting port 2002. By allowing the first starting port 2002 to receive the game ball B, a lottery of a special lottery result (first special lottery result) in which an advantageous game state in which a player such as a "big hit" game is advantageous occurs. Therefore, it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for a special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

  In this starting port unit 2100, the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 that guides the game ball B backward is inclined at a smaller angle (closer to the horizontal) than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. Therefore, the moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B relatively backward is slow. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, the received game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001. It is possible to reliably recognize that the game ball B has been received in the first starting port 2002, and to give the joy (feeling of superiority) that the game ball B has been received in the first starting port 2002 to the general winning opening 2001. Can be tasted for a longer time than when accepted.

  In addition, in a state where the starting port unit 2100 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 395, the rear lower middle production unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 is located at the rear, and is provided in the lower rear middle production unit 3300. It is designed to be illuminated and decorated with light from the LEDs of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 and the lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329 of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320.

  Further, although not shown in detail, the starting port unit 2100 may be provided with a rib that straddles the front wall 2101 and the bottom of the peripheral wall 2102 in the first starting port 2002. The rib is formed in a triangular shape (a part may be rounded) in side view, and the upper surface is inclined at the first front wall portion 2203 of the two general winning openings 2001 from the right side of the side unit 2200. And the distance to the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203 is longer than the distance from the upper end to the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. (The position of the rib is lower than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203). Thereby, the timing at which the game ball B received at the first starting port 2002 abuts on the rib and is guided rearward is determined by the game ball B received at the general winning opening 2001 at the first front wall portion 2203. The timing can be made later than the timing of abutting on the inclined portion and being guided backward, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 393 to 395 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starter unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game balls B can be always received. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning openings 2001 on the right side are open upward, and the general winning opening 2001 on the left side is open upward.

  The side unit 2200 has a flat base plate and two gutters that extend in a gutter shape from the base plate back and forth and that are inclined so as to move rearward as the front end moves downward and are separated to the left and right. One guiding gutter, a first front wall portion closing the front end side of each of the two first guiding gutters, and extending in a gutter shape from the base plate back and forth on the left side of the two first guiding gutters. A second guiding gutter, and a second front wall closing the front end side of the second guiding gutter. The side unit 2200 is entirely formed of a transparent member.

  The first guiding gutter 2202 and the second guiding gutter 2204 have a U-shaped cross section. The first guiding gutter 2202 has a U-shaped open portion facing upward, and the second guiding gutter 2204 has a U-shaped open portion facing upper left. The front end of the first guide gutter 2202 is vertically extended on the upper side of a portion about 3/4 from the bottom, and near the base plate 2201 such that the lower side moves rearward as it goes downward. It extends diagonally to. Therefore, the first front wall portion 2203 that closes the front end side of the first guide gutter 2202 has a shape in which the lower side is bent rearward at a height of about か ら from the bottom.

  The second guide gutter 2204 has a vertical front end. Therefore, the second front wall 2205 that closes the front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 extends vertically in parallel with the base plate 2201.

  The side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110 with the base plate 2201 in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The first guiding wall 2202 and the second guiding wall 2204 can receive the game ball B at a portion of the first guiding gutter 2202 and the second guiding gutter 2204 projecting forward from the panel plate 1110, and at the first front wall portion 2203 and the second front wall portion 2205. A general winning opening 2001 is formed. When the side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the portions of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 that project rearward from the base plate 2201 penetrate through the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. And protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The first guiding gutter 2202 and the second guiding gutter 2204 are inclined so that the bottom surface is lower toward the rear, and can guide the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear.

  When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, three general winning openings 2001 protrude forward from the front of the game panel 1100. The side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the third delivery port 3050 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to any of the fourth delivery ports 3064. The game ball B delivered to any of the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port 3064 of the back guiding unit 3050 is detected by the general winning port sensor 3051, and then, the lower position is detected. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200.

  The side unit 2200 is different from the starting port unit 2100 in that a decorative seal is not attached to the first front wall portion 2203 or the second front wall portion 2205 forming the front surface of the general winning opening 2001, The first starting port 2002 is less noticeable. Since the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 in the side unit 2200 are inclined, the three-dimensional effect of the general winning openings 2001 can be emphasized, and even if a decorative seal is not stuck on the front surface. It doesn't look bad.

  When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 395, the lower back left rendering unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is located at the rear, and the lower back left decoration of the back lower left rendering unit 3200. Light emitting decoration can be performed by light from the LED on the substrate 3203, and the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 can be visually recognized in a favorable state. In addition, since the side unit 2200 has a portion that is inclined at the first front wall portion 2203 that forms the front end of each of the two general winning openings 2001, the lower portion of the back unit 3000 is formed by the portion. The light emitted forward from the lower decorative substrate 3203 under the back of the effect unit 3200 can be reflected (or refracted) near the head of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, The appearance can be improved.

  In the side unit 2200, since the bent portion and the obliquely extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 are inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200 is relatively rearward. The moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B is fast. The bottom surfaces of the first guiding gutter 2202 and the second guiding gutter 2204 are inclined at substantially the same angle as the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting port unit 2100. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, the received game ball B becomes invisible in a shorter time than the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. This makes it possible to prevent the player's interest from being unnecessarily attracted to the general winning opening 2001 for a long time while making the player surely recognize the acceptance of the game ball B into the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, the player's interest can be easily directed to the next game ball B, the first starting port 2002, the first winning port 2005, the other winning port such as the second winning port 2006, and the like. It is possible to entertain a game in the game area 5a and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In other words, since the bent and obliquely extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 The rolling speed of the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 can be made slower than the rolling speed of the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, the received game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001. It is possible to reliably recognize that the game ball B has been received in the first starting port 2002, and to give the joy (feeling of superiority) that the game ball B has been received in the first starting port 2002 to the general winning opening 2001. Can be tasted for a longer time than when accepted.

  By the way, in the side unit 2200, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front end of each of the two general winning openings 2001 is inclined, so that the first front wall portion 2203 is positioned from the side of the first guiding gutter 2202. The game ball B can pass in front of the inclined portion of the game ball B. When the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203, when viewed from the front, the game ball B appears to overlap the general winning opening 2001, so that the game ball B is received by the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player. When the payout of the game balls B is not performed, the player may feel distrust of the pachinko machine 1 or the game hall side, which may reduce the interest in the game. On the other hand, in the side unit 2200 of the present embodiment, as described above, the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 and the first guiding gutter 2202 are received by the general winning opening 2001 and rearward. Since the guided game ball B can be visually recognized by the player for a short time, it is possible to recognize that the game ball B has been accepted in the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, even if the illusion that the game ball B passed in front of the first front wall portion 2203 is accepted by the general winning opening 2001, it can be immediately recognized as an illusion.

  Further, in this side unit 2200, a portion of the game ball B can pass in front of the first front wall portion 2203, so that a game ball is formed in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001. When most of the game balls B (at least half or more of the game balls B) overlap with the general winning opening 2001 in a front view when B passes, some players place the game balls B in the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player. An illusion can be made as if the player was received, and the player can be entertained. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning opening 2001, and it can be thought that it is an illusion. Therefore, even if a bonus (payout of the game ball B or a lottery of the first special lottery result) is not provided thereafter, it is possible to avoid distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side. It is possible to keep the player entertained in the game, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, the side unit 2200 extends the front end of the leftmost (left end) general winning opening 2001 among the three general winning openings 2001 in parallel with the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110) by the second front wall portion 2205. It has the same shape as the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. Thus, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001 at the left end, it is possible to give an illusion that some players have been accepted in the starting opening. And even if the game ball B is accepted in the general winning opening 2001, which is an illusion that it is a starting port, since the lottery of the special lottery result is not performed, the player feels distrust toward the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side. There is a risk that it will. However, the general winning opening 2001 is provided at the left end of the side unit 2200 distant to the left from the first starting opening 2002 at the center in the left-right direction (a position that cannot be received by “right-handed”), and Since a decorative seal indicating a starting port is not attached to the front surface of the front wall portion 2205, it can be reconfirmed that the starting port is not a starting port, and the player can enjoy the game by feeling distrust. It is possible to avoid lowering.

  Also, since the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 are inclined in the side unit 2200, the amount of material required for the side unit 2200 is smaller than when the front ends are parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. Can be reduced, and a decoration sticker is not attached to the front of the general winning opening 2001, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  The angle of inclination of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 (general winning opening 2001) from the horizontal is not shown, but a variable winning opening such as a large winning opening or a bonus winning opening is openably closed. Is larger than the inclination angle from the horizontal when the upper side is opened around the lower side so that the upper side moves forward so as to guide the game ball B toward the winning side. Angle. More specifically, depending on the player, if the number of game balls B paid out by accepting the game balls B to the variable winning opening is larger than the general winning opening 2001, the number of the game balls B to the variable winning opening is increased. To win the prize. Alternatively, even with a variable winning opening (large winning opening) in which the defined winning number is determined, it is desired to win more than the defined number. Accordingly, since the inclination of the winning opening door of the variable winning opening is set to be smaller than that of the general winning opening 2001 (first front wall portion 2203), the speed of the game ball B rolling on the winning opening door is slow. As described above, when the game ball B is received in the variable winning opening, the received game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001. Can be surely recognized that the game ball B has been received in the variable winning opening, and the joy (feeling of excellence) that the game ball B has been received in the variable winning opening is given to the general winning opening 2001. You can taste it for a longer time than when you are accepted. In addition, since the angle of the winning opening door in the open state is loose, the time required for the opening winning door to be closed becomes longer, so that the game balls B win more than the specified number for the player. You can make them seem to.

  Further, at the two general winning openings 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200, a portion extending obliquely downward from the lower end of the first front wall portion 2203, compared with a distance of a portion extending vertically downward from the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203. Is formed longer. As a result, since the winning port is the general winning port 2001, the payout of the game ball B is performed but the lottery such as the normal lottery or the special lottery is not performed. Can be quickly invisible from the player's view.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the side unit 2200 has a front surface of a specific general winning opening 2001 inclined from the plurality of general winning openings 2001. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The front surface of the winning opening 2001 may be inclined. In the present embodiment, the game ball B fired at the firing position (so-called “left-handed”) in the normal gaming state through the general winning opening 2001 whose front surface is not inclined can enter. Although the position provided at the position is shown, the present invention is not limited to this. The general winning opening 2001 whose front surface is not inclined is set in the advantageous gaming state (during "time saving", "probable change" or "big hit"). The game ball B fired at the firing position (so-called “right strike”) may be provided at a position where the ball can enter, or may be provided at both.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 394, the inclination angle of the general winning opening 2001 provided with an inclination on the front surface is larger than the opening angle when the variable winning opening (for example, the big winning opening) is opened after it is closed. The angle is narrow. When the payout number of the game balls B at the time of winning in the special winning opening is made larger than the general winning opening 2001, even if the special winning number is defined, the player wins more than the specified number. I wish. Therefore, the speed at which the game ball B winning the big winning opening rolls to the back side is slower than the speed at which the game ball B winning the general winning opening 2001 with the front surface inclined rolls to the back side. I have. In other words, when the player wins the general winning opening 2001 which is smaller than the number of payouts when the player wins the big winning opening, it is assumed that the speed of the game ball B winning the big winning opening rolls inward. ing. In other words, it can be said that the winning port with more payouts has a longer time of disappearing from the player's view. As a result, the prize port having more payouts can provide a longer joy time when a prize is won.

[5-8c. Upper left side unit]
The upper left side unit 2300 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 392 and the like. The upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 inclined so as to be lower rightward. The upper left side unit 2300 is formed entirely transparent.

  When the upper left side unit 2300 is assembled to the game board 5, the shelf 2301 protrudes forward from the front of the game panel 1100. The upper left side unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center role 2500 to the right side below the center role 2500 by the shelf 2301.

[5-8d. First attacker unit]
The first attacker unit 2400 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 396 (a) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 396 (b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 397 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit exploded and viewed from the front, and FIG. 398 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit exploded and viewed from the rear. FIG. 399 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the first winning port in the first attacker unit from the left side. FIG. 400 is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a path of a game ball in the first attacker unit.

  The first attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is disposed on the front right side of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in front view, in the game area 5a, and is located on the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. Installed. The first attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting port 2004, a first winning port 2005, and a first sub-out port 2011 (see FIG. 405 and the like). In the first attacker unit 2400, when viewed from the front, the second starting port 2004 is provided at the upper right side from the center in the left-right direction. The first sub-out port 2011 is provided below the second starting port 2004 and lower than the first big winning port 2005.

  In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 has a second starting port sensor 2401 for detecting a game ball B received at the second starting port 2004 and a first starting port sensor 2401 for detecting a game ball B received at the first big winning port 2005. It includes a special winning opening sensor 2402, a first sub-out opening sensor 2403 for detecting a game ball B received in the first sub-out opening 2011, and a magnetic sensor 2404 for detecting illegal magnetism. The first big winning opening sensor 2402 and the magnetic sensor 2404 are provided two each.

  The first attacker unit 2400 includes a unit base 2411 attached to the panel plate 1110, a front cover 2412 attached to the front side of the unit base 2411 and forming a flow path of the game ball B, and attached to the rear side of the unit base 2411. Rear cover 2413, a second starting port door 2414 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the second starting port 2004, and moving the second starting port door 2414 to open and close the second starting port 2004. A starting opening solenoid 2415, a solenoid cover 2416 covering the starting opening solenoid 2415, a first winning opening door 2417 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the first winning opening 2005; To open and close the first big winning opening 2005 by moving the big winning opening door 2417 It includes as one attacker solenoid 2418, the transmission member 2419 to the movable first winning opening the door 2417 by transmitting the advance and retreat of the first attacker solenoid 2418, the.

  Also, the first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the rear cover 2413, and is attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 2413 and the first large winning opening decorative board 2420 for emitting and decorating the first large winning opening 2005. The second starting port sensor 2401, the first winning port sensor 2402, the first sub-out port sensor 2403, the magnetic sensor 2404, the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, the first winning port decorative board 2420 and the panel relay board And a first attacker relay board 2421 for relaying the connection with the 1710.

  The unit base 2411 is formed of a transparent member. The unit base 2411 has a first opening 2411a penetrating front and back near the upper end on the right side from the center in the left and right direction, a first guide hole 2411b penetrating front and rear below the first opening 2411a, and a left and right direction. A second opening 2411c penetrating back and forth long left and right in the upper part on the left side from the center; two second guide holes 2411d penetrating back and forth side by side under the second opening 2411c side by side; And a first sub-out port 2011 penetrating back and forth below the one guide hole 2411b.

  The left and right widths of the first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411 are formed slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2414a of the second starting door 2414 is inserted therethrough. The first guide hole 2411b is provided at a position below the center in the vertical direction. The first guide hole 2411b protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape, and is inclined so that the rear end side becomes lower. The second opening 2411c extends right and left at a length of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 is inserted therethrough. The second guide holes 2411d each project rearward in a tubular shape, and are inclined so that the rear end side is lower.

  In addition, the unit base 2411 is arranged side by side along the upper side of the second opening 2411c, and has two contact portions 2411e protruding forward in a triangular shape. These contact portions 2411e move the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 when the first special winning opening 2005 is in the closed state, with the contact portion of the front cover 2412. In cooperation, they are distributed in a large zigzag shape in the front-rear direction.

  The second starting port sensor 2401 is attached to the unit base 2411 directly above the first guide hole 2411b with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. In addition, right above each of the two second guide holes 2411d, the first special winning opening sensor 2402 is attached with the detection holes protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Further, at the rear end of the first sub-out port 2011, a first sub-out port sensor 2403 is attached to the unit base 2411 so that the detection holes coincide with each other. Further, magnetic sensors 2404 are mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 2411 on the left side of the first guide hole 2411b and on the right side of the two second guide holes 2411d, respectively.

  The front cover 2412 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and is transparently formed as a member. The front cover 2412 is for forming a passage for the game ball B on the front surface of the unit base 2411. The front cover 2412, as shown in FIG. 400, has a first shelf 2412a extending from the vicinity of the upper right corner to be lower leftward in a front view, and a game ball moving leftward from the left end of the first shelf 2412a. B is slightly longer than the diameter of B and extends shorter than the first shelf 2412a so as to be lower to the left from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf 2412a. And a second shelf 2412b forming a second starting port 2004, and a second shelf that is lower leftward than a left end of the second shelf 2412b and smaller than the diameter of the game ball B to the left. And a third shelf 2412c extending from the left end of the third shelf 2412c to the left with a length of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B, and a third shelf 2412c extending from the left end of the third shelf 2412c. From lower position to lower left It extends so that has a fourth ledge 2412d forming the first special winning opening 2005 between the third ledge 2412c, a.

  The right end of the first shelf 2412a is separated from the right side of the front cover 2412 to the left slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B. The first shelf 2412a, the second shelf 2412b, and the third shelf 2412c are each inclined at the same angle, and the fourth shelf 2412d is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf 2412a and the like. ing.

  Further, the front cover 2412 is the same as the first standing wall portion 2412e extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a and the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a. A second standing wall portion 2412f extending to the height, a third standing wall portion 2412g extending vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf portion 2412b to the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e, and a third shelf portion 2412c. The fourth standing wall portion 2412h extending vertically downward from the right end of the front cover 2412 to the lower side, the fifth standing wall portion 2412i extending downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c, and the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d. And a sixth standing wall 2412k extending downward from the left end of the fourth shelf 2412d.

  The fifth standing wall portion 2412i extends a little longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to extend downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d and then lower leftward. , Extends further downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412. The sixth standing wall portion 2412j extends from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d downward to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d, and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to lower rightward. Above, it extends further downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412. The interval in the left-right direction between the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

  Further, the front cover 2412 includes a first horizontal wall portion 24121 connected to lower ends of the first vertical wall portion 2412e, the second vertical wall portion 2412f, and the third vertical wall portion 2412g, and a first vertical wall portion on the right side of the front cover 2412. From a position lower than the lower end of 2412e, the game ball B is inclined to the left with an interval at which the game balls B can flow between the first horizontal wall portion 2412l and then to the middle of the left fourth standing wall portion 2412h. And a second horizontal wall portion 2412m that is inclined so as to be higher toward the front. The first horizontal wall portion 2412l is provided at the same height as the lower end of the first guide hole 2411b in the unit base 2411. The second horizontal wall portion 2412m is formed such that the portion of the first sub-out port 2011 below the second starting port 2004 is the lowest.

  In addition, the front cover 2412 extends from near the lower portions of the fifth upright wall portion 2412i and the sixth upright wall portion 2412j in a direction approaching each other to around the center between the fifth upright wall portion 2412i and the sixth upright wall portion 2412j. It has a third horizontal wall portion 2412n that extends and a partition portion 2412o that connects the opposing ends of the two third horizontal wall portions 2412n together and extends upward. The third horizontal wall portion 2412n is provided at the same height as the lower end of the second guide hole 2411d in the unit base 2411.

  Further, the front cover 2412 extends stepwise so as to be lower to the left along the upper side of the front cover, and is an interval at which the game balls B can flow between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c. It is provided with an opening. It has an upper shelf 2412p. The upper shelf 2412p has a right end located directly above a left end of the first shelf 2412a, and a left end located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf 2412d. The upper shelf 2412p is inclined so that the vicinity of the right end becomes lower to the right.

  Further, although not shown, the front cover 2412 is located in front of the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411, and a triangular portion that is alternately arranged in the left-right direction with respect to the two contact portions 2411e of the unit base 2411. It has two abutments projecting rearward in shape. These contact portions, when the first special winning opening 2005 is in the closed state, the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 and the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411. In cooperation, they are distributed in a large zigzag shape in the front-rear direction.

  The rear cover 2413 is formed in a box shape opened forward. The rear cover 2413 cooperates with the unit base 2411 to hold a second starting door 2414, a solenoid cover 2416, a first winning opening door 2417, a first attacker solenoid 2418, and the like. The rear cover 2413 cooperates with the front cover 2412 to hold the second starting port sensor 2401, the first winning port sensor 2402, and the first sub-out port sensor 2403 so as to sandwich the same.

  The second starter door 2414 has a flat door portion 2414a, an arm portion 2414b extending downward from the door portion 2414a, and a left and right extending from a lower end of the arm portion 2414b. A rotating shaft 2414c that is rotatably attached to the arm portion 2414b, and a connecting portion 2414d that is provided at a position below the rotating shaft 2414c below the arm portion 2414b and that is connected to the tip of the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415. .

  The door part 2414a of the second starting door 2414 is inclined such that the left end side is lower. The arm portion 2414b of the second starting port door 2414 extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2414a and then bends forward to substantially the same position as the front end of the door portion 2414a. The connecting portion 2414d is provided closer to the door portion 2414a than the rotating shaft 2414c of the arm portion 2414b.

  The second starting port door 2414 can close the second starting port 2004 by the door portion 2414a. The second starting port door 2414 is rotated (rotated) about the rotating shaft 2414c by the forward / backward movement of the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415, so that the door section 2414a moves in the front / rear direction. The starting port 2004 can be opened and closed.

  The starting port solenoid 2415 is attached with the plunger protruding forward. In this starting port solenoid 2415, the plunger protrudes forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown) in a state where power is not supplied, and the plunger is retracted by supplying power.

  The first winning opening door 2417 has a flat plate-shaped door portion 2417a that is long in the left and right directions, a pair of arm portions 2417b extending downward from both left and right ends of the door portion 2417a, and a pair of arm portions 2417b. It has a rotating shaft 2417c coaxially extending from the lower end in the left-right direction, and a cylindrical link pin 2417d protruding rightward from the lower part of the right arm 2417b.

  The door portion 2417a of the first winning opening door 2417 is inclined such that the left end side is lower. The pair of arm portions 2417b extend downward from the rear end of the door portion 2417a and then bend forward to a position substantially equal to the front end of the door portion 2417a. The link pin 2417d is provided at a lower portion of the arm portion 2417b on a side closer to the door portion 2417a than the rotation shaft 2417c. The link pin 2417d is slidably inserted into a vertically extending slit 2419c of a transmission member 2419 described later.

  The first special winning opening door 2005 can be closed by the door portion 2417a. The first award winning door 2417 is rotated (rotated) about the rotation shaft 2417c by the forward and backward movement of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 in the front-rear direction, so that the door portion 2417a moves in the front-rear direction. The first winning opening 2005 can be opened and closed.

  The first attacker solenoid 2418 is attached with the plunger protruding forward. When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown), and when energized, the plunger retreats.

  The transmission member 2419 penetrates in the left-right direction near the front end of the extension 2419b, the base 2419a attached to the tip of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418, the extension 2419b extending forward from the base 2419a. And a slit 2419c extending vertically. The link pin 2417d of the first winning port door 2417 is slidably inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419.

  A plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward are mounted on the front surface of the first special winning opening decoration board 2420. The plurality of LEDs of the first special winning opening decoration board 2420 are full color LEDs. The first special winning opening decoration board 2420 can make the first special winning opening 2005 emit light by emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  In the first attacker unit 2400, in a normal state, the starting port solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418 are each in a non-energized (OFF) state. In this normal state, the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415 projects forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the door 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 passes through the first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411. Protruding forward. In this state, the door portion 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 is located above the second starting port 2004, and the state in which the game ball B cannot be received into the second starting port 2004 by the door section 2414a. Has become. That is, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2414 (door portion 2414a) (see FIG. 400).

  In a normal state, the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 protrudes forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 is connected to the second opening of the unit base 2411. It protrudes forward through 2411c. In this state, the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 is located above the first special winning opening 2005, and the reception of the game ball B into the first special winning opening 2005 is impossible by the door portion 2417a. It is in a state. That is, the first special winning opening 2005 is closed by the first special winning opening door 2417 (door portion 2417a) (see FIGS. 399 and 400).

  In this normal state, when the game ball B flows down on the first shelf portion 2412a, the game ball B rolls to the left due to the inclination of the first shelf portion 2412a, and the door portion 2414a of the second starting door 2414a After rolling on the upper surface and the second shelf 2412b, it is discharged to the left from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. The game ball B discharged to the left from the second shelf 2412b falls on the third shelf 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 according to the momentum, and the inclination thereof causes the game ball B to be left. Roll towards you. When the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2412b abuts against the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p and rebounds rightward, a gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c is formed. May enter.

  At this time, the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a that closes the first special winning opening 2005 is moved toward the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and the contact portion of the front cover 2412. As a result, they come into contact alternately and roll leftward while zigzag in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that has rolled to the left on the door 2417a is discharged from the left end thereof to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400 after rolling on the fourth shelf 2412d.

  In the first attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B flows to the right of the first shelf portion 2412a, it passes through the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e, falls near the right end of the second lateral wall portion 2412m, and falls on the second lateral wall. Due to the inclination of the portion 2412m, it rolls leftward and enters the first sub-out port 2011. When the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c, the game ball B passes between the third standing wall 2412g and the fourth standing wall 2412h, and the second horizontal wall 2412m passes through the gap. It falls near the left end, rolls rightward due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m, and enters the first sub-out port 2011.

  The game ball B that has entered the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and is returned to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a. It is delivered and discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B flowing on the right side of the first shelf 2412a and the game ball B passing through the gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c are both It is formed so as to enter one sub-out port 2011, and substantially two first sub-out ports 2011 are provided.

  In this normal state, when the starting port solenoid 2415 is energized (ON) in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003, the plunger is opposed to the urging force of the spring. Is retracted, and the connecting portion 2414d of the arm portion 2414b of the second starting port door 2414 above the rotary shaft 2414c (on the side of the door portion 2414a) is pulled rearward by the tip of the plunger. Thus, the second starting door 2414 rotates about the rotation shaft 2414c in the direction in which the door 2414a moves rearward. When the door portion 2414a rotates so as to retreat from the front surface of the unit base 2411, the upper portion of the second starting port 2004 is opened, and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004. Becomes That is, the second start port 2004 is opened.

  When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004 when the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, the game ball B flows down between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g, and the second starting port sensor 2401 After being detected, it falls on the first horizontal wall portion 2412l. The portion between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g in the first horizontal wall portion 2412l is inclined so as to be lower rearward, and the game ball B rolls rearward due to the inclination, and the unit It enters the first guide hole 2411b of the base 2411 and is discharged backward from its rear end. The game ball B released backward from the rear end of the first guiding hole 2411b is delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is transferred from the back guiding unit 3050 to the lower substrate holder 1200. Is discharged.

  On the other hand, in a normal state, according to a special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) selected by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is energized (ON), the plunger retreats together with the transmission member 2419 attached to the tip thereof against the urging force of the spring. When the transmission member 2419 is retracted, the link pin 2417d of the first winning opening door 2417 inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419 is pressed backward by the inner wall of the slit 2419c while sliding in the slit 2419c. It will be.

  Accordingly, the first winning opening door 2417 rotates so that the door 2417a moves rearward about the rotation axis 2417c, and the front end of the door 2417a moves rearward from the front of the unit base 2411. Will move. By moving the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 behind the front surface of the unit base 2411, the first special winning opening 2005 is opened upward, and the state is shifted to the first special winning opening 2005. (See FIG. 399). That is, the first special winning opening 2005 is opened.

  When the game ball B is received in the first special winning opening 2005 when the first special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, the game ball B passes between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j, and then passes through the fifth standing wall. After passing between the portion 2412i and the partitioning portion 2412o or between the sixth standing wall portion 2412j and the partitioning portion 2412o, it is detected by one of the two first big winning opening sensors 2402, It falls on the three horizontal wall portions 2412n. The third horizontal wall portion 2412n is inclined so as to become lower rearward from the upper surface, and the game ball B that has fallen on the third horizontal wall portion 2412n rolls rearward due to the inclination, and It is discharged backward through the second guide hole 2411d. The game ball B released backward from the second guiding hole 2411d is delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 to the lower substrate holder 1200. .

  As described above, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of the present embodiment, in the first special winning opening door 2417 that opens and closes the first special winning opening 2005, near the front end of the door 2417a that closes the first special winning opening 2005. The first large winning opening 2005 is opened and closed by rotating the door portion 2417a about a rotating shaft 2417c extending left and right at the same position in the front-rear direction. The depth in the front-back direction applied to the attacker unit 2400) can be shortened as much as possible. This effect is the same in the second start port 2004 opened and closed by the second start port door 2414. Thereby, the space behind the first attacker unit 2400 can be relatively widened.

  Also, in the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B received from the first special winning opening 2005 is divided into two by the partition part 2412o, and each is detected by the different first special winning opening sensor 2402, and the unit base 2411 is detected. , The game balls B can be prevented from staying between the first special winning opening 2005 and the first special winning opening sensor 2402, and more game balls can be released in a short time. B can be accepted.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 401 (a) is a perspective view of the center role of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 401 (b) is a perspective view of the center role of the front unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 402 is a front view of the center item. The center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 is disposed in the game area 5a above the starting port unit 2100, substantially in the center in front view and slightly upward, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing. The center role item 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, and can visually recognize, from the front, various effect units provided in the effect display device 1600 provided in the rear of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000. .

  The frame-shaped center role 2500 has a portion that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is placed in the frame. It is inaccessible.

  The center role item 2500 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-shaped member projecting from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and abutting on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. It has a flange 2502 and a flat support 2503 protruding from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall 2501. The peripheral wall 2501 extends rearward to a position where its rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in a state where the peripheral wall 2501 is assembled to the game board 5. The peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110 into which the center role 2500 is inserted. When the peripheral wall portion 2501 is assembled to the game board 5, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from entering the inside of the frame from the outside of the center role object 2500.

  The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is formed smaller than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange 2502 and the support 2503 project from the peripheral wall 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support part 2503 (flange part 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall part 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

  A plurality of support portions 2503 are partially provided on the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall 2501 where the flange 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall 2501. The support portion 2503 has an edge protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 formed in a shape following the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or in a straight line so that the support portion 2503 is not noticeable. The support portion 2503 has a protruding amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within a range from the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness (1 mm to 10 mm) of the panel plate 1110, and the player exerts an effect as reinforcement. To make it less noticeable.

  More specifically, a plurality of support portions 2503 of the center role 2500 are provided. For example, in a support portion 2503 provided above a warp inlet 2511 to be described later and at a portion where the peripheral wall portion 2501 protrudes to the leftmost, the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 at that portion is intermediate between the vertically extending portions. Has a shape that swells to the left. The tip side of the support part 2503 is formed in a shape along the peripheral wall 2501 on both the upper and lower sides of the part bulging leftward of the peripheral wall 2501, and in the part bulging leftward of the peripheral wall 2501, It has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and is formed linearly so as to connect the upper and lower portions (see FIG. 410). When the support portion 2503 of this portion is assembled to the game board 5, the portion extending linearly up and down on the tip side of the support portion 2503 is the back front left decorative body of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. 3030 substantially along a part of the right side. Therefore, since the tip side of the support part 2503 coincides with the edge of the back front left decorative body 3030, the support part 2503 is hard to distinguish, and the back front left decoration provided relatively rearward. The decoration of the body 3030 can be prominent.

  Further, of the plurality of support portions 2503, the support portion 2503 below the warp entrance 2511 extends rightward in a square shape while the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends diagonally. The support portion 2503 of this portion is located in front of the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C in the back front left rendering unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 in a state assembled to the game board 5 (see FIG. 382 and the like). ). Since the left and right end sides of the support portion 2503 extend in parallel with the plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter unit 3730 in the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C, they are partly formed in the shape of the shutter 3732. , And it is difficult for the support unit 2503 to determine (see FIG. 386).

  The center role 2500 has a warp entrance in which a game ball B in the game area 5a is opened at a position on the left side of the peripheral wall 2501 in a front view and in front of the front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter. 2511, a game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511, a warp exit 2512 that can be released from the front of the game panel 1100 and opens in the frame, and a game ball B released from the warp exit 2512. A stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after rolling in the left-right direction and a stage cover 2515 provided to cover the upper part of the stage 2513 are provided (see FIG. 402 and the like). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the invasion of the game ball B from outside the frame of the center role 2500 into the frame by bouncing the game ball B bouncing on the stage 2513 toward the stage 2513 side.

  The stage 2513 of the center role 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is depressed, and corresponds to the position immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center role 2500 is placed on the panel plate of the game panel 1100. It is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) such that the position of the approximate center in the left-right direction when attached to the 1110 is slightly higher than both left and right sides thereof. In the stage 2513, a portion (central emission portion 2513a) slightly higher than the left and right sides at the center in the left-right direction and a lowest portion (side emission portion 2513b) on the left and right sides thereof are directed forward. It is inclined so as to be lower, and the game balls B can be released into the game area 5a from those portions.

  In the state where the center role item 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the raised portion (central discharge portion 2513 a) at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2513 is located immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central discharge portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, it is accepted to the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

  The center role item 2500 includes a guide passage group 2520 that is provided at the upper right corner and includes two passages through which the game balls B can flow. When the center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the end of the upper right corner of the center role 2500) is the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5 a (the stop of the front component 1000). The game ball B, which is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005) in the vicinity of the portion 1006 and is driven to the right above the center role 2500, is formed so as to always pass through the guide passage group 2520.

  The length of the guide passage group 2520 in the up-down direction is about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 is formed in a groove shape that is opened forward, so that the game balls B flowing therethrough can be visually recognized in a favorable state from the front.

  The guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and is provided along the first guide passage 2521 distant from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the right side of the first guide passage 2521 along the peripheral wall portion 2501. And a second guide passage 2522 extending therefrom. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are separated to the left and right. The outlet of the first guide passage 2521 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and open diagonally to the lower right along the arc above the right rail 1005.

  The guide passage group 2520 is located above the gate 2003 in a state where the center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. In addition, the right end of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is located immediately below the lower end of the stop portion 1006 of the front component 1000, and most of the game balls B contacting the stop portion 1006 are the first guide. It is formed so as to enter the passage 2521.

  In addition, the center role 2500 has a lower right guide passage 2530 that protrudes rightward from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall 2501 and guides the game ball B from above to the right and then discharges the ball downward. The lower right guide passage 2530 has an entrance opening upward over the front width in the left-right direction, and an exit opening diagonally lower left with a width of one game ball B.

  The lower right guide passage 2530 has a right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 when assembled to the game board 5 and is located between the first attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2600. Therefore, between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are arranged.

  According to the center role 2500 of the present embodiment, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided, at the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 Since it is the outer edge, the inside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (within the frame of the center role 2500) can be relatively widened, and the effect image of the rear effect display device 1600 passing through the frame of the center role 2500 and the back unit 3000 decorations and the like can be made more visible.

  Further, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. This can prevent the peripheral wall 2501 from being deformed or damaged even when the game ball B comes into contact with the peripheral wall 2501 outside the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided. Further, since the strength of the center role 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center role 2500 can be released from the injection mold without being deformed.

  Further, since the transparent support portion 2503 is made to protrude shortly from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is provided partially on the entire periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is provided on the rear side. The visibility of the decorative body of the unit 3000 and the effect image of the effect display device 1600 can be reduced. In addition, the center role 2500 such as the support portion 2503 is transparent, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left rendering unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 are located as close as possible to the rear surface of the center role 2500. Is arranged, it is possible to prevent the decoration of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 from being blurred due to the lens effect of the transparent center role 2500. For this reason, according to the center role 2500 of the present embodiment, the visibility of the decorative body and the like provided at the rear can be improved, and the decorative effect by them can be reliably exhibited.

  Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 and the like are transparent and the support portion 2503 is provided in front of the decorative body and the effect display device 1600 that can be illuminated and decorated, it can be illuminated and decorated with light from them, and the appearance is good. can do. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 410 and the like, a back front left rendering unit 3700 and a rendering display device 1600 in the rear unit 3000 are provided behind the support portion 2503 (cross-hatched portion in FIG. 410). By transmitting, reflecting, refracting, or diffusing light radiated forward from the LEDs of the front left decoration board 3714, the effect display device 1600, and the like in the front left rendering unit 3700, a brilliant luminous decoration is provided. Can be shown to players. Note that a step, a notch, or the like may be provided in the support portion 2503, so that light from behind can be diffused by the step or the like, and a more brilliant appearance can be achieved.

  In addition, since the support portion 2503 is provided to have a portion where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided, the support portion 2503 in the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) is provided. In a close part, the obstacle nail N can be implanted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall 2501. Thereby, the game area by the plurality of obstacle nails N in the game area 5a can be made as wide as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can enjoy the original game.

  The peripheral wall portion 2501 has the same shape as the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is flush with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the support portion 2503 is provided. Is provided on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the panel plate 1110, so that the support portion 2503 can be made less noticeable to the player, and the center role 2500 is made to appear to be integrated with the panel plate 1110. be able to.

  Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center role 2500, the inside of the frame of the center role 2500 is more compared with the case where the support portion 2503 is provided over the entire circumference. The display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided on the rear side can be more easily seen. In other words, when the non-distribution area (the inside of the frame) defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center role 2500 is to be made large, the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501. You may do it. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear when viewed from the front.

  The edge of the support portion 2503 may have a shape similar to the shape of the front cover 3711 (the shape of the decorative body) of the rear left effect unit 3700 provided at the rear. This makes it possible to prevent the support portion 2503 from being noticeably degraded in the decorativeness of the rear decorative body due to the support portion 2503 being different from the rear decoration. Can be increased.

  In the above-described embodiment, the support unit 2503 is provided at a position near the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left rendering unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear, and the decoration is performed by the lens effect. Although the one that suppresses blurring is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the support part 2503 is provided near the front end of the peripheral wall part 2501 that is remote from the rear unit 3000 at the rear. Alternatively, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left rendering unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided rearward may be intentionally blurred.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game panel 1100 has the opening 1112 penetrating through the panel plate 1110, and the rear side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is inserted into the opening 1112. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be no rear part inserted into the opening 1112 in the peripheral wall 2501. In this case, the peripheral wall 2501 may be attached to the gaming panel 1100 having no opening 1112. . When the center role 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 having no opening 1112, the support portion 2503 may be mounted to the game panel 1100. In this case, the center portion 2500 does not have the flange 2502. You may do it.

[5-8f. Second attacker unit]
Next, the second attacker unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 403 (a) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, the right side middle unit, and the gate member in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 403 (b) is the second attacker unit, side right middle unit, and It is the perspective view which looked at the gate member from the back. FIG. 404 is an explanatory diagram showing, in cross-section, a passage of a game ball in the second attacker unit and the right side middle unit.

  The second attacker unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is disposed on the right side of the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. It is attached to the front of panel panel 1110 in panel 1100. The second attacker unit 2600 is provided with a second big winning opening 2006 which is openable and closable to the left (see FIG. 404).

  The second attacker unit 2600 includes a second special winning opening sensor 2601 for detecting the game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006, and a magnetic sensor for detecting an improper time acting near the second special winning opening 2006. 2602. In addition, the second attacker unit 2600 moves the second special winning opening door 2611 to open and close the second special winning opening 2006, and moves the second special winning opening door 2611 to open the second special winning opening 2006. A second attacker solenoid 2612 for opening and closing, a transmission member (not shown) for transmitting the advance and retreat of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 to move the second winning port door 2611, and a second winning port 2006 And a guiding passage 2613 for guiding the received game ball B and discharging it backward.

  In the second attacker unit 2600, the second large winning opening 2006 is opened to the left at a position closer to the right from the center in the left-right direction, and the second large winning opening 2006 is closed from the left. A winning opening door 2611 is provided.

  The second winning opening door 2611 has a semicircular lower side bulging downward, a right side linearly extending upward in contact with the right end of the lower side, and bulging leftward from the upper end of the right side. It is formed in the shape of a so-called wing composed of an arc-shaped left side in contact with the left side of the lower side. The second winning opening door 2611 has a cylindrical rotary shaft 2611a extending in the front-rear direction with the center of the lower side of the semicircular shape as an axis, and a link protruding rearward from a position further than the rotary shaft. Pins (not shown). The second large winning opening door 2611 has a lower rotating shaft rotatably mounted such that the upper end moves leftward.

  Although not shown in detail, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is attached so that the plunger projects downward. A transmission member (not shown) includes a base attached to the tip of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612, and a transmission pin that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction so that the link pin of the second winning port door 2611 can slide. And a slit to be inserted, and is mounted so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

  The second attacker unit 2600 is located such that the right side thereof is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 when assembled to the game board 5, and the second large winning opening 2006 and the peripheral wall portion of the center role item 2500. A space through which game balls B can flow is formed between the right side of 2501 and the right side. In the second attacker unit 2600, when assembled to the game board 5, the rear surface including the rear end of the guide passage 2613 protrudes more rearward than the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100.

  In the second attacker unit 2600, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is in a non-energized (OFF) state in a normal state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to its own weight and the own weight of the transmission member. In this state, the second special winning opening door 2611 is upright, and the second special winning opening 2006 is closed by the second special winning opening door 2611. In other words, in the normal state, the game ball B cannot be received in the second special winning opening 2006.

  In this normal state, according to a special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, When the second attacker solenoid 2612 is energized (ON), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the second special winning opening door 2611 inserted into the slit of the transmission member is pulled upward. In addition, by sliding in the slit, the second winning port door 2611 rotates counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 2611a.

  As a result, the upper end of the second special winning opening door 2611 moves to the left, the second special winning opening 2006 is opened to the left, and the right end side of the second special winning opening door 2611 is lowered. Thus, the state is inclined. That is, the second special winning opening 2006 is opened. In this state, when the flowing game ball B comes into contact with the second big winning opening door 2611, it rolls rightward due to its inclination and is received in the second big winning opening 2006. The game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006 is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2601, and then guided by the guiding passage 2613 and discharged backward. The game ball B released backward from the guidance passage 2613 is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the back guidance unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8 g. Side right middle unit]
Next, the side right center unit 2700 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The right side middle unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 is disposed immediately above the second attacker unit 2600 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The side right middle unit 2700 has one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012.

  In the right side middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 is always open upward in the left-right direction with the width of one game ball B, and is adjacent to the right side of the general winning opening 2001. The second sub-out port 2012 is always open upward with the width of two balls B.

  The side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 backward, and the first guide path 2701 that guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 backward. And two guide passages 2702. The first guidance passage 2701 is formed in a crank shape that extends rearward from the general winning opening 2001, and then bends rightward and further backwards. The second guide passage 2702 extends backward from the second sub-out port 2012 below the first guide passage 2701 and then bends rearward. The outlet of the first guide passage 2701 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2702 are arranged vertically.

  When the side right middle unit 2700 is assembled to the game board 5, the rear ends of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 protrude rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. I have.

  In the state in which the right side middle unit 2700 is assembled to the game board 5, the right end is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and the lower end is substantially in contact with the upper end of the second attacker unit 2600. A space through which the game balls B can flow is formed between the left end and the right side of the peripheral wall 2501 in the center role 2500. In this side right middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 is opened slightly upward to a position slightly to the left of the second big winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2012 is formed between the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005. It opens upward almost entirely between them (see FIG. 405 and the like).

  The right side middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 by the first guide path 2701, and is provided at the back. It can be delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the unit 3000. The game balls B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 are detected by the general winning port sensor 3051 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In addition, the side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 to the rear side of the panel board 1110 by the second guiding passage 2702, and then provides the back unit provided behind. It can be delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guidance unit 3050 in 3000. The game ball B delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 is detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8h. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The gate member 2800 of the front unit 2000 is disposed between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the middle right side unit 2700 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. Have been. The gate member 2800 includes a gate portion 2003 in which a lottery of a normal lottery result for opening and closing the second starting port 2004 by passing the game ball B is performed, and a gate sensor for detecting that the game cow B has passed through the gate portion 2003. 2801. A detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2801 is a gate 2003.

  The gate member 2800 has a guide piece 2802 projecting obliquely to the lower left from near the right end of the lower surface. The guide piece 2802 is for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003 to the lower left. When the guide piece 2802 is assembled to the game board 5, the guide piece 2802 is inclined so that an extension thereof passes near the left end of the general winning opening 2001 in the side right middle unit 2700.

  The gate member 2800 is located substantially at the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component member 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 when assembled on the game board 5, and the game is played on both left and right outer sides. The ball B forms a gap through which the ball can flow. The gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left from directly below the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center role 2500, and also to the right from above the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700. positioned.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 390 and 405. FIG. 405 is an explanatory diagram in which the right part in the game area in FIG. 390 is enlarged. When assembled on the game board 5, a center role 2500 is provided substantially at the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at both left and right outer portions and a lower portion of the center role item 2500. Further, on the left side of the center role item 2500 and above the upper left side unit 2300, a windmill W that is rotated by the contact of the game ball B is provided.

  The plurality of obstacle nails N implanted on the left side of the center role 2500 mainly enter the game ball B driven into the left side of the center role 2500 into a portion on the right side of the center of the windmill W. The wind turbine W is adjusted so as to enter a portion on the left side of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability than the above. Thus, the game ball B is driven down the left side of the center role 2500 to be able to enter the warp entrance 2511 of the center role 2500 with a certain probability.

  The plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 of the center role item 2500 and the gate member 2800 are larger than the gaming balls B flowing through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. The game balls B flowing through the second guide passage 2522 on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 are adjusted so as to pass through the gate 2003 with a higher probability. In addition, the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are adjusted so that the game ball B flows mainly on the left side of the right side portion of the gate member 2800. ing.

  The plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the gate member 2800 and the middle right side unit 2700 are adjusted so that the game balls B mainly flow on the left side of the middle right side unit 2700.

  In the game area 5a, the game ball B is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 and is driven upward from the left side along the periphery of the game area 5a. When the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a so as to flow on the left side of the center role 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails implanted on the left side of the center role 2500 as shown in FIG. 390. By N, it is guided to enter either the warp entrance 2511 of the center role 2500 or a portion on the right side of the center of the windmill W, and a portion on the left side of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability than these. You are guided to enter.

  The game ball B guided to a position on the left side of the center of the windmill W is guided rightward by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility that three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 will be accepted. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and thereafter, the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. 3064, and is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 after being detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, a privilege for paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given. The game ball B guided to the portion on the left side of the center of the windmill W is hardly accepted by the first starting port 2002. Then, the game balls B not accepted in the general winning opening 2001 are discharged from the out opening 2010 to the outside of the gaming area 5a.

  The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W is centered in the left and right direction (first starting port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged obliquely along the lower side of the center role 2500. Side and may be accepted into the first opening 2002. Further, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through a plurality of obstruction nails N arranged diagonally, and may flow down to the side unit 2200. May be accepted in the general winning opening 2001.

  The game ball B that has entered (accepted) the warp entrance 2511 of the center role 2500 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513, moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from a central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released from the central discharge part 2513a at the center of the stage 2513 into the game area 5a, the central discharge part 2513a is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, so that the first discharge port 2513a has a high probability. It is received in the starting port 2002. When the game ball B is released from the left and right side discharge portions 2513b of the central discharge portion 2513a, the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 with a certain probability.

  The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then transferred to the first receiving port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and the first starting port sensor. After being detected by 3052, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the first starting port sensor 3052 detects the game ball B, a lottery of the first special lottery result is performed, and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out. The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2002 is discharged from the out port 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

  In addition, the game ball B flowing on the left side of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a passes through the gate portion 2003, and is received in the second starting port 2004, the first winning port 2005, and the second winning port 2006. There is no possibility that it will be done.

  In the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment, the probability that the game ball B hit to the right of the center role 2500 is accepted by the second starting port 2004 is higher than the game ball B hit to the left of the center role 2500. The probability of being accepted by the first starting port 2002 is set higher. Thereby, when the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 is not in the open state, it is possible to urge the operation of hitting the game ball B to the left side of the center role item 2500 (“left hit”).

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game balls B enter the upper part of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 with a strength at which the game balls B penetrate above a portion that becomes lower rightward from near the center in the left-right direction. When driven, the game ball B flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

  More specifically, the game ball B is driven with a strength to abut against a stop portion 1006 projecting inward from the outer rail 1001 forming a part of the periphery of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed). Then, the game ball B abutting on the stopper 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 is discharged downward at a position slightly closer to the right than immediately above the gate portion 2003.

  The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is caused by a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800, the left side of the gate member 2800, the gate portion. In 2003, the gate member 2800 is guided in such a manner that the probability becomes lower in the order to the right, and flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center role 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the second guide passage 2522, it is on the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521. It is released from below. The game balls B discharged downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 are guided so that the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate member 2800 have substantially the same probability, and the right side of the gate member 2800 has a lower probability than them. Then, it flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

  The game ball B passing through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received in the second sub-out port 2012. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and is transferred to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and then the second sub-out port sensor. After being detected by 3054, it is discharged out of the game area 5a. The game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is released to the side right middle unit 2700 side after being detected by the gate sensor 2801. By the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801, a lottery of a normal lottery result in which the second starting port 2004 opens and closes is performed.

  The game ball B passing through the left side of the gate unit 2003 and the gate member 2800 has a high probability that the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700 have a high probability. Of the side right middle unit 2700 and occasionally accepted in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 or rarely in the second sub-out opening 2012. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. After being detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. At this time, a privilege for paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is provided.

  The game ball B flowing on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. Down to the left of

  At this time, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and “small hit” is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the second big prize is won. Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted with a high probability in the second big winning opening 2006.

  The game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006 is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2601, and then guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a. It is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guiding unit 3050 and is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. By detecting the game balls B by the second special winning opening sensor 2601, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

  The game ball B, which was not accepted by the second winning opening 2006 and flowed to the left of the second winning opening 2006, enters the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role 2500 and exits from the lower right guide passage 2530. From the first attacker unit 2400 side.

  The game ball B discharged downward (obliquely lower left) from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role 2500 flows down onto the first shelf 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400. In addition, since a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B is directly transmitted from the lower right guide passage 2530 to the first attacker unit 2400. It does not flow down to the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e.

  The game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400 rolls to the left due to its inclination, and moves the upper surface of the door portion 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 and the second shelf 2412b. After rolling, it is discharged to the left from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. Then, the game ball B discharged to the left from the second shelf 2412b falls on the third shelf 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 according to the momentum, and the inclination thereof. , And after rolling from the door 2417a to the fourth shelf 2412d, it is discharged from the fourth shelf 2412d to the left outside the first attacker unit 2400.

  In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role 2500, the plurality of nails N abut on the upper shelf 2412p without flowing down to the first shelf 2412a. May flow down. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper shelf 2412p rolls to the left due to its inclination, is discharged to the left from the left end of the upper shelf 2412p, and is then placed on the obstacle nail N implanted to the left. After contacting and turning downward and flowing down near the left end of the upper surface of the door portion 2417a in the first big winning opening door 2417, the door portion 2417a and the fourth shelf portion 2412d are rolled to the left and the first It is released outside the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, even when the game ball B rolls on the upper shelf portion 2412p, depending on the timing at which the game ball B is released from the upper shelf portion 2412p and the timing at which the first special winning opening 2005 is opened, the first large game ball B is opened. The winning opening 2005 may be accepted.

  Also, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role 2500, the ball rebounds to the right due to contact with the obstacle nail N or the right end of the upper shelf 2412p and the first shelf 2412a. By flowing down, the first shelf 2412a may roll rightward against its inclination and be discharged rightward (downward) from the right end of the first shelf 2412a. The game ball B released to the right from the right end of the first shelf 2412a flows between the first standing wall portion 2412e and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and flows down near the right end of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m. Then, it rolls leftward due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m and is received in the first sub-out port 2011. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and is not returned into the game area 5a, but the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. And discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

  When the game ball B is released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role item 2500 and “normal hit” is selected as a result of the normal lottery by the passing of the game ball B at the gate unit 2003, the second start is performed. Since the mouth door 2414 is movable and the second starting port 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B rolling the first shelf 2412a to the left is received in the second starting port 2004. there is a possibility. When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, the ball is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second start-up opening sensor 2401, a lottery of the second special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out.

  When the game ball B is released to the left from the second shelf 2412b, the game ball B is accepted by the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is obtained. As a result, when the "big hit" is selected by lottery, since the first big winning opening door 2417 is movable and the first big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, it is discharged to the left from the second shelf 2412b. The game ball B will be accepted with a high probability in the first big winning opening 2005. The game ball B received in the first special winning opening 2005 is detected by the first special winning opening sensor 2402 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. By detecting the game balls B by the first special winning opening sensor 2402, a privilege for paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

  In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B discharged to the left from the second shelf 2412b, the game ball B abuts on a step on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p, and flows down diagonally to the lower right, and the third shelf 2412b and the third The game ball B may enter the gap between the rack 2412c. The game ball B that has entered the gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c passes between the third standing wall 2412g and the fourth standing wall 2412h and is near the left end of the second horizontal wall 2412m. It falls down, rolls rightward due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m, and is received in the first sub-out port 2011.

  The game ball B discharged from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role item 2500 to the first attacker unit 2400 side is received by any of the second starting port 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the first sub-out port 2011. If not, the game is discharged from the out port 2010 at the lower end of the game area 5a to the lower rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a.

  Therefore, in order to open and close the first winning opening 2005 and the second winning opening 2006, the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 receives the game ball B, and the "small hit" It is necessary to have a lottery of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, such as a "big hit" or the like. While the first starting port 2002 is always open, the second starting port 2004 needs to let the game ball B pass through the gate unit 2003 to draw (or allocate) a "normal hit" as a normal lottery result. Therefore, the opportunity to accept the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 is lower than that of the first starting port 2002.

  Therefore, in a normal state, the player inserts the game ball B so that the game ball B flows down the left side of the center role 2500 so that the game ball B can be received in the first starting port 2002. The pachinko machine 1 can enjoy the original game by displaying the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N, and the game ball B to the first starting port 2002. Expectations can be raised for acceptance of

  Then, when the game ball B is accepted to the first starting port 2002 and “small hit” or “big hit” is drawn as the first special lottery result, the first big winning port 2005 or the second big winning port 2006 is obtained. Is opened and closed, the driving operation of the game ball B is changed to “right-handed” so that the game ball B can be received in the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006, and the first special winning opening is set. It is possible to increase a sense of expectation for accepting the game ball B to the 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006.

  At this time, a guide passage group 2520 including a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided at the upper right corner of the center role 2500, and the gate passage 2003 can be easily passed depending on the guide passage to be circulated. And the second sub-out port 2012 makes it easier to receive the game ball B so that the game ball B circulates in a desired guide path. The driving operation of B can be enjoyed.

  In addition, by performing “right-handed”, by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003, there is a possibility that a “normal hit” in which the second starting port 2004 is in the open state may be drawn, and The game ball B can be accepted by the second starting port 2004 and "small hits" or "big hits" can be drawn by lot, so that the sense of expectation for the game can be increased and the decrease in interest can be suppressed. Can be.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 406 to 409 and the like. FIG. 406 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 407 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 408 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit exploded for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 409 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit exploded for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 of the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape having an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a in the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is provided at the lower part of the front end of the back box 3010 in the form of a flat back front left decorative body 3030 and a back front right decorative body 3040 provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, respectively. The rear guidance unit 3050 provided at the rear end of the rear box 3010, the rear production unit 3100 provided at the rear end of the rear box 3010, and the rear guidance unit 3050 at the lower portion of the rear box 3010 are provided left and right apart from each other. The lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back right rendering unit 3250, and the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 provided behind the back lower left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back right rendering unit 3250 in the back box 3010. Have.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 in front of the back rear presentation unit 3100 and in the back box 3010, and is provided in the back of the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. Left back production unit 3500, back right production unit 3600 provided behind back right decoration 3040 in back box 3010, rear left decoration 3030 inside back box 3010 and back left A front left production unit 3700 provided between the production unit 3500, and a front right production unit provided between the rear right decoration 3040 and the rear right production unit 3600 in the back box 3010. 3800.

[5-9a. Back box]
The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 406 to 409 and the like. The back box 3010 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100. Inside the back box 3010, a back front left decorative body 3030 and a back front right decorative body 3040 and various effect units are attached, and an effect display device 1600 and a drive board unit 1700 are attached on the rear side. This back box 3010 is transparently formed of synthetic resin.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and an opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall in a square shape, and a flat frame-like shape protruding rearward with a gap from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b; two fixing grooves 3010c into which the upper fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is recessed upward from the inside of the frame at the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b; And a notch portion 3010d cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the vicinity of the center of the lower side in the left-right direction to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached.

  The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. The lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 so that the lock mechanism 3020 is slidable left and right on the left side of the rear surface of the cutout portion 3010d in a rear view.

  In addition, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting a decorative body, an effect unit, and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

  The back box 3010 has a strip-shaped reinforcing plate 3011 made of a metal plate attached along the lower side and the left and right sides of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is reinforced by the reinforcing plate 3011.

[5-9b. Back front left decorative body and back front right decorative body]
Subsequently, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 406 to 410 and the like. FIG. 410 is a front view of the pachinko machine in which the upper left corner of the game board is enlarged and the door frame is transparent. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the front end of the back box 3010 so as to be separated from each other left and right.

  The back front left decorative body 3030 includes a flat base 3031 extending vertically and a decorative seal 3032 attached to the front surface of the base 3031. The base 3031 extends vertically at the same height as the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010, and the left end is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decorative seal 3032 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The back front left decorative body 3030 is formed opaque, and the rear member can be made invisible from the front.

  The back front right decorative body 3040 includes a flat base 3041 extending vertically and a decorative seal 3042 attached to the front surface of the base 3041. The base 3041 extends from the upper end of the back box 3010 to near the center in the vertical direction, and the right end is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decorative seal 3042 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The back front right decorative body 3040 is formed opaque, and the rear member can be made invisible from the front.

  The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are extended in a flat plate shape in an assembled state on the game board 5 so that an outer peripheral edge located outside is located outside the game area 5a in front view. (See FIGS. 386 and 410). Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are formed in a flat plate shape so that the outer peripheral edge located outside is located outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Has been extended to.

  More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 410, when viewed from the front, the back front left decorative body 3030 is half of the bottom left back drive motor 3554 provided at the top left corner of the back left production unit 3500. To the position of. In other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outward from the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 in a front view. Furthermore, in other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3.

  Thus, when assembled to the game board 5, the lower half of the rear left and right elevating drive motor 3554 can be covered by the rear front left decorative body 3030 (shaded portion in FIG. 410), and the back left rear from the player side. The lifting drive motor 3554 can be made difficult to see. In the state assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the back left front decorative body 3030 covering the lower half of the back left vertical drive motor 3554 is located outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 (hatched portion in FIG. 410). The rear left and right elevating drive motor 3554 can be made invisible (invisible) from the player side by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the door frame 3. Accordingly, the functional components such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided behind the back front left decorative body 3030 can be made invisible to the player side, and the appearance of the gaming board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved. can do.

  The back front left decorative body 3030 extends so as to cover a part (lower half) of the back back left elevating drive motor 3554. When the back front left decorative body 3030 is assembled to the game board 5, the back back left elevating drive motor 3554 Although a part (upper half) can be seen from the front, by assembling the pachinko machine 1, the upper half of the rear left up / down driving motor 3554 can be covered and hidden by the door frame 3. Therefore, it is not necessary to extend the back front left decorative body 3030 so as to cover the entire back left lifting drive motor 3554, and it is possible to suppress the back front left decorative body 3030 from becoming unnecessarily large. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outside the function display unit 1400, even if the function display unit 1400 is not attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 in front view, the function display unit is provided. In place of 1400, the back front left decorative body 3030 can hide the back rear left vertical drive motor 3554 (functional component) provided at the rear.

  On the other hand, the back front right decorative body 3040 extends to the upper right corner of the back box 3010 so as to cover the entire back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 in the back right right rendering unit 3600 in front view. Even through the component member 1000 and the transparent game panel 1100, the rear right up / down drive motor 3654 is not visible from the front (the player side). Therefore, the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved by making the functional components such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided behind the back front right decorative body 3040 invisible from the player side. Accordingly, the same function and effect as those of the back front left decorative body 3030 can be exerted.

  As described above, according to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the present embodiment, at least a part of the functional components such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided at the rear are covered. Therefore, it is possible to make the functional component hard to be seen from the player side, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the game board 5 (the pachinko machine 1).

  Also, as described above, the front front left side decorative member 3030 and the front front right side decorative body 3040 can cover the front of the functional component provided at the rear, so that the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are made transparent. Also, the functional component can be made invisible to the player. That is, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Therefore, the transparent front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a so as to give the player a sense of openness, and at the same time provide the player with the actual game area 5a. Although the size of the game area does not change, the game area 5a can be shown large (wide) to the player. At this time, the parts outside the game area 5a in the decorative seal 3032 of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the decorative seal 3042 of the back front right decorative body 3040 to which a predetermined decoration is applied are the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100. Can be viewed from the front of the game area, and thereby, the outside of the game area 5a can be decorated, and the game area 5a can be made larger than the actual game area. The board 5 (the pachinko machine 1) can be used.

  In addition, as described above, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, so that the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, and the back unit. 3000, etc., can be reflected or refracted forward (by the player) by the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100, so that the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 emit light. The decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

  In addition, a part of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, which extends outside the game area 5a, allows a functional component such as a drive motor or a drive solenoid provided at the rear to be provided from the player side. Since it can be made invisible, all functional components may be provided outside the game area 5a in front view. At this time, since the size of the game board 5 is limited, in order to secure a space for providing all the functional components outside the game area 5a, the size of the game area 5a is relatively reduced. Since there is a possibility that a problem that must be caused may occur, a part of the functional component is moved out of the game area 5a with a balance that allows the game area 5a to be larger than the size of the game board 5 as in the present embodiment. It is desirable to provide.

  Further, it is desirable that the decoration of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 be a decoration related to the decoration (design) in the game area 5a in a front view. Thereby, the design in the game area 5a can be extended to outside the game area 5a by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. The pachinko machine 1 can make the 5a look larger than it actually is, and can strongly attract the player's interest.

[5-9c. Back guidance unit]
Next, the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 411 and the like. FIG. 411 (a) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 411 (b) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. The back guiding unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower part of the front end in the back box 3010, and has a shape in which both ends extending left and right are bent upward. Almost the entire back guiding unit 3050 is formed transparent.

  The back guiding unit 3050 includes a general winning opening sensor 3051 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening sensor 3052 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2002, Out port sensor 3053 for detecting game ball B received in out port 2010, second sub out port sensor 3054 for detecting game ball B received in second sub out port 2012, and warp entrance 2511 of center role 2500 And a magnetic sensor 3055 that is provided at a position behind the sensor and detects illegal magnetism.

  In addition, the back guiding unit 3050 is received at the first delivery port 3061 where the game ball B received at the first startup port 2002 of the startup port unit 2100 is delivered and the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200. A second delivery port 3062 for receiving the game ball B, a third delivery port 3063 for receiving the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 in the middle of the side unit 2200, and a general left side of the side unit 2200. The fourth delivery port 3064 to which the game ball B received in the winning opening 2001 is delivered, and the fourth delivery port 3064 to which the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 and the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 are delivered. The game ball B received at the fifth delivery port 3065 and the first winning port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 is delivered. The sixth delivery port 3066, the seventh delivery port 3067 to which the game ball B received at the second big winning port 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 is delivered, and the general winning port 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 And a ninth delivery port 3069 through which the game balls B received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700 are delivered.

  Further, although not shown in detail, the back guiding unit 3050 guides the game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 rightward and then discharges the game ball B downward, and a second delivery path. The game ball B delivered to the delivery port 3062 and the game ball B delivered to the third delivery port 3063 are merged and then discharged downward, and delivered to the fourth delivery port 3064. A third discharge path for guiding the game ball B downward and discharging diagonally to the lower right, and a position where the game ball B transferred to the eighth delivery port 3068 is below the sixth delivery port 3066. And a fourth discharge path that guides leftward to a position on the left side of the sixth delivery port 3066 and then discharges diagonally to the lower left. A fifth delivery port 3065, a sixth delivery port 3066, a seventh delivery port 3067, and a ninth delivery port 3069 communicate with the fourth discharge path.

  The game ball B received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 and transferred to the first delivery port 3061 is discharged downward after being detected by the first starting port sensor 3052 in the middle of the first discharge path. Is done. The game ball B received at the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200 and transferred to the second receiving opening 3062, and the game ball received at the general winning opening 2001 on the middle side and transferred to the third receiving opening 3063. The ball B merges in the second discharge path, and is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning opening 2001. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 on the left side of the side unit 2200 and delivered to the fourth delivering opening 3064 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning opening 2001 in the middle of the third discharge path. .

  The game ball B is received by the second starting port 2004 or the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 and passed to the fifth delivery port 3065, and is received by the first winning port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. The game ball B delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 and the game ball B received at the second winning port 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 are the fourth Discharged through the discharge path.

  The game ball B received at the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 and delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is located upstream of a portion communicating with the ninth delivery port 3069 in the fourth discharge path. It is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051 and discharged through the fourth discharge path. The game ball B received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700 and transferred to the ninth delivery port 3069 is merged with the fourth discharge path after being detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054, and It is discharged through four discharge channels.

  The back guiding unit 3050 includes an out ball detecting member 3080 that detects the game ball B received in the out port 2010. The out ball detection member 3080 is driven into the game area 5a, and is received by the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first winning opening 2005, and the second winning opening 2006. In order to detect the game ball B received from the out port 2010 opened at the lower end of the game area 5a, of the game balls B that did not exist (the game balls B to which the privilege was not given, also referred to as “out balls”). belongs to.

  The out-ball detecting member 3080 is inserted into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 from the rear, and the game ball B is formed so that the game ball B can flow therethrough and extends in the front-rear direction. A partition portion 3082 that divides the inside into right and left, a flange portion 3083 that protrudes in the shape of a flat plate in the left-right direction from the outer periphery of the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3081, and a game ball B that is continuous with the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3081 and is lowered (See FIG. 389). The out ball detecting member 3080 has an out port sensor 3053 between the cylindrical portion 3081 and the rear cover 3084.

  The cylindrical portion 3081 has substantially the same size as the out port 2010, and has a width in the left-right direction that is sufficient for two game balls B (a width not having three game balls B), and a lower inner surface. It is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear side. The partition part 3082 is provided near the rear end of the cylindrical part 3081, and is partitioned on both left and right sides into a size that allows one game ball B to pass therethrough. The partitioning portion 3082 has a front end side curved so as to protrude forward as it goes downward, and protrudes forward shorter than the diameter of the game ball B.

  In the out ball detecting member 3080, two out mouth sensors 3053 are provided side by side. The left outlet sensor 3053 detects the game ball B flowing on the left side of the partition 3082 in the cylindrical portion 3081, and the right outlet sensor 3053 detects the right side of the partition 3082 in the cylindrical portion 3081. The game balls B which have been distributed are detected. The outlet sensor 3053 is a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch.

  The two out-opening sensors 3053 are provided such that the detection direction of the game ball B (the axial direction of the detection hole through which the game ball B passes) is parallel to the lower inner surface of the cylindrical portion 3081. As a result, the distribution direction of the game balls B flowing through the cylindrical portion 3081 does not change even at the portion of the out-mouth sensor 3053, so that the game balls B can be smoothly detected by the out-mouth sensor 3053. Can be quickly discharged to prevent stagnation on the front side of the outlet sensor 3053.

  In this out-ball detecting member 3080, the tubular portion 3081 is inserted into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100 in a state where the out-ball detecting member 3080 is assembled to the game board 5 (see FIG. 389).

  When the out ball detecting member 3080 is assembled to the game board 5, the upper front end of the cylindrical portion 3081 protrudes forward from the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000 (see FIG. 389). That is, the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 3081. In addition, the lower end of the rear cover 3084 protrudes below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200 through the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200.

  The out ball detection member 3080 flows down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 in the game area 5a, and is guided rearward by the out guiding portion 1003 to be received in the out port 2010. The game ball B passed through the cylindrical portion 3081 is detected by one of the two out-port sensors 3053, and then guided downward by the rear cover 3084 to be discharged. The out ball detection member 3080 discharges the game ball B to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the main body frame 4 without abutting the game ball B on the substrate holder 1200.

  According to the out-ball detecting member 3080 of the present embodiment, since the two out-port sensors 3053 provided on the left and right are partitioned by the partition portion 3082, the gaming ball B flowing down the left side of the center role 2500 is removed. The game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center role item 2500 can be guided to the right out-port sensor 3053 side while being able to be guided to the left-side out port sensor 3053 side. Therefore, in each of the left and right out-mouth sensors 3053, it is determined whether the player has a tendency to "left strike" or "right strike" based on the number of game balls B detected per time. Based on the discrimination, it is possible to prompt a driving operation that is optimal for the game situation, and entertain the intended game.

  In addition, in the out ball detecting member 3080, since the forward projection of the partition portion 3082 is shortened so that the game balls B can easily get over, when many game balls B enter the out port 2010 per hour, the partition The game ball B can escape to the left or right side of the part 3082 where the circulation amount of the game ball B is relatively small, and the game ball B can be discharged without delay at the out port 2010.

  In addition, since the lower end of the rear cover 3084 projects downward from the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first winning opening 2005, The game ball B received by the second special winning opening 2006, the first sub-out opening 2011, and the second sub-out opening 2012 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 flows backward by the out-ball detecting member 3080 and is detected by the out-opening sensor 3053. It can be prevented from being detected, and only the “out ball” received in the out port 2010 can be accurately detected.

  In the present embodiment, the out-ball detecting member 3080 is provided in the back unit 3000. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The out-ball detecting member 3080 may be attached to the game panel 1100. At this time, if the game panel 1100 has the out recess 1123, the out ball detecting member 3080 can be attached, so that it can correspond to the existing game panel 1100 having the out recess 1123. In addition to this, it can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first winning opening 2005, and the second winning opening 2006 are driven into the game area 5a. Since the game ball B (“out ball”) that was not accepted by any of them can be detected by the out mouth sensor 3053, the first sub out mouth sensor 2403, and the second sub out mouth sensor 3054, for example, a specific winning If the "out ball" is not detected even though the acceptance of the game ball B into the mouth is continuously detected, it means that a specific winning port has been misconducted, It is possible to notify that the wrongdoing is being performed.

  In addition, since the number can be counted by detecting the "out ball", the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first winning opening 2005, and the second winning opening 2005. The number of “winning balls” and the number of “out balls” counted by the detection of the game balls B received in 2006, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first large The “payout rate” of the pachinko machine 1 can be known from the number of “safe balls” paid out by receiving the game balls B into the winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. Although not shown, a display unit for displaying the “outtake rate” is provided on the rear side of the game board 5.

  Further, in the game board 5, all the game balls B ("all") hit into the game area 5a are detected, or all the game balls B ("all") discharged from the game area 5a are detected. ), Only the “out ball” is detected by the out mouth sensor 3053, the first sub out mouth sensor 2403, and the second sub out mouth sensor 3054. By comparing the numbers of "" and "all", it is possible to detect the occurrence of clogging of balls in the game board 5.

[5-9d. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 412 to 416 and the like. FIG. 412 (a) is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 412 (b) is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 413 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear production unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 414 is an exploded perspective view of the rear production unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 415 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable configuration of the back rear production unit from the front. FIG. 416 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back effect unit.

  The rear production unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 is attached to the rearmost position (the front surface of the rear wall) in the rear box 3010. The back rear production unit 3100 has a U-shape that is open downward when viewed from the front, and is formed to be approximately the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010. The back-side effect unit 3100 includes a back-side movable decorative body 3110 extending in the left-right direction, and a back-side movable mechanism 3120 for moving the back-side movable decorative body 3110 in the vertical direction.

  The back movable decorative body 3110 extends in the left-right direction and has a translucent decorative body 3111 having a relief-shaped decoration on the front surface, and a plurality of light-transmitting decorative bodies 3111 provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111. It includes a back decoration board 3114 on which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are mounted, and a decoration base 3115 attached to the decoration 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the back decoration board 3114. Each of the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the back decoration board 3114 is a full-color LED. With the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b of the back decoration board 3114, the decoration 3111 (the back movable decoration 3110) can be illuminated.

  In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 includes a left slider 3116 extending vertically on the left side of the decorative body 3111, and a right slider 3117 extending vertically on the right side of the decorative body 3111. The left slider 3116 includes a movable projection 3116a projecting leftward from the vicinity of the lower end, a locking projection 3116b projecting triangularly leftward from the vicinity of the upper end, and a detection piece 3116c provided at the upper end. Have.

  The back rear movable mechanism 3120 is formed in a U-shape that is open downward when viewed from the front, and has a unit base 3121 mounted in the back box 3010, and extends vertically in a cylindrical shape on the left side of the unit base 3121. And a slide shaft 3122 that supports the left slider 3116 of the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and extends vertically up and down in parallel with the slide shaft 3122 on the left side of the slide shaft 3122. And a spiral shaft 3123 in which a groove is formed.

  The rear-rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a transmission gear 3124 in the form of a spur gear attached to the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123, a motor gear 3125 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the transmission gear 3124, and a motor gear 3125 having a rotating shaft. The back rear drive motor 3126 mounted, the motor base 3127 mounting the back rear drive motor 3126 to the lower end of the left side of the unit base 3121, and the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123 rotatably mounted to the unit base 3121. It includes a bearing member 3128 and a lower bearing member 3129 rotatably attached to the unit base 3121 near the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123.

  Further, the back rear movable mechanism 3120 is screwed to the spiral shaft 3123, and is a slide guide 3130 that can abut from below on the movable projection 3116a of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, and a left side of the spiral shaft 3123. A transmission slider 3131 extending vertically and capable of ascending and descending, and a lower end side of which can contact the slide guide 3130 from above, a spring 3132 for urging the transmission slider 3131 upward, and a transmission slider 3131. A link member 3133 that rotates around the axis in the front-rear direction by elevating and lowering, a lock member 3134 that slides in the left-right direction by the rotation of the link member 3133 and can contact the locking projection 3116b of the rear movable decorative body 3110, It has.

  Further, the back rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a back rear upper detection sensor 3135 that detects the detection piece 3116c of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, a back rear lower detection sensor 3136 that detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, and A front left cover 3137 attached to the left side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the left end side of the movable decorative body 3110 from the front, and a right side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the right end side of the back and back movable decorative body 3110 from the front. The rear right drive motor 3126, the rear rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the rear lower lower detection sensor 3136, which are mounted on the lower front of the front right cover 3138 and the front left cover 3137, are connected to the effect driving board 1720. Between the back rear left relay board 3139 that relays the A back right rear relay board 3140 relaying the connection is assigned a back after decoration board 3114 of the back after the movable decorative body 3110 and effect driving substrate 1720, and a.

  The unit base 3121 has a shock absorbing member 3121a that abuts on the lower surface of the left slider 3116 and the lower surface of the right slider 3117 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 that has moved downward to absorb a shock. The upper end and the lower end of the slide shaft 3122 are sandwiched between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137.

  The slide guide 3130 protrudes rightward from the vicinity of the lower end, and has a detection piece 3130a that is detected by the back lower detection sensor 3136. The slide guide 3130 is provided so as to be vertically slidable between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137, and is incapable of rotating around the axis of the spiral shaft 3123 by being in contact with them. The lower surface of the movable projection 3116a of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can contact the upper end surface of the slide guide 3130. The slide guide 3130 is configured such that an upper end surface of a lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 can contact the lower surface of the slide guide 3130.

  The transmission slider 3131 is mounted to be vertically movable between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137. The transmission slider 3131 can be moved up and down only within a predetermined range by the front left cover 3137. The transmission slider 3131 has a lower protruding portion 3131a protruding rightward on the lower end side, an upper protruding portion 3131b protruding rightward on the upper end side, and a columnar shape protruding rearward from near the upper end of the upper protruding portion 3131b. Projection pin 3131c. The transmission slider 3131 is configured such that the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 can contact the upper surface of the lower protrusion 3131a. In the transmission slider 3131, the projection pin 3131c is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133.

  The spring 3132 has an upper end attached to the unit base 3121 and a lower end attached to the upper projection 3131b of the transmission slider 3131 to urge the transmission slider 3131 upward.

  The link member 3133 has a triangular shape with a vertex chamfered at each vertex when viewed from the front. The link member 3133 is attached to the unit base 3121 near one vertex so as to be rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction. The link member 3133 has a slot-shaped first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the left apex from the rotation axis, and a slot-shaped first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the top apex from the rotation axis. A second slit 3133b. In the link member 3133, the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b.

The lock member 3134 is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 by the front left cover 3137 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction.
The lock member 3134 protrudes rearward in a columnar shape, forms a transmission pin 3134a that is slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, and forms a flat upper end surface and moves in the left-right direction. A contact surface 3134b that extends and can contact the lower surface of the locking protrusion 3116b of the rear movable movable body 3110, and is inclined to move leftward from the right end of the contact surface 3134b downward; A guide surface 3134c with which the locking projection 3116b can abut.

  The front right cover 3138 cooperates with the unit base 3121 to support the right slider 3117 of the rear movable movable body 3110 in a vertically slidable manner.

  Next, the operation of the back effect unit 3100 will be described. In the normal state, the back rear production unit 3100 is in a retracted position in which the back movable ornamental body 3110 has moved upward as shown in FIG. 415 (FIG. 416 (a)), and the slide guide 3130 Are located near the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123, and the lock member 3134 moves rightward to be at the lock position. In this state, the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the left slider 3116 of the rear movable movable body 3110 is in contact with the upper end surface of the slide guide 3130, and the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134 is in contact with the rear movable movable body. The lower surface of the locking projection 3116b of 3110 is in contact.

  In a normal state, the transmission slider 3131 is located at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 3132. Since the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, the spring The biasing force of 3132 is acting in the clockwise direction about the rotation axis of the link member 3133, and is biased in the direction in which the lock member 3134 slides rightward. Therefore, the lock member 3134 is maintained at the lock position by the urging force of the spring 3132.

  In this state, downward movement of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is regulated by the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134. Therefore, even if one of the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134 moves from the position for some reason (inconvenience), the remaining movable body 3110 can be prevented from moving downward (falling) due to the rest. it can.

  In a normal state, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 is located above the rotation axis of the link member 3133, and the second slit 3133b into which the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted rotates. It is located to the right of the axis. The back upper detection sensor 3135 detects the detection piece 3116c of the back movable decoration 3110, and the back lower detection sensor 3136 does not detect the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130.

  In the normal state of the evacuation position, the back rear production unit 3100 is located behind the back upper production unit 3400, and is invisible from the front (the player side).

  In this normal state, when the spiral shaft 3123 is rotated in a predetermined direction (here, counterclockwise direction in plan view) by the back rear drive motor 3126, the slide guide 3130 screwed to the spiral shaft 3123 moves downward. Move to. Even if the slide guide 3130 moves downward, since the locking projection 3116b of the rear movable movable body 3110 is in contact with the lock member 3134, the rear movable decorative body 3110 cannot move downward from the retracted position. Instead, only the slide guide 3130 moves downward away from the movable projection 3116a of the rear movable decorative body 3110.

  Then, the slide guide 3130 moves downward due to the rotation of the spiral shaft 3123, and when the detection piece 3130 a is detected by the back lower detection sensor 3136, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 is moved downward by the lower protrusion 3131 a of the transmission slider 3131. It comes into contact with the upper end surface (see FIG. 416 (b)). When the slide guide 3130 further moves downward in a state where the back-back lower detection sensor 3136 detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, the slide guide 3130 presses the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 downward. The transmission slider 3131 moves downward together with the slide guide 3130 against the urging force of the spring 3132.

  As the transmission slider 3131 moves downward, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 into which the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted is pressed downward, and the link member 3133 is rotated counterclockwise about its rotation axis. It turns in the surrounding direction. Then, by rotating the link member 3133 in the counterclockwise direction, the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133 moves to the left, and via the transmission pin 3134a inserted in the second slit 3133b. The lock member 3134 moves to the left (see FIG. 416 (c)).

  When the lock member 3134 moves to the left from the locking protrusion 3116b of the back movable movable body 3110, the lock (restriction downward) by the lock member 3134 is released, and the back movable movable body 3110 falls. At this time, the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130 that is moving downward is in a non-detection state with respect to the back rear detection sensor 3136, and the rotation of the back rear drive motor 3126 stops.

  Then, the dropped movable decorative body 3110 comes into contact with the shock absorbing member 3121a of the unit base 3121, and stops falling to be in the appearance position (see FIG. 416 (c)). In the state of this appearance position, the slide guide 3130 is located below the lower end of the left slider 3116 of the back movable movable body 3110, and the back movable movable body 3110 does not abut.

  The back-side effect unit 3100 allows the back-side movable decorative body 3110 to be visible from the front (from the player side) in the appearance position where the back-side movable decorative body 3110 has fallen. In this state, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back decoration board 3114 emit light as appropriate, so that the back movable decoration 3110 (decoration 3111) can be illuminated and decorated. The luminous decoration can entertain the player.

  When returning the back movable decorative body 3110 from the appearance position of the lower moving end to the retracted position in the normal state, the back shaft drive motor 3126 causes the spiral shaft 3123 to move in the reverse direction (here, clockwise in plan view). Direction) to move the slide guide 3130 upward. When the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the transmission slider 3131 slides upward together with the slide guide 3130 by the urging force of the spring 3132. When the transmission slider 3131 moves upward, contrary to the above, the link member 3133 rotates clockwise, and the lock member 3134 moves rightward and stops at the lock position. Become.

  Also, as the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a comes into contact with the lower surface of the movable projection 3116a of the rear movable decoration 3110, and the slide guide 3130 raises the movable projection 3116a upward. By pressing, the rear movable decorative body 3110 moves upward (see FIG. 416 (d)).

  Then, when the back movable ornamental body 3110 is moved upward to the vicinity of the retracted position by the slide guide 3130, the locking projection 3116b comes into contact with the guide surface 3134c of the lock member 3134 from below. When the locking projection 3116b abuts against the guide surface 3134c from below and the locking projection 3116b presses the guide surface 3134c upward, a force that causes the lock member 3134 to move leftward due to the inclination of the guide surface 3134c. Thus, the lock member 3134 slides rightward against the urging force of the spring 3132 which is to be moved rightward via the transmission slider 3131 and the link member 3133.

  When the lock protrusion 3116b is positioned above the upper end of the guide surface 3134c of the lock member 3134 by the upward movement of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the guide surface 3134c is not pressed upward by the lock protrusion 3116b. The lock member 3134 is slid rightward by the urging force of the spring 3132 to be in the lock position. As a result, the right end side of the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134 is located below the locking projection 3116b of the back movable ornamental body 3110, and the lock member 3134 moves the rear movable ornament body 3110 downward. Can be regulated.

  At this time, the detection piece 3116c of the back movable ornament 3110 is detected by the back upper detection sensor 3135, and the rotation of the back drive motor 3126 stops. In this way, the back movable ornament 3110 can return from the appearance position to the retracted position, which is the normal state.

  According to the back side rendering unit 3100 of the present embodiment, the back movable ornamental body 3110 extending to the left and right is dropped from the retracted position invisible from the player side to the appearance position in which it is visible. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted.

  In addition, since the lock member 3134 that locks (restricts) the rear movable movable body 3110 in the retracted position is moved leftward to release the lock, the lock member 3134 is rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. In comparison with the case where the lock is released by moving the lock, the back movable ornamental body 3110 can be dropped without moving upward when the lock is released.

[5-9d-1. Movable decorative body behind back]
Subsequently, the back movable decoration 3110 in the back effect unit 3100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 417 to 431. FIG. 417 is a front view showing the back-side movable decorative body together with the back-side decorative substrate. FIG. 418 (a) is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 417, and FIG. 418 (b) is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 417. FIG. 419 (a) is a perspective view of the back decorative movable body viewed from the front, and FIG. 419 (b) is a perspective view of the back decorative movable body viewed from the rear. FIG. 420 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear movable decorative body viewed from the front, and FIG. 421 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear movable decorative body viewed from the rear. FIG. 422 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the rear movable ornamental body, and FIG. 423 is an explanatory diagram showing the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative board in the front view of FIG. 422 by broken lines. FIG. 424 (a) is a front view showing a part of the decoration body in the back movable movable body, and FIG. 424 (b) is a front view showing a part of the decoration sheet in the same part as the decoration body of FIG. (C) is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the back decoration substrate at the same site as the decoration body of (a).

  FIG. 425 is an enlarged sectional view showing the upper part of FIG. 418 (a) in an enlarged manner. FIG. 426 is an exploded view showing the cross sectional view of FIG. 425 in an exploded manner. FIG. 427 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a relationship between the decoration by the decorative body and the decorative sheet and the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative board by enlarging a part of the front surface of the rear movable decorative body. FIG. 428 (a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the back decoration board at the position of the first LED, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the light-guide radiating plate in the part which is doing from the front, (c) is the LED housing part of the light-guide radiating plate with respect to the 2nd decoration part in a decoration body and a decoration sheet, and the 1st of the back decoration board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of arrangement | positioning of one LED from the front. FIG. 429 is a front view showing a part of the back-side decorative substrate in an enlarged manner together with the copper foil of the circuit pattern. FIG. 430 (a) is a front view of the back decoration board, and FIG. 430 (b) is a rear view of the back decoration board. FIG. 431 (a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of a decorative body in the back movable movable body, and FIG. 431 (b) shows a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative portion having a different form from that of FIG. It is an expanded sectional view, and (c) is an enlarged sectional view showing a part of ornaments which have a metal ornament part of a form different from (a) and (b).

  As shown in FIG. 417 and the like, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 extends in the left-right direction, and is provided with a decorative portion 3150 made of a predetermined decoration when viewed from the front. To be more specific, the decorative portion 3150 of the back-side movable decorative body 3110 has, in a front view, a horizontal direction between the two first decorative portions 3151 provided near the left and right ends, respectively, and the two first decorative portions 3151. And a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in a row. The first decorative portion 3151 imitates a single cherry blossom. Although not shown, each of the second decorative portions 3152 imitates a predetermined character, and is arranged side by side to form a predetermined logo according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. ing. As described above, the back movable movable body 3110 is decorated with a logo between two cherry blossoms.

  As shown in FIGS. 417 to 421 and the like, the back movable decorative body 3110 in the back back effect unit 3100 extends in the left-right direction and forms a part of the decorative portion 3150 by embossed (relief-shaped) irregularities. And a translucent sheet-shaped decorative sheet provided with a transparent flat decorative body 3111 having a pattern and a decoration (picture) provided behind the decorative body 3111 and constituting the rest of the decorative portion 3150 3112, a transparent flat light guide radiation plate 3113 provided behind the decorative sheet 3112, and a plurality of first LEDs and second LEDs mounted on the front surface provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113. The decorative board 3114 attached to the decorative body 3111 so as to cover the back side of the decorative board 3114, the decorative board 3111, and the decorative body 3111. A left slider 3116 extending vertically at the side, and a, and the right slider 3117 extending vertically on the right side than the decorative body 3111.

[5-9d-2. Decorative body of movable decorative body behind back]
The decorative body 3111 has a flat general surface on the front side and the rear side. The decorative body 3111 includes a first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward from the front general surface, a second decorative protrusion 3111b shorter than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and protruding forward, and a second decorative protrusion. And a third decorative protrusion 3111c which is shorter than the portion 3111b and protrudes forward. The first decorative protrusion 3111a is provided at a portion that is the contour of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. The first decoration protrusion 3111a in the part of the first decoration part 3151 is formed on the outer periphery of the petal of the first decoration part 3151 imitating cherry blossoms, and on the part imitating the central stamen and pistil, respectively. . The first decorative projections 3111a in the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 are formed so as to surround the outer periphery of each of the second decorative portions 3152 in a double (two) manner. The first decorative projection 3111a is curved so that the front surface swells forward.

  The second decorative projection 3111b is provided outside the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative part 3152. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom or a petal smaller than the first decorative portion 3151. The second decorative projection 3111b is curved so that the front surface swells forward.

  The third decorative projection 3111c is provided in the frame of the first decorative projection 3111a. The front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 is curved. Further, the third decorative projection 3111c at a portion corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 has a flat front surface.

  The first decorative projection 3111a and the third decorative projection 3111c of the decorative body 3111 constitute a part of each of the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative part 3152 of the decorative part 3150.

  In addition, the decorative body 3111 is provided at the portion (first foil stamping area (see FIG. 431 (a))) of the first decorative projection 3111a that projects forward of the second decorative projection 3111b (see FIG. 431 (a)). In FIGS. 422 to 424, a shaded portion is provided. The entire decoration body 3111 except for the metal decoration part 3111d is formed to be colorless and transparent. As shown in FIG. 425 and FIG. 431 (a) and the like, the metal decorative portion 3111d of the present embodiment is provided at a curved front part of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and is provided with the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It is not provided on the side part. Thereby, the creepage distance EL from the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration 3111 to the back decoration substrate 3114 is made longer than when the metal decoration portion 3111d is also provided on the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a. Thus, the insulating property against the discharge of static electricity or the like and the short circuit can be improved.

  Since the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d along the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, it is possible to impart a sense of quality by the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d. In addition, the three-dimensional effect of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be further enhanced by the curvature of the metal decorative portion 3111d. As shown in FIG. 423 and the like, the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided in a portion of the back decoration substrate 3114 in front of the first LED 3114a, and is provided with the first LED 3114a and the light guide radiation plate 3113. Is difficult to see from the front.

  Further, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, light from the first LED 3114a or the like of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 is transmitted by the back surface (rear surface) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. The light can be reflected backward to illuminate the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 provided at the rear, and the decoration (first contour portion 3112a) of the decorative sheet 3112 can be more easily seen.

  The metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by pressing a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment) by hot stamping. More specifically, first, a base material of the decorative body 3111 is formed by injection molding of a synthetic resin. The base material of the formed decorative body 3111 is mounted at a predetermined position of the hot stamping device with the front side from which the first decorative projections 3111a and the like project upward facing upward. At this time, a transfer sheet having a desired metal foil and a flat hot plate having an elastic lower surface and heated to a predetermined temperature are arranged above the base material of the decorative body 3111. . Then, the hot plate is lowered from the upper end of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the base material of the decorative body 3111 to a position at a predetermined distance below (a position higher than the upper end of the second decorative protrusion 3111b), and The metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred (foil pressed) to the first decorative protrusion 3111a by heat. Thereby, the metal decoration part 3111d is formed in the part of the first foil stamping area FS1 above (in front of) the second decoration protrusion 3111b in the decoration body 3111 (see FIG. 431 (a)). .

  In the hot plate of the hot stamping device used to form the metal decoration portion 3111d of the present embodiment, since the portion in contact with the decoration 3111 to which the metal foil of the transfer sheet is to be transferred has elasticity, the transfer destination ( Even if the front surface of the first decorative projection 3111a is not flat but curved, it can be elastically deformed along the surface, and the metal foil can be favorably placed on a three-dimensional shape such as a curved surface. Can be transferred (foil pressed). Thereby, compared with the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by plating or vapor deposition, it is possible to easily form the metal decorative portion 3111d without requiring large-scale equipment, and to suppress an increase in cost.

  In the above embodiment, the decorative body 3111 has the metal decorative portion 3111d provided only at the tip end of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the metal decoration portion 3111d is formed by the hot stamping device, the hot plate is lowered to a position lower than the second decoration protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decoration protrusion 3111c, thereby forming the first decoration protrusion. The decorative body 3111 can be formed by providing a metal decorative portion 3111d at the tip of the portion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b.

  Alternatively, in a state where the base material of the decorative body 3111 is mounted on the hot stamping device, first, the hot plate is moved to the second decorative projection using a transfer sheet having a metal foil (first metal foil) of a predetermined color. Lowering to a position (second foil stamping area FS2) lower than the portion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c, the first metal foil is applied to the end portions of the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b. Transcribe. Subsequently, using a transfer sheet having a metal foil (second metal foil) of a different color from the first metal foil, the hot plate is set lower than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and higher than the second decorative protrusion 3111b. It is lowered to the position (first foil stamping area FS1), and the second metal foil is transferred to the tip of the first decorative projection 3111a (see FIG. 431 (b)). As a result, the decorative body 3111 including the metal decorative portions 3111d of different colors between the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b is formed without performing the masking process on the base material of the decorative body 3111. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the metal decoration 3111d of the decoration 3111 is formed by hot stamping (foil stamping). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after a metal film is formed on the surface of the base material of the decorative body 3111 by plating or vapor deposition, the metal film at a portion excluding the first decorative protrusion 3111a is peeled (laser peeled) by laser light, and the first film is peeled off. A decorative body 3111 having a metal decorative part 3111d on the decorative protrusion 3111a may be formed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 431 (c), the metal decorative portion 3111d may be provided not only at the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a but also at the side portion.

  The decorative body 3111 of the back movable decorative body 3110 has a rear concave part 3111e that is concave toward the front from the rear general surface. The rear concave portion 3111e is provided so as to correspond to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. The concave portion 3111e thereafter equalizes the thickness of the decorative body 3111, so that deformation due to sink of the resin during injection molding can be suppressed.

  The rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is provided so as to be recessed forward at a portion corresponding to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c on the flat rear surface. Therefore, the flat portion of the rear surface excluding the rear concave portion 3111e comes into contact with the front surface of the later-described first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112. As a result, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 come into close contact with each other, so that light is not irregularly reflected between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. The picture or the like of the first contour portion 3112a of the decoration sheet 3112 can be clearly seen through the transparent decoration body 3111.

  In addition, since the rear concave portion 3111e is provided at a portion corresponding to the third decorative protrusion 3111c, the rear concave portion 3111e is located in front of the later-described first light diffuser 3112c and second light diffuser 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112. It is provided in the part. As a result, a gap is formed between the rear recess 3111e and the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112, and the gap irradiates light emitted from the front to the rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111 from the front. The light is irregularly reflected between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear concave portion 3111e, and the portion of the rear concave portion 3111e is brightened by light from the front. Thereby, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decoration board 3114 are not emitting light, the portions of the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d in the decoration sheet 3112 by light from the front, that is, The first decorative portion 3151 imitating cherry blossoms and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 forming the logo are brightened and are easily visible from the front.

  Further, the decorative body 3111 has a plurality of mounting bosses 3111f that protrude rearward from the rear surface in a cylindrical shape. The mounting boss 3111f is for mounting the decorative body base 3115 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111. The mounting boss 3111f is provided at a position immediately behind the third decorative projection 3111c. This makes it difficult for the mounting boss 3111f to be seen from the front (from the player side) due to the lens action of the third decorative projection 3111c. In other words, the third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided at a position in front of the mounting boss 3111f, and the lens effect of the third decorative protrusion 3111c makes it difficult to visually recognize the mounting boss 3111f from the front.

[5-9d-3. Decorative sheet of movable decorative body behind back]
The decorative sheet 3112 has a thin sheet shape and is formed to have the same outer shape as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. The decorative sheet 3112 is obtained by applying a pattern to the rear surface of a transparent resin sheet. The decorative sheet 3112 is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 except for the portion behind the second decorative protrusion 3111b of the decorative body 3111 and at the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151. A first contour portion 3112a, a second contour portion 3112b provided at a portion corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 and between the double decorative first protrusions 3111a of the decorative body 3111, A first light diffusing portion 3112c corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 and provided at a portion inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 (a portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c); The second decoration portion 3152 corresponds to the second decoration portion 3152, and the second decoration portion 3111 is provided at a portion inside the first decoration projection 3111a (a portion behind the third decoration projection 3111c). It has a diffusion section 3112D, a.

  Further, the decorative sheet 3112 further includes a transparent transmitting portion 3112e provided at a position behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c in the decorative body 3111. Have.

  As shown in FIG. 424 (b) and the like, the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a portion of a pattern imitating a cherry blossom smaller than the first decorative portion 3151, and the remaining portions are The hologram is a portion where interference fringes of light are displayed. The first contour portion 3112a is formed opaque. In the present embodiment, the hologram part in the first contour part 3112a is the same gold as the metal decoration part 3111d of the decoration 3111. In addition, the portion of the first contour portion 3112a imitating a cherry blossom is colored using white or pink. Note that an ink (paint) used for a picture or the like may have a glittering particle-like glitter.

  The first outline portion 3112a is located rearward outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111 when the rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front, and is formed of metal. Since it has a portion of the same color (gold in the present embodiment) as the decorative portion 3111d, continuity with respect to the decoration by the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decorative portion 3111d can be provided. Therefore, the perspective between the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decoration portion 3111d can be emphasized, and the thinness of the rear movable decoration 3110 can be hardly felt.

  The rear side of the first contour portion 3112a is formed in light gray or white. Thereby, the coloring of the picture and the hologram on the front side is improved. In addition, the light emitted from the light guide radiation plate 3113 forward can be reflected backward and returned to the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the light gray or white rear surface of the first contour portion 3112a. Since the plate 3113 can emit light more brightly, the amount of light radiated forward from the translucent portion of the decorative sheet 3112 can be increased, and the back-side movable decorative body 3110 can be lighted and decorated more brightly. As a result, the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be more uniformly light-emission-decorated.

  Furthermore, since the first contour portion 3112a is provided outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the decorative body 3111, the first contour part 3112a is flat except for the rear concave part 3111e on the rear surface of the decorative body 3111. It is provided behind the part. As a result, the flat rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 comes into contact with and adheres to the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a, so that light is transmitted between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. There is no irregular reflection, and the picture and hologram of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly seen from the front through the transparent decorative body 3111.

  As shown, the second contour 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed in a black line shape having a predetermined width. The second contour portion 3112b is located behind a portion of the second decoration portion 3152 between the first decoration protrusions 3111a (metal decoration portion 3111d) that is provided double of the decoration 3111. That is, since the black second contour portion 3112b is provided between the gold metal decoration portions 3111d which are formed double, the black color of the second contour portion 3112b enhances the double metal decoration portion 3111d. The decorative effect of the metal decorative portion 3111d can be further enhanced.

  The first light diffusing portion 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 has a light-transmitting property and is formed by a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the first light diffusing portion 3112c is formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of short ridges extending linearly in random directions. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 424 (b) and the like, in the petal of one of the cherry blossoms simulated by the first decorative portion 3151, the portion of the first light diffusing portion 3112c extends from the center to the periphery of the petal. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in the present embodiment) are printed by printing so that the density becomes darker (transparency becomes lower) as going. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the back decoration board 3114 for emitting light from the rear to the first light diffusing unit 3112c emits light, the first light diffusing unit 3112c has a pear-skin pattern, so that a slight The light and shade of the first decorative portion 3151 imitating cherry blossoms can be given a three-dimensional effect.

  The second light diffusion portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 has a light-transmitting property and is formed by a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. This second light diffusing portion 3112d is provided on the entire inside of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the second decorative portions 3152, as shown by light and shaded shading in FIGS. 422 to 424. Have been. The second light diffusion portion 3112d has a light-transmitting property and is formed by a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. The plurality of fine irregularities forming the second light diffusing portion 3112d are formed in a halftone dot pattern at regular intervals in the vertical and horizontal directions. The second light diffusion portion 3112d of the present embodiment is formed in a translucent milky white. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the back decoration board 3114 for emitting light from behind to the second light diffusing unit 3112d emits light, the predetermined pattern is formed by the halftone dot pattern of the second light diffusing unit 3112d. The second decorative portion 3152 composed of the characters of the characters can be illuminated with uniform brightness.

  The first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are provided behind a portion of the decorative body 3111 inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the rear surface of the portion of the decorative body 3111 Is provided with a concave portion 3111e that is recessed forward. Accordingly, when the decorative sheet 3112 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, a gap is formed on the front surface of the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d due to the presence of the rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111. It will be in the state that was done. Due to the gap, light applied to the rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 from the front is irregularly reflected between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear concave portion 3111e. The diffusion unit 3112c and the second light diffusion unit 3112d become bright. Thereby, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decoration board 3114 are not emitting light, the portions of the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d in the decoration sheet 3112 by light from the front, that is, The first decorative portion 3151 imitating cherry blossoms and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 forming the logo are brightened and are easily visible from the front.

  The decorative sheet 3112 has a predetermined pattern formed by the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusing portion 3112c, and the second light diffusing portion 3112d. The remaining part of the part 3150 except for the decoration by the decorative body 3111 is configured. In the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment, a first contour portion 3112a, a second contour portion 3112b, a first light diffusion portion 3112c, and a second light diffusion portion 3112d are provided on a rear surface side of a transparent sheet serving as a base material. ing. The first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by printing. Further, the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by sticking a predetermined light diffusing film (diffuser film). Note that the first light diffusing unit 3112c and the second light diffusing unit 3112d may be a lens film or a prism film.

  The transmitting portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed transparent. Since the transmitting portion 3112e is provided behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111, the light-emitting plate 3113 emits light from the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative board 3114. A part of the light emitted forward can be transmitted to irradiate the first decorative projection 3111a. At this time, in the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface side, and the side surface side remains transparent, so that the first decorative protrusion 3111a from the rear through the transparent portion 3112e. Is emitted from the side surface of the first decorative projection 3111a to the outside. For this reason, the light transmitted through the transmission portion 3112e allows the player to see a light-emitting decoration in which the first decoration protrusion 3111a (metal decoration portion 3111d) is illuminated by back light. In addition, the light transmitted through the transmitting portion 3112e and radiated to the outside from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can illuminate the first contour portion 3112a located outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a from the front. Therefore, the picture and the hologram provided on the first contour portion 3112a can be more easily seen, and the decoration effect by the first contour portion 3112a can be more easily exerted.

  Since the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111 can be decorated by the first contour portion 3112a having a picture or a hologram. The decoration of the movable decorative body 3110 behind can be made to look large. In addition, since the decoration sheet 3112 is approximately the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is not bordered, so that the rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the appearance position. At the time, the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear displays an effect image that is continuous with the decoration of the back movable movable body 3110, so that the player can see an effect with a sense of unity, In addition to giving a visual impact to the player, attention can be given, a large decoration can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest of the player can be suppressed.

  Note that, in the decorative sheet 3112 of the above embodiment, the transparent sheet 3112e is provided behind the metal decorative portion 3111d (first decorative protrusion 3111a) of the decorative body 3111, but the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, you may make it provide the 1st outline part 3112a also in the site | part behind the metal decoration part 3111d. Thereby, when the rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed obliquely from the front, the rear side can be seen through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 and the transparent transmission part 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112. In addition, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable movable body 3110 from being deteriorated. In addition, by providing the first contour portion 3112a to a portion behind the metal decorative portion 3111d, the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the first contour portion 3112a passes through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111. Since the portion located behind the portion 3111a can be seen, the side of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be decorated by the portion of the first contour portion 3112a, and the metal decorative portion 3111d can be decorated by the first decorative protrusion 3111d. Even if it is provided only on the front surface of the portion 3111a, the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be improved.

[5-9d-4. Light guide radiation plate of movable decoration behind the back]
As shown in FIGS. 420 and 421, the light guide radiation plate 3113 includes a transparent flat plate-shaped main body 3113a extending left and right, a flange 3113b extending rearward from an outer peripheral edge of the main body 3113a, and a main body. A plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c, which penetrate the portion 3113a in the front-rear direction and into which the first LEDs 3114a of the back decoration board 3114 are inserted, and the back decoration board 3114 which penetrates the main body portion 3113a in the front-rear direction. A plurality of second LED housings 3113d into which the second LEDs 3114b are inserted, a plurality of reflectors 3113e provided over substantially the entire rear surface of the main body 3113a, and a first LED housing section on the rear surface of the main body 3113a. The leg portion 3113f projecting rearward from the periphery of the 3113c and the first LED housing portion 3113c of the leg portion 3113f are opposite to each other. And a, an auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g that is provided along the rear edge of the side.

  The light guide radiation plate 3113 has a right slider front portion 3113h extending downward from the right end of the main body portion 3113a in a front view.

  The main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flat front surface with which the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3112 contacts. The flange portion 3113b protrudes rearward about 1.5 times the thickness of the main body portion 3113a. As shown in FIG. 425 and the like, the rear end of the flange portion 3113b projects rearward of the back decoration board 3114 in a state where the flange portion 3113b is assembled to the back movable decoration body 3110.

  The inner peripheral shape of the first LED housing portion 3113c is formed in a rectangular shape. As shown in FIG. 423, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided behind the low-transparency portion of the decorative portion 3150 when the back movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front. More specifically, in the portion of the first decoration portion 3151, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided behind the portion of the first light diffusion portion 3112c of the decoration sheet 3112 where the shade of pink is darkened by dots. ing. More specifically, the first LED housing portion 3113c provided at the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is located closer to the center than the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the five petals simulating cherry blossoms. The inner periphery is provided such that the center of the long side of the rectangle is located on the center line of the petal.

  On the other hand, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c provided at the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 are provided so as to be located behind the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112. Have been. For this reason, the plurality of first LED housings 3113c (first LEDs 3114a) are difficult to visually recognize from the front.

  In addition, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided at the portion of the second decoration portion 3152 so as to surround the outer periphery of the second decoration portion 3152. In addition, when the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are close to each other to some extent, as illustrated in FIG. 424 (c) and FIG. 428 (c), the respective first LED housing portions 3113c are connected to each other. It is formed in the state where it was set. By connecting the approaching first LED housing portions 3113c to each other, it is possible to prevent a portion smaller than the thickness in the main body portion 3113a from being formed, and to damage the light guide radiation plate 3113. It can be difficult.

  Incidentally, the first LED housing section 3113c has a rectangular inner periphery and penetrates the main body section 3113a. Thereby, when the light guided inside the main body 3113a (within the plate thickness) in the direction along the surface (the front surface or the rear surface) of the main body 3113a reaches the first LED housing portion 3113c, the light is transmitted. A part is directly reflected by the inner circumferential surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c toward the inside of the main body portion 3113a, and the rest passes through the inner circumferential surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. It will be radiated inside 3113c. Then, when the light radiated inside from one of the four inner peripheral surfaces of the first LED housing portion 3113c reaches another surface of the inner peripheral surface, a part of the surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c becomes The light is reflected inward, and the rest enters inside the main body 3113a. That is, inside the main body 3113a, the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body 3113a radiates to the inside of the first LED housing 3113c when trying to pass through the first LED housing 3113c. Since a part of the light is reflected by the inner peripheral surface portion and the inner peripheral surface portion of the first LED housing portion 3113c incident on the main body portion 3113a side, the light passing through the first LED housing portion 3113c is reflected. Is significantly reduced as compared with before passing through.

  For this reason, the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body 3113a inside the main body 3113a can be blocked by the first LED housing section 3113c. Since the first LED 3114a of the back decoration board 3114 is housed inside the first LED housing 3113c, light that is going to pass through the first LED housing 3113c can be blocked by the first LED 3114a. In the portion where the first LED 3114a is housed, light is prevented from passing through to the opposite side of the first LED housing 3113c. Accordingly, by providing the first LED housing portion 3113c at an optimum position with respect to the outer peripheral shape of the second decoration portion 3152, light from the first LED 3114a housed in the first LED housing portion 3113c is It is possible to prevent the light from being guided to another second decorative portion 3152 and to perform light-emitting decoration, and it is possible to reliably light-emitting only the desired second decorative portion 3152 in the plurality of second decorative portions 3152. .

  The operation of the first LED housing section 3113c as described above will be described in further detail. For example, as shown in FIG. 428 (c), a plurality of second decoration sections 3152 of “I”, “R”, “H”, and “☆” In order to make the light emitting decoration, the first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided on the outer periphery of each of the second decorative portions 3152, and light is radiated into the first LED accommodating portions 3113c toward the inside of the second decorative portion 3152. A first LED 3114a is provided. In this embodiment, since the first LED housing portions 3113c provided between “i” and “ro” and between “ro” and “ha” are close to each other, they are connected to each other. One hole. Thus, a thin portion that is easily damaged is not formed in the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Further, in this embodiment, the first LED housing portion 3113c and the first LED 3114a for emitting and decorating the “☆” disposed below the “i” are provided below the “☆”. Therefore, when the first LED 3114a for decorating “☆” emits light, the “i” provided above “☆” may be decorated with light, but the “i” provided above “☆” is provided at the upper left of “☆”. An extension 3113j is provided in the first LED housing 3113c, in which the first LED 3114a for making a part of the “i” emit light is decorated, so as to cover the area above “☆”. ing. The extension 3113j can reduce (block) the light from the first LED 3114a for decorating the “☆” by emitting light to the “i” side. As a result, even if “☆” is illuminated, “i” is not illuminated. In addition, the extension portion 3113j can reduce (block) the light for causing the “i” to emit light and decorate the light to the “☆” side. Only the desired second decorative portion 3152 such as “I” or “☆” can be reliably lighted and decorated, and the desired effect can be sufficiently exhibited.

  As shown in FIG. 427 and the like, the second LED housing portion 3113d has a circular inner periphery. The plurality of second LED housing portions 3113d are provided behind five circular portions imitating stamens provided around the center in the first decoration portion 3151 imitating cherry blossoms. More specifically, the second LED housing portion 3113d is provided behind each of the five petals imitating cherry blossoms, which are located on the center line of the petal and imitate a circular part imitating a stamen. Thereby, in each of the five petals, one first LED housing portion 3113c and one second LED housing portion 3113d are provided on the center line of the petals.

  The second LED housing portion 3113d has a circular inner periphery and penetrates the main body portion 3113a. Accordingly, when the light guided inside the main body 3113a (within the plate thickness) in the direction along the surface (the front surface or the rear surface) of the main body 3113a reaches the second LED housing portion 3113d, the light is transmitted. A part is reflected by the inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing portion 3113d so as to be diffused in a fan shape toward the inside of the main body portion 3113a. In the present embodiment, in each of the five petals of the first decoration portion 3151 imitating cherry blossoms, the second LED housing portion 3113d is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a. As shown in the figure, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the inside of the main body 3113a is fan-likely reflected toward the first LED 3114a by the circular inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing 3113d. The light can make the petals luminous decoration brighter.

  One of the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e is formed in a quadrangular pyramid, and is arranged in a row so as to be continuous vertically and horizontally. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e exclude the portion of the flange portion 3113b on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, the portion around the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, and the portion of the right slider front portion 3113h. It is formed on almost the entire surface. Within the thickness of the main body 3113a, the plurality of reflectors 3113e can mainly reflect light emitted in a direction along the plate surface forward and radiate the light forward from the front surface of the main body 3113a. The light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment is formed such that the rear is difficult to visually recognize when viewed from the front due to the presence of the plurality of reflection portions 3113e.

  Further, since the plurality of reflectors 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the main body 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface. Even if the design of the decorative part 3150 by the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 is changed by the change or the like, it is not necessary to change the light guide radiation plate 3113, and it is possible to easily cope with the design change and the cost. Increase can be suppressed.

  The leg portion 3113f protrudes rearward from the rear end side of a portion facing the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a to be inserted on the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. As shown in FIG. 425 and the like, the surface of the leg portion 3113f on the first LED housing portion 3113c side is provided on the same surface as the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. Thereby, the area of the light receiving portion 3113i for receiving the light emitted from the first LED 3114a into the main body 3113a can be increased, and more light from the first LED 3114a can be applied to the inside of the main body 3113a. Can be. When the leg portion 3113f is assembled to the back movable movable body 3110, the rear surface abuts on the front surface of the back decorative substrate 3114, and a gap is provided between the rear surface of the main body 3113a and the front surface of the back decorative substrate 3114. Can be formed.

  The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g is provided in a C-chamfered shape along a side opposite to the first LED housing portion 3113c at the rear end of the leg portion 3113f. The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g reflects the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the leg 3113f forward.

  The right slider front portion 3113h is for configuring a right slider 3117 in cooperation with a right slider rear portion 3115d described later of the decorative body base 3115.

  Since the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment covers the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3114 by the flange portion 3113b when assembled to the back movable decoration body 3110, the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3114 by the flange portion 3113b. The surface can be made difficult to see, and the appearance can be prevented from becoming poor. Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has the flange portion 3113b protruding rearward from the back decoration board 3114, the light decoration plate 3111d is provided with a metal decoration portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decoration 3111. The creepage distance EL to 3114 (copper foil 3114d or electronic component 3114e) can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the back decoration board 3114, and the back decoration board 3114 is damaged. Can be prevented.

  In the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment, the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are formed as holes penetrating the main body portion 3113a, so that the first LED housing portion 3113c housed in the first LED housing portion 3113c is formed. The heat from the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b housed in the second LED housing portion 3113d can be released to the front of the main body 3113a, and the heat influence on the back decoration board 3114 can be reduced.

  Further, since the first LED housing section 3113c and the second LED housing section 3113d are formed as through holes, the front sides of the first LED housing section 3113c and the second LED housing section 3113d are closed by the decorative sheet 3112, the decorative body 3111, and the like. Even if it is formed, the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion are compared with the case where the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are formed in a concave shape (groove shape) having no bottom. The volume (heat capacity) of 3113d can be increased. Thereby, a sudden rise in temperature due to heat from the accommodated first LED 3114a and second LED 3114b can be mitigated, and thermal influence on the back decoration board 3114 and the like can be suppressed. Further, in the first LED housing portion 3113c having the extended portion 3113j and the first LED housing portion 3113c approaching and connected to each other, the volume of the first LED housing portion 3113c is large. For the same reason as described above, it is possible to dissipate more heat from the first LED 3114a or to alleviate a sudden rise in temperature.

  Further, the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a first LED housing 3113c and a second LED housing 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 are inserted from behind. Since the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are inserted into the first LED housing 3113c and the second LED housing 3113d, the rear surface of the main body 3113a is as close as possible to the front surface of the back decoration board 3114. The thickness of the back movable movable body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be further reduced.

  Furthermore, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has the leg 3113f projecting rearward from the rear surface of the main body 3113a, the rear end of the leg 3113f can be brought into contact with the front surface of the back rear decorative board 3114. A gap can be formed between the rear surface of the main body 3113a and the front surface of the back decoration board 3114. Thereby, heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the like mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 can be released through the gap, and a temperature rise in the back decoration board 3114 can be suppressed, thereby affecting the heat. Can be reduced.

  In addition, the light guide radiation plate 3113 guides light from the first LED 3114a mounted at a plurality of predetermined positions on the back decoration board 3114, and is substantially in front of the rear surface of the main body 3113a by the reflection portion 3113e. Therefore, the light from the first LED 3114a can be radiated forward even in a part of the main body 3113a where the back decoration board 3114 is not provided behind. In other words, even if the back decoration board 3114 is smaller than the size of the main body 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface of the main body 3113a. Therefore, since the back decoration board 3114 can be smaller than the main body 3113a, the distance between the outer periphery of the main body 3113a and the back decoration board 3114 can be made longer, and the decoration body 3111 can be made longer. The creeping distance EL from the metal decoration portion 3111d on the front surface can be made longer so that the above-described effects can be more easily exerted.

[5-9d-5. Decorative substrate behind back of movable decorative body behind]
A plurality of first LEDs 3114a of a side view type and a plurality of second LEDs 3114b of a top view type are mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114. Further, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 includes a flat substrate main body 3114c, a copper foil 3114d (see FIG. 429 and the like) provided on the front surface and the rear surface of the substrate main body 3114c, respectively, and forming a predetermined circuit pattern. Electronic components 3114e (see FIG. 430 (b)) such as an LED driver IC and a resistor mounted on the rear surface of the main body 3114c.

  The back-side decorative substrate 3114 has a coating film (not shown) made of a white solder resist on the surface excluding the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the electronic component 3114e, and the like. Further, although not shown, the back-side decorative substrate 3114 has a notation section indicating the mounted component near the mounted components such as the mounted first LED 3114a, second LED 3114b, and electronic component 3114e. have. The notation part is provided by silk printing in a predetermined color (for example, yellow) that is inconspicuous from above the coating film.

  The back-side decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape substantially along the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and a gap slightly larger than the thickness of the flange portion 3113b between the outer peripheral shape and the flange portion 3113b. It is formed in a substantially uniform size. The back decoration board 3114 has an outer peripheral shape substantially along the inner periphery of a flange portion 3115b of a decorative body base 3115 described later, and a slight gap is substantially formed between the outer peripheral shape and the inner periphery of the flange portion 3115b. It is formed in a size that is formed to be constant. That is, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is formed in a size to be accommodated inside the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115.

  As shown in FIG. 427 and the like, the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 is located on the center line of each of the five petals imitating cherry blossoms, as shown in FIG. It is provided so that light is irradiated toward the center of the flower near the tip inside the (metal decoration part 3111d). Thus, the first LED 3114a at the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 allows each of the five petals simulating cherry blossoms to be illuminated and decorated.

  In addition, in the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 in the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, in each of the second decorative portions 3152 arranged in a row on the left and right, the first decorative protrusion provided double of the decorative body 3111. In the vicinity of the rear of 3111a, it is provided so that light is irradiated toward the inside of the second decorative portion 3152. Accordingly, the first LEDs 3114a at the portion of the second decoration portion 3152 can cause the plurality of second decoration portions 3152 arranged in the left and right directions to be illuminated one by one.

  As shown in FIG. 427 and the like, the plurality of second LEDs 3114b are, in the first decorative portion 3151, a central portion simulating cherry blossoms, and a circular portion simulating a stamen located on the center line of five petals. It is provided at the back. That is, the second LED 3114b is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a corresponding to one petal imitating a cherry blossom in the first decoration portion 3151. Thereby, the five parts imitating the stamen of the center part in the first decoration part 3151 can be respectively illuminated by the second LED 3114b.

  Since the second LED 3114b is a top-view type capable of irradiating light forward, when the second LED 3114b emits light, a portion imitating a stamen of a central portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is separated from other portions. Can also emit a point light with high luminance, which can strongly attract the interest of the player. Therefore, in the light-emitting decoration of the decoration portion 3150, a portion that emits light in a planar shape by the first LED 3114a and a portion that emits a dot in the shape of a dot by the second LED 3114b can be provided. Various light emission effects can be performed, and it is possible to make the player hard to get tired of.

  The board main body 3114c is a rigid board whose thickness is slightly smaller than the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The substrate main body 3114c of the present embodiment uses a glass composite base material.

  The copper foil 3114d is provided on substantially the entire front and rear surfaces of the substrate main body 3114c. The copper foil 3114d is formed to have a predetermined thickness (18 μm to 70 μm), and forms a circuit pattern by an etching process (hatched portion in FIG. 429). As shown in FIG. 429, the copper foil 3114d is provided at a position where the outer peripheral edge is separated from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate main body 3114c by a predetermined distance SL (0.5 mm to 3 mm) (in this embodiment, SL = 1 mm). ing. With this predetermined distance SL, a creeping distance EL and a space distance from a conductive member (for example, a metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111) outside the back decoration substrate 3114 to the copper foil 3114d are obtained, and discharge of static electricity or the like is performed. The insulation property against short-circuit can be improved, and the damage of the back decoration substrate 3114 due to discharge or the like can be suppressed.

  Further, regardless of the presence or absence of the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e, the outer peripheral edge of the copper foil 3114d is provided from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate main body 3114c to a position inside a predetermined distance, and the area of the copper foil 3114d is increased. Is as wide as possible. By transmitting a part of the heat generated in the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e to the copper foil 3114d, the heat can be radiated from the copper foil 3114d, and the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b , And the cooling effect on the electronic component 3114e can be enhanced to prevent heat damage.

  In addition, the rear back decorative board 3114 has a predetermined size on the light-emitting surface side of the side view type first LED 3114a on the front side so as to easily reflect light emitted from the first LED 3114a toward the board body 3114c forward. (A region surrounded by a broken line in FIG. 429). As shown in FIGS. 426 and 428 (a), the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f of the present embodiment does not include the copper foil 3114d. As a result, the front surface of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is lower than the front surface of the copper foil 3114d on which the first LED 3114a is mounted. The angle of light emitted from one LED 3114a into the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f is such that it approaches the vertical line on the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c, so that the light emitted toward the substrate main body 3114c can be easily reflected forward. Can be.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 428 (a) and the like, the copper foil 3114d is not provided in the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f, and the rear end of the leg 3113f projecting rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is fixed. Because of the contact, the leg 3113f can be lengthened rearward by the thickness of the copper foil 3114d. Therefore, the size of the light receiving portion 3113i that receives light from the first LED 3114a can be increased, and the amount of light (light amount) radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 can be increased. And the decorative sheet 3112) can be more brightly illuminated.

  Further, the rear ends of the legs 3113f projecting rearward of the light guide radiating plate 3113 are made to abut within the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f (see FIG. 428 (a) and the like). Thus, even if the coating film (solder resist) applied to the surface due to the contact of the leg 3113f is worn or turned up, only the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c is exposed, and the copper foil 3114d is exposed. Never. Therefore, the insulation property is reduced due to the exposure of the copper foil 3114d, and damage due to a short circuit such as static electricity can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 425 and the like, the back decoration substrate 3114 of the present embodiment is assembled to the back movable decoration 3110 to form a flange portion 3115b of the decoration base 3115 and a flange portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113, which will be described later. 3113b, the outer periphery is double-enclosed, so that the outer peripheral surface becomes hard to see from the outside, and deterioration of appearance is prevented. Also, in a state where the back decoration board 3114 is assembled to the back decoration board 3110, the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3114 is surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 with a certain gap. The flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 is inserted from behind into a gap between the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the flange portion 3113b, and is also surrounded by the flange portion 3115b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decoration portion 3111d on the front surface of the decoration 3111 to the back decoration substrate 3114 is moved to the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decoration body base 3115. Since the windings meander so as to go around, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the back decoration board 3114, and the back decoration board 3114 is damaged. Can be prevented. In this embodiment, the creepage distance EL is set to a distance of 10 mm or more, or a distance that can correspond to a discharge voltage of 10 kV.

  Further, since the back decoration board 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, the member provided behind the back movable decorative body 3110 by the back decoration board 3114 (in this embodiment, The light from the effect display device 1600) can be blocked. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light from the effect display device 1600 or the like provided at the rear from being irradiated on the decorative sheet 3112 or the decorative body 3111, so that the decorative portion 3150 is illuminated in an unintended state. Can be avoided, and the desired light emission effect can be reliably performed on the rear movable decorative body 3110. In addition, since the back decoration board 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiating plate 3113, the back decoration board 3114 can prevent the back from being seen through the light guide radiating plate 3113, and the back movable decoration can be prevented. Deterioration of the appearance of the body 3110 can be suppressed.

  In addition, the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is provided with only the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b which are housed from the rear with respect to the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d of the light guide radiation plate 3113 on the front surface. Since the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are inserted into the first LED housing 3113c and the second LED housing 3113d, the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 approaches the rear surface of the main body 3113a as much as possible. The thickness of the back movable movable body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be further reduced.

  Further, the back rear decorative board 3114 has electronic components 3114e such as LED driver ICs and resistors mounted on the rear surface. Since the LED driver IC, the resistor, and the like as the electronic component 3114e are generally black components, by providing the electronic component 3114e on the rear surface of the back decoration board 3114, the black electronic component 3114e cannot be seen from the front. It is possible to improve the appearance of the back movable movable body 3110. Further, since the black electronic component 3114e is provided on the rear surface of the back decoration board 3114 which is not visible from the front, there is no need to apply a paint such as white to make the electronic component 3114e difficult to see, The cost of the back decoration board 3114 can be reduced.

[5-9d-6. Decorative body base behind movable decorative body]
The decorative body base 3115 is entirely formed to be transparent. The decorative body base 3115 penetrates the flat-plate-shaped covering plate portion 3115a that covers the rear side of the back decoration board 3114, the flange portion 3115b protruding forward from the outer peripheral edge of the covering plate portion 3115a, and the covering plate portion 3115a. And a right slider rear portion 3115d extending downward from the right end of the cover plate portion 3115a when viewed from the front.

  The outer peripheral shape of the covering plate portion 3115a has a shape substantially along the inner peripheral surface of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and a slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral surface and the flange portion 3113b. It is formed in the size which is. That is, the cover plate portion 3115a (decorative body base 3115) is formed in a size that can be accommodated inside the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the cover plate portion 3115a covers the rear side of the back decoration board 3114, it is possible to prevent the other members from contacting the back decoration board 3114 from behind and protect the back decoration board 3114. It is possible to prevent the back decoration board 3114 from being damaged.

  As shown in FIG. 425 and the like, the flange portion 3115b enters the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3114, and the front end is located forward of the back decoration board 3114. Is projected to be located. The flange portion 3115b is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the back decoration substrate 3114, and makes it hard to see the outer peripheral surface of the back decoration substrate 3114 from the outside to improve the appearance. Moreover, since the flange portion 3115b is inserted into the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the back decoration substrate 3114 in a state where the flange portion 3115b is assembled to the back movable decoration body 3110, The shortest route from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear decorative substrate 3114 can meander so as to go around the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Out. Therefore, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and it is possible to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d from flowing to the back decoration board 3114 and damaging the back decoration board 3114.

  Each of the plurality of openings 3115c has a slit-shaped portion that is long on the left and right, and a portion that is larger than the slit-shaped portion. With the plurality of openings 3115c, heat from the electronic component 3114e mounted on the back surface of the back decoration board 3114 can be released to the outside of the back decoration board 3114. Can be reduced.

  The right slider rear portion 3115d is for configuring the right slider 3117 in cooperation with the right slider front portion 3113h of the light guide radiation plate 3113.

  The decorative body base 3115 has a plurality of protrusions 3115e slightly protruding from the front surface of the cover plate 3115a. The plurality of protrusions 3115e are arranged so as to abut on a portion of the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 near the outer peripheral edge where the copper foil 3114d is not provided. The plurality of protrusions 3115e can form a gap between the rear surface of the back decoration substrate 3114 and the front surface of the cover plate portion 3115a by bringing the rear surface of the back decoration substrate 3114 into contact with the front surface thereof. . Accordingly, heat from the electronic component 3114e can be easily released through a gap between the rear surface of the back decoration board 3114 and the front surface of the cover plate portion 3115a.

[5-9d-7. Main effects of movable decorative body behind back]
Subsequently, main functions and effects of the back movable decorative body 3110 in the present embodiment will be described. The back movable movable body 3110 of the present embodiment has a decorative sheet 3112 sandwiched between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the front surface of the main body 3113a of the light guide radiating plate 3113. With the back decoration board 3114 sandwiched between the base 3115 and the base 3115, the mounting boss 3111f of the decoration 3111 is mounted on the decoration base 3115 to assemble (see FIG. 418 and the like). Accordingly, the thickness of the back movable movable body 3110 in the front-rear direction is relatively thin.

  The back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c protruding forward on a transparent flat decorative body 3111, and Since the decorative sheet 3112 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has the first contour portion 3112a provided with a hologram in which a pattern or light interference fringe is displayed, the decorative sheet 3112 of the movable movable body 3110 on the rear side has a first contour 3112a. Thus, the first decorative projection 3111a, the second decorative projection 3111b, and the third decorative projection 3111c can provide a three-dimensional effect, and the lens effect by the second decorative projection 3111b and the third decorative projection 3111c. And a hologram can provide a sense of depth. Accordingly, even if the thickness of the back movable ornamental body 3110 in the front-rear direction is small, the player does not feel thin, and the decorative effect of the decorative portion 3150 of the back movable ornamental body 3110 is sufficiently achieved. It is possible to entertain and entertain the player.

  Further, as described above, the first decorative projection 3111a, the second decorative projection 3111b, the third decorative projection 3111c, the first contour 3112a, and the like can provide a three-dimensional effect and a sense of depth. The thickness of the back movable movable body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be further reduced. This can reduce the space required for the installation of the back movable ornamental body 3110, so that the degree of freedom of arrangement of the back movable ornamental body 3110 can be increased, and a more effective portion inside the game board 5 can be provided. By providing the rear movable movable body 3110, the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player can be easily embodied. In addition, since the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made thinner, it is relatively easy to secure a space for arranging another decorative body. The pachinko machine 1 can provide a pachinko machine 1 having a good appearance or a pachinko machine 1 that can enjoy various effects, and has a high appeal to players and can be differentiated. can do.

  The back-side movable decorative body 3110 has a metal decorative part 3111d made of a metal foil on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 forming the outer periphery of the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative part 3152. Therefore, the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 can be made to stand out by the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. In addition, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, it is possible to give the metal decorative portion 3111d a three-dimensional appearance and a high-grade appearance. Thereby, when the rear movable decorative body 3110 moves from the evacuation position invisible to the player to the visible appearance position, the high-quality decorative portion 3150 can be seen, thereby giving the player a sense of premium. Can be given, so that the player can strongly think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Also, since the back movable ornamental body 3110 has a flat rear surface of the ornamental body 3111 and the ornamental sheet 3112 has substantially the same size as the outer periphery of the ornamental body 3111, the movable body 3110 has a first contour portion 3112a having a picture or a hologram. In addition, it is possible to decorate the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111, and to make the decoration of the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back large. In addition, since the decoration sheet 3112 is approximately the same size as the decoration body 3111, the decoration of the rear-movable decoration body 3110 is not framed. When the body 3110 is moved to the appearance position, the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear displays an effect image that is continuous with the decoration of the back movable movable object 3110, thereby providing an effect with a sense of unity. It can be shown to the player, and can give the player a visual impact to attract attention, and can also enjoy a large decoration, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest of the player.

  In addition, since the rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with the first LED 3114a at a position behind the metal decorative part 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour part 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112, the metal decorative part 3111d and the second The first LED 3114a can be made difficult to see from the front by the two contours 3112b, and the decoration effect can be sufficiently exhibited by suppressing the deterioration of the appearance of the decoration part 3150.

  Further, since the back movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 3114a so as to surround each outer periphery in each of the first decorative portion 3151 and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152, the first decorative portion 3151 And the second decorative portion 3152 can be individually illuminated. Accordingly, the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in a row on the left and right can be sequentially illuminated and decorated, or only the specific first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 can be illuminated and decorated. By appropriately illuminating the first decorative portion 3151 and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152, various luminous effects can be shown to the player, making it difficult for the player to be bored and suppressing a decrease in interest. it can.

  In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 irradiates light in a direction along the surface thereof within the thickness of the main body part 3113a of the light guide radiating plate 3113 by the first LED 3114a of the side view type. The light from the first LED is radiated forward from the front surface of the light guide radiating plate 3113 because light is emitted forward by the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide radiating plate 3113. The distance to can be lengthened. Thereby, since the light from the first LED can be sufficiently diffused and emitted forward from the light guide radiating plate 3113, even if the thickness of the back movable ornamental body 3110 in the front-rear direction is thin, the decorative body 3111 And the decorative sheet 3112 can be uniformly and luminously decorated, and the player can be entertained by the luminous decoration having a good appearance. In addition, since the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be uniformly illuminated and decorated by the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the side view type first LED 3114a, the thickness of the back movable movable body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be increased. It is possible to reliably realize the pachinko machine 1 which can be made thin and has the above-described effects.

  In addition, since the rear movable decorative body 3110 uses the first LED 3114a as a side view type for planar light emission and uses the second LED 3114b as a top view type, the rear movable movable body 3110 (the decorative portion 3150) can be used. In the light-emitting decoration (light-emitting effect) described in (2), a portion that emits a high-brightness point-like light with the second LED 3114b can be added to the portion that is light-emitting decorated with the first LED 3114a. Thereby, the light emission effect can be sharpened by the light emission of the second LED 3114b, so that it is easy to present the optimum light emission effect according to the game state, and it is possible to make the player more entertaining and play the game. Can be raised, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  In addition, the back-side movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a first LED housing portion 3113c into which the first LED 3114a of the side view type is inserted in the light guide radiating plate 3113 to receive light on the inner peripheral surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. The portion 3113i is irradiated with light from the first LED 3114a so that the light enters the inside of the main body 3113a. Accordingly, by providing the first LED housing portion 3113c at a position close to a desired portion to be illuminated and decorated by the first LED 3114a, the desired portion can be brightly illuminated and decorated, and a more staging effect The player can enjoy a high-luminance decoration.

  Further, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 includes a first LED housing portion 3113c and a second LED on which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the back rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted from the rear on the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since it has the accommodation portion 3113d, the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are inserted into the first LED accommodation portion 3113c and the second LED accommodation portion 3113d, so that the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a is behind and the front surface of the decoration board 3114 is behind. The movable decorative body 3110 can be made as thin as possible in the front-rear direction.

  Also, in the rear movable decorative body 3110, the leg portion 3113f projecting rearward of the light guide radiating plate 3113 abuts on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114, so that the main body 3113a and the rear decorative board 3114 can be connected. Is formed, the heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the like mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 can be released through the gap, and The effect of heat can be reduced by suppressing the temperature rise.

  In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 can form a gap between the main body part 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the rear decorative board 3114 by the legs 3113f, and the decorative body base 3115 has a plurality of openings. Since it has the portion 3115c, the surface of the back decoration board 3114 can be ventilated through the gap and the opening 3115c by raising and lowering the back decoration body 3110, and the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, In addition, heat from the electronic component 3114e and the like can be released, and a rise in the temperature of the back decoration board 3114 can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that a temperature effect is provided on the back-side movable decorative body 3110, and when the back-side movable decorative body 3110 (back-side decorative substrate 3114) becomes higher than a predetermined temperature, the movable back-to-back movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down. May be performed at a higher frequency (probability). As a result, the back-side movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down, whereby the surface of the back-side decorative substrate 3114 can be ventilated, and the back-side decorative substrate 3114 can be cooled to suppress the occurrence of a problem due to heat.

  Further, the back movable decorative body 3110 surrounds the outer periphery of the back decorative board 3114 from the rear side by the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, and also surrounds the outer periphery of the flange portion 3115b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is surrounded by a flange portion 3113b. Accordingly, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decoration portion 3111d of the metal foil provided on the front surface of the decoration 3111 to the back decoration substrate 3114 is radiated by the light guide radiation due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decoration base 3115. Since it meanders around the flange portion 3113b of the plate 3113, a long creepage distance EL can be obtained, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the back decoration substrate 3114, and the back decoration substrate 3114 3114 can be prevented from being damaged.

  In addition, the back movable decorative body 3110 is configured such that the copper foil 3114d constituting the circuit is provided at a position away from the outer periphery of the substrate main body 3114c by a predetermined distance SL in the back decorative board 3114. The predetermined distance SL can also increase the creepage distance EL and the spatial distance, increase the insulating property against a discharge such as static electricity or a short circuit, and suppress the damage of the back decoration board 3114 due to the discharge or the like.

  In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 only on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Not. Thereby, the creepage distance EL to the back decoration substrate 3114 can be increased by the length of the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained. Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the area of the metal decorative portion 3111d is smaller than the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. The size can be reduced, and the amount of static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d can be reduced. Accordingly, since the discharge voltage can be reduced, even if a discharge occurs to the back decoration board 3114, the influence thereof can be reduced.

  By the way, as described above, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved up and down (movable) between the retracted position moved upward and the emerged position moved downward by driving the rear drive motor 3126. Therefore, friction occurs in the left slider 3116, the right slider 3117, and the like each time the vehicle moves up and down, and the static electricity generated by the friction easily accumulates on the surface of the back movable movable body 3110. Since the decorative body 3111 and the decorative body base 3115 constituting the surface of the rear movable decorative body 3110 are formed of a synthetic resin having low conductivity, even if a large amount of static electricity is accumulated, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative body base 3115 may have the surface thereof. It is difficult for the accumulated static electricity to be discharged at once. On the other hand, in the metal decoration portion 3111d made of the metal foil of the decoration 3111, since the conductivity is high, static electricity accumulated on the entire surface of the metal decoration portion 3111d is easily discharged at a stretch. For this reason, the back movable decorative body 3110 of the present embodiment easily accumulates static electricity in the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111. Since the creepage distance EL to the back decoration board 3114 is sufficiently long, the back decoration board 3114 is not damaged by the discharge of static electricity, and the movable effect in which the movable decoration body 3110 moves up and down, and the movable decoration body behind the back. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 in which both the light emitting effect in which the light emitting decoration 3110 is provided and the light emitting effect can be enjoyed.

  When the area of the metal decoration 3111d in which static electricity is accumulated is equal to or larger than a predetermined value (for example, 100 cm2 or more), it is desirable to connect the metal decoration 3111d to GND (ground). Accordingly, it is possible to reliably prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d from being discharged to the back decoration substrate 3114.

[5-9d-8. Another embodiment of movable backside decorative body]
Next, mainly referring to FIG. 432, the back movable decorative body 3160, the back movable movable body 3170, the back movable movable body 3180, and the like of the embodiment different from the above-described rear movable movable body 3110 will be described. This will be described in detail. FIG. 432 (a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the configuration of the back movable movable body of the second embodiment different from the back movable movable body of FIG. 417, and FIG. 432 (b) is a back movable movable body of the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a decorative body by a cross section, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a back movable movable body of 4th Embodiment by a cross section.

  As schematically shown in FIG. 432 (a), the back movable movable body 3160 of the second embodiment is provided on a decorative body 3161 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface and a rear side of the decorative body 3161. A sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3162 provided with a predetermined decoration, a light guide radiating plate 3163 provided behind the decorative sheet 3162 and internally radiating light in a direction along the front surface, and a light guide radiating plate A back decoration board 3164 having a plurality of LEDs 3164a for irradiating light inside the 3163 in a direction along the front surface.

  The decorative body 3161 of the back movable movable body 3160 includes a transparent flat plate-shaped main body 3161a, a flange 3161b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 3161a, and metal provided on the front surface of the main body 3161a. Decorative portion 3161c. The main body portion 3161a may be flat or may be provided with a relief-like decoration having irregularities. The metal decoration part 3161c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body part 3161a, and forms a predetermined decoration. The metal decorative portion 3161c may be formed by foil stamping, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by vapor deposition.

  The decoration sheet 3162 is a sheet in which a predetermined decoration (pattern) is printed on a transparent sheet. In the decoration sheet 3162, a part having low transparency in the decoration is located at a part of the back decoration board 3164 in front of the LED 3164a (not shown). This makes it difficult to see the LED 3164a from the front. The decorative sheet 3162 is formed in a size smaller than the inner peripheral shape of the flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161.

  The light guide radiation plate 3163 is formed in the shape of a flat plate having the same size as the decoration sheet 3162. And a reflection portion 3163b. The LED housing portion 3163a is a hole penetrating the light guide radiation plate 3163 in the front-rear direction, and the inner periphery is formed in a square shape along the outer periphery of the LED 3164a. The plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are each depressed forward in a triangular cross section, and are provided only at predetermined portions. The plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are provided so as to respectively reflect light from the determined LED housing portion 3163a forward, and are arranged in a concentric fan shape around the determined LED housing portion 3163a. . That is, the plurality of reflectors 3163b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction to the front. In addition, similarly to the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide radiating plate 3113 of the back movable movable body 3110, the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b can reflect light from an unspecified direction forward. Alternatively, it may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

  The back decoration board 3164 is formed in the same size as the decoration sheet 3162 and the light guide radiation plate 3163. On the back rear decorative board 3164, a plurality of side-view type LEDs 3164a to be inserted from the rear into the LED housing portions 3163a of the light guide radiation plate 3163 are mounted on the front surface. Although not shown, the back-side decorative substrate 3164 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil at a position inside a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the back-side decorative substrate 3164 on the front surface and the rear surface. In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the front surface (both sides) of the back decoration substrate 3164.

  In the assembled state, the back rear movable decorative body 3160 of this embodiment has the decorative sheet 3162 in contact with the rear surface of the main body 3161a of the decorative body 3161 and the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3162 with the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163. Further, the front surface of the back decoration board 3164 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163. Accordingly, the thickness of the back movable movable body 3160 in the front-rear direction is small. The flange portion 3161b of the decoration 3161 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back decoration substrate 3164. Thereby, in the back movable decorative body 3160, the outer circumferences of the decorative sheet 3162, the light guide radiation plate 3163, and the back decoration board 3164 are covered with the flange portion 3161b, so that the outer peripheral surfaces thereof are hard to be seen from the outside. And make it look good.

  Since the rear movable decorative body 3160 has a flange 3161b extending rearward from the main body 3161a of the decorative body 3161 so as to cover the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3164, the metal decorative portion on the front of the main body 3161a is provided. The creepage distance EL from 3161c to the back decoration board 3164 (the copper foil thereof) can be made a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3161c flows to the back decoration board 3164, and the back decoration. The substrate 3164 can be prevented from being damaged.

  As described above, according to the back movable decorative body 3160 of the present embodiment, the same operation and effect as those of the above-described back movable movable body 3110 can be achieved. Note that a decorative body base that covers the rear side of the back decorative board 3164 may be provided in the back movable decorative body 3160.

  Subsequently, as shown schematically in FIG. 432 (b), the back-side movable decorative body 3170 of the third embodiment includes an outer decorative body 3171 formed in a frame shape and an inner side of the outer decorative body 3171 (frame). And a light guide radiation plate 3173 provided behind the inner decoration 3172 and radiating light in a direction along the entire surface to the front in the interior. And a back decoration board 3174 on which a plurality of LEDs 3174a for irradiating light inside the light guide radiation plate 3173 in a direction along the front surface are mounted on the front surface.

  The outer decorative body 3171 of the back-side movable decorative body 3170 includes a frame-shaped main body 3171a extending in the front-rear direction, a support part 3171b projecting inward from the inner peripheral surface of the main body 3171a in a flat plate shape, and a main body 3171a. And a metal decoration portion 3171c provided on the front surface of the. The distance from the front end of the main body portion 3171a to the front surface of the support portion 3171b is the same as the thickness of the inner decoration 3172 in the front-rear direction. The metal decoration part 3171c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body part 3171a, and forms a predetermined decoration. The metal decorative portion 3171c may be formed by foil stamping, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by vapor deposition.

  Although not shown, the inner decorative body 3172 is formed with a relief-shaped decoration having irregularities. The inner decoration 3172 is attached so as to close the front opening of the frame-shaped outer decoration 3171.

  The light guide radiation plate 3173 is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner decoration 3172. The light guide radiation plate 3173 is inserted into the frame of the outer decoration 3171, and the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The light guide radiating plate 3173 has an LED housing portion 3173a into which the LED 3174a of the back decoration board 3174 is inserted from behind, and a plurality of reflection portions 3173b provided on the rear surface. The LED housing portion 3173a is a hole penetrating the light guide radiation plate 3173 in the front-rear direction, and has an inner periphery formed in a square shape along the outer periphery of the LED 3174a. The reflecting portion 3173b extends in an arc shape with the determined LED housing portion 3173a as a center, and a plurality of reflecting portions are provided concentrically. The reflecting portion 3173b has a triangular cross section. The plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are provided so as to reflect light from the predetermined LED housing portions 3173a forward. That is, the plurality of reflectors 3173b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction to the front. Note that, similarly to the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back movable movable body 3110, the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b can reflect light from an unspecified direction forward. Alternatively, it may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

  The back decoration board 3174 is formed in the same size as the light guide radiation plate 3173. The rear back decoration board 3174 has a plurality of side-view type LEDs 3174a mounted on the front surface thereof, which are inserted into the LED housing portions 3173a of the light guide radiation plate 3173 from behind. Although not shown, the back decoration board 3174 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil at a position inside a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3174 on the front surface and the rear surface. The back decoration substrate 3174 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface (both surfaces).

  In the assembled state of the back rear movable decorative body 3170 of the present embodiment, the inner decorative body 3172 is fitted into the frame of the outer decorative body 3171 from the front, and the front surface of the outer decorative body 3171 and the front surface of the inner decorative body 3172 are provided. And the outer periphery of the rear surface of the inner decorative member 3172 is in contact with the front surface of the support portion 3171b. In the rear movable decorative body 3170, the light guide radiating plate 3173 and the back decorative board 3174 are inserted into the frame of the outer decorative body 3171 from the rear, and the light guide radiating plate 3173 is provided on the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The vicinity of the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact, and the front surface of the back decoration substrate 3174 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3173. Thereby, the thickness of the back movable movable body 3170 in the front-rear direction is thin. In the rear movable decorative body 3170, a gap having a thickness of the support portion 3171b is formed between the inner decorative body 3172 and the light guide radiation plate 3173.

  The main body portion 3171a of the outer decoration 3171 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back decoration substrate 3174. In the back decorative movable body 3160, the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3172, the light guide radiating plate 3173, and the back decorative board 3174 are covered by the main body 3171a of the outer decorative body 3171. Makes it harder to see and makes it look better.

  Since the rear movable decorative body 3170 covers the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3174 by the main body part 3171a extending rearward of the outer decorative body 3171, the metal decorative part 3171c on the front surface of the main body part 3171a. The creepage distance EL to the back decoration board 3174 (the copper foil thereof) can be made a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3171c flows to the back decoration board 3174, and the back decoration board 3174 Can be prevented from being damaged.

  As described above, according to the back movable decorative body 3170 of the present embodiment, the same operational effects as those of the above-described back movable movable body 3110 can be obtained. In addition, you may make it provide a metal decoration part also in the front surface of the inner decoration body 3172. Further, in the back movable decorative body 3170, a decorative body base that covers the rear side of the back decorative board 3174 may be provided.

  Subsequently, as shown schematically in FIG. 432 (c), the back movable movable body 3180 of the fourth embodiment has an outer decorative body 3181 formed in a frame shape and an inner side of the outer decorative body 3181 (frame). Inner decorative body 3182 having a light-transmitting property, which closes the inner side, and a plurality of LEDs 3183a provided behind the inner decorative body 3182 and capable of irradiating light forward are mounted on the front side of the back decoration board 3183. And

  The outer decorative body 3181 of the back movable movable body 3180 includes a flat frame-shaped main body 3181a, a flange 3181b extending rearward from the outer periphery of the main body 3181a, and the entire surface of the main body 3181a and the flange 3181b. And a metal decoration portion 3181c covering the metal decoration portion 3181c. The metal decoration portion 3181c is provided on the entire surface of the outer decoration 3181. The metal decorative portion 3181c may be formed by plating or may be formed by vapor deposition.

  The inner decoration 3182 is formed of a transparent member. The inner decorative body 3182 has a flat outer shape that is larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped main body 3181a of the outer decorative body 3181 and smaller than the inner circumference of the flange 3181b. And a flange portion 3182b extending to the front. Although not shown, the main body portion 3182a is formed with a relief-like decoration having irregularities on substantially the entire surface.

  The back decoration board 3183 has an outer shape smaller than the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration 3182. That is, the back decoration board 3183 is formed in a size such that a gap of a predetermined distance or more is formed between the outer circumference and the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration 3182. A plurality of top view type LEDs 3183a are mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3183. Although not shown, the back-side decorative substrate 3183 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil at a position inside a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the back-side decorative substrate 3183 on the front surface and the rear surface. The back decoration substrate 3183 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface (both surfaces).

  In the assembled state of the back rear movable decorative body 3180 of the present embodiment, the inner decorative body 3182 and the back decorative board 3183 are inserted into the frame of the frame-shaped outer decorative body 3181 from the rear. The rear movable decorative body 3180 has a front surface near the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3182 in contact with the rear surface of the main body 3181a of the outer decorative body 3181, and the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182 It extends rearward to the same position as the rear end of the flange portion 3181b. That is, the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 3181b of the outer decoration 3181 is covered by the flange 3182b of the inner decoration 3182. In other words, the outer periphery of the flange 3182b of the inner decoration 3182 is covered by the flange 3181b of the outer decoration 3181. Therefore, the outer periphery of the inner decorative member 3182 and the back decoration substrate 3183 are not visible from the outside by the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative member 3181.

  The rear movable movable body 3180 is provided with a flange 3182b of an inner decorative body 3182 inside a flange 3181b of an outer decorative body 3181 provided with a metal decorative part 3181c, Since the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3183 provided on the rear side of the main body 3182a is separated from the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration 3182, the copper of the back decoration board 3183 (from the metal decoration section 3181c is removed. The creepage distance EL to the foil) can be set to a sufficient distance, preventing static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3181c from flowing to the back decoration board 3183 and damaging the back decoration board 3183. can do.

  As described above, according to the rear movable decorative body 3180 of the present embodiment, the same operation and effect as those of the above-described rear movable decorative body 3110 can be achieved. In addition, you may make it provide a metal decoration part also in the front surface of the main-body part 3182a of the inner decoration body 3182. In the back movable decorative body 3180, a decorative body base that covers the rear side of the back decorative board 3183 may be provided.

[5-9e. Bottom left production unit and Bottom right production unit]
Next, the lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back right rendering unit 3250 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 433 to 436 and the like. FIG. 433 (a) is a perspective view of the back bottom left production unit and the back bottom right production unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 433 (b) is the back bottom left production unit and the back bottom right production unit of the back unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 434 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back left production unit and the lower back right production unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 435 is an exploded view of the lower back left production unit and the lower back right production unit and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 436 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movable configuration of the lower back left rendering unit and the lower back right rendering unit from the front.

  The lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back right rendering unit 3250 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the lower end of the back rear rendering unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back right rendering unit 3250 are located on the left and right sides of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 of the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 in a state where they are assembled to the game board 5, and from the front. The transparent game panel 1100 and the front unit 2000 can be visually recognized.

  First, the lower back left rendering unit 3200 will be described. The lower back left rendering unit 3200 is provided behind the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 and has a translucent lower left rotating decorative body 3201 having a shaft shaft 3201a protruding rearward. A lower back left decorative body 3202 having: a lower back left decorative board 3203 provided behind the lower back left decorative body 3202 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front; , A lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is rotatably mounted, and a lower back left decorative body 3202 is mounted, and a unit base 3204 mounted on the lower end of the left side of the back rear production unit 3100. , Is provided.

  In addition, the lower back left rendering unit 3200 is mounted on the lower back left drive motor 3205 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3204 so that the rotation axis projects rearward, and mounted on the rotation shaft of the lower back left drive motor 3205. And a first transmission gear 3207 which is in mesh with the driving gear 3206 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3204, and is in mesh with the first transmission gear 3207. A second transmission gear 3208 in the form of a spur gear rotatably attached to the unit base 3204; and a second transmission gear 3208 meshed with the second transmission gear 3208 and attached to the rear end of the shaft 3201a of the lower back left rotary decorative body 3201. And a third transmission gear 3209 in the form of a spur gear, and attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 below the lower back left decorative body 3202. Is provided with a cover 3210, a.

  The lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3201a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower back decoration 3201 is formed to have a length penetrating the lower back decoration 3202, the lower back decoration substrate 3203, and the unit base 3204. . The lower back left decorative body 3202 overlaps two cherry blossoms of the same size as the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, and rotates so that the rear petals are located between the front petals. It is formed in such a shape as to have been made.

  In the lower back left decorative substrate 3203, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is provided with a lower back left detection sensor 3203a for detecting the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 on the rear surface. The lower back left detection sensor 3203a penetrates the unit base 3204 and protrudes rearward. The third transmission gear 3209 has a detection piece 3209a that protrudes forward and is detected by the lower back left detection sensor 3203a of the lower back left decorative board 3203. In a state in which the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 is detected by the lower back left detection sensor 3203a, the lower back left rotary decorative body 3201 has one petal directed upward (see FIG. 436). ).

  When the drive gear 3206 is rotated by the lower back left drive motor 3205, the lower back left rendering unit 3200 of the present embodiment is driven via the first transmission gear 3207, the second transmission gear 3208, and the third transmission gear 3209. The lower left rotating decorative body 3201 can be rotated around a longitudinal axis. In addition, the lower back left rendering unit 3200 can cause the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 and the lower back left decorative body 3202 to emit light by making the plurality of LEDs of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 emit light.

  Next, the lower right effect unit 3250 will be described. The lower back right rendering unit 3250 is provided behind the lower right rotating decorative body 3251 and has a translucent lower right rotating decorative body 3251 having a shaft shaft 3251a protruding rearward. Bottom right decorative body 3252 having a lower back right decorative board 3253, which is provided behind the lower back right decorative body 3252, and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof; A bottom base right rotation decorative body 3251 is attached rotatably and the bottom bottom right decorative body 3252 is mounted, and a unit base 3254 attached to the lower end of the right side of the back rear production unit 3100 is provided. , Is provided.

  The lower back right effecting unit 3250 is mounted on the lower back right drive motor 3255 and the lower back right drive motor 3255 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3254 such that the rotation axis projects rearward. And a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3257 meshed with the drive gear 3256 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3254, and meshed with the first transmission gear 3257. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3258 rotatably attached to the unit base 3254, and meshed with the second transmission gear 3258, and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3251a of the lower right back decoration 3251; And a third transmission gear 3259 in the form of a spur gear, and attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254 below the lower back right decorative body 3252. Is provided with a cover 3260, a.

  The lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 is formed in a shape imitating cherry blossoms. The shaft shaft 3251a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower back right rotary decorative body 3251 is formed to have a length penetrating the lower right lower decorative body 3252, the lower right right decorative substrate 3253, and the unit base 3254. . The lower back right decorative body 3252 overlaps two cherry blossoms of the same size as the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 and rotates them so that the rear petals are located between the front petals. It is formed in such a shape as to be made.

  In the lower back right decorative substrate 3253, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The lower back right decorative substrate 3253 is provided with a lower back right detection sensor 3253a for detecting the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 on the rear surface. The lower back right detection sensor 3253a penetrates the unit base 3254 and protrudes rearward. The third transmission gear 3259 has a detection piece 3259a that protrudes forward and is detected by the bottom right detection sensor 3253a of the bottom right decoration board 3253. In a state where the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 is detected by the bottom right detection sensor 3253a, the bottom right rotation decorative body 3251 has one petal directed upward (see FIG. 436). ).

  When the drive gear 3256 is rotated by the lower back right drive motor 3255, the lower back right rendering unit 3250 of the present embodiment rotates through the first transmission gear 3257, the second transmission gear 3258, and the third transmission gear 3259. The lower right rotating decorative body 3251 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. In addition, the lower back right rendering unit 3250 can cause the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 and the lower back right decorative body 3252 to emit light by making the plurality of LEDs of the lower back right decorative board 3253 emit light.

[5-9f. Production unit under the back]
Subsequently, the under-back middle rendering unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 437 to 444 and the like. FIG. 437 (a) is a perspective view of the under-rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 4 (b) is a perspective view of the under-rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 438 is an exploded perspective view of the under-the-under-under-the-rendering mechanism of the under-under-under-the-rendering unit when viewed from the front, and FIG. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 440 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back middle decoration unit of the lower back middle rendering unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 441 is an exploded view of the lower back middle decoration unit of the lower back middle production unit from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which was seen. FIG. 442 is an explanatory diagram showing lifting and lowering of the under-back middle decorative body unit by the under-back under-medium elevating mechanism in the under-back under-rendering unit. FIG. 443 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing, from the front, a configuration relating to the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body of the lower back middle decorative body unit in the lower back middle rendering unit, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a stop position and each detection sensor in a table. Drawing 444 is an explanatory view showing arrangement of LED of a decoration object unit under the back in a production unit under the back from the front.

  The lower back middle rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is arranged below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The lower back middle rendering unit 3300 is attached to the rear of the lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back right rendering unit 3250. The underside middle rendering unit 3300 includes a bottom inside middle decoration body unit 3320 having a bottom inside middle decoration body 3310 rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a bottom inside middle lifting mechanism that moves the bottom inside middle decoration unit 3320 up and down. 3350.

  The bottom back middle rotating decorative body 3310 of the back bottom middle rendering unit 3300 has a regular hexagonal shape when viewed from the front. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has six numeral decorations formed in a relief shape from “1” to “6” on the entire surface, and is circular at every 60 ° angle clockwise about the center. It is arranged on the circumference. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has translucency. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a concave portion 3311 which can accommodate a diffusion lens 3321, a lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322, and a front end side of the substrate fixing member 3323 in the back lower middle decorating body unit 3320 which will be described later. Have.

  As shown in FIG. 440 and FIG. 441, the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 is provided with a diffusion lens 3321 provided behind the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 and a diffusion lens 3321 behind. A lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a diffuser lens 3321 attached to the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 so as to sandwich it from the rear side and project rearward in a columnar shape. A substrate fixing member 3323 having a shaft portion 3323a, and a shaft hole 3324a into which the shaft portion 3323a of the substrate fixing member 3323 is rotatably inserted. And a base 3324.

  In addition, the lower back middle decorating unit 3320 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 and extends in a semicircular arc coaxial with the shaft hole 3324a, and a circumference coaxial with the region detecting piece 3325. A plurality of position detection pieces 3326 protruding from the rotation base 3324 and a spur gear-shaped rotation gear 3327 provided on the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 are provided.

  Furthermore, the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is provided behind the rotating base 3324 and has an opening 3328a through which the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can pass, and has a light transmitting property. A lower middle back decoration 3328, a lower back middle decoration board 3329 provided behind the lower back middle decoration 3328, and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side thereof; A plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 which are attached to the front surface of the second decorative board 3329 which can detect the area detecting piece 3325, and the position specifying which are attached to the front face of the second lower decorative substrate 3329 and which can detect the position detecting piece 3326 And a sensor 3331.

  The lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is provided at the rear of the lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329, and the rear end of the shaft portion 3323a of the substrate fixing member 3323 is attached, and the lower back middle decoration 3328 is mounted. A movable base 3332, a rear lower mid-rotation drive motor 3333 attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3332 so that the rotation axis projects forward, A drive gear 3334 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the rotating gear 3327, a rear cover 3335 attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332, and a lower-lower elevating mechanism 3350 attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332. And an elevating slider 3336 which is slidably guided by the slide rail 3360 in the vertical direction.

  The front end side of the diffusion lens 3321, the lower back inside first decorative substrate 3322, and the substrate fixing member 3323 are located between the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the rotating base 3324 in the assembled state. It is in a state of being accommodated in the concave portion 3311 of the rotating decorative body 3310, and is not in contact with any of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the rotating base 3324. By appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs on the lower back middle decoration substrate 3322, the number decoration (relief) portion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be light-emitting decorated. The LED on the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 is a full-color LED. The LED of the second lower decorative substrate 3329 is a full-color LED.

  The area detecting piece 3325 has a larger diameter than the rotating gear 3327 and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotating base 3324. As shown in FIG. 443 (a), the area detection piece 3325 includes “3”, “4”, and “5” from between the number decorations “2” and “3” in the lower back middle decoration body 3310. It is formed in an arc shape within a range of 180 degrees around the rotation axis through the numeral decoration and between the numeral decorations of "5" and "6".

  Each of the plurality (here, six) of the position detection pieces 3326 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotating base 3324 on a circumference having a diameter larger than that of the area detection piece 3325. The position detection pieces 3326 are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction at an angle of θ degrees (here, 60 degrees) such that each of the position detection pieces 3326 is located at the center of the decoration of the number of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. . In the present embodiment, one position detecting piece 3326 is formed in an arc shape within a range of a predetermined angle α degrees (20 degrees to 25 degrees, here, 23.34 degrees) around the rotation axis, and is adjacent to the rotation axis. There is an interval of 2 × β degrees (θ degrees−α degrees (here, 36.66 degrees)) about the rotation axis with the position detection piece 3326 (see FIG. 443 (a)). .

  The plurality (three in this case) of the region specifying sensors 3330 are provided so as to be arranged at an angle of θ degrees (60 degrees) around the rotation axis of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. The three area specifying sensors 3330 are provided in the order of the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c in the clockwise order. In the present embodiment, the three area specifying sensors 3330 position the decoration “1” of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 right above the center of rotation, and select “3”, “4”, and “5”. It is provided at a position corresponding to the numeral decoration (see FIG. 443 (a)).

  The position specifying sensor 3331 is provided at a position at an angle of γ degrees (here, 30 degrees) from the first area specifying sensor 3330a in a counterclockwise direction around the rotation axis of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. ing.

  The movable base 3332 has an elevating pin 3332a that protrudes rearward from a lower portion of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape. The elevating pin 3332a is slidably inserted into the second slit 3357b of the elevating arm 3357 of the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350. The lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is a stepping motor capable of detecting a rotation position.

  The under-back under-decoration body unit 3320 rotates the drive gear 3334 by the under-back under-rotation drive motor 3333 to rotate the under-back under-decoration intermediate decoration 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotating gear 3327. Can be. In addition, the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower back middle first decoration substrate 3322 and the lower back middle decoration substrate 3329, respectively, thereby forming the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310. In addition, it is possible to decorate the lower decorative body 3328 with light.

  As shown in FIGS. 438 and 439 and the like, the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350 extends right and left and both ends are attached to the lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back right rendering unit 3250, and a unit base 3351, and a unit base 3351. A lower-lower middle elevating drive motor 3352 mounted on the front surface of the unit so that the rotation shaft projects rearward, and a flat bottom mounted on the rotating shaft of the lower-lower middle lifting drive motor 3352 and partially facing the front side of the unit base 3351. A gear-shaped drive gear 3353 is meshed with the drive gear 3353, and is meshed with a first transmission gear 3354 in the form of a spur gear and rotatably mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3351. A second transmission gear 3355 in the form of a spur gear rotatably mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3351; It has a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3356a that meshes with the motor 355, and a drive pin 3356b that protrudes in a columnar shape from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the front surface of the gear portion 3356a. A lifting cam gear 3356 rotatably mounted at the upper center.

  In addition, the lower back middle lifting mechanism 3350 has a base end extending in the left-right direction rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, and a driving pin 3356b of the lifting cam gear 3356 is slidably inserted in the longitudinal direction. The second slit 3357b, which extends in the longitudinal direction on the distal end side from the first slit 3357a, and in which the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 in the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is slidably inserted. And a lifting arm 3357 having a detecting piece 3357c provided at the end thereof, and a lower-lower middle lifting detecting sensor 3358a capable of detecting the detecting piece 3357c of the lifting arm 3357. And a relay board 3358 located on the front side.

  Further, the lower back lower elevating mechanism 3350 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, the lifting cam gear 3356, and the lifting arm 3357 from the front side. A front cover 3359 having a vertically extending lifting and lowering slit 3359a into which the lifting pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 of the decorative body unit 3320 is inserted, and a front cover 3359 attached to the front surface of the front cover 3359. A slide rail 3360 for guiding the slider 3336 in the vertical direction, a gear cover 3361 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the drive gear 3353 from the rear, and a tip end side of the lifting arm 3357 move upward (front). In the clockwise direction) Arm 3357 is provided with a spring 3362 that is urged to rotate.

  The lower back middle drive motor 3352 is attached to the lower part of the unit base 3351 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The lifting arm 3357 is rotatably mounted on the base end to the right of the lifting cam gear 3356 at the same height as the center of the lifting cam gear 3356. The end of the lifting arm 3357 extends to the left from the lifting cam gear 3356.

  The lower back middle relay substrate 3358 includes a lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322, a lower back middle decorative substrate 3329, an area specifying sensor 3330, a position specifying sensor 3331, a lower back middle rotating drive motor 3333, and a lower back middle lifting drive motor. 3352, the connection between the back lower middle elevation detection sensor 3358 a and the effect drive board 1720 is relayed.

  The front cover 3359 is attached to the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction, and the elevating slit 3359a is provided on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. The elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3359a of the front cover 3359. The slide rail 3360 is provided on the front cover 3359 on the right side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. With the lifting slit 3359a and the slide rail 3360, the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 can be supported so as to slide vertically in the vertical direction.

  When the drive gear 3353 is rotated by the back-lower middle lifting drive motor 3352, the lower-lower middle lifting mechanism 3350 raises and lowers the cam gear via the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356 a of the lifting cam gear 3356. 3356 can be rotated. Then, the drive pin 3356b revolved by the rotation of the lift cam gear 3356 can rotate the lift arm 3357 through the first slit 3357a in which the drive pin 3356b is slidably inserted. The lower back middle decoration unit 3320 can be moved up and down together with the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 via the lifting pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 slidably inserted into the two slits 3357b.

  Next, the movement of the under-back middle rotation decorative body 3310 and the under-back middle decoration body unit 3320 in the under-back middle rendering unit 3300 will be described in detail. In the normal state, the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 is in a lowered position in which the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 has moved to the lowest position. In this normal state, the elevating arm 3357 of the back-and-back middle elevating mechanism 3350 has the tip side located below the base end side, and the detection piece 3357c at the tip moves up and down while the back-and-under middle relay board 3358 is up and down. It is detected by the detection sensor 3358a (see FIG. 442 (a)).

  In this normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 is located below the center of its revolution, and is located near the base end of the first slit 3357a of the elevating arm 3357. . More specifically, a normal line passing through a contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356. Thus, even if an urging force for rotating the elevating arm 3357 in the clockwise direction is applied by the spring 3362, the line of force of the urging force is applied to the drive pin 3356b contacting the first slit 3357a. Through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3356, the elevating cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Accordingly, since the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 also does not revolve, the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, and the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 does not move from the lowered position by the urging force of the spring 3362. The urging force of 3362 does not act on the lower-lower middle elevating drive motor 3352 via the elevating arm 3357 or the like.

  In a normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 may be brought into contact with the base end of the first slit 3357a. Accordingly, when the lifting / lowering arm 3357 attempts to rotate clockwise by the urging force of the spring 3362, the lifting / lowering cam gear 3356 moves in the counterclockwise direction by the force acting from the first slit 3357a via the drive pin 3356b. Try to rotate. At this time, the drive pin 3356b is about to revolve so as to move to the base end of the elevating arm 3357. However, since the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the base end of the first slit 3357a. Since the drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the elevating arm 3357 is locked, and the upward and downward movement of the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 can be prevented.

  In the normal state, the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 is configured such that the uppermost numeral decoration among the plurality of numeral decorations in the lower lower middle rotation decorative body 3310 is inside the frame of the center role 2500. And can be viewed well from the front (from the player side) (see FIG. 386 and the like). Further, in the normal state, the numeral decoration located at the lowermost position is located behind the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, and the first decorative substrate 3322 and the lower lower middle By causing the LED of the second decoration substrate 3329 to emit light, the first starting port 2002 formed of a transparent member can also be made to emit light in addition to the light-emitting decoration of the middle rotating decoration body under the back (see FIG. 395 and the like). ).

  In this normal state, when the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the back-and-under middle elevating drive motor 3352, the drive gear 3353 is rotated through the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a. As a result, the elevating cam gear 3356 rotates clockwise, and the driving pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 revolves clockwise. As the drive pin 3356b revolves, the inner surface of the first slit 3357a that is in contact with the drive pin 3356b is pressed upward, and the drive pin 3356b slides inside the first slit 3357a toward the distal end, and the elevating arm The distal end of 3357 is rotated clockwise around the proximal end so that the distal end moves upward.

  When the elevating arm 3357 rotates clockwise, the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 inserted into the second slit 3357b on the distal end side of the elevating arm 3357 is raised by the inner surface of the second slit 3357b. , And the lower-back middle decorative body unit 3320 moves upward via the lifting pin 3332a. Then, when the drive pin 3356b moves above the center of revolution, the drive pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the base end. At this time, in the elevating arm 3357, since the urging force in the clockwise direction is applied by the spring 3362, the upward movement of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is assisted by the urging force, and the lower back middle The load on the lifting drive motor 3352 is reduced.

  When the drive pin 3356b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches near the base end of the first slit 3357a, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 by the lower back lowering drive motor 3352 stops and the drive The revolution of the pin 3356b stops. Thereby, the movement of the lower back decoration unit 3320 by the lifting arm 3357 is stopped, and the lower back decoration unit 3320 is in the state of the ascending position where it is moved to the uppermost position.

  When the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 is in the raised position, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevation cam gear 3356. Accordingly, even if a force is required to rotate the elevating arm 3357 in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320, the force line of the force is applied to the first slit 3357a. The lift cam gear 3356 does not rotate because it passes through the center of rotation of the lift cam gear 3356 via the contacting drive pin 3356b. Accordingly, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 also does not revolve, so that the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, the under-back middle decoration unit 3320 does not move downward from the raised position, and the under-bottom decoration body does not move. The own weight of the unit 3320 does not act on the lower-lower middle lifting drive motor 3352 via the lifting arm 3357 or the like.

  When the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the raised position, the lift cam gear 3356 may be further revolved to bring the drive pin 3356b into contact with the proximal end of the first slit 3357a. Accordingly, when the elevating arm 3357 attempts to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320, the elevating cam gear 3356 is rotated by the force acting from the first slit 3357a via the driving pin 3356b. Try to rotate in the direction around. At this time, the drive pin 3356b is about to revolve so as to move to the base end of the elevating arm 3357. However, since the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the base end of the first slit 3357a. Since the drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the elevating arm 3357 is locked, and the downward movement of the back lower middle decoration body unit 3320 can be prevented.

  In the state where the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 is moved to the ascending position, most of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is located within the frame of the center role 2500 (further, a game ball rolling in the game area 5a). B is located above the rebound preventing member (stage cover 2515) provided on the center role component 2500 for preventing the B from rebounding from the outside to the inside of the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501), and is positioned forward (by the player). Side), all of the numeral decorations can be visually recognized well (see FIG. 476).

  To return the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 to the lower position from the state in which the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 is moved to the upper position, the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the opposite direction by the lower back middle drive motor 3352, and the lifting arm 3357 is moved. Rotates in the counterclockwise direction, and the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 moves downward from the raised position. Then, when the detection piece 3357c at the tip of the lifting arm 3357 is detected by the lower back lowering detection sensor 3358a of the lower back relay board 3358, the rotation of the driving gear 3353 is stopped by the lower back lifting drive motor 3352. The center for preventing the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 from falling back from the outside of the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501) to the lower position in the normal state (further, the game ball B rolling in the game area 5a). The bounce prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided on the accessory 2500 can be returned to the pachinko machine 1 at a position where the member overlaps when viewed from the front.

  The under-rear under-rendering unit 3300 of the present embodiment rotates the drive gear 3334 by the under-rear-under-reverse rotation drive motor 3333 in the under-rear under-decoration body unit 3320, and thereby rotates the under-rear under-rotation decorative body 3310 via the rotating gear 3327. Can be rotated about an axis in the front-rear direction. By rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, the six numeral decorations provided on the front face rotate like roulette. The under-back middle decoration body 3310 can be rotated by the under-back middle rotation drive motor 3333 in any position of the under-back middle decoration unit 3320 such as the lowered position or the raised position.

  In the normal state, the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 of this embodiment is configured such that one of the plurality (here, six) numeral decorations in the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is located immediately above the rotation center (stop position). are doing. For example, as shown in FIG. 443 (a), in the state where the numeral decoration of “1” in the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is located on the upper side, the region detecting piece 3325 of the rotating base 3324 is set to the first region specifying. The three area specifying sensors 3330 of the sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are detected, and a plurality of (here, six) position detecting pieces 3326 are detected by the position specifying sensor 3331. Has not been detected.

  Here, first, the relationship between the three area specifying sensors 3330 and the six stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 will be described. In the state where the numeral decoration of “1” is set to the stop position, as described above, the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are connected to the area detecting piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324. Is detected. That is, as shown in FIG. 443 (b), when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c detect, the number decoration of “1” is centered on the stop position. It is located within the range of ± 30 degrees.

  Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect and the third area specifying sensor 3330c does not detect, the numeral decoration of “2” indicates the area of ± 30 degrees around the stop position. Located within range.

  Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c do not detect, the numeral decoration of “3” indicates the area of ± 30 degrees around the stop position. Located within range.

  Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are not detected, the numeral decoration of “4” indicates the range of ± 30 degrees around the stop position. Located within.

  Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b are not detected and the third area specifying sensor 3330c is detecting, the numeral decoration of “5” indicates the area of ± 30 degrees around the stop position. Located within range.

  Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a is not detected and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are detecting, the numeral decoration of “6” is in the range of ± 30 degrees around the stop position. Located within range.

  In this way, any combination of the detection and non-detection of the three region specifying sensors 3330, the first region specifying sensor 3330a, the second region specifying sensor 3330b, and the third region specifying sensor 3330c, causes any of the numeral decorations to indicate the stop position. It is possible to know (detect) whether or not it is located in a stop area including the stop area.

  In addition, since the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 of this embodiment is a stepping motor, the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 rotates by 30 degrees after the area specifying sensor 3330 detects the area detection piece 3325. By stopping the rotation of the motor 3333, it becomes possible to stop the desired numeral decoration of the lower back inside rotating decorative body 3310 at the stop position. However, in the case of performing such control, it is necessary to identify the origin of the stop position at the stop position while identifying the area of the stop position by the three area identification sensors 3330. There is a problem that the control for stopping the rotation of the 3310 is complicated and the load is increased. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of position detecting pieces 3326 for specifying the stop position and a position specifying sensor 3331 for detecting the position detecting piece 3326 are provided, and the origin is recognized by the position specifying sensor 3331. Thus, the complexity of the control for stopping the rotation of the lower back inside rotary decoration 3310 is suppressed, and the load is reduced.

  More specifically, when it is desired to stop the lower back middle decorative body 3310 at a desired number decoration stop position, the lower back middle decorative body 3310 rotates and the three area specifying sensors 3330 perform the desired stop. When the combination satisfies the position, the position specifying sensor 3331 detects the center of the position detecting piece 3326 because the position specifying sensor 3331 is shifted in the rotation direction at an angle of 30 degrees with respect to the first area specifying sensor 3330a. ing. In this state, the desired number is separated from the stop position by a rotation angle of 30 degrees.

  In this state, when the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates by α / 2 degrees (here, 11.67 degrees), which is the length of the position detection piece 3326, the position detection piece 3326 separates from the position identification sensor 3331. Thus, the position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected. The angle at which the position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected is set as the origin. Then, when rotation from the origin (from the origin) by β degrees (here, 18.33 degrees), the rotation of the under-back middle rotation decorative body 3310 by the under-back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is stopped to obtain a desired number. The decoration can be stopped exactly at the stop position.

  Note that, in the above description, the rotation stop of the under-back middle rotation decorative body 3310 has been described based on the angle, but the rotation may be stopped by the rotation step of the under-back middle rotation drive motor 3333 including a stepping motor. For example, when one rotation is set to 396 steps, in a state where the three area specifying sensors 3330 are in a combination satisfying a desired stop position, if the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates by 13 steps, the position detecting piece 3326 becomes Apart from the position specifying sensor 3331, the position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected. Stopping the rotation of the under-bottom rotating decoration 3310 by the under-bottom rotating drive motor 3333 when the position specifying sensor 3331 rotates by 20 steps with the angle at the origin as the origin, thereby stopping the desired numeral decoration. It can be stopped exactly at the position.

  Next, the luminous decoration in the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 will be described. As shown in FIG. 444, the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 to cause the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 to emit light. A decorative substrate 3322 and a second lower decorative substrate 3329 are provided. The plurality of LEDs of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 are located behind the six numeral decorations in the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310, and each of the numeral decorations can be independently illuminated.

  On the other hand, the plurality of LEDs of the lower back middle decorating substrate 3329 are located behind a portion outside the plurality of numeral decorations in the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, and are located outside the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310. The periphery can be illuminated.

  As described above, the under-back middle rendering unit 3300 can detect the rotation position of the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 to some extent by the three region identification sensors 3330, and therefore, based on the detection of the region identification sensor 3330. By rotating the plurality of LEDs of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back, as appropriate, the LED is rotated in a state where only specific numeral decorations are luminously decorated or in a state where each numeral decoration is illuminated with a different color. It is possible to show the player an effect that strongly attracts the interest of the player.

  In addition, in the state where the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 is in the lowered position, the lower number decoration on the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, By illuminating the LED at the corresponding portion of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back, the first starting port 2002 can be illuminated. Thereby, the player's interest can be directed to the first starting port 2002. Also, when the game ball B wins at the first starting port 2002, the LED of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back is made to emit light (or one light emission mode is determined from a plurality of light emission modes to emit light). ).

  As described above, according to the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 of the present embodiment, this allows the rotating lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having six stop positions to detect an area having a length extending over three stop positions. Pieces 3325 and six position detecting pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, and three area specifying sensors 3330 for detecting the area detecting pieces 3325 and one position specifying for detecting the position detecting pieces 3326 Since the sensor 3331 is provided, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates, the three area specifying sensors 3330 for detecting the area detecting pieces 3325 decrease sequentially after increasing sequentially from one side in the rotation direction. This is repeated until all the area specifying sensors 3330 are not detected until the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the next stop position. Not Rukoto, by a combination of area identification sensor 3330 that detects the area detection piece 3325 can roughly grasp the current rotational position of the subplantar rotating decorative body 3310.

  And, since the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 is provided with six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the lower back middle rotation is performed by the detection of the area detection pieces 3325 by the three area specifying sensors 3330. After roughly detecting the rotation of the decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331, and the shift of the stop position can be detected. It is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having a plurality of stop positions with as few as possible.

  In addition, since the stop position of the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position, and the stop position shifts to play a game. It is possible to prevent giving a sense of incongruity to the person, and it is possible to entertain the effect (movable effect) of the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, the shift of the stop position can be suppressed, and By moving the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotating speed) of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is more increased than in the case where the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 reciprocates. Can be faster. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player by the underside rotating decoration body 3310 rotating quickly, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It is possible to entertain, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated about the axis in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of numeral decorations are provided on the front surface, the roulette that stops rotating at an arbitrary stop position after rotating roundly is provided. Since such an effect can be shown to the player, the player can be excited by whether or not the desired numeral decoration stops rotating at the stop position. It is possible to entertain and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the number of stop positions of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is an even number, the number of stop positions that can be handled by the minimum number of region specifying sensors 3330 necessary for detecting movement to an arbitrary stop position is determined. The number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is the same, the ability (grasping of the stop position) by the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 can be maximized, and more stop positions are provided. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 are provided on the rotating base 3324 that rotates together with the lower middle rotating decoration 3310, the radius (diameter) of the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can be set. It can be made as large as possible, and the positioning accuracy of the stop position can be made higher.

  Note that, in the above-described embodiment, the rotation base 3324 that rotates integrally (with) the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 and the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 are provided, but this is not the case. The present invention is not limited to this. The region detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 may be provided on a member that rotates with the rotation of the lower back middle rotating body 3310 such as the drive gear 3334.

[5-9 g. Uragami production unit]
Subsequently, the back upper presentation unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 445 to 452 and the like. FIG. 445 (a) is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 445 (b) is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 446 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper presentation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 447 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper presentation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. is there. FIG. 448 is an exploded perspective view of the back ascending / decorating decorative body unit in the back and top effect unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 449 is an exploded perspective of the back ascending / decorating decorative body unit of the back unit as viewed from the rear. FIG.

  FIG. 450 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rotation mechanism of the back-up front rotating decorative body in the back-up presentation unit from the front. FIG. 451 (a) is an explanatory view showing the elevation mechanism of the back-up / down decoration unit in the back-up production unit from the front, and FIG. 451 (b) is a back-up state with the back-up / down decoration unit moved to the appearance position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising / lowering mechanism of a raising / lowering decoration body unit, and the rotating mechanism of a back decoration rotating body from back. FIG. 452 is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative board from the front in a state where the back-up-and-down decorative body unit is moved to the appearance position in the back-up effect unit.

  The back effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is mounted above the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 and in front of the back effect unit 3100. As shown in FIG. 446 and FIG. 447, the back upper presentation unit 3400 includes a back upper rotary decoration 3410 having a shaft shaft 3410a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface, and a rear upper rotary decoration 3410. A left and right front upper decorative body 3421 extending through the shaft shaft 3410a at the center in the left and right direction, and a rear upper side provided behind the back upper front decorative body 3421 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. The front decorative substrate 3422 and the back upper decorative substrate 3422 are provided behind the front upper decorative substrate 3422, and the front upper decorative body 3421 is attached to the front surface thereof. The front decorative substrate 3422 rotatably supports the shaft shaft 3410a of the rear upper front rotating decorative body 3410. And a unit base 3423.

  In addition, the back upper presentation unit 3400 is provided between a rear cover 3424 attached so as to form a space between the rear base 3423 and a unit base 3423 having a rotation axis on the rear surface of the rear cover 3424. Meshes with a front upper back rotation drive motor 3425 mounted so as to protrude into the space, a spur gear shaped drive gear 3426 mounted on the rotation shaft of the back upper front rotation drive motor 3425, and a drive gear 3426. A rotating gear 3427 which is attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3410a of the front and rear rotating decorative body 3410 and has a detection piece 3427a protruding forward; And a back-upside rotation detection sensor 3428 that is attached to the rear surface and can detect the detection piece 3427a of the rotating gear 3427.

  In addition, the back-up production unit 3400 includes a back-up / down drive motor 3429 attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 so that the rotation axis projects into the space between the front unit base 3423 and a back-up / down drive A spur gear-shaped motor gear 3430 attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 3429, a gear portion 3431 a meshing with the motor gear 3430, penetrating the rear cover 3424 from a portion protruding outward from the circumference of the gear portion 3431 a. A drive pin 3431b protruding rearward in a columnar shape, and a detection piece 3431c protruding forward from near the outer periphery of the gear portion 3431a, and an elevating cam gear 3431 rotatably attached to the rear cover 3424. , Which is attached to the rear surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 and detects the detecting piece 3431 c of the elevating cam gear 3431. The base end side is located on the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 so that the front end side on which the movable back and forth detection sensor 3432 and the back and back rotation decorative body 3440 are provided moves up and down by the revolution of the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431. And a spring 3433 biasing the back-up and down decorative body unit 3450 to rotate in the direction in which the tip side moves upward. , A bar-shaped regulating member 3434 that is attached to the rear side of the rear cover 3424 and regulates the upward movement of the back-up-and-down decorative body unit 3450.

  As shown in FIG. 448 and FIG. 449, the back ascending / descending decorative body unit 3450 includes a back upper back decoration in which a shaft shaft 3440a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 penetrates at the center. Body 3451, a back-upper decorative board 3452 provided behind the back-upper decorative body 3451 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back-upper decorative body 3451 from behind the back-upper decorative board 3452. And a lifting unit base 3453 that is rotatably mounted on the unit base 3423 and rotatably supports the shaft shaft 3440a of the back-upside rear decoration 3440.

  The back-up and down decorative body unit 3450 includes a back-upper rear rotation drive motor 3454 that is attached to the front surface of the up-down unit base 3453 so that a rotation shaft projects rearward, and a rotation shaft of the back-upper rear rotation drive motor 3454. , A spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3456 meshed with the drive gear 3455 and rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3453, and a first transmission gear 3456. A second transmission gear 3457 in the form of a spur gear, which is rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3453, and which is in mesh with the second transmission gear 3457; And a spur gear-shaped rotating gear 3458 attached to the rear end.

  Further, the back elevating and lowering decorative body unit 3450 includes a gear cover attached to the rear surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so as to cover the driving gear 3455, the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotating gear 3458 from behind. 3459, and a motor cover 3460 attached to the front surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so as to cover the rear upper rear drive motor 3454 from the front.

  The back-upper front rotating decorative body 3410 of the back-up presentation unit 3400 is formed in a shape imitating cherry blossoms, and has translucency. The shaft shaft 3410a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the front upper back decoration 3410 penetrates the front upper back body 3421, the front back decoration substrate 3422, and the unit base 3423, and the unit base 3423 and the rear side. The space extends to the space between the cover 3424 and the space. The back upper decorative body 3421 is formed by stacking two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 at the center in the left-right direction, and the rear petals are placed between the front petals. The decoration has a shape as if it were rotated to be located at The entire back upper front decorative body 3421 has a light-transmitting property.

  The front upper back decorative substrate 3422 extends right and left over substantially the entire length of the front upper back body 3421 in the left-right direction. By illuminating the LEDs on the back upper front decorative substrate 3422, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421 can be illuminated. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 are full color LEDs.

  The unit base 3423 has a through-hole 3423a through which the back-upside rotation detection sensor 3428 and the back-up-and-down detection sensor 3432 attached to the rear surface of the back-upper decorative board 3422 are inserted. The rear cover 3424 is coaxial with the shaft shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotary decorative body 3410, and is formed in a circular arc shape through which a cylindrical support shaft 3424a protruding rearward from the rear surface and a drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 are inserted. And an extended slit 3424b. The support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is for rotatably supporting the back elevating and lowering decorative body unit 3450, and is inserted into the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453.

  The detection piece 3427a of the rotating gear 3427 is detected by the upper back rotation detection sensor 3428 that penetrates the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and protrudes rearward. The elevating cam gear 3431 has a gear portion 3431a formed in a semicircular arc shape, and is provided with a drive pin 3431b projecting rearward at a portion bulging outward from the opposite side of the gear portion 3431a. The drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 penetrates the slit 3424b of the rear cover 3424 and is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453 of the back elevating decorative body unit 3450. In addition, the detection piece 3431c of the lifting cam gear 3431 is detected by the back lifting detection sensor 3432 that penetrates through the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and projects rearward.

  The back-upper rotating decoration 3440 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom, and has translucency. The shaft shaft 3440a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 penetrates the back-upper decoration 3451, the back-upper decoration board 3452, and the elevating unit base 3453, and the elevating unit base 3453. Extends to the back of the The back upper decorative body 3451 overlaps two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, and rotates so that the rear petals are located between the front petals. It has a decoration in the shape of a creature. The whole back decoration body 3451 has translucency.

  The back-upper decorative board 3452 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face, so that the back-upper rotary decoration 3440 and the back-upper decorative body 3451 can be illuminated. The LED on the back upper back decoration board 3452 is a full-color LED.

  The elevating unit base 3453 is provided on the shaft end 3453a, which penetrates forward and rearward on the base end side (right end side in front view), into which the support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is relatively rotatably inserted, and provided on the right side of the shaft hole 3453a. And an elongated slit 3453b extending along a line passing through the center of the shaft hole 3453a. The drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the lift unit base 3453. The motor cover 3460 has a decoration imitating cherry blossoms formed on the front surface.

  Next, movements of the back-upper front rotating decoration 3410, the back-upper rotating decoration 3440, and the back-up and down decoration unit 3450 in the back-up presentation unit 3400 will be described. In the back state effecting unit 3400, in a normal state, the detection piece 3427a of the rotating gear 3427 attached to the shaft shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 is detected by the back upper rotation detection sensor 3428, and The upper front rotating decorative body 3410 is in a state in which one petal faces upward (see FIG. 450). In this state, when the drive gear 3426 is rotated by the back upper front rotation drive motor 3425, the back upper front rotation decorative body 3410 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotation gear 3427.

  Also, in a normal state, the back-up and down decorative body unit 3450 provided with the back-upper rotating decoration body 3440 on the front end side is in a state of extending in the left-right direction, and the whole except the front side is It is located at the back of the back upper front decorative body 3421 and is in a retracted position invisible from the front (see FIG. 451 (a)). In addition, the part of the back ascending and descending decorative body unit 3450 projecting to the left from the back upper front decorative body 3421 is located behind the back front left rendering unit 3700 in a state where it is assembled on the game board 5, It is not visible from the front.

  In this normal state, the detection piece 3431c of the lifting cam gear 3431 is detected by the back-up / down detection sensor 3432. In addition, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 is located below the revolving center, and near the end far from the shaft hole 3453a in the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453 of the back elevating decorative body unit 3450. positioned.

  More specifically, a normal line passing through a contact point of the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 with the slit 3453b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431. Accordingly, even if a force is applied to rotate the elevating unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction so that the tip side moves downward due to the weight of the back elevating and lowering decorative body unit 3450, the force is not applied. Since the force lines pass through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431 via the driving pin 3431b in contact with the slit 3453b, the elevating cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Accordingly, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 does not revolve, so that the elevating unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back elevating decorative body unit 3450 rotates from the retreat position so that the tip side moves downward. There is no. Therefore, the weight of the back-up / down decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back-up / down drive motor 3429 via the up / down unit base 3453 and the up / down cam gear 3431.

  In a normal state, the drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 may be brought into contact with an end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Accordingly, when the elevating unit base 3453 attempts to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back elevating and lowering decorative body unit 3450, the elevating cam gear 3431 is counterclockwise driven by the force acting from the slit 3453b via the driving pin 3431b. Try to rotate in the direction around. At this time, the drive pin 3431b is going to revolve so as to move in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b comes into contact with an end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Accordingly, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the elevating unit base 3453 is locked, and the counterclockwise rotation of the back elevating decorative body unit 3450 can be prevented. .

  In this normal state, when the motor gear 3430 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back up / down drive motor 3429, the up / down cam gear 3431 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the gear portion 3431 a meshing with the motor gear 3430. Thus, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 revolves clockwise. As the drive pin 3431b revolves clockwise, the drive pin 3431b moves leftward and upward, and the drive pin 3431b slides in the slit 3453b toward the shaft hole 3453a, The lifting unit base 3453 is rotated counterclockwise around the shaft hole 3453a by the weight of the back lifting decoration unit 3450 so that the tip side thereof moves downward.

  When the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 revolves clockwise, and moves above a straight line connecting the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431 and the center of the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, the driving pin 3431b is moved. The inside of the slit 3453b is slid in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a. When the drive pin 3431b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches near the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 is stopped by the back up / down drive motor 3429, and at the same time, the drive pin 3431b Stops revolving.

  Accordingly, the rotation of the back-up and down decorative body unit 3450 in the counterclockwise direction via the up-and-down unit base 3453 stops, and the front end side of the back-and-back up and down decorative body unit 3450 including the back-up and down rear rotating decorative body 3440 is moved. , The appearance position moved downward from the back upper front decorative body 3421 (see FIG. 451 (b)). In this appearance position, the front end side of the back-up-and-down decoration body unit 3450 is located below the back-upper front decoration body 3421, so that the back-upper-back rotation decoration body 3440 and the like are visually recognized from the front. It is possible.

  In the state where the back elevating decorative body unit 3450 is in the appearance position, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3431b with the slit 3453b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431. Accordingly, even if a force for further rotating the elevating unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction is exerted by the weight of the back elevating and lowering decorative body unit 3450, the line of the force is applied to the slit 3453b. The lift cam gear 3431 does not rotate because it passes through the center of rotation of the lift cam gear 3431 via the contacting drive pin 3431b. Accordingly, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 does not revolve, so that the elevating unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back elevating decorative body unit 3450 is further rotated counterclockwise from the appearance position so that the tip side moves downward. , And the weight of the back up / down decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back up / down drive motor 3429 via the up / down cam gear 3431.

  In addition, in the state where the back-up / down decorative body unit 3450 is in the appearance position, the up-and-down cam gear 3431 may be further revolved, and the drive pin 3431b may be brought into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Accordingly, when the elevating unit base 3453 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back elevating and lowering decorative body unit 3450, the elevating cam gear 3431 is rotated by the force acting from the slit 3453b through the driving pin 3431b. Try to rotate in the direction around. At this time, the drive pin 3431b is going to revolve so as to move in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b comes into contact with an end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the lifting unit base 3453 is locked, so that the rotation of the back lifting and lowering decorative body unit 3450 in the counterclockwise direction can be prevented. .

  In a state where the back-up-and-down decoration body unit 3450 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position side, the back-upper-back rotation decoration body 3440 provided on the distal end side becomes visible from the front. In the back-up and down decorative body unit 3450, when the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back-upper-back rotation drive motor 3454, the back-upper-back rotation decoration via the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotation gear 3458. The body 3440 can be rotated around the longitudinal axis (see FIG. 451 (b)). Therefore, when the rear upper back rotation decorative body 3440 is visible from the front and the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the rear upper back rotation drive motor 3454, the rotating rear upper back decoration body 3440 can be visually recognized. .

  When returning the back-up / down decorative body unit 3450 from the appearance position to the retracted position, the drive pin 3431b of the up-and-down cam gear 3431 is raised and lowered by rotating the motor gear 3430 in the opposite direction by the back-up and down drive motor 3429. The inner surface of the slit 3453b of the unit base 3453 is pressed downward, the elevating unit base 3453 rotates clockwise, and the tip side of the back elevating and lowering decorative body unit 3450 moves upward. Then, when the detection piece 3431c of the lifting / lowering cam gear 3431 is detected by the back lifting / lowering detection sensor 3432, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 by the back lifting / lowering drive motor 3429 is stopped, so that the back lifting / lowering decorative body unit 3450 is moved to the retracted position. Can be restored.

  At this time, the spring 3433 urges the back-up / down decorative body unit 3450 in the clockwise direction, and assists the rotation of the back-up / down decorative body unit 3450 to the retreat position side, so that the back-up / down movement is performed. The load on the drive motor 3429 is reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 452, the back upper presentation unit 3400 of the present embodiment is provided with the back upper front decorative board 3422 behind the back upper rotary decoration 3410 and the back upper decoration 3421. By appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front decoration substrate 3422, the back upper front decoration 3410 and the back upper decoration 3421 can be illuminated. In addition, since the back upper decoration board 3452 is provided behind the back upper rotation decoration 3440 and the back upper decoration 3451, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back upper decoration board 3452 emit light as appropriate. By doing so, it is possible to make the back upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back upper decoration 3451 emit light.

  At this time, while the back-up and down decorative body unit 3450 is rotated from the retracted position to the emergent position, the LED of the back-upper decorative board 3452 emits light, so that the back-upper rotary decoration that is illuminated and decorated is provided. The body 3440 and the back decoration 3451 can be shown to the player.

[5-9h. Back rear left production unit]
Next, the back rear left rendering unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to main drawings 453 to 459 and the like. FIG. 453 (a) is a perspective view of the back rear left rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 453 (b) is a perspective view of the back rear left rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 454 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left production unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 455 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left production unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. FIG. FIG. 456 is an exploded perspective view of the back left rear decoration unit of the back rear left rendering unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 457 is an exploded view of the back rear left decoration unit of the back rear left rendering unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which was seen. FIG. 458 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movable mechanism of the back rear left rendering unit from the front. FIG. 459 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back left decoration unit in the back left effect unit.

  The back rear left rendering unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the left end in the back box 3010 and in front of the left side of the back rear rendering unit 3100. The back left rendering unit 3500 is a back left rotating decorative body 3510 having translucency rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back supporting the rear left rotating decorative body 3510 rotatably at a lower end side. A rear left decorative body unit 3520 and a rear left drive unit 3550 mounted in the rear box 3010 by rotating the upper end side of the rear left decorative body unit 3520 around an axis in the front-rear direction are provided. .

  The back left rotation decorative body 3510 of the back back left rendering unit 3500 is formed in a shape imitating cherry blossoms, and has translucency. The back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 has a shaft shaft 3510a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface in a columnar shape (see FIG. 457).

  As shown in FIG. 456 and FIG. 457, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 includes a back rear left decorative body 3521 in which the shaft shaft 3510a of the back rear left rotary decorative body 3510 passes through at the center, and a back rear left decorative body. A back rear left decorative board 3522 provided behind 3521 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and attached to the back rear left decorative body 3521 from behind the back rear left decorative board 3522 and A front cover 3523 rotatably supporting the shaft shaft 3510a of the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, and a rear cover attached to the rear side of the front cover 3523, and an upper end side rotatable by the back rear left drive unit 3550. And a movable base 3524 to be attached.

  Further, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 includes a back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 mounted on the rear surface of the movable base 3524 so that a rotation axis protrudes between the movable base 3524 and the front cover 3523, A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3526 attached to the rotation shaft of the left rotation drive motor 3525, and a flat gear meshed with the drive gear 3526 and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3510a of the rear left rotation decorative body 3510. And a gear-shaped rotary gear 3527.

  The back left decorative body 3521 of the back left decorative body unit 3520 has a light-transmitting property. The petals on the side are formed in a shape as if rotated so as to be located between the petals on the front side. The plurality of LEDs on the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 are full color LEDs.

  The front cover 3523 is formed in a shape in which a shape in a front view is a combination of a portion having the same shape as the outer shape of the back left rear decorative body 3521 and a portion extending upwardly and rectangularly from the upper left of the portion. . In the front cover 3523, a plurality of cherry blossom decorations are formed on the front surface of a portion extending in a rectangular shape upward. The front cover 3523 is formed in a shallow container shape opened rearward.

  The movable base 3524 is formed so as to close the open rear side of the front cover 3523, and the upper end side extends above the upper end of the front cover 3523. The movable base 3524 has a shaft hole 3524a penetrating front and rear on the upper end side, and an operating pin 3524b protruding forward in a columnar shape at a position away from the shaft hole 3524a. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear left rear drive unit 3550 is inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 so as to be relatively rotatable. The operating pin 3524b projects forward at a position below and to the right of the shaft hole 3524a.

  When the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back left rotation drive motor 3525, the back back left decorative body unit 3520 moves the back back left rotary decorative body 3510 back and forth through the rotating gear 3527 meshed with the drive gear 3526. Can be rotated about the directional axis.

  As shown in FIGS. 454 and 455, the rear back left drive unit 3550 includes a vertically extending flat reinforcing plate 3551 having a support shaft 3551a that rotatably supports the rear back left decorative body unit 3520. A unit base 3552 which is attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3551 and which is attached to the inside of the back box 3010; a unit cover 3553 which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3552; A rear left and right elevating drive motor 3554 mounted so that a shaft protrudes between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped motor gear mounted on a rotating shaft of the rear and rear left elevating drive motor 3554 3555.

  Further, the rear-left rear drive unit 3550 is in mesh with the motor gear 3555 and is rotatably mounted on the unit cover 3553. The transmission gear 3556 is in the form of a spur gear, and the spur gear-shaped gear portion 3557a is in mesh with the transmission gear 3556. An elevating cam gear 3557 having a drive pin 3557b protruding rearward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 3557a in a cylindrical shape, and a detection piece 3557c protruding forward from near the outer periphery of the front surface of the gear portion 3557a. A left and right extending first slit 3558a into which the drive pin 3557b of the 3557 is slidably inserted, and an operating pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 in the rear left decorative body unit 3520 extending left and right below the first slit 3558a. Has a second slit 3558b, which is slidably inserted. , A, a link member 3558 are slidably mounted in the vertical direction between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553.

  Further, the back rear left drive unit 3550 includes a spring 3559 for urging the link member 3558 upward, a flat partition plate 3560 provided between the link member 3558 and the elevating cam gear 3557, and a unit cover. A rear left rear relay board 3561 attached to the front of the 3553, a rear left vertical detection sensor 3562 mounted to the rear face of the rear left relay board 3561, and capable of detecting the detection piece 3557c of the lifting cam gear 3557; It has.

  The reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear left rear drive unit 3550 is a metal plate extending vertically, and a support shaft 3551a protrudes forward at the upper part. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the back rear left decorative body unit 3520.

  The unit base 3552 extends vertically longer than the reinforcing plate 3551 such that the support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is located near the center in the vertical direction. The unit cover 3553 extends up and down with substantially the same length as the unit base 3552, and is formed in a shallow container shape opened rearward.

  The lift cam gear 3557 has the drive pin 3557b slidably inserted into the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558 through the slit 3560a of the partition plate 3560. The detection piece 3557c is detected by a rear left up / down detection sensor 3562 that penetrates through the unit cover 3553 and projects rearward. The link member 3558 extends vertically and has a first slit 3558a near the upper end and a second slit 3558b at the lower end. The spring 3559 has a lower end attached to the link member 3558 and an upper end attached to the partition plate 3560.

  The partition plate 3560 has a slit 3560a that extends in a semicircular shape through which the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is inserted. The back rear left relay board 3561 relays the connection between the back drive left decorative board 3522, the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the back back left elevating drive motor 3554, the back back left elevating detection sensor 3562, and the effect drive board 1720. It is for doing.

  Subsequently, an operation of the back rear left rendering unit 3500 will be described. In a normal state, the back left left rendering unit 3500 has a back back left rotating decorative body 3510 provided at the lower end (front end) as shown in FIGS. 458 and 459 (a). The unit 3520 is in a retracted position where the unit 3520 hangs down. In this normal state, the back back left decorative body unit 3520 (back back left rotating decorative body 3510) is located behind the back front left rendering unit 3700, and is invisible from the front (player side). Has become.

  Also, in the normal state assembled on the game board 5, most of the back-left left rendering unit 3500 is located behind the back-front left decorative body 3030 and the back-front left rendering unit 3700. Only a part of 3554 faces forward (see FIG. 406 and the like). Note that, in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the part facing the front of the rear left ascent / descent drive motor 3554 is in a state where the front is covered by a part outside the door window 101 a of the door frame 3. It becomes invisible from the side (see FIG. 410).

  In this normal state, the detection piece 3557c of the elevating cam gear 3557 is detected by the rear left and right elevating detection sensor 3562. In a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is located immediately below the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557, and is located near the left end of the link member 3558 in the first slit 3558a. In a normal state, the link member 3558 is located at the lower moving end, and the operating pin 3524b located to the right of the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the rear left decorative body unit 3520 is The link member 3558 is located near the left end in the second slit 3558b.

  In this normal state, the link member 3558 is urged upward by the spring 3559, but the normal passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557 that is in contact with the first slit 3558a is: Since it passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557 (revolution center of the drive pin 3557b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3557b via the first slit 3558a by the urging force of the spring 3559, the drive pin 3557b Does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3558 does not move upward. Accordingly, since the link member 3558 does not move upward, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 (the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510) moves from the retracted position around the shaft hole 3524a (support shaft 3551a) of the movable base 3524. It does not rotate, and the urging force of the spring 3559 does not act on the rear left rear elevation drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558 and the elevation cam gear 3557 and the like.

  In a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 may be brought into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. Thus, when the link member 3558 attempts to move upward due to the urging force of the spring 3559, the lifting cam gear 3557 attempts to rotate clockwise due to the force acting from the first slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b. At this time, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 tries to revolve in the direction to move to the left. However, since the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the drive pin 3557b Cannot be revolved, and the upward movement of the link member 3558 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3557, whereby the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 can be prevented from rotating from the retracted position.

  In this normal state, when the motor gear 3555 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the rear left and right lifting drive motor 3554, the lifting cam gear 3557 rotates in the counterclockwise direction via the transmission gear 3556 and the gear portion 3557a. Thus, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 revolves in the counterclockwise direction. When the drive pin 3557b revolves in the counterclockwise direction, it slides rightward in the first slit 3558a while pressing the inner surface of the first slit 3558a upward, and the link member 3558 moves upward. It will be.

  When the link member 3558 moves upward, the operating pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 projecting downward and to the right of the support shaft 3551a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558. The movable base 3524 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 3551a while the operating pin 3524b slides rightward in the second slit 3558b, and the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is pressed. It will rotate counterclockwise from the retracted position (see FIGS. 459 (a) and (b)). At this time, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is assisted by the urging force of the spring 3559, and the load applied to the rear left up / down driving motor 3554 is reduced.

  In this way, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 3551a, so that the back rear left decorative body 3510 provided at the lower end moves rightward. While moving upward, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 moves to the right of the back front left rendering unit 3700 and becomes visible from the front (player side).

  In the rear left effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment, the rotation of the rear left decorative body unit 3520 when the elevating cam gear 3557 rotates about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state (state of the retracted position). The position is the first appearance position (see FIG. 459 (b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 has rotated about 44 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

  When the elevating cam gear 3557 further rotates counterclockwise from the state of the first appearance position, the drive pin 3557b slides leftward in the first slit 3558a. When the drive pin 3557b moves to a position immediately above the center of revolution (revolves 180 degrees from a normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the rear left up / down drive motor 3554 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3557b stops. .

  As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3558 stops, the rotation of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 in the counterclockwise direction stops, and the state becomes the second appearance position (FIG. 459 (c)). )). In the state of the second appearance position, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 has been rotated approximately 74 degrees counterclockwise from the state of the retracted position.

  When the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3557b is located immediately above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557. In this state, due to the weight of the rear left back decoration unit 3520, a force of the rear back left decoration unit 3520 rotating clockwise about the support shaft 3551a acts on the back base unit 3520. The link member 3558 attempts to move downward via the operating pin 3524b of the 3524 and the second slit 3558b, but the drive pin 3557b inserted into the first slit 3558a is located immediately above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction.

  Accordingly, since the drive pin 3557b does not revolve, the elevating cam gear 3557 does not rotate, so that the link member 3558 does not move downward, and the rear left back decoration unit 3520 rotates from the state of the second appearance position. In addition to this, the force due to the weight of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 does not act on the rear back left vertical drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558 and the vertical cam gear 3557 and the like.

  In the state where the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3557 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction so that the drive pin 3557b contacts the left end of the first slit 3558a. Is also good. Accordingly, when the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 tries to rotate clockwise around the support shaft 3551a by its own weight, the link member 3558 moves downward via the operating pin 3524b. The lifting cam gear 3557 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction by the force acting from the one slit 3558a via the driving pin 3557b. At this time, the drive pin 3557b attempts to revolve to move to the left, but since the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the drive pin 3557b can revolve. Therefore, the downward movement of the link member 3558 is prevented, and the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 can be locked non-rotatably in the state of the second appearance position.

  In a state in which the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated from the retreat position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 provided at the lower end side is forward (the player side). To be visible.

  In the back rear left decorative body unit 3520, by rotating the drive gear 3526 by the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the back rear left rotary decorative body 3510 is rotated via the rotating gear 3527 meshed with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated about an anterior-posterior axis (see FIG. 458). Therefore, when the rear left rotation drive motor 3525 rotates the driving gear 3526 when the rear left rotation decorative body 3510 is visible from the front (from the player side), the rotating rear left rotary decoration 3510 is rotated. It can be visually recognized by a player.

  When the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is returned from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is a normal state, the motor gear 3555 is inverted by the back rear left up / down drive motor 3554, and the reverse of the above. , The link member 3558 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557, and with the movement of the link member 3558 downward, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is moved. It turns in the direction of the retreat position (clockwise direction). When the detection piece 3557c of the elevating cam gear 3557 is detected by the back left elevating detection sensor 3562, the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the back left elevating drive motor 3554 is stopped, thereby retreating the back back left decorative body unit 3520. It can be returned to the position.

  As shown in FIG. 458, the back back left rendering unit 3500 of this embodiment is provided with the back back left decorative substrate 3522 behind the back back left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back back left decorative body 3521. By appropriately illuminating a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear left decorative substrate 3522, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back rear left decorative body 3521 can be illuminated. At this time, the LED of the rear left back decoration board 3522 is made to emit light in a state where the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position side, thereby emitting light. The back left rotating decoration 3510 and the back left decoration 3521 that have been set can be shown to the player.

[5-9i. Urago right production unit]
Next, the back right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to main figures 460 to 466 and the like. FIG. 460 (a) is a perspective view of the back right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 460 (b) is a perspective view of the back right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 461 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right production unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 462 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right production unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. FIG. FIG. 463 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right decoration unit of the rear right production unit when viewed from the front, and FIG. 464 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right decoration unit of the rear right production unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which was seen. FIG. 465 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movable mechanism of the rear right production unit from the front. FIG. 466 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back right decoration unit in the back right effect unit.

  The rear right production unit 3600 of the rear unit 3000 is provided near the right end in the back box 3010 and in front of the right side of the rear rear production unit 3100. The back right production unit 3600 has a translucent right back decoration 3610 rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction and a back back rotatably supporting the right back decoration 3610 at the lower end. A rear right decoration unit 3620 and a rear right drive unit 3650 mounted in the back box 3010 by rotating the upper end side of the rear right decoration unit 3620 around an axis in the front-rear direction. .

  The back right decoration 3610 of the back right effecting unit 3600 is formed in a shape imitating cherry blossoms, and has translucency. The rear right rotating decorative body 3610 has a shaft shaft 3610a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface in a columnar shape (see FIG. 463).

  As shown in FIG. 463 and FIG. 464, the back right decoration unit 3620 includes a back right decoration 3621 through which the shaft 3610 a of the back right rotation decoration 3610 passes through at the center, and a back right decoration. A back right decoration board 3622 provided behind the 3621 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and attached to the back of the back right decoration 3621 from behind the back right decoration board 3622. A front cover 3623 rotatably supporting the shaft shaft 3610a of the rear right rotation decorative body 3610; and a rear cover 3623 mounted on the rear side of the front cover 3623 and having an upper end rotatable by the rear right drive unit 3650. And a movable base 3624 to be attached.

  The back right decoration unit 3620 includes a back right rotation drive motor 3625 mounted on the rear surface of the movable base 3624 so that a rotation axis protrudes between the movable base 3624 and the front cover 3623. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3626 attached to the rotation shaft of the right rotation drive motor 3625, and a flat gear meshed with the drive gear 3626 and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3610 a of the rear right rotation decorative body 3610. And a gear-shaped rotary gear 3627.

  The back right decoration 3621 of the back right decoration unit 3620 has a light-transmitting property, and two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back right rotation decoration 3610 are superimposed one on the other, and the back is formed. The petals on the side are formed in a shape as if rotated so as to be located between the petals on the front side. The plurality of LEDs on the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 are full color LEDs.

  The front cover 3623 is formed in a shape in which a shape in a front view is a combination of a part having the same shape as the outer shape of the back right rear decorative body 3621 and a part extending in a rectangular shape from the upper right to the upper part of the part. . The front cover 3623 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a portion extending in a rectangular shape upward. The front cover 3623 is formed in a shallow container shape opened rearward.

  The movable base 3624 is formed so as to close the open rear side of the front cover 3623, and has an upper end extending above the upper end of the front cover 3623. The movable base 3624 has a shaft hole 3624a penetrating forward and backward on the upper end side, and an operating pin 3624b protruding forward in a columnar shape at a position away from the shaft hole 3624a. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear right drive unit 3650 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 so as to be relatively rotatable. The operating pin 3624b projects forward at a position below and to the left of the shaft hole 3624a.

  When the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the back right rotation drive motor 3625, the back right decoration body 3620 moves the back right rotation decoration 3610 forward and backward through a rotation gear 3627 meshed with the drive gear 3626. Can be rotated about the directional axis.

  As shown in FIGS. 461 and 462, the rear right drive unit 3650 includes a vertically extending flat reinforcing plate 3651 having a support shaft 3651a that rotatably supports the rear right decorative body unit 3620. A vertically extending unit base 3652 mounted on the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 and mounted in the back box 3010; a vertically extending unit cover 3653 having an upper portion mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3652; The rear rear right-up / down drive motor 3654, which is mounted on the upper part of the front of the front surface of the 3653 so that the rotary shaft protrudes between the unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653, and the rotation shaft of the rear right-right up / down drive motor 3654. And a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3655.

  In addition, the rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3657a meshing with the motor gear 3655, a drive pin 3657b protruding rearward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 3657a, and a front surface of the gear portion 3657a. An elevating cam gear 3657 having a detection piece 3657c protruding forward from the vicinity of the outer periphery, a first slit 3658a extending left and right into which a drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted, and a first slit It has a second slit 3658b that extends left and right below 3658a, and into which the operating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 in the rear right decorative body unit 3620 is slidably inserted. The unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653 Link section slidable up and down between It is provided with a 3658, a.

  Further, the rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spring 3659 for urging the link member 3658 upward, a flat partition plate 3660 provided between the link member 3658 and the elevating cam gear 3657, and a unit cover. A rear right rear relay board 3661 attached to the front surface of the rear and rear right relay board 3661, a rear right vertical lowering detection sensor 3662 mounted on the rear surface of the rear right rear relay board 3661, and capable of detecting a detection piece 3657c of the lifting cam gear 3657; A lower base 3663 is attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 below the unit base 3652 and has a lower portion of the unit cover 3653 attached to the front surface.

  The reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear right drive unit 3650 is a vertically extending metal plate, and the support shaft 3651a protrudes forward at the upper part. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 of the rear right decorative body unit 3620.

  The unit base 3652 extends above the reinforcing plate 3651 such that the support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is located near the lower end. The unit cover 3653 extends vertically from the upper end of the unit base 3652 to approximately the same length as the lower end of the reinforcing plate 3651 (the lower base 3663), and is formed in a shallow container shape opened rearward.

  The lift cam gear 3657 has the drive pin 3657b slidably inserted into the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658 through the slit 3660a of the partition plate 3660. The detection piece 3657c is detected by a rear right up / down detection sensor 3662 that penetrates the unit cover 3653 and protrudes rearward. The link member 3658 extends vertically and has a first slit 3658a near the upper end and a second slit 3658b at the lower end. The spring 3659 has a lower end attached to the link member 3658 and an upper end attached to the partition plate 3660.

  The partition plate 3660 has a slit 3660a extending in a semicircular arc shape through which the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is inserted. The back right relay board 3661 relays the connection between the back right decoration board 3622, the back right rotation drive motor 3625, the back right right up / down drive motor 3654, and the back right right up / down detection sensor 3662, and the effect drive board 1720. It is for doing.

  Next, an operation of the back right effect unit 3600 will be described. In the normal state, the back right effecting unit 3600 is provided with a back right rotating decorative body 3610 at the lower end (front end) as shown in FIGS. 465 and 466 (a). The unit 3620 is in a retracted position in which it is suspended. In this normal state, the back right decoration unit 3620 (back right rotation decoration 3610) is located behind the back right effect unit 3800, and is invisible from the front (player side). Has become.

  In the normal state assembled on the game board 5, the back right effect unit 3600 is located behind the front right decorative body 3040 and the back right effect unit 3800, and the whole is front (player side). It is not visible from.

  In this normal state, the detection piece 3657c of the elevating cam gear 3657 is detected by the rear right and left elevating detection sensor 3662. In a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the lifting / lowering cam gear 3657 is located immediately below the rotation center of the lifting / lowering cam gear 3657 and near the right end in the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658. In a normal state, the link member 3658 is located at the lower moving end, and the operating pin 3624b located to the left of the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the back right decorative body unit 3620 is The link member 3658 is located near the right end in the second slit 3658b.

  In this normal state, the link member 3658 is urged upward by the spring 3659, but the normal passing through the contact point in contact with the first slit 3658a of the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is: Since it passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657 (revolution center of the driving pin 3657b), even if an upward force acts on the driving pin 3657b via the first slit 3658a by the biasing force of the spring 3659, the driving pin 3657b Does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3658 does not move upward. Accordingly, since the link member 3658 does not move upward, the back right decoration body unit 3620 (back right rotation decoration 3610) moves from the retracted position around the shaft hole 3624a (the support shaft 3651a) of the movable base 3624. It does not rotate, and the biasing force of the spring 3659 does not act on the rear rear right-and-left vertical drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658 and the vertical cam gear 3657 and the like.

  In a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 may be brought into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. Accordingly, when the link member 3658 attempts to move upward by the biasing force of the spring 3659, the lifting cam gear 3657 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b. . At this time, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 tries to revolve in the direction to move to the right, but since the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b Cannot be revolved, and the upward movement of the link member 3658 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3657, whereby rotation of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 from the retracted position can be prevented.

  In this normal state, when the motor gear 3655 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the rear right up / down drive motor 3654, the up / down cam gear 3657 is rotated in the clockwise direction via the gear portion 3657a. Drive pin 3657b revolves clockwise. When this drive pin 3657b revolves clockwise, it slides leftward in the first slit 3658a while pressing the inner surface of the first slit 3658a upward, and the link member 3658 moves upward. Becomes

  When the link member 3658 moves upward, the operating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 of the rear right decorative body unit 3620 projecting below and to the left of the support shaft 3651a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658. While the operating pin 3624b slides leftward in the second slit 3658b, the movable base 3624 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a, and the rear right decorative body unit 3620 retreats. It rotates clockwise from the position (see FIGS. 466 (a) and (b)). At this time, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is assisted by the urging force of the spring 3659, and the load applied to the rear right driving motor 3654 is reduced.

  By rotating the back right decoration unit 3620 clockwise about the support shaft 3651a in this manner, the back right rotation decoration 3610 provided on the lower end side moves to the left. As a result, the back right rotating decorative body 3610 moves to the left of the back front right rendering unit 3800, and becomes visible from the front (the player side).

  In the rear right production unit 3600 of this embodiment, the rotation position of the rear right decorative body unit 3620 when the elevating cam gear 3657 is rotated approximately 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state (the state of the retracted position). Is the first appearance position (see FIG. 466 (b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 has been rotated approximately 44 degrees clockwise from the state of the retracted position.

  Then, when the elevating cam gear 3657 further rotates clockwise from the state of the first appearance position, the drive pin 3657b slides rightward in the first slit 3658a. Then, when the drive pin 3657b moves to a position immediately above the center of revolution (revolves by 180 degrees from a normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the rear right up / down drive motor 3654 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3657b stops. .

  This stops the upward movement of the link member 3658, stops the clockwise rotation of the back right decorative body unit 3620, and enters the state of the second appearance position (FIG. 466 (c)). See). In the state of the second appearance position, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated approximately 74 degrees clockwise from the state of the retracted position.

  In a state where the rear right decorative body unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3657b is located immediately above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657. In this state, the right weight of the back right decorative body unit 3620 exerts a force to rotate the back right decorative body unit 3620 in a counterclockwise direction about the support shaft 3651a due to the weight of the back right decorative body unit 3620. The link member 3658 tends to move downward through the operation pin 3624b of the base 3624 and the second slit 3658b, but the drive pin 3657b inserted in the first slit 3658a is positioned right above the revolving center. Therefore, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction.

  Accordingly, since the drive pin 3657b does not revolve, the elevating cam gear 3657 does not rotate, so that the link member 3658 does not move downward, and the rear right decorative body unit 3620 rotates from the state of the second appearance position. In addition, the force by the weight of the back right decoration unit 3620 does not act on the back right lifting drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658 and the lifting cam gear 3657 and the like.

  It should be noted that, when the rear right decorative body unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3657 is further rotated clockwise so that the drive pin 3657b is brought into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. good. As a result, when the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 attempts to rotate counterclockwise around the support shaft 3651a by its own weight, and the link member 3658 attempts to move downward via the operating pin 3624b, By the force acting from the first slit 3658a via the driving pin 3657b, the lifting cam gear 3657 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3657b attempts to revolve so as to move rightward, but since the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b can revolve. Therefore, the downward movement of the link member 3658 is prevented, and the back right decorative body unit 3620 can be locked so as not to rotate in the state of the second appearance position.

  In a state where the back right decoration unit 3620 is rotated from the retreat position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back right rotation decoration body 3610 provided at the lower end side is forward (the player side). To be visible.

  In the rear right back decoration unit 3620, by rotating the drive gear 3626 by the rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the rear right rotation decoration 3610 is rotated via the rotation gear 3627 meshed with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated about an anterior-posterior axis (see FIG. 465). Therefore, when the back rear right rotation decorative body 3610 is visible from the front (from the player side) and the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the rotating back right rotational decoration 3610 is rotated. It can be visually recognized by a player.

  When the back right decoration body unit 3620 is to be returned from the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position, which is a normal state, the back right driving motor 3654 rotates the motor gear 3655 in the opposite direction. , The link member 3658 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657, and with the downward movement of the link member 3658, the back right decorative body unit 3620 is moved. It turns in the direction of the retreat position (counterclockwise direction). Then, when the detection piece 3657c of the elevating cam gear 3657 is detected by the back right elevating detection sensor 3662, the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the back right elevating drive motor 3654 is stopped, so that the back right decorative body unit 3620 is retracted. It can be returned to the position.

  As shown in FIG. 465, the back right right decoration unit 3600 of this embodiment is provided with the back right decoration board 3622 behind the back right rotating decoration 3610 and the back right decoration 3621, By appropriately illuminating a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back right decoration board 3622, the back right rotation decoration 3610 and the back right decoration 3621 can be light-emitting decorated. At this time, the LED of the back right decoration board 3622 emits light in a state where the back right decoration body unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, thereby emitting light. The back right rotating decoration 3610 and the back right decoration 3621 that have been set can be shown to the player.

[5-9j. Back front left production unit]
Next, the back front left rendering unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 467 to 470 and the like. FIG. 467 (a) is a perspective view of the back front left rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 467 (b) is a perspective view of the back front left rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 468 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative unit in the back front left rendering unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 469 is an exploded view of one back front left decorative unit in the back front left rendering unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the apparatus viewed from behind. FIG. 470 (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left production unit in a closed state, and FIG. 470 (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left production unit in an open state.

  The back front left rendering unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear left rendering unit 3500 so that the vicinity of the left end is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. The back front left rendering unit 3700 includes three back front left decorations of a first back front left decorative body unit 3710A, a second back front left decorative body unit 3710B, and a third back front left decorative body unit 3710C in order from the top. It is composed of a body unit 3710.

  In the back front left rendering unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 470, the first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is compared with the second back front left decorative body unit 3710B and the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. The upper end is inclined obliquely so as to move to the right. The shape of the rear cover 3715 of the first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is slightly different from those of the second back front left decorative body unit 3710B and the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C.

  As shown in FIG. 468 and FIG. 469, the back front left decorative body unit 3710 of the back front left effecting unit 3700 is a frame-shaped front cover 3711 penetrating front and back, and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3711. Shutter support member 3712, and are vertically arranged on the front surface of the shutter support member 3712, and each is rotatably supported around a left-right axis so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 can be opened and closed. A shutter unit 3730.

  Further, the back front left decorative body unit 3710 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3712 from behind, and is formed of a flat back front left decorative body 3713 and a front back left decorative body 3713 having a light-transmitting property. A back front left decorative board 3714 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front and a front back 3711 mounted on the front cover 3711 so as to cover the back front left decorative board 3714 from the rear, and a back rear left effect unit. And a rear cover 3715 attached to the front of the 3500.

  Further, the back front left decorative body unit 3710 includes a support plate 3716 made of a metal plate attached to the left side of the shutter support member 3712, a back front left drive solenoid 3717 attached to the support plate 3716, and a back front A transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger in the left drive solenoid 3717 and a transmission plate 3716 are attached to the support plate 3716 so as to be rotatable around a left-right axis. It includes a rotating link member 3719 and an opening / closing slider 3720 for sliding the shutter unit 3730 vertically by rotating the link member 3719.

  The outer shape of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 is formed in a shape in which a “convex” character is turned rightward and the corner is rounded (a shape in which “pine” is designed). The shutter support member 3712 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3712a that rotatably support the shaft portions 3733 of the respective shutter members 3731 in the shutter unit 3730 on the front surface. Further, the shutter support member 3712 has a boss 3712b that protrudes cylindrically forward from near the left end of the front surface. The boss portion 3712b is slidably inserted into the slit 3720b of the opening / closing slider 3720, and has a support plate 3716 attached to the tip.

  The shutter unit 3730 includes a plurality (here, eight) of shutter members 3731. The shutter member 3731 includes a flat plate-shaped shutter 3732 extending left and right, a shaft portion 3733 extending in a cylindrical shape from both ends in the left and right direction of the shutter 3732, and a left end after protruding in a direction perpendicular to the axis from the tip of the left shaft portion 3733. And a crankshaft 3734 extending in a columnar direction.

  The shutter 3732 is formed with a length and a shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3731 is arranged, with respect to the shape inside the frame of the front cover 3711. The shaft portion 3733 protrudes from near the upper end of the shutter 3732 with the surface of the shutter 3732 facing forward. The crankshaft 3734 is located behind the shaft portion 3733.

  The shutter member 3731 can rotate around the shaft portion 3733 in the left-right direction with the shaft portion 3733 rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3712a of the shutter support member 3712. The crankshaft 3734 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3720a of the opening / closing slider 3720.

  Although not shown, the back front left decorative body 3713 is provided with characters, items, logos, and other patterns in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The back front left decorative body 3713 can diffuse light from the LEDs of the back front left decorative board 3714. The plurality of LEDs on the back front left decorative board 3714 are full color LEDs.

  The support plate 3716 extends vertically with the plate surface facing in the left-right direction, and is formed in a shape in which the front end side is bent rightward. The support plate 3716 has a portion bent rightward on the front end side attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712, and the remaining portion protrudes rearward through the left side of the shutter support member 3712. I have. In addition, the support plate 3716 has a support pin 3716a that protrudes rightward from the vicinity of the lower end in a columnar shape. The support pin 3716a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3719.

  The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is attached to the support plate 3716 in a direction in which the plunger moves forward and backward. The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is urged by a spring in a direction in which the plunger projects downward. When the support pin 3716a of the support plate 3716 is inserted, the link member 3719 can rotate around the support pin 3716a around the axis in the left-right direction. The link member 3719 has a first connection portion 3719a connected to the transmission member 3718 on the rear side with a portion where the support pin 3716a is inserted, and a second connection portion connected to the opening / closing slider 3720. A connection portion 3719b is provided on the front side.

  The opening / closing slider 3720 extends up and down with a length substantially equal to the height of a shutter unit 3730 including a plurality of shutter members 3731, and a transmission groove into which each crankshaft 3734 of the shutter unit 3730 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3720a, and a slit 3720b into which the boss 3712b of the shutter support member 3712 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

  Next, an operation of the back front left rendering unit 3700 will be described. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 470 (a), the back front left rendering unit 3700 has a state in which the shutter 3732 of the shutter member 3731 of the shutter unit 3730 has its plate surface directed forward, and Of the front cover 3711 is closed by the shutter 3732. In this normal state, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is invisible from the front (from the player side). Although not shown, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear back front left decorative body 3713 is provided on the front surface of the shutter unit 3730 (the plurality of shutters 3732). Have been.

  In a normal state, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward by the urging force of the spring. In a normal state, the opening / closing slider 3720 is located at the upper moving end, and the crankshaft 3734 of each shutter member 3731 is located above the shaft portion 3733.

  In this normal state, when the back front left drive solenoid 3717 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the urging force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. When the transmission member 3718 moves upward, the first connection portion 3719a of the link member 3719 connected to the transmission member 3718 moves upward, and the link member 3719 rotates about the support pin 3716a. As a result, the second connecting portion 3719b on the opposite side to the first connecting portion 3719a moves downward. Then, the downward movement of the second connecting portion 3719b of the link member 3719 causes the opening / closing slider 3720 connected to the second connecting portion 3719b to move downward.

  When the opening and closing slider 3720 moves downward, the crankshaft 3734 of the shutter member 3731 inserted into the transmission groove 3720a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crankshaft 3734 is located below the shaft portion 3733. The member 3731 rotates around the shaft portion 3733. Accordingly, the plate surface of the shutter 3732 is oriented in the up-down direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3732, and the front side provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is opened. The left decorative body 3713 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 470 (b)).

  After that, by turning off (OFF) the back front left drive solenoid 3717, the plunger that has been moving upward is moved downward by the urging force of the spring. The shutter unit 3730 in the open state can return to the closed state, which is a normal state.

  As described above, according to the back front left rendering unit 3700 of the present embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3730 by the back front left drive solenoid 3717, the decoration (picture) of the shutter unit 3730 is changed from the back front left decorative body 3713. Can be switched to the decoration (pattern), and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

  In addition, since the back front left decorative board 3714 is provided behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front left decorative body 3713, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, a plurality of LEDs on the back front left decorative board 3714 can emit light. Thus, the player can show the shutter unit 3730 decorated with light emission, and when the shutter unit 3730 is in the open state, the plurality of LEDs on the back front left decorative board 3714 emit light, so that the lighted decorated back front left is displayed. The decorative body 3713 can be shown to the player.

  Further, in the back front left rendering unit 3700, three back front left decorative body units of a first back front left decorative body unit 3710A, a second back front left decorative body unit 3710B, and a third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. Each of the 3710s can independently open and close the shutter unit 3730 and decorate it with light, so by appropriately combining the effects of the three back front left decorative units 3710, a variety of effects can be provided to the player. I can show you.

[5-9k. Ura-mae right direction unit]
Next, the back front right rendering unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 471 to 474 and the like. FIG. 471 (a) is a perspective view of the back front right rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 471 (b) is a perspective view of the back front right rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 472 is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decoration unit in the back front right rendering unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 473 is an exploded view of one back front right decoration unit in the back front right rendering unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the swash plate seen from behind. FIG. 474 (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right rendering unit in a closed state, and FIG. 474 (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right rendering unit in an open state.

  The back front right rendering unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear right rendering unit 3600 such that the upper part near the right end is located behind the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back box 3010. . The back front right rendering unit 3800 includes three back front right decorations of a first back front right decoration unit 3810A, a second back front right decoration unit 3810B, and a third back front right decoration unit 3810C in order from the top. It is composed of a body unit 3810.

  In the back front right rendering unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 474, the first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is compared with the second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C. The upper end is inclined diagonally so as to move to the left. The shape of the rear cover 3815 of the first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is slightly different from that of the second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C.

  As shown in FIGS. 472 and 473, the back right decoration unit 3810 of the back right effecting unit 3800 includes a frame-shaped front cover 3811 that penetrates forward and backward, and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3811. Shutter support member 3812, and are vertically arranged on the front surface of the shutter support member 3812, and each is rotatably supported around a left-right axis to open and close the frame of the front cover 3811. A shutter unit 3830.

  The back front right decorative body unit 3810 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3812 from the rear, and is formed of a translucent flat back right decorative body 3813 and a back front right decorative body 3813. A rear right decoration board 3814 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a front cover 3811 attached to the front cover 3811 so as to cover the front right decoration board 3814 from the rear. And a rear cover 3815 attached to the front of the 3600.

  Further, the back front right decorative body unit 3810 includes a support plate 3816 made of a metal plate attached to the right side of the shutter support member 3812, a back front right drive solenoid 3817 attached to the support plate 3816, A transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger in the right drive solenoid 3817 and a transmission member 3818 attached to the support plate 3816 so as to be rotatable around a left-right axis. It includes a link member 3819 that turns, and an opening / closing slider 3820 that slides up and down by the rotation of the link member 3819 to open and close the shutter unit 3830.

  The front cover 3811 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 has an outer shape formed by turning a “convex” character to the left and rounding the corner (a shape in which a “pine” is designed). The shutter support member 3812 is provided with a plurality of bearings 3812a that rotatably support the shaft portions 3833 of the respective shutter members 3831 in the shutter unit 3830 on the front surface. Further, the shutter support member 3812 has a boss 3812b that protrudes cylindrically forward from near the right end of the front surface. The boss 3812b is slidably inserted into the slit 3820b of the opening / closing slider 3820, and has a support plate 3816 attached to the tip.

  The shutter unit 3830 includes a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3831. The shutter member 3831 includes a flat plate-shaped shutter 3832 extending left and right, a shaft portion 3833 extending in a columnar shape from both ends in the left and right direction of the shutter 3832, and a rightward projection after projecting in a direction perpendicular to the axis from the tip of the right shaft portion 3833. And a crankshaft 3834 extending in a columnar direction.

  The shutter 3832 is formed to have a length and a shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3831 is arranged with respect to the shape inside the frame of the front cover 3811. The shaft portion 3833 protrudes from near the upper end of the shutter 3832 with the surface of the shutter 3832 facing forward. The crankshaft 3834 is located behind the shaft portion 3833.

  The shutter member 3831 can rotate around the shaft 3833 in the left-right direction with the shaft 3833 rotatably supported by the bearing 3812a of the shutter support member 3812. The crankshaft 3834 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3820a of the opening / closing slider 3820.

  Although not shown, the back front right decorative body 3813 is provided with characters, items, logos, and other patterns in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The back front right decorative body 3813 can diffuse the light from the LED on the back front right decorative board 3814. The plurality of LEDs on the back front right decorative board 3814 are full color LEDs.

  The support plate 3816 extends up and down with the plate surface facing in the left-right direction, and is formed in a shape in which the front end side is bent leftward. In the support plate 3816, a portion bent leftward on the front end side is attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812, and the remaining portion projects rearward through the right side of the shutter support member 3812. I have. In addition, the support plate 3816 has a support pin 3816a that protrudes leftward from the vicinity of the lower end in a columnar shape. The support pin 3816a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3819.

  The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is attached to the support plate 3816 in a direction in which the plunger moves forward and backward. The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is urged by a spring in a direction in which the plunger projects downward. By inserting the support pin 3816a of the support plate 3816, the link member 3819 can rotate around the axis in the left-right direction about the support pin 3816a. The link member 3819 has a first connection portion 3819a connected to the transmission member 3818 provided on the rear side with a portion where the support pin 3816a is inserted, and a second connection portion connected to the opening / closing slider 3820. A connection portion 3819b is provided on the front side.

  The opening / closing slider 3820 extends up and down with substantially the same length as the height of a shutter unit 3830 including a plurality of shutter members 3831, and a transmission groove into which each crankshaft 3834 of the shutter unit 3830 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3820a, and a slit 3820b into which the boss 3812b of the shutter support member 3812 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

  Next, an operation of the back front right rendering unit 3800 will be described. In the normal state, the back front right rendering unit 3800 has a state in which the shutter 3832 of the shutter member 3831 of the shutter unit 3830 has its plate surface facing forward as shown in FIG. The inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is closed by the shutter 3832. In this normal state, the back right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is invisible from the front (from the player side). Although not shown, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern provided on the back front right decoration 3813 is provided on the front surface of the shutter unit 3830 (the plurality of shutters 3832). Have been.

  In a normal state, the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward by the urging force of the spring. In a normal state, the opening / closing slider 3820 is located at the upper moving end, and the crankshaft 3834 of each shutter member 3831 is located above the shaft portion 3833.

  In this normal state, when the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the urging force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to When the transmission member 3818 moves upward, the first connection portion 3819a of the link member 3819 connected to the transmission member 3818 moves upward, and the link member 3819 rotates about the support pin 3816a. As a result, the second connecting portion 3819b on the opposite side to the first connecting portion 3819a moves downward. When the link member 3819 moves downwardly of the second connecting portion 3819b, the opening / closing slider 3820 connected to the second connecting portion 3819b moves downward.

  When the opening / closing slider 3820 moves downward, the crankshaft 3834 of the shutter member 3831 inserted in the transmission groove 3820a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crankshaft 3834 is positioned lower than the shaft portion 3833. The member 3831 rotates around the shaft portion 3833. Accordingly, the plate surface of the shutter 3832 is oriented in the up-down direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3832, and the front side provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is opened. The right decorative body 3813 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 474 (b)).

  Thereafter, the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is de-energized (OFF), so that the plunger that has been moving upward moves downward by the urging force of the spring. The shutter unit 3830 in the open state can return to the closed state, which is a normal state.

  As described above, according to the back front right rendering unit 3800 of the present embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3830 by the back front right drive solenoid 3817, the decoration (picture) of the shutter unit 3830 can be removed from the back front right decorative body 3813. Can be switched to the decoration (pattern), and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

  In addition, since the back front right decorative board 3814 is provided behind the shutter unit 3830 and the back front right decorative body 3813, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, a plurality of LEDs of the back front right decorative board 3814 can emit light. The shutter-equipped shutter unit 3830 can be shown to the player, and when the shutter unit 3830 is in the open state, a plurality of LEDs on the back-front-right decoration board 3814 emit light, so that the illuminated-decorated back-front right The decorative body 3813 can be shown to the player.

  Furthermore, in the back front right rendering unit 3800, three back front right decorative body units of a first back front right decorative body unit 3810A, a second back front right decorative body unit 3810B, and a third back front right decorative body unit 3810C. 3810, the shutter unit 3830 can be independently opened / closed or illuminated, so that various effects can be provided to the player by appropriately combining the effects of the three back front right decorative units 3810. I can show you.

[5-10. Production on a game board]
Next, main effects (movable effects) in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 475 to 480 and the like. FIG. 475 is a front view of the game board in a state where the back movable ornament of the back effect unit has been moved from the retracted position to the appearing position. FIG. 476 is a front view of the game board in a state in which the under-back mid-rotation decorative body of the under-bottom effect unit has been moved from the lowered position to the raised position. FIG. 477 shows the back-upside rotating decoration of the back-up rear production unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back-left rotation decoration of the back-left production unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and back-right. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back right rotation decoration body of the effect unit moved from the retreat position to the first appearance position, respectively. FIG. 478 shows the back left rotating decorative body of the back left rendering unit from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back right rotating decorative body of the back back right rendering unit from the retracted position to the second appearance position, respectively. It is a front view of the game board shown in the moved state. FIG. 479 is a front view of the game board showing the shutter unit of the front-left production unit and the shutter unit of the front-right production unit, respectively, from the closed state to the open state.

  FIG. 480 shows the back decoration of the back production unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back decoration of the back production unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back of the back production unit. Move the left rotating decorative body from the retracted position to the first appearance position, move the right rotating decorative body behind the back right rendering unit from the retracted position to the first appearing position, and move the lower rotating middle decorative body of the back lower directing unit to the first appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state moved from a descent position to a descent position, respectively.

  The game board 5 of the present embodiment includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, a starting port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a side panel. Since the upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, the second attacker unit 2600, the middle right side unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed substantially entirely transparent, in a normal state, As shown in FIG. 386, the back-front left decorative body 3030, the back-front right decorative body 3040, and the back-bottom left-hand rotation of the back front left decorative unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through them. Decorative body 3201, bottom right rotating decoration body 3251 of back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle production unit Rotating decorative body 3310 under the back of unit 3300, front rotating decorative body 3410 and back upper decorative body 3421 of back upper staging unit 3400, front cover 3711 and shutter unit 3730 of back front left rendering unit 3700, back front The front cover 3811, the shutter unit 3830, and the like of the right effect unit 3800 can be viewed well, and the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be viewed well through the frame of the center role 2500. be able to.

  More specifically, the back front left decorative body 3030 is located on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the back front right decorative body 3040 is moved from the stop portion 1006 of the front component 1000 to the right rail 1005. Along the side right middle unit 2700. In addition, the back movable decoration 3110 of the back effect unit 3100 is located behind the back effect unit 3400, and is invisible from the player side.

  The lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is located below the frame of the center role 2500 and in the center of the side unit 2200 and behind the general winning opening 2001 on the left side. Is located behind the first big winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 below the frame of the center role 2500. The lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 and the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 are visible from the player side through the transparent game panel 1100 and the front unit 2000.

  In addition, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the lowered position, and is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 so that the upper part protrudes into the frame of the center role 2500. ing. Since the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 is viewed from obliquely above from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, the numeral decoration above the rotation center is passed through the frame of the center role 2500. It can be visually recognized well.

  Further, the back upper front decorative body 3421 of the back upper effect unit 3400 extends left and right in the upper part of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and the upper part on the left side from the center in the left and right direction is a transparent game panel 1100 and a center role. In addition to being visible through the center 2500, the rest can be viewed well through the frame of the center role 2500. The back upper rotation decorative body 3410 is in a state where one petal faces upward at the center in the left-right direction in front of the back upper front decoration body 3421, and is favorable from the player side through the frame of the center role 2500. Can be visually recognized. In the normal state, the back up / down decorative body unit 3450 having the back upper back rotating decorative body 3440 of the back upper performance unit 3400 is in a retracted position behind the back upper front decorative body 3421, and It is not visible from the side.

  In addition, the back-left decoration unit 3520 having the back-left rotation decorative body 3510 of the back-left production unit 3500 is in a retracted position that is behind the front-left left production unit 3700 in a normal state. , Is invisible to the player. In addition, the back right decoration unit 3620 having the back right rotation decorative body 3610 of the back right production unit 3600 is in a retracted position that is behind the back front right production unit 3800 in a normal state. , Is invisible to the player.

  In addition, the three back front left decorative body units 3710 of the back front left rendering unit 3700 are vertically arranged along the left side of the game panel 1100, and are located in the game area 5a in front view and are transparent games. The panel 1100, the center role 2500, and the frame of the center role 2500 can be viewed from the player side. Of the three back front left decorative body units 3710, the upper first front front left decorative body unit 3710A is mostly located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center role 2500 in front view, The lower part is located within the frame of the center role 2500. The middle second back front left decorative body unit 3710B is located within the frame of the center role 2500 when viewed from the front. Most of the lower third back front left decorative body unit 3710C is located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center role 2500 in front view, and the right portion is within the frame of the center role 2500. positioned.

  In the normal state, the back front left rendering unit 3700 has the shutter unit 3730 closed in each of the three back front left decorative body units 3710, and the back front left decorative body 3713 is invisible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3730 is visible.

  Further, the three back right decorative body units 3810 of the back front right rendering unit 3800 are vertically arranged along the right side of the game panel 1100, and are located in the game area 5a in front view, and are transparent games. The panel 1100, the center role 2500, and the frame of the center role 2500 can be viewed from the player side. Of the three back front right decorative body units 3810, the upper first front front right decorative body unit 3810A is located on the right side behind the transparent gaming panel 1100 and the center role 2500 in front view, The left side is located within the frame of the center role 2500. The middle second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the lower third back front right decorative body unit 3810C in front view have a transparent game panel 1100 and a center on the right side from a position closer to the left than the center in the left-right direction. It is located behind the accessory 2500 and the remaining left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500.

  In the normal state, the back front right rendering unit 3800 has the shutter unit 3830 in the closed state in each of the three back front right decorative body units 3810, and the back front right decorative body 3813 is invisible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3830 is visible.

  The game board 5 is directed behind the back unit 3000 in accordance with a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. Unit 3100, lower back left production unit 3200, lower back right production unit 3250, lower back middle production unit 3300, back upper production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700 , And the front right production unit 3800 perform a predetermined production (movable production or light emission production).

  Specifically, as an effect using the back rear production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 475, the slide guide 3130 is moved downward by the back rear drive motor 3126, so that the lock member 3134 is provided. Is released, and the back movable ornament 3110 is dropped from the retracted position to the appearing position. This allows the player to see an effect (movable effect) in which the large rear movable decorative body 3110 straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction falls freely while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous game state (for example, a “big hit” game) in which the player has an advantage over the player occurs. It can be made to think that it may be, and it can raise the expectation for the game.

  Although not shown, in the back-side effect unit 3100, after the back-side movable decorative body 3110 is dropped to the appearing position, the slide guide 3130 is moved upward by the back-side drive motor 3126, and the back-side movable decorative body is moved. When returning the 3110 to the retracted position, the forward / reverse rotation of the back drive motor 3126 is appropriately changed, so that the back movable ornament 3110 can be moved up and down on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 via the slide guide 3130. It may be made to reciprocate up and down near the center in the direction. As a result, the back movable ornament 3110 moves up and down while blocking the center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the up and down direction. Attention can be paid to the movable decorative body 3110, and the movement of the movable decorative body 3110 behind can be enjoyed.

  As an effect of using the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 476, the lower lower middle lifting drive motor 3352 rotates the lifting arm 3357, and the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 Is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, and the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction by the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333. Thereby, the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 moves upward and is positioned within the frame of the center role object 2500 so as to block a part of the effect image of the effect display device 1600, and is favorable from the player side. Since the player can visually recognize the object and rotate, it can give a strong impact to the player and can entertain the player.

  Since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with six numeral decorations, by rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, the impression that the roulette is rotating to the player is as if. Can be given. Therefore, when rotating the underside middle rotation decorative body 3310, the effect display device 1600 displays an effect image such as “Sugoroku”, and the number of the number decoration of the underside bottom middle rotation decoration body 3310 that has stopped rotating. The "piece" may advance in accordance with. This allows the player to make a "piece" move to a desired "square", and depending on whether or not the rotating underside rotating decoration body 3310 stops rotating at the position of the desired numeral decoration, the player is sharpened. It can be exciting and can entertain the player. In addition, the progress of the “piece” can make the player feel that the expected value is increasing, and can increase the sense of expectation for the game.

  As an effect using the lower back left rendering unit 3200, the lower back right rendering unit 3250, the back upper rendering unit 3400, the back rear left rendering unit 3500, and the back rear right rendering unit 3600 in the back unit 3000, for example, FIG. As shown, the lower back left rotating decoration body 3201 is rotated by the lower back left driving motor 3205 in the lower back left rendering unit 3200, and the lower back right rotating decoration body is rotated by the lower back right driving motor 3255 in the lower back right rendering unit 3250. 3125 is rotated. Also, in the back-up production unit 3400, the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 is rotated by the back-up front rotation drive motor 3425, and the back up-down decoration body unit 3450 is moved downward from the retreat position by the back-up / down drive motor 3429. At the same time as rotating to the appearance position, the back-upper-back rotation decorative body 3440 is rotated by the back-upper-back rotation drive motor 3454. Further, the back left left decorative body unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position slightly upper right by the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 in the back rear left rendering unit 3500, and the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 is used to move the back left decorative body unit 3520. The left rotating decorative body 3510 is rotated. Also, in the back right lighting unit 3600, the back right decoration unit 3620 is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position slightly upper left by the back right driving motor 3654, and the back right rotation drive motor 3625 drives the back. The right rotation decoration 3610 is rotated.

  Thereby, the back-upper rotating decoration 3440, the back-left rotating decoration 3510, and the back-right rotating decoration 3610 can be moved forward of the effect display device 1600 to be visible, and the lower-back left rotating decoration. Since the body 3201, the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 rotate respectively, By rotating the six decorative bodies, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and to raise the expectation for the game by assuming that something good will happen.

  At this time, the back up / down drive motor 3429, the back up left up / down drive motor 3554, and the back up right up / down drive motor 3654 are rotated forward / reverse as appropriate, so that the back up / down decorative body unit 3450, back back left decoration The body unit 3520 and the back right decorative body unit 3620 may be respectively rocked. Thereby, since the back-upper rotating decoration body 3440, the back-left rotating decoration body 3510, and the back-right rotating decoration 3610 rotate while shaking, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, It can entertain players.

  Also, at this time, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be rotated. Thereby, since the seven decorative bodies rotate around, it is possible to make the player strongly think that an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage (for example, a “big hit” game) occurs. Expectations for the game can be increased.

  As an effect using the back rear left rendering unit 3500 and the back rear right rendering unit 3600 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The left decoration body unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position on the upper right, and the rear left rotation decoration motor 3525 is rotated by the rear left rotation drive motor 3525. Also, in the back right lighting unit 3600, the back right decoration unit 3620 is moved from the retracted position to the upper left second appearance position by the back right lifting drive motor 3654, and the back right rotation drive motor 3625 is used. The rotating decorative body 3610 is rotated. As a result, the two decorative bodies rotate with the eyes of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and at a position approximately at the height, and there is something good to surprise the player. It can be made to think that it is not, and the expectation for the game can be raised.

  At this time, in the effect display device 1600, the positions of the back left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back right rotating decorative body 3610 of the second appearance position are determined according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 by the eyes of a predetermined character. You may make it display the effect image which becomes a position. As a result, it is possible to show the player an effect in which the eyes of the character are turning round and round, and the player can be entertained.

  As an effect using the back front left rendering unit 3700 and the back front right rendering unit 3800 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The shutter unit 3830 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the front right driving solenoid 3817 in the front right effect unit 3800 from the closed state to the open state. With this, the back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front right decorative body 3813 behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front right decorative body 3813 behind the shutter unit 3830 become visible from the player side. The decoration of the decorative body 3813 can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

  In addition, as the production using the back front left rendering unit 3700 and the back front right rendering unit 3800, each has three back front left decorative units 3710 and three back front right decorative units 3810. The shutter unit 3730 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 may be individually opened and closed, and a combination of the shutter unit 3730 and the shutter unit 3830 to be opened and closed. Thereby, a variety of effects can be shown to the player, and the player can be hardly bored.

  The back production unit 3100, the back bottom left production unit 3200, the back bottom right production unit 3250, the back bottom middle production unit 3300, the back top production unit 3400, the back rear left production unit 3500, and the back right production unit 3600 in the back unit 3000. As an effect using the back front left rendering unit 3700 and the back front right rendering unit 3800, for example, as shown in FIG. 480, all decorative bodies and the like may be moved. This makes it possible to convince the player that a favorable gaming state (for example, a “big hit” gaming state) will occur due to the movement of all the decorative bodies, thereby increasing the expectation of the advantageous gaming state. it can. Note that, in this case, the back left effect unit 3500 and the back right effect unit 3600 move the back left decorative unit 3520 and the back right decorative unit 3620 from the retracted position to the first appearance position. By doing so, contact with the rear movable movable body 3110 is avoided.

  In the above description, the movement of each decorative body has been described. However, when each decorative body is moved, the LED of the decorative board provided at the rear is appropriately made to emit light, so that the light emitting effect of the decorative body is provided to the player. It can be shown, and the interest of the player can be further attracted.

  Further, in the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment, the above-described movable effect and the light-emitting effect can be appropriately combined, and also combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. This makes it possible to present a variety of pattern effects to the player by appropriately combining the light-emitting effect, the movable effect, the display effect, and the like. It is possible to entertain the player, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[5-11. Main effects of gaming board]
Next, main functions and effects of the game board 5 of the present embodiment having the above-described configuration will be described. The game board 5 according to the present embodiment has a game panel 1100 provided with a game area 5a on the front side, a penetrating opening 1112, and a game area 5a in which a game ball B can circulate. The front end of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 formed as a shape along the inner periphery of the opening portion 1112 partitioned into an impossible non-flow area has its front end protruded forward from the front surface of the gaming panel 1100. Since the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112 in this state, it is probable that the outside of the peripheral wall 2501 becomes a flow area and the inside becomes a non-flow area. Then, a flat support portion 2503 thinner than the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 extends from the same position in the front and rear direction of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501 from the same position in the front-rear direction to the non-distribution area side (inside). At the same time, a flange 2502 is provided to abut on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the portion of the peripheral wall 2501 where the support 2503 is not provided to the distribution area side (outside), so that the peripheral wall 2501 is provided. Nothing is extended to the flow area side of the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided, so that the obstacle nail N can be implanted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. And a substantial distribution area can be set up to a position in contact with the peripheral wall portion 2501, which is substantially more effective than the conventional pachinko machine. It can be increased Do distribution area. That is, even if the non-distribution area (within the frame of the center role 2500) defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 is increased, the substantial distribution area is not reduced unlike the conventional pachinko machine. . Therefore, the non-distribution area defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 is increased while suppressing the distribution area in which the game ball B circulates in the game area 5a from becoming substantially smaller. The effect image of the effect display device 1600 as the effect device provided behind the area, the movable body and the decorative body of the effect unit, etc. can be more easily seen, and the game in the distribution area by the game ball B and the non-distribution area It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can entertain any of the effects of the present invention.

  In the center role 2500, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced from the non-flow area side (inside) by the support portion 2503, and the peripheral wall portion 2502 is provided at a portion where the support portion 2503 is not provided. The portion 2501 can be reinforced from the distribution area side (outside), and the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is improved by attaching the center role 2500 to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 via the flange portion 2502. Even if the game ball B in the game area 5a contacts (contacts) a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be maintained by the support portion 2503 and the like. The deformation and breakage of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (the center role 2500) can be prevented.

  Further, since the strength and rigidity of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role item 2500 can be increased by attaching to the support portion 2503, the flange portion 2502, the game panel 1100, and the like, the peripheral wall portion 2501 when the game ball B abuts. Can be prevented from elastically deforming and playing the game ball B like an elastic body (rubber or spring). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B flowing in the game area 5a from making an unusual movement different from the conventional one by abutting on the peripheral wall portion 2501, thereby giving a player an uncomfortable feeling. Can be prevented, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the center role 2500 including the support portion 2503 is made transparent, the support portion 2503 extending from the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the non-distribution area side can be made hard to see, and the support portion 2503 (center Since the effect image of the effect display device 1600 as the effect device provided at the rear through the accessory 2500) and the movable body or decorative body of the effect unit provided in the back unit 3000 can be seen, the non-distribution area Of the effect image provided by the effect device, the movable body, the decorative body, and the like can be enlarged, and the effect of the effect device can be more easily exerted. The effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the visible range of the movable body and the decorative body are large, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be used. It can stand, can be pachinko machine 1 high appeal against the player.

  In addition, since the center role 2500 including the support portion 2503 is made transparent, the transparent portion is provided for the light of the illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the pachinko machine 1. Since the light from the light emitting means (such as the LED and the effect display device 1600) can be reflected, refracted, diffused, and transmitted, the transparent portions such as the support portion 2503 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 are illuminated. It is possible to make the appearance look good, improve the appearance and enhance the appeal to the player. At this time, a step, a notch, or the like may be provided in the transparent support portion 2503 to further enhance the diffusion effect.

  Furthermore, since the center role 2500 including the support part 2503 is made transparent, it is provided on a movable body (for example, a back front left production unit 3700 or a back rear left production unit 3500) provided behind the support part 2503. The above-described effects can be obtained by the light emission of the light emitting means (LED), and the player can recognize the presence of the movable body by the transparent support portion 2503.

  In addition, the transparent support portion 2503 is extended in a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100 at the same position in the front and rear direction of the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501, so that the support portion 2503 is The lens effect by the support part 2503 can be reduced as compared with the case where the support part 2503 is extended with the same thickness as that of the support part 1100. ), The lens effect of the transparent support portion 2503 is further reduced, and a portion (design) behind the support portion 2503 in the back front left decorative body 3030, the effect image of the rendering device, the movable body, the decorative body, etc. ) Can be improved, and the back front left decorative body 3030, the effect image, and the like can be more easily seen.

  Furthermore, since at least a part of the tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, a portion of the tip side of the support portion 2503 having a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is used. Since a line different from the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be shown by the tip side of, it is difficult to see a single design as compared with the case where the shape is along the peripheral wall portion 2501, and it is difficult to see the details. The pachinko machine 1 having a deep design can be provided.

  In addition, since at least a part of the tip side of the support portion 2503 has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the amount of extension of the support portion 2503 from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not constant but different. Therefore, by setting the extension amount according to the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the reinforcing effect of the support portion 2503 on the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be improved.

  Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 extends from the same position in the front and rear direction of the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is a part of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 for the player. The illusion can be made as if it were, and the existence of the support portion 2503 can be made hard to notice.

  In addition, the support portion 2503 is provided at the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and extends from the middle (in the middle) of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the front-rear direction. As compared with the case where the support portion 2503 is extended from the end side, the reduction of the reinforcing effect of the support portion 2503 on the distal end side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reduced, so that the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be sufficiently increased. The peripheral wall portion 2501 (the center role 2500) can be prevented from being deformed or damaged even when the game medium abuts.

  Furthermore, since the peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500 is formed along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 and the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112, the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 is formed. The inner peripheral surface can be hidden, decorated, or made hard to see by the peripheral wall portion 2501.

  In addition, since the outer shape of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500 is formed along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, when the center role 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall 2501 is It looks like it protrudes forward from the periphery of the opening 1112, and it is possible to give a sense of unity to the peripheral wall 2501 (center role 2500) and the game panel 1100, and a good-looking slingshot in the game area 5a. Machine 1 can be provided.

  In addition, since the center role 2500 is attached to the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, even if the game panel 1100 is transparent or opaque, it is defined by the peripheral wall 2501 inside the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. The effect image of the effect display device 1600 provided behind the non-distribution area, the movable body and the decorative body of the effect unit, and the like can be visually recognized from the front (the player side) satisfactorily. Thus, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of sufficiently exhibiting the effect of the effect of the present invention.

  Furthermore, since the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role item 2500 projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, when the game area 5a is viewed obliquely, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is located forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. This makes it easier for the player to notice the existence of the peripheral wall 2501 and also makes it easier for the player to recognize the distribution area and the non-circulation area defined by the peripheral wall 2501.

  Further, a flange 2502 extending toward the distribution area (outside) is provided in a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 where the support portion 2503 does not extend, and in a portion where the flange 2502 is provided. Does not have the support portion 2503 extending to the non-distribution area side (inside), the support portion 2503 does not interfere with the visibility of the rendering device (the rendering unit 1600 or the rendering unit of the back unit 3000). However, the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the area where the movable body of the effect unit can be seen can be enlarged, the effect of the effect by the effect device can be more easily exhibited, and the effect device is provided to the player. And the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in the center role 2500, since the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be kept equal to that of the conventional product by the support portion 2503 and the flange portion 2502, the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the support portion 2503 are integrally formed by resin molding. It is possible to prevent deformation of the molded product when the molded product is removed from the mold.

  Further, since the support portion 2503 is extended in a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100, when the center role 2500 is integrally formed of synthetic resin, only the portion of the support portion 2503 is in contact with other portions. An increase in the difference in the amount of shrinkage can be avoided, and deformation of the center role 2500 during molding can be prevented.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the frame-shaped front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the flat game panel 1100 that closes the inside of the frame of the front component 1000 from the rear. Behind the game panel 1100, the rear rear left vertical drive motor 3554 and the rear right rear drive of the rear right directing unit 3600 as functional parts of the rear left directing unit 3500 in the rear unit 3000, respectively, The motor 3654 is disposed such that at least a part thereof is outside the game area 5a in a front view, and between the game panel 1100 and the back left and right up and down drive motor 3554 and the back and back right up and down drive motor 3654, A game is performed from within the game area 5a so as to cover at least a portion within the game area 5a of the elevating drive motor 3554 and the rear right elevating drive motor 3654. Since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided so as to extend outside the region 5a, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 allow the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back. It becomes possible to cover and hide at least a part of the rear right elevating drive motor 3654, and from the player side to the rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the rear side through the transparent front component 1000, the game panel 1100 and the game area 5a. The right elevating drive motor 3654 can be made difficult to see, and the overall appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being degraded. In addition, the rear rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right elevating drive motor 3654 are replaced with a front side. By seeing the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, the appearance of the entire pachinko machine 1 can be improved, Can be pachinko machine 1 is enhanced appeal against skill person.

  In addition, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the boundary of the game area 5a defined by the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 is difficult to understand, so that the outer periphery of the game area 5a is not defined. The appearance can give a sense of openness, and even if the game area 5a is the same size as the conventional pachinko machine, the game area 5a can be made to look larger. Therefore, since the game area 5a looks larger than the conventional pachinko machine, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the expectation for the game with the present pachinko machine 1 can be increased, and the player can play the game. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made more appealing to the player.

  Also, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are made to cover at least a part in the game area 5a in front of the functional components such as the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. Since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 prevent the functional components from being visible in the game area 5a, the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved. In addition to providing the same operation and effect as described above, the functional component can be made difficult to see even when viewed obliquely from the center of the game area 5a.

  Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 have a continuous decoration over the entire surface, and the front front extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a in front view. Since the decorations of the left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are continuous over the entire surface, the boundary of the outer periphery of the game area 5a can be made harder to understand by the continuous decoration, and a sense of openness is given to the game. The size of the area 5a can be made larger than the actual size, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by decorating the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040. It can be made more prominent and appealing to the player.

  Moreover, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are made opaque, the back back left effect unit 3500 provided on the rear side through the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 and The back right production unit 3600 and the like can be prevented from being seen, and the back left production unit 3500 and the back right production unit 3600 and the like can be seen from the player side through the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100. Of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  In addition, in the front view, at least a part of the back left rear up / down drive motor 3554 and the back back right right up / down drive motor 3654 as a functional component is arranged outside the game area 5a. (It is completely (entirely arranged outside) the game area 5a.) In order to arrange the rear left and right elevating drive motor 3554 and the rear right and right elevating drive motor 3654, the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the game area 5a are arranged. Even if the space between them is not large, the rear left rear up / down drive motor 3554 and the rear right right up / down drive motor 3654 can be arranged, and the rear rear left up / down drive motor 3554 and the rear right right up / down drive motor 3654 can be arranged. By taking the balance, it is possible to prevent the space of the game area 5a from being reduced. In other words, since a part of the rear right up-and-down drive motor 3654 is arranged in the game area 5a when viewed from the front, the space between the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is reduced. This makes it possible to relatively increase the space of the game area 5a, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can further exert the above-described effects. In addition, by providing a part of the drive source (motor, solenoid, etc.) of the accessory movable in the game area 5a outside the game area 5a, the space in the game area 5a can be enlarged. The effect performed in the game area 5a has a wider range. All the driving sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) of the movable objects in the game area 5a may be arranged outside the game area 5a.

  Further, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the illumination light in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1, the effect display device 1600, and the like. Can be transmitted, reflected, refracted, and diffused, so that it is possible to make it appear as if the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are emitting light. Appearance can be improved. Although the opaque decorative seal 3032 and the decorative seal 3042 are applied to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, the base 3031 of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, respectively. And the base 3041 (which may include the decorative seal 3032 and the decorative seal 3042) is formed of a transparent member, so that light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 can receive light from the back front left decorative body 3030 or the back. It is possible to give the impression that the front left decorative body 3030 and the rear right decorative body 3040 reach the front right decorative body 3040 and emit light. It can be said that the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are arranged at positions where light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 reaches.

  In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 covers at least a part of the rear left and right elevating drive motor 3554 as a functional part, it is understood that the functional part is covered by covering it to some extent without covering the whole. It becomes spicy and can look like part of a decoration. Therefore, even if the back front left decorative body 3030 is not sized to cover the entire back rear left elevating drive motor 3554, the same operation and effect as described above can be achieved, and the back front left decorative body 3030 The game area 5a can be made large while reducing the cost of 3030. In addition, although the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 cover and hide at least a part of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654, the part is a pachinko machine. It is desirable to set a portion closer to the center of 1 (a portion closer to a boundary line that separates the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a). In addition, a predetermined location where there is no drive source outside the game area 5a (a location at the lower left in FIG. 406, that is, a location at the lower left corner of the game board 5) extends from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. By providing the decorative body, the game area 5a can be made to look large.

  In addition, the inside of the frame of the front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a is closed from behind by a transparent game panel 1100, and the game area 5a is located on the front side of the game panel 1100. Therefore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided behind the game area 5a. Therefore, in front view, the inside and outside of the game area 5a can be decorated from behind by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extending from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. The same effect can be achieved, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 do not interfere with the game ball B in the game area 5a, so that the game in the game area 5a can be smoothly performed. And a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are extended to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in front view, the back front left decorative body inside the door window 101a. It is possible to make the back and rear left rendering unit 3500 and the back and rear right rendering unit 3600 behind the 3030 and the back right decoration 3040 invisible, so that the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended to such an extent that a part inside the door window 101a of the back left vertical drive motor 3554 as a functional component is hidden, the back front left decorative body 3030 moves up and down. Even if the entire drive motor 3554 is not covered, the uncovered portion can be covered by the frame-shaped door frame 3, so that the back front left decorative body 3030 can be prevented from being unnecessarily long, The cost of the back front left decorative body 3030 (the pachinko machine 1) can be reduced.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined toward the game panel 1100 at the two general winning openings 2001 from the right of the side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 5. On the other hand, in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the front wall 2101 forming the front face is parallel to the game panel 1100, and the front face is decorated with translucency. Since the sticker is attached, the front surface of the first starting port 2002 faces forward (toward the player), so that the first starting port 2002 can be more conspicuous than the general winning port 2001. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be more easily directed to the first starting port 2002 than to the general winning port 2001, so that the number of the game balls B accepted in the first starting port 2002 decreases (or the first starting port). The player's consciousness is concentrated on the general winning opening 2001 rather than the opening 2002), and the lottery of the first special lottery result performed by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 , It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the player and to suppress the decrease in interest, and it is possible to surely recognize the position of the first starting port 2002 which the player should aim at, and aim the player at the first starting port 2002. You can entertain the game.

  Then, depending on whether or not the game ball B in the game area 5a is accepted by the first starting port 2002, the player can be made harassed, and when the game ball B is accepted by the first starting port 2002, Depending on whether or not a winning (for example, a "big hit") in which an advantageous gaming state occurs due to the lottery of the first special lottery result, the player can be thrilled and excited, thereby increasing the expectation for the game. A decrease in interest can be suppressed. Thereafter, when the winning is determined by the lottery of the first special lottery result, an advantageous gaming state in which the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 are opened and closed in a predetermined pattern occurs, so that the player is greatly enjoyed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. At this time, when the game ball B aiming at the first starting port 2002 is accepted in the general winning opening 2001, the lottery of the first special lottery result is not performed, but the game ball B is paid out as a privilege. In addition, the player is not disappointed, and can continue to enjoy the game, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Also, the first front wall 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined with respect to the surface of the gaming panel 1100, and the front wall 2101 of the first starting opening 2002 is made parallel to the surface of the gaming panel 1100. Since the form (appearance) of the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are greatly different, a sticker is attached to the front of the first starting opening 2002 and a sticker is applied to the front of the general winning opening 2001. Even if the player does not attach the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from having an uncomfortable feeling, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being deteriorated. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are formed of transparent members, the game balls B received in the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are visually recognized through the transparent member. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted in the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002, and to fully enjoy the joy of having been accepted. This can suppress a decrease in interest. Further, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are formed of transparent members, the light of the illumination in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the light emission provided in the pachinko machine 1 Since it is possible to reflect, refract, and diffuse the light from the means (the LED of the decorative substrate), the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 can be made to look brilliant, and the appearance can be improved. As a result, the appeal to the player can be enhanced.

  Further, in the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined toward the game panel 1100, and in the first starting opening 2002, the received game balls B are passed through the general winning opening. Since the game ball B is guided backward later than the game ball B received in 2001, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 where the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed is set in the general winning port 2001. Since the player can be guided backward at a later timing than the accepted game ball B, the player can view the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 for a relatively long time. Therefore, when the game ball B is accepted at the first starting port 2002 where the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed, the joy (feeling of superiority) due to the game ball B being accepted at the first starting port 2002 is given to the general prize. It is possible to make the player taste the game ball B for a longer time than when the game ball B is received in the mouth 2001, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is immediately moved backward ( (The game panel 1100 side), and can be discharged faster than the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. Therefore, it is unnecessary to receive the game ball B in the general winning opening 2001. Can be suppressed for a long period of time, the player's interest can be directed to the next game ball B, and the game can be promoted crisply, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined with respect to the game panel 1100, and a part of the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203. When the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001, most of the game ball B overlaps the general winning opening 2001 in a front view. Depending on the player, it may be possible to give an illusion as if the game ball B was accepted in the general winning opening 2001, and the player can be entertained. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning opening 2001, and it can be thought that it is an illusion. Therefore, even if the benefit (lottery of the first special lottery result) is not subsequently given, it is possible to avoid distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side, and to the player Therefore, it is possible to keep the game entertained and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the gaming panel 1100, the amount of the material applied to the general winning opening 2001 (side unit 2200) can be reduced, and the general winning can be achieved. Decoration such as a seal can be omitted on the front surface of the mouth 2001. Therefore, since the cost required for the general winning opening 2001 can be reduced, the pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain the player can be provided by turning the cost to an effect device or the like.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the under-back middle decoration unit 3320 of the under-back middle production unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, the rotating under-back middle rotation having a plurality of (here, six) stop positions at even-numbered positions. The decorative body 3310 is provided with an area detection piece 3325 having a length that is half of the stop position, and a plurality (six in this case) of position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position. (Here, three) consisting of a plurality of (three in this case) area specifying sensors 3330 each consisting of half of the stop positions for detecting the position detection piece 3326 and one position specifying sensor 3331 detecting one of the position detecting pieces 3326. When the under-back middle rotation decorative body 3310 rotates, the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 that detect the area detecting pieces 3325 are provided in the rotation direction. Repeatedly increasing and then decreasing from one side, and the current rotational position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is roughly grasped by the combination of the area specifying sensor 3330 detecting the area detecting piece 3325. be able to.

  More specifically, in the case of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having six stop positions from the first stop position to the sixth stop position in the rotation direction, three aligned stop positions where the area detection pieces 3325 are half the number , And the minimum number of the area specifying sensors 3330 necessary for detecting the movement to an arbitrary stop position is three half of the number of the stop positions. The three area specifying sensors 3330 are, in the rotating direction, a first area specifying sensor 3330a, a second area specifying sensor 3330b, and a third area specifying sensor 3330c, and the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the first stop position. At the time of (the position of the decorative numeral “3”), only the first region specifying sensor 3330a is detecting the region detecting piece 3325. When the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the second stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “2”) from this state, the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect the area detecting piece 3325. I do. Further, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the third stop position (the position of the decorative numeral of "1"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are connected. The area detection piece 3325 is detected.

  Further, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the fourth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral of “6”), the first area specifying sensor 3330a is not detected, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying are not performed. The sensor 3330c detects the area detection piece 3325. Furthermore, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the fifth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral of “5”), the second area specifying sensor 3330b is not detected, and only the third area specifying sensor 3330c is the area detecting piece. 3325 is detected. Then, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the sixth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral of “4”), the third area specifying sensor 3330 c is also not detected, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 are set to the area detecting pieces 3325. Is not detected. After that, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates, it rotates to the first stop position (the position of the decorative numeral of “3”), and only the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects the area detecting piece 3325. In this state, the detection / non-detection of the area specifying sensor 3330 as described above is repeated with the rotation of the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310.

  As described above, since the area detection piece 3325 having a length extending to half of the number of stop positions is provided, the combination of the detection of the area detection piece 3325 by the plurality of area identification sensors 3330 allows the lower-side middle rotation decoration. Since the rotation of the body 3310 can be detected, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 do not become undetected until the underside rotating decoration body 3310 rotates to the next stop position, The current position of the middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be roughly grasped.

  And, since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with a plurality of (here, six) position detecting pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 determine the area detecting pieces 3325. After roughly detecting the rotation of the underside rotating decoration body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position by the detection, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331. In addition, it is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the lower back inside rotary decorative body 3310 having a plurality of stop positions while minimizing the shift of the stop position.

  In addition, since the stop position of the under-the-bottom rotating decoration 3310 can be accurately grasped, the under-the-bottom rotating decoration 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position, and the stop position shifts to play a game. It is possible to prevent giving a sense of incongruity (discomfort) to the person, and to enjoy the production (movable production) by the under-the-riddle rotating decorative body 3310, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest, and The pachinko machine 1 can realize the operation of the movable body (the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310) that does not give a player a discomfort.

  Furthermore, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, the shift of the stop position can be suppressed, and By moving the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotating speed) of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is more increased than in the case where the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 reciprocates. Can be faster. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player by the underside rotating decoration body 3310 rotating quickly, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It is possible to entertain, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, by rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction, the rotating surface of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 faces the player side in front, and it is optional after the round rotation. It is possible to show the player a roulette-like effect that stops rotating at the stop position, so that the player can be excited by whether or not the underside rotating decoration body 3310 stops rotating at the desired stop position. This makes it possible to entertain the movable effect by the lower-back middle rotating decorative body 3310, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is an even number, the stop position that can be handled by the minimum number of sensors (region specifying sensors 3330) necessary for detecting movement to an arbitrary stop position. And the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 are the same, and the ability (grasping of the stop position) by a plurality of sensors (region specifying sensor 3330 and position specifying sensor 3331) is maximized. It is possible to entertain the player with the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having more stopping positions, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Note that, in the above-described embodiment, the lower back middle rotating effecting body 3310 in the back lower middle rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 has six stop positions. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Four to ten stop positions may be provided.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the movable body having the plurality of stop positions (the lower-side middle rotating decorative body 3310) is described as being rotated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body having the plurality of stop positions is provided. As an example, a “circulating object”, a “linear moving object”, a “circular moving object”, a “curved moving object”, and the like may be used.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 481 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is assigned. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 1310, and the effect image display on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control unit 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a for controlling the payout of the game balls B and the like, and a firing control unit 633b for controlling the firing of the game balls B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is a microprocessor which is not shown in detail but is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. An MPU, a main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids The circuit includes a circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU has a built-in ROM and RAM, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting port sensor 3052 for detecting a game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, a gate sensor 2801 for detecting a game ball B passing through the gate unit 2003, and a second sensor. A second starting port sensor 2401 for detecting a game ball B received in the starting port 2004, a general winning port sensor 3051 for detecting a game ball B received in the general winning port 2001, and a first winning port 2005. First big winning opening sensor 2402 for detecting game ball B, second big winning opening sensor 2601 for detecting game ball B received at second big winning opening 2006, and detecting game ball B received at out opening 2010 Out port sensor 3053, first sub-out port sensor 2403 for detecting game ball B received in first sub-out port 2011, second sub-out port Detection signals from the second sub-out mouth sensor 3054 for detecting the game ball B received at 012 and the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055 for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a are respectively main control I / O. Input via port.

  The main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612, etc., or output a drive signal from the main control I / O port, the status display of the function display unit 1400, a normal symbol display, a normal reservation display, a first special symbol display, and a first special reservation number display. The drive signal is output to a display, a second special symbol display, a second special reserved number display, a round display, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3052, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the first big winning opening sensor 2402, the second big winning opening sensor 2601, and the out opening sensor 3053 are not provided. While a contact-type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, the general winning port sensor 3051, the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 are provided with contact-type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches. Using a switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the gate unit 2003, so that the first starting port sensor 3052, the second starting port sensor 2401, and The detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801 also frequently occurs. For this reason, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first starting port sensor 3052, the second starting port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801.

  In addition, when an advantageous game state ("big hit" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened and the game ball B frequently enters. The detection of the game ball B by the first winning port sensor 2402 and the second winning port sensor 2601 also frequently occurs. For this reason, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the first special winning opening sensor 2402 and the second special winning opening sensor 2601. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball B does not frequently enter, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3051 does not frequently occur. For this reason, as the general winning opening sensor 3051, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used.

  Further, since the game ball B frequently enters the out port 2010, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the out port sensor 3053. On the other hand, since the game ball B does not frequently enter the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 have a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch. Is used.

  Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands relating to control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. The main control MPU receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, and shapes the various commands and transmits the commands to the peripheral control unit 1511, which will be described in detail later.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, as will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. To be described). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various kinds of information in the RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages fall below the power failure warning voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game balls B and the like performs a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, a firing control by the firing solenoid 542, and a firing that performs a ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for releasing an error displayed on the error LED display, and a ball tank 552 and a tank rail for maintenance. 553, a ball guiding unit 570, and a ball removal switch for discharging the game balls B in the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 to start a ball removal operation. .

[6-2a. Dispensing control section]
Although not shown in detail, a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is a microcontroller having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. The payout control MPU has a built-in ROM and RAM as well as a function for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or receives the main control board 1310 In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the CPU through the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to a payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via a payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

  Further, detection signals from a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. A command for outputting to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port and indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Or, the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 through the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by ascertaining the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The following are the contents displayed and notified by the error LED display. For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is notified that “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it is “connection abnormal” (specifically, the main control board 1310 That the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board is abnormal), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "ball out" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it is "ball watching" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, that the game ball B bites between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and that the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, (Specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and when the number "5" is displayed, " "Retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, it is "full". (Specifically, the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154), and the number “7” is displayed. Sometimes, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (that the electrical connection has been cut off at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), and when the number "9" is displayed, "S Tsu that is being click "(specifically, yet that the ball number of payout non game ball B has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and sent to the payout control MPU. Will be entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls lent out of the game balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input to the ball lending display unit of the operation unit 220 and displayed.

[6-2b. Launch control section]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a A launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the launch ball; a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on the launch reference pulse; A ball feeding solenoid driving circuit that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are shot toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the generated reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number, and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 for detecting whether a palm or a finger is in contact with the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will is detected. The detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the signal is input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal, and is input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of the game ball B to be launched toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 182 is input to a firing solenoid drive circuit.

  The launch solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength appropriate for the rotational position of the handle 182, based on a signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, and the launch reference pulse. The input is output to the firing solenoid 542 as a trigger. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, and thereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. B is received into the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped, and the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side. send. As described above, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. Is controlled.

  The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power-off process even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 481, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the effect control based on the command from the main control board 1310, and the effect display device 1600 based on the control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for performing the drawing control of.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although not shown in detail, a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance. And a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, each decorative board of the game board 5 is provided. The game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to each decorative board of the game board 5. A game board-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board to the drive motor of the game board 5 or For transmitting a drive signal to a drive solenoid or to an operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, an operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the like. Door-side drive light emission comprising side drive data and door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Data is transmitted from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side, and control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is effected from the serial I / O port for the display control unit. In addition to transmitting to the display control unit 1512 and outputting a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

  The detection signals from the pressure detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit 1512 Monitors operation.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and outputs a vibration speaker 354, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker provided on the door frame 3, the body frame 4, and the like. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects matched to various effects flow from the speaker 464, the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4, and the like. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume protruding backward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the body frame 4 are provided with an acoustic signal (eg, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo By transmitting a signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a 4.1ch surround signal, it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watch dock timer) built in the peripheral control MPU. A diagnosis is made as to whether or not the own system is running away by using the WDT together.

  A display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed through a serial input / output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) bits per second (hereinafter, referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / flashing command, the game board side lighting / flashing command, the movable body driving command, and the like output from the peripheral control MPU to the game board 5 side are transmitted through a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

[6-3b. Effect display control section]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands and various data, and a VDP for displaying and controlling the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of a screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM for transferring and copying various data stored in the image ROM. Have.

  The display control MPU includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to render the effect on the effect display device 1600. Control. If the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. The display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs an interrupt process when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM includes, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be rendered on the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, control data (display command) for the schedule data. A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines a screen configuration in a time-series manner, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured such that when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM, the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order is arranged in chronological order. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which various kinds of data are transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM from the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 in accordance with the progress of the schedule data is defined in advance.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to the VDP. As described above, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in chronological order in the schedule data one by one from the display control ROM from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

  When screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to effect display device 1600. In addition, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an in-execution signal notifying the fact to the display control MPU. The VDP adopts a line buffer method. The “line buffer method” means that one line of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in a line buffer, and the one line of drawing data held in the line buffer is transferred to the effect display device 1600. Output to the

  An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored and affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is base data which is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in a compressed state in the image ROM.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". Thus, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites will be used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting a background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 with the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite overlapping order”).

  In addition, the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular regions each having 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character. In the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of six sprite characters arranged in a horizontal 2 × vertical 3 or the like are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be represented using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The effect display device 1600 repeatedly performs a main scan for setting a display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixel and a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction, sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front. And the sub-scan to be performed. When the rendering data for one line output from the rendering display control unit 1512 is input, the rendering display device 1600 sequentially performs one-line rendering from left to right as viewed from the front of the rendering display device 1600 as main scanning. Is output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the image is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game content]
The contents of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 390 and 405. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3. Is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the driving strength. In addition, the driving strength of the game balls B can be adjusted by the rotation amount of the handle 182, and the more the ball is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger it can be hit. B, that is, the game balls B can be hit at 0.6 second intervals.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The falling speed of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movements can be enjoyed. In addition, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that is rotated by the contact of the game ball B is provided above the upper left side unit 2300 and to the left of the center role 2500.

  When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest point in front view, it contacts the plurality of obstacle nails N, It flows down in the area on the left side of the center role 2500. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the left area of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2511 opened in the peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512.

  The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513, moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from a central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released from the central discharge part 2513a at the center of the stage 2513 into the game area 5a, the central discharge part 2513a is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, so that the first discharge port 2513a has a high probability. It is received in the starting port 2002. When game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, on the main control board 1310, advantageous game states (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "probability change (probable change)", "time reduction (time reduction)" A special lottery result (first special lottery result) for generating “hit” is performed.

  The game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center role item 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted in the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100.

  By the way, when the game ball B flowing down to the left side of the center role 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it is moved to the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 and the obstacle nail N of the upper left side unit 2300, and the side unit 2200 , Or the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, etc. When the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500, the guide of the center role 2500 is provided. A plurality of the plurality of gas discharged through the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the passage group 2520 and discharged above the gate portion 2003 and implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003 are provided. After abutting on the obstacle nail N, it passes through the gate 2003 with a certain probability.

  The guide passage group 2520 of the center role 2500 has a first guide passage 2521 having an entrance opened near the stopper 1006, and an entrance opened at an interval leftward from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. And a second guide passage 2522. Thus, when the game ball B is hit with a strength that abuts against the stop portion 1006 (so-called right-handed), the ball enters the first guide passage 2521 and has a strength that does not touch the stop portion 1006 (right-handed). If the player hits the game ball B with a certain level of strength, the ball enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center role item 2500 flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 according to the driving strength.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability when flowing through the second guide passage 2522 than with the first guide passage 2521. The second guide passage 2522 is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability than the first guide passage 2521.

  When the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery result obtained is “normal hit”, the first attacker unit is set. The closed second starting port 2004 in 2400 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate unit 2003, a certain period of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result (for example, 0). .01 to 60 seconds, usually also referred to as fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

  Note that if the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 after the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the number of ordinary lottery results to be held is limited to four, and for more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, it is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  The game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 has a high probability of the middle right side unit 2700 due to the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the gate portion 2003 and the middle right side unit 2700. Of the side right middle unit 2700 and occasionally accepted in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 or rarely in the second sub-out opening 2012. When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out similarly to the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. On the other hand, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2012, there is no opportunity to be received in the second special winning port 2006, the second starting port 2004 or the first special winning port 2005, and the ball is discharged out of the gaming area 5a. .

  The game ball B passing through the right side of the gate section 2003 is received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700, and the general winning opening 2001, the second big winning opening 2006, and the second winning opening 2006 of the side right middle unit 2700. There is no opportunity to be accepted in the starting opening 2004 or the first winning opening 2005, and the game is discharged out of the game area 5a.

  As described above, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2012 on the downstream side of the guide passage group 2520, the game ball B is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a. It is possible to prompt a driving operation such that the game ball B cannot be received at the mouth 2012. In the present embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520 of the center role item 2500, the second guide passage 2522 has a lower probability of receiving the game ball B at the second sub-out port 2012 than the first guide passage 2521. Thus, the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the second guide passage 2522 can be prompted. In other words, it is possible to prompt a driving operation that requires a delicate adjustment in the rotation operation of the handle 182, rather than a “right-handed” operation in which the game ball B comes into contact with the stop portion 1006. The main game of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed.

  The game ball B passing through the left side of the right side middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted on the left side of the right side middle unit 2700, and the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. Is discharged to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role 2500.

  At this time, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and “small hit” is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the second big prize is won. Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted with a high probability in the second big winning opening 2006. When the game ball B is received in the second special winning opening 2006 while the second special winning opening 2006 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or more) from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201.

  The game ball B released to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the left side of the second big winning opening 2006, the first shelf 2412a, the second starting door 2414, and the second shelf 2412b, left on the top After rolling to the left, it is released to the left and further rolls to the left on the third shelf 2412c, the first winning opening door 2417, and the fourth shelf 2412d, into the gaming area 5a. Released.

  When the game ball B is rolling on the second starting port door 2414, the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate unit 2003 is "normal hit", and the second starting port door is set. When the game ball 2414 is retracted, the game ball B is received at the second starting port 2004. When the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, on the main control board 1310, advantageous game states (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "probability change (probable change)", "time reduction (time reduction)" A special lottery result (first special lottery result) for generating “hit” is performed.

  In addition, when the game ball B is rolling on the first winning opening door 2417, the special lottery result (the first lottery result) obtained by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 If the one special lottery result and the second special lottery result are special lottery results (for example, "big hit") that generate an advantageous gaming state, the first special winning opening 2005 is set to a predetermined opening / closing pattern after the elapse of the special fluctuation time. Thus, the game ball B can be accepted. When the game ball B is received in the first special winning opening 2005 when the first special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or more) from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the first special winning opening 2005 is capable of receiving the game balls B, by allowing the first special winning opening 2005 to receive the game balls B, it is possible to pay out many game balls B, and the player You can entertain.

  When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment displays, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, “big hit”, A special lottery result that generates “medium hit”, “small hit”, “probability change (probability change)”, “time reduction (time reduction)” is performed, and the selected special lottery result is It suggests to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation period), and the lottery is performed by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Special lottery results include "losing", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probable change (probability change)", "time reduction (time reduction)", " Probably variable time saving " Per "," the second big hit ", and the like.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the second large winning opening 2006 is set to the open state in which the game ball B can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). After that, the opening / closing pattern for closing is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the first big winning opening 2005 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, or When one of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B into the winning opening 2005 is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern for closing the game ball B to be unacceptable (one opening / closing pattern is set to 1 Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for “2R jackpot”, 5 rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 15 rounds for “15R jackpot” are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In the "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" is drawn ("probable change") or the display time of the effect image indicating the special lottery result is changed. ("Time savings").

  When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is “second big hit”, after the first special winning opening 2005 can receive the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, the special game state is set to ST (special).・ Time). This ST is to maintain a state of certainty and time saving during a predetermined number of times of change.

  In the present embodiment, during the period from the start of the special lottery to the indication of the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the first starting port 2002 and the When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is not started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Suspended. The number of reserved special lottery results to be retained is up to four for the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 indicates that a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined period of time, and thereafter, the special lottery result is indicated by a combination of the LEDs that are turned on.

  On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and suggests a special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 is such that a pattern row composed of a plurality of patterns is displayed in a state where three pattern rows are arranged in the left and right direction, and each pattern row is changed, and the pattern row that is variably displayed is displayed. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stopped and displayed such that the patterns of the three picture rows to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a "small hit" game, a "big hit" game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  In addition, the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (the blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the fixed image due to the fluctuation of the pattern row is displayed). (The time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for indicating the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected by lottery. A player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 can be performed. In the player participation type effect, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate or vibrate the rotation operation unit 302, assist the rotation operation, inhibit the rotation operation, and operate the operation button lifting drive motor. With 367, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised to make it stand out, and the player's participation-type effect can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, and the back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, Bottom left production unit 3200, Ura bottom right production unit 3250, Ura bottom middle production unit 3300, Ura top production unit 3400, Ura left production unit 3500, Ura back right production unit 3600, Ura front left production unit 3700, Ura front It is possible to perform a luminous effect, a display effect, or the like by appropriately using the right effect unit 3800, and the like, and to entertain the player even with various effects, and to reduce the player's interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control board 1510, in a player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, a correct operation is performed when a player makes a mistake or does not perform an operation to be performed. To the player. Specifically, for example, when a pressing operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354. That effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

[8. Independent support member]
Next, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 482 is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown together with the self-supporting auxiliary member. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted between the lower surface of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 and the table 8 of the island equipment in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed (attached), the pachinko machine 1 assists independence and is prevented from falling down. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is formed in a block shape. In addition, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is formed using at least one of hard foamed resin, plastic, corrugated paper, wood, pulp mold, and the like.

  Although not shown in detail, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a mounting portion for mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the lower surface of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3. On the other hand, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a mounting portion mounted on the mounting portion of the dish unit 200. In the present embodiment, the plate unit 200 is provided with a groove extending forward and backward as a mounting portion, and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a ridge inserted into the groove of the plate unit 200 as a mounted portion. ing. Thereby, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is slid in the front-back direction with respect to the plate unit 200, and the mounted portion of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is inserted into the mounting portion of the plate unit 200, so that the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 7 can be mounted (mounted). Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island equipment with the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 attached to the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the self-standing auxiliary member 7 can be easily removed by sliding the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 forward. . Further, when removing the pachinko machine 1 attached to the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily attached by sliding in the direction opposite to the direction in which the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 was removed.

  The mounting (mounting) between the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 and the mounting portion of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not limited to the above-described one, but may be performed by “inserting a projection into a hole”, It may be "locked", "magnetized by magnet", "surface fastener", "adsorber", "peelable adhesive", or the like. Further, the position where the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 is provided is not limited to the lower surface of the plate unit 200 as described above, and may be “inside”, “at least one of the left and right side surfaces”, “front surface”, and the like. .

  After the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is removed from the mounting portion of the plate unit 200, stored at the game hall side, and when the pachinko machine 1 is removed from the island facility, It is mounted on the unit 200 and used. In addition, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be attached to the plate unit 200 in advance when the pachinko machine 1 is shipped from the manufacturer to the game hall, or may be attached at the time of installation work.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the door frame 3 includes the plate unit 200, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450 that protrude greatly forward, the door frame 3 moves forward. Although the pachinko machine 1 is easily fallen, by attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 to the lower mounting portion of the plate unit 200, the pachinko machine 1 can be assisted to be independent and can be prevented from falling forward. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is attached to the attachment portion of the dish unit 200, so that the gap between the dish unit 200 and the table 8 of the island facility is established. The pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from tipping over by the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 located at the position (1), so that when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 is prevented from falling over. The pachinko machine 1 does not need to be installed and the installation work is easy.

  Further, by mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the mounting portion of the plate unit 200, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from overturning, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being damaged due to overturning. The pachinko machine 1 is capable of reducing the burden on the side.

  Furthermore, since the attachment unit for attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 to the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is provided, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is attached to the attachment unit of the plate unit 200 to assist the pachinko machine 1 independence. It is possible to prevent the device from falling forward and thereby make it possible to increase the size of the effect device, decorative member, and the like provided on the door frame 3 or to project the device forward. The pachinko machine having a significantly different appearance from the machine can be easily configured, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to a player can be provided. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 1, the dish unit 200 and the like are protruded greatly forward in the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 has a high appealing power.

  In the above embodiment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be detached from the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 by sliding the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 in the front-rear direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it detachable by sliding in the left-right direction with respect to the plate unit 200 of the frame 3.

  In addition, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is made detachable with respect to the mounting portion of the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), and a functional member (for example, the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202) provided detachably on the door frame 3. , Door frame left side unit 400, door frame right side unit 410, door frame top unit 450, etc.). Thereby, when attaching the pachinko machine 1 to the island facility or removing it from the island facility, the functional member removed from the door frame 3 is attached to the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and the pachinko machine 1 1 to be able to stand alone in a stable state. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is attached to the door frame 3 as a functional member, so that a part of the pachinko machine 1 is provided. It can function as a functional member to be configured. Specifically, for example, when the door frame left side unit 400 swelling forward from the left side of the door window 101a in the door frame 3 as a functional member also serving as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, the door removed from the door frame 3 The frame left side unit 400 can function as a self-supporting auxiliary member 7 by being attached to the lower side of the plate unit 200, and can be removed from the lower side of the plate unit 200 and attached to the left side of the door window 101a to function as a functional member. be able to. For this reason, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is made detachable, there is no need to separately store the detached self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and the trouble of managing the detached self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so as not to be lost. Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall can be reduced.

  Alternatively, after the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachable from the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), functional members (for example, “substrate cover covering the substrate”, “wiring”) provided detachably on the main body frame 4 ), A "protection cover that protects the rear of the effect display device or the movable decorative body, etc.", a "storage tank in which game media are stored", a "guide member through which game media circulates", etc.) You may make it double. Thereby, when attaching the pachinko machine 1 to the island facility or removing it from the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the main frame 4 is attached to the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), and the pachinko machine 1 is stabilized. Be able to stand on its own in a state where it was done. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the door frame 3 is attached to a predetermined portion of the main body frame 4 so as to constitute a part of the pachinko machine 1. It can function as a member. For this reason, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is made detachable, there is no need to separately store the detached self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and the trouble of managing the detached self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so as not to be lost. Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall can be reduced. When the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is also used as a functional member provided on the main body frame 4, when the functional member is attached to the main body frame 4, the player touches the detachable functional member. Since it is not possible to perform this, it is possible to prevent the functional member from coming off due to the player, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that does not give the player any discomfort.

  Further, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is also used as a functional member provided on the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 is compared with a case where the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not used as a functional member. Therefore, the number of components can be reduced, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Further, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be provided so as to be accommodated in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3. Thereby, when it is not necessary to attach the pachinko machine 1 to the island facility and make it independent, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is accommodated in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 looks good due to the existence of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7. And the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be prevented from interfering with the game. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or detached from the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 housed in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is taken out so that the pachinko machine 1 can stand on its own. Thus, the work of installing and removing the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. Further, in this case, there is no need to store the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 and to save the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 from being lost as compared with a case where the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is removed and separately stored. Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 having the mounted portion attached to the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Is also good.

  In addition, although the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 that can be attached to and detached from the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is built in the plate unit 200 (door frame 3). When installed in the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be made to protrude downward and abut on the table 8. Thereby, after installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, there is no need to remove the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 and store it separately, and it is possible to reduce the time and effort required for the management of the gaming hall.

[10. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of a control process executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly, the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 483 (a) is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a control process performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 483 (a), the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment first performs various processing as step S1 on condition that the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated. Initializes data stored in a register or a RAM built in the main control MPU (hereinafter referred to as a main control built-in RAM). The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. The RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, one second) has elapsed since the power was turned on, and the main control MPU receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. When it is determined that this is the case, an initialization process (step S1) is executed to initialize data stored in various registers and the main control built-in RAM.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process of storing information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) in the main control built-in RAM is executed. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM in the backup process is referred to without executing the initialization process (step S1), A restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. When the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the pachinko machine 1 is set to an initial state by executing an initialization process without executing a recovery process. When the initialization process is performed, the game state is controlled to the non-time saving state.

  Next, as a process of step S2, a random number which is a number updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment, special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) provided for the lottery process for the display mode when the special symbol is stopped in the variable display, and the special symbol A random number used for a lottery process for a predetermined time (variable time) required for the variable display control, and whether or not to reach as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. Or random number to be provided to the lottery process (whether or not to perform the effect), symbol random number to be provided to the lottery process for determining the type of big hit when it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number (The first symbol random number, the second symbol random number), the random number (ordinary random number) to be used in the lottery process related to the winning at the time of opening the second start port 2004, and the like. And it includes a random number counter that.

  In this example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol use a common reach random number, that is, even if the first start port 2002 is started, the second start port 2004 is started. Even in this case, the reach random number is updated from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the reach random number is updated from a different counter. The first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second reach symbol corresponding to the reach determination table to be compared with the obtained reach random number may be different from the first reach determination table. The execution ratio of the reach effect may be made different by providing a second reach determination table in which a determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) which are not involved in the random numbers among the random numbers are updated. After the processes in steps S1 and S2 are performed, only the process in step S2 is basically repeatedly performed. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 ms.

  FIG. 483 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 483 (b), in this interrupt control, first, register save processing is performed as the processing of step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, the gate sensor 2801, the first starting port sensor 3052, the second starting port sensor 2401, the first count sensor for detecting the game ball B received in the first big winning port 2005, Detection signals from various sensors such as a second count sensor for detecting the game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006, the general winning opening sensor 3001, various magnetic sensors, and the like are input. Next, as a process of step S13, a random number updating process for updating the value of the random number counter for generating the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, the random number (special random number, ordinary random number) related to the display mode of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol when the variable display is stopped among the random numbers is updated. An operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this manner, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process including a lottery process according to a display mode when the special symbol variation display is stopped as the process of step S14. Execute The special symbol process processing will be described later, but here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, second special symbol process flag) indicating the progress of the game stored in the main control built-in RAM. The corresponding process is selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes, as the process of step S15, a normal symbol process process including a lottery process related to a hit at the time of opening the second starting port 2004. In the normal symbol process process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed in accordance with the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game.

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the normal symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 next executes the special symbol process as the process of step S16. Then, processing for transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM in the above-described normal symbol process process to, for example, the peripheral control board 1510 is performed.

  In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs an information output process of outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hole management computer, for example, as the process of step S18.

  Then, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes the first start port sensor 3052, the second start port sensor 2401, the first count sensor, the second count sensor, When the detection signals of the general winning opening sensor 3051 and the like are in the ON state, a prize ball process of outputting a payout control command to the payout control board 633 so as to pay out a prize ball corresponding to those signals to the player is executed. Thus, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 633 outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584, and pays out a prize ball to the player. In this example, when the game ball B wins in the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port sensor 3052 is turned on, “3 balls”, the game ball B wins in the second starting port 2004 and the second game port B wins. When the second starting port sensor 2401 is turned on, "1 ball", when the game ball B wins the first big winning opening 2005 and the first count sensor is turned on, "15 balls", the second big winning port When the game ball B wins in 2006 and the second count sensor is turned on, "15 balls". When the game ball B wins in the general winning opening 2001 and the general winning opening sensor 3051 is turned on, Each of the "eight balls" is paid out to the player.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes a storage process for checking an increase or decrease in the number of reserved storages as a process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. After that, the drive control of the constantly operating actuator is performed (step S22), and the contents of the register are restored (step S23). When the interrupt is permitted (step S24), this control ends. Becomes

  According to the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process using a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be performed. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 484 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that the random numbers used for the various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 484, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first uses the first starting port sensor 3052. The first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the above-mentioned random number counter, provided that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (step S31), and this is incorporated in the main control. A first starting port passage process such as storing in a first special symbol holding storage area of the RAM is executed (step S32). On the condition that the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is replaced with the random number. A second opening opening passage process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S34).

  Next, the main control MPU determines whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game is being controlled is set (step S35). If the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit game is controlled. Is executed (step S40). In the big hit control process, the result of the lottery process (the result of the hit determination and the content of the big hit type) regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped indicates "15R big hit". , The first count sensor detects that ten gaming balls B have been won after opening the first special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or in the first special winning opening 2005. A process of controlling a 15R big hit game in which the open / close pattern to be closed when closed is repeated 15 times is executed.

  In the big hit control process, after the opening control of the first big winning opening 2005 is performed, the time saving flag setting process is executed. The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that the time-saving control (control executed in the time-saving state) is being executed, and is set when the big hit game based on the big hit for which the time-saving control is performed after the big hit game ends, and is described later. It is reset by a first special symbol stop process shown in 495 or a second special symbol stop process of a second special symbol process process described later. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the number of times of saving is set so that the time saving control is terminated when the changing display of the first special symbol is executed five times or the changing display of the second special symbol is executed once. That is, when the time saving control is started after the big hit game ends, and either the condition that the variable display of the first special symbol is executed five times or the condition that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once is satisfied. The time saving control is terminated.

  If the big hit execution flag is not set, the main control MPU determines whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being controlled is set (step S36). If the running flag is set, a small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit game is executed. In the small hit control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a mode indicating “small hit”, the second special winning opening 2006 described later is used. Closes after opening the second special winning opening 2006 based on the opening pattern A or the opening pattern B or when the second counting sensor detects that ten game balls B have won the second special winning opening 2006. Execute the processing to be performed. When the game ball B distributed in the second special winning opening 2006 and distributed by the distribution member enters the specific area, the game is controlled to the big hit game to open the first special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, After 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor detects that 10 game balls B have been won in the first big winning opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern to be closed is repeated 15 times. I do. On the other hand, when the game ball B that has won the first big winning opening 2005 and has been distributed by the distribution member does not enter the specific region, and enters the discharge region, the small ball is not controlled to the big hit game. After the end of the win game, the game state is controlled again to the game state (normal state or time saving state) before the small hit game.

  If neither the big hit executing flag nor the small hit executing flag is set, the main control MPU sets a second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area. On the condition that the value of is "0" (step S37), a first special symbol process process including a lottery process according to a display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38). On condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is not “0” (step S37), at the time of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol. The second special symbol process including the lottery process according to the display mode is executed (step S39).

  FIG. 485 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first starting port passage processing (step S32).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first starting port sensor 3052 is in the ON state and that the game ball B has entered the first starting port 2002, it is shown in FIG. 485. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S41.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains, from the main control built-in RAM, a counter value by a first special reserved number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area. Based on the counter value, it is determined whether the first reserved storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) “4” (step S42). In the process of step S42, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S43 to S43 to set the variable display control of the first special symbol to a new suspended state. The process of S45 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, in the process of step S44, each random number acquired in step S41 is stored in the first special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. To be stored.

  In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 displays the display result of the first special symbol variation display based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S41. Is a big hit, if a big hit, the type of big hit, if not, a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or a mode type of the game effect to be executed ( After performing effect pre-judgment processing for judging pre-judgment information such as the type of the fluctuation pattern) before starting the fluctuation display according to the start winning (step S45), the processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S42, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S43 to S45, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly held.

  In addition, when the first hold storage number changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special hold number display in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the first hold. In addition to updating to correspond to the number of storages, in the storage processing (step S20), a command (first reservation number designation commands 0 to 4) indicating the first number of storages to be stored is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. It is supposed to. It should be noted that the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 486 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect pre-judgment process (step S45). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-judgment process, the pre-judgment table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S41, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation Whether or not a big hit is achieved by comparing with a random number, if a big hit, the type of the big hit, and if the big hit is not made, a reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. The game production mode type is specified (step S61).

  Then, the specified pre-determination information (whether or not a big hit is to be made, if a big hit is made, if a big hit is not made, a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, Game production mode), the type of the obtained special random number (first special random number), and the number of storages to be stored (the value of the number of reservations counter) stored in correspondence with the obtained special random number. Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-judgment process related to the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first starting opening passage process, the specified pre-judgment information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the (The value of one special reserved number counter) and the first special symbol pre-judgment command corresponding to the value (step S62).

  Then, by transmitting the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the special symbol command control process (step S16), the command is stored in correspondence with the first start port 2002 in which the start winning has occurred. In addition to the number of reserved memories, whether or not the display result of the change display of the special symbol based on the generated start winning is determined to be a big hit, if the big hit, the type of the big hit, if not, the effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before executing the reach effect as the game effect to be performed or the preliminary determination information such as the type of the game effect to be executed is started before the variable display according to the start winning is started. Can be grasped.

  When the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control MPU is provided with a first hold storage area for storing advance determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol.

  Further, the first hold storage area has storage areas 1 to 4 corresponding to the number of hold storages, and the peripheral control MPU stores the advance determination information indicated by the received advance determination command in the first (earliest) storage area. Store in order from the area. When the advance determination command is received when the advance determination information is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the advance determination information notified to the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is received. When the first variation pattern command notifying the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is received, the advance variation stored in the first storage area of the first hold storage area in accordance with the received first variation pattern command is stored. The determination information is discarded, and the pre-determination information stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage area is moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Shift the stored pre-judgment information). As a result, the advance determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to specify the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest advance determination information.

  When the variable display control is set to the suspended state in this way, despite the fact that the variable display control is maintained in a non-executed state (reserved state), the big hit expectation degree of the variable display control (pseudo winning probability) ) Can be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, for example, at the time of new output of the hold display or at the time of shift display of the hold display corresponding to the hold exhaustion. .

  FIG. 487 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the second starting port passage processing (step S34).

  Now, in the process of step S33, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the ON state and that the game ball B has entered the second starting port 2004, it is shown in FIG. 487. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reserved stored number becomes the maximum value (upper limit value). ) Is determined (step S52). In the process of step S52, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S53 to S53 to set the variable display control of the second special symbol to a new suspended state. The process of S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as a process of step S54, each random number acquired in step S51 is stored in the second special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. To be stored.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S52 that the second reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S53 to S54, the above-mentioned variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  In addition, when the second reserved storage number changes based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved number display in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the second reserved state. In addition to updating to correspond to the storage number, a command (second reservation number designation command 0 to 1) for designating the second storage number is set in the storage processing (step S20) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. It is supposed to. It should be noted that the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 488 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S38). The first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, Only the first special symbol processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is performed according to the first special symbol process flag on condition that an interval timer described later has timed out (YES in step S85). It will be executed selectively. If the interval timer has not timed out (NO in step S85), the process ends without executing the following process.

1. A first special symbol in which the first special random number stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and a lottery process or the like for a display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped based on the read first special random number is performed. Normal processing (step S80)
2. A first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which a process of determining a mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on a result of a lottery process on a display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped. )
3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and the variation of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the first special symbol. First variation pattern setting process in which a lottery process or the like for the mode is performed (step S82)
4. First special symbol variation process that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S83).
5. The mode at the time of stop of the variation control of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process on the display mode at the time of the stop of the variation control of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol as described above (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 483).

  FIG. 489 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 489, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first executes step S101. In the processing of (1), it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value of the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is the variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state, the process is then stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM as a process of step S102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol is stored in the main control built-in RAM. Read from Next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first special reserved number stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  More specifically, the first special symbol storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol storage area a to first special symbol storage area d), The random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, if a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and a winning start occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first random number is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage areas is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. The various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. As a result, the order in which the variable display control of the first special symbol is suspended is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become.

  Then, thereafter, as a process of step S105, a hit determination process as a lottery process of the hit of the big hit or the small hit is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S106) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), the process is ended.

  FIG. 490 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S105).

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a hit determination table shown in FIG. 491 (A) and a special random number (when the first special symbol normal process is being executed, the first special random number read in step S102, If the second special symbol normal process is being executed, the second special symbol normal process is compared with the second special symbol normal process (step S114).

  As shown in FIG. 49A, the hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is prepared for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Then, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, three types of first special random numbers match the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit has been won, and are different from the big hit determination value. Each of the first special random numbers is matched so that the first special random number matches the big hit determination value indicating that the small hit has been won, and the 265 types of first special random numbers match the loss determination value indicating that the loss has occurred. It is associated (big hit probability; 1/135, small hit probability; 3/270). Further, in this example, in the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, two types of the second special random numbers are used. 113 kinds of second special random numbers that match the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit has been won, and are different from the big hit determination value match the small hit determination value that indicates that the small hit has been won, and 155 kinds of second special random numbers The second special random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the loss determination values indicating that the random numbers are lost (big hit probability; 1/135, small hit probability: 113/270). In other words, the determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured to have a higher probability of being determined to be a small hit compared to the hit determination table referenced for comparison with the first special random number. In the case where the variable display of the second special symbol based on the start winning prize to the second starting port 2004 is executed, compared to the case where the variable display of the first special symbol based on the start winning prize to the first starting port 2002 is executed. Is more advantageous for the player.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes the hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process or the second special symbol read in the second special symbol normal process). As a result of the comparison with the random number, when it is determined that the hit is a big hit (step S115), a big hit flag indicating that the change is a big hit is set (step S116), and the hit judging process is ended.

  Also, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal process), If it is determined that the small hit has occurred (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the change has won the small hit is set (step S118), and the hit determination processing ends.

  On the other hand, if neither the big hit nor the small hit has been won, that is, if it is determined that a loss has occurred, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119).

  The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is in the time reduction state, and is used when the game state is in the non-time reduction state. A state determination table. In the reach determination table in the time saving state, the reach is determined so that one type of reach random number matches the reach determination value indicating that reach is possible, and 71 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination value that indicates that reach is not possible. Random numbers are associated with each other.

  Further, in the reach determination table in the non-hours reduction state, the reach determination value indicating that the reach number of five types including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time reduction state reaches the reach determination value, The reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination value indicating that no reach is made. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating the reach in the non-time reduction state is set higher than in the time reduction state.

  When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119), and determines that the reach loss has occurred (step S120), the variation is determined. The reach flag indicating the reach is set, and the process ends (step S121).

  FIG. 492 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 492, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the result of the lottery process is performed by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU selects the big hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 491 (B), and the first symbol random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process and By comparing the selected big hit symbol determination table with the selected big hit symbol determination table, a big hit symbol as a mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S132).

  As shown in FIG. 491 (B), the symbol random numbers (the first symbol random number and the second symbol random number) are associated with the big hit symbol determination table in accordance with the determination result (14R short jackpot, 5R short jackpot), respectively. It is remembered. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the big hit by specifying the determination result associated with the obtained symbol random number.

In particular,
1. The first large winning opening 2005 is closed after being opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first counting sensor detects that ten game balls B have been won in the first large winning opening 2005. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 14 times (14 rounds), the game ball B is controlled to a 14R big hit game in which the first big winning opening 2005 can be entered (easy), and the symbol change of the special symbol is 100 after the big hit game is completed. If the next big hit game does not occur before the game is executed, the state is ended.
2. The first large winning opening 2005 is closed after being opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first counting sensor detects that ten game balls B have been won in the first large winning opening 2005. (1 round), after that, after the second special winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when 10 game balls B are won in the second special winning opening 2006 by the second counting sensor. By repeating the opening / closing pattern to be closed when detected four times (four rounds), the game ball B is controlled to a 5R jackpot game in which it is possible (easy) to enter the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 After the jackpot game is over, if the first special symbol change display is executed five times or the second special symbol change display is executed once, the next big hit game is not generated unless the next big hit game occurs. Time-saving state B to be terminated Control to 5R time reduction jackpot A
3. After the second special winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the second count sensor detects that ten game balls B have won the second special winning opening 2006, the second special winning opening 2006 is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 14 times (14 rounds), the game ball B is controlled to a 14R big hit game that can enter (easily) the second big winning opening 2006, and the symbol change of the special symbol is 100 after the big hit game ends. If the next big hit game does not occur before the game is executed once, the state is ended.
4. The first large winning opening 2005 is closed after being opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first counting sensor detects that ten game balls B have been won in the first large winning opening 2005. (1 round), after that, after the second special winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when 10 game balls B are won in the second special winning opening 2006 by the second counting sensor. By repeating the opening / closing pattern to be closed when detected four times (four rounds), the game ball B is controlled to a 5R jackpot game in which it is possible (easy) to enter the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 After the jackpot game is over, if the first special symbol change display is executed five times or the second special symbol change display is executed once, the next big hit game is not generated unless the next big hit game occurs. Time-saving state B to be terminated Control to 5R time reduction jackpot B

  In addition, the big hit symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number is such that six judgment values are sorted in the case of 14R time saving big hit A, and 94 judgment values are sorted in the case of 5R time saving big hit A. I have. That is, when a lottery result of a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, a 14R time-short-hit jackpot A is obtained with a probability of 6%, and a 5R-time-hit jackpot A is obtained with a probability of 94%. Similarly, the big hit symbol determination table, which is compared with the second symbol random number, is such that 58 judgment values are sorted in the case of 14R time savings jackpot B and 42 judgment values are sorted in the case of 5R time savings jackpot B. ing. In other words, when a lottery result of a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, a 14R time-saving big hit B is obtained with a probability of 58%, and a 5R time-saving big hit B is obtained with a probability of 42%. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the probability of being determined as the 14R time-saving big hit is higher in the big hit symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number than in the big hit symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number. When the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start winning prize to the second starting port 2004 is executed rather than the variation display of the first special symbol based on the winning prize to the first starting port 2002, This is in an advantageous state for the player.

  When a lottery result for a big hit is obtained, the game state after the big hit game is ended is determined according to the type of the big hit. Then, in the big hit control process (step S40), after controlling the big hit game, a process of setting a time reduction flag based on the determination result and a process of setting the number of time reductions according to the type of the big hit in the time reduction counter. Be executed.

  Specifically, when it is determined that the big hits of “14R time-saving jackpot A” and “14R time-saving jackpot B” are obtained, the special symbol (the first special symbol) is executed after the jackpot game for 14 rounds is executed. When it is determined that the time variation is controlled until the symbol change of (the sum of the second special symbol and the second special symbol) is executed 100 times, and the big hits of “5R time saving big hit A” and “5R time saving big hit B” are obtained. After the jackpot game for five rounds is executed, the time saving state is controlled until the variable display of the first special symbol is executed five times or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once. In this way, when a lottery result based on the first special random number is obtained by the lottery based on the first special random number, the time saving state is always controlled after the end of the big hit game, and similarly, a lottery result based on the second special random number based on the lottery result Is obtained, the time is always controlled after the end of the big hit game. However, when the big hits of “14R short hit jackpot A” and “14R short hit jackpot B” are obtained, the big hit game is more effective than when the big hits of “5R short hit jackpot A” and “5R short hit jackpot B” are obtained. After execution, the system is controlled to be in a time saving state for a long period of time.

  In addition, when it is determined to be 14R hourly jackpot A, it is determined to be a 14R hourly jackpot A symbol as a first special symbol 14R jackpot symbol, and when it is determined to be 5R hourly jackpot, it is 5R as a first special symbol 5R jackpot symbol. It is decided to be a time saving big hit A symbol. In addition, when the second special symbol stop symbol setting process is determined to be 14R HOT jackpot B, a 14R HOT jackpot B symbol is determined as the 14R jackpot symbol of the second special symbol, and when the 5R HQ jackpot B is determined, the second special symbol is determined. The 5R jackpot B symbol is determined as the 5R jackpot symbol of the two special symbols.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines a lost symbol (step S136).

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the lottery result (any one of the type of the big hit, the small hit, the reach loss, and the loss) as the process of step S137. A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that an instruction (which may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, thereafter, as the process of step S138, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82), the process ends.

  The peripheral control MPU controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command. On the effect display device 1600, a decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is variably displayed. Specifically, as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbol fluctuates and stops, the peripheral control MPU determines the jackpot symbol (left / middle / right decoration symbol) when the jackpot is specified from the received determination result notification command. [0] to [8], and when the reach loss is specified, the lost pattern with the reach (the same decorative pattern as the left and right decorative patterns are [0] to [8]) If the combination is determined to be a combination of designs with different middle decoration designs; reach loss design) and a loss is specified, a loss design without reach (at least the left / right of the left / middle / right decoration design) Is determined to be a combination in which the decorative symbol is a different symbol), and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled.

  FIG. 493 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 493, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag to If it has been done (step S141), a large hit variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the type of big hit determined in step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S142), and the reach flag is set. If it is set (step S145), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S146), and if neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, a normal loss (reach effect) Is not executed, the variation pattern table at the time of the loss (not shown) Is selected (step S147).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S148). The variable pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S149). Further, the main control MPU sets the fluctuation time set in correspondence with the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S150). Thus, the first special symbol display control of the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed for the thus determined variable time, and the effect display device 1600 is synchronized with the change display of the special symbol. The effect control will be performed in.

  Note that a plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is included in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table. The variable random numbers are stored in association with each other. Thus, the main control MPU selects the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process from among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. Is obtained from the table, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of the present example, it is set so as to determine the type of the mode of the reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. . For example, out of 241 types of variable random numbers, 164 types of variable random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that one of normal reach effects is to be executed, and 59 types of variable random numbers are super reach having a low jackpot expectation degree. The determination values (164 to 222) are set as the determination values (164 to 222) indicating that any one of the effects is to be performed, and the determination values (223 to 240) indicating that the 18 types of variable random numbers execute any of the super reach effects having a high jackpot expectation. ). Note that the super reach effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect, and for a player who wants to generate a jackpot game, the player's expectation for the jackpot game is increased when the super reach effect is executed. It has become.

  In the variation pattern table of this example, 13 to 60 seconds is set in the non-time saving state as the variation time corresponding to the first special random number, and 4 to 60 seconds is set in the time reduction state. As the corresponding fluctuation time, 13 to 60 seconds is set in the non-time saving state, and 2 to 60 seconds is set in the time saving state.

  When the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, next, as a process of step S151, it is determined whether or not a counter value of a time-saving counter for setting the number of continuations of the time-saving state is “0”. If the counter value is not "0", the time-saving counter is counted down (step S152), and it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short-time counter is "0" (step S153). . Then, as a result, if the counter value is "0", a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving control is to be ended is set (step S154).

  If it is determined in step S151 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is “0”, and if it is determined in step S153 that the counter is not “0”, Then, the process proceeds to step S155. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) (step S155), the process ends.

  FIG. 494 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol change process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 494, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first executes step S171. In the process (1), the variation timer for setting the variation time according to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is subtracted by one. Then, when the variable time timer is 0, that is, when it is determined that the lottery variable time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, the process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  FIG. 495 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 495, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first executes step S181. As the processing of the above, while performing a display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing derivation and display of the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of one special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

  Next, when the time reduction end flag is set (step S183), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 resets the time reduction end flag (step S184) and resets the time reduction flag (step S185). Thereby, when the variable display of the predetermined number of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is performed (in this example, any one of 100 times, once, and five times), the time saving control is ended. The control in the non-time saving state is started.

  When the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating to start the big hit game (step S187), and The standby time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the big hit game or the like) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Although not shown, in step S188, a process of setting the number of rounds according to the type of the big hit to a big hit number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The jackpot number counter is decremented by one each time a round is executed in a jackpot control process described later, and when the jackpot number counter becomes “0”, it is determined that the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has executed the specified round number. Control to end the big hit game. Specifically, in the big hit control process described later, the big win opening processing (step S91) and the big win opening processing (step S92) are repeatedly executed until the big hit counter reaches “0”, and the big winning is achieved. When the round is ended in the mouth opening process (step S92), the big hit counter is decremented by 1 and becomes “0”. Then, the process proceeds to the special winning opening process (step S93) to end the big hit game. Execute the control to make it.

  Then, a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game is being executed is set (step S189). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, a jackpot start command (14R time jackpot A start command, 5R time jackpot A start command) according to the type of jackpot (14R time jackpot A, 5R time jackpot A) is set. Thereby, the effect of the jackpot game according to the type of the jackpot designated by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Also, in the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process, a big hit start command (14R short time big hit B start command, 5R short time big hit B start) according to the type of big hit (14R time short big hit B, 5R short time big hit B) Command).

  The big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game is being executed is, when the big hit game is ended, specifically, in the post-big-winning-hole opening process (step S93) of the big hit control process (step S40). Opening / closing control of the first special winning opening 2005 according to the type (for example, after the first special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or 10 gaming balls B have won the first special winning opening 2005). This is reset when the opening / closing control to repeat the opening / closing pattern to be closed when detected by the first count sensor is repeated 14 or 5 times (all rounds executable in the big hit game). By resetting the big hit execution flag, the big hit control process (step S40) is not executed in step S35 of the special symbol process process (step S14), while the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is displayed. The first special symbol change display and the second special symbol change display on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

  When the big hit flag is not set (step S186) and the small hit flag is set (step S190), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 indicates that the small hit game is started. A small hit start command is set (step S191), and a waiting time until the start of the small hit game (a time for displaying an indication to start the small hit game) is set in the interval timer (step S192). Then, a small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is set (step S193). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the small hit type. In step S191, a small hit start command (5R small hit A1 start command, 5R small hit A2 start command, 14R small hit) according to the type of small hit (5R small hit A1, 5R small hit A2, 14R small hit A). A start command) is set. Thereby, the effect of the small hit game corresponding to the type of the small hit specified by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. In the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process, a small hit start command (5R small hit B1) according to the type of small hit (5R small hit B1, 5R small hit B2, 14R small hit B). A start command, a 5R small hit B2 start command, and a 14R small hit B start command) are set.

  The small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is, when the small hit game is ended, specifically, the small hit middle processing (step S401) of the small hit control processing (step S41) described later. ), The opening and closing control of the first special winning opening 2005 (for example, opening the first special winning opening 2005 (for example, 1.8 seconds)) according to the type of the small hit, or the game ball B is 10 It is reset when the opening / closing control for closing when the first prize is detected by the first count sensor is finished. The small hit execution flag is reset so that the small hit control process (step S41) is not executed in step S36 of the special symbol process process (step S14), while the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed. The state in which the variable display of the first special symbol on the container and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

  When the small hit flag is not set, that is, when a loss occurs, a standby time (a time during which a special symbol stop symbol is displayed) until the next special symbol change display is started is set in the interval timer. (Step S194), and it transfers to step S195.

  When the processes of steps S186 to S194 are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value. (Step S195), this process ends.

  FIG. 496 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S40). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. The peripheral control board 1510 informs the player of the transition to the jackpot game based on the change of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) at the time of the change display stop to the big hit symbol. Winning opening process before waiting until the next round is started or until the next round starts (step S91)
2. Based on the fact that the special symbol change display mode at the time of stoppage is a big hit symbol, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be in an open state, or the next round is started. After the first winning opening 2005 or the second winning opening 2006 is controlled to be open, the first winning opening 2005 or the second winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or after the first winning opening. Processing during opening of the special winning opening that is closed when the first count sensor or the second count sensor detects that 10 game balls B have won the special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 (step S92).
3. After the rounds have been completed, the processing to wait until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player of the end of the big hit game is performed (step S93).

  The big hit process flag is operated so as to indicate that the big winning opening pre-process (step S91) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 483). Further, in the above-described opening processing of the special winning opening (step S92), at the start of the round for controlling the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 to the open state, a big hit round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is issued. At the end of a round for controlling the first winning opening 2005 and the second winning opening 2006 to be closed, a big hit round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect of the jackpot game according to the number of rounds designated by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is displayed. This is executed by the device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker, and the like.

  FIG. 497 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the small hit control process (step S41). In the small hit process, one of the following two process processes is selectively executed according to the small hit process flag.

1. Small hit start processing for executing setting processing for starting a small hit game (step S400)
2. Small hit middle processing for monitoring the entry time and opening time of the game ball B during the small hit game (step S401)

  The small hit process flag is operated to indicate that the small hit start process (step S400) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 483). Also, when the game ball B enters the specific area is detected in the small hitting process, the big hit executing flag is set, and the number of rounds (5R small) that can be executed in the big hit game according to the type of the small hit is set. If it is a hit, 4 rounds, and if it is a 14R small hit, 13 rounds) are set in the big hit counter, and the process is terminated. Thereby, the big hit game is started following the small hit game.

  FIG. 498 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary symbol process (step S15).

  Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is in the ON state and that the game ball B has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs a gate section passing process such as acquiring the ordinary random number of the ordinary symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the ordinary symbol holding storage area of the RAM as the process of step S802. Execute.

  Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. The ordinary random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and based on the read ordinary random number, a normal symbol normal process in which a lottery process for a display mode when the variation control of the ordinary symbol is stopped is performed (step S803).
2. Ordinary symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the ordinary symbol random number.
3. Ordinary symbol variation process of waiting until the variation display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S805).
4. The normal symbol fluctuation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process on the display mode when the normal symbol fluctuation control is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Ordinary symbol stop processing to stop variable display of symbols (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode in which the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped becomes a mode suggesting "per day", a process for controlling the reception of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 is performed. Normal electric accessory release processing to be executed (step S807)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the above-described process of step S1 (see FIG. 483).

  FIG. 499 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate portion passing processing (step S802).

  Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is in the ON state and that the game ball B has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains, from the RAM of the main control MPU, the counter value of the ordinary reserved number counter indicating the number of ordinary random numbers stored in the ordinary symbol reserved storage area as the process of step S811. . Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of stored ordinary symbols is the maximum value “4”.

  If it is determined in step S811 that the number of stored ordinary symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed in order to newly set the variable display control of the ordinary symbols to a suspended state. Is performed. That is, first, as the process of step S812, the ordinary reservation number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as the processing of step S813, the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned ordinary figure variable random number are acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter. Then, as a process of step S814, each of the random numbers thus obtained is stored in a normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU.

  However, if it is determined in the processing of step S811 that the number of stored ordinary symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of ordinary symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processing of step S812 to step S814 (the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the ordinary figure variable random number are not acquired from the random number counter), the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is not newly held.

  It should be noted that the gate portion passage processing (step S802) may be performed as another example described below. For example, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is in the ON state and that the game ball B has passed to the gate unit 2003, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first The ordinary random number and the general variable random number are obtained from the random number counter and stored in the temporary storage area. Thereafter, the counter value of the above-mentioned ordinary reserved number counter is obtained from the RAM of the main control MPU, and it is determined whether or not the retained number of ordinary symbols is the maximum value “4” based on this counter value. Do. If it is determined that the number of stored ordinary symbols is not the maximum value, the ordinary reserved number counter is counted up (addition of 1) so that the variable display control of the ordinary symbols is newly held. Then, the previously-obtained ordinary random number and the ordinary figure variable random number (the ordinary random number and the ordinary figure variable random number stored in the provisional storage area) are stored in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. Is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value of the above normal hold number counter. On the other hand, as a result of acquiring the counter value of the ordinary pending number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU, when it is determined that this counter value is its maximum value of “4” (the reserved storage number of the ordinary symbol is the In the case of the maximum value), the previously acquired ordinary random number and the ordinary figure variable random number are discarded without being stored in the ordinary symbol holding storage area, and the acquired ordinary symbol change display control is newly performed. It may be configured not to be suspended.

  FIG. 500 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal processing (step S803).

  When the ordinary symbol process flag indicates that the ordinary symbol normal processing is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 500, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 firstly performs the processing in step S821 as follows. It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the ordinary symbol in the suspended state based on the counter value of the ordinary suspended number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is the variable display control of the ordinary symbol in the suspended state, then as the process of step S822, the ordinary symbol stored in the ordinary symbol retaining storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is described. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, ordinary random number, ordinary figure variable random number) related to the display mode of the symbol is read from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, the normal holding number counter is counted down, and when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stopped. Are shifted in a first-in first-out manner (first-in first-out).

  Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted in accordance with the passage of the game ball B to the gate section 2003 are stored in the first (earliest) area. Store in order. When the random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, the random number extracted to the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area When the start condition of the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out, and the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage is performed. Various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. Thereby, the order in which the fluctuation display control of the ordinary symbols is suspended is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the fluctuation display control is sequentially released from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the ordinary figure hit determination table shown in FIG. 501A with the ordinary random number read in step S822 (step S828).

  The ordinary figure hit determination table shown in FIG. 501A is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU. Then, in the ordinary figure hit determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random numbers, the above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are set so that all of the ten kinds of ordinary random numbers coincide with the universal figure hit determination value indicating that the winning has been achieved. Associated. That is, in the present example, when the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, the game ball is always won per ordinary drawing.

  If the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the ordinary symbol hit determination table with the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol ordinary process, and determines that the normal symbol hit is determined (step S829), A general symbol hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won per ordinary symbol is set (step S830), and the symbol at the time of normal symbol fluctuation control stop (ordinary symbol stop symbol) is determined as the symbol per ordinary symbol. (Step S831). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S829 that it is not a normal symbol hit, a normal symbol loss symbol is determined as the mode (normal symbol stop symbol) when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped (step S833).

  Then, after the lottery process for the ordinary symbol is performed, as a process of step S834, the lottery result (indicating one of the per-drawing and the loss) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 by the lottery. A general-purpose diagram determination result notification command corresponding to each result is set. Then, thereafter, as the process of step S835, when the above-described ordinary symbol process flag is updated so as to proceed to the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804), this process is ended.

  FIG. 502 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination processing (step S804). When the ordinary symbol process flag indicates that the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 502, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has the time reduction flag set. If the time reduction flag is set (step S842), the normal symbol variation pattern determination table is selected if the time reduction flag is set (step S841). (Step S843).

  Then, by comparing the selected ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table with the ordinary symbol variation random number read out in step S822 of the ordinary symbol ordinary process, a variation pattern (ordinary symbol variation pattern) of the ordinary symbol to be executed is determined (step S844). ), A general symbol variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 of the start of the ordinary symbol variation in the determined ordinary symbol variation pattern is set, and the variation of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set. Is started (step S845).

  When the main control MPU determines the general figure fluctuation pattern, the main control MPU sets the general figure fluctuation time according to the determined general figure fluctuation pattern in the general figure fluctuation timer (step S846). As a result, the effect control is performed on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (the ordinary symbol variation display) for the ordinary symbol variation time according to the determined ordinary symbol variation pattern.

  In the non-working time ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table of this example, 20 seconds is set as the ordinary symbol variation time. On the other hand, in the normal symbol variation pattern determination table during the time reduction in this example, the general symbol variation time is set to 0.8 seconds so that the general symbol variation time is shorter than the non-time-saving ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table. Is set. The ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

  When the normal symbol variation display control is started, next, as the process of step S847, when the above-described ordinary symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-described ordinary symbol variation process (step S805), this process is started. The process ends.

  FIG. 503 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary symbol change process (step S805). When the ordinary symbol process flag indicates that the ordinary symbol variation process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 503, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first executes the process in step S851 as follows: In the above step S846, the general figure fluctuation timer in which the general figure fluctuation time is set is decremented by one. Then, when it is determined that the normal figure fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, that the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol has elapsed (step S852), the process proceeds to step S853. That is, in the process of step S853, the process ends when the ordinary symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S806).

  FIG. 504 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary symbol stop processing (step S806).

  When the ordinary symbol process flag indicates that the ordinary symbol stop processing is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 504, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first executes the processing in step S861 as follows: In addition to performing display control for displaying the stop symbol of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol normal process on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400, the derivation display of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is notified. The general-purpose stop display command is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S862).

  Next, when the general figure hit flag is set (step S863), the second starting port corresponding to the current game state is set using the general figure hit release pattern table shown in FIG. 501 (B). The release pattern of 2004 is set (step S864).

  Specifically, if the non-time-saving state is controlled when the opening of the second starting port 2004 is started, the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004. That is, if the non-time-saving state is controlled at the start of opening of the second start port 2004, the second start port 2004 is opened and closed when a lottery result based on ordinary drawing is obtained by a lottery based on ordinary random numbers. The opening pattern A in which the starting port solenoid 2514 is turned on and the second starting port 2004 opens and closes in a short open mode (0.05 seconds in this example) is executed. As a result, when the opening pattern A is executed as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is short, and when the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, the game ball is opened. It is difficult to enter the ball. That is, in the non-time saving state, even if the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed, game balls hardly enter the ball.

  On the other hand, if the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is controlled to be in the time saving state at the start of opening, the opening pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004. That is, if the non-time-saving state is controlled at the start of opening of the second start port 2004, the second start port 2004 is opened and closed when a lottery result based on ordinary drawing is obtained by a lottery based on ordinary random numbers. An opening pattern B in which the starting port solenoid 2514 is turned on and the second starting port 2004 opens and closes in a long open mode (1.5 seconds in this example) is executed. Thereby, when the opening pattern B is executed as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is long, and the game ball is opened when the second starting port 2004 is in the open state. You can enter the ball.

  When the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004 is set, next, as a process of step S885, a general symbol start command indicating to start the general symbol game is set, and the normal symbol process flag is set to the normal electric accessory. When the process is updated so as to shift to the release process (step S866), the process ends. Here, the per-figure start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect of the per-figure per game corresponding to the type of per-figure per designated by the per-figure start command is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It can be executed by a lamp, LED, speaker, and the like.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the ordinary symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the ordinary symbol normal process which is the initial value when the ordinary symbol hit flag is not set in step S864. At this point (step S868), this process ends.

  FIG. 505 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S807).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S871 that the second start port 2004 is in the open state, as shown in FIG. 505 and the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. If a predetermined time (the opening time of the second starting port 2004 in the opening pattern set in step S865) has elapsed since the control of the second starting port 2004 to the open state (step S872), When the starting port solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the starting port 2004 is turned off and the second starting port 2004 is controlled to be closed (step S873), the process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of step S871 that the second starting port 2004 is in the closed state, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the second starting port 2004 as shown in FIG. If the timing is to open the second starting port 2004 (step S874), the starting port solenoid 2514 for opening and closing the second starting port 2004 is turned on to control the second starting port 2004 to the open state (step S875). The process ends.

  In the process of step S871, if it is not the timing to open the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. 505, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 opens the second start port 2004. When the number of times has reached a predetermined number (the number of times the second start port 2004 has been opened in the opening pattern set in step S865) (step S876), an end command per figure is set (step S877). Then, when the ordinary symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the ordinary symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S878), the process ends. In addition, the end command per ordinary figure is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and upon receiving the end command per ordinary figure at the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display game 1600, the effect of the game per ordinary figure executed by the lamp / LED, the speaker and the like. Can be terminated.

[11. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 506 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 506, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU performs an initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting processing, processing for clearing a RAM built in the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 and the like are performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether the 16 mS elapsed flag T has been set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU generates an interrupt every time 2 mS elapses, and executes the 2 mS regular processing. In the 2 mS steady processing, a process of counting up the 16 mS progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 mS progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 mS progress monitoring counter becomes 8, that is, when the 16 mS has elapsed, the 16 mS elapsed time has elapsed. At the same time as setting the flag T, a process of resetting (clearing) the 16 ms progress monitoring counter to 0 is executed. As described above, the 16 mS elapse flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 mS in the 2 mS steady processing, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 mS elapse flag is set in step S502 (16 mS elapse flag T is "1"), the 16 mS elapse flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 mS steady processing is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 mS regular process, a process of controlling the effect display device 1600, lamps / LEDs, speakers, and the like is executed based on a command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 mS steady processing is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16mS. On the other hand, if the 16 mS elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 mS elapsed flag T is “0”), the loop processing is performed until the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 507 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the 16 mS regular processing executed every 16 mS in the sub main processing. In the 16 mS regular processing, the peripheral control MPU executes the processing of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis processing in step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control processing of step S602, the fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S149 of the first fluctuation pattern setting processing and step S149a of the second fluctuation pattern setting processing) causes the transmission of the fluctuation pattern command transmitted. Based on this, the control processing related to the effect display device 1600 is executed.

  In the sound control process of step S603, a control process related to a speaker provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, a control process related to the lamp / LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the various decorative boards 184, 273 and the like is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  Note that the processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 mS regular processing ends within 16 mS. Even if it takes 16 mS or more from the start of the 16 mS steady-state process to the end of the 16 mS steady-state process, the 16 mS steady-state process is started immediately after the 16 mS elapses from the start of the 16 mS steady-state process (the command in step S601). Do not execute (from analysis processing). That is, when 16 mS has elapsed during the execution of the 16 mS steady processing, only the 16 mS elapsed flag is set. When it is determined in step S502 that the 16 mS elapsed flag has been set after the end of the 16 mS steady processing, the 16 mS steady processing is performed. To start.

  Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is executed in the 16 mS regular process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing and the 16 mS regular processing in the sub-main processing.

  FIG. 508 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process (step S602).

  In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU selectively executes one of the following five process processes according to the effect process flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. Will be done.

1. A variation pattern command that indicates a variation pattern of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) analyzed in the command analysis process (a first variation pattern command that indicates a variation pattern of the first special symbol, a second variation pattern command) After performing processing such as controlling the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker, and the like based on the second fluctuation pattern command instructing the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the process during the fluctuation effect. Variable production start processing to be changed (step S711)
2. The elapsed time from the start of the control of the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, and the like is measured, and processing for controlling the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker, and the like is performed according to the elapsed time, and the special symbol (the first The variable production process (step S712) in which the effect process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the change end process in response to the elapse of the change time according to the change pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol).
3. A process for deriving and displaying a predetermined display result is performed based on receiving a stop display command instructing a variable display stop of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). Change the process flag to a value according to the variable production start process, change the value to a value according to the big hit production process if it is a big hit, and change it to a value according to the small hit production process if it is a small hit (Step S713)
4. Based on receiving the big hit start command instructing the start of the big hit game, the effect display device 1600 performs a process for executing the display control during the big hit game, and changes the effect process flag when the big hit game ends. Big hit production process which changes to the value according to the production start process (step S714)
5. Based on receiving the small hitting start command instructing the start of the small hitting game, the effect display device 1600 performs a process for executing the display control during the small hitting game, and performs the second big winning opening during the small hitting game. If the game ball B accepted in 2006 has been distributed to the specific area, when the small hitting game is finished, the effect process flag is changed to a value according to the big hit effect start processing, and the game ball B is allocated to the specific area. If not, the small hit effect process is changed to a value according to the variable effect start process (step S715).

  Special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed on the special symbol display (first special symbol display of function display unit 1400, second special symbol display of function display unit 1400) by the above processing In the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the symbol.

[10. Variation control at the end of time-saving control]
As described above, the opening and closing of the second start port 2004 is controlled in an opening pattern different from the non-time saving state in the time saving state. That is, if the normal symbol change executed by the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 stops, if the time saving state is reached, the opening pattern A in the short opening mode (0.05 seconds in this example) is the second starting port 2004. Is opened and closed, and if the normal symbol change executed by the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped, if the non-time saving state is set, the second pattern is opened in the long opening mode (1.5 seconds in this example). The starting port 2004 is opened and closed.

  As described above, in order to change the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004 based on the time when the normal symbol change executed on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped, immediately before the time saving state ends (for example, Is in the time saving state A of 100 times, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is displayed in the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) in the time saving state immediately before the 100th variation display stops. In the case where the normal symbol change executed in the step is stopped and the second starting port 2004 is opened / closed, the second starting port 2004 is opened / closed in the opening pattern B in the long opening mode (1.5 seconds in this example) as the time saving state. Will be done. In addition, when the time-saving state ends after the second start port 2004 is opened, the player may feel uncomfortable because the opening pattern in the time-saving state is executed even though the time-saving state has ended. In addition, a start winning in the second starting port 2004 may occur at an unexpected time such as after a symbol change is started in a non-time saving state after the end of the time saving state, and this is not intended by the game designer. Behavior (variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed in the non-time saving state and variation display of the second special symbol is hardly performed. (The start winning prize is generated and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed)), and the behavior gives the player a sense of incongruity, which may lead to a decrease in the interest in the game.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the special symbol displayed fluctuated on the special symbol indicator (the first special symbol indicator, the second special symbol indicator) of the function display unit 1400 is stopped with a lost symbol (for example, In step S194 of the special symbol stop process, normally, “0.5 seconds” is set in the interval timer as a standby time (time during which the special symbol stop symbol is displayed) until the next variation display of the special symbol is started. set. As described above, the interval timer is referred to in the first special symbol process (step S28) and the second special symbol process (step S39). Until the interval timer times out, the special symbol display (the second symbol) of the function display unit 1400 is used. The control is performed so that the variable display of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) on the one special symbol display and the second special symbol display is not started.

  Further, when the time saving state is ended, that is, when the symbol change of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) after the big hit game has reached the number of time savings, and when the symbol variation stops (the time reduction) When the last symbol change in the state is stopped), “2 seconds” is set to the interval timer as a standby time (time during which the special symbol stopped symbol is displayed) until the next special symbol change display is started. set. As described above, after the second start port 2004 is changed to the open state in the time saving state, the second start port 2004 is changed to the closed state when 1.5 seconds have elapsed. Therefore, by setting the interval timer to “2 seconds” when the last symbol change in the time reduction state is stopped and the time reduction state is ended, the symbol change of the special symbol in the non-time reduction state is started before starting. The second starting port 2004 can be changed to the closed state, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the start winning in the second starting port 2004 after the symbol change of the special symbol in the non-time saving state is started.

  Note that the period set in the interval timer when the last symbol change in the time reduction state stops and the time reduction state ends is at least equal to the opening time of the second big winning opening 2006 in the time reduction state (in this example, “1. 5 seconds ") or more. In addition, if the last symbol change in the time saving state is stopped and the second special winning opening 2006 is not changed to the open state when the time saving state is ended, the waiting time until the next special symbol change display is started is set. The same time as usual ("0.5 seconds" in this example) may be set.

  As described above, when the last special lottery result in the time reduction state is derived (when the last symbol change in the time reduction state is stopped), regardless of the presence or absence of the first hold number and the second hold number, during the predetermined period By suppressing the execution of the next special lottery (winning determination) over the whole time, the time saving control that can be continued after the last special lottery result in the time saving state is derived (after the last symbol change in the time saving state is stopped) Is terminated within the predetermined period, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the second suspended number after the time saving control is completed. Accordingly, the game progresses in an unintended behavior of the game designer such that a start winning is generated in the second start port 2004 and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed despite the non-time saving state. Since the game progress can be prevented, and the progress of the game in the behavior intended by the game designer (the game property intended by the game designer) can be suitably realized, the decrease in the gaming interest can be suppressed by not giving the player a sense of incongruity. .

  In the above-described example, the determination as to whether or not the time reduction state (determination as to whether or not to end the time reduction state) is made when the normal symbol change executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped. Although the process performed as a reference has been described, the determination of whether or not the person is in the time saving state is started when the normal symbol change executed by the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (for example, the ordinary symbol normal process (step S803)). Is executed, or when the normal symbol variation pattern determination processing (S804) is executed). In this case, at least the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation executed in the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 during the time reduction state (ordinary symbol fluctuation time: “0.8 seconds” in this example) and the time in the time reduction state The opening time of the second special winning opening 2006 (“1.5 seconds” in this example) may be equal to or longer than the total period (“2.3 seconds” in this example).

[12. Production in an advantageous state]
[12-1. Pachinko machine specifications]
First, an example of the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 in this chapter will be described. FIG. 509 (A) is an example of the hit probability table, and FIG. 509 is an example of the big hit distribution table. The hit probability table and the big hit distribution table are stored in, for example, the ROM of the main control MPU.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol is also called special figure 1, and the second special symbol is also called special figure 2. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to simply as a special symbol. In addition, the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation are collectively referred to as special symbol fluctuation or simply fluctuation. The special lottery results in the special maps 1 and 2 include a big hit and a small hit.

  The hit probability table includes a jackpot probability in a low-probability state (ie, a non-probable state) and a high-probability state (ie, a probable state), a small-hit probability (no distinction between the low-probability state and the high-probability state), Is defined. The jackpot probability is common to Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. Further, the hit probability table defines the small hit probability in the special map 2. In other words, according to the hit probability table of FIG. 509, a small hit is won with a high probability at the time of winning the special figure 2. In addition, from the winning of the special figure 1, the small hit is not won, or the winning is performed with an extremely low probability (for example, 1/300 or less) as compared with the special figure 2.

  In this chapter, when a small hit is won, the first winning port 2005 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). Then, the opening / closing pattern for closing is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice).

  The big hit distribution table defines the big hit type distribution when the big hit is won for each of the special maps 1 and 2. “2R”, “8R”, and “16R” in the jackpot type indicate the number of rounds of the jackpot, and “low-probability-short-time”, “high-precision-time-short”, and “high-precision-time-short” indicate the big hit. This shows a game state to be shifted to after the end.

  In addition, "special figure 1_8R low accuracy time reduction symbol 1", "special figure 1_8R low accuracy time reduction symbol 2", "special figure 1_8R low accuracy time reduction symbol 3", "special figure 2_2R low accuracy time reduction symbol 1", The number of times of “Tokuzu 2_2R low-accuracy time reduction symbol 2”, “Tokuzu 2_2R low-accuracy time reduction symbol 3”, and “Tokuji 2_2R high-accuracy time reduction symbol 3” are 10 times, and “Tokuzu 2_2R high”. The number of reductions in the number of times for the “correct time saving symbol 1” is seven, and the number of times for the “special figure 2_2R low probability reduction symbol 2” is nine.

  The number of time savings is the number of fluctuations that triggers the end of the time saving state that starts after the end of the big hit game. In other words, the time-saving state ends when the change in the number of times determined by the number of time savings ends after the time-saving state is entered. It should be noted that the number of time savings may be determined by the total number of changes of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 or may be determined by the number of changes of one of the special figures. In this chapter, it is assumed that the number of time savings is determined by the number of fluctuations in Toku-zu 2. In other words, for example, the time-saving state that shifts after the big hit of “Special figure 2_2R high-accuracy time-saving symbol 1” is the fluctuation of the special figure 2 even if the total number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 reaches seven. If has not been completed seven times, it shall not be terminated.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are configured such that the variable display is started individually according to the extraction of the special random number, and the variation of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is changed. And display can be performed simultaneously (simultaneous fluctuation of special symbols). When both the first special random number and the second special random number are stored (reserved), the reserved special random numbers are individually digested in accordance with the degree of progress of the variable display of each special random number.

  That is, when the changing first special symbol stops, the changing of the first special symbol held in the first special symbol storage display starts, and when the changing second special symbol stops, the second special symbol stops. The change of the second special symbol held in the memory display is started. In addition, since the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed at the same time, on the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbols are displayed so as to change simultaneously with the change of each special symbol.

  In the case where one of the special figures in the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is stopped in the display mode indicating the big hit, any one of the following processing is performed as the processing for the other special figure during the simultaneous fluctuation. . As a first processing example, a big hit game by one special figure is controlled, and a change of the other special figure is deleted (forcibly stopped at an outlier). In this case, even after the big hit game ends, the fluctuation of the other special figure deleted is not restarted, but is started from the fluctuation of the next special figure on the other side.

  As a second processing example, a big hit game based on one special map is controlled, and the execution of the fluctuation time of the other special map is temporarily stopped during execution of the big hit game. During the execution of the big hit game, the special figure during the fluctuation stop is, for example, blinking on the special symbol display (displayed in a mode different from that when the game is not paused (the player can recognize that the game is paused)) Is done. Then, after the end of the big hit game, the fluctuation display of the other special figure that has been temporarily stopped is restarted from the remaining fluctuation time. As a third processing example, the big hit game by one special figure is controlled, the fluctuation time of the other special figure is reset, and the change of the other special figure is started again after the big hit game ends.

  In this chapter, the high-precision non-saving time state is a state where a small hit is easily obtained (a so-called small hit rush). Hereinafter, an example of a specification for realizing the small hit rush only in the highly accurate non-time saving state will be described.

  First, the normal symbol fluctuation time, the normal lottery probability, and the like will be described. The fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is, for example, about 1 second in both the time reduction state and the non-time reduction state, and is shorter than the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation. In both the time reduction state and the non-time reduction state, the probability of a normal winning in the normal lottery result performed by the game ball B passing through the gate unit 2003 is extremely high (for example, 1/1). In addition, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 when a normal symbol is won is long in the time reduction state (for example, about 6 seconds) and short in the non-time reduction state (for example, about 0.7 seconds).

  Subsequently, a game method in each state will be described. As described above, the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is extremely higher than that of the first special symbol lottery (54552/65536 in the example of FIG. 509 (A)). Therefore, in the low-probability non-saving time state, the second starting port 2004 is opened by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003, and the game ball B is allowed to enter the second starting port 2004, and a small hit with a high probability Can be elected.

  However, in the low-probability non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of Toku-zu 2 is much longer than the fluctuation time of Toku-zu 1. Specifically, for example, the shortest fluctuation time (for example, about 10 minutes) of the special figure 2 is longer than the longest fluctuation time (for example, about 5 minutes) of the special figure 1. Therefore, the time interval between the winning of the small hit and the opening of the first big winning opening 2005 is very long, and the opening and closing time of the first big winning opening 2005 in the small hit game is short and the number of times of opening and closing is small. Even if the variation of Tokuzu 2 is executed, it is difficult to make the game ball B enter the first big winning opening 2005 with good timing during the small hit game.

  Note that, specifically, the total opening time of the first winning port 2005 in the small hit game is shorter than the opening time of the second starting port 2004 in the time saving state. For example, a small hit game in which the first large winning opening 2005 is opened for about 0.5 seconds and then closed for about 1.35 seconds only once, or the first big winning opening 2005 is 0.5 seconds. There is a small hit game in which the first pattern is executed once after the second pattern, which is opened for about seconds and then closed for about 0.7 seconds, is repeated twice.

  Even if the game ball B could be made to enter the first big winning opening 2005 with good timing during the small hitting game, since the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is very long, the payout per unit time is obtained. And the game cannot proceed smoothly. Therefore, in the low-probability non-saving time state, the player basically proceeds to play the game so that the player hits left and the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002.

  On the other hand, in the time-saving state (the low-accuracy time-saving state and the high-accuracy time-saving state), the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to be short. Specifically, for example, the variation time (for example, about 1 second) of the non-shortened variation (for example, about 1 second) of the special figure 2 is set shorter than the shortest variation time (for example, about 4 seconds) of the special figure 1. If the shift starts when the special figure 2 is suspended in the time saving state, the shortened shift is selected at a high rate (for example, about 90%). Therefore, in the time-saving state, the player executes a so-called right-handed game and advances the game so that the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004, thereby reducing the number of balls to be played out and smoothly. The game can proceed.

  Here, since the second starting port 2004 is located downstream of the gate portion 2003 in the flow path of the game balls B on the game board 5, most of the game balls B going to the second starting port 2004 are the second starting ports 2004. Pass through the gate section 2003 before reaching. The first big winning opening 2005 opened during the small hit game is located downstream of the second starting opening 2004 in the flow path of the game ball B on the game board 5. When the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, the game ball B heading for the first winning port 2005 enters the second starting port 2004 and does not reach the first winning port 2005. That is, in order for the game ball B to enter the first winning port 2005, the game ball B needs to pass over the second start port 2004 when the second start port 2004 is in the closed state.

  However, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is long (for example, about 6 seconds) in the case of winning in a normal win, so that the game ball B, which is right-handed, heads toward the first big winning opening 2005. Most of the balls B enter the second starting port 2004 in the open state and do not reach the first winning port 2005. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the player can cause the game ball B to enter the second starting port 2004 and frequently win a small hit, but cannot obtain a payout by the small hit game. . In addition, the number of award balls when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 is, for example, one. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the special figure 2 can be executed without substantially reducing the number of payout balls. It is difficult to increase balls.

  In addition, the first special winning opening 2005 is located at a position where there is almost no game ball B reaching the first special winning opening 2005 when performing a so-called left-handed operation. Care is also taken for so-called capture actions, which attempt to increase the number of game balls B by repeating right-handing alternately.

  Subsequently, in the highly accurate non-time saving state, similarly to the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to be short (for example, about 1 second). Therefore, in the high-precision non-time saving state, the player executes a so-called right strike to advance the game such that the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004. Furthermore, in the high-precision non-time saving state, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 in the case of winning in a normal winning is a time sufficient for the game ball B to enter the second starting port 2004 and is short ( For example, about 0.7 seconds), a considerable number (for example, half or more) of the right-hitting game balls B pass over the second starting port 2004 in the closed state, and the first big winning port. Reach 2005.

  In other words, in the high-precision non-saving time state, the player can cause the second starting port 2004 to enter the game ball B to frequently win a small hit and obtain a payout by the small hit game. According to the above-described specification, it is possible to realize a small hit rush in which it is easy to obtain a payout with a small hit only in the highly accurate non-time saving state.

  FIG. 510 is a transition diagram showing an example of a game state transition of the pachinko machine 1 in this chapter. As described above, in the low-probability non-time saving state, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed, and in the state other than the low-probability non-saving time state, the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed, so that the player can smoothly proceed the game. Can be. On the other hand, the transition from the low-probability non-time saving state to the special figure 2 big hit and the transition from the state other than the low-probability non-time saving state to the special figure 1 big hit are irregular, and are indicated by dotted lines in FIG. ing.

  In any state, when a big hit is won, the state shifts to one of a low-accuracy time-saving state, a high-accuracy time-saving state, and a high-accuracy non-time-saving state according to the type of the big hit. In the low-probability time-saving state, when the change of the special figure 2 of the number of time-savings determined by the jackpot type that triggered the transition to the low-probability time-saving state is completed, the state shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving state. Also, in the high accuracy time reduction state, when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 of the number of time savings determined by the big hit type that triggered the transition to the high accuracy time reduction state ends, the state changes to the high accuracy non-time saving state, that is, the small hit rush. Transition.

  The transition from the high-accuracy time reduction state to the high-accuracy non-saving time state seems to be a disadvantageous state transition for the player at first glance, but as described above, the small hit rush is realized in the high-accuracy non-saving time state, which is advantageous for the player. It is a state transition. Therefore, when the high-precision time-saving state is completed by exhausting the fluctuation of the special figure 2 determined by the number of times saved, the player can obtain a sense of excitement without a decrease in interest.

[12-2. Rush entry chance direction]
Hereinafter, a rush entry effect, which is an effect executed from the start of the time-saving state (the high accuracy time-saving state and the low accuracy time-saving state), will be described. At the beginning of the time reduction state, the rush entry chance production is to notify that the current state is the time reduction state, but it is unknown whether the current state is the high accuracy time reduction state or the low accuracy time reduction state. This is an effect that informs whether the state is a high-accuracy time-saving state (that is, a state in which the state shifts to a high-accuracy non-hour-saving state that is a small hit rush state after the end of the specified number of special fluctuations) or a low-accuracy time saving state. .

  511, 512, and 513 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a rush entry chance effect. 511, 512, and 513 illustrate an example in which the number of time savings is 10, and all the fluctuations in the time saving state are out-of-range fluctuations.

  (A) is a state in which the time saving big hit has ended. The same decorative symbol indicating the big hit is stopped on the effect display device 1600. It should be noted that the expected value of the payout at the time of winning the big hit becomes higher in the order of a low probability big hit, a high probability short hit, and a high probability short hit. For example, when "7" complete decoration symbols are selected, a combination of decorative symbols may be selected so that the winning of the high-accuracy time-saving big hit is determined. Also, the odds of the decorative pattern are selected more than the odds of the decorative pattern are selected, the higher the expectation of winning in the high-precision short-hit jackpot than the low-accuracy short-hit jackpot. , A combination of decorative patterns may be selected.

  An effect in which the decorative symbol is promoted during the big hit may be executed. Specifically, for example, even if the winning of the high accuracy time-saving big win is completed, the odd or even alignment is stopped when the symbol is confirmed, the promotion effect is executed during the big hit game, and even if the decorative symbol is promoted to the "7" alignment. Good.

  (B) is a state in which the time saving big hit has ended and the time saving state has started. A display indicating that the rush entry chance has started is displayed on effect display device 1600. In (C), since the time reduction state has started, a so-called right-handed operation is executed, and a display (right-handed display) for prompting the second starting port 2004 to enter the game ball B is displayed on the effect display device 1600. I have. At the start of the time reduction state, a large right-handed display (three arrows described as “Right-handed!”) In the middle and lower part of the effect display device 1600 and a small right-handed display in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600 (“ Right arrow! ") Is displayed.

  (D) is a state in which the game ball B has entered the second starting port 2004 from the state of (C) and the first fluctuation of the special figure 2 has started. The large right-handed display is deleted from the effect display device 1600. Further, a display indicating the maximum value of the number of remaining time savings is displayed on the upper left of the effect display device 1600. As described above, the number of time savings is 7, 8, or 10 times. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 2D in which none of the fluctuations in Toku-zu 2 has been completed (D), the maximum value is “the remaining 10 times”. Is displayed. In addition, a display “Power up the character in 6 seconds!” Is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, the power-up effect of the character is performed using the six changes from the first change to the sixth change of the special figure 2 in the time saving state. In the power-up effect, the image of the character wearing the aura is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the aura color steps up in the six fluctuations.

  For example, the peripheral control ROM stores a scenario management table for a power-up effect. The scenario management table stores a power-up effect scenario and a distribution for each of the low-probability time-saving state and the high-probability time-saving state. The scenario shows the color of the aura in each of the six variations. In each scenario, it is assumed that the expectation that the aura color in the final variation of the power-up effect is a highly accurate time-saving state in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow increases. It is assumed that the rainbow color is selected only when the current state is the highly accurate time saving state.

  Further, it is desirable that the aura color does not step down (for example, white in the next change of blue) in the six changes in each scenario. This is because there is a possibility that the expectation of the player may be reduced. Further, for example, when the final aura color in the power-up effect is the same, it may be set so that the smaller the number of fluctuations that has reached the final aura color, the higher the degree of expectation in the highly accurate time saving state. Specifically, for example, when the final aura color is red, when the color reaches red in the sixth variation of Toku-zu 2 and when the color reaches red in the fourth variation of Toku-zu 2, The latter is more likely to be in a highly accurate time saving state. Note that the former may have a higher degree of expectation in the high-accuracy time-saving state. This is because the expectation can be pulled up to the last (sixth) change.

  Further, in each scenario, the aura color may be promoted by one step, may be promoted by plural steps, or may not be promoted by one change. In the case where the aura color is promoted in a plurality of stages by one change, for example, the change may step up from white to green without passing through blue, or may sequentially step up to white, blue, and green in the change. May be. In each scenario, the aura color displayed first in the first variation of the special map 2 may not be the one with the lowest expectation (that is, it may not be white).

  The “6 seconds” displayed on the effect display device 1600 is an index indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in which the power-up effect is performed, and is different from the actual 6 seconds. That is, for example, as described later, the first variation of the time saving state is “6 more seconds” (meaning that the power-up effect is performed using the remaining six variations), and the second variation is “after” 5 seconds "(meaning that a power-up effect is performed using the remaining five changes). That is, since the remaining time indicates the number of remaining fluctuations before the rock breaking effect is performed, the display indicating the maximum number of times saved may not be performed.

  (E) is the state of the special figure 2 that is changing for the first time since the time reduction state started, and is a state following (D). The effect display device 1600 displays a character wearing an aura and a display of "6 more seconds".

  (F) is a state at the time of the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 for the first time since the time saving state started. After the state of (E), the color of the aura is promoted from white to blue until the end of the fluctuation, and a display (“power up !!”) indicating that the color of the aura has been promoted is provided on the effect display device 1600. Will be displayed. (G) is a state in which the change of the special figure 2 for the second time since the time reduction state started is started. The aura color of the character remains blue, and the effect display device 1600 displays “5 seconds left”. A similar effect is repeated until the fifth change of the special figure 2.

  (H) is a state where the special figure 2 is changing for the sixth time since the time saving state started. The color of the aura is promoted to red in the sixth variation of the special map 2, and a display (“power up !!”) indicating that the aura color has been promoted is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the example of FIG. 511, red is the final aura color in the power-up effect.

  (I) is the state at the end of the sixth special figure 2 after the time reduction state starts. In the sixth variation, after the aura-colored step-up is completed, the seventh to tenth introductory effects of the rock breaking effect performed in the variation of the special figure 2 are executed. In (I), the effect display device 1600 displays “Destroy rocks!” As the introduction effect. The character destroys the rock in the rock destruction effect only when the current state is the highly accurate time saving state.

  (J) is a state in which the special figure 2 is changing for the seventh time since the time saving state started. The image in which the rock destruction effect starts and the character hits the rock is displayed on the effect display device 1600. During the rock destruction effect, for example, the character wears a red aura, which is the final aura color of the power-up effect.

  Thus, even during the rock destruction effect, the player does not forget the degree of expectation in the highly accurate time-saving state. Conversely, the character may not wear an aura during the rock destruction effect. This is because some players do not want the other players to know the degree of expectation. When the character wears an aura during the rock destruction effect, the aura color may be stepped up during the rock destruction effect.

  (K) is a state in which the seventh special figure 2 has been changed since the time saving state started, and is a continuation of (J). An image in which the rock has cracked but the rock is not broken due to the character hitting the rock is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (L) is the state at the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 for the seventh time since the start of the time reduction state. A display indicating that the rock destruction effect is still continuing (“still more!”) Is displayed on effect display device 1600. After that, the same effect is repeated.

  (M) is a state in which the special figure 2 is changing for the eighth time since the time saving state started. In the rock destruction effect, an image in which the character hits the rock again is displayed on effect display device 1600. (N) is the state at the end of the ninth variation of the special figure 2 from the start of the time saving state. A display (“Bet on this blow!”) Indicating that the next change in the special figure 2 is the last change in which the rock breaking effect is performed is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  (O) is the changing state of the special figure 2 tenth time (ie, the end of the time saving state) from the start of the time saving state. An image in which the character hits a rock is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The cracks in the rock may increase each time the character hits the rock. In (O), the cracks in the rock are more than in (M).

  (P) is a state in which the special figure 2 is changing ten times since the time saving state started, and is a continuation of (O). The effect display device 1600 displays an image in which the rock has been successfully destroyed (that is, an image indicating that the current state is the highly accurate time saving state and that the state shifts to the high non-saving time state at the end of the fluctuation). ing. After the image that failed to destroy the rock is displayed, a resurrection effect may be performed to display an image that succeeds in destroying the rock. (Q) is the state at the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 for the tenth time since the time reduction state started. An image (“rush rush!”) Indicating the transition to the highly accurate non-saving time state is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  In the case of the highly accurate time reduction state where the number of time savings is seven, the image in which the rock breaks at the seventh variation of the special figure 2 and the image which shifts to the highly accurate non-time saving state (that is, (P), (Q ) (However, the remaining number at the upper left is displayed as "4 remaining"). Similarly, in the case of the high-accuracy time-saving state in which the number of time savings is 9, the image in which the rock breaks at the ninth variation in Tokuju 2 and the image that shifts to the high-accuracy non-time-saving state (that is, (P), ( Q) (however, the remaining number of times at the upper left is displayed as "two remaining times").

  In the above-described example, the time saving states in which the number of times saved is 7 and 9 is not selected in the low accuracy time saving state. If there is a low probable time-saving state where the number of time savings is 7 and 9 times, a rock breaking effect that ends in failure with a small number of fluctuations will be performed, and it will not be possible to give the player an uplifting feeling. is there.

  FIGS. 513 (P ′) and (Q ′) are examples of the rock destruction effect when the current state is the non-time saving state. (P ′) is the state following the change in the special figure 2 for the tenth time since the start of the time saving state and continuing from (O). In the rock destruction effect, an image in which the character failed to destroy the rock is displayed on effect display device 1600. (Q ′) is a state in which the tenth variation of the special figure 2 has been completed since the time saving state started. A display indicating that the rush entry chance has ended is displayed on effect display device 1600. Thereafter, the state shifts to the low-probability non-saving time state.

  Note that, for example, in the power-up effect, an image of the pressing operation unit 303 and an image prompting the pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and at the timing when the pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected, Whether or not the step-up of the aura color may be notified. Similarly, for example, in the rock destruction effect, an image of the pressing operation unit 303 and an image prompting the pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and at the timing when the pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected. Alternatively, whether rock destruction may be performed may be notified.

  In addition, when the fluctuation | variation in the time saving state, ie, the rush entry production | generation is a big hit fluctuation, the said big hit is alert | reported by the effect different from the effect which destroys a rock, for example. This is to make the player recognize clearly whether the jackpot has been won or whether the transition to the highly accurate time saving state has been successful.

  As a specific effect, for example, immediately after the start of the change, the shutter group is closed so as to cover the effect display device 1600. The closed state of the shutter group is maintained for a long time (for example, about 2 minutes) according to the fluctuation pattern, for example. Thereafter, when the shutter group is opened, an icon indicating the type of the big hit is displayed on the effect display device 1600. After that, the decorative symbols are stopped. On the other hand, the jackpot may be notified by the effect of destroying the rock. Accordingly, the player cannot immediately recognize whether the player has won the jackpot or has shifted to the high-precision time-saving state, so that the player can maintain a sense of tension.

[12-3. Direction during the small hit rush]
FIG. 514 and FIG. 515 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the effect during the small hit rush. (A) is a state at the end of the final fluctuation in the highly accurate time saving state, that is, a state similar to FIG. (B) is a state in which the highly accurate non-time saving state is changing. At the upper left of the effect display device 1600, a display (“Rushing !!”) indicating that the current state is the high-precision non-saving time state (that is, during the small hit rush) is displayed.

  In (B), the effect display device 1600 has a total acquired ball number display area and a timer display area at the lower right. The total acquired ball count display area displays the total acquired ball count from the start of the small hit rush The number of balls paid out by the small hit and the big hit. In addition, for example, it is desirable that the number of balls paid out by entering the game ball B into a general winning opening other than the special winning opening or the starting opening is not included in the total number of obtained balls.

  In addition, for example, the number of balls paid out by entering the game ball B into the general winning opening may be included in the total number of acquired balls, but in this case, a predetermined number is displayed on the effect display device 1600 at the time of the entry. It is desirable to output an image, output a predetermined sound from various speakers, and output predetermined light from various lamps. This is to make the player recognize that the total number of acquired balls has increased due to the entry of the game ball B into the general winning opening.

  In addition, the display of the total number of acquired balls is continued until the end of the jackpot fluctuations (that is, the fluctuations of the high-accuracy short-hit jackpot and the low-accuracy short-hit jackpot fluctuations), which cannot always be shifted to the high-accuracy non-hour-saving state. At the end of the change, the counting of the total number of acquired balls stops. However, if you win a jackpot that is not always able to shift to the high-accuracy non-saving time state, but if you can re-enter the high-accuracy non-saving time state without falling down to the low-probability non-saving time state, you will get the total again The number of balls is displayed again, and counting is restarted from the most recent count stop value. In addition, although the winning is not always possible to shift to the high-accuracy non-hour saving state, if the high-accuracy time-saving no-win is elected during the time-saving state shifted by the jackpot, the high-precision At the start, the total number of acquired balls may be redisplayed and the count may be restarted.

  In the timer display area, the digestion time of the small hit rush counted from the start of the small hit rush is displayed. The start of the small hit rush may be at the end of the high-accuracy time-saving no-big-hit game, at the end of the final fluctuation in the high-accuracy time-saving state, or at the beginning of the first fluctuation in the high-accuracy time-short state. Good.

  (C) is a state in which the high-accuracy time-saving no-big hit fluctuation has ended in the high-accuracy non-hour saving state. The timer in the timer display area indicates the digestion time of the small hit rush. Therefore, the timer is stopped at the end of the big hit change during the high-precision non-time saving (at the end of the big hit change). (D) is a big hit game with a high accuracy time-saving big hit. Even during the big hit game, the total number of acquired balls is displayed and added. Note that the timer is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the big hit, but may be displayed with the timer stopped.

  (E) is a jackpot game with a high-accuracy time-saving no-big-hit, and is a continuation of (D). When the total number of acquired balls reaches the predetermined number of balls, the effect display device 1600 performs arrival display. The predetermined number of balls has a plurality of stages. For example, the arrival display is performed every time the total number of obtained balls increases by 1,000. Therefore, the display “1000 PT exceeded!” Indicating that 1000 shots have been reached in (E) is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, together with the arrival display, predetermined light may be output from various lamps, predetermined sound may be output from various speakers, or BGM may be changed. Note that, for example, after the total number of obtained balls reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, 30,000 shots), the arrival display need not be performed.

  Note that, for example, the difference between the plurality of stages may be constant or may be different. Specifically, for example, the difference between the plurality of stages may be constant such as 1000 shots, 2000 shots, 3000 shots,..., Or 1000 shots, 5000 shots, 10000 shots, The difference may be set so that the difference from the previous stage increases as the stage proceeds, such as 20,000 shots,.

  (F) is a state immediately before the end of the jackpot game with a high accuracy time-saving no-big hit. (G) is a state immediately after the end of the jackpot game with high accuracy and short time. A display indicating a highly accurate non-time saving state, that is, a small hit rush restarting, is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, in (G), there is an acquired ball count history display area in the upper middle of the effect display device 1600. In the acquired ball number history display area, a history of the total number of the acquired balls by one big hit and the obtained balls by the small hit rush that has won the big hit is displayed. In (G), 2910 shots have been obtained in the big hit and the immediately preceding small hit rush, and thus “2910” is displayed in the obtained ball count history display area.

  (H) is a state where the total number of acquired balls has reached 5,000 during the small hit rush. When the total number of acquired balls reaches the predetermined number of balls, the background image on the effect display device 1600 changes. The predetermined number of balls has a plurality of stages. For example, each time the total number of obtained balls increases by 5,000, the background image changes. In addition, with the change of the background image, predetermined light may be output from various lamps, predetermined sound may be output from various speakers, or BGM after the background image is changed may be changed. Note that, for example, after the total number of acquired balls reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, 30,000 shots), the background image need not be changed.

  In the example of FIG. 514, since the arrival display of the total number of obtained balls is performed every 1000 shots, and the background image is changed every 5000 shots, the total obtained ball count is 5000, 10,000, 15,000, .., When both the arrival display and the background image change are executed (in this example, the arrival display is always performed at the timing when the background image changes).

  The reaching display and the change of the background image in the effect display device 1600 are executed in order according to, for example, a predetermined priority. For example, since the number of times the background image is changed is less frequently executed than the reaching display, the change in the background image can give the player a stronger sense of excitement than the reaching display. Depending on whether the background image is changed first or later, the timing at which a stronger sensation is given to the player differs.

  Note that the arrival display and the change of the background image may be executed simultaneously. By simultaneously executing the reaching display and the change of the background image, a synergistic effect can be obtained, and a stronger sensation can be given to the player than when these effects are executed alone. The same applies to the output of light and sound that is executed simultaneously with the arrival display and the change of the background image.

  (I) is a state at the time of the end of the fluctuation of the working hours with big hits. In order to perform a rush entry chance effect after the end of the big hit, at this time, it is desirable not to be notified whether the time saving big hit is a high accuracy time saving big hit or a low accuracy time saving big hit.

  (J) is the state at the time of the end of the jackpot fluctuation with time reduction, and is the state following (I). At the end of the big hit change, the total number of acquired balls, the total time of the timer, and the result are displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a result. The result is displayed at the timing because the winning in the time saving big hit does not always make it possible to shift to the high certainty non-saving time state (small hit rush) without falling down to the low certainty non-saving time state. It is.

  (K) is a state in which the big hit with time reduction is completed. (L) is a state in which the rush entry chance has started. (M) is a state in which the final fluctuation of the rush entry chance (final fluctuation in the time-saving state) is fluctuating, and is a state in which the effect of destroying the rock is being executed. (N) is a state at the end of the final fluctuation, and is a state in which a transition to the highly accurate non-time saving state is notified. (K), (L), (M), and (N) are the same as FIG. 511 (A), FIG. 511 (B), FIG. 512 (P), and FIG. Description is omitted.

  (O) is a state in which the highly accurate non-time saving state is changing. If it is possible to return to the high-accuracy non-time saving state again without falling to the low-accuracy non-saving time state, for example, the display of each display area is as follows. The timer display in the timer display area inherits the value at the end of the last highly accurate non-time saving state. In addition, the total number of obtained balls in the total obtained number of balls display area is a value obtained by adding the number at the end of the immediately preceding high-precision non-saving time state to the number of balls that were obtained in the immediately preceding time saving big hit. You. Further, an image corresponding to the total number of acquired balls is displayed on the background image. Further, in the acquired ball number history display area, the history of the total number of the acquired balls due to the previous time-saving big hit and the number of the obtained balls in the small hit rush that has won the time-saving big hit is further displayed. These histories are displayed, for example, for the last 10 jackpots that have been won without falling to the low-probability non-saving time state.

  In this way, if it is possible to return to the high-accuracy non-time-saving state again without falling into the low-probability non-time-saving state, a display succeeding the previous state can be displayed. It is possible to accurately grasp the payout that could be obtained without any delay. Also, resetting the total number of acquired balls and the timer each time the high-accuracy non-time saving state ends will reduce the likelihood of cases where these displays will have large values, increasing the player's lift. The display content is as described above because the user is not given a feeling.

  As described above, the total value of the acquired payouts during one big hit game and the obtained payouts in the highly accurate non-time saving state (small hit rush) immediately before the big hit game is displayed in the acquired ball count history display area. Therefore, a numerical value larger than the expected value of the acquired payout per one big hit game can be indicated by using the acquired ball count history display area, so that a sense of excitement can be given. Further, for example, the display mode may be changed depending on the value displayed in the acquired ball count history display area. Specifically, if it is less than 5000, the number is a blue number, if it is 5000 or more and less than 10,000, it is a red number, and if it exceeds 10,000, it is a rainbow number. In addition, although the last ten times are displayed, a numerical value obtained by summing up the numerical values of 1 to 10 times may be displayed after the eleventh time.

[12-4. Direction during big hit]
Hereinafter, the production during the big hit will be described. For example, a song that can be played during the high-accuracy time-saving no-big-hit is added each time the high-probability time-saving no-big-hit is won without falling to the low-probability non-hour-saving state. For example, only the song A can be selected in the first high-accuracy time-saving big hit, which is won without straddling the low-probability non-hour-saving status, and the music B can be further selected in the second high-accuracy time-saving no-big hit. In addition, the song C can be further selected in the third highly accurate timeless jackpot, and the song D can be further selected in the fourth and later highly accurate timeless jackpots.

  In the second and subsequent high-precision time-saving no-hits, the player can select a tune to be played from selectable tunes by performing an operation using a predetermined operation unit. In the case where the player does not select a song, for example, the song A is won without straddling the low-probability non-time saving state, and the song A is won in the first high-probability job B is assumed to be a tune C at the third highly accurate time-saving big hit, and a tune D is to be played at the fourth or more highly accurate time-saving big hit.

  Also, the music that was playing during the high-accuracy short-time jackpot may continue to flow during the high-accuracy non-short-time state that shifts after the high-precision short time jackpot. Further, even in the highly accurate non-saving time state, the music may be selectable by the operation of the predetermined operation unit by the player.

  FIG. 516 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an effect during a high-accuracy time-saving big hit. More specifically, a description will be given of an effect in which a predetermined command (hidden command) is input during a high-accuracy time-saving big hit, whereby all songs can be selected.

  (A) is a state in which the second high-accuracy time-saving no-hit, which has been won without falling to the low-accuracy time-saving state, has started. (B) is a state in which the first round of the high-accuracy time-saving no-big hit is being executed. A music selection box and an image describing a music selection operation are displayed on the effect display device 1600. Since the second high-accuracy time-saving big win won without falling to the low-probability non-time-saving state, the music A and the music B can be selected. B is selected.

  These images are displayed, for example, when the peripheral control MPU receives a first round start command from the main control MPU. Also, for example, at the same timing, the operation acceptance period of the operation unit for executing the music selection operation starts. The operation reception period ends, for example, when the peripheral control MPU receives a round end command of the last round from the main control MPU.

  In the example of FIG. 516, the cursor for selecting the music A and the music B is moved by operating the rotation operation unit 302, and the music that is currently flowing is displayed by pressing the center pressing operation unit 303a. Changes to the song pointed to by.

  Also, the operation reception period of the hidden command starts, for example, when the peripheral control MPU receives the first round start command from the main control MPU, and ends when the second round end command is received. . (C) is a state after the hidden command is input in (B). All songs (songs A to D) can be selected.

  Note that the hidden command is, for example, a command for long-pressing (for example, pressing for 3 seconds or more) the center pressing operation unit 303a. As described above, the operation reception period of the hidden command overlaps with the operation reception period of the music selection.

  In the music selection, the peripheral control MPU determines that the central pressing operation unit 303a has changed from the pressed state to the non-pressed state, and that the pressed state is not long-pressed (in the above example, the pressed state did not continue for 3 seconds or more. ), The music is determined.

  If the center press operation unit 303a changes the pressed state to the non-pressed state and decides a song, the player decides to execute the hidden command even though the player intends to execute the hidden command. There is a risk that the user will mistakenly think that the operation is wrong and will not continue pressing until the long press state, which is a hidden command. Further, if the center pressing operation unit 303a is in the long pressing state and the music is determined when the pressing state is changed from the pressing state to the non-pressing state, if the hidden command is executed, the music is always determined. Since the decision is made, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, when the above condition is satisfied, the music is determined.

  In addition, for example, in the operation for notifying the hit result of the effect during the reach, and also in the determination operation on the character selection screen and the like described later, when the center pressing operation unit 303a changes from the pressed state to the non-pressed state in this way, Alternatively, it may be determined that the center pressing operation unit 303a has been operated.

[13. Demo screen production]
[13-1. Normal demonstration screen production]
Hereinafter, an example of the effect of the demonstration screen when the fluctuation is not executed will be described. FIG. 517 is an example of a time table of the demonstration screen. In the time table, the display contents on the effect display device 1600, the display time of the display contents, whether or not to accept the volume adjustment jog, whether or not to accept the volume light amount adjustment jog, whether or not BGM is flowing, and a predetermined movable body (role). In this chapter, it is defined whether or not the back movable decorative body 3110) is in a falling state.

  In a state where the volume adjustment jog can be accepted, for example, by rotating the rotary operation unit 302, an image indicating the volume output from the pachinko machine 1 is displayed and the volume can be adjusted. In a state where the volume light amount adjustment jog can be received, for example, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302, an image indicating one of the volume and the light amount is displayed, and the one can be adjusted, and the image can be displayed. When the user presses the center pressing operation unit 303a in the state of being performed, an image indicating the other of the volume and the light amount is displayed, and the other can be adjusted.

  As described above, the back movable decorative body 3110 is a decorative body that can move in the vertical direction. The back-side movable decorative body 3110 is located at the above-described retreat position above the game board 5 or at the above-described appearance position at the center of the game board 5 depending on the effect state.

  Hereinafter, the flow of a specific effect in the demonstration screen will be described. First, a fluctuation or a big hit is executed (NO1). At the end of the change or the big hit, the decorative design stops on the effect display device 1600 (NO2). After that, if there is no suspension of the change, the determined decorative symbol stop state is maintained (NO3). From NO1 to NO3, the volume adjustment jog can be accepted, the volume light quantity adjustment jog cannot be accepted, the variable BGM is flowing, and the back movable decorative body 3110 is not in the falling state, that is, is in the retracted position. However, in NO1, there may be a prohibited section in which reception of the volume adjustment jog is prohibited, such as during a predetermined reach effect or during a predetermined round of a big hit.

  Subsequently, a predetermined image is displayed (NO4-1). Subsequently, a telop image (also referred to as a sound volume control telop) indicating that transition to the volume light control screen is possible while the predetermined video is being displayed, and a character for determining a later changing effect state. A telop image (also referred to as a character selection telop) indicating that transition to the selection screen is possible is displayed (NO4-2).

  For example, the video reproduced in NO4-1 and NO4-2 is a video of 30 seconds, and is loop-reproduced between NO4-1 and NO4-2. In NO4-1 and NO4-2, the volume adjustment jog cannot be accepted, the volume light quantity adjustment jog can be accepted, and the back movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position. However, although BGM is flowing in NO4-1, the BGM fades out from the start of NO4-2 (the volume decreases and eventually stops).

  Subsequently, a model demonstration movie of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed (NO5), then a maker logo is displayed (NO6), and then a jog button attention movie is displayed (NO7). An action prevention movie) is displayed (NO8).

  Further, after that, while the predetermined video is being displayed, a sound volume control telop and a character selection telop are displayed (NO9). The display content of NO9 is the same as that of NO4-2. After the display content of NO9 is displayed, the process returns to NO5. In NO5 to NO9, the volume adjustment jog cannot be accepted, the volume light quantity adjustment jog can be accepted, and BGM does not flow.

  Hereinafter, the operation of the back movable movable body 3110 will be described. At the start of the model demonstration movie in NO5, the back movable ornamental body 3110 moves downward and falls, that is, is in the appearance position. Thereafter, in NO6 to NO9, the back movable decorative body 3110 maintains the appearance position. In addition, in NO9, when shifting to the volume light quantity adjustment screen or the character selection screen, the back movable ornamental body 3110 may be moved to the retreat position to make the effect display device 1600 easier to see. In this case, for example, when the display of the volume light amount adjustment screen or the character selection screen ends, the back movable ornament 3110 is moved to the appearance position again.

  In NO5 to NO9, when the game ball B enters the starting port (the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004), the back movable ornamental body 3110 not located at the retreat position moves to the retreat position. In NO5, if the game ball B enters the starting port while the back movable decorative body 3110 is falling from the evacuation position to the appearing position, for example, the back movable movable body 3110 is detected at the timing when the ball is detected. To rise. Thereby, the back movable ornamental body 3110 can be quickly moved to the retreat position at the same time as the start of the change corresponding to the incoming ball, and the visual recognition of the effect using the effect display device 1600 of the change is prevented as much as possible. I'm done.

  Further, in NO5, when the game ball B enters the starting port while the back movable ornamental body 3110 is falling from the evacuation position to the appearance position, the back movable ornament body 3110 falls once to the appearance position. You may raise it after having made it. This is because, if an irregular operation in which the movable back body 3110 suddenly starts to rise at the same time as the falling ball is performed during the descent, some players mistake this as an effect with a high expectation of big hits.

  In addition, the operation of the back movable ornamental body 3110 may be determined according to the variation pattern of the variation performed by the entering ball. For example, a description will be given of a variation pattern in which an effect of lowering the back movable ornament 3110 at the start of the variation is performed. In NO5 to NO9, a variation pattern is selected in which a game ball B enters while the back movable ornamental body 3110 is located at the appearance position, and an effect of lowering the back movable ornamental body 3110 at the start of the variation is executed. It shall have been done.

  In this case, for example, simultaneously with the entry of the ball, the rear movable ornament 3110 is once raised to the evacuation position or a predetermined position higher than the maximum lowering position of the lowering effect, and then the lowering effect is executed. In the case where the descending effect is an effect having a high expectation of a big hit, it is desirable to execute the descending effect without cancelling (that is, to cause the effect to be lowered with a delay). Further, for example, instead of the descending effect, a specific irregular effect (for example, emission of a predetermined lamp attached to the rear movable movable body 3110 or output of a predetermined sound from a speaker) may be performed. The rear movable decorative body 3110 may be raised to the retreat position while performing a specific irregular effect.

  Also, for example, instead of the descending effect, a specific irregular operation of the back movable ornamental body 3110 (for example, the back movable movable body 3110 is reciprocated up and down a predetermined number of times with a predetermined amplitude) may be performed. Good. Even if the descent effect is an effect with a high degree of expectation of a big hit, by performing these irregular processes instead of the descent effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. Further, in the first place, in the case where the back movable ornamental body 3110 is not at the retreat position in NO5 to NO9, an effect in which the back movable ornamental body 3110 descends at the start of the fluctuation is executed (a descending effect is executed at the start of the fluctuation. Selection of an effect pattern). In addition, although the selection of the variation pattern is not prohibited (there is a possibility that a down effect is produced), the down effect may not be executed when the variation pattern is selected. By doing in this way, even when the descending effect has not been executed, it is possible to make the player think that the descending effect may have been selected.

  Further, in NO5, a variation pattern in which an effect in which the game ball B enters the starting port while the back movable ornamental body 3110 moves to the appearance position and the back movable ornamental body 3110 descends at the start of the variation is executed. The same applies to the case where is selected.

  Specifically, in this case, for example, simultaneously with entering the ball, the back movable ornament 3110 is once raised to the evacuation position or a predetermined position higher than the maximum descent position of the descent effect, and then the descent effect is performed. Execute. In addition, before the ascent, the back movable decorative body 3110 may be moved to the appearance position once (that is, the effect of lowering is generated with a delay). Further, for example, instead of the descending effect, the rear movable decorative body 3110 may be raised while performing a specific irregular effect. Before the ascent, the movable decorative body 3110 may be moved to the appearance position once. In such a case, the selection of the variation pattern (the effect pattern in which the downward effect is executed at the start of the variation) may be prohibited.

  Also, in NO5 to NO9, when the back movable ornamental body 3110 is located below the retreat position, the game ball B enters the starting port, and at the start of the change, the other movable body (the back movable ornamental body 3110 and the back). It is assumed that a variation pattern in which an effect of moving a movable body different from the back to the movable range of the back movable movable body 3110 is selected at the time of the ball entry. In this case, for example, by moving the rear movable decorative body 3110 to the retracted position first and then moving the other movable body, interference between the movable bodies is avoided. Also, when the rear movable decorative body 3110 is at the appearance position and does not interfere with the rear movable decorative body 3110 at the appearance position even if the other movable body (a movable body different from the rear movable movable body 3110) operates. The other movable body is operated in a state where the back movable ornament 3110 is in the appearance position, and after the other movable body returns to the initial position, the back movable ornament 3110 is moved to the evacuation position. You may. In such a case, the movement of the back movable decoration 3110 to the retracted position and the movement of a movable body different from the back movable decoration 3110 may be performed simultaneously.

  Further, for example, in the variation pattern (effect pattern), the other movable body (a movable body different from the back movable decorative body 3110) may not be operated. At this time, the irregular effect or the irregular operation described above may be executed for the back movable decorative body 3110 or the other movable body. Further, in such a case, selection of a variation pattern (effect pattern) in which an effect in which another movable body moves to the movable range of the back movable ornamental body 3110 at the start of the variation may be executed may be prohibited.

  When the back movable ornament 3110 is at the appearance position, a part of the effect display device 1600 is hidden. Therefore, some players feel that the visual state of the image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not good in NO5 to NO9, and such a player feels that he wants to view the image in a good visual state.

  For such a player, when the game ball B enters the starting port (when the game ball B enters the starting port, the fluctuation starts and these images are displayed (for example, the model demo movie stop shown in FIG. 517 is stopped). The rear movable movable body 3110 may be raised to the retreat position on occasions other than the time) because the time image or the like ends. As a specific opportunity, for example, there is an operation of a predetermined operation unit (for example, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b).

  If the game ball B wins the starting opening while the back movable ornamental body 3110 is moving up to the evacuation position due to a trigger other than that the game ball B enters the starting opening, the back moving is performed. The decorative body 3110 continues the ascent operation, for example, and returns to the retracted position. Further, while the back movable ornament 3110 is moving up to the evacuation position, the game ball B wins the starting port, and the effect pattern determined based on the winning lowers the back movable ornament 3110. In the case of the effect pattern to be performed, the raising operation of the back movable ornamental body 3110 may be continued and returned to the retreat position, and then the back rear movable decorative body 3110 may be lowered. The descent effect may be executed even during the ascent of 3110. Further, when the game ball B wins the starting port in a state where the back movable movable body 3110 has returned to the retracted position due to a trigger other than the game ball B entering the starting port, for example, Maintain the evacuation position.

  Note that the decorative symbol (the symbol whose NO2 decorative symbol is also shown in the stop image of NO9) displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the back movable decorative body 3110 is at the appearance position is, for example, at the end of the change (NO2). May be displayed in a reduced state in comparison with (a symbol indicated by) or may be displayed in the same size. When the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced size, the display size of the decorative symbol is changed, for example, at the start of descent of the back movable decorative body 3110 in NO5, at the end of the descent, or when the fixed symbol NO3 is displayed. . When the decorative design is displayed in a reduced size, it may be displayed in an area that does not overlap the moving range of the back movable decorative body 3110. You may make it overlap.

  Note that, in NO5 to NO9, an example has been described in which the back movable ornamental body 3110 is located in front of the effect display device 1600. However, instead of or in addition to the back rear movable ornament body 3110, another movable body is connected to the effect display device. It may be located on the front of 1600. However, in the case where a plurality of movable bodies are located in front of the effect display device 1600, it is preferable to use a plurality of movable bodies whose positions after movement do not overlap (contact). Further, in NO5 to NO9, since the image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the movable body that makes the image invisible is not moved. In particular, it is desirable not to make the explanation for the player such as the sound volume control telop etc. invisible. Even if the position after the movement is the movable body overlapping the position where such description is displayed, it is once moved to the front of the effect display device 1600 in NO5, and when such a description is displayed, The movable body may be returned to the original position. Further, the position and size of the explanation display for the player such as the sound volume control telop and the like may be changed according to the position of the movable body.

[13-2. Another example of volume adjustment method]
Hereinafter, another example of the volume adjustment method will be described. FIG. 518 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a screen transition of volume adjustment. (A) is a state in which the decorative symbol determined after the fluctuation is stopped is stopped, that is, a state of NO3 in FIG. 517. (B) is a state in which the loop image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, that is, a state of NO4-1 in FIG. 517.

  (C) is a state in which the loop image and the character selection telop are displayed on the effect display device 1600. It differs from NO4-2 in FIG. 517 in that the sound volume control telop is not displayed. When the user presses the center pressing operation unit 303a in the state of (C), the screen changes to a character selection screen. In the example of FIG. 518, the volume adjustment (adjustment and setting of output sounds output from various speakers) is performed only after passing through the character selection screen. This is different from the example of FIG.

  (D) is a state in which the character selection screen is displayed on the effect display device 1600 due to the pressing of the center pressing operation unit 303a in the state of (C). A character can be selected by rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and the selected character can be determined by pressing the center pressing operation unit 303a.

  Note that the character selected here appears on the effect display device 1600 during a predetermined effect, and performs a predetermined line effect or performs a predetermined operation. In other words, the later presentation mode changes depending on the selected character. Further, the effect contents (for example, the above-mentioned dialogue and movement) when the character appears differ depending on the selected character. In addition, for example, the volume of dialogue at the time of production differs for each character. Also, for example, the BGM differs depending on the selected character.

  (E) is a state in which the character is determined by pressing the center pressing operation unit 303a in the state of (D). When the character is determined, for example, a line by the character is output from the speaker. The dialogue is output, for example, at the same volume as the dialogue effect of the character performed during a change or the like.

  For example, many players feel that the speech effect by the character A is noisy even at a volume of 3 (5 levels of volume (1 is the minimum volume and 5 is the maximum volume)). Many players feel. As described above, the volume can be adjusted after the character's dialogue when the character is determined is actually heard, so that the player can select an appropriate volume for himself.

  (F) is a state after the character is selected. After the character is selected, the character selection screen is erased, and a display different from the volume control screen, such as the above-described loop image, is displayed. The reason why such a screen is displayed before the state in which the screen can be shifted to the volume control screen is to prevent the volume control from being merely a task for the player.

  Specifically, for example, it is assumed that a character A with a large sound of a line effect is selected on the character selection screen. At this time, if the screen shifts to the volume control screen immediately after the character A is determined, the player simply performs the operation of reducing the volume without any consideration. On the other hand, once a display different from the volume control as described above is displayed, the player loses consciousness of the character selected by himself, and some players forget the character selected by themselves before the volume control can be performed. I have. In order to reduce the volume while the player remembers the selection of the character A, when the words of the character A appear thereafter, the player reconfirms that the selected character was the character A, thereby providing a sense of security. And rejoice.

  In (G), a loop image, a character selection telop, and a volume light amount adjustment telop are displayed on the effect display device 1600. (H) is a state in which the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the state of (G), and the screen shifts to a volume light amount adjustment screen. By rotating the rotation operation unit 302, the volume changes, and by pressing the center pressing operation unit 303a, the screen shifts to the light amount adjustment screen. Although not shown, in the light amount adjustment screen, the light amount is changed by rotating the rotary operation unit 302, and the screen shifts to the volume adjustment screen by pressing the center pressing operation unit 303a.

  (I) is a state in which the loop image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 again. For example, in the volume control screen or the light control screen, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the last operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the center pressing operation unit 303a, the state returns to the state in which the loop image is displayed.

  When the fluctuation starts in a state where the volume adjustment screen is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the volume adjustment can be continuously performed, and the image for performing the volume adjustment displays the visibility of the effect during the fluctuation. The display can be continuously performed in a mode that does not significantly hinder the display. Thus, the sound volume can be adjusted while confirming the actual sound volume during the fluctuation.

  Although the example in which it is not possible to shift to the volume light amount adjustment screen without passing through the character selection screen has been described, in addition to or instead of passing through the character selection screen, when the specific condition is not satisfied, the screen shifts to the volume light amount adjustment screen. It may not be possible. The specific conditions include, for example, the entry of the game ball B into a general winning opening where a prize ball is obtained at the time of entry, the passage of a predetermined time, or the like (or a combination thereof).

  Note that the predetermined time may be longer or shorter depending on, for example, the operation state of the operation means that can be operated by the player. Further, when the volume (output sound) satisfies a condition that can be changed, the volume (output sound) may be changeable without going through the character selection screen. The changed volume (output sound) may end at the end of the specified number of changes. Note that, in a specific effect that is changing, the effect may proceed at a volume (output sound) unique to the specific effect, instead of the selected volume (output sound). Further, after a character is selected and before shifting to the volume control screen, a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit, so that the number of volume patterns selectable on the volume control screen may be increased ( For example, when the predetermined operation is not performed, five levels of volume (output sound) can be selected, but by performing the predetermined operation, ten levels of volume (output sound) can be selected. etc).

[14. Directed production]
Hereinafter, the rising effect will be described. The rising effect is one of the effects executed during the SP reach (a special effect, and the SP reach described below also corresponds to the special effect). SP reach is a reach effect that is more likely to be selected in a jackpot change and less likely to be selected in a loss change compared to a normal reach effect. That is, SP reach is a reach production with a high degree of expectation of a big hit as compared with a normal reach production. In the start-up effect, a display indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and when a word “Karakara no” to be described later is displayed, the effect display device 1600 is displayed after the words are displayed. The jackpot expectation degree displayed in is raised.

  FIG. 519 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a rising effect. (A) is a state in which a rising effect has started during SP reach. The effect display device 1600 displays, for example, an image of the center pressing operation unit 303a in a blurred state. Subsequently, in (B), the background color of the image of the center pressing operation unit 303a in the effect display device 1600 changes. The background color after the change is blue or red. In addition, it is assumed that the higher the degree of expectation of the change, the more easily red is selected as the background color after the change from blue.

  Subsequently, in (C), the words "Karakara no ~" are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the image and the background color of the center pressing operation unit 303a are deleted. Note that the image and the background color of the center pressing operation unit 303a may be continuously displayed in (C). When the dialogue is displayed, the jackpot expectation is raised thereafter. Subsequently, in (D), the dialogue is deleted from the effect display device 1600, and the image of the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed again in a blurred state. For example, the background color of the image of the center pressing operation unit 303a is promoted from blue to red at the timing when the dialogue is deleted from the effect display device 1600.

  Subsequently, in (E), the blurred image and the background color of the center pressing operation unit 303a are erased, and the large image (red large push display) of the red center pressing operation unit 303a is clearly displayed in the effect display device. Displayed at 1600, the user is prompted to press the center pressing operation unit 303a. The images of the center pressing operation unit 303a displayed at this point include, for example, a small blue image (blue small push display), a large blue image (large blue push display), and a large red image (large red image). Push display) and a large rainbow image (rainbow large push display). It is assumed that the big hit expectation increases in the order of the blue small push display, the blue large push display, the red large push display, and the rainbow large push display, and the rainbow large push display is selected only by the big hit fluctuation.

  In the state (E), the center pressing operation unit 303a is in the operation valid state, and when the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation valid state, it is notified whether the fluctuation during execution is a big hit fluctuation or a non-performing fluctuation. Is done. In (F), it is announced that the fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation.

  Note that the effect from the time when the blurred image of the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed in (A) to the time immediately before the clear image of the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed in FIG. The effect from when the clear image of the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed until the display of the image ends is also called a button display effect.

  FIG. 520 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the rising effect. In the example of FIG. 519, the words “Kara-no-” are displayed in the fanning effect, and the background color in the fanning effect is promoted. However, in the example of FIG. Is displayed, and the button image in the button display effect is promoted.

  (A) and (B) are the same as FIG. 519 (A) and (B), respectively, and thus description thereof is omitted. Subsequently, in (C), the blurred image and the background color of the center pressing operation unit 303a are deleted, and the large blue push image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a clear state, and the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed. You are urged to do so.

  Next, in (D), the effect display device 1600 displays a line “Karakara no ~” so as to overlap the image of the center pressing operation unit 303a. Note that, in (D), the image of the center pressing operation unit 303a and the display urging the pressing may be deleted in order to concentrate the player's consciousness on the line “Karakara no”. Subsequently, in (E), the words “Karakara no” are deleted from the effect display device 1600, and the blue large push image is promoted to the red large push image at the timing when the words are deleted. . (F) is similar to FIG. 519 (F), and therefore, description thereof is omitted.

  In the case where the promotion effect is performed during the button display effect, the operation of the center press operation unit 303a is effective during the period from when the image of the center press operation unit 303a is displayed in the button display effect to when the promotion effect appears. Or may be invalid. Since the operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is effective during the period, a player who wants to know the winning result quickly can be satisfied. In addition, since the operation of the center press operation unit 303a is invalid during the period, the player who wants to enjoy the effect to the end can be satisfied, and the image of the center press operation unit 303a is displayed. If the operation is invalid, it is determined that the promotion effect is performed, and the player can feel a sense of elation.

  In this way, if the operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed in spite of the fact that the image of the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed, the promotion of the promotion effect is not determined. Regardless of whether or not the promotion effect is performed during the effect, the operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a may be enabled for a predetermined time after the start of the button display effect.

  In addition, in the rising effect, there may be a pattern in which the fanning effect is not executed and only the button display effect is executed. The type of image of the central pressing operation unit 303a that can be displayed in the button display effect may be different between a case where the fanning effect is executed and a case where only the button display effect is executed without executing the fanning effect. .

  Specifically, for example, in the pattern in which the swaying effect is executed, only the blue large push, the red large push, and the rainbow large push can be displayed in the button display effect, but in the pattern in which the swaying effect is not executed, Suppose a small push, a large blue push, a large red push, and a rainbow large push can be displayed. As a result, the pattern in which the fanning effect is executed has higher jackpot expectation than the pattern in which the fanning effect is not executed.

  In such a case, it is desirable that the pattern in which the fanning effect is executed has a higher appearance frequency than the pattern in which only the button displaying effect is executed without executing the fanning effect. As described above, the pattern in which the fanning effect is executed has higher jackpot expectation. Also, for example, in a pattern in which the fanning effect is not executed, BGM flows in the button display effect, but in a pattern in which the fanning effect is executed, the BGM is played in the fanning effect, but the BGM is stopped in the button display effect and no sound is generated. It is desirable to be in a state. This makes it possible to produce a sense of tension in the button display effect in a pattern in which the fantastic effect with a high jackpot expectation is executed.

  Also, for example, a pattern in which a flirting effect is executed only when the change is a big hit change, and when the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed during the effective period of the center pressing operation unit 303a in the button display effect. A pattern in which an effect in which the vibration speaker 354 vibrates is executed may be executed.

  FIG. 521 is a timing chart illustrating an example of timing at which a promotion effect in a rising effect is performed. The promotion effect can be executed, for example, at any of timings 1 to 7 shown in FIG. Timing 1 is immediately after the start of the stir-up effect (for example, the timing of FIG. 519 (A) or the timing immediately after the start of (B)). At the timing 1, the player cannot recognize or slightly recognizes the first background color in the fanning effect. Therefore, when the promotion effect is performed at the timing 1, the player with a low recognition of the background color is Can give a sense of surprise.

  Timing 2 is a timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the stir effect (for example, the timing of FIG. 519 (C)). At timing 2, the player is completely recognizable of the first background color in the fanning effect, so if the background color is blue, for example, the player is discouraged, but the promotion effect is performed at timing 2. This can eliminate this disappointment.

  Timing 3 is simultaneous with the start of the button display effect (for example, the timing at the start of FIG. 520 (C)). In the example of FIG. 521, it is assumed that the effective period of the center pressing operation unit 303a ends at the same time as the end of the button display effect.

  At the timing 3, the player cannot recognize the type of the image of the center pressing operation unit 303 a displayed in the button display effect, so that when the promotion effect is performed at the timing 3, the player is given a sense of surprise. Can be. Further, when the promotion effect is performed at the timing 3, the player does not recognize the type of the image of the center pressing operation unit 303a yet, but at least the image (blue small push) having the lowest expectation of the big hit is obtained. Since it is determined that there is no such feeling, it is possible to obtain a feeling of excitement.

  Timing 4 is immediately after the start of the button display effect (for example, immediately after the start of FIG. 520 (C)). The timing 4 is, for example, a timing at which the player can operate the center pressing operation unit 303a, but is difficult, for example, 0.008 seconds after the start of the button display effect. At the timing 4, since the recognition of the type of the image of the center press operation unit 303a displayed in the button display effect is weak, when the promotion effect occurs, the player can be given a sense of surprise.

  Further, for the player who knows that the promotion effect can occur at the timing 4, for example, before the start of the button display effect, the valid period is started by repeatedly hitting the center pressing operation unit 303a or the like. Therefore, it is possible to provide another game characteristic that the pressing operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a can be performed before the promotion effect.

  The timing 5 is a timing after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the button display effect (however, the first half of the effective period of the center pressing operation unit 303a). At timing 5, since the player has completely recognized the type of the image of the center pressing operation unit 303a, for example, if the image is a small blue push, the player is discouraged. Is performed, this disappointment can be eliminated.

  The timing 6 is a timing after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the button display effect (however, the latter half of the effective period of the center pressing operation unit 303a). At timing 6, since a considerable time has elapsed since the image of the center pressing operation unit 303a was displayed, the promotion effect can be shown to the player who has given up the appearance of the promotion effect halfway. Therefore, a sense of surprise can be provided.

  Timing 7 is immediately before the end of the button display effect. By executing the promotion effect at timing 7, for example, even if the pressing of the center pressing operation unit 303a is prompted, a promotion effect can be shown to a player who does not intend to operate the center pressing operation unit 303a. . Also, for example, if the effective period of the center pressing operation unit 303a does not start until the promotion effect occurs even after the button display effect starts, the promotion effect is executed at the timing 6 or the timing 7 to freeze. An effect like an effect can be realized, and the player can have a strong sense of expectation.

  In the case where the promotion effect is executed after the start of the button display effect, the pressing of the center pressing operation unit 303a may be used as a trigger for executing the promotion effect. Specifically, for example, from the start of the button display effect to the timing of the promotion effect (for example, any one of timings 4 to 7), the image of the center press operation unit 303a is displayed, but the operation of the center press operation unit 303a is invalid. It is said. Then, at the timing of the promotion effect, the valid period of the operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a starts.

  If the center press operation unit 303a is pressed during the validity period, a promotion effect occurs, and the operation is invalidated during the promotion effect. Then, the button image after the promotion is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the operation validity period starts again. When the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed during the operation valid period, a result of the change is notified.

  Further, for example, although the valid period of the center press operation unit 303a starts at the start of the button display effect, the center press operation is performed from the start of the button display effect to the timing of the promotion effect (for example, any of timings 4 to 7). When the operation unit 303a is pressed, a promotion effect may occur. Thereafter, when the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed during the valid period after the button image after the promotion is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the result of the fluctuation is notified. It is desirable that the pattern in which the promotion effect is performed after the start of the button display effect is selected only when the big hit changes (that is, the pattern in which the big hit is determined). Assuming that the pattern is selected in the out-of-place variation, the player operates the center pressing operation unit 303a in the expectation that a hit result will be announced by a button effect, but the player unexpectedly develops (a big hit or not). This is because there is a possibility that the watermark may be used as a watermark when the development is not notified.

  Further, for example, although the valid period of the center press operation unit 303a starts at the start of the button display effect, the center press operation is performed from the start of the button display effect to the timing of the promotion effect (for example, any of timings 4 to 7). When the operation unit 303a is pressed, an effect that expects the occurrence of an enhanced effect (for example, a dialogue effect such as “Don't be impatient! It will be promoted sooner!”) May be executed. In such a case, the promotion effect is not performed at the timing when the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed as described above, but is performed at a predetermined promotion timing.

  In addition, for example, when the promotion effect occurs after the start of the button display effect, immediately after the word “Kara-no-” is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the fanning effect is executed once again after the promotion, and thereafter, The button display effect may be executed again. In this case, the promotion target in the promotion effect may be the background color that appeared in the previous fanning effect, the image of the center pressing operation unit 303a in the button display effect, or both. Good.

  More specifically, for example, if the fanning effect ends with a blue background and `` Karakara no ~ '' is displayed after the blue small push display is displayed in the button display effect, then it is promoted to a red background A flurry effect may be performed, and a button display effect in which a blue small push display is displayed may be performed. Also, specifically, for example, if the fanning effect ends with a blue background, and `` Kara-no- ~ '' is displayed after the small blue push display is displayed in the button display effect, then the blue background May be performed again, and a button display effect in which a red large push display is displayed may be performed.

  Further, in the above-described example, an example has been described in which the promotion effect is performed by only one of the fanning effect and the button display effect, but the promotion effect may be performed by both. In addition, a plurality of promotion effects may be executed within one fanning effect and one button display effect. Although the example in which the background color is changed as a flirting effect has been described, in addition to the background color, a shape that is displayed before the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed and overlaps an area where the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed. There is no need to be concerned with the background color, such as by changing the color of the effect (light gathering effect, etc.) displayed with.

[15. Hold notice production]
[15-1. Preliminary notice effect by change of reserved color]
In the present embodiment, the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the hold number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310. However, the display mode of the hold display until the hold display is exhausted. Is changed, it is possible to execute a hold announcement effect indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit for a change display of a decorative symbol (a change display of a special symbol) based on the hold display. Also, during the display period of the hold display, a hold change effect indicating that the display mode of the hold display may change can be executed.

  Specifically, the main control board 1310 transmits a reserved number designation command and a pre-judgment command based on the winning of a game ball in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (start condition is satisfied). . When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the hold number designation command and the preliminary determination command in the command analysis processing of step S601, the hold notice determination table corresponding to those commands, that is, the hold number specified from the hold number designation command (Holding storage number) and a holding advance notice determination table corresponding to the advance judgment information (one of a big hit, a small hit, a reach loss, a loss) specified from the prior judgment command, and the judgment set in the hold advance notice determination table By comparing the value with the read random number for determining the pending notice, the type of the pending notice pattern set in the pending notice determination table is determined.

  In the suspension notice determination table, the distribution of the determination value for each suspension notice pattern differs for each of the preliminary determination information (any of a big hit, a small hit, a reach loss, and a loss) specified from the preliminary determination command, and The appearance rate of the notice pattern is different.

  Further, when a game ball is won in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (start condition is satisfied), the number of holds (the number of stored memories) specified from the number-of-holds designation command is increased, and the effect is displayed. One hold display is additionally displayed on the device 1600. On the other hand, when the variable display (variable display of the special symbol) based on the hold display is started (the start condition is satisfied), the number of holds (the number of stored memories) specified from the hold number designation command decreases. , Deletes the hold display on the effect display device 1600. Then, during the display period from when the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 until the hold display is erased, the display mode of the hold display is displayed based on the hold advance notice pattern, Each time a variable display of a decorative symbol (variable display of a special symbol) based on another hold display is started (start condition is satisfied), the display mode of the hold display can be changed.

  In this embodiment, at the time when the decoration display based on the hold display (variable display of the special symbol) is started (start condition is satisfied), the hold display is deleted. After the start of the variable display (variable display of the special symbol), the display of the suspension may be continuously displayed, and the display mode of the suspension display may be changeable. In such a case, the position at which the suspended display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 moves before and after the start of the decorative display based on the suspended display (variable display of the special symbol), similarly to other suspended displays. The execution of the hold change effect may indicate that the display mode of the hold display may change.

  Next, a hold color determination table in which a plurality of types of hold color patterns are set for each hold number (hold hold number) specified from the hold number designation command will be described with reference to FIGS. 522, 523, and 524. I do. The reservation notice determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 522 (A) is a hold color determination table used when the game ball B wins the starting port without holding and during the non-change execution. FIG. 522 (B) is a hold color determination table used when the game ball B wins the starting port without holding and during the change execution. FIG. 523 (C) is a reserved color determination table used when the game ball B wins the starting opening with one reserved. FIG. 524 (D) is a hold color determination table used when the game ball B wins the starting opening in a state where there are two holds. FIG. 524 (E) is a hold color determination table used when the game ball B wins the starting opening in a state where there are three holds. Note that it is not necessary to use a pre-determination command to determine a reserved color without suspension and during non-change execution.

  The reserved color determination table defines a pattern indicating a reserved color at a timing at which the reserved color can be changed, a distribution in a hit variation of the pattern, and a distribution in a loss variation. Note that the start of the change 1 is the time when the change is started in a state where the hold of the color change target by the pattern is the first hold (that is, the change corresponding to the hold is executed in the next change). It is. Similarly, the start of the change of the hold 2 means that the change has started in a state where the hold of the color change target by the pattern is the second hold (that is, the change corresponding to the hold is executed in the next successive change). It is time. Similarly, the start of the change of the hold 3 means that the hold of the color change target by the pattern is the third hold (that is, the change corresponding to the hold is executed three times ahead of the change). It is when it started.

  The peripheral control MPU changes the reserved color at each timing according to the color indicated by the pattern. The distribution in the reserved color determination table is determined in advance so that the big hit expectation increases in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow colors. The distribution of the rainbow color is determined in advance so that it is selected only when the big hit changes.

  Note that, in each pattern of the reserved color determination table, a change to a reserved color having a low jackpot expectation is not performed. Specifically, for example, after the reserved color turns blue, it does not return to white. This is because if there is a possibility of changing to the reserved color having a low jackpot expectation, even if the reserved color becomes a color having a high expectation, the player cannot obtain a sense of expectation.

  The reserved color determination table has a pattern in which a plurality of levels of color promotion are executed. Specifically, for example, there is a pattern in which the reserved color is changed from white to red, to skip blue and green. Due to the existence of such a pattern, for example, at the final timing of the reserved color change, even if the color remains white, there is still a possibility that the color changes to a color having a high jackpot expectation at a stretch. Expectations can be maintained to the end.

  Further, for example, the reserved color of blue or more may be selected only in the reach variation, or the reserved color of red or more may be selected only in the variation in which the SP reach is executed. Further, when a change is suspended in a state where a jackpot variation is included in the variation being executed or suspended, the peripheral control MPU forcibly changes all the reserved color change patterns for the variation to white (that is, (A standard color).

  FIG. 525 is an example of a fluctuating reserved color determination table. During the execution of the fluctuation, the pending color determination table includes a pattern indicating the reserved color at a timing at which the pending color can be changed, a distribution of a hit variation of the pattern, a distribution of a loss variation, a variation of the variation pattern, and a variation pattern. Defined for each hold color at start. That is, the peripheral control MPU determines the pending color change pattern during the change according to the reserved color at the start of the change, the change pattern of the change, and whether the change is the hit change or the out-of-change.

  In the example of FIG. 525, three promotion timings are defined for each variation pattern, but the number of promotion timings may be different for each variation pattern. Further, the promotion timing itself may be different for each variation pattern. For example, in the executed fluctuation pattern in which the SP reach is changed, the promotion timing includes, for example, when the reach is established, when the SP reach is developed, and when the latter half of the SP reach is started. Note that the big hit expectation and the change pattern of each reserved color are the same as in the reserved color determination table.

  FIG. 526 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a hold announcement effect due to a change in hold color. (A) is a state where the fluctuation is not suspended and the fluctuation is being performed. (B) is a state in which the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 in a state where the fluctuation is performed. In (B), the reserved color determination table shown in FIG. 522 (B) is referred to, and the reserved color at the time of winning and the start of change is determined to be green.

  (C) is a state in which the fluctuation in (B) has been completed. (D) is a state where the fluctuation corresponding to the green suspension has started. (E) is a state where it has developed to reach in the fluctuation. In (E), the reservation remains green. (F) is a state in which it has developed into SP reach due to the fluctuation. In (F), the reservation remains green. (G) is a state in which the latter half of the SP reach has started in the fluctuation. At the beginning of the second half of the SP Reach, the hold turned red.

[15-2. Preliminary notice production due to gacha coin change]
Up to now, the suspension notice effect by the suspension color change has been described. Hereinafter, a hold announcement effect caused by a change in the hold displayed as a gacha coin will be described. In the hold announcement effect, for example, when a prize is won, the hold is displayed in the form of coins (hereinafter referred to as “gacha coins”), and at the timing when the hold moves, the number of coins increases or a coin different from the normal form (hereinafter referred to as a coin). , Called rare gacha coins).

  Then, for example, at the start of the change corresponding to the suspension, the effect display device 1600 executes the same number of gacha gacha as the number of gacha coins and rare gacha coins, and acquires the same number of suspended displays. Then, the hold display indicating the change currently being executed is changed to the hold display of the color with the highest expectation of big hit among the obtained hold displays. It is to be noted that the display is not limited to the change of the hold display to the color having the highest jackpot expectation, but may be changed to any of the hold displays displayed. It should be noted that although the hold of the gacha coin or the rare gacha coin is displayed, the hold of the gacha coin or the rare gacha coin may be displayed without performing the gacha gacha at the start of the change corresponding to the hold.

  The gacha coin hold determination table in which a plurality of types of gacha coin hold patterns are set for each number of holds (number of hold storages) specified from the hold number designation command will be described with reference to FIGS. 527, 528, and 529. . The gacha coin hold determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 527 (A) is a gacha coin holding determination table used when the game ball B wins the starting port without holding and with no change. FIG. 527 (B) is a gacha coin holding determination table used when the game ball B wins the starting opening without holding and during the execution of the change. FIG. 528 (C) is a gacha coin hold determination table used when the game ball B wins the starting opening with one hold. FIG. 529 (D) is a gacha coin holding determination table used when the game ball B wins the starting opening with two holdings. FIG. 529 (E) is a gacha coin holding determination table used when the game ball B wins the starting opening with three holdings. It should be noted that it is not necessary to use a pre-judgment command to determine whether or not to hold a gacha coin without holding and during non-change execution.

  In the gacha coin holding determination table, similarly to the holding color determination table, a pattern indicating the type and the number of gacha coins at the timing at which the holding color can be changed, sorting in hit variation of the pattern, sorting in loss variation, Is defined.

  The peripheral control MPU changes the type and number of gacha coins at each timing according to the type and number of gacha coins indicated by the pattern. Note that the distribution in the gacha coin holding determination table is determined in advance so that the expectation of a big hit increases in the order of one gacha coin, three gacha coins, five gacha coins, one rare gacha coin, and five rare gacha coins. Have been. In addition, even the five rare gacha coins with the highest expectation of big hits may be selected based on the change in the loss.

  Note that, similarly to the reserved color determination table, in each pattern of the gacha coin retention determination table, a change to a gacha coin having a low jackpot expectation is not performed. In addition, like the reserved color determination table, the gacha coin determination table has a pattern in which a plurality of stages of gacha coin promotion are executed. In addition, when the fluctuation is suspended in the state in which the jackpot fluctuation is included in the fluctuation being executed or suspended, the peripheral control MPU forcibly displays the normal white suspension instead of the gacha coin suspension. You may make it.

  In the illustrated gacha coin holding determination table, when gacha coin holding is displayed, it is assumed that gacha coins are always displayed from the time of winning, for example, a normal white holding is displayed at the time of winning. Alternatively, there may be a pattern in which the hold changes to a gacha hold by the start of the change corresponding to the hold. However, it is desirable that there is no pattern that changes to a gacha coin after the reserved color is promoted to blue or higher. This is because there is a possibility that the sense of expectation of the reserved color being promoted may be reduced.

  FIG. 530 is an example of a gacha coin reserved color correspondence table. In the gacha coin hold color correspondence table, the correspondence between the type and number of gacha coins at the start of the change and the hold color with the highest expectation of big hits among the hold displays obtained by the gacha at the start of the change, and the big hit change and deviation And the distribution for which the corresponding action is selected for each change.

  The gacha-coin reserved color correspondence table is set so that a gacha-coin-based gacha-gacha is executed, but a situation where only a white reserved display can be obtained does not occur. This is because if such a situation occurs, the player cannot obtain a sense of expectation for the effect in which the jumble is performed.

Note that “coin” in the hold color column indicates that the hold is not executed and the hold is changed while displaying the gacha coin or the rare gacha coin. In the gacha coin holding determination table, the jackpot expectation degree when no gacha gacha is executed is set to be low. However, as shown in FIG. 530, the gacha gacha is executed when five rare gacha coins are in the mode of the highest jackpot expectation. If not, the jackpot may be set to be determined.
Further, the gacha coin holding color correspondence table may not include a pattern in which gacha gacha is not executed. In other words, in this case, when a hold display of a gacha coin or a rare gacha coin appears, the display always changes to a hold display having a big hit expectation higher than the blue hold.

  In addition, with regard to the jackpot fluctuation, the allocation to the “coins” indicating that the fluctuation is executed with the display of the gacha coin or the rare gacha coin being held without performing the gacha gacha is performed with one gacha coin and three gacha coins. The number of coins, five gacha coins, one rare gacha coin, and five rare gacha coins is set lower than the rate at which the display changes to a colored hold display (in the case of one coin, 32 / The coin remains at 128 but changes to some color at 96/128). This is because the expectation is generally higher when the display is changed to the colored hold display, so that it is possible to minimize the termination of the coin.

  In addition, according to the distribution indicated by the gacha coin reserved color correspondence table, the reserved color having the highest expectation of a big hit is determined for a plurality of reserved displays acquired using a plurality of gacha coins or rare gacha coins. The colors of the hold display other than the hold color with high expectation are determined, for example, at random.

  Specifically, for example, if three coins have been acquired and it is determined that red is to be displayed as the reserved color, the reserved color indicated by the remaining two coins is expected to exceed red. Is determined randomly from among “coins”, “blue”, “green”, and “red” excluding the rainbow color having Also, instead of being random, for example, "blue", "green", and "red" are in pattern 1, "green", "green", and "red" are in pattern 2, and "blue", "red", and "red" are in pattern 3. A plurality of patterns may be provided for each of the number of coins and the final color, and the pattern may be determined from the patterns. If the reserved color with the highest jackpot expectation is not determined (when any of the displayed reserved colors is determined), for example, the pattern 2 is more likely to be promoted to red than the pattern 1. It is good to set.

  In the gacha coin reserved color correspondence table, colors of all reserved displays acquired by a plurality of gacha coins or rare gacha coins may be defined. In this case, even if the hold color with the highest jackpot expectation is the same, the distribution should be set such that the larger the number of hold displays having the hold color, the higher the jackpot expectation is (specifically, For example, using three gacha coins, a hold display of “red, blue, white” is obtained, and a hold display of “red, red, red” is obtained rather than when the hold display changes to red. If the hold display changes to red, the jackpot expectation is higher.)

  Note that the change pattern of the hold display in the change after the change to the normal hold display with a color at the start of the change by the gacha coin or the rare gacha coin is determined using the change color determination table in FIG. 525. In other words, even if it is a gacha-coin suspension notice, after the display is changed to the colored normal suspension display, the suspension change pattern by the suspension color is used as in the case where the suspension color change announcement is continued. However, with respect to each pattern of the pending color determination table during the change of FIG. 525, even if the distribution at the time of the big hit change and the distribution at the time of the loss change are different between when passing through the gacha coin reservation notice and when not passing through. Good.

  In the example described above, the effect that the gacha coin is changed to the hold color display by the gacha is performed at the start of the change of the hold corresponding to the gacha coin, but the effect is performed at another timing after the start of the change. Is also good. The timing includes, for example, immediately before reaching, immediately after reaching, and when SP reach is developed when SP reach is executed. However, for example, when an image prompting the operation of the specific operation unit is displayed during the reach effect and an effect prompting the operation of the operation unit is executed, the last timing is before the start of the display of the image. Is desirable.

  For example, if the final hold color is the same, the hold color is set so that the big hit expectation is higher when passing through the gacha coin hold notice than when not passing through the gacha coin hold notice. It is desirable that sorting be set in the determination table, the gacha coin holding color correspondence table, and the like.

  In the above-mentioned example, the number of stages of gacha coin holding (5 stages of 1 gacha coin, 3 gacha coins, 5 gacha coins, 1 rare gacha coin, 5 rare gacha coins) and the number of stages of the reserved color (5 levels of white, blue, green, red and iridescent) are the same, but may be different. When the number of stages is different, it is desirable that the number of stages of gacha coin holding be larger. Since the gacha coin holding also eventually changes to the holding of the colored display, the player recognizes the final expectation degree of the big hit by the holding of the colored display. That is, if the number of stages of the reserved colors is large, it is difficult for the player to grasp the final expected jackpot degree unless the player remembers the order of the jackpot expected degrees of all the colors.

  Although not shown, in the peripheral control ROM, for example, as a hold at the time of winning, a sort in which a gacha coin hold display is selected, and a sort in which a normal hold display (colored hold including white) is selected. And a table defined for each variation pattern. The peripheral control MPU refers to the table, selects the gacha coin hold display or the normal hold display, and, depending on the selected display mode, refers to the gacha coin hold color correspondence table or the hold color determination table and changes the hold change. Determine the pattern.

  The jackpot expectation degree when the gacha coin hold display is selected is generally set higher than the jackpot expectation degree when the normal hold display is selected, but the gacha coin hold (gacha coin hold) having the lowest jackpot expectation degree is set. It is assumed that the highest hold (red) that can be selected even when the normal hold display is out of the range (one coin) has a higher jackpot expectation.

  FIG. 531 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a gacha-coin hold notice effect. (A) is a state where the fluctuation is not suspended and the fluctuation is being performed. (B) is a state in which the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 in a state where the fluctuation is performed. In (B), the gacha coin holding determination table of FIG. 527 (B) is referred to, and the holding display at the time of winning is determined to be “1 gacha coin” and the holding display at the start of the change is set to “3 gacha coins”. 530 is a diagram when red is determined as the reserved color in FIG. 530. FIG.

  (C) is a state in which the fluctuation in (B) has been completed. (D) is a state in which the change corresponding to the hold changed to the gacha coin has started. At the start of the change, the hold display of “1 gacha coin” is changed to “3 gacha coins”. (E) is a state in which three gacha coins are used to perform the gacha gacha effect three times. The gacha coin reserved color correspondence table is referred to, and the reserved color having the highest expectation of big hit is determined to be green. Therefore, in (E), among the three reserved displays acquired in the jerky production, the one with the highest jackpot expectation is green.

  (F) is a state following the fluctuation. The hold display corresponding to the change has changed to green with the highest jackpot expectation among the three hold displays obtained in the jerky production. (G) is a state where it has developed into reach in the fluctuation. In (G), the reservation remains green. (H) is a state in which it has developed into SP reach due to the fluctuation. In (H), the reservation remains green. (I) is a state in which the latter half of SP reach has started in the fluctuation. At the beginning of the second half of the SP Reach, the hold turned red.

  Since the manner of change of the hold display after the gacha coin hold notice is changed to the normal hold display (colored hold display including white) is the same as that without passing through the gacha coin hold notice, (G), (H) ) And (I) are the same as FIGS. 526 (E), (F) and (G), respectively. In addition, in addition to the above, for example, the three reserved displays acquired in the gacha-gacha effect are “blue”, “green”, and “red”, and are changed from the state of FIG. 531 (F) to a red display, and FIG. 531 (G) The timing at which the color is promoted, such as indicating the final color before the start of reach shown in FIG.

[16. Reach Collapse Simulated Series]
Hereinafter, the reach collapse pseudo continuous production will be described. First, the pseudo continuous effect will be described. The pseudo continuous effect is an effect of performing an operation of changing the decorative symbol and terminating the change of the decorative symbol a plurality of times during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. . “Ending the change of the decorative pattern” means, for example, a mode in which a part or all of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, a mode in which the player recognizes that the change in the decorative pattern has ended once, and a mode in which the decorative pattern is changed. There is a mode in which the pseudo-sequence symbol (a symbol in which the pseudo-sequence is determined if this symbol stops) is partially stopped. The pseudo continuous production in which the operation is performed N times (N is a natural number of 1 or more) is referred to as N consecutive pseudo continuous productions, and the variation of the Mth decorative pattern (M is 1 or more N The following natural number) is referred to as an M-th series pseudo continuous effect.

  In addition, during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display, the operation is actually executed again while suggesting to the player that the operation may be executed again. An effect that is not performed is referred to as a “pseudo-gase effect”. In addition, there is a pseudo-gase effect in which two consecutive pseudo-consecutive effects are executed, but the third consecutive pseudo-consecutive effect is not executed while suggesting the execution of the third consecutive pseudo-consecutive effect. Hereinafter, the pseudo continuous production is simply referred to as “pseudo continuous production” or “pseudo continuous production”.

  The pseudo continuous effect is generated or continued, that is, the operation of changing the decorative symbol and terminating the change of the decorative symbol is performed again during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. When it is determined that the pattern is to be performed, the peripheral control MPU may stop the pseudo continuous symbol on at least one of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol. In the following example, the peripheral control MPU stops characters such as "continue!" Note that, for example, a combination of specific decorative symbols (for example, all of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are odd or even and no reach occurs) may be used as the pseudo continuous symbol.

  The presence or absence of the execution of the pseudo run and the number of pseudo runs in the case where the pseudo run is executed in each variation are defined in the variation pattern. Further, the selectivity of the variation pattern in the variation pattern table is determined such that the greater the number of pseudo runs, the greater the degree of expectation of a big hit.

  FIG. 532 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of reach collapse pseudo continuous production. FIG. 532 (A) shows a state where the fluctuation has started. Subsequently, in (B), the left decorative symbol is stopped, and the right decorative symbol is the same symbol as the left decorative symbol, and is about to stop in a swinging manner (approaching the reach state). In (C), the decorative symbol maintains the state of (B), and an image prompting to press the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  (D) is a state immediately after the center pressing operation part 303a is pressed in (C). The display (“× 2!”) Indicating that the decorative symbol that is about to reach the state starts to change again and the second pseudo-series has started is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Subsequently, in (E), the left decorative symbol is stopped again, and the right decorative symbol is the same symbol as the left decorative symbol, for example, being stopped in a swinging manner. Further, a display (“× 2”) indicating that the second pseudo run is currently being executed is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (F), the decorative symbol maintains the state of (E), and an image prompting to press the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  It is assumed that the same effect is repeated and a fourth pseudo-run is performed. In (G), the decorative symbol maintains the state of (E), and an image prompting to press the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A display (“× 4”) indicating that the fourth pseudo series is currently being executed is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  (H) is a state in which, although the center pressing operation part 303a is pressed in (G), the reach has been formed without the decorative pattern which has been approaching the reach state collapsed. The reach state is formed by the even number of decorative symbols. In addition, it is assumed that the expected value of the payout obtained by the big hit is larger in the order of the even pattern, the odd pattern other than 7, and the 7 decorative pattern. A display (“× 4”) indicating that the fourth pseudo series is currently being executed is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Note that it has been described that the vehicle is approaching the reach (the upper and lower positions of the left and right decorative patterns are slightly different), but from the state of the reach (the upper and lower positions of the left and right decorative patterns are the same), FIG. As shown in (c), an image prompting to press the center pressing operation unit 303a may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  FIG. 533 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a reach symbol promotion effect that is executed following the reach collapse pseudo continuous effect. The reach symbol promotion effect is an example of SP reach. FIG. 533 (I) shows a state in which the reach symbol promotion effect has started. The characters "Promote the reach symbol !!" are displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the reach symbol promotion effect, for example, even reach is promoted to odd reach or 7 reach, and odd reach is promoted to 7 reach. Here, even reach <odd reach <7 reach is set to be advantageous (for example, easy to win) in the order of reach. In particular, the 7-reach has a considerably intense performance (for example, a jackpot expectation of more than 80%). Note that, in (I), since the reach collapse effect has ended, the display indicating the number of pseudo consecutive runs has been deleted from the effect display device 1600.

  Subsequently, in (J), an image prompting the operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Note that a white effect image is displayed on the background of the image of the center pressing operation unit 303a. Further, in (J), for example, a display is made in such a manner that the decorative pattern during the reach is shaking.

  (K) shows a state in which the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in (J) and the reach symbol is successfully promoted. A display indicating that the reach symbol has been promoted (“promotion !!!!”) is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, the decorative pattern has been promoted to odd reach. The color of the background effect image has changed from white to blue.

  For example, the color of the effect image of the reach design promotion effect background is white for even reach, blue for odd reach other than 7, and red for 7 reach. In addition, even if the promotion of the reach symbol fails, the reach effect (for example, the SP reach effect) is performed by the reach symbol, a winning is notified, and the symbol is determined.

  Subsequently, in (L), the characters “Promote the reach symbol !!” are displayed on the effect display device 1600 again. Subsequently, in (M), an image prompting the operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Also, at this time, for example, the display is performed in such a manner that the decorative pattern during the reach is shaking.

  (N) is a state in which the center pressing operation part 303a is pressed in (M) and the reach symbol is successfully promoted. A display indicating that the reach symbol has been promoted (“promotion !!!!”) is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The decorative design has been promoted to 7 reach. Further, the color of the background effect image has changed from blue to red. Although illustration is omitted, a reach effect (for example, SP reach effect) with seven symbols is performed, a hit is announced, and the symbol is determined.

  In addition, from the end of the first period in which the reach collapse pseudo continuous production, which is an effect of the same mode (reach pattern mode) performed repeatedly, is performed, the final reach pattern is determined (the reach pattern promotion effect). Comparing the second period up to the end), it is desirable that the second period is longer. Since the player pays the most attention to the result of the change, the longer the second period in which the result of the change is notified more directly can maintain the interest of the player, and can improve the player's interest. Since the jackpot expectation degree of the reach is set to an exceptional numerical value, a longer period in the second period than in the first period can provide the player with a feeling of excitement for a longer time.

  In addition, it is desirable that the number of times the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the first period is larger than the number of times the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the second period. As the time from the start of the change to the prompting of the operation of the operation unit becomes longer, when the operation of the operation unit is prompted, the player tends to think that the result of the change is notified by the operation. . Therefore, in the second period in which the elapsed time from the start of the change is long, if the number of times of urging the operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is large, the player is prepared for each operation and may be tired. The number of times is as described above.

  In addition, it is desirable that the time interval between the effects of urging the pressing of the center pressing operation unit 303a repeatedly performed in the first period be shorter than the time interval of the effect of urging the center pressing operation unit 303a repeatedly performed in the second period. Hereinafter, the effect of prompting the pressing of the center pressing operation unit 303a is also referred to as an operation request effect. As described above, in the second period, the effect of notifying the winning result is more direct than in the first period. Therefore, if the time is required between the operation requesting effects in the first period, the interest of the player is increased. Because it cannot be maintained. In addition, the time interval between the effects that prompt the pressing of the center pressing operation unit 303a repeatedly performed in the first period is the effect that prompts the first center pressing operation unit 303a in the second period after the end of the first period. It is for the same reason that the time interval is shorter than the time interval until the start.

  Further, it is desirable that the operation validity period in one operation request effect in the second period is longer than the operation validity period in one operation request effect in the first period. This is because there is a player who wants to perform the pressing operation in the second period slowly with a sense of tension because the second period is an effect of more directly informing the result of the hit than the first period.

  Depending on the contents of the reach collapse pseudo consecutive production (for example, the number of pseudo consecutive productions is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times (for example, three times)), even when the game reaches SP reach, the operation request production may not be executed. However, although the reach collapse pseudo continuous production has occurred, it is desirable that the rate at which the operation request production is executed at the SP reach is higher than the rate at which the operation request production is not performed at the SP reach developed thereafter. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of excitement due to the occurrence of the reach collapse pseudo continuous production.

  As described above, in the examples of FIGS. 532 and 533, the display form of the operation request effect in the first period is one type, but the display form of the operation request effect in the second period is a plurality of types (including a blue effect). Display, and display with a red effect).

  Further, after the operation request effect is started, a timer (may be a gauge or the like) indicating the remaining operation validity period may be displayed on effect display device 1600. In this case, the time from the start of the operation request effect to the display of the timer in the first period is shorter than the time from the start of the operation request effect to the display of the timer in the second period.

  Further, although not shown, when the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation request effect in the second period, a predetermined movable body may operate according to a hit result. Specifically, for example, the movable body is operated if the hit is a change, and the movable body is not operated if the change is a loss. On the other hand, when the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation request effect in the first period, the movable body does not operate regardless of the hit result.

  Further, even when the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation request effect in the first period, the movable body may operate, but the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation request effect in the second period. In this case, the operation mode of the movable body is different (for example, the operation direction and the operation amount of the movable body are different, or the movable body that operates is different).

  In the first period, a specific effect (for example, a cut-in effect) may be executed when the reach is broken and the pseudo-ream starts. There may be a plurality of such specific effects. In addition, depending on the type of a specific effect, the change may appear such that the degree of expectation of the great hit of the fluctuation increases and the next reach collapse is determined.

  In addition, when a specific effect with a high expectation appears, it is desirable that the expectation does not decrease in the specific effect of the transition (specifically, for example, when a green cut-in effect appears, Cut-in effect does not appear). Further, in the first period, when the reach is collapsed and the pseudo run starts, the predetermined movable body may operate. Note that the operation of the movable body may be the same each time, or the operation and the actor itself may be different depending on the current number of pseudo runs.

  Also, a plurality of operation request effects are executed in the first period, but the time interval between operation request effects may be gradually shortened, or the time interval between operation request effects is shortened from a predetermined number of times. You may. However, for example, the time interval between the immediately preceding operation request effect and the last operation request effect may be longer than the time interval between other operation request effects.

[17. Sugoroku stage production]
Hereinafter, the production on the stage of Sugoroku will be described. The Sugoroku stage is an example of a specific effect state, and during a change, the effect is performed and the game proceeds. Specifically, a map of sugoroku is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the underside rotating decoration body 3310 rotates during the change, and when the rotation is stopped, only the number indicated by the underside rotating decoration body 3310, The character drawn on the Sugoroku map advances on the grid. The effect indicated by the square where the character has stopped is executed in the fluctuation or the fluctuation on hold.

  It is not always necessary to perform the rotation operation of the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 in all variations. In the variation in which the rotation operation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is not performed, for example, the character does not move the square, that is, stays in the same square. In addition, even if it is determined that the start of the sugoroku stage may shift to the sugoroku stage at a predetermined probability at the start of the change, or that it is determined to stay at the sugoroku stage for a predetermined number of changes after the end of the advantageous gaming state. Alternatively, the transition may be made as a part of a pre-reading effect using the above-described advance determination command.

  FIG. 534 and FIG. 535 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the effect on the stage. (A) is a state immediately before the fluctuation starts. A large decorative design is stopped at the center of the effect display device 1600. Also, nothing is displayed in the squares of Sugoroku. It is also assumed that there are three fluctuations at the time of (A). (B) is a state where the fluctuation has started. A large decorative symbol starts changing at the center of the effect display device 1600.

  In (C), the large decorative symbol at the center of the effect display device 1600 is deleted, and the small decorative symbol fluctuates in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600. Also, at the timing when the large decorative pattern is erased, a display indicating the effect contents is displayed in the square. Also, for example, at the timing, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 starts rotating. At the timing of (B), the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be started.

  In (D), the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 stops rotating. The number of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 located at the uppermost position indicates the number of squares through which the character advances. In (D), the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 points to “2”.

  In (E), the character moves two squares. The “x” in the square to which two squares have been moved indicates that no special effect is performed. Therefore, no special effect is performed, and the decorative symbol is stopped in (F). When the decorative design is stopped, a large decorative design is displayed at the center of the effect display device 1600.

  In (G), in the effect display device 1600, the camera that shoots the stage in particular moves so that the character is positioned at the last cell among the sugoroku cells displayed on the effect display device 1600. Perform the production. At the end of (G), it is the same as in (A). Subsequently, the next fluctuation starts at (H). Details of (H) are the same as (B). After that, the same effect is repeated.

  (I) is a state in which the final fluctuation of the stage has been performed, and details are the same as (C). (J) is a state following the final fluctuation. In (J), the ascending operation (an operation different from the rotation operation) is performed so as to approach the suspension display area (the suspension display area for the fluctuation) in the effect display device 1600 while the back-and-under rotation decoration body 3310 is rotating. I do. Note that the ascending operation can be performed only in the final fluctuation. When the ascending operation is performed, the contents of the squares change to those having a high jackpot expectation. In the state of (I), the contents of the squares that were "x", "?", And "x" are all changed to "reach" in the state of (J).

  In addition, it is set so that the probability of performing the ascent operation is higher when the final fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation than when the final fluctuation is an outlier fluctuation, that is, when the final operation is performed when the ascent operation is performed. It is desirable that the jackpot expectation degree in the fluctuation is higher than the jackpot expectation degree when the ascent operation is not performed. Note that, as in (K), the lower-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may hide a part or the whole of the reserved display area, or may not approach but be close to the reserved display area.

  In addition, the rising operation may be performed after the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is stopped (that is, after the number is determined). However, it is desirable that the start of the ascending operation is later than the start of the rotating operation in the final fluctuation. As described above, when the ascending operation is performed, the jackpot expectation increases, and the player can have a feeling of expectation that the ascending operation is performed even after the rotation operation is started.

  (K) is a state following the final fluctuation. In (K), the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 returns to the initial position while rotating. Note that the rotation may be returned to the initial value after the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 stops. In (K), the hold of the hidden hold display area is changed from the normal display to a blue hold display (a hold display having a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal hold display).

  In addition, although the rotation operation of the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be performed even in a fluctuation in the effect state other than the stage, the probability that the rotation operation is performed in each of a plurality of continuous fluctuations in the stage is extremely low. In an effect state other than the stage, it is preferable that the probability of the rotation operation being executed in each of a plurality of continuous fluctuations is set lower. This is because a player who enjoys a lot of fluctuations in which the character moves on the grid on the sugoroku stage can enjoy sugoroku.

  On the other hand, there may be an effect state in which the probability that the rotation operation is executed in each of the plurality of continuous fluctuations is set to be much higher than that of the stage. This is because the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 which seems to be provided for the stage at first glance is in a continuous rotating state, thereby providing a sense of surprise to the player.

  In addition, although the example in which the rotating operation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is performed has been described, an operation of changing the position may be performed instead of an operation of not changing the position such as the rotating operation. For example, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be slightly raised while rotating (a rising width smaller than the rising operation in the final fluctuation).

[18. Specific zone production]
Hereinafter, the effect of the specific zone will be described. Examples of the specific zone include a pine zone and a super pine zone. The pine zone is, for example, a zone that rushes into the stage in the previous chapter. The super pine zone is, for example, a zone that may enter regardless of the stage.

  For example, the entry into these specific zones is executed as a prefetch effect. The look-ahead effect is an effect in which an effect indicating the result of the pending change is executed before the start of the pending change. The peripheral control MPU refers to the special symbol advance determination command for the reserved special symbol variation transmitted from the main control MPU, and the retained special symbol variations each have a hit variation (that is, a big hit variation or a small hit variation). ) Is determined (prefetch determination), and a prefetch effect can be executed based on the determination result.

  After rushing into the pine zone and the super pine zone, the rush state of these zones continues until a change (also referred to as a prefetch target change) corresponding to the hold determined to be prefetched. It is assumed that the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation corresponding to the pre-determined reservation of the pine zone and the super pine zone is high. Further, it is assumed that the degree of expectation of the big hit of the prefetch target change is higher when the vehicle enters the super pine zone than when the vehicle enters the pine zone. In addition, it is desirable that the pine zone and the super pine zone in which the newly suspended change is the prefetch target variation are not executed while the jackpot variation is being executed or suspended.

  FIG. 536 and FIG. 537 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the pine zone effect. (A) is a state in which fluctuation during the stage is being performed. The pending change next to the change being executed in (A) is the prefetch target change. A prefetch effect for the prefetch target fluctuation is performed from the fluctuation of (A). In (A), an effect is performed in which the character stops at the square indicated as “pine zone”. (B) is a state following the fluctuation of (A). A display indicating that the vehicle has entered the pine zone is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  In (C), a decorative symbol is displayed at the center of the effect display device 1600. Further, a display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone (“in the pine zone ...”) is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (D), the fluctuation has been completed. In the next fluctuation of (C), for example, the same effect as in (C) and (D) is executed.

  (E) is a state in which the prefetch target change has started. Subsequently, a display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (F) is a state where the reach was established in the prefetch target change. In the state where the reach is established, the display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone is deleted from the effect display device 1600.

  When a specific effect with a high jackpot expectation, such as the timing at which the reach is established, is executed, the display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone is erased, so that the user stays in the pine zone until then. It is possible to draw attention to a player who has paid a great deal of attention to the fact that a particular effect is being executed. In addition, if it is always displayed that the player is staying in the pine zone, the player may be tired and tired. Note that there may be a plurality of timings at which the display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone is erased. Specifically, for example, it may be erased every time the execution of the pseudo run is determined.

  In other words, a specific timing (when a reach is established, a time when a display for confirming a pseudo-ream appears, and a reach or a pseudo-ream occurs before an SP reach effect (a Janken game effect described later) is started) (For example, when an effect related to (emphasized) is performed), the display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone may be temporarily deleted.

  In (G), the reach state is continued. In (G), a display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone is displayed on the effect display device 1600 again. (G) is a timing at which the player waits for the development of the SP reach or not. At this timing, the display indicating that the player is staying in the pine zone having a high jackpot expectation is displayed again, so that the player Remembering that it is in the pine zone, you can expect to develop into SP reach.

  (H) shows a state in which a rock-paper-scissors fighting performance that is SP reach has started. The rock-paper-scissors game production is an SP reach that develops with the change of the prefetch target in the pine zone and the super matsu zone. The rock-paper-scissors game production is, for example, a production with an extremely high expectation of big hits among SP reach productions (for example, a bigger expectation of big hits next to an SP reach production that is selected only when the big hit changes). Note that even if the player enters the pine zone, the rock-paper-scissors game effect is not necessarily executed.However, if the player enters the super-matsu zone, the fluctuation pattern of the prefetch target change is selected so that the rock-paper-scissors game effect is always executed. It is assumed that

  Also, at the start of the rock-paper-scissors game effect, the display indicating that the player is staying in the pine zone is deleted from the effects display device 1600, and is also deleted during the rock-paper-scissors game effect. The rock-paper-scissors game production is a production with a very high expectation of big hits, and is intended to draw the player's attention to the rock-paper-scissors game production. For this reason, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation degree is set to be higher at the time of starting a rock-paper-scissuring game than at the time of entering the pine zone.

  (I) shows the state of the continuation of the rock-paper-scissors game. The sound of rock-paper-scissors is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (J), a rock-paper-scissors game of rock-paper-scissors game is performed. The hand of an ally character is displayed on the left side of the effect display device 1600, and the hand of an enemy character is displayed on the right side of the effect display device 1600. In (J), a state in which the ally character has won the enemy character in a rock-paper-scissor game is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (that is, the fact that the change is a jackpot change is reported). In (K), the effect display device 1600 notifies that the big hit has been won, and the decorative pattern has stopped at the big hit combination.

  FIG. 538 and FIG. 539 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the supermatsu zone effect. The entry into the super pine zone is executed, for example, as a pending announcement effect. Specifically, for example, the suspension is displayed in a display indicating the possibility of entering the supermatsu zone (hereinafter, also referred to as supermatsu suggestion suspension). In addition, the display of the mode indicating that the entry into the supermatsu zone is determined to be reserved (hereinafter, also referred to as “supermatsu determination reservation”), for example, when a prize is won, the reservation corresponding to the prize is displayed as a supermatsu suggestion hold, At the timing when the suspension of the normal display mode moves, the display is changed to the super pine suggestion suspension.

  (A) is a state in which a change is being executed and three changes are suspended. (B) is a state in which the change is newly suspended in the state of (A). In (B), when the new prize is won, the super-shorting suggestion suspension (reservation described as “super-matsu?” And may be displayed in a color (for example, red) different from the standard color (for example, white).) Supamatsu suggestion suspension is the suspension of the prefetching target change. (C) is a state in which the fluctuation has been completed.

  (D) is a state where the next fluctuation has started. (E) is a state following the fluctuation of (D). In (E), the effect display device 1600 is executing a line effect (“may be a supermatsu zone ...”) that indicates entry into the supermatsu zone. (F) is the state at the end of the change. In (F), the effect display device 1600 displays a display ("...") indicating that entry into the supermatsu zone was suggested but entry into the supermatsu zone was not possible.

  (G) is a state after the next change of (F) starts. One suggestion has been moved. Also, in (G), a line effect ("Is it really a super-matsu zone !!?") Suggesting entry into the super-matsu zone is displayed again. The dialogue effect in (G) is an effect with a higher degree of expectation of entering the supermatsu zone than the dialogue effect in (E). When performing an effect that suggests entering the supermatsu zone a plurality of times in this way, it is desirable to prevent the degree of expectation of entering the supermatsu zone from decreasing in the plurality of effects.

  In (H), a display confirming entry into the supermatsu zone is displayed on effect display device 1600. As shown in (H), at this timing, the supermatsu suggestion suspension may change to the supermatsu confirmation suspension. In the example shown in FIG. 538, the indication that the entry into the supermatsu zone is confirmed has been changed from the suggestion suspension to the supermatsu decision suspension, but the supermatsu decision suspension has been changed before the timing. Needless to say, may appear. Also, in the example of FIG. 538, the entry into the supermatsu zone from the indication of entry into the supermatsu zone is performed over two variations, but may be performed with one variation.

  In (I), a decorative symbol is displayed at the center, and a display indicating that the user is staying in the supermatsu zone is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, the super pine determination suspension is changed to a suspension display of a mode of high expectation (red suspension display in (I)). For example, in this state, the fluctuations are being digested.

  (J) is a state in which the prefetch target change has started. (K) is a state in which the reach is established in the prefetch target change. Similarly to the pine zone, when the reach is established, the display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone is deleted from the effect display device 1600.

  As described above, when a specific effect having a high jackpot expectation, such as a timing at which the reach is established, is executed, the display indicating that the user is staying in the supermatsu zone is deleted, so that the user stays in the supermatsu zone. It is possible to draw attention to a player who has paid a great deal of attention to the fact that a particular effect is being executed. In addition, if the display always indicates that it is a super matsu zone, the player may be tired continuously and tired. It should be noted that there may be a plurality of timings at which the display indicating that the vehicle is staying in the supermatsu zone is deleted. Specifically, for example, it may be erased every time the execution of the pseudo run is determined.

  That is, similarly to the above-mentioned pine zone, before the SP reach production (the above-described rock-paper-scissors game production) is started, a specific timing (when the reach is established, when the display for confirming the pseudo-ream appears, For example, when an effect related to the occurrence of a reach or a pseudo-run (when an effect is emphasized) is performed, the display indicating that the user is staying in the supermatsu zone may be temporarily deleted.

  In (L), the state where the reach is applied is continued. In (L), similarly to the pine zone, a display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone is displayed on the effect display device 1600 again. Since the super pine zone has a higher expectation of big hits than the pine zone, the display during staying in the super matsu zone is performed again, so that the player can obtain a sense of exaltation again.

  (M) is a state in which a rock-paper-scissors game production that is SP reach has started. As described above, when the vehicle enters the super pine zone, a rock-paper-scissors game effect is always executed. In (M), the display indicating that the user is staying in the supermatsu zone has been deleted from the effect display device 1600 again. This makes it possible to strongly appeal to the player that the player has entered the rock-paper-scissors game production.

  (N) is the state of the continuation of the rock-paper-scissors game. The sound of rock-paper-scissors is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, in (N), a display indicating that the user is staying in the supermatsu zone is displayed on the effect display device 1600 again. As described above, the supermatsu zone has a higher jackpot expectation than the pine zone. Therefore, in the rock-paper-scissors game production, the display is performed at the timing when the rock-paper-scissors game is actually being performed, so that the player can enhance the rock-paper-scissors game production and the super-matsu zone by the synergistic effect of the two effects with high expectations. You can get the feeling.

  In (O), a rock-paper-scissors game of rock-paper-scissors game is performed. The hand of an ally character is displayed on the left side of the effect display device 1600, and the hand of an enemy character is displayed on the right side of the effect display device 1600. In (O), a state in which the ally character has won the enemy character in a rock-paper-scissor game is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (that is, it is reported that the fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation).

  In (O), the display indicating that the user is staying in the supermatsu zone is deleted from the effect display device 1600. This is because, at the timing when the hit result of the fluctuation is already notified, only the hit result is important for the player, and it is not important whether or not the player is staying in the super matsu zone. In (P), the effect display device 1600 notifies that the big hit has been won, and the decorative pattern is stopped at the big hit combination.

  In addition, the example in which the super pine zone starts after the super pine suggestion appears has been described, but if it is not possible to enter the super pine zone despite the appearance of the super pine suggestion hold, for example, Even during the corresponding fluctuation, a production that suggests entry into the supermatsu zone, but fails to enter, is performed.

  In addition, in the above-described example, a special effect is not performed for a change that is not a look-ahead target change while staying in the pine zone or the super matsu zone. However, in these changes, a specific effect (for example, May be executed. The entry into the pine zone and the super pine zone may be executed as a normal effect (a part of the effect performed within one change) which is not a pre-reading effect. Specifically, for example, a rush suggestion effect, a rush effect, and a rock-paper-scissuring game in the pine zone or the super matsu zone may be executed with one change.

  The entry into the pine zone is performed in principle by stopping the character at the square indicating the pine zone of the stage, so that the pine zone is not suggested by the hold display like the super pine zone. desirable. If the pine zone is suggested by the hold display on the Sugoroku stage, the contents of the sugoroku squares that are not displayed until after the start of the change will be suggested by the hold display, and the pleasure of the Sugoroku may decrease. Because there is.

  In the above-described pine zone or super pine zone, an example has been described in which the display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone or the super pine zone is deleted when, for example, a reach occurs. An image (for example, a reach enhancement effect) different from the display image may be displayed on the side with the higher priority (higher priority). In short, the display indicating that the player is staying in the pine zone or the super matsu zone cannot be recognized by the player (or is displayed in a superimposed manner, but very slightly staying in the pine zone or the super matsu zone) Can be seen).

[19. Hold Peep Direction]
Hereinafter, a held peeping effect which is an example of the held notice effect will be described. FIG. 540 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a held peeping effect. (A) is a state where the fluctuation is being executed. In (A), three changes are pending. In (B), the character appears from below the effect display device 1600, and the character is displayed in the hold display area without hiding the hold display (the hold display located at the lower center of the effect display device 1600) corresponding to the variation currently being executed. Part (partly means completely hiding a predetermined number (for example, one) of the four holdings, and / or hiding part of each of the four holdings (that is, completely holding all four holdings) Is not visible))). Note that the character may hide all of the hold display area. In addition, the hold display (the hold display located at the lower center of the effect display device 1600) corresponding to the variation that the character is currently executing may be hidden.

  In (C), the character disappears from the effect display device 1600, and a part of the hold display hidden by the character (the third hold in FIG. 540) is changed to a hold display of a high expectation green hold display. Is changing. (D) is the end of the change. The decorative symbol is stopped at a combination indicating that the fluctuation is a deviation fluctuation. As in the example of FIG. 540, when hiding only the pending display on hold, it is preferable that the pending look-up effect is executed only when the variation during execution is a variation.

  In the case where a normal look-out variation pattern (a variation pattern in which a special effect such as a reach effect is not performed and a variation time is long (for example, about 10 seconds)) is selected, a held look-in effect is performed. At the start of the change, as in the example of FIG. 540, the character does not appear at the start of the change, but appears after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) from the start of the change. In the case of a shortened fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation time in which a special effect such as a reach effect is not executed, which has a short fluctuation time (for example, less than 10 seconds)), when a hold look-through effect is executed, The character may appear after a very short time (e.g., less than 3 seconds described above) has elapsed (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the start of the change.

  Further, before (B), a hold-up peeking effect may be performed. In the provoking effect, specifically, for example, an effect is performed in which a character appears on the effect display device 1600 and approaches the hold display area, but does not hide the hold display area. In addition, although a flirting effect is performed, an effect may be performed in which the character disappears afterwards without hiding the hold display area. In the above-described shortened fluctuation pattern, since the fluctuation time is short, it is desirable that the fluttering effect is not performed or performed in a short time (for example, about 1 second). In addition, when such a stir effect is performed and the character hides the hold display area, the hold display may always be changed.

  Also, in the example of FIG. 540, a part of the hold display hidden by the character has changed, but there may be a pattern in which all the hold displays change, or a pattern in which all the hold displays do not change. You may.

  In addition, even if the hold display of the color having the same jackpot expectation, for example, the case of passing through the hold peeping effect, the case of passing through the hold peeping effect is higher than the case of not passing through the hold peeping effect. I do. Thus, when the held look-through effect is executed, the player can obtain a feeling of elation. Conversely, even if the hold display of a color having the same jackpot expectation degree, the jackpot expectation degree may be higher in the case of not passing through the hold peeping effect than in the case of passing through the hold peeping effect. . Player's expectation of a held peeping effect in which the hold display is changed with a high probability at the time of occurrence, but the jackpot expectation is suppressed, and a normal hold color change effect in which the hit expectation is high although the occurrence is unpredictable. You can balance the feeling.

  In addition, as in the example of FIG. 540, in the effect display device 1600, it is desirable to notify the change of the hold display by retreating the character from the hold display. If the reserved color is changed or the reserved color after the change is suggested before the character retreats, the period in which the player feels tension in the reserved peeping effect is shortened, and the interest is reduced. Because.

  However, for example, a luminous body different from the effect display device 1600 (for example, a lamp or an LED attached to the front wall portion 2101 of the starting port unit 2100 or a lamp or an LED provided near the starting port unit 2100) Is emitted in the same color as the reserved color displayed on the effect display device 1600, before the character retreats on the effect display device 1600 (that is, before the display of the changed reserved color), May be emitted in the reserved color. The player usually plays the game while mainly viewing the effect display device 1600, but can feel a sense of expectation by feeling a change due to a change in the color of the luminous body that has slightly entered the field of view. .

  Since the purpose is to cause the player to recognize the change in the color of the illuminant before the change in the reserved color of the effect display device 1600, the effect (control for) that the reserved color of the effect display device 1600 changes is performed. The timing to execute is given to the player by the change of the color of the illuminant before the timing of executing the effect of changing the color of the illuminant, or even at the same timing, before the change of the reserved color of the effect display 1600. There is no problem if it can be recognized.

  In addition, immediately before the light-emitting body emits light or immediately before changing the light-emitting color of the light-emitting body, the light-emitting body may emit light in a reserved color (for example, white) in a normal display mode. Specifically, for example, when the reserved color of the reserved display on the effect display device 1600 changes from blue to green, the emission color of the luminous body changes from blue to white before the reserved color of the effect display device 1600 changes. , And further changes from white to green. Although the example in which the reserved color in the normal display mode is white has been described, there is no problem if the reserved color is not likely to be selected as the reserved color after promotion in this reserved change effect. When performing white display, there is no problem whether the display is on or blinking. If it is lit, the liquid crystal can be watched, and if it is blinking, it is possible to show that a pending change is being performed.

  In such a case, it is desirable that the time during which the luminous body emits white light on the way is extremely short (for example, a time shorter than the shortest fluctuation pattern among all the fluctuation patterns). This is because if the luminous body emits white light for a long time, if the hold display changes to white having a low jackpot expectation, the player may misunderstand.

  In addition, when the hold display mode in the effect display device 1600 is a hold in a special mode that cannot be expressed only by color (for example, the above-mentioned suggestion of super pine), the luminous body is, for example, in the effect display device 1600. Light emission by a color that is not used in the reserved color change (for example, when the reserved color change of white, blue, green, red, or iridescent can be performed in the effect display device 1600, the luminous body emits light in purple). By executing light emission of a predetermined pattern, the hold display mode is expressed. As the light emission of the predetermined pattern, there are, for example, a pattern in which red flashes and a pattern in which red and green alternately emit light.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 540, a series of effects in which the character hides the hold display and retreats are performed only once, but the effects may be performed a plurality of times. When the effect is performed a plurality of times, the form of the hold display may change each time, the form of the hold display may change at least once, and the form of the hold display does not change at least once. Is also good.

  Further, it is desirable that the hold look-through effect is performed only for the hold of the special figure 1. When the game is progressing mainly due to the fluctuation of the special figure 2, for example, a very short fluctuation time is often selected, such as a time saving state, so that it is necessary to execute the held peeping effect at a high speed. This is because there is a possibility that the player will be confused.

  In addition, a plurality of types of characters may be present in the held peeping effect. The expectation of each of the plurality of characters may be different, or the expectation may be common to some or all of the characters. The degree of expectation may be the degree of expectation of a change in suspension in the peeping effect, or may be the degree of expectation of a big hit in the fluctuation of suspension. Specifically, for example, it is assumed that the holding expectation increases in the order of the character A, the character B, and the character C, and the character C is selected only when the holding change is executed. Further, for example, the character B may have a higher degree of expectation of a change in hold than the character A, but the expectation of a big hit may be higher in the case of the character A than in the case of a change in the hold. In addition, the character A and the character B may have the same degree of hold change expectation and big hit, and the character C may set the hold change expectation and big hit expectancy higher than the characters A and B.

  Although it is desirable that the held peeping effect is performed only when the fluctuation during execution is out of range, the fluctuation during execution is non-reach fluctuation or reach fluctuation in which the jackpot expectation is not high (for example, normal reach is out of order). It is more desirable that the held look-in effect is performed only in the case of the change. That is, it is desirable that the hold look-in effect is not generated not only in the case where the fluctuation during execution is the jackpot fluctuation, but also in the case where a reach effect with a high jackpot expectation such as SP reach is executed.

  If a held peeping effect occurs during a change in which the SP reach is executed, the player thinks that the held change may have a higher degree of expectation than the currently executed change, and This is because the expectation of reach may be weakened.

[20. Still image production]
Hereinafter, the still image effect will be described. The still image effect is an effect in which the effect display device 1600 displays a dynamic display in parallel with the display of the still image. The still image during the still image effect is a still image of an image (for example, an object (sprite) such as a character image or a background image) displayed as dynamic display until immediately before the start of the still image effect. Alternatively, it may be a still image whose display is started simultaneously with the start of the still image effect. When the still image effect is completed, the still image is released and the still image changes to a dynamic display. Further, when the still image effect ends, the still image may be deleted and a new dynamic display may be displayed.

  In addition, the stillness of an image in this chapter includes not only complete stillness, but also an aspect sufficient to make a player recognize that the stillness. Specifically, for example, a mode in which an image (object) is slightly shaking, a mode in which an effect is applied to the image (object), a mode in which the image (object) is slightly enlarged or reduced, and the like are also static. include.

[20-1. Rocket production]
541, 542, and 543 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of a rocket effect. The rocket effect is an example of an SP reach effect in which a still image effect may be executed.

  When the rocket effect, which is an example of the SP reach effect, starts, a display indicating that the rocket effect has started is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in (A). In (B), an image of a character A (a character whose head is white in the figure), a line by the character A saying “ignition wire is ignited!”, And a rocket that has ignited the ignition wire are displayed on effect display device 1600. .

  In (C), the image of the character A has been deleted from the effect display device 1600. In (C), the squib is shorter than the state of (B) (that is, the spark is traveling on the squib). In (D), the character A is displayed again on the effect display device 1600, and the character A's words "Not enough fuel! The rocket cannot be fired as it is!" Is further displayed. In (D), the squib is shorter than in (C).

  In (E), an image of a character B (a character whose head is black in the figure) and a dialogue by the character B saying “Replenish fuel before the spark reaches the rocket!” Are displayed on the effect display device 1600. Have been. Further, in (E), the squib is shorter than in (D).

  In (F), an image of the character B and a line saying “It will arrive in 5 seconds!” By the character B are displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, in (F), the rocket is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a zoomed-up state near the squib, and the squib is shorter than in the state of (E). Until (M) described later, the rocket is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a zoomed-up manner near the fuse.

  In (G), a line saying “Replenish in 3 seconds!” And an image in which character A tries to lift fuel are displayed on effect display device 1600. The image "Replenish in 3 seconds!" Is displayed until the end of FIG. 542 (N) described later. In (G), the squib is shorter than in (F). That is, from the start of (B) to the start of (G), a dynamic effect in which the spark travels through the squib and the squib is gradually shortened has been performed. On the other hand, from the start of (G) to the end of (M) to be described later (immediately before the timing of notification of the special lottery result), a still image effect in which the image of the fuse and the spark is stopped is executed.

  In (H), an image in which the character A lifts the fuel is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (I), an image of character A about to throw fuel is displayed on effect display device 1600. In FIG. 542 (J), an image of character A throwing fuel is displayed on effect display device 1600.

  In (K), an image in which character A tries to lift fuel is displayed on effect display device 1600. In (L), an image in which the character A lifts the fuel is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The images of the character A and the fuel in (K) and (L) are the same as the images of the character A and the fuel in FIGS. 541 (G) and (H), respectively.

  That is, a series of effects in which the character A tries to lift fuel, lifts fuel, tries to throw fuel, and throws fuel are repeated from FIG. 541 (G) to FIG. 542 (J). From FIG. 542 (K), the second series of effects starts, and up to (L), the series of effects ends halfway.

  In (M), the image of the character A and the fuel is erased from the effect display device 1600, and the rocket image in which the spark and the squib are stationary is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (N), the still image is released, the spark reaches the rocket from the fuse, and the image of the successful launch of the rocket, that is, the image that informs that the special lottery result is a big hit is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Is displayed in. In (O), an image display notifying that the special lottery result “Big hit! Congratulations !!” is a big hit is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  FIG. 543 is an example of the end stage of the rocket effect when the special lottery result is out. In FIG. 543 (N ′) following FIG. 542 (M), an image in which the spark goes out in the middle of the fuse and the launch of the rocket fails, that is, an image that informs that the special lottery result has been lost is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Is displayed. At (O '), an image is displayed, indicating that the special lottery result "Sorry ..." is out of order. Even if the special lottery result is a big hit, an image for notifying that the special lottery result is out of order as shown in FIG. 543 (N ′) is displayed at the timing of FIG. 542 (N). After that, a resurrection effect (for example, an effect as shown in FIG. 542 (N) or an effect dedicated to resurrection) may be performed.

  The display mode of the character A and the fuel, which are dynamic displays during the still image effect, may indicate a special lottery result. Specifically, for example, when the special lottery result is a big hit, a character such as “chance” is added to the clothes worn by the character A during the still image production, as compared with the case where the special lottery result is unsuccessful. Is displayed, or the selection ratio of the effect in which the fuel during the still image effect is displayed in a specific color (for example, red) is preferably high.

  Also, an example has been described in which a plurality of dynamic displays (character A and fuel) are displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the still image effect, but the number of dynamic displays may be one. Further, when a plurality of dynamic displays can be displayed during the still image effect, the satisfaction of a specific condition during the still image effect (for example, a game ball B entering a predetermined winning opening) is satisfied. In response to this, the number of dynamic displays may be increased.

  Specifically, for example, each time the game ball B enters the predetermined winning opening during the still image effect, the character supporting the character A is additionally displayed one by one up to a predetermined number (for example, five). May be done. The additionally displayed character repeats, for example, at least once, a support effect that is an example of a series of effects composed of a plurality of effect elements. Note that, similarly to the repetition of the series of effects shown in FIG. 541 and FIG. 542, the support effect may end in the middle of the series of effects (for example, the support effect starts from the effect A, the effect B, the effect C). In the case of a series of effects performed in this order, the support effect may end after execution of the effect A or the effect B in the N-th (N is a natural number) series of effects.

  When a plurality of characters are additionally displayed, it is desirable that the timing of the support effect by the plurality of characters be synchronized. That is, when a new character is additionally displayed, the support effect of the new character starts in synchronization with the schedule of the support effect being executed by the already displayed additional display character. This makes it easier for the player to notice that the character has been additionally displayed, and can also draw the player's attention to the support effects by the plurality of characters. In addition to or instead of the additional display, a display indicating the number of characters that have been additionally displayed or the number of people to be additionally displayed may be displayed on effect display device 1600.

  Note that, among the dynamic displays during the still image effect, it is desirable that only those that have been displayed since the start of the still image effect (ie, the character A and the fuel) are those that indicate the special lottery result. That is, it is desirable that the dynamic display added after the above-described specific condition is satisfied after the start of the still image effect does not indicate the special lottery result. This is because if all of these dynamic displays indicate a special lottery result, the player may be confused.

  It is desirable that the dynamic display during the still image effect be displayed at a position other than the central portion such as the corner of the effect display device 1600 (the lower right corner in the examples of FIGS. 541 and 542). Further, it is desirable that the display size of the dynamic display during the still image production is smaller than the display size of the still image (the rocket including the squib and the spark in the examples of FIGS. 541 and 542). The result of the special lottery is notified only to the rocket after the stationary state has been released, so that attention is paid to the rocket rather than the dynamic display.

  Note that a plurality of colors of the title display in FIG. 541 (A) (“Launch a rocket! A successful hit is a big hit!”) Are prepared, for example, white, red, and rainbow colors. The degree of expectation may be increased in order. Also, a plurality of title display types may be provided even when a still image effect is not executed. For example, the jackpot expectation degree is as follows: 1% of white where the still image effect is not executed, 5% of red not executed, 100% of rainbow not executed, 10% of executed white, and 20% of executed red. 100% rainbow. If the red color is the same when the still image effect is executed and when it is not, the red when the still image effect is executed has a higher jackpot expectation.

  Further, when comparing the white when the still image effect is executed and the red when the still image effect is not executed, white when the still image effect is executed has a higher expectation of a big hit. In other words, the jackpot expectation is indicated by the title display color and the presence / absence of a still image effect. However, since the still image effect has a greater contribution to the jackpot expectation, the still image effect is displayed with the higher title display color. The big hit expectation may be higher when the still image effect is executed with the lower title display color than when it is not executed. By doing so, the player's disappointment can be suppressed even if white is displayed in the title display displayed before the still image effect is executed.

  Further, it is desirable that the light emission of the lamp, the output of the sound from the speaker, the operation of the movable body, and the like be not performed in accordance with the dynamic display during the still image production. The result of the special lottery is notified only to the rocket after the stationary state has been released, so that attention is paid to the rocket rather than the dynamic display.

  The outline of the rocket effect described with reference to FIGS. 541 to 543 is as follows. First, a dynamic effect is produced in which the spark travels along the squib and the squib of the rocket gradually shortens. Thereafter, the squib and the spark come to rest (the rocket is also at rest). Then, the dynamic effect of the character A and the fuel is executed while the fuse and the spark are at rest. Then, the static effect of the character A and the fuel is finished at the same time when the fuse and sparks are released, and an effect (successful or unsuccessful rocket launch) for informing the special lottery result is executed.

  FIG. 544 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the schedule of the dynamic effect of the character A and the fuel after the start of the still image effect in the rocket effect. Each element in FIG. 544 indicates an element of the series of effects described above. Element 1 is a state where the character A tries to lift the fuel as shown in FIG. 541 (G), and element 2 is a state where the character A lifts the fuel as shown in FIG. 541 (H). Element 3 is a state where the character A is about to throw fuel as shown in FIG. 541 (I), and element 4 is a state where the character A is throwing fuel as shown in FIG. 542 (J).

  Pattern A is an effect pattern in which, after the first series of effects, elements 1 and 2 are executed, and then a successful launch or unsuccessful launch of the rocket (that is, an effect that reports a special lottery result) is executed. is there. In FIGS. 541 to 543 described above, the effect of the pattern A has been executed.

  The pattern B is an effect pattern in which the elements 1 and 2 are executed after the second series of effects, and then a successful launch or failed launch of the rocket is executed. The pattern C is an effect pattern in which the elements 1 and 2 are executed after the third series of effects, and then a successful launch or failed launch effect of the rocket is executed.

  That is, the patterns A, B, and C are effect patterns in which a series of effects are terminated halfway, and a successful launch or failed launch effect of the rocket is executed. On the other hand, the pattern D is an effect pattern in which a successful launch or an unsuccessful launch of the rocket is executed after a series of exactly five effects. In such a point, the pattern D is different from the patterns A, B, and C, and therefore, the pattern D is selected in comparison with the patterns A, B, and C. However, it is desirable that the selectivity of each pattern is set so that the big hit expectation is high. Assuming that the expectation of the big hit of the pattern D having the longest still image production time is low, in the still image production, it is highly likely that the special lottery result is incorrect despite the player expecting for a long time. This is because a situation in which the player is strongly discouraged frequently occurs. The pattern D may be set to be selected only when the special lottery result is a big hit.

  Further, since the time of the still image effect becomes longer in the order of pattern A <pattern B <pattern C, the big hit expectation is increased in the order of pattern A <pattern B <pattern C (≦ pattern D), for example. It is desirable that the selectivity of each pattern be set in advance. If the expectation of the big hit is low for a pattern with a long still image production time, the possibility of the special lottery result being high in the still image production is high despite the player expecting for a long time. This is because frequent occurrences of disappointment often occur.

  As described above, in each of the effect patterns, a series of one or more effects is performed during the still image effect. Accordingly, the stationary state is not released until at least one series of effects has progressed once, so that the player can prepare for the effect in which the special lottery result is announced during that time, and by extension, Excessive tension can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, as described above, a plurality of effect patterns in which the number of times of a series of effects to be executed is different are predetermined. This makes it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the performance in which the special lottery result is to be performed after the series of performances has progressed once, and after the progress of the performance, the player feels nervous. Can be provided. In other words, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 544 is determined in advance, so that an appropriate sense of tension can be provided to the player during the still image effect.

  Although it is difficult to predict at what timing the effect in which the special lottery result is notified is executed, as shown in FIG. 544, the timing in which the effect in which the special lottery result is notified is determined as a specific timing. ing. In the example of FIG. 544, it is after the element 2 or the element 4 has been executed. If there is a possibility that a performance in which a special lottery result is announced after all the elements (1 to 4) may be executed, a sense of tension is continuously maintained, and fatigue is given to the player. Because it might be.

  Note that all the effect patterns shown in FIG. 544 start with element 1 and then repeatedly execute a series of effects that proceed in the order of element 2, element 3, and element 4. There may be an effect pattern in which the order of the elements in or the element at the start differs from the effect pattern shown in FIG. Specifically, for example, there may be an effect pattern that repeats a series of effects proceeding in the order of element 3, element 4, element 1, and element 2. Further, for example, there may be an effect pattern that repeats a series of effects proceeding in the order of element 4, element 2, element 1, and element 3.

  In the example described above, an example in which a still image effect is executed during SP reach is described. However, for example, a still image effect is performed before the reach state is reached (that is, during the variation display of all decorative symbols). May be executed, or a still image effect may be executed after entering the reach state and before starting the SP reach. In addition, a still image effect may be executed as an effect indicating that a reach state is set, or a still image effect may be performed as an effect indicating that SP reach starts after the reach state and before the start of SP reach. May be executed. In addition, a series of effects may be started before the still image effect is performed (for example, a series of effects may be performed one or more times by the start of the still image effect, or the first time). Still image effects may start during a series of effects).

[20-2. Battle Direction]
FIG. 545, FIG. 546, and FIG. 547 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of a battle effect. The battle effect is an example of an SP reach effect in which a still image effect may be executed. When the battle effect, which is an example of the SP reach effect, starts, a display indicating that the battle effect has started is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in (A). In (B), the main character (white character) and the enemy character (black character) are displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (C), the main character and the words of the main character are displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (D), the enemy character and the words of the enemy character are displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  In (E), an image in which the hero and the enemy character jump on each other is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (F), an image in which the hero and the enemy character attack each other in the air is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (G), an image in which the main character and the enemy character have landed is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  From the start of (G) to the end of FIG. 546 (J) to be described later (immediately before the timing of reporting the special lottery result), a still image effect in which the images of the hero and the enemy character are stopped is executed. In (H), the images of the hero and the enemy character are stationary. Further, in (H), an image of a friendly character (character shaded) with a bandage (character “bond” in a circle) is displayed in the first aid box.

  In (I), the images of the hero and the enemy character are still stationary. Further, in (I), an image of the ally character in which the bandage (the character “wrapped” in a circle) is placed in the first aid box is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 546 (J), the images of the main character and the enemy character are still stationary. In (J), an image of the ally character in which the tweezers (the character “P” is put in a circle) is displayed in the first aid box on the effect display device 1600.

  In (K), the effect display device 1600 displays an image of an ally character who puts gauze in the first aid box (the letter “G” in a circle). In (K), before the ally character finishes putting gauze in the first aid box, that is, before a series of effects in which the ally character puts things in the first aid box, the still image of the enemy character is released and the protagonist stands. A display indicating that the enemy character has collapsed and that the protagonist has won is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Note that in (K), after the ally character finishes putting gauze in the first aid box, the stillness of the image of the enemy character may be released.

  In the example of FIG. 546, the image of the main character in (J) is the same as the image of the main character in (K) (the pose has not changed), and the main character remains stationary from (J) to (K). Still, the hero may be released from the stillness. In (L), a display of “big hit! Congratulations!” Notifying that the special lottery result is a big hit is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  By performing a still image effect just before notifying the special lottery result, such as a battle effect, it is possible to give a sense of tension to the player, but since the player does not know when the stillness will be released, during the still image effect You must be nervous through. Therefore, by performing dynamic display during the still image production, the player can be distracted, and the tension can be reduced.

  In addition, the player who saw the still image effect in the battle effect learns that the special lottery result is notified immediately before the ally character that is the dynamic display finishes putting the gauze in the first aid box, so the same effect is performed again. When executed, the effect can be enjoyed without excessive tension until the ally character starts putting gauze in the first aid box.

  When the dynamic display during the still image effect is in a specific mode, the dynamic display mode may be selected so that the expectation that the special lottery result is a big hit increases. More specifically, for example, when the bandage in (I) is red, the selection rate of the effect is such that the expectation that the special lottery result is a big hit is higher than when the bandage is white. Is set.

  However, if the selectivity of the specific mode is high, the expectation of a big hit due to the appearance of the dynamic display itself during the still image effect is increased, and the player's interest in the appearance of the specific mode is diminished. Therefore, when the dynamic display during the still image production appears, the appearance rate of the specific mode becomes low (for example, 1/4 or less), and even if the special lottery result is a big hit, the specific mode is performed. Is desirably determined so as to have a low selectivity (for example, 以下 or less).

  Also, a plurality of dynamic displays may be displayed during the still image effect. When a plurality of dynamic displays can be displayed during the still image effect, it is determined that the satisfaction of a specific condition during the still image effect (for example, that the game ball B enters a predetermined winning opening) is satisfied. At the same time, the number of dynamic displays may be increased.

  Specifically, for example, each time the game ball B enters the predetermined winning opening during the still image production, the friendly characters may be additionally displayed one by one up to a predetermined number (for example, five). . The additionally displayed ally character also performs the same effect as the ally character in FIGS. 545 (H) to 546 (K), for example. When a plurality of ally characters are displayed, it is desirable that the effects of the plurality of ally characters be synchronized. That is, when a new ally character is additionally displayed, the support effect of the new ally character is started in a state synchronized with the schedule of the support effect that the already displayed ally character is executing. This makes it easier for the player to notice that the character has been additionally displayed, and can also draw the player's attention to the support effects by the plurality of characters.

  Note that, among the dynamic displays during the still image effect, it is desirable that only the ally character displayed from the start of the still image effect is the one that indicates the special lottery result. That is, it is desirable that the dynamic display added after the above-described specific condition is satisfied after the start of the still image effect does not indicate the special lottery result. This is because if all of these dynamic displays indicate a special lottery result, the player may be confused.

  It is desirable that the dynamic display during the still image effect is displayed at a position other than the center of the effect display device 1600 (the lower right corner in the example of FIGS. 545 and 546). It is desirable that the display size of the dynamic display during the still image production is smaller than the display size of the still image (the hero and the enemy character in FIGS. 545 and 546). The result of the special lottery is notified only to the enemy character and the hero after the stillness is released, so as to draw attention to them.

  Further, it is desirable that the light emission of the lamp, the output of the sound from the speaker, the operation of the movable body, and the like be not performed in accordance with the dynamic display during the still image production. The result of the special lottery is notified only to the enemy character and the hero after the stillness is released, so as to draw attention to them.

  Also, before the start of the still image effect, the dynamic display by the ally characters in FIGS. 545 (H) to 546 (K) may be executed. This allows the player to check the dynamic display by the ally character before the still image production starts, and provides the special lottery result to the player who has seen the still image production during the battle production in the past. It can remind you when to notify.

  In addition, although it is difficult to predict at what timing the production in which the special lottery result is reported is performed, the production in which the special lottery result is reported is similar to the series of rocket production production and schedule (FIG. 544). The execution timing is defined as a specific timing. For example, the special lottery result is notified immediately before the ally character finishes putting on the bandage in the first aid box or immediately before the ally character finishes putting on the bandage in the gauze. If there is a possibility that a performance in which a special lottery result is announced immediately before the end of all the elements may be performed, a sense of tension is continuously maintained, which may cause fatigue to the player. is there.

  Note that, for example, like the dynamic display during the still image effect of the rocket effect described above, the dynamic display of the ally character during the still image effect may be an effect in which a series of effects is repeated at least once. Specifically, for example, an effect in which the ally character puts a bandage in the first aid box, an effect in which the ally character puts a bandage in the first aid box, an effect in which the ally character puts tweezers in the first aid box, and an effect in which the ally character puts gauze in the first aid box , May be repeatedly executed one or more times.

  It should be noted that a plurality of colors of the title display in FIG. 545 (A) (“Win the enemy character! Victory is a big hit!”) Are prepared, for example, white, red, and rainbow colors, and white <red <rainbow colors. The degree of expectation may be increased in order. Also, a plurality of title display types may be provided even when a still image effect is not executed. For example, the jackpot expectation degree is as follows: 1% of white where the still image effect is not executed, 5% of the red which is not executed, 100% of the rainbow which is not executed, 10% of the white which is executed, and 20% of the red which is executed the still image effect. , The executed rainbow is 100%, and so on. When the still image effect is executed and when it is the same red, when the still image effect is executed, the red color when the still image effect is executed has a higher jackpot expectation, and when the still image effect is executed. When white is compared with red when the still image effect is not executed, white when the still image effect is executed has a higher expectation of a big hit. By doing so, the player's disappointment can be suppressed even if white is displayed in the title display displayed before the still image effect is executed.

  In addition, a series of effects by the ally character may be started before the still image effect is performed (for example, a series of effects may be executed one or more times before the start of the still image effect). (Still image effects may start during the first series of effects.)

  FIG. 547 is an example of an effect when a still image effect is not executed during a battle effect. After FIG. 545 (G), the flow shifts to FIG. 547 (H '). In (H ′), the image of the enemy character is released from being stopped, and an image in which the hero is standing while the enemy character is falling and a display indicating that the hero has won are displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, in (H '), an image of the ally character putting a bandage in the first aid box similar to that in FIG. 545 (H) is displayed.

  In (I ′), the effect display device 1600 continues to display an image in which the enemy character is falling down with the hero standing, and a display indicating that the hero has won. Further, in (I '), an image of the ally character who has a bandage in the first aid box similar to that in FIG. 545 (I) is displayed.

  In (J ′), the effect display device 1600 continuously displays an image in which the hero is standing while the enemy character is falling, and a display indicating that the hero has won. Also, in (J '), an image of an ally character holding tweezers in the first aid box similar to that in FIG. 546 (J) is displayed.

  In (K ′), an image in which the enemy character is falling down with the hero standing and a display indicating that the hero has won are continuously displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, at (K '), an image of a friend character who puts gauze in the first aid box similar to that of FIG. 546 (K) is displayed. Subsequently, in (L '), the same display as that in FIG. 546 (L) is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  As described above, when the still image effect is executed during the battle effect and when the still image effect is not executed, the timing at which the player feels nervous can be increased.

  The example in which the still image effect is executed before the notification of the special lottery result during the battle effect and the example in which the still image effect is not executed have been described. However, as in the examples of FIGS. 545, 546, and 547, the still image effect is not executed. The dynamic effect during the still image effect when performed (the effect that the ally character puts things in the first aid box) and the dynamic effect executed after the special lottery result notification when the still image effect is not performed are common. It is desirable that

  By these being common, for example, a player who has seen a dynamic performance performed after the special lottery result notification when the still image effect is not performed, the dynamic performance and the notification of the special lottery result Is stored, it is possible to more strongly notice that a special lottery result will be announced soon when watching a dynamic effect during a still image effect. In addition, since the player who has seen the dynamic effect during the still image effect remembers that the special lottery result is notified after the dynamic effect has started, the player does not perform the still image effect. If a dynamic effect is executed after the lottery result is reported to be incorrect, the real special lottery result may be reported after the dynamic effect (that is, a resurrection effect may be performed). And you can have a sense of expectation.

  In addition, the selection rate of the effect is determined so that the big hit expectation when the still image effect is performed before the notification of the special lottery result during the battle effect is higher than the big hit expectation when the still image effect is not performed. Is desirable. Since the still image effect is an effect that gives a sense of tension to the player, it is possible to provide the player with many situations in which a big hit is notified in exchange for the sense of tension. Conversely, if the still image effect is performed before the notification of the special lottery result during the battle effect, the big hit expectation is higher than the big hit expectation when the still image effect is not performed. It may be determined. Thereby, in the case where the still image effect is not performed and the nervousness is not felt much, it is possible to provide the player with many situations in which the big hit is notified and the euphoria can be obtained at once.

  In addition, when the still image effect is not executed and the special lottery result is out of order, in FIG. 547 (H ′), an image in which the hero is falling down with the enemy character standing and that the hero has been defeated are shown. Is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and continues until FIG. 547 (K ′). Even if the protagonist is defeated, a dynamic display of putting an object in the first aid box by the ally character is executed as in FIGS. 547 (H ′) to (K ‘).

  In the case where the still image effect is executed and the special lottery result is out of order, in FIG. 546 (K), when the ally character finishes putting the gauze in the first aid box, the image of the hero is released from the static state and the enemy is released. The effect display device 1600 displays an image in which the hero has fallen while the character is standing, and a display indicating that the hero has been defeated. After that, the dynamic display in which the ally character puts an object in the first aid box is continuously executed while the image in which the hero is falling while the enemy character is standing is displayed.

  The continuously displayed dynamic display is, for example, a series of effects in FIGS. 545 (H) to 546 (K) or a series of effects repeatedly executed. In this case, for example, the size of the dynamic display of the ally character is not changed at a predetermined timing exceeding one time without changing the size of the dynamic display of the ally character until at least one or more of the series of effects is completed. To increase. Thereafter, the series of effects is terminated, and, for example, a video in which the ally character takes care of the main character is displayed, and a decorative pattern of a combination of losing characters is displayed.

  In addition, when a still image effect is performed during the battle effect, in FIG. 546 (K), the image in which the hero is falling while the enemy character is standing and the hero are shown despite the special lottery result being a big hit. May be displayed on the effect display device 1600 indicating that the game has been defeated. In other words, an effect may be executed that once makes the player think that the special lottery result is out of order.

  In this case, similar to the above-described production in which the special lottery result is out of order, for example, following FIG. 546 (K), for example, an image in which the hero has fallen while the enemy character is standing and a display indicating that the hero has been defeated Is continuously displayed, and the production by the ally character is further continued. For example, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the fall of the protagonist, a resurrection effect is performed, and it is notified that the special lottery result is a big hit. In the resurrection effect, for example, an image in which an ally character is treating the hero is displayed, and the hero makes a guts pose while falling down.

  The resurrection effect may be performed, for example, at a predetermined timing when the size of the ally character, which is a dynamic display, has not yet changed, or at a predetermined timing after the size of the ally character has increased. You may. In addition, one of these two types of timing may be selected in accordance with a predetermined selection rate, and the resurrection effect may be set to be executed at the selected timing. In this case, it is desirable that the selectivity of the two types of timing be different. When the resurrection effect is executed at a timing with a low selection rate, the player is surprised and the elation of the player can be improved at a stretch. Although the description has been made with two types of timings, there may be two or more types of timings.

  Note that a series of effects performed in the battle effect may end in the middle of the series of effects. Specifically, for example, the above-described effect in which the ally character puts a bandage in the first aid box (element 1), the effect in which the ally character puts a bandage in the first aid box (element 2), and the effect in which the ally character puts tweezers in the first aid box (element 2) In a series of effects performed in the order of element 3) and an effect in which the ally character puts gauze in the first aid box (element 4), element 1 and element in the N-th (N is a natural number) repetition of the series of effects The series of effects may end immediately after the execution of the second or third element.

  548 and 549 are explanatory diagrams illustrating another example of the battle effect. The differences from FIGS. 546 and 547 will be described. In FIGS. 548 and 549, a timer effect is added. 548 (A) to (F) are the same as FIGS. 546 (A) to (F), respectively, and the description of the effects other than the timer effect is omitted.

  In (A), for example, at the same time as the start of the battle effect, that is, the start of the title display, a timer is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the timer value starts decreasing. The timer is a dynamic display in which the timer value decreases with time. The initial value of the timer in (A) is 30 seconds. The timer is displayed at the lower right of the effect display device 1600, but may be displayed at another position as long as the player can recognize the contents of the battle effect.

  In (A) to (E), the timer value decreases with time. In (E), the timer value becomes 0 seconds. In (F), the display "Maybe ..." is displayed in the area where the timer value was displayed.

  The still image effect starts from (G). In (G), in the area where the timer value is displayed, a display of “heat or intense heat?” Indicating the degree of expectation of the special lottery result is displayed. In (H), in the area where the timer value was displayed, a display of "hot heat!" Indicating that the expectation that the special lottery result is a big hit is extremely high is displayed. The display of the area in which the timer was displayed in (F) to (H) is an expectation suggestion display that suggests the jackpot expectation of the special lottery result. Note that the expectation degree suggestion display does not necessarily need to be displayed in the area where the timer was displayed.

  Further, from (F) to (H), the expected degree suggestion display changes over the start of the still image effect. The expected degree suggestion display maintains the dynamic display before and after the start of the still image effect. The display area and the display content may be different as long as the player can recognize that the expected degree suggestion display is an effect in the timer effect.

  The light emission mode of the various lamps when the expectation suggestion display is performed may be a light emission mode corresponding to the expectation suggestion display, or may be the expectation degree from the start of the expectation suggestion display until the start of the still image effect. After the still image effect starts in the light emission mode corresponding to the suggestion display effect, the light emission may correspond to the still image effect.

  In the example of FIG. 548, the expected degree suggestion display changes over the start of the still image effect, but the timer value may decrease over the start of the still image effect. That is, the start timing of the decrease in the timer value may be before the start of the still image effect, and the timing at which the timer value becomes 0 second may be after the start of the still image effect. In this case, the timer display maintains the dynamic display before and after the start of the still image effect.

  When the timer display is performed over the start of the still image effect, the light emission mode of the various lamps may be a light emission mode corresponding to the timer display, or may be from the start of the timer display to the start of the still image effect. After the still image effect starts in the light emission mode corresponding to the timer display effect, the light emission may correspond to the still image effect.

  Subsequently, in (I), the indication of the degree of expectation indicating that the dynamic display is maintained over the start of the still image effect is erased, and the timer effect has ended. That is, the display is the same as when the timer effect is not executed. In other words, the timer effect ends during the still image effect before notifying the special lottery result. Since it is more important for the player to report the special lottery result after the still image production than the expected degree suggestion display, it is possible to end the timer production before the notification and concentrate the player on the still image production. desirable.

  The expectation suggestion display, which is a dynamic display, is performed over the start of the still image effect.However, the time from the start of the expectation suggestion display to the start of the still image effect, the still image effect is displayed. It is desirable that the time from the start to the end of the expected degree suggestion display is short. When the still image effect ends, the special lottery result is notified, but if the expectation suggestion display is executed as a dynamic display for a long time even after the still image effect starts, the player's attention will be displayed This is because there is a possibility that the tension caused by the still image effect may be excessively reduced.

  549 (J) to (M) are the same as FIGS. 545 (I) to 546 (L), respectively, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  The sound output from the various speakers in response to the expectation degree suggestion display is one shot (that is, a sound that is output only once without being repeated), and after the output of the one shot is completed (the player (After the one-shot sound is no longer heard), the still image effect ends, dynamic display starts, and the special lottery result is shown.

  The timer effect may end before the start of the still image effect, for example, before the start of the still image effect, that is, in a state where the dynamic display is performed, without the timer effect straddling the start of the still image effect. Specifically, for example, the timer value becomes 0 seconds before FIG. 548 (H), and the expectation suggestion display is displayed from FIG. 548 (H) to (I). An image effect may be started.

  However, although the big hit expectation degree when the timer effect ends before the start of the still image effect is higher than the case where the timer effect is not executed, the timer effect is executed over the start time of the still image effect. It is desirable that the effect selection rate is set lower than the big hit expectation in the case of This is because, when the timer effect and the still image effect are not executed at the same time, the case where they are executed simultaneously gives the player a synergistic expectation due to the two effects. In addition, the effect in which the timer effect is executed over the start of the still image effect may be selected only when the special lottery result is a big hit (that is, a big hit confirmed effect).

  As described above, by causing the timer to appear and displaying the expectation suggestion display after the timer value reaches 0 seconds, the player can expect the appearance of the expectation suggestion display from the time when the timer appears. .

  In addition, the timer effect may appear in SP reach, movie reach, and the like other than the battle effect. In addition, in the same kind of fluctuation pattern, it is desirable that the selection rate of the timer effect is determined so that the big hit expectation when the timer effect appears does not become higher than the big hit expectation when the timer effect does not appear. Further, it is desirable that there is no fluctuation pattern in which the timer effect always appears.

  Although the timer effect is described here as the timer value decreasing, the timer is not displayed in FIGS. 548 (A) to 548 (E), and the dynamic effect in FIGS. 548 (F), (G) and (H) is not displayed. Only the expected degree suggestion display as the display may be performed. If the expectation suggestion display is a still image in such a case, the player does not expect the appearance of the expectation suggestion display because the expectation suggestion display does not necessarily appear in the battle effect. There is a possibility that the expectation degree indication is not noticed. Therefore, as described above, the expected degree suggestion display is a dynamic display across the start and end of the still image effect.

  In addition, the timing of the display start of the timer, other than the above-mentioned timing, for example, at the start of fluctuation, during the change of all decorative symbols, at the time of stopping the left decorative symbol, at the time of stopping the right decorative symbol, after reaching reach and before starting SP reach, or It may be a predetermined timing after the start of the SP reach and before the notification of the special lottery result.

  Further, the timer value may be reduced at the same time as the timer is displayed, or the timer value may be reduced after a predetermined time has elapsed since the timer was displayed. When the timer value starts decreasing after a predetermined time has elapsed since the timer was displayed, the timer value is not displayed at the timing when the timer was displayed, but is displayed at the timing when the timer value starts decreasing. You may.

  The timing at which the timer value becomes 0 seconds is, for example, other than the above-mentioned timing, for example, during the change of all decorative symbols, when the left decorative symbol is stopped, when the right decorative symbol is stopped, after reach is established, before SP reach is started, and after SP reach is started. The timing may be a predetermined timing before the notification of the special lottery result or the timing of the notification of the special lottery result. Note that, for example, a timing at which the timer value starts decreasing and a timing at which the timer value becomes 0 second are selected, and the initial value of the timer is determined based on the selected timing.

  Note that a plurality of timers may be displayed simultaneously in the timer effect. In this case, the display start timing of each of the plurality of timers, the start timing of decreasing the timer value, and the timing at which the timer value becomes 0 second may be different. Further, in this case, the effect performed after the timer value of each of the plurality of timers reaches 0 seconds may be different. In this case, before the execution of the timer effect, a display indicating that a plurality of timers are displayed at the same time, a display indicating the number of timers displayed at the same time, or the like may be displayed on effect display device 1600.

  In addition, a plurality of timer effects are executed in order in one change (that is, a new timer is displayed after the timer value of one timer becomes 0 seconds and the timer is thereafter hidden). You may. In this case, the effect performed after the timer value of each of the plurality of timers reaches 0 seconds may be different. In addition, when a plurality of timer effects are executed, a display indicating that the timer effect is to be executed thereafter, and a display indicating the number of times the timer effect is executed after the timer effect is executed during and before the execution of the timer effect. May be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  The effect selection rate is set such that the big hit expectation when a plurality of timers are displayed sequentially or simultaneously is higher than the big hit expectation when only one timer is displayed. When a plurality of timers are displayed in order or at the same time, for example, the expectation suggestion display, which is a dynamic display that is shown after the timer value of the plurality of timers finally reaches 0 seconds, is a still image effect. Straddling the start of Thereby, it is possible to make the player understand that the still image effect is an effect directly linked to the notification of the special lottery result, and it is possible to draw attention to the still image effect.

  When a plurality of timers are displayed simultaneously or sequentially, a plurality of still image effects may be executed. In this case, for example, expectation degree suggestion display, which is a dynamic display indicated after the timer value reaches 0 seconds, is executed over each of the start of the plurality of still image effects. As a result, the player's attention can be drawn to each of the multiple still image effects.

  Note that the timer effect may be executed as a prefetch effect. In this case, for example, the display and decrease of the timer value start from a change before the prefetch target change, and the timer value becomes 0 second in the prefetch target change. Although the description has been made using the timer effect in FIG. 548, another dynamic display effect may be executed instead of the timer display which is a dynamic display.

[20-3. Reel production]
FIG. 550 and FIG. 551 are explanatory diagrams each showing an example of a reel effect. The reel effect is an example of an SP reach effect in which a still image effect may be executed.

  In (A), a reel effect, which is an example of the SP reach effect, starts. At the start of the reel effect, a title image (for example, "Align the same number on a straight line of the reel!") May be displayed on the effect display device 1600. When the reel effect starts, the image of the reel of the slot is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the image in which the numbers in the reach state are stopped is displayed on the middle left reel and the middle right reel. The numbers displayed in the left reel middle section and the right reel middle section maintain the stationary state until the reel effect ends. Further, in the reel image in (A), a state in which the middle reel is further changing is displayed.

  In (B), the fluctuation speed of the middle reel gradually decreases, and the same number as the number in the reach state appears in the upper stage of the middle reel. In (C), the number stops between the upper middle reel and the middle middle reel, and a display indicating that the number stops at the upper middle reel or the middle reel after 10 seconds (“After 10 seconds”). The display will be stopped somewhere!) Is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  The display of "I will stop somewhere after 10 seconds!" Is an effect suggesting that a countdown effect described later is to be executed, and is displayed in the same area as the area where the countdown effect described later is displayed. In addition, in order to clearly recognize that the countdown effect described below is being executed, a display “I will stop somewhere after 10 seconds!” May be displayed in an area larger than the area where the countdown effect is displayed. In this case, a part or all may overlap the area where the countdown effect is displayed.

  From (C) to FIG. 551 (N) described later, the numbers on the reels are stopped, that is, a still image effect is being executed. In addition, a countdown display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 from (D) to FIG. 551 (N). In (D), a countdown display ("10") indicating the remaining 10 seconds is displayed. Further, in (D), two support characters are displayed on the left end and the right end of the effect display device 1600, and a support effect is executed from (D) to FIG. 551 (N). The support effect and the countdown display effect are dynamic display effects during a still image effect. In (D), the two support characters hold the folding fan downward.

  In (E), a countdown display ("9") indicating the remaining nine seconds and two cheering characters having a fan on the right side with both feet on the ground are displayed. In (F), a countdown display ("8") indicating the remaining eight seconds and two cheering characters having a fan on the left side with both feet on the ground are displayed. In (G), a countdown display ("7") indicating the remaining 7 seconds and two cheering characters having a fan on the right side with one leg kicked out are displayed.

  In (H), a countdown display ("6") indicating the remaining six seconds and two cheering characters having the same downward fan as in (D) are displayed. In (I), a countdown display (“5”) indicating the remaining 5 seconds and two cheering characters having a fan on the right side with both feet on the ground as in (E) are displayed. . In FIG. 551 (J), a countdown display (“4”) indicating the remaining 4 seconds, and two cheering characters having a fan on the left side with both legs on the ground as in FIG. 550 (F) are displayed. Is displayed.

  In (K), a countdown display (“3”) indicating the remaining three seconds and two cheering characters having a fan on the right side with one leg kicked out as in FIG. 550 (G) are displayed. ing. In (L), a countdown display (“2”) indicating the remaining two seconds and two cheering characters having a fan on the right side with both feet on the ground as in FIG. 550 (D) are displayed. ing. In (M), a countdown display (“1”) indicating the remaining one second, two cheering characters having a folding fan similar to that in FIG. 550 (E), and two cheering characters are displayed. I have.

  In (N), a countdown display (“0”) indicating the remaining 0 seconds and two cheering characters having a fan on the left side with both feet on the ground as in FIG. 550 (F) are displayed. ing. In other words, during a still image effect between FIG. 550 (D) to FIG. 551 (N), as a dynamic display, a countdown display in which a 10 second countdown is performed, and a series of effects by two support characters are repeated, Is running. The countdown display is not a series of effects repeatedly executed, that is, an aperiodic effect.

  Note that, in the example of FIGS. 550 and 551, as described above, in the example of FIGS. 550 and 551, as described above, the two support characters have the folding fan and both feet are on the ground. With the folding fan on the right side on the left side, with the legs on the ground, the folding fan on the right side, and with one leg kicked out, the folding fan on the right side.

  The countdown display that is an aperiodic effect and the display of a support effect by a support character that is a periodic effect may be displayed near or overlapping. If they are displayed in places far from each other, there is a risk that one of the effects will be missed. In this way, by making it easier to see the countdown display and the display of the support effect at the same time, the player who wants to gradually increase their mood while taking notice of the special lottery result while paying attention to the countdown display, It is possible to satisfy both needs of a player who pays attention and always wants to feel better during the reel production.

  Further, the visibility of one of the countdown display and the display of the support effect may be higher than the visibility of the other. Specifically, for example, an effect is combined only with the one, an effect larger than the other is combined with the one, or the display size of the one is made larger than the display size of the other. By increasing the visibility of the countdown display over the visibility of the support production, it is easier to gradually increase the mood as the countdown progresses.By increasing the visibility of the support production over the visibility of the countdown production, you can always feel during the reel production Is easy to increase.

  After the countdown display of (N) becomes 0, the stillness in the still image effect is released. That is, the decoration image of the middle reel displayed on the effect display device 1600 starts slowly again. In (O), the number on the middle reel moves from the upper row to the middle row, the same number stops on a straight line, and it is notified that the special lottery result is a big hit.

  Note that, for example, when the specific condition is satisfied during the still image effect, the stillness in the still image effect may be forcibly released, that is, the midway effect may be skipped and the process may transition to (N). . A predetermined number of game balls B fired by operating the handle 182 at a predetermined timing (for example, a period in which the countdown display remains 7 seconds to 3 seconds after the start of the still image production) are provided at a predetermined starting port. A case where a prize has been won or a case where a plurality of game balls B have passed through the gate unit 2003 which normally starts a symbol change are examples of the specific condition.

  In addition, among the dynamic effects during the still image effect (the support effect for the support character), a plurality of display modes may exist in the series of effects described above. Specifically, for example, there are a plurality of colors of clothes of the support character (for example, when red is selected, the big hit expectation is set higher than when white is selected). . In addition, the series of effects is composed of a plurality of display modes (display modes of the support characters of each of FIGS. 550 (D) to (G)), but a plurality of types of effects of different display modes forming the series of effects are different. May be present. On the other hand, among the dynamic effects during the still image effect, it is preferable that the display mode is single for the aperiodic effect (the countdown display in the examples of FIGS. 550 and 551). That is, it is desirable that the form of the non-periodic effect does not change even if the mode of the series of effects changes. In particular, in the examples of FIGS. 550 and 551, the timing of notification of the special lottery result is notified in a non-periodic manner, so that the player can take accurate timing because the mode of the aperiodic effect does not change. it can.

  Note that a suggestion effect indicating that a series of effects that can be repeatedly executed during the still image effect is displayed may be executed before the start of the still image effect. The suggestion effect may be executed even when a series of effects that can be repeatedly executed during the still image effect is not executed (that is, a so-called gaseous effect may exist).

  The suggested effect is preferably an effect that allows the player to guess that a series of effects that can be repeatedly executed is displayed. Specifically, for example, at the timing of FIG. 550 (B), an effect (not shown) in which a support character in which noise is applied to the right corner and the left corner of the effect display device 1600 is displayed, or the support is performed. An effect such as executing an effect that brings effects to the character is an example of the suggested effect. Thereby, the player can guess the appearance of the support character, and can thus have a sense of expectation. It is desirable that the aperiodic effect described above is not executed during the execution of the suggested effect. This is because, in a situation where it is not determined that a series of effects that can be repeatedly executed during the still image effect is displayed, it is possible to prevent the suggested effect from lowering the player's attention to the aperiodic effect.

  Note that it is desirable to change the light emission mode of a predetermined lamp or to output a predetermined sound from a speaker in accordance with the countdown display. The special lottery result is the most important concern for the player, and the special lottery result is notified after the countdown display is completed, so that the player emits light and sounds according to the countdown display, thereby increasing the expectation of the player. improves. However, in order to prevent the player from feeling too tense, it is desirable that the light emission mode of the predetermined lamp and the predetermined sound mode be as follows.

  For example, the light emission mode of the predetermined lamp is to keep the light-off state or the light-on state (that is, do not blink). Further, for example, only a part of the lamps in the door frame or the game board repeats a predetermined lighting pattern, and the other lamps remain turned off or turned on. In addition, in order to prevent the player from feeling excessive tension, for example, the predetermined sound is desirably SE (Sound Effect) instead of BGM (Back Ground Music).

  Further, during the countdown display, for example, a part or all of the countdown display may be made invisible (or difficult to see) by putting a concealed image on the front side when viewed from the player of the countdown display. However, it is desirable not to make the countdown display invisible in the latter half of the still image effect. The countdown display effect is to give the player a strong sense of expectation, especially in the latter half, and to prevent such a sense of expectation from being reduced.

[20-4. Bee extermination direction]
552 and 553 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a bee extermination effect. The bee elimination effect is an example of an SP reach effect in which a still image effect may be executed.

  When the bee elimination effect, which is an example of the SP reach effect, starts, a display indicating that the bee elimination effect has started is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in FIG. 552 (A). In (B), a display for introducing a practice effect for bee extermination is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (C), when the queen bee is exterminated, a display showing that the special lottery result is a big hit, that the central press operation unit 303a should be pressed in order to exterminate the queen bee, and a center press operation unit 303a Are displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  In (D), a display indicating that the special lottery result is not a big hit even if the soldier bee is eliminated is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (E), a display indicating the start of bee extermination practice is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (F), the practice production of bee extermination has started. In (F), a sleeping queen (a large bee located at the center of the staging display device 1600), a plurality of soldier bees, an aim for exterminating the bees, and an operation instruction of the central pressing operation unit 303a (" Aim! ") Is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The practice effect is a dynamic effect in which each of a plurality of soldier bees moves as a dynamic display. The aim is also moving. In addition, the sleeping queen bee moves, for example, so as to sway up and down slowly (in (F), it is displayed at the lower part of the effect display device 1600), but the sleeping queen bee puts out the nose lantern and the nose lantern Only the body may move in such a manner as to swing.

  In (G), the dynamic production continues, the queen bee that has moved to the upper part of the production display device 1600, the plurality of soldiers that are moving, the moving sight, and the operation instruction of the central pressing operation unit 303a. Are displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (H), a display in which the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed and the insecticide is ejected is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Note that, in the bee extermination effect, when the moving sight is on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee, if the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, an image in which the queen bee is exterminated is displayed. In (J), when the moving sight is on the soldier bee, the central pressing operation part 303a is pressed, so that the queen bee cannot be eliminated. Therefore, in (I), a display indicating that the queen bee could not be eliminated (“Wow, I was saved”) is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Also, in the practice performance, if the center pressing operation part 303a is pressed when the moving aim is on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee, for example, the display in (I) indicates that the queen bee has been eliminated. The display in FIG. 553 (J), which will be described later, is replaced with a display such as “Work hard in that condition!”. That is, even if a display indicating that the queen bee has been eliminated in the practice effect (a display indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit) is performed, the later-described FIGS. 553 (J) to (N) are executed.

  It should be noted that, in the practice performance, the queen bee may be set so as not to be exterminated. Therefore, for example, the sight can be moved to a position where the sight is not on the queen bee or only on the soldier bee, or the sight can be moved to a position where the queen bee can be eliminated, but the queen bee is pressed even if the central pressing operation part 303a is pressed at the position. The effect of displaying an image that failed to exterminate is displayed.

  Further, if the special lottery result is a big hit, the setting may be made so that the queen bee can be always exterminated in the practice effect. For this purpose, for example, the aim is moved only at a position that is not on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee, or it is possible to move only at a position other than the position, but the injection area of the insecticide is increased so that the queen bee is included in the injection destination. , Etc. are performed.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 553 (J), a display for introducing a production effect of bee extermination is displayed on the effect display device 1600. This display indicates that the production effect starts in a state where the soldier bees have been exterminated. In (M), a stationary queen bee, a plurality of stationary bees, a moving sight, and an operation instruction of the central pressing operation unit 303a (“Push for timing!”) Are displayed. ing. Also, the plurality of soldier bees that are stationary in (K) are not located on the queen bee.

  In (L), at a timing where the aim is at a position on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee, the central pressing operation section 303a is operated, and a display that the insecticide is sprayed on the queen bee is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (M), an image indicating that the queen bee was successfully eliminated, that is, an image indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit is displayed. In (M), the queen bee, which was statically displayed until immediately before, has been released. In (N), a display (“big hit! Congratulations!”) Indicating that the special lottery result was a big hit is displayed.

  If the special lottery result is a big hit, move the sight only on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee, or move only the position other than the position so that the queen bee can be eliminated in the actual production Although possible, it is desirable to perform an effect such as increasing the spray area of the insecticide to include the queen bee in the spray destination. By forcibly exterminating the queen bee in this way, it is possible to eliminate an operation error of the central pressing operation section 303a by the player when the special lottery result is a big hit.

  Also, if the special lottery result is incorrect, the queen bee can not be eliminated in the actual production, for example, the aim can be moved only on a position that is not on the queen bee or on the soldier bee, or the queen bee can be eliminated Although the aim can be moved to the position, effects such as displaying an image in which the queen bee has failed in extermination even if the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed at the position are displayed.

  In the example described above, only the center pressing operation unit 303a is used for the bee extermination effect, but a plurality of operation units may be used. Specifically, for example, the aim may be moved using the rotation operation unit 302. Also, for example, in the practice effect, the insecticide is sprayed by pressing the center pressing operation portion 303a, and in the actual effect, the insecticide is sprayed by pressing the outer circumferential pressing operation portion 303b. Is also good.

  As described above, in the production effect of the bee extermination effect, during the still image effect (that is, when the queen bee and a plurality of soldier bees, which are still images, are displayed), the pressing instruction of the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed. When the center pressing operation section 303a is pressed, a special lottery result is notified. That is, since the operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a during the production effect is important, the tension of the player is excessively increased. Therefore, the player is likely to make a mistake in operating the center pressing operation unit 303a.

  In order to suppress such excessive tension of the player and reduce the occurrence of operation errors, a practice effect is executed before the actual effect. As described above, in the practice production, the soldier bees move and disturb, and the queen bee elimination is highly difficult. In the production production, the queen bee elimination difficulty is reduced because the soldier bees have been exterminated in advance. This allows the player to operate the center pressing operation unit 303a with a margin in the actual performance without feeling the pressure as much as the practice performance, and to reduce operation errors, thereby improving the satisfaction of the player.

  It should be noted that the time for the production effect (the aim is moving and the center pressing operation unit 303a is valid) is longer than the time for the practice effect (the time when the aiming is moving and the center pressing operation unit 303a is valid). Is longer. Thereby, the operation error of the player in the production effect is reduced, and the player actively operates the center pressing operation unit 303a in the production effect.

  Further, in the production effect, a plurality of presses of the center press operation unit 303a may be received. In this case, in the production effect, for example, each time the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed while the aim is moving, an insecticide is ejected, and an effect is performed such that the queen bee can be easily exterminated. Therefore, when a production effect that accepts the press of the center press operation unit 303a only once appears, an expectation of the big hit of the special lottery result becomes higher when a production effect that accepts the press multiple times appears. It is desirable that the selectivity is determined. Thereby, the player's willingness to operate the center pressing operation unit 303a can be improved.

  Similarly, in the practice effect, a plurality of presses of the center press operation unit 303a may be received. In this case, in the practice effect, for example, each time the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed while the aim is moving, an insecticide is sprayed, and an effect is performed such that the queen bee can be easily exterminated. Therefore, when a practice effect that accepts multiple presses appears only when a practice effect that accepts the press of the center press operation unit 303a only once appears, the special lottery result has a higher expectation of big hits. It is desirable that the selectivity is determined. Thereby, the player's willingness to operate the center pressing operation unit 303a can be improved.

  Further, the queen bee's elimination success rate in the actual production may be set to be different depending on the result of the practice effect (success or elimination failure of the queen bee). For example, in FIG. 553 (J), the words "It seems to be difficult" (display that appears based on the pressing of the center pressing operation unit 303a) are displayed when the jackpot expectation degree is low, If the jackpot expectation is high, it is desirable to replace the line with a line such as "I made a mistake but I'm almost there." This makes it possible to improve the player's willingness to operate the central pressing operation unit 303a in the actual production when the big hit expectation is high. Also, for example, an effect that always succeeds in exterminating the queen bee in a practice effect may be set to be selected only when the special lottery result is a big hit. In addition, as described above, in the practice effect, the queen bee may always fail to be eliminated. That is, the display in FIG. 553 (J) may be displayed only when the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed.

  In addition, although the aim is a dynamic display in both the practice effect and the production effect, it is desirable that the aim movement is a regular movement (for example, a display that is repeatedly performed such as moving in a figure of eight). This makes it easier for the player to press the center pressing operation unit 303a at a timing when the aim is on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee. Further, an aim used for the practice effect and the production effect may be selected from a plurality of types of aim, and it is desirable that the big hit expectation is set differently depending on the selected plurality of types of aim. For example, if the size of the aim is small, the expectation of big hit is low, if it is large, the expectation of big hit is high, and if it is oversized, the expectation of big hit is extremely high. Have been. Also, for example, the selectivity of these aiming is set such that the big hit expectation is low when the aim is blue, the big hit expectation is high when the aim is green, and the big hit expectation is extremely high when the aim is red. Stipulated.

  Further, the number of selectable sights may be different between the practice effect and the performance effect. For example, the number of sights that can be selected in the production effect may be more, less, or the same as the number of sights that can be selected in the practice effect.

  When the number of sights that can be selected in the production effect is larger than the number of sights that can be selected in the practice effect, for example, two types of small aim and large aim can be selected in the practice effect, and a small aim in the production effect Three types, a large aim and an oversized aim, can be selected. At this time, an extra-large sight with an extremely high jackpot expectation is selected only for the production effect, so that the player can immediately increase the sense of expectation in the production effect.

  In addition, when the number of sights that can be selected in the production effect is larger than the number of sights that can be selected in the practice effect, for example, in the practice effect, three types of a small aim, a large aim, and an oversized aim can be selected. In the production effect, two types, a large aim and an oversized aim, can be selected. At this time, there is a possibility that an oversized aim may be selected even in the practice effect, so that the player's expectation at the time of the practice effect can be increased. Further, in the production effect, since the small aim with the lowest expectation of big hit is not selected, the player's sense of expectation can be increased even during the production effect.

  In addition, when the number of sights that can be selected in the actual production is the same as the number of sights that can be selected in the practice production, for example, in the practice production, three types of small sight, large sight, and extra-large sight can be selected. Even in a live performance, three types of targets can be selected: a small aim, a large aim, and an extra-large aim. At this time, the same degree of expectation as in the production effect is also shown in the practice effect, so that the player can pay attention to both the practice effect and the production effect.

  In addition, the aim selected in the practice effect and the performance effect may be selected according to the selection rate set for each, or according to the selectivity set as a combination of the aim effect selected in the practice effect and the performance effect. It may be selected. However, in any case, it is desirable that an aim having a lower hit expectation than the aim selected in the practice effect is hardly selected or not selected in the actual effect. Thus, for the player, the actual production looks more likely to have the big hit expectation than the practice production, so that the expectation can be maintained or improved.

  Specifically, when the aim selected in the practice effect and the performance effect is selected separately, the selectivity in the performance effect of the aim with a low jackpot expectation is lower than the selectivity in the practice effect of the aim. Is set. Further, for example, an aim having a higher hit expectation than the aim selected in the practice effect may be forcibly selected in the actual effect.

  In addition, when the aim selected in the practice effect and the production effect is selected as a combination, the selectivity of the combination in which the aim in the production effect is lower than the aim in the practice effect is the selectivity of the other combinations. It is set lower. In addition, a combination in which the aim in the production effect has a lower expectation of a big hit than the aim in the practice effect may not be included in the selection targets.

  Note that, in the actual production, it is desirable that no sound is output from various speakers in order to concentrate the player on the operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a. If a sound is output, it is desirable that only a sound corresponding to the dynamic display, such as a sound of moving the aim, be output. In the practice effect, BGM or the like may be output from the speaker. In addition, in the actual production, in order to concentrate the player on the operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a, various lamps provided in the door frame 3, the game board 5, and the like are not blinked (that is, kept off or lit). It is desirable.

  Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may be provided with a movable body (not shown) simulating a tool used for exterminating bees (for example, an insecticide can or an insect net). The movable body is movable on the front side of the effect display device 1600 in front view. At this time, the movable body is used instead of the aim in the bee extermination effect. For example, in the practice effect and the performance effect, when the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, the movable body moves toward the front of the queen bee of the effect display device 1600 in front view.

  At this time, it is desirable that the moving mode of the movable body be different between the case where the queen bee is successfully eliminated in the practice production and the case where the queen bee is successfully eliminated in the production production. For example, when the queen bee is successfully eliminated in the practice performance, it is desirable that the movable body is not largely moved (the dynamic display in which the queen bee moves on the back side in the front view around the initial position of the movable body. At). This is because if the movable body moves greatly, the player may misunderstand that the special lottery result is a big hit. On the other hand, in the actual production, if the queen bee is successfully eliminated, the movable body may move significantly.

  554 and 555 are explanatory diagrams showing another example of the bee extermination effect. 552 and 553 will be described. FIGS. 552 and 553 show examples in which a production effect with a low degree of difficulty is executed after a practice effect with a high degree of difficulty. However, in the examples of FIGS. 554 and 555, a plurality of (for example, up to two times) difficulty levels are used. A low practice effect can be performed. Also, instead of being able to execute a plurality of practice effects, the difficulty level of the production effects is high.

  By performing a plurality of practice effects having a low degree of difficulty in this manner, the player can get used to the operation of the center pressing operation section 303a and can relax the tension. In addition, the player who has become accustomed to the operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a and has relaxed the tension by performing the practice effects a plurality of times can feel the capture element in the production effects having a high degree of difficulty and enjoy the production effects.

  After FIG. 552 (C), the transition is made to FIG. 554 (D '). In (D '), the fact that the special lottery result is not a big hit even if the soldier bee is exterminated, that the practice effect starts with the soldier bee exterminated in advance, and that the practice effect is performed twice. The indicated display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (E ′), a display indicating the start of the first practice effect is displayed on effect display device 1600.

  In (F ′), as in FIG. 553 (K), a queen bee that is a static display, a plurality of soldiers that are a static display, and a moving sight that is a dynamic display. And an operation instruction of the center pressing operation unit 303a (“Press for the timing!”) Are displayed. Also, the plurality of soldier bees that are stationary in (F ′) are not located on the queen bee.

  In (G ′), the effect that the center pressing operation part 303a is pressed at a timing when the aim is not on the queen bee and the insecticide is ejected is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in (H '), as in FIG. 552 (I), a display indicating that the queen bee could not be eliminated is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  In (I ′), a display indicating the start of the second practice effect is displayed on effect display device 1600. (J '), (K'), and (L ') are the same as (F'), (G '), and (H'), respectively.

  In FIG. 555 (M ′), a display indicating that the production effect has started and that the soldier bee and the queen bee are moving in the production effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (N ′), a queen bee that is a moving static display, a plurality of soldier bees that are moving dynamic displays, a sight that is a dynamic display for exterminating the bees, and a central pressing operation unit 303a Is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (O ') is the same as (N').

  In (P ′), at the timing where the aim is at a position above the queen bee and not above the soldier bee, the central pressing operation part 303a is operated, and a display that the insecticide is sprayed on the queen bee is displayed on the effect display device 1600. . In (Q ′), an image indicating that the queen bee was successfully eliminated, that is, an image indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit is displayed, and the soldier bee is still moving. When the queen bee has been successfully eliminated, the display may be such that not only the queen bee but also the soldier bee can be eliminated. (R ') is the same as in FIG. 553 (N).

  As described above, in the examples of FIGS. 554 and 555, a plurality of (up to two) practice effects can be executed in the bee extermination effect. In the production performance, the queen bee and the soldier bee are moving, but in the practice performance, the queen bee and the soldier bee are stationary.

  When the special lottery result is a big hit, there may be a surprise effect pattern in which the queen bee can be eliminated in the practice effect and the result of the special lottery can be reported as it is (that is, the production effect is not executed). Even in this case, there is a possibility that, after the judge effect (practice effect) of the special lottery result by the still image effect, the judge effect (production effect) of the special lottery result by the dynamic effect other than the still image effect is executed. However, the judge effect (practice effect) of the special lottery result by the still image effect is not executed after the jackpot effect (production effect) of the special lottery result by the dynamic effect other than the still image effect.

  However, even when the surprise effect pattern exists, it is desirable that the selectivity of the surprise effect pattern is lower than the selectivity of the other patterns (for example, 1/10 or less of the selectivity of the other patterns). If the selectivity of the surprise effect pattern is low, the sense of excitement of the player can be improved at a stretch by winning in the surprise effect pattern, and if the selectivity of the surprise effect pattern in which the production effect is not executed is high, This is because there is a possibility that the player's sense of expectation for the actual performance may be reduced.

  Note that at least one practice effect may be replaced with an operation explanation effect. The operation explanation effect is, for example, an effect in which the effect of (F ') to (G') or the effect of (J ') to (K') is automatically executed without the operation of the player. Specifically, for example, the operation explanation effect does not display a message prompting the operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a and does not enable the operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a. It differs from the practice effect in that the effect of injecting the agent is displayed and then the extermination result is displayed. Note that the above-described surprise effect pattern may be applied to the operation explanation effect.

  Note that, for example, in the above-described practice effect and the performance effect, the queen bee may be enlarged and displayed in a state where the queen bee is stationary, by zooming in on the central portion of the effect display device 1600. This makes it easier to aim at the queen bee. In addition, the zoom-up may be performed also for the above-described model effect. Further, in the example of FIG. 555, the queen bee is moving in the actual production, but only the soldier bee may move and the queen bee may be stationary.

[20-5-1. Reach production where Daruma fell down]
556 and 557 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the reach effect in which the daruma fell. The reach effect in which the daruma fell is an example of the SP reach effect in which a still image effect may be executed. In the description below, the still image effect includes not only an effect in which dynamic display is performed together with the display of a still image, but also an effect in which only a still image is displayed.

  If the hero character plays a demon of "Dharma fell" and the hero character defeats all other participants (hereinafter also referred to as non-oni), It is a big hit. In addition, after the hero character shouts “Dharma has fallen” and turns around the non-demon, if there is a non-demon moving in that state, the hero character has won the non-demon. In addition, when the fluctuation is an outlier fluctuation, in the reach effect in which the daruma falls, an effect occurs in which the hero character is touched by a non-demon.

  FIG. 556 (A) shows a state in which the reach effect in which the daruma has fallen has started after the reach mode of the decorative symbol is shown. In (A), in the effect display device 1600, the hero character emits a line saying "Dharma-san-ga", during which dynamic display is performed in which four non-devils gradually approach the hero character. In (B), the protagonist character issues a line saying “It has fallen!”. Further, in (B), when the hero character finishes saying the line, the hero character looks back toward the non-demon and stops, and by the time the hero character finishes saying the line, the non-demon movement stops, and a still image effect starts.

  In (C), the still image effect continues, for example, the hero character and the non-demon are standing still in the state at the end of (B). In (D), two of the non-demons cannot endure stillness and move, so that the still image effect has been completed. The non-demon who has moved in (D) does not appear after (E) described later. In addition, even if the still images in the still image effects from (B) to (C) are released, the special lottery result corresponding to the change is not notified. That is, in (D), all non-demons do not move, and the non-demons do not touch the main character.

  Subsequently, in (E), in the effect display device 1600, the hero character emits a line “Da-ru-ma-”, during which the remaining two non-devils gradually approach the hero character. The display has been made. In (F), the protagonist character emits a line saying “sa-n-a-ga-”, during which a dynamic display is performed in which the remaining two non-devils gradually approach the protagonist character.

  In (G), as in (B), the hero character issues a line saying “Fall!”. Further, in (G), as in (B), when the hero character finishes saying the line, the hero character looks back toward the non-demon and stops, and the movement of the non-demon stops until the hero character finishes saying the line. Image production starts.

  Note that the stop position of each non-demon in (G) is a position very close to the hero character (specifically, the hero character after the release of the stillness is referred to as “Dharma fell down”. If the non-demon is always touched by the protagonist character during the period, the position is such that the player recognizes it. Therefore, at the end of the still image production starting from (G), if all non-demons have won (if the still image production starting from (G) ends due to all non-monsters moving), the special lottery result is It is a big hit, and the special lottery result is wrong if the non-demon survives even if the still image production starting from (G) ends. That is, the still image effect starting from (G) can function as a judge effect indicating the special lottery result.

  The still image effect continues until FIG. 557 (J) described later. In (H), the still image effect continues, and the main character displays a line saying "Can you stop for another 5 seconds?" In (I), the countdown display of 5 seconds declared by the main character's line in (H) starts.

  In FIG. 557 (J), a display indicating that the countdown is 4 seconds remaining is displayed. In (K), a display indicating that the countdown is 3 seconds remaining is displayed, and the still image effect is terminated because the two non-devils move without standing still. In the example of (K), the remaining two non-devils are moving in the middle of the countdown, but if the special lottery result is a big hit, the remaining two non-devils will be in the timing up to the end of the countdown. Demon may move at any time.

  For example, the timing at which the special lottery result is notified may be the same between when the special lottery result is a big hit and when it is not. Specifically, for example, when the special lottery result is a big hit, when the remaining time of the countdown becomes 0 seconds, the non-monster cannot move to stand still and moves, and when the special lottery result is out, At the timing when the remaining time of the countdown reaches 0 seconds, an effect occurs in which the main character is touched by a non-demon.

  In (L), the hero character issues a line indicating that "all non-devils have been found!", Which means that the non-devil has won all the non-devils, that is, that the special lottery result has been a big hit. In (M), an image indicating that the special lottery result “Big hit! Congratulations !!” is a big hit is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  If the result of the special lottery is incorrect, for example, there is a non-demon that survives without moving even if the countdown starting from FIG. 556 (I) reaches 0 seconds, and after the countdown reaches 0 seconds ( The still image effect may be ended at the same time as the time when 0 second is reached, or after a predetermined time has elapsed since 0 second. Then, while the protagonist character emits a line saying “Dharma has fallen!” Again, the surviving non-demon touches the protagonist character and is notified that the special lottery result has been lost.

  As described above, the countdown starts after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the still image effect. In other words, even if the still image effect starts, the special lottery result is not shown at least until the countdown display starts, so that the player is not overly nervous until the countdown display starts.

  In addition, when the special lottery result is a big hit, the static display is released and the dynamic display starts at any timing until the countdown reaches 0 seconds, and when the special lottery result is out, the countdown is performed. After 0 seconds, the stillness is released and the dynamic display starts. As described above, since the countdown display is completed before the end of the still image effect, the countdown display is a display indicating the length of a part of the still image effect, and the end of the still image effect (FIGS. 556 and 557). In the example of (1), the timing shows the special lottery result). Therefore, after the countdown display is performed, the player can immediately increase the sense of tension and sense of expectation.

  In the reach effect in which the Daruma fell, the special lottery result is not shown at the end of the first still image effect, and the special lottery result is shown at the end of the second still image effect. By displaying the special lottery result together with the release of the stillness, a tension can be given to the player in the still image effect, but there are not a few players whose tension is too high. Therefore, by executing a series of effects that do not show the special lottery result at the end of the still image effect before the series of effects showing the special lottery result at the end of the still image effect, the player can get used to the still image effect. In the still image effect, the player can be given an appropriate level of tension that does not become excessive.

  Hereinafter, the still image effect in which the special lottery result is not displayed after the end of the still image effect is also referred to as a non-report still image effect, and the still image effect in which the special lottery result is displayed after the end of the still image effect is also referred to as a notification still image effect.

  The non-information still image effect is prepared for the player to get used to the still image effect, and gives the player an expectation by spending a long time on the information still image effect which is important for the player. be able to. On the other hand, the period of the notification still image effect may be shorter than the period of the non-information still image effect. Since the non-information still image effect is performed for a long time, the player can get used to the still image effect in advance, and the player is not excessively nervous in the notification still image effect. The notification still image effect functions as a hit notification effect that leads to the notification of the result of the special lottery, and the non-information still image effect functions as a preparation effect for preparing the mind.

  In addition, a reach effect in which a Daruma-san falls (hereinafter, also referred to as a reach effect in which a first Daruma-san falls) in which the period of the information still image effect is longer than the period of the non-information still image effect, and a non-information still image There may be both a reach effect in which the Daruma-san has fallen (hereinafter, also referred to as a reach effect in which the second Daruma has fallen) in which the period of the notification still image effect is shorter than the period of the effect.

  In this case, it is preferable that the big hit expectation when the first Daruma-san has fallen into a reach effect is higher than the big hit expectation when the second Daruma-san has fallen into a reach effect. By doing so, the jackpot expectation is higher in the case where the period of the notification still image effect is longer than the period of the non-information still image effect, and the player becomes more special as the still period becomes longer in the notification still image effect. Immediately before the announcement of the lottery result, a sense of tension and an expectation can be raised at a stretch.

  On the other hand, the jackpot expectation degree in the case where the reach effect in which the first Daruma falls has occurred may be lower than the jackpot expectation degree in the case where the reach effect in which the second Daruma has fallen occurs. In this manner, the jackpot expectation is higher in the case where the period of the non-information still image effect is longer than the period of the information still image effect, and when the still period in the non-information still image effect is longer, The user can obtain a sense of expectation from an early stage (before the notification still image production starts).

  In the still image production in the reach production in which the daruma fell, a plurality of types of poses in which the non-demon stops may be prepared. For example, the pose of each non-demon is selected in the order of standing on both feet <standing on one foot <pose of the swan so that the probability of the non-demon moving when the stillness is released increases, that is, the expectation of a big hit increases. However, it is desirable that the pose of the two-leg standing with the lowest expectation of big hits appears in the highest ratio in the reach production in which the daruma fell. Since the pose with the lowest expectation degree of the big hit is likely to be selected, it is possible to suppress giving the player an excessive sense of tension.

  In particular, the production in which the non-demon stops at the swan pose (the production with the highest jackpot expectation) may be executed only in the case of the jackpot fluctuation (that is, the appearance of the swan pose indicates the jackpot determination in this case). Thereby, especially when the player stands still in a pose having a high expectation of a big hit, the player can feel long-awaited to release the stillness in the still image effect.

  Note that the main control MPU selects a variation pattern in which the reach production in which the Daruma-san has fallen is executed. However, these stop poses of the non-demon during the reach production in which the Daruma-san has fallen are performed by receiving a command from the main control MPU. May be selected as a notice effect by the peripheral control MPU. The peripheral control MPU may suddenly select a pose (for example, standing on one foot) having a high jackpot expectation in the non-information still image effect executed first, or may select a large hit expectation degree in the information still image effect executed last. May be selected. In the non-information still image production performed first, when a pose with a high expectation of a big hit is suddenly selected, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation from an early stage, and the information still image production performed last In the case where a pose having a high jackpot expectation is selected, the player can immediately increase the sense of expectation and the sense of tension immediately before the notification of the special lottery result.

  In the reach production in which the daruma fell, for example, the non-information still image production performed first is executed last compared with the ratio of selecting a pose with a high jackpot expectation (for example, one-leg standing). In the notification still image effect, the ratio of selecting a pose with a high expectation of big hit is low. Thereby, a sense of expectation can be given to the player from the first non-informational still image.

  On the other hand, in the reach effect in which the daruma fell, the information still image executed last is compared with the ratio in which a pose with a high jackpot expectation (for example, one-leg standing) is selected in the non-information still image effect executed first. In the image effect, the ratio of selecting a pose having a high jackpot expectation may be high. Thereby, the player can enjoy the last notification still image effect without giving up the appearance of the effect with high expectation of big hit.

  In addition, in the reach effect in which the daruma fell, the notification still image executed last is compared with the ratio in which a pose with a high jackpot expectation (for example, one foot standing) is selected in the non-information still image effect executed first. The ratio in which poses with a high expectation of big hits are selected in the image effect may be the same. This allows the player to have a certain degree of expectation for the non-report still image production, and even if a pose with a high jackpot expectation does not appear in the non-report still image production, the final notification still image production. You can get some sense of expectation.

  In the reach effect in which the Daruma-san fell, three or more still image effects may be executed. In this case, for example, by setting only the end of the last still image effect as the notification still image effect, it is possible to further suppress the player from feeling nervous.

  Note that, during the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the non-informational still image effect (the period in which the hero character says “Daru-ma-san” and “Fall!” In FIGS. 556 (A) and (B)). The period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the notification still image effect (in FIGS. 556 (D) to (F), the main characters are “da-ru-ma-” and “sa-n-ga-”. Is preferable to be longer. As a result, the period of the dynamic display immediately before the notification still image effect can be extended, and the expectation of the player can be improved during that period. On the other hand, the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the non-information still image effect may be longer than the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the information still image effect. This makes it possible to lengthen the period of the dynamic display immediately before the non-report still image production, and to give the player a sense of expectation that a production with a high degree of expectation will be performed in the non-report still image production. .

  Also, for example, the period of the non-information still image effect is longer than the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the information still image effect. This allows the player to enjoy the notification still image production while maintaining the increased tension in the non-information still image production. On the other hand, the period of the non-information still image effect may be shorter than the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the information still image effect. This makes it possible to temporarily reduce the player's sense of tension increased by the non-information still image effect, so that the player does not feel excessive tension in the information still image effect.

  Also, for example, the period of the notification still image effect is longer than the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the notification still image effect. This allows the player to enjoy the notification still image production while maintaining the increased tension in the non-information still image production. On the other hand, the period of the notification still image effect may be shorter than the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the notification still image effect. Thus, the notification still image effect is started in a state where the tension of the player increased by the non-information still image effect is once reduced, and the player does not increase the tension in the information still image effect.

  Although the example in which FIG. 556 (A) starts after the reach mode of the decorative symbol has been described has been described, the non-report still image effect is executed before the reach mode of the decorative symbol is displayed, and the non-report still image effect is performed. After the completion of the above, the reach mode may be indicated, and then the notification still image effect may be executed. By performing the non-information still image effect before the reach mode is indicated, the player expects that the decorative symbol will stop in the reach state after the still image is released in the non-information still image effect. Can be.

  In addition, the daruma-san, in which the informational still image effect is performed after the non-informational still image effect as described above, is reached, and the daruma-san, in which only the informational still image effect is performed without performing the non-informational still image effect, is performed. There may be both a fall reach effect. In this case, the informative still image effect is performed after the non-informational still image effect, rather than the reach effect in which the informative still image effect is not performed and the informative still image effect is performed. It is desirable that the reach production has a lower appearance rate but a higher jackpot expectation. Thus, when a non-report still image effect appears, the jackpot is highly expected. Therefore, even for a player who has already become accustomed to the still image effect, a sense of expectation can be obtained by the appearance of the non-information still image effect. .

  As described above, when the notification still image effect is executed, the dynamic display immediately after the end of the notification still image effect indicates the special lottery result (for example, FIG. 557 (K)), but the display of the still image ends. A specific special lottery result can be determined after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, FIG. 557 (M)). For example, as shown in FIG. 557 (M), a video that directly informs of a big hit is displayed, or by displaying a set of three decorative symbols, a specific special lottery result can be determined. ing.

  The predetermined time is shorter than, for example, the period of the notification still image effect. Thereby, the player can determine a specific special lottery result while maintaining the tension due to the notification still image effect. On the other hand, the predetermined time may be longer than the notification still image effect period. This allows the player to determine the state in which the tension caused by the notification still image effect has been reduced, and the specific special lottery result.

  Further, the predetermined time is shorter than, for example, the period of the non-report still image effect. Thereby, the non-report still image effect can be impressed on the player as compared with the period until the specific lottery result is reported. On the other hand, the predetermined time may be longer than the non-report still image effect period. Thereby, from the non-announced still image effect in which the special lottery result is not displayed, the predetermined time indicating the specific special lottery result is impressed to the player, and the player's sense of tension and expectation is increased in the predetermined time. it can.

  The predetermined time is shorter than, for example, the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the notification still image effect. As a result, the dynamic display can be impressed on the player as compared with the period until the specific lottery result is notified. On the other hand, the predetermined time may be longer than the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the notification still image effect. This makes it possible to impress the player with the predetermined time indicating a specific special lottery result from the dynamic display in which the special lottery result is not displayed, and increase the player's sense of tension and expectation during the predetermined time.

  In the non-report still image effect, it is desirable that the BGM that has flowed immediately before is still flowing. As a result, although the image is still, the BGM remains unchanged, so that the player can recognize that the non-announced still image effect is a series of effects from the immediately preceding effect, and the still image is displayed. Even if it is done, the player will not be too nervous. On the other hand, in the notification still image effect, it is desirable that the BGM stops or the volume of the BGM decreases. As a result, not only the image is stopped, but also the BGM is stopped or reduced, so that even a player who is accustomed to the still image effect can have a certain level of tension in the notification still image effect.

  In addition, when the notification still image effect ends and dynamic display starts, a predetermined movable body may be operated. For example, when the special lottery result is a big hit, by operating a predetermined movable body at the timing, the player can easily recognize that the special lottery result is obtained, and the player's feeling of excitement is improved. On the other hand, when the non-report still image effect ends and the dynamic display starts, it is desirable that the movable body is not operated. This is because the player may misunderstand that the special lottery result is a big hit even though the effect for indicating the special lottery result continues after the non-information still image production.

  Further, a predetermined sound may be output when the notification still image effect ends and the dynamic display starts. For example, when the special lottery result is a big hit, by outputting a predetermined sound at the timing, the player can easily recognize that the special lottery result is obtained, and the player's sense of excitement is improved. On the other hand, when the non-report still image effect ends and dynamic display starts, it is desirable not to output the predetermined sound. This is because the player may misunderstand that the special lottery result is a big hit even though the effect for indicating the special lottery result continues after the non-information still image production.

  In the above-described example, the countdown display is started when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the still image effect. However, the countdown display may start simultaneously with the start of the still image effect. Further, as described above, the still image effect may end at the same time when the countdown ends. Therefore, when the countdown display starts at the same time as the start of the still image effect and ends at the same time as the end of the still image effect, the countdown display is a display indicating the entire period of the still image effect. In this case, the player can see the countdown display and measure the timing at which the still image effect ends, so that the player is ready for the mind.

  Also, when the countdown display indicates a partial period of the still image effect and ends at the same time as the end of the still image effect, for example, the countdown display period in the still image effect is longer than the countdown non-display period in the still image effect. May be the same, the same, or shorter. In the countdown display, the player's sense of tension is suppressed, so that the longer the countdown display period in the still image effects, the more the player's sense of tension and expectation can be suppressed. On the other hand, as the countdown display period in the still image effects is shorter, the player's sense of expectation and tension can be improved.

  In addition, when the countdown display indicates a part of the still image effect, starts after the start of the still image effect, and ends before the end of the still image effect, for example, the countdown display period in the still image effect is , May be longer than the total of the countdown non-display period (that is, the total of the period from the start of the still image effect to the start of the countdown display and the period from the end of the countdown display to the end of the still image effect), or may be the same. Good or short.

  The countdown display may start before the start of the still image effect, and may end during the execution of the still image effect (before or at the end). As a result, as described above, the player can prepare for his / her mind by looking at the countdown display during the still image effect and timing the end of the still image effect, and also display the countdown display before the start of the still image effect. By watching, the start timing of the still image effect can be measured, and the mind can be prepared even before the start of the still image effect.

  In the example described above, the countdown display is executed only in the notification still image effect, but the countdown display may be executed also in the non-information still image effect. The big hit expectation when the countdown display is executed in the non-information still image effect is preferably higher than the big hit expectation when the countdown display is not executed in the non-information still image effect. The countdown display reduces the player's sense of tension, but if the expectation of the jackpot is low even though the countdown display has been executed multiple times, it is difficult to obtain a sense of tension and the frequency at which a sense of excitement due to the jackpot is obtained. Because it is not high, it is difficult for the interest of the player to be improved.

  On the other hand, the big hit expectation when the countdown display is executed in the non-information still image effect may be lower than the big hit expectation when the countdown display is not executed in the non-information still image effect. As a result, the smaller the number of times of suppressing the tension, the higher the expectation of the big hit. Therefore, the frequency of winning the big hit in the high tension is increased, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the period of the countdown display executed in the notification still image effect may be longer, the same, or shorter than the period of the countdown display executed in the non-information still image effect. .

  Since the special lottery result is displayed after the end of the notification still image effect, the player is more likely to feel more nervous in the notification still image effect than in the non-information still image effect. Therefore, the effect of suppressing the player's sense of tension is greater because the countdown display period executed in the notification still image effect is longer than the countdown display period executed in the non-information still image effect. On the other hand, since the period of the countdown display executed in the notification still image effect is shorter than the period of the countdown display executed in the non-information still image effect, it is possible to meet the needs of the player seeking a sense of tension.

  In the non-report still image effect, the countdown display may be performed during a part of the non-information still image effect, or the countdown display may be performed during the entire non-information still image effect.

  When the countdown display is executed during a part of the still image effect, the countdown display period includes (1) the countdown display starting from the start of the still image effect and before the end of the still image effect. And (2) a pattern B in which the countdown display starts after the start of the still image effect and ends before the end, and (3) a countdown display starts after the start of the still image effect, And a pattern C that ends at the end of the still image effect.

  When the countdown display is executed during a part of the non-report still image effect, it is desirable that the effect is selected in the order of pattern B <pattern C <pattern A so that the big hit expectation increases. Since the special lottery result is not displayed after the end of the non-information still image effect, the non-information still image effect is less likely to attract the interest of the player than the information still image effect. Therefore, by setting a high expectation degree of the big hit of the pattern A in which the countdown display starts at the same time as the start of the non-information still image effect and the pattern C in which the countdown display starts at the same time as the end of the non-information still image effect. Thus, the player can be noticed from the start to the end of the non-informational still image effect.

  On the other hand, when the countdown display is performed during a part of the notification still image effect, it is desirable that the effect is selected in the order of pattern A <pattern B <pattern C so that the big hit expectation increases. In other words, in the notification still image effect, the larger the start timing of the countdown display and the later the end timing, the higher the expectation of a big hit. Therefore, the player starts the countdown display early until the countdown display starts. It is possible to enjoy the effect that there is no hope that the countdown end will not come early after the countdown display starts.

  When a pattern B having a low jackpot expectation appears in the non-information still image production, a pattern C having a high jackpot expectation is provided in the notification still image production in order to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player thereafter. It is desirable that it be set so that it is always selected.

  If the timing at the end of the still image effect and the timing of the end of the countdown display are the same, the countdown display may be made to be recognizable for a predetermined period even after the timing at which the still image effect ends. Specifically, for example, at the same time as the countdown display becomes “0”, the still image effect ends and the dynamic display starts, but the countdown display of “0” remains displayed for a predetermined period thereafter, Effects such as enlarging the display, making the countdown display translucent, and applying an effect such as smoke to the countdown display may be performed. Thereby, the lingering countdown display can be left for the player.

  It is desirable that the length of the countdown non-display period in the non-information still image effect is longer than the length of the countdown non-display period in the information still image effect. Since the special lottery result is not displayed after the non-report still image effect, by increasing the countdown non-display period, it is possible to draw the player's attention and give a sense of tension. On the other hand, the length of the countdown non-display period in the non-information still image effect may be shorter than the length of the countdown non-display period in the information still image effect.

  Further, the ratio of the length of the countdown display period to the length of the entire period of the non-report still image effect may be larger than the ratio of the length of the countdown display period to the length of the entire period of the notification still image effect. desirable. Since the special lottery result is not shown after the non-announced still image production, increasing the ratio of the countdown non-display period to the entire period of the non-announced still image production draws the player's attention and gives them a sense of tension. Can be. On the other hand, the ratio of the length of the countdown display period to the length of the entire period of the non-report still image effect may be smaller than the ratio of the length of the countdown display period to the length of the entire period of the informative still image effect. Good.

[20-5-2. Another example of reach production where Daruma fell]
FIG. 558 shows another example of the reach effect in which the daruma fell. In FIGS. 556 and 557, an example in which the non-report still image effect is executed only once is described, but in FIG. 558, the non-report still image effect is executed a plurality of times.

  After FIG. 556 (D), the flow shifts to FIG. 558 (E '). That is, (E ') is a state immediately after the end of the first non-report still image effect. In (E ′), in the effect display device 1600, the main character emits a line “Dharma-san”, during which dynamic display is performed in which the two non-devils gradually approach the main character. In (F ′), the main character emits a line “Fall!”. Further, in (F '), when the hero character finishes saying the line, the hero character looks back toward the non-demon and stops, and by the time the hero character finishes saying the line, the non-demon movement stops, and a still image effect starts.

  In (G ′), the still image effect continues, for example, the hero character and the non-demon are still in the state at the end of (F ′). In (H ′), since the non-demon does not move even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the still image effect, the still image effect ends, and the image displayed in (G ′) is faded out. . The image gradually fades out from (H ′) to (I ′).

  The effect of (J ') is the same as in FIG. 556 (E), and the subsequent effects are the same as in FIGS. 556 and 557. Since the special lottery result is not shown even if the dynamic effect starts after the end of (I '), the still image effect up to (I') is a non-information still image effect.

  As described above, at the end timing of the first non-announced still image effect (FIGS. 556 (C) to (D)), the still image is moved without fading out (without applying an effect or the like to the still image). Has been switched to the target display. In other words, at the moment when the display is switched to the dynamic display, the entire still image displayed as the non-informational still image cannot be recognized by the player. On the other hand, at the end timing of the second non-report still image effect (FIGS. 558 (H ') to (I')), the display is switched to the dynamic display by fading out the still image.

  By performing a plurality of non-announced still image effects in the reach effect in which the Daruma-san fell down in this manner, the player became more accustomed to still image effects, and the player was overly nervous about the still image effects. Can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, as the number of non-information still image effects increases, the player may become tired of the non-information still image effects. Therefore, in the case where a plurality of non-information still image effects are performed in one reach effect in which the Daruma-san has fallen, the image is faded out at the end of a part of the non-information still image effects, so that the non-information still image effect is produced. , And the player is not bored even if a plurality of non-information still image effects are performed. In addition, even in the case where the non-information still image effect is performed only once in the reach effect in which the daruma falls, the image may be faded out at the end of the one non-information still image effect.

  It is desirable that the fade-out time in the non-report still image effect accompanied by the fade-out is shorter than the image still time in the non-report still image effect. This is because if the fade-out time is longer, there is a possibility that the increased tension caused by the display of the still image in the non-report still image effect may be completely resolved within the fade-out time. In order to temporarily reduce the tension caused by the display of the still image, the fade-out time when the non-report still image production ends and the image fades out is longer than the image still time in the non-report still image production. Is also good.

  In the example of FIG. 558, after the image displayed in the non-informational still image effect is faded out and completely erased, the dynamic display of “Dharma has fallen” in (J ′) is started. However, the dynamic display of “Dharma-san has fallen” in (J ′) may be started during or from the start of the fade-out of the image displayed in the non-information still image effect.

  Specifically, for example, from the timing of (H ') or (I'), the dynamic display of "Dharma fell" in (J ') is started. In this case, for example, a semi-transparent image that is being faded out is superimposed on the dynamic display of “Dharma has fallen” in (J ′). As a result, a dynamic display of “Dharma has fallen” can be performed for the player while leaving the lingering still image effect.

  In addition, a first display time which is a display time of a still image in a non-report still image effect without image fade-out, and a second display time which is a display time of a still image in a non-information still image effect without image fade-out. , May have the same or different lengths. For example, if the degree of big hit expectation of the reach where the daruma fell is different depending on whether or not a non-announced still image effect accompanied by fade-out occurs, the first display time and the second display time are different, and the player is notified of the non-announced still image By focusing on the display time during the production, it is possible to have a further sense of tension and expectation.

  For example, since the second display time is longer than the first display time, the length of the second display time can be made closer to the total time of the first display time and the fade-out time. By maintaining the balance of the length of time, it is possible to give the player an impression of both effects. However, it is desirable that the second display time is shorter than the total time of the first display time and the fade-out time in order to maintain the balance of the length of time between effects. Note that the length of the second display time may be longer than the total time of the first display time and the fade-out time.

  On the other hand, since the second display time is shorter than the first display time, the difference between the total length of the first display time and the fade-out time and the length of the second display time can be increased. Thus, a series of effects including a non-informational still image effect and a fade-out can strongly impress the player.

  Further, the length of the third display time, which is the display time of the still image in the notification still image effect, and the length of the first display time may be the same or different. For example, when the third display time is longer than the first display time, a sense of tension can be increased in the notification still image that notifies the special lottery result. In particular, when the third display time is longer than the total time of the first display time and the fade-out time, the effect is remarkably exhibited. Note that the third display time may be longer than the first display time, and the third display time may be shorter than the total time of the first display time and the fade-out time.

  Note that, as described above, depending on the form of the still image in the still image effect, the jackpot expectation may be different (for example, the non-demon can stand on both feet, stand on one foot, or take a swan pose). The jackpot expectations are different). For example, after a non-informational still image effect in which a still image with a high jackpot expectation (for example, a non-demon standing on one leg or a swan pose) is displayed, the still image with a high jackpot expectation is executed by performing fade-out. The player can be clearly recognized, and the expectation of the player can be improved.

  On the other hand, for example, after an unreported still image effect in which a still image with a low jackpot expectation (for example, a non-demon standing on both feet) is displayed, the still image is immediately deleted by not performing the fade-out, and the next image is deleted. , The discouragement of the player can be suppressed. In addition, it is determined that there is a fade in the case of a non-announced still image effect having a plurality of non-announced still image effects with different degrees of expectation, and that there is no fade in the case of a non-information still image effect without a plurality of non-announced still image effects with different degrees of expectation , May be.

  Note that when the image is being faded out, it is desirable not to maintain the light emission mode of the lamp performed in the immediately preceding non-informational still image effect. Specifically, for example, when the image is being faded out, instead of the light emission mode of the lamp performed in the immediately preceding non-informational still image production, the dynamic display immediately after (the hero character is “Daruma-san has fallen” Of the lamp corresponding to the effect “). Thereby, at the time when the fade-out of the image starts, the player can recognize that the non-report still image effect has ended, and the player can turn his or her consciousness to the next effect.

  Further, when the image is being faded out, it is desirable not to maintain the sound output in the immediately preceding non-informational still image effect. Specifically, for example, when the image is being faded out, the sound is not the sound that was output in the immediately preceding non-informational still image effect, but is the dynamic display immediately after (the main character “Dharma fell!”). Is output. Thereby, at the time when the fade-out of the image starts, the player can recognize that the non-report still image effect has ended, and the player can turn his or her consciousness to the next effect.

  In the example of FIG. 558, the non-information still image effect without image fade-out and the non-information still image effect with image fade-out are performed within one fluctuation (reach effect in which Daruma-san fell). However, one of these non-announced still image effects may not be executed in one reach effect in which the daruma falls.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 558, the non-report still image production with the image fade-out is executed after the non-information still image production without the image fade-out, but the non-information still image production with the image fade-out is performed. Later, a non-informational still image effect without image fade-out may be performed. Since the non-report still image effect accompanied by fade-out of the image is executed, the player feels lingering with the non-information still image effect by the fade-out, and therefore, the non-notified image without the fade-out of the image executed thereafter is performed. You can enjoy still image effects.

  Note that the non-report still image effect may be terminated by an image effect other than fade-out as long as it can leave a lingering sound to the player. For example, changing the contrast, brightness, and / or transmittance of an image, and changing the image to monochrome or color are examples of the image effect. Another example of the image effect is to display another image or a moving image on the image displayed in the non-report still image effect. Further, instead of fading out, for example, a part or the whole of the image is displayed in a form in which the image is broken or a hole is opened, and a part or the whole of the display content of the image changes, so that the non-informational stationary The image effect may end.

  In addition, even if both the reach effect where the daruma who performed the non-information still image production with fade-out fell and the reach effect where the daruma who did not perform the non-information still image production with fade-out fell were executable, Good. If both can be executed, it is desirable that the reach effect in which the Daruma-san performing the non-informational still image effect accompanied by fade-out has a higher jackpot expectation is obtained. Fade-out can leave a lingering effect on the still image effect, but if the expectation of the big hit is low, the player will have a stronger impression of the special lottery result being missed, and the Daruma will fall This is because there is a risk that interest in the reach production may be weakened.

  On the other hand, for example, the reach production in which the daruma who does not perform the non-informational still image production with fade-out falls has a greater jackpot expectation degree than the reach production in which the non-informational still image production with fade-out has fallen. May be higher. As a result, the reach effect that the Daruma who performed the non-informational still image production with fade-out fell, leaving the impression on the player by the lingering fade-out, and the Daruma-san who did not perform the non-informational still image production with the fade-out fell With regard to the reach effect, the possibility of a big hit is high, so that an impression can be left on the player, and the impression on both players can be left in a well-balanced manner.

  Note that the image may be faded out at the end of the notification still image effect as well. When the image fades out at the end of the notification correct image effect, for example, when the special lottery result is a big hit, the player can feel the excitement by feeling the finish of the effect connected to the big hit. .

[20-6. Information process selection reach production]
FIG. 559, FIG. 560, and FIG. 561 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the notification process selection reach effect. The notification process selection reach effect is an example of an SP reach effect in which a still image effect may be executed.

  In FIG. 559 (A), the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state. In (B), the notification process selection reach effect has started. In (B), a still image effect has been started. In (B), an image of a gauge for indicating the degree of expectation that the special lottery result in the variation during execution is a big hit is displayed on the left part of the effect display device 1600, and an execution image is displayed on the right part of the effect display device 1600. The images of the patrol lamps for announcing the special lottery result in one shot (that is, directly indicating whether the special lottery result is a big hit or a non-big hit without suggesting the jackpot expectation etc.) It is displayed as an image.

  In (C), the image of the effect operation unit 301 is displayed at the center of the effect display device 1600 while the gauge image and the patrol lamp image corresponding to the notification process selection reach effect are displayed as still images. Further, one of the gauge image or the patrol lamp image (the gauge image in (C)) is displayed in the same bright mode as in (B), and the other (the patrol lamp image in (C)) is displayed in a darkened mode. .

  The image of the effect operation unit 301 has a display indicating that pressing the center pressing operation unit 303a selects the notification method indicated by the image displayed in a bright manner. By operating the rotation operation unit 302, an image displayed in a bright mode and an image displayed in a dark mode can be exchanged (that is, a notification method is selected) in the image of the effect operation unit 301. The display shows that you can do it. The image of the effect operation unit 301 may be displayed as a still image. For example, the center pressing operation unit 303a in the image moves up and down, the rotation operation unit 302 in the image rotates, It may be displayed as a dynamic display such as an arrow in the image moving.

  When the player presses the center pressing operation unit 303a in (C), or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the image of the staging operation unit 301 in (C) is displayed, the notification method displayed in a bright manner is selected. Is done. In addition, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the image of the effect operation unit 301 in (C) is displayed, one (for example, the suggestion of the expected degree) may be forcibly selected, or the suggestion of the expected degree or one shot may be randomly performed. Announcements may be selected.

  In (C), both the gauge image and the patrol lamp image may be displayed in a bright manner without changing from the state of (B). In this case, for example, in (C), when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the left, the expectation suggestion is selected, and when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right, one-shot notification is selected. An image suggesting a selection method by an operation is displayed on effect display device 1600. In this case, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the image of the effect operation unit 301 in (C) was displayed, for example, one (for example, the suggestion of the expected degree) was forcibly selected, or the expected degree of the expected degree was randomly selected. Alternatively, one notification is selected.

  (D) is a state in which one-shot notification is selected in (C). In (D), the still image effect ends and the stillness is released, and only the image of the patrol lamp is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600. In (D), a dynamic display in which a patrol lamp is lit is displayed as a display indicating that the special lottery result in the fluctuation is a big hit. In (E), an image that more clearly informs that the special lottery result is a big hit is displayed. Note that a predetermined movable body may be moved in (D).

  For example, when the special lottery result in the fluctuation is out of order, in (D), for example, a dynamic display in which the effect display device 1600 darkens without lighting the patrol lamp is performed, and in (E), “Sorry. ····································· Image that informs that the special lottery result is “losing” such as “losing”.

  FIG. 560 (D ') shows a state where the expectation degree suggestion is selected in FIG. 559 (C). In (D '), the still image effect ends and the stillness is released, only the gauge image is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600, and the display "Store the gauge!" Is displayed. Gauges can be stored in up to eight levels. In (E '), gauges are stored in three levels, and a display indicating that there is still a chance to store gauges ("Not yet!") Is displayed on the staging display device 1600. Is displayed. For example, only when the special lottery result is a big hit, the gauge may be set to accumulate up to the maximum value of eight stages.

  In addition, when the predetermined time has elapsed and the expectation degree suggestion has been selected forcibly without operating the center pressing operation unit 303a after the image of the effect operation unit 301 in (C) is displayed, In (D ′), the number of gauge stages does not have to be increased. It is possible that the player did not operate the center pressing operation unit 303a because he did not want to know the degree of expectation, and this is to satisfy such a player's wish.

  In (F '), the state returns to the state similar to that in FIG. However, the number of stages of the gauge displayed as a still image may reflect the number of stages accumulated in the immediately preceding effect as shown in (F ′), or may be completely accumulated as shown in (C). It may be displayed in a state where it does not exist.

  (G ′) is a state where the expectation degree suggestion is selected in (F ′). In (G ′), as in (D ′), the still image effect ends and the stillness is released, only the gauge image is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600, and the display “Store gauge!” Is displayed. Is done. However, this is different from (D ′) in that the gauge is accumulated from the number of stages accumulated in the immediately preceding effect.

  In (H ′), the gauges are accumulated up to four levels, and a display (“more and more!”) Indicating that there is still a chance to accumulate the gauges is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (I '), the state returns to the same state as (F').

  When a series of effects for accumulating the gauge are repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, five times) by selecting the suggestion of the degree of expectation, the effect of suggesting the degree of expectation ends at the end of the effect of accumulating the gauge of the predetermined number of times, and is now displayed. A display is made to indicate that the number of gauge stages present indicates the jackpot expectation ("To that point" in (J ')). (J ') is the state at the end of the effect of accumulating the gauge for the predetermined number of times. In the state of (J '), the gauge has accumulated up to six levels.

  In (H '), the gauge image darkens, and the patrol lamp image is displayed in a bright manner. Further, although the image of the effect operation unit 301 is displayed, the display urging the pressing of the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed, but the display urging the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is not displayed. That is, after performing the effect of accumulating the gauge a predetermined number of times, in (H '), the one-shot notification is forcibly selected. In other words, the number of gauge steps in (J ') indicates the jackpot expectation.

  FIG. 561 (I ′) shows a state in which the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in (J ′), and shows the result of the special lottery by turning on or off the patrol lamp as in FIG. 559 (D). Note that, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display of (J '), the flow shifts to FIG. 561 (I') even if the center pressing operation unit 303a is not pressed. Subsequently, in (J '), as in FIG. 559 (E), an image for more clearly informing that the special lottery result is a big hit is displayed.

  Note that, after selecting the expectation degree suggestion, a still image effect for selecting the notification method is performed again (for example, in FIG. 560 (F ′) and (I ′)), but one notification is selected in the still image effect. In this case, as shown in FIG. 559 (D), a one-time notification indicating the special lottery result is performed by displaying a patrol lamp.

  The player can get a sense of tension and a sense of expectation by the static display of the still image effect, but some players feel that the game is still interesting because the player is still. Therefore, as described above, in the notification process selection reach production, in the still image production, the method of reporting the special lottery result can be selected from the degree of expectation suggestion or one-shot notification. You can make them interested in the production.

  In addition, as described above, in the still image effect, it is possible to select multiple times for the suggestion of expectation or one notification, and in the last still image effect, only the patrol lamp of one notification can be selected. Is set. As a result, in the notification process selection reach production, the special lottery result is finally indicated by one announcement. Furthermore, in the notification process selection reach effect, a plurality of expectations degree suggestion effects can be selected, so that the player's sense of expectation can be gradually increased. Furthermore, even after selecting the effect suggesting the degree of expectation one or more times, it is possible to switch to the one-shot announcement, so that the player can know the special lottery result at the stage when the degree of expectation is satisfied, and furthermore, the player Never get bored.

  In the example described above, when the suggestion of expectation was selected, the stage number of the gauge was increased in the effect of accumulating the gauge, but the effect is terminated with the immediately preceding stage number without increasing the stage number of the gauge. May be. For example, even if the effect of accumulating the gauge a predetermined number of times (for example, five times) is completed, if the gauge is equal to or less than a predetermined level (for example, if the level is zero), the big hit may be determined.

  In addition, when the gauge is accumulated, for example, a continuous striking effect is performed in which the player is prompted to repeatedly hit an operation unit such as the center pressing operation unit 303a and the number of gauge stages is increased in such a manner that the gauge accumulates according to the number of repeated hits. May be. However, the maximum number of stages of the gauge in the production that accumulates the gauges of each time is determined by the predetermined distribution based on the special lottery result before the start of the production, and after reaching the maximum number of stages, repeatedly hit the operation unit However, it is not assumed that the number of steps exceeds the maximum number of steps.

  As described above, the still image effect executed in the notification process selection reach is a case where the expected value suggestion is selected from among effects (FIG. 559 (C)) in which both the expected value suggestion and the one-shot notification can be selected. And a second still image effect in which a continuous hit effect is executed when the expectation degree suggestion is selected. Still image effects performed in the notification process selection reach include a third still image effect (FIG. 560 (H ′)) in which only one notification can be selected.

  The effective period of the effect operation unit 301 may be different depending on the type of the still image effect. For example, after the third still image effect, the most important special lottery result for the player is forcibly shown, so that the player can obtain the special lottery result by his / her own operation. Is desirably longer than the effective periods in the second still image effect and the first still image effect. Further, when the expectation degree suggestion is selected in the second still image effect, a continuous hitting effect is performed in which the player can enjoy confirming the expectation degree by the operation of the player himself / herself. It is desirable that the effective period in the second still image effect is longer than the effective period in the first still image effect.

  In addition, the size of the image of the effect operation unit 301 displayed during the still image effect may be different depending on the type of the still image effect. For example, after the third still image effect, the most important special lottery result for the player is forcibly shown, so that the player can obtain the special lottery result by his / her own operation. It is desirable that the image of the effect operation unit 301 be larger than the images of the effect operation unit 301 in the second still image effect and the first still image effect. Further, when the expectation degree suggestion is selected in the second still image effect, a continuous hitting effect is performed in which the player can enjoy confirming the expectation degree by the operation of the player himself / herself. It is desirable that the image of the effect operation unit 301 in the second still image effect is larger than the image of the effect operation unit 301 in the first still image effect.

  Further, in the above-described example, one notification is selected by operating the center pressing operation unit 303a in the third still image effect, but a plurality of operating units (for example, the center pressing operation unit 303a, the outer circumference pressing operation) are selected. The operation of the operation unit selected from the unit 303b and the rotation operation unit 302) may be prompted, and the notification may be selected by operating the operation unit. In this case, for example, a difference may be provided in the jackpot expectation degree depending on the selected operation unit.

  The image of the effect operation unit 301 may appear at the same time as the start of the still image effect, or may appear after the start of the still image effect. Further, the length of time from the start of the still image effect to the appearance of the image of the effect operation unit 301 may vary depending on the type of the still image effect. For example, the time from the start of the still image effect to the appearance of the image of the effect operation unit 301 is longer in the order of the third still image effect> the second still image effect> the first still image effect.

  A special lottery result is shown after the third still image effect, and a continuous hit effect is executed after the second still image effect when the expectation degree suggestion is selected, and the first still image when the expectation degree suggestion is selected. After the image effect, the repeated hit effect is not executed, and the degree of expectation is suggested. In other words, since the effects that are important to the player are performed in the order of the third still image effect> the second still image effect> the first still image effect, the effect operation unit 301 starts after the still image effect starts in this order. By increasing the time until the image of the above does appear, it is possible to give the player a period of preparing his mind for an operation for starting an important effect.

  In the example described above, the effect that the gauge gradually accumulates until a predetermined stage after a predetermined time has elapsed after the expectation suggestion is selected has been described. Good. Thereby, the player can immediately confirm the degree of expectation. In this case, the gauge may gradually accumulate up to the predetermined stage at the same time as the expectation suggestion is selected, or the gauge may enter the predetermined stage at the same time as the expectation suggestion is selected without going through the middle stage. Is also good.

  If the expectation degree suggestion is forcibly selected after a predetermined time has elapsed without operating the center pressing operation unit 303a, for example, the image of the effect operation unit 301 is displayed from FIG. 559 (C). The deleted image may be displayed, and in this case, the number of stages of the gauge does not need to be changed. Accordingly, the player recognizes that the degree of expectation does not increase unless the player operates the effect operation unit 301, and thus can provide an incentive to operate the effect operation unit 301. However, in the last effect in which the expectation suggestion can be selected, even if the expectation suggestion is forcibly selected after a predetermined time has elapsed without operating the center pressing operation unit 303a. It is desirable that an effect that accumulates is executed.

  In the example described above, the number of stages of the gauge is 0 at the timing before the player selects the suggestion of expectation (the timing of FIG. 559 (B)). All may be accumulated. However, if it is determined that the state in which all the gauges are stored is determined to be a big hit, if all the gauges are stored at the timing, the big hit is determined at the timing, and the player selects the notification process. In such a case, it is desirable that at least a part of the gauge is stored at the timing in such a case because the reach effect may not be enjoyed to the end.

  For the image of the rendering operation unit 301 in the last state, effects are combined, or the color is changed according to the jackpot expectation degree (for example, if the gauge is a predetermined number of steps or more, red, the gauge If the number is smaller than the number of stages, white may be used. This allows the player to feel an expectation not only by the gauge but also by the image of the effect operation unit 301.

  In addition, in the notification process selection reach production, the image of the production operation unit 301 in the selection production other than the last which can select both the expectation degree suggestion and the one announcement, and the production in the last selection production in which only the one announcement can be selected The image of the operation unit 301 may be common. As a result, the image of the effect operation unit 301 does not change even in the final state, and the player estimates the jackpot expectation only by the stage of the gauge, so that the player's consciousness is concentrated on the effect of accumulating the gauge. be able to.

  In addition, for example, the display period of the image of the effect operation unit 301 is the same as the effective period of the effect operation unit 301 (the center pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. However, the last time in which only one notification can be selected. In the selection effect, the display of the image of the effect operation unit 301 may be started before the start of the validity period of the effect operation unit 301. The final selection effect is the player's expectation in the notification process selection reach effect. Is an effect that can be enjoyed in the state where the effect is the highest, and by starting to display the image of the effect operation unit 301 before the start of the effective period of the effect operation unit 301, the player can surely perform the last selection operation. You can enjoy doing it.

  In addition, the validity period of effect operation unit 301 in the last selected effect in which only one notification can be selected is the validity period of effect operation unit 301 in the selected effect other than the last in which both the suggestion of expectation and the one notification can be selected. Longer is desirable. Thereby, the player can surely enjoy the last selection operation. In addition, the validity period of the effect operation unit 301 in the last selection effect in which only one announcement can be selected is the validity period of the effect operation unit 301 in the other than the last selection effect in which both the suggestion of expectation and the one notification can be selected. It may be shorter or the same.

  In addition, when the expectation suggestion effect is selected, a plurality of still image effects are executed. In the dynamic display executed during the plurality of still image effects, the expectation suggestion and one-shot The image of the effect operation unit 301 in a selected effect other than the last in which both of the notifications can be selected may be displayed. Thereby, the player can prepare for the selection operation in the next still image effect.

[20-7. Pending set production]
FIG. 562 and FIG. 563 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a pending set effect. The pending set effect is an example of an effect in which a still image effect may be executed. In FIG. 562 (A), all decorative symbols are changing, and there are three more reservations. In (A), five hold displays are displayed. The center hold display is a hold display corresponding to the change during execution, and each of the other hold displays corresponds to the change for the next and subsequent four times. This is the corresponding hold display.

  In the state of (A), the game ball B enters the starting port (first starting port 2002 or second starting port 2004) to acquire a new hold, so that the holding set effect may start. is there. (B) is a state in which the hold set effect has started due to the above-described opportunity. Since the game ball B has entered the starting port and acquired a new hold, (B) shows a state in which there are four holds. When the suspended set effect starts, an effect in which the Great Demon King appears on the effect display device 1600 is executed.

  In (C), the still image effect starts, and the Great Demon King that appeared in (B) is displayed as a still image for a predetermined time. In the still image effect, the hold display on the effect display device 1600 does not change.

  In (D), the still image effect ends, and an effect in which the main character appears on the effect display device 1600 is executed by dynamic display. In (E), the protagonist character issues a line saying “Holding Collective Chance!”, And each hold display on the effect display device 1600 moves to the upper part of the protagonist character image.

  In (F), in the effect display device 1600, the hold displays moved to the upper part of the hero character are united to form one ball (hereinafter also referred to as a courage ball). As a result, the suspended display is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 once. (G) shows a state in which the hero character is throwing a courage ball. In (H), a state in which the hero character throws a courage ball thrown by the Great Demon King is displayed.

  In (I), the still image effect has started, and the Great Demon King who is receiving the courage is displayed as a still image. In FIG. 563 (J) described below, the still image effect also functions as a judge effect because the special lottery result notifies a hold that is a big hit.

  In FIG. 563 (J), the still image effect ends and the stillness is released, and the special lottery result of either the pending change “WIN !!” or the running change in the effect display device 1600 is a big hit. Is displayed.

  Subsequently, in (K), in addition to the display of (J), a hold display is displayed in the original area, and a display indicating which special lottery result corresponding to which hold is a big hit is performed. In the example of FIG. 563, the hold display corresponding to the successive changes of the running change is illuminated collectively with the effect, and the special lottery result corresponding to this change is a big hit. In (J) and (K), all the decorative patterns are changing.

  The appearance timing of the effect indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit (effect in (K), hereinafter also referred to as a big hit effect) may be immediately before or at the end of the fluctuation during execution. As a result, the player can maintain a sense of tension until the end of the change during execution.

  In the illustrated example, the big hit effect has a size that covers the hold display corresponding to the big hit change, but may have a size smaller than the hold display. Specifically, for example, the big hit effect may be an effect that occurs only inside the hold display corresponding to the big hit variation (the inside of the hold display shines).

  The big hit effect may overlap a part of the hold display corresponding to the big hit, and a part of the big hit effect may protrude from the hold display. In addition, the jackpot effect may be overlapped with at least a part of the hold display corresponding to the jackpot, and may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 on a layer prior to the hold display (that is, a layer on the near side as viewed from the player). . That is, in this case, at least a part of the suspension display is hidden by the big hit effect.

  If all the special lottery results of the pending fluctuations and the ongoing fluctuations are incorrect, for example, in (J), all the special lottery results are incorrect, such as "Sorry ...". Is displayed, and the hold display is displayed again on the effect display device 1600 in the same manner as in (B) to (D), that is, in a normal manner.

  In addition, when there is a big hit change in the running change and the pending change, the big hit effect may be displayed after performing the same effect as the above-described outlier. In this case, the jackpot effect may be displayed after displaying "WIN !!" as a resurrection effect after the outgoing effect, or the jackpot effect itself may be revived without displaying "WIN !!". It may be. At this time, the big hit effect may be a change after the next change of the currently executed change, and may be started from a change before the big hit change.

  In addition, when there is no big hit fluctuation in the fluctuations during execution and the fluctuations on hold, the fluctuations on hold are quickly digested after the hold set effect (specifically, for example, the fluctuation time is 2 seconds or less). It is desirable that a fluctuation pattern as short as possible is selected). The player will not be interested in the change that the special lottery result is found to be out of place, and if the fluctuation time of the change is long, the discouragement of the player will be maintained during that time, This is because it degrades interest.

  In addition, when there is a big hit change in the running change and the pending change, the change before the big hit change may or may not be exhausted at high speed. Since the fluctuations before the jackpot fluctuation are rapidly digested, the fluctuations in which the special lottery result is found to be out of order can be ended early, and the game can be shifted to the jackpot game, and the game time for the player can be reduced. Efficiency is improved. On the other hand, when the fluctuation before the jackpot fluctuation is not rapidly digested, the player's feeling of excitement for winning the jackpot can be maintained in the period of the fluctuation that is not rapidly digested.

  As described above, in the hold set effect, it is notified whether or not there is a change in which the special lottery result is a big hit among the change during execution and the change during hold. Since the fluctuations during execution and the fluctuations on hold are total of five fluctuations, the hold set effect is successful according to the jackpot expectation degree in the five fluctuations. For example, if the special lottery result of the change during execution is missed, and the special lottery result of the next change on hold is a big hit, the normal effect will produce an outage for the change during execution, but the hold set In the effect, an effect indicating a big hit in the fluctuation during the execution is performed. In other words, the chance of appearance of a time-consuming out-of-stage effect is reduced, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

  As described above, at the end of the first still image effect (i.e., the still image effect in the state where the hold display is displayed), it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot change in the change during execution and the change during hold. Does not show judge results.

  Note that, for example, from the end of the first still image effect to the point where the hold display is not performed on the effect display device 1600 (for example, the period of FIG. 562 (D)), the hold change effect may be performed. Specifically, for example, the change expectation of the big hit corresponding to the hold display changed to red is higher than the big hit expectation of the change corresponding to the hold that does not change the hold display, so that the hold change effect is increased. Do. The tension imparted to the player by the first still image effect is once loosened by the end of the still image effect, but the holding change effect is performed at the timing described above, and the game is performed even during the period until the courage ball is formed. People can be expected.

  In the example of FIG. 562, the reservation gathering chance is executed in (E) and the courage ball is formed in (F). However, even if an effect in which the reservation gathering chance fails and a courage ball is not formed is executed. Good. Specifically, in (F), the formation of the courage ball failed, and each hold display returned to the original position, and the position of the hold display is displayed as it is without moving until the change ends. Instead of the effects of (G) and (H), for example, an effect is performed in which the main character attacks the Great Demon King with bare hands, and instead of (I), the Great Demon King after the attack is displayed as a still image. (Ie, a still image in a mode different from that of (I) is displayed). Thereafter, similarly to FIG. 563 (J), it is notified whether or not there is a jackpot variation among the variation during execution and the variation pending.

  Note that the jackpot expectation degree in the case where a still image effect as a judge effect is performed after the success of the hold set chance is higher than the jackpot expectation degree in the case where a still image effect as a judge effect is performed after the failure in the hold set chance. . In other words, if the holding collective chance fails and the still image effect and the release of the still image are performed with the hold display being displayed and the special lottery result is announced, the hold collective chance succeeds and the hold is set. When the still image effect and the cancellation of the still image are performed in a state where the display is not displayed and the special lottery result is notified, the big hit expectation is higher.

  In addition, when the hold display is displayed during the still image effect, the hold display may be a dynamic display. For example, each of the hold displays is displayed in a shaking or rotating manner, or even if the hold display itself is still, the brightness of each of the hold displays changes, or the effect of the hold display changes. You may. Since the hold display is displayed in the dynamic display during the still image effect, the dynamic display and the still image are compared and recognized remarkably.

  It is preferable that the big hit effect is continuously displayed until the change with respect to the hold indicating the big hit is completed. This is because a sense of security can be given to the player.

  However, on the other hand, if the display in which the jackpot has been confirmed is displayed for a long time (until the fluctuation of the hold indicating that the jackpot is completed is completed), it may be seen by the next player with white eyes, Since the possibility of thinking cannot be denied, for example, it is displayed until immediately before the end of the current fluctuation, until the end of the current fluctuation, or until the start of the next fluctuation of the current fluctuation. Alternatively, only a relatively short time may be displayed.

  The relatively short time is, for example, a time shorter than the static display (I), a period less than half of the period (J) of the dynamic display, or less than half. The period and the latter half of the dynamic display (J) may be set as follows. By being eliminated at the start of the running fluctuation or the next fluctuation of the running fluctuation, the player's consciousness is directed to the big hit game state, and the player prepares for the big hit game (for example, how to hit at the start of the big hit). Conscious of changing to right-handed).

  In the example described above, the jackpot effect is displayed until the end of the change in which the special lottery result is a big hit. However, the special lottery result may be deleted during the execution of the change in which the special lottery result is a big hit and before the end. . This allows the player to pay attention not only to the jackpot effect but also to the changing performance in which the special lottery result is a jackpot.

  When the big hit effect is deleted, the big hit effect may be suddenly deleted, or the big hit effect may be gradually deleted (for example, the transparency of the big hit effect is increased and gradually deleted). By suddenly erasing the jackpot effect, the lingering effect of the jackpot effect is not left on the player, so that the consciousness of the player can be quickly turned to the jackpot game. In addition, by gradually removing the big hit effect, it is possible to leave the finish of the big hit effect to the player and to strengthen the impression of the big hit effect.

  When the big hit effect is deleted, the big hit effect may be deleted by applying another effect. Specifically, for example, after applying another effect on the jackpot effect to make the jackpot effect unrecognizable, the other effect is deleted, or another effect is applied on the jackpot effect. After making the state recognizable, the jackpot effect is deleted together with the other effect. By erasing the jackpot effect by applying another effect, it is possible to leave the finish of the jackpot effect on the player and to enhance the impression of the jackpot effect.

[20-8. Divided reach direction]
FIG. 564 and FIG. 565 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of the divided reach effect. The split reach effect is an example of a reach effect in which a still image effect may be executed. In FIG. 564 (A), all decorative symbols are changing.
If the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the decorative symbol stopped in the reach state (for example, the reach state of the “7” symbol has a higher jackpot expectation degree than the reach state of other decorative symbols), and the reach of the jackpot expectation is lower. When the decorative symbol stops in the state, there is a possibility that the player's sense of excitement may be reduced. In the divided reach effect, since a plurality of types of timings for determining the decorative symbols to be stopped in the reach state are provided, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the elation of the player.

  In (B), the display area in the effect display device 1600 is divided into upper and lower display areas, and the same reach effect (battle by a hero character (white character in the figure) and an enemy character (black character in the figure) is displayed in the upper and lower display areas. Direction) is executed as a dynamic display. However, in one (upper) display area, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped in the reach mode, and in the other (lower) display area, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are changing. is there.

  In (C), following (B), the same reach effect is executed as dynamic display in the upper and lower display areas, and the main character and the enemy character hit each other. In (C), similarly to (B), in one (upper) display area, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped in the reach mode, and in the other (lower) display area, , The left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are changing.

  In (D), from among the upper and lower display areas divided in (B) to (C), the display area (upper display area) in which the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state is selected. Further, in (D), the display content of the selected display area is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600, and the still image effect starts. In the still image effect, for example, the display content displayed in the upper display area at the end of the period (C) is displayed as a still image on the entire effect display device 1600. Even during the still image effect of (D), the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are in a state of stopping (still) in the reach mode.

  In (E), the still image effect ends, the stillness is released, and the dynamic display is resumed. In (E), as the display indicating the result of the special lottery, an image in which the hero character has lost to the enemy character, a display of "Sorry ...", and a decorative pattern stopped by a combination of losing are displayed. Since the special lottery result is shown in (E) after the end of the still image effect of (D), the still image effect of (D) also functions as a judge effect.

  FIG. 565 (D ') shows a state in which the display area (lower display area) in which the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are changing after (C) is selected. In (D '), the display content of the selected display area is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600, and the still image effect starts. In the still image effect, for example, the display content displayed in the lower display area at the end of the period (C) is displayed as a still image on the entire effect display device 1600. In addition, in (D '), the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are displayed while being changed even during the still image effect.

  In (E '), the still image effect ends, the stillness is released, and the dynamic display is resumed. In (E '), the battle effect of the hero character and the enemy character is performed again, and at the same time, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol fluctuate while the reach mode is formed (which decorative symbol stops in the reach state). (E ') is unknown.) Further, in (E '), a display is displayed, "Which symbol will be the reach !?"

  In (F '), the battle effect of the main character and the enemy character continues, and the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped in the reach state. In (G '), the still image effect starts. After the end of the still image effect of (G '), a special lottery result is shown in (H') to be described later, so that the still image effect of (G ') also functions as a judge effect.

  In the still image effect in (G ′), the same still image as the still image in FIG. 564 (D) is displayed. That is, the case where the display area in the reach state is selected from the divided display state, the case where the display area in the non-reach state is selected from the divided display state, and the display area goes through (D ′) to (F ′), The still image in the still image effect is common. Thereby, the impression of the still image can be strongly implanted in the player.

  In (H '), the still image effect ends, the stillness is released, and the dynamic display is resumed. In (H '), as the display indicating the special lottery result, an image in which the protagonist character defeats the enemy character, a display of "Victory !!", and a decorative pattern stopped by a big hit combination are displayed.

  As described above, immediately after the start of the divided reach effect, the display area is divided into upper and lower parts, the decorative pattern stops in the reach state while the reach effect is performed in one display area, and the reach effect is performed in the other display area. Also, the decorative pattern fluctuates without stopping in the reach state.

  With this, it is not possible to know which decorative symbol is to be reached until a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the divided reach effect, so that the player can obtain a sense of tension and a sense of expectation even after the start of the reach effect. Further, by executing the still image effect after selecting one of the display areas from the divided display areas, the player can more strongly recognize which display area has been selected.

  In addition, when a display area in which the decorative pattern is fluctuating is selected from the divided display areas, after performing the still image effect, an effect for recognizing which decorative pattern is to be in the reach state is performed. By performing the dynamic display and then stopping the decorative symbols in the reach state, the player's expectation can be improved.

  In addition, the big hit expectation degree when the display area in which the decorative pattern is changed is selected from the divided display areas is the big hit expectation degree when the display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state is selected. It is desirable to set it higher. If a display area in which the decorative pattern is fluctuating is selected, there is a possibility that the reach state of the decorative pattern with a high expectation of big hit (for example, the reach state of the “7” pattern) is left. is there.

  However, in the display area where the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state, when the reach state is formed with the decorative symbol (for example, the symbol “7”) having a high expectation of big hit, the decorative symbol fluctuates. The big hit expectation when the display area is selected may be set lower than the big hit expectation when the display area in which the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state is selected.

  In the still image effect (FIG. 564 (D) and FIG. 565 (D ')) after one of the display regions is selected from the divided display regions, an effect for prompting operation of a predetermined operation unit is executed. Is also good. In this case, for example, by operating the predetermined operation unit, the stillness is released and the effect proceeds.

  It should be noted that, in the still image effect (FIG. 565 (D ′)) after the display area in which the decorative symbol is fluctuating is selected, the decorative symbol is in the reach state due to the number of types of operation units that may be prompted to operate. It is desirable that the number of types of operation units that may be prompted to operate in a still image effect (FIG. 564 (D)) after the stopped display area is selected is larger.

  Specifically, for example, in a still image effect after the display area in which the decorative symbol is fluctuating is selected, there is a possibility that the operation of only the center pressing operation unit 303a may be prompted, and the decorative symbol is in the reach state. In the still image effect after the stopped display area is selected, there is a possibility that the operation of either the center pressing operation unit 303a or the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is prompted.

  As described above, since the still image effect after the display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state is selected also functions as a judge effect, for example, if the degree of expectation of the judge effect differs depending on the operation unit prompting the operation. It is better that more operating units may be operated in order to perform the operation.

  Further, even if the number of selectable operation units is the same, the type of image prompting the operation in the still image effect (FIG. 565 (D ′)) after the display area in which the decorative pattern is changed is selected. It is desirable that the number of the types of images prompting the operation in the still image effect (FIG. 564 (D)) after the display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state is selected is larger than the number.

  Specifically, for example, in a still image effect after the display area in which the decorative pattern is fluctuating is selected, there is a possibility that only an image in which the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed in white or red is displayed. In a still image effect after the display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state is selected, an image in which the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed in white or red, or the main character is displayed inside the center pressing operation unit 303a. May be displayed.

  As described above, since the still image effect after the display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state is selected also functions as a judge effect, for example, the judge effect is determined by the type order of the displayed image of the operation unit. It is better that more images may be displayed in order to make the degree of expectation different.

  The display area where the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state is selected from the valid period of the operation unit in the still image effect (FIG. 565 (D ')) after the display area in which the decorative pattern is fluctuating is selected. It is desirable that the validity period of the operation unit in the still image effect (FIG. 564 (D)) after the execution is longer. If the operation unit is operated during the still image production after the display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state is selected, the judge production starts, so the player operates the operation unit during the still image production. There is a demand for reliable operation, and therefore, it is desirable that the validity period be long.

  In addition, in the still image effect (FIG. 565 (D ')) after the display area in which the decorative pattern is fluctuating is selected, it is desirable that the BGM flowing immediately before is still flowing. On the other hand, in the still image effect (FIG. 564 (D)) after the display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state is selected, it is desirable that the BGM is stopped or the volume of the BGM is reduced. Accordingly, the movement of the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol is linked to the BGM (the BGM flows during the change of the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol, and the BGM stops or decreases in the reach state). In particular, in the still image effect in the reach state, not only the image is frozen, but also the BGM is stopped or reduced, so that the sense of tension can be increased.

  However, even in a still image effect after the display area in which the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state is selected, it is desirable that the effect sound corresponding to the effect prompting the operation of the operation unit is output. This is for surely prompting the player to operate the operation unit.

  In addition, when the still image effect (FIG. 564 (D)) after the display area in which the decorative pattern is changed is completed and the dynamic display starts, a predetermined movable body may be operated. You may. For example, when the special lottery result is a big hit, by operating a predetermined movable body at the timing, the player can easily recognize that the special lottery result is obtained, and the player's feeling of excitement is improved. On the other hand, when the still image effect (FIG. 565 (D ′)) after the display area in which the decorative pattern is changed ends and the dynamic display starts, it is desirable that the movable body is not operated. . This is because the player may misunderstand that the special lottery result is a big hit even though the effect for indicating the special lottery result continues after the still image effect.

  Also, when a still image effect (FIG. 564 (D)) after the display area in which the decorative pattern is changed is selected and dynamic display is started, a predetermined sound may be output. Is also good. For example, when the special lottery result is a big hit, by outputting a predetermined sound at the timing, the player can easily recognize that the special lottery result is obtained, and the player's sense of excitement is improved. On the other hand, when the still image effect (FIG. 565 (D ′)) after the display area in which the decorative pattern is changed and the dynamic display starts, the predetermined sound is not output. Is desirable. This is because the player may misunderstand that the special lottery result is a big hit even though the effect for indicating the special lottery result continues after the still image effect.

  Note that the series of effects shown in FIGS. 565 (E ′) to (F ′) may be repeated. Specifically, for example, in the first effect of (F '), the reach state is reached with a decorative symbol (for example, the symbol "6") having a low jackpot expectation, and then the effect of (E') is performed again. Will be Then, in the second effect of (F '), a reach state is reached with a decorative symbol (for example, "7" symbol) having a high jackpot expectation, and the effect proceeds to (G'). By proceeding the effect as described above, in the first effect of (F '), even if the player reaches the reach state with a decorative pattern having a low jackpot expectation, a decrease in the player's expectation can be suppressed.

  In the divided display in FIGS. 564 (B) to 564 (C), different effects may be performed in one display area and the other display area. Thereby, the player can enjoy two types of effects with one change. In addition, when the degree of expectation of the big hits of the effects displayed in the respective display areas is different, the player not only determines whether the decorative pattern is in the reach state, but also selects the effect with the different degree of expectation of the big hits. It is possible to watch with a sense of tension and a sense of expectation.

  In the case where an effect with a different jackpot expectation is executed in each of the divided display areas, for example, an effect with a higher jackpot expectation in a display area in which the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state may cause a change in the decorative symbol. In the displayed display area, an effect with a low degree of expectation of a big hit is executed. As described above, the jackpot expectation when the display area in which the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state is selected is lower than the jackpot expectation when the display area in which the decorative symbol is changed is selected. By performing an effect with a high expectation of big hits in the display area where the symbols are stopped in the reach state, it is possible to suppress discouragement of the player when the display area is selected.

  On the other hand, when an effect with a different jackpot expectation degree is executed in each of the divided display areas, for example, an effect with a higher jackpot expectation degree in the display area in which the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state, the decorative symbol fluctuates. An effect with a high degree of expectation of a big hit is executed in the displayed display area. As described above, the jackpot expectation degree when the display area in which the decorative pattern is fluctuating is selected is higher than the jackpot expectation degree when the display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state is selected. By performing an effect with a high expectation of big hits in the display area in which the symbols are fluctuating, when the display area is selected, an extremely high expectation of big hits can be obtained, so that the player's euphoria is strongly improved. be able to.

[21. Characteristic operation and effect of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back-side movable decorative body 3110 in the back-side effect unit 3100, a transparent conductive member is provided behind the decorative member composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. A light emission plate 3113 and a back decoration board 3114 are provided, and mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 in each of the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c formed on the back surface of the light guide emission plate 3113. It is inserted so that the side view type first LED 3114a is accommodated. When the plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the back decoration board 3114 emit light, light from the first LEDs 3114a is transmitted from the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c to the surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 within the plate thickness. Irradiating in the direction along, and is reflected forward by a plurality of reflectors 3113e formed on substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and is radiated forward from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Become. The light radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 is radiated forward through the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 constituting the decorative member, whereby the transparent portion provided with the decorative portion 3150 is provided. The decorative members having light properties (decorative body 3111 and decorative sheet 3112) are to be luminously decorated.

  At this time, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a in the direction along the plate surface of the light guide radiating plate 3113 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e within the plate thickness of the light guide radiating plate 3113, and the decorative body Since the 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 are made to emit light, the light of the first LED 3114a is emitted from the front surface of the light guide radiating plate 3113 as compared with the case where the first LED 3114a emits light forward. The distance from which the light is radiated forward can be increased, and the light from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused and radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113. Therefore, when the first LED 3114a emits light, the light from the first LED 3114a can be diffused widely, and it can be suppressed that the light is emitted in a dot-like manner. The sheet 3112 can be evenly illuminated and decorated so that the sheet 3112 looks beautiful, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the back movable decorative body 3110, since the back decorative board 3114 is provided behind the flat decorative member (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112) and the light guide radiation plate 3113, the dimension in the front-rear direction is thin. And it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back, and to arrange other directing members (the front decorative rotating body 3410 on the back and the rotating decorative body 3440 after the rear on the back). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can make a player more enjoyable by providing various effect members by easily providing a space for the pachinko machine.

  Furthermore, the decorative member (the rear movable decorative body 3110) provided with the decorative part 3150 has relief parts such as a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since it is composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having a picture such as the first contour portion 3112a, the embossed portion can give the decorative portion 3150 a three-dimensional effect, and the embossed portion allows the embossed portion to be embossed. The sense of depth can be given to the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 provided at the rear by the lens effect. Therefore, a three-dimensional decoration (decoration part 3150) having a sense of depth can be shown to the player by the relief portion of the decoration body 3111 and the pattern of the decoration sheet 3112, and the thickness of the back movable decoration body 3110 ( Even if the front-back direction dimension) is reduced, the decorative effect does not decrease, it is possible to attract and entertain the player's interest, and the back-side movable decorative body 3110 can be made thinner, The above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, a decorative sheet having a pattern such as a first contour portion 3112a behind a decorative body 3111 having a relief such as a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since the 3112 is provided, the decorative body 3111 can be seen to be colored by the color of the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 without coloring the transparent decorative body 3111, and the cost of the decorative body 3111 can be reduced. Can be done. In addition, by changing the pattern of the decoration sheet 3112, the decoration (decoration part 3150) of the decoration 3111 (the back movable decoration 3110) can be easily changed. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled.

  In addition, the first contour portion 3112a of the decoration sheet 3112 has a hologram portion where a part of the pattern as the decoration portion 3150 is displayed by interference fringes of light, and the first LED 3114a of the back decoration board 3114 is provided. , The light from other LEDs provided on the pachinko machine 1, the effect display device 1600, and the like, the light in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the like are holograms of the first contour portion 3112a. , The predetermined hologram can be shown by the light interference fringes, so that the hologram can improve the appearance of the decorative portion 3150, and can strongly attract the player's interest, and By doing so, it is possible to impart a three-dimensional effect to a part of the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable movable body 3110, and make the rear movable movable body 3110 thin And it is possible to ensure that does not feel as thin player also.

  Furthermore, since a part of the pattern in the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 is configured by a hologram, the hologram includes the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion. Since it can be seen through the transparent decorative body 3111 having an embossed portion such as 3111c, a sense of depth can be imparted to a pattern such as a hologram by the lens effect of the embossed portion, and it can strongly attract the interest of a player. Possible decorations 3150 can be shown to the player. In addition, since the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a hologram portion, a printing technique can be used to form the hologram portion, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  In the decorative member including the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flattened, and the outer shape of the decorative sheet 3112 is made the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. The outer periphery of 3111 can be decorated with the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112, and since there is no such thing as a frame on the outer periphery of the decoration (decoration part 3150), a feeling of openness is given to the decoration of the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back. And can make the decoration look bigger. Therefore, the decoration of the back movable movable body 3110 (the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112, etc.) can be made more conspicuous, and the decoration effect of the back movable movable body 3110 can be sufficiently exhibited. The decoration of 3110 can strongly attract the interest of the player, and the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player can be provided.

  Further, since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 is flat, the decorative sheet 3112 is in contact with (abuts) the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, and thus light between the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 is generated. Is not diffusely reflected, and the pattern of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be more easily seen through the transparent decorative body 3111, so that the decorative effect of the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 can be sufficiently exhibited. Further, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flat, the dimension of the decorative member composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 in the front-rear direction can be made as small as possible. The thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 capable of realizing the above-described operational effects can be provided.

  Further, the decorative sheet 3112 is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111, and it is possible to decorate the outer peripheral edge of the back movable movable body 3110 (decorative body 3111) by the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112. Therefore, by making the decoration mode of the member adjacent to the back-side movable decorative body 3110 continuous with the decoration of the back-side movable decorative body 3110, a large decoration with a sense of unity is provided to the player. It is possible to show the player, give a visual impact to the player, and make the player pay attention. At the same time, it is possible to entertain a large decoration, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

  In addition, since the light guide radiating plate 3113 has the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c in which the first LEDs 3114a of the back decoration board 3114 are housed from behind, the first LED housing of the light guide radiating plate 3113 is provided. By storing the first LED 3114a from the rear in the portion 3113c, the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 can be made as close as possible, and the front and rear of the back movable decoration 3110 can be obtained. The thickness in the direction can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Further, the first LED 3114a of the back decoration board 3114 is housed in the first LED housing 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the light from the first LED 3114a is irradiated from the inner surface of the first LED housing 3113c to the inside of the plate thickness. Therefore, as compared with the case where light is irradiated from the outer peripheral surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, a portion (for example, a central portion) of the light guide radiation plate 3113 where light from the outer peripheral surface is hard to reach. However, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c in the portion and irradiating light from the inner surface thereof, the portion can be made to emit light brightly, and the back movable decorative body 3110 (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3111) 3112) can be illuminated without unevenness.

  Further, since the first LED 3114a of the back decoration board 3114 is of a side view type, the first LED 3114a is simply housed in the first LED housing 3113c of the light guide radiating plate 3113 to emit light. Light can be radiated from the inner surface of the portion 3113c (the light receiving portion 3113i) to the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described operational effects can be reliably realized. be able to.

  Further, a plurality of reflection portions 3113e are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and light can be emitted to substantially the entire decoration 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112. Even if the decoration (decoration part 3150) provided on the sheet 3112 is changed, it is not necessary to change the reflection part 3113e, and it is possible to easily cope with the change in the decoration of the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112, It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can easily respond to a model change, a design change, and the like.

  In addition, the same function and effect as described above can be obtained in the rear movable decorative body 3160 and the rear movable decorative body 3170. In addition, the periodic swing and rotation of the hold display and the periodic swing and rotation of the decorative pattern may be a series of effects repeatedly executed in the dynamic display during the still image effect.

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For a game machine (parrot machine) obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, It may be applied, and in this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the metal decorative part 3111d of the decorative body 3111 are used as the decorative part 3150 of the back movable decorative body 3110. , And the decoration sheet 3112 is composed of the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusion portion 3112c, and the second light diffusion portion 3112d. It does not do. For example, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 may be made into one decorative member, and the decorative portion 3150 may be applied to the decorative member.

1 Pachinko machines (game machines)
2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 930 Power supply board box 951 Payout control board 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1311 Main control MPU (CPU)
1312 RAM
13121 arithmetic circuit 1313 ROM
1314 Main control I / O port 1317 Character ratio display (base display)
1510 Peripheral control board 1600 Effect display device 2002 First starting port 2004 Second starting port 4000 Slot machine (game machine)
4210 Start lever 4211 Reel stop button 4300 Symbol variation display device 4301 Reel 4341 Reel drive motor 4500 Image display 4600 Main board (game control device)
4601 CPU
4602 ROM
4603 RAM
4700 effect control board 5100 ROM area 5200 RAM area 5300 I / O area 5400 parameter information setting area

Claims (1)

Lottery means for performing a lottery regarding the hit,
Effect execution means for executing an effect capable of suggesting the result of the lottery by the lottery means,
An effect display device on which the effect is displayed,
The effect that the effect execution means can execute includes a special effect,
The special production is
When the static display is statically displayed as an effect, and the result of the lottery is indicated by a dynamic display when a predetermined period of time during the static display has elapsed, a hit result notification effect,
Static display as an effect, and the static display time changes to a dynamic display when a predetermined time elapses, but at least a mental effect in which the result of the lottery is not shown is displayed. hand,
The effect executing means,
It is possible to execute a mind-set production in which the result of the lottery is not displayed before performing the hit result notification production that indicates the result of the lottery,
There are multiple productions in the above-mentioned ceremonial production,
The sound that has been output before the static display in the hit result notification effect is shown is not audibly output when the static display is performed,
A gaming machine wherein a predetermined movable body can be operated at a timing indicating the result of the lottery in the hit result notification effect.